Job Safety Analysis (JSA), Safe Operating Procedures (SOP ...

APPENDIX 1d:Job Safety Analysis (JSA), Safe Operating Procedures (SOP)

& Safe Work Practices (SWP)(Valard)

Document Description: JSA for Excavations / Trenching Created by: H. McNeil Doc. Number: JSA 01.005A

Date: April 15, 2011 Revision #: 1 Date Revised: Jan. 08, 2016 Revised by: D, Stykalo

Page 1 of 4

This JSA is to aid the site supervisor in planning the work to be used in conjunction with other job planning tools, such as the daily tailboard sheet and other applicable procedures, etc. This should not be viewed as the complete job plan but as a starting point. Normal proper personnel protective equipment should be worn at all times and is not addressed in this JSA unless there is a specific need.

Task / Activity Potential (Source of)

Loss/Hazard Hazard Rating

Recommended Loss Prevention Barriers

Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 1. Excavation

Authorization * Significant Concerns:

Workers are to insure that there are no underground lines of any type. The local authority must verify this.

1.1 Buried utilities. 1.2 Permit to work 1.3 Confined Space

Entry certificate if deeper than 1.2 meters.

5 Low/Mod 1.1 Obtain necessary excavation, ground disturbance clearance.

1.2 Obtain necessary permits to work, if required.

1.3 Confined space entry

permit must be obtained if workers are to enter any excavation or trench greater than 1.2 Metres.

SWP 26.031 Excavations

3 Low/Risk

2. Equipment checks for 2.1 Possible fluid leaks.

3 Low/Risk 2.1 Visual inspection of equipment prior to use.

SWP 26.013 Use of

1 Low/Risk

Exp

osur

e

Hazard

1 2 3 4 5

1 1 2 3 4 5

2 2 4 6 8 10

3 3 6 9 12 15

4 4 8 12 16 20

5 5 10 15 20 25

1-3 Low Risk

Review on change of process or if circumstances change. No great effort required for reducing risk.

8-10

Moderate / High Risk

Critically examine the areas of exposure in the process, and agree on a timetable for completion of all agreed actions.

4-6 Low /

Moderate Risk

Investigate engineering controls to minimize reliance on PPE & procedures.

12-25 Unaccepta

ble Risk

Cease work until interim controls are implemented, and an action plan to permanently reduce the risk to an acceptable level.



Page 2 of 4




Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating

mobile and stationary equipment.

2.2 Equipment failure

Use drip pans to avoid spillage of hazardous waste. Spill kits placed at all equipment with a potential to spill.

2.2 Ensure equipment log books / Check Lists are completed daily and checked for completion. Ensure applicable equipment inspection and certifications are current.

2.3 Ensure workers are

aware of protocol to inform appropriate people of spill.

Company Vehicles

3. Excavation / Trenching

3.1 Care-in/collapse of sides

3.2 Damaging the

underground utilities and cables.

3.3 Falling of persons,

loads and mobile equipment into the excavation / trench.

6 Low/Mod 3.1 Benching, sloping, shoring as per standard.

3.2 Obtain appropriate locates. Hand dig in case of doubt and close to utilizes.

3.3 Fence or barricade

excavation pits and trenches. Use warning signs.

4 Low/Risk



Page 3 of 4




Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating

3.4 Engulfment. 3.5 Access and egress. 3.6 Spoil Management. 3.7 Water Management

3.4 Soil condition survey, excavation to be done under competent persons supervision, proper protection to prevent cave in and collapse of sides.

3.5 Stair case, ladder or

ramp must be present in excavation more than 1.2 meter deep, they must be placed so that a person should not have to travel more than 25 feet (7.5 Meter) to reach them.

3.6 Spoil piles must be

placed at least 1 meter away from the edge of the excavation.

3.7 Hydro vac, pumps, dikes

and special shoring techniques can be used to remove water



Page 4 of 4

NAME (print) SIGNATURE COMPANY

Document Description: JSA for Hydro-vacing Trenches Created by: A. Felczak Doc. Number: JSA 01.006 Date: Sept. 23, 2003 Revision #: 7 Date Revised: April 10, 2013 Revised by: A. Felczak


Exp

osur

e

Hazard 1 2 3 4 5

1 1 2 3 4 5 2 2 4 6 8 10 3 3 6 9 12 15 4 4 8 12 16 20 5 5 10 15 20 25

Task / Activity

Potential (source of) Loss/Hazard

Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation Rating

1-3 Low Risk


8-10 Moderate / High Risk


4-6 Low /

Moderate Risk


12-25 Unacceptable Risk


1. Set up Hydro Vac

Unit 1.1 Injury to workers and

others 1.2 Slips and trips 1.3 Noise 1.4 Incorrect setup 1.5 Electrical Hazard 1.6 Striking workers or

objects. 1.6 Equipment tipping over.

1.1 A Spotter must be used to move the Equipment to insure nothing is struck.

1.1 Level work area if required. 1.1 Workers to wear the

following PPE: • Hard Hats • Safety Glasses • Hydrovac operator to

wear Face shield • Approved boots • Gloves • Hearing protection • Hi Vis outerwear

1.2 A clear walkway must be

prepared. 1.3 Hearing protection is

SWP 26.038 SWP 26.027


Task / Activity Potential (source of) Loss/Hazard

Hazard Rating


Standard Reference


mandatory. 1.4 Follow manufacturer’s

manual. 1.5 Maintain Limits of Approach

from any powerline. 1.6 Setup the Hydrovac on

stable ground.

SWP 26.002

2.Trenching with Hydro- Vac unit

2.1 Equipment failure 2.2 Falling into trench 2.3 Struck by boom 2.4 Ground cave in.

2.1 Equipment must be inspected by supervisor prior to its use.

2.1 Trench area to be protected by barriers when leaving area unattended.

2.3 Boom operator to advise worker nearby to move prior to swinging boom.

2.4 Trench over 1.2 metres deep must be either shored or sloped at 45° angle

2.1 Ladders must be placed close to workers and minimum of 25 feet apart.

SWP. 26.038

3. Back filling trench with sand

3.1 Contaminated material used.

3.2 Equipment striking workers or objects.

3.3 Equipment slipping into trench.

3.1 Approved sand to be placed. 3.2 Spotter must be used to

guide equipment near trench.

3.3 Equipment must be kept a minimum of 3 meters from trench.

SWP 26.027

4. Clean-up 541 Tripping, falls 4.1 Area kept in a clean manner. 4.1 Walk on level area if

possible. 4.1 All material left over must be

SWP 26.043



Hazard Rating


Standard Reference


cleaned up. 4.1 Restore ground to original

condition.



Document Description: JSA for Installing Screw Anchors Created by: HSE Doc. Number: JSA 01.009 Date: Aug. 01, 2011 Revision #: 1 Date Revised: Jan. 08, 2016 Revised by: D. Stykalo

Page 1 of 8


Task / Activity Potential (Source of) Loss/Hazard

Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 1. Mobilize to site 1.1 Traffic 3 Low/Risk 1.1 Four way flashers and

pull to the side if needed while opening barriers; Flag persons and traffic control as required; Secure loads. Road conditions, time of day, weather check height of utilities.

SWP 26.013 Use of Company Vehicles

1 Low/Risk

2. Set up anchor installing Machine

2.1 Equipment strikes employee

3 Low/Risk

2.1 Operator to identify and communicate with designated employee to guide during “backing” operation.

SWP 26.027 Spotter and Signaller

1 Low/Risk

Exp

osur

e

Hazard

1 2 3 4 5 1 1 2 3 4 5 2 2 4 6 8 10 3 3 6 9 12 15 4 4 8 12 16 20 5 5 10 15 20 25

1-3 Low Risk




4-6 Low /

Moderate Risk


12-25 Unaccepta

ble Risk



Page 2 of 8


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 2.2 Hands, fingers or

other body parts caught in between objects.

2.3 Rigging fails.

Operator to maintain visual contact with personnel. Operator to familiarize self with surrounding area prior to beginning equipment set-up. Operator and ground personnel to review planned direction of equipment movement during “Tail-gate meeting” and on an ongoing basis during the work.

2.2 Work gloves and other PPE to be worn. Designate a flagger for movement control. Keep hands and body clear and maintain safe distance from pole. Do not allow personnel in pinch points. Recommendation of not wearing jewelry or excessively loose fitting clothing.

2.3 Inspect all rigging prior to use for damage and/or


Page 3 of 8


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 2.4 Equipment contacts

energized electrical equipment and/or conductors.

2.5 Slips, trips, falls.

defects. Ensure all rigging being applied is SWL rated for load.

2.4 Identify all energized electrical equipment and conductors and determine necessary clearance to be maintained from electrical conflicts. Spotter assigned to assist operator in maintaining clearances.

2.5 Observe work area for hazards and eliminate whenever possible. Guard and/or barricade or otherwise clearly identify hazards that cannot be removed. Ensure personnel are using appropriate footwear, clean shoes of mud, ice, dirt, etc. prior to climbing on machine. Clean equipment steps and handgrips. Face machine when ascending and


Page 4 of 8


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 2.6 Equipment tips over. 2.7 Strains, sprains and

overexertion

descending. Maintain 3 point contact.

2.6 Crane leveled as required. Outriggers are to be fully extended. Equipment operated within manufacturers load chart rating and safe radius work zone. All environmental factors considered per manufacturer specifications.

2.7 Keep proper body position. Do not extend arms or legs beyond strength positions.

Ask for assistance. 3. Install Anchor 3.1 Hands, fingers and

other body parts caught in pinch points.

4 Low/Mod

3.1 Work gloves and other PPE to be worn. Designate a flagger for movement control. Keep hands and body clear and maintain safe distance from pole. Do not allow personnel in pinch points. Operator to identify and

Section 10 Personal Protective Equipment

3 Low/Risk


Page 5 of 8


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 3.2 Personnel struck by

anchor or equipment. 3.3 Hydraulic system

failure spraying hot fluid.

communicate with designated employee to guide during “backing” operation.

3.2 Operator to maintain visual contact with personnel. Operator to familiarize self with surrounding area prior to beginning road construction. Operator and ground personnel to review planned direction of clearing during “Tail-gate meeting” and on an ongoing basis during the work. Set drive at proper angle, check torque requirement, check that anchor is not deforming during installation. Inspect hose and fittings for leaks, wear or damage.

Wear all necessary PPE.

3.3 Establish the best work position possible to minimize exposure to


Page 6 of 8


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating high-pressure hydraulic system bursting failure.

4. Test Anchors 4.1 Slips, trips and falls 4. 2 Hands, fingers and


4.3 Test equipment

overstressed.

3 Low/Risk

4.1 Observe work area for hazards and eliminate whenever possible. Guard and/or barricade or otherwise clearly identify hazards that cannot be removed. Work gloves and other PPE to be worn.

4.2 Designate a flagger for movement control. Keep hands and body clear and maintain safe distance from pole. Do not allow personnel in pinch points. Recommendation of not wearing jewelry or excessively loose fitting clothing.

4.3 Check specified torque requirement for given anchor. Ensure equipment will be operated within the manufacturers SWL specifications.

SWP 26.043 Housekeeping

2 Low/Risk


Page 7 of 8


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 5. Clean up area 5.1 Slips, trips, and falls

5.2 Personnel struck by

equipment

3 Low/Risk

5.1 Observe work area for hazards and eliminate whenever possible.

5.2 Guard and/or barricade or otherwise clearly identify hazards that cannot be removed. Operator to identify and communicate with designated employee to guide during “backing” operation. Operator to maintain visual contact with personnel. Operator to familiarize self with surrounding area prior to beginning clean-up operations. Operator and ground personnel to review planned direction of equipment movement during “Tail-gate meeting” and on an ongoing basis during the work.

2 Low/Risk


Page 8 of 8


Document Description: JSA for Site Preparation (Tie-down Areas) Created by: V. Vidakovic Doc. Number: JSA 01.010 Date: April 07, 2011 Revision #: 1 Date Revised: Jan. 08, 2016 Revised by: D. Stykalo

Page 1 of 4



Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 1. Mobilization and

Access to Site 1.1 Traffic 1.2 Congestion and

Right of Way Limits

4 Mod/Risk

1.1 Obey speed limits of the roads used. Four way flashers and pull to the side if needed while opening barriers. Flag persons and traffic control if required Secure loads.

1.2 Park clear out of work

area. Only needed equipment parked in work area. Equipment and trucks to

SWP 26.013 Use of Company Vehicles SWP 26.027 Spotter and Signaller

2 Low/Risk

Exp

osur

e

Hazard

1 2 3 4 5 1 1 2 3 4 5 2 2 4 6 8 10 3 3 6 9 12 15 4 4 8 12 16 20 5 5 10 15 20 25

1-3 Low Risk




4-6 Low /

Moderate Risk


12-25 Unaccepta

ble Risk



Page 2 of 4


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 1.3 Existing Line

Structures * Significant Concerns:

Travelling speed ROW boundaries Equipment contact with energized lines

keep to designated roads and accesses. Communication between vehicles if necessary. Wait at wide spots to meet other vehicles.

1.3 Ensure operators and

crew are aware of overhead lines (limits of approach) Use Designated Signaler (spotter) if unsure of equipment proximity.

2. Set up Equipment 2.1 Equipment failure *Significant Concerns: Unauthorized use of equipment. Boom truck pads

5 Mod/Risk 2.1 Qualified operators Daily inspections completed. Operated within the operating instructions of the unit. Boom Truck set up on level ground using outrigger pads. Boom Truck pads sufficient to support unit. Be aware of site conditions. Radius of lift known.

Section 9 Inspections-Monitoring

3 Low/Risk

3. Installation of Screw Type Anchors

3.1 Energized circuits

6 Mod/Risk 3.1 No person is touching the boom truck, RBD or outriggers.

SWP 26.036 Grounding

4 Mod/Risk


Page 3 of 4


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating *Significant Concerns: Working in vicinity of energized lines. Induced Voltage. May need locates to identify underground services.

Grounding for RBD installed. Limits of approach Safety watch when in close proximity to utilities. Lift loads away from the existing ROW. Use Disignated Signaler (spotter) if unsure of equipment proximity.

and Bonding

4. Positioning of Puller, Tensioner, Fly Rope Carrier, Small Puller, Small Tensioner etc.

4.1 Rigging 4.2 Back up of

Equipment during positioning.

*Significant Concerns: Un-rated and/or faulty rigging Back up of Equipment

4 Mod/Risk 4.1 All rigging used to connect the equipment to anchors shall be in good condition and rated to loads that will be applied.

4.2 Use Designated Signaler in case that equipment needs backward movement.

SWP 26. 006 Crane and Rigging

2 Low/Risk

5. Clean up and Demobilize off the site

5.1 Equipment Collision 5.2 Site Conditions

*Significant Concerns: Back-up of Equipment

3 Low/Risk 5.1 Qualified operators and drivers. Back up beepers. Have signal person directing equipment and trucks when backing up at tower locations.

2 Low/Risk


Page 4 of 4


Document Description: JSA for Installing Earth Tower Foundation / Anchors Created by: H. McNeil Doc. Number: JSA 01.011 Date: Jan. 17, 2011 Revision #: 0 Date Revised: Revised by:


Page 1 of 4

Exp

osur

e

Hazard 1 2 3 4 5

1 1 2 3 4 5 2 2 4 6 8 10 3 3 6 9 12 15 4 4 8 12 16 20 5 5 10 15 20 25

1-3 Low Risk




4-6 Low /

Moderate Risk




Task / Activity


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference


1. Excavate area 1.1 Open Excavation 1.2 Swing zone

1.3 Cave in 1.4 Ground stability

conditions

Significant Concerns: - Position equipment

to maintain integrity of excavation.

5 Low/Mod 1.1 Stay clear of machine and excavation.

1.2 Slope at 45 degrees or install support structure.

1.3 Place rig mat if required.

1.4 Spoil Pile to be 1 meter from walls of excavation.


3 Low/Risk


Task / Activity Potential (source of)



Standard Reference


Page 2 of 4

2. Remove Water from Excavation with Hydro-Vac

2.1 Backing into congested area

2.2 Swing zone

3 Low/Risk 2.1 Use a spotter 2.2 Ensure all attachments

are secure.

JSA 01.007 Hydrovacing Trenching

1 Low/Risk

3. Enter the excavation to construct footing frame

3.1 Access and egress 3.2 Excavation 3.3 Pinch points 3.4 Ground conditions Significant Concerns: - No worker shall

enter an excavation until it is deemed safe by the supervisor.

- Watch person will stand at the top of the excavation to watch out for the workers in the excavation.

4 Mod/Risk 3.1 Ensure access and egress is safe and adequate (stairs, ladder or ramp).

3.2 Ensure the excavation is suitability sloped prior to entry.

3.3 Clear the ground of any obstructions.

2 Low/Risk

4. Place gravel into the footing frame and pack

4.1 Sling failure 4.2 Swing zone 4.3 Overhead load

3 Low/Risk 4.1 Rigging equipment inspected prior to use.

4.2 Operator to be aware of their surroundings and the placement of the crew.

4.3 All ground grew to be clear.

SWP 26.027 Spotter and Signaller Practice

1 Low/Risk





Standard Reference


Page 3 of 4

4.4 Moving equipment

4.5 Noise 4.6 Pinch points

4.4 One spotter to communicate with the operator.

4.5 Hearing protection when using packer.

4.6 Ensure proper body and had positioning.

5. Place Footing / Anchor

5.1 Rigging Failure 5.2 Moving loads 5.3 Body in the line of

fire

4 Mod/Risk 5.1 Operator to be aware of their surroundings and the placement of the crew.

5.2 Rigging equipment to be inspected prior to use.

5.3 One spotter to communicate with the operator.

SWP 26.006 Crane and Rigging

2 Low/Risk

6. Aligning Footing / Anchor

6.1 Excavation 6.2 Pinch points

3 Low/Risk 6.1 Ensure access and egress is safe and adequate (stairs, ladder or ramp)

1 Low/Risk

7. Backfill and Tamp 7.1 Moving equipment 7.2 Swing zone

2 Low/Risk 7.1 Stay clear of swing zone.

7.2 Eye contact with operator.

1 Low/Risk


Page 4 of 4


Document Description: JSA for Installing Tower Footings (Rock) Created by: H. McNeil Doc. Number: JSA 01.012 Date: Jan. 17, 2011 Revision #: 0 Date Revised: Revised by:


Page 1 of 4

Exp

osur

e

Hazard 1 2 3 4 5

1 1 2 3 4 5 2 2 4 6 8 10 3 3 6 9 12 15 4 4 8 12 16 20 5 5 10 15 20 25

1-3 Low Risk




4-6 Low /

Moderate Risk




Task / Activity


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference


1. Excavate area 1.1 Excavator swing zone

1.2 Open Excavations 1.3 Cave in 1.4 Ground stability

conditions

5 Low/Mod 1.1 Stay clear of machine within motion, maintain eye contact with operator.

1.2 If excavation is going to be left unattended at any time, mark and cover

1.3 Slope at 45 degrees or install support structure

1.4 Position equipment to maintain integrity of excavation


3 Low/Risk





Standard Reference


Page 2 of 4

1.5 Place a rig mat for the equipment to set up on if required.

2. Clear excavation of any excess water using Hydro Vac

2.1 Backing the hydro-vac truck into a congested area.

2.2 Swinging boom.

3 Low/Risk 2.1 Use a spotter while backing up equipment.

2.2 Ensure all

attachments are secure to the boom.

JSA 01.007 Hydro-vacing Trenching

1 Low/Risk

3. Enter the excavation to mark drill locations.

3.1 Slips, trips and falls 3.2 Ground conditions 3.3 Entrance and egress

of excavation.

4 Mod/Risk 3.1 Watch footing 3.2 Ensure ground

obstructions are removed.

3.3 Ensure adequate means for entering and exiting the excavation are secure and adequate (ramp, stairs, or ladder)


2 Low/Risk

4. Drill Rock 4.1 Excavation stability 4.2 Rock dust 4.3 Swing zone 4.4 Blind spots on

machine.

4 Mod/Risk 4.1 Position equipment to maintain integrity of the excavation.

4.2 Dust particle masks as required.

4.3 All ground crew stay clear of machine.

2 Low/Risk

5. Cut Dewey Dag 5.1 Power rotating tools

5.2 Sparks

4 Mod/Risk 5.1 Inspect cutting tool prior to each use.

5.2 Full-face shield with safety glasses must be worn.

3 Low/Risk





Standard Reference


Page 3 of 4

6. Mixing the grout 6.1 Dust 6.2 Hazardous

products (WHMIS)

3 Low/Risk 6.1 Appropriate PPE and safety measure taken in accordance with the MSDS for the project.

2 Low/Risk

7. Grout in the Dewey Dag

7.1 Carrying a load 7.2 Slips, trips and falls

2 Low/Risk 7.1 Use a pass-off method to move grout down into the excavation.

7.2 Watch footing.

1 Low/Risk


Page 4 of 4


Document Description: JSA for Climbing Steel Poles Created by: HS&E JSA 01.015 Date: Dec. 2, 2005 Revision #: 0 Date Revised: Revised by:


Page 1 of 3

Exp

osur

e

Hazard 1 2 3 4 5

1 1 2 3 4 5 2 2 4 6 8 10 3 3 6 9 12 15 4 4 8 12 16 20 5 5 10 15 20 25

1-3 Low Risk




4-6 Low /

Moderate Risk




Task / Activity


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference


1. Check climbing tools & equipment

1.1 Equipment breaks/falls

1.2 Climber falls from

structure

5 Mod/Risk 1.1 Check equipment for condition and proper fit.

1.2 Confirm snaps are properly secured within D rings; Ensure boots are of proper design for climbing.

SWP 26.028 Fall Protection

3 Low Risk

2. Climb steel 2.1 Steps break or pull out – climber loses footing or grip – potential fall from structure or making contact with structure.

2.2 Pole strap (safety strap) catches on

6 Mod/Risk 2.1 Check and secure each step bolt before placing body weight on them. Prior to climbing, clear steps and work boots of dirt, mud, ice, etc.

2.2 Secure pole strap ends to “idle” side D

SOP 27.001 Tower Rescue

3 Low/Risk





Standard Reference


Page 2 of 3

pole and or pole attachments, ie: step bolts.

ring when pole strap is not in use.

3. Establish proper working position

3.1 Improper positioning could result in reaching strains or slips.

4 Mod/Risk 3.1 Move into proper position as each work task requires.

2 Low/Risk

4. Descend Structure 4.1 Falling from the structure or slipping which could result in personal injury.

5 Mod/Risk 4.1 Test each step bolt with feet before applying full body weight to step bolt; carefully descend after checking that all safety gear is in the clear.

3 Low/Risk

5. Stepping off pole 5.1 Poor footing could cause loss of balance resulting in personal injury.

5.2 Stepping on or bumping into ground personnel.

2 Low/Risk 5.1 Inspect area at base of structure for the safest place to step off the structure.

5.2 Check where ground personnel are before stepping off the pole; alert ground personnel to relocate before stepping off pole.

1 Low/Risk


Page 3 of 3


Document Description: JSA for Anchor Pull Testing Created by: H. McNeil Doc. Number: JSA 01.017 Date: Jan. 15, 2011 Revision #: 0 Date Revised: Revised by:


Page 1 of 3

Exp

osur

e

Hazard 1 2 3 4 5

1 1 2 3 4 5 2 2 4 6 8 10 3 3 6 9 12 15 4 4 8 12 16 20 5 5 10 15 20 25

1-3 Low Risk


8-10



4-6 Low / Moderate

Risk




Task / Activity


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference


1. Set up transit 1.1 Slips, trips and falls 3 Low/Risk 1.1 Watch footing and ground conditions.

1.2 Wear appropriate footwear.


1 Low/Risk

2. Set up Machine 2.1 Moving equipment 4 Mod/Risk 2.1 Use a spotter when moving equipment to testing position.

2.2 Clear area of obstructions and identify all anchors.

* Significant Concerns Be aware of Tower

Foundation Location.


2 Low/Risk

3. Rig Anchor 3.1 Slips, trips and falls 3.2 Heavy lifting

3 Low/Risk 3.1 Watch footing and ground conditions.

3.2 Use proper lifting

SWP 26.050 Manual Lifting and Handling

1 Low/Risk





Standard Reference


Page 2 of 3

3.3 Pinch points

techniques and adequate manpower.

4. Tension Anchor 4.1 Pinch points 4.2 Rigging Failure 4.3 Anchor Failure

5 Mod/Risk 4.1 Ensure proper body positioning.

4.2 Inspect rigging prior to each use.

4.3 Stand behind the anchor while tension is being applied.


3 Low/Risk

5. Clean up area 5.1 Slips, trips and falls 5.2 Heavy lifting (pulls,

strains, sprains)

3 Low/Risk 5.1 Watch footing and ground conditions.

5.2 Use adequate manpower.

1 Low/Risk


Page 3 of 3


Document Description: JSA for Unloading Material Created by: M. Felczak Doc. Number: JSA 01.018 Date: May 1, 2011 Revision #: 1 Date Revised: August 2018 Revised by: I.Brar


Page 1 of 5

1-3 Low Risk




4-6 Low /

Moderate Risk



Cease work until interim controls are implemented, and an action plan to permanently reduce the risk to an acceptable level. E

xpos

ure

Hazard 1 2 3 4 5

1 1 2 3 4 5 2 2 4 6 8 10 3 3 6 9 12 15 4 4 8 12 16 20 5 5 10 15 20 25

Task / Activity


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference


1. Before beginning to unload confirm material is in good condition, document any damages with photos. Inspect material for shifting during transport and address as needed

1.1 Tripping hazard 1.2 Poorly secured

loads

1.3 Un-level ground

3 Low/Risk 1.1 Keep worksite clean to control hazard. Use three points contact when ascending/descending trailer.

1.2 Inspect load to ensure stability before removing any strapping.

1.3 Park equipment on level ground to help protect against load shifting when straps are removed.

* When Equipment (Breakers, Ct’s, Pt’s) arrives on site, make sure to check shock meter to ensure no damage has occurred during transport. In cases where a shock has been recorded, document before removing any strapping. Once removed, equipment will have to be tested to ensure proper working


1 Low/Risk





Standard Reference


Page 2 of 5

function. Client should be notified in this case to expedite any need for replacement.

2. Plan location to lay down material, remove strapping

2.1 Congestion

2.2 Tripping Hazards

2.3 Pinch Points

3 Low/Risk 2.1 Communicate with workers in area; flag off area if needed. Spotters to be used in congested areas.

2.2 Keep area clear to reduce hazard.

2.3 Be mindful of hand placement throughout task. Wear appropriate gloves for hazard.

SWP 26.080 Use of Gloves – Tools, Materials & Cutting

1 Low/Risk

3. Using Equipment to un-load truck

3.1 Heavy equipment

3.2 Moving material /

equipment)

3.3 Congestion

3.4 Rigging Failure

3.5 Drop Zone

4 Mod/Risk 3.1 Qualified operator and spotters to be used while lifting and moving material. Inspect equipment daily before using. Ensure equipment certifications are valid (if applicable).

3.2 Use caution while un-loading; strap material to equipment (if using front end loader / skidsteer); if using Crane - taglines to be used. Signalman to be clearly identified with gauntlet.

3.3 Lay down area should

SWP 26.006 Crane and Rigging SWP 26.027 Spotter and Signaller SWP 26.077 Controlling and Maintaining Drop Zones

2 Low/Risk





Standard Reference


Page 3 of 5

be outside of work area as best as possible if material is not to be installed immediately. Material should be placed on dunnage to ease in moving at later time and kept off ground. Additional spotter(s) may be required in congested areas.

3.4 Qualified rigger to oversee task, rigging to be inspected prior to using, follow all safe work practices and procedures and review manufacturer specs for material weights. Review manufacturer lift directions if available.

3.5 Where practicable, workers must create a physically visible safe control zone below or in the roll area of a load using flagging, ribbon or pylons. No workers to enter the drop/roll zone while work is being carried out.





Standard Reference


Page 4 of 5

4. When completed un-loading: clean area, dispose of any debris, barricade area if needed.

4.1 Tripping hazards


4.3 Moving material

3 Low/Risk 4.1 Clear area of debris and any unused material when task is complete.

4.2 Use caution - have spotters when moving equipment.

4.3 Use caution, plan route before moving.

2 Low/Risk

Document Description: JSA for Unloading Material Created by: M. Felczak Doc. Number: JSA 01.018 Date: May 1, 2011 Revision #: 0 Date Revised: Revised by:

Page 5 of 5


Document Description: JSA for Tower Material Hauling Created by: B. Szumik Doc. Number: JSA 01.023 Date: July 15, 2010 Revision #: 1 Date Revised: Feb., 12 2016 Revised by: D. Stykalo

Page 1 of 6



Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 1. Position trailer

1.1 Overhead hazards electrical - contact with live circuits.

1.2 Soft ground – tipping front end loader.

1.3 Other vehicular/personnel traffic – striking vehicles/personnel

5 Mod/Risk 1.1 Designated Signaler if near overhead lines.

1.2 Move trailer away from soft ground.

1.3 If needed barrier area or

have extra workers to keep others away.

* Significant Concerns: Position trailer unit as

close as possible to steel bundles to minimize travel distance


3 Low/Risk

Exp

osur

e

Hazard

1 2 3 4 5 1 1 2 3 4 5 2 2 4 6 8 10 3 3 6 9 12 15 4 4 8 12 16 20 5 5 10 15 20 25

1-3 Low Risk




4-6 Low /

Moderate Risk


12-25 Unaccepta

ble Risk



Page 2 of 6


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating of front end loader. Ideally steel was positioned in an area away from overhead lines and on good ground.

2. Load trailer 2.1 Front end loader tipping

2.2 Steel bundle falling 2.3 Striking vehicles or

personnel 2.4 Improper secured

steel bundles

2.5 Slipping, tripping,

falls

4 Mod/Risk 2.1 Check weight of bundle to ensure not over the lift capacity of front end loader.

2.2 Check banding on bundles so bundles do not come apart.

2.3 Workers clear of load,

not under; use taglines if necessary. Ensure area clear of others. If high traffic area get workers to flag.

2.4 Position steel bundles on

blocking and ensure bundles are secure so as not to slide or tip over. Ensure hold downs are of sufficient strength and quantity to secure load.

2.5 Trailer deck to be clear of

tripping slipping hazards.


2 Low/Risk


Page 3 of 6


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating * Significant Concerns: Ensure front end loader

operator is competent to operate front end loader.

Check load chart capacity of front end loader against largest bundle weight to be lifted. Do not over load trailer. Check capacity of trailer.

3. Travel to unloading site.

3.1 Other vehicular traffic

3.2 Taking poor route 3.3 Right of way

restrictions

3 Low/Risk 3.1 Be wary of other drivers. Traffic control may be necessary at some location.

3.2 Know route beforehand and take less travelled route to unloading site.

3.3 Check for any road

restrictions or if special permits required. Determine beforehand if there are any restriction or other work activity which may impede travel.


1 Low/Risk

4. Position trailer at site 4.1 Soft ground – tipping front end loader

3 Low/Risk 4.1 Move trailer away from soft ground.

1 Low/Risk


Page 4 of 6


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 4.2 Other vehicular /

personnel traffic – striking vehicles / personnel

4.2 If needed barrier area or have extra workers to keep others away.


close as possible to steel bundles to minimize travel distance of front end loader. Ideally steel was positioned in an area away from overhead lines and on good ground.

5. Clean up area 5.1 Overhead hazards -electrical

5.2 Front end loader tipping

5.3 Steel bundle falling

5.4 Striking vehicles or

personnel


5.2 Check weight of bundle to ensure not over the lift capacity of front end loader.

5.3 Check banding on

bundles so bundles do not come apart.


not under, use taglines if necessary.

3 Low/Risk


Page 5 of 6


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 5.5 Improper secured

steel bundles

5.5 Position steel bundles on blocking on the ground and ensure bundles are secure so as not to slide or tip over.

* Significant Concerns:

Know capacity of front end loader and largest bundle to be unloaded.


Page 6 of 6


Document Description: JSA for Receiving Tower Steel at Marsh Yard Created by: B. Szumik Doc. Number: JSA 01.024 Date: July 28, 2010 Revision #: 1 Date Revised: Feb., 12 2016 Revised by: D. Stykalo

Page 1 of 4



Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation



1.2 Soft ground – tipping front end loader

1.3 Other vehicular / personnel traffic – striking vehicles / personnel


1.2 Move trailer away from

soft ground. 1.3 If needed barrier area or



Position trailer unit as close as possible to lay down area to minimize travel distance of front


3 Low/Risk

Exp

osur

e

Hazard

1 2 3 4 5 1 1 2 3 4 5 2 2 4 6 8 10 3 3 6 9 12 15 4 4 8 12 16 20 5 5 10 15 20 25

1-3 Low Risk




4-6 Low /

Moderate Risk


12-25 Unaccepta

ble Risk



Page 2 of 4


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating end loader. Ideally steel was positioned in an area away from overhead lines and on good ground.

2. Releasing steel bundles

2.1 Falling off trailer 2.2 Sudden tensioned

release of tie-down equipment

3 Low/Risk 2.1 Use ladder to climb onto trailer and if needed to climb onto load. Watch for footing. Maintain 3 point contact.

2.2 Avoid bite when releasing loads. If bear trap used, use a controlled release. If steel banded, may have to use heavy gloves and face shield as banding may explode out .

* Significant Concerns: Be aware that the load will be under tension and will have shifted while being transported

1 Low/Risk

3. Unload trailer 3.1 Front end loader tipping





3 Low/Risk


Page 3 of 4


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 3.3 Striking vehicles or


steel bundles 3.5 Slipping, tripping,

falls

3.3 Workers clear of load, not under, use taglines if necessary. Ensure area clear of others. If high traffic area get workers to flag.

3.4 Position steel bundles on blocking and ensure bundles are secure so as not to slide or tip over.


tripping slipping hazards. 3.6 Ensure blocking is of

sufficient strength and quantity to keep steel off of ground and to ease future loading.

* Significant Concerns: Ensure front end loader


Check load chart capacity of front end loader against largest bundle weight to be lifted.


Page 4 of 4


Document Description: JSA for Tower Material Hauling Created by: Bill Szumik Doc. Number: JSA 01.025 Date: July 28, 2010 Revision #: 1 Date Revised: Feb., 12 2016 Revised by: D. Stykalo

Page 1 of 6



Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation







1.3 If needed barrier area or have extra workers to keep others away.


Position trailer unit as close as possible to steel bundles to minimize travel distance


3 Low/Risk

Exp

osur

e

Hazard

1 2 3 4 5 1 1 2 3 4 5 2 2 4 6 8 10 3 3 6 9 12 15 4 4 8 12 16 20 5 5 10 15 20 25

1-3 Low Risk




4-6 Low /

Moderate Risk


12-25 Unaccepta

ble Risk



Page 2 of 6


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating of front-end loader. Ideally steel was positioned in an area away from overhead lines and on good ground.


2.2 Steel bundle falling 2.3 Striking vehicles or


steel bundles




not under, use taglines if necessary. Ensure area clear of others. If high traffic area get workers to flag.

2.4 Position steel bundles

on blocking and ensure bundles are secure so as not to slide or tip over. Ensure hold downs are of sufficient strength and quantity to secure load


2 Low/Risk


Page 3 of 6


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 2.5 Slipping, tripping,

falling

2.5 Trailer deck to be clear of tripping slipping hazards.

* Significant Concerns: Ensure front-end loader

operator is competent to operate front-end loader.

Check load chart capacity of front-end loader against largest bundle weight to be lifted.

Do not over load trailer. Check capacity of trailer.

3. Travel to unloading site



restrictions

3 Low/Risk 3.1 Be wary of other drivers. Traffic control may be necessary at some location.


3.3 Check for road

restrictions or if special permits are required. Determine beforehand if there are any restrictions


2 Low/Risk


Page 4 of 6


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating or other work activity that may impede travel.



3 Low/Risk 4.1 Move trailer away from soft ground.




close as possible to steel bundles to minimize travel distance of front-end loader. Ideally steel was positioned in an area away from overhead lines and on good ground.

2 Low/Risk

5. Unloading at site 5.1 Overhead hazards / electrical




5.2 Check weight of bundle to ensure not over the lift capacity of front-end loader.


bundles so bundles do

3 Low/Risk


Page 5 of 6


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating

5.4 Striking vehicles or personnel

5.5 Improper secured steel bundles

not come apart. 5.4 Workers clear of load,

not under, use taglines if necessary. Ensure area clear of others. If high traffic area get workers to flag.

5.5 Position steel bundles

on blocking on the ground and ensure bundles are secure so as not to slide or tip over.


Know capacity of front-end loader and largest bundle to be unloaded.


Page 6 of 6


Document Description: JSA for Installing Guys Created by: HS&E Doc. Number: JSA 01.030 Date: Aug. 01, 2011 Revision #: 1 Date Revised: Feb., 12 2016 Revised by: D. Stykalo

Page 1 of 7



Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 1. Survey Areas

1.1 Slips, trips and falls 4 Low/Mod 1.1 Observe work area for hazards and eliminate whenever possible. Guard and/or barricade or otherwise clearly identify hazards that cannot be removed.

WP 26.043 Housekeeping

2 Low/Risk

2. Mark out Guy lengths 2.1 Equipment strikes employee.

8 Mod/High 2.1 Ensure the end of guy wire is controlled while wire is being paid off the reel. Properly secure both ends of wire while guys are being cut. Properly secure the end still attached to the reel

4 Mod/Risk

Exp

osur

e

Hazard

1 2 3 4 5 1 1 2 3 4 5 2 2 4 6 8 10 3 3 6 9 12 15 4 4 8 12 16 20 5 5 10 15 20 25

1-3 Low Risk




4-6 Low /

Moderate Risk


12-25 Unaccepta

ble Risk



Page 2 of 7


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating

2.2 Hands, fingers or

other body parts caught in between objects.

2.3 Rigging fails. 2.4 Equipment/guy

contacts energized electrical equipment and/or conductors.

to prevent the end of the guy wire from whipping.

2.2 Work gloves and other

PPE to be worn; designate a flagger for movement control; keep hands and body clear and maintain safe distance from wire and reel; do not allow personnel in pinch points; recommendation of not wearing jewelry or excessively loose fitting clothing.

2.3 Inspect all rigging prior to

use for damage and/or defects. Ensure all rigging being applied is SWL rated for load. Always lock hoists in the up position.

2.4 Identify all energized

electrical equipment and conductors and determine necessary clearance to be maintained from electrical conflicts; spotter assigned to assist operator in maintaining clearances.


Page 3 of 7


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 3. Install Guys 3.1 Hands, fingers and



guys or equipment.

8 Mod/High 3.1 Work gloves and other PPE to be worn; designate a flagger for movement control; keep hands and body clear and maintain safe distance from pole; do not allow personnel in pinch points; recommendation of not wearing jewelry or excessively loose fitting clothing.

3.2 Communicate with all personnel while guys are being hung and pulled. Do not allow personnel in the “hole” while guys are being hung. Control ends of preform while wrapping the guys. Maintain a safe distance from guy wraps to prevent face and other body parts from being injured by the preform whipping back.


4 Mod/Risk


Page 4 of 7


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 3.3 Grip on guy slips. 3.4 Anchor Fails.

3.3 Check preform for proper sizing. Fully install preform on guy being pulled. Use only approved mechanical grips.

3.4 Check anchor test

results before pulling guy. Reinstall anchor as necessary or contact engineering for consideration of modification of anchoring specifications.

4. Check Guys 4.1 Slips, trips and falls.

4.2 Hands, fingers and


4.1 Observe work area for hazards and eliminate whenever possible. Guard and/or barricade or otherwise clearly identify hazards that cannot be removed.

4.2 Work gloves and other PPE to be worn; designate a flagger for movement control; keep hands and body clear and maintain safe distance from guys and

3 Low/Risk


Page 5 of 7


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 4.3 Guy tension uneven

or pole not aligned correctly.

associated tools and equipment; do not allow personnel in pinch points; recommendation of not wearing jewelry or excessively loose fitting clothing.

4.3 Make necessary

corrections to guys for balance tensioning and properly align structure according to engineering specifications. Always lock hoists in up position when temporarily stopping pulling action.

5. Clean up area 5.1 Slips, trips and falls 5.2 Personnel struck by

equipment

4 Mod/Risk 5.1 Observe work area for hazards and eliminate whenever possible. Guard and/or barricade or otherwise clearly identify hazards that cannot be removed.

5.2 Operator to identify and

communicate with designated employee to guide during “backing” operation. Operator to

2 Low/Risk


Page 6 of 7


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating maintain visual contact with personnel. Operator to familiarize self with surrounding area prior to beginning clean-up operations. Operator and ground personnel to review planned direction of equipment during movement .


Page 7 of 7


Document Description: JSA for Tower Erection of Body and Arms Created by: B. Szumik Doc. Number: JSA 01.034 Date: Jan. 4, 2010 Revision #: 1 Date Revised Dec. 4, 2015. Revised by: D. Stykalo


Page 1 of 9

Exp

osur

e

Hazard 1 2 3 4 5

1 1 2 3 4 5 2 2 4 6 8 10 3 3 6 9 12 15 4 4 8 12 16 20 5 5 10 15 20 25

1-3 Low Risk




4-6 Low /

Moderate Risk




Task / Activity


Hazard Rating Recommended Loss Prevention Barriers

Standard Reference


1. Mobilize to site

1.1 Traffic 4 Mod/Risk 1.1 Pull equipment into accesses where possible. Four way flashers and pull to the side if needed while opening barriers. Flag persons and traffic control as required. Secure loads.


Road conditions, time of day, weather, check height of utilities.


2 Low/Risk

Document Description: JSA for Tower Erection of Body and Arms Created by: B. Szumik Doc. Number: JSA 01.034 Date: B. Szumik Revision #: 0 Date Revised: Revised by:




Standard Reference


Page 2 of 9

2. Access site 2.1 Congested and right-away limits existing line structures

6 Mod/Risk 2.1 Park vehicles clear of work area.

Only needed equipment placed in

work area. Ensure operators and crew are aware of overhead lines (limits of approach) use Designated Signaler (spotter) if unsure of equipment proximity.

Equipment and trucks to keep to designated roads and accesses. Communication between vehicles if necessary.

Wait at wide spots to meet other vehicles.

* Significant Concerns: Equipment contact. Adhering to ROW

boundaries.

26.027 Spotter and Signaller Practice

4 Mod/Risk





Standard Reference


Page 3 of 9

3. Set up equipment 3.1 Equipment failure 3.2 Strains / sprains

8 Mod/High 3.1 Qualified operators; Daily inspections

completed; Operated within the

operating manual of the unit;

Crane set up on level ground using outrigger pads;

Crane pad sufficient to support unit;

3.2 Be aware of site conditions;

Pads for man lift level; Radius of lift known; Three point contact; Climb all the way to

the ground; Look at ground

conditions before you dismount.


6 Mod/Risk

4. Rig Lift 4.1 Rigging Failure

8 Mod/High 4.1 Rated and inspected rigging for the lift.

Softeners used if needed.

Steel slings choked around members.

Weight of the loads calculated.

Weights predetermined.


6 Mod/Risk

5. Attach cranes to load 5.1 Communication 5.2 Energized circuits

6 Mod/Risk 5.1 Designated signal person.

Line of site between operators and signal person.

Communication with crew prior to starting.

4 Mod/Risk





Standard Reference


Page 4 of 9

5.2 No person is touching the crane or outriggers.

Ground probe and chain.

Limits of approach Safety watch when in

close proximity to utilities.

Lift loads away from the existing ROW.

Weather conditions monitored.

6. Hoist load with two cranes

6.1 Two machine pick 6.2 Energized circuit 6.3 Equipment failure 6.4 Falling materials

8 Mod/High 6.1 Operators only take signals from designated signal person.

6.2 Qualified operators. 6.3 Extra spotter in place

if needed. 6.4 LMI monitored in

crane as load transfer takes place.

6.5 Line of site with signal person is maintained.

6.6 Maintain clearances (limits of approach)

6.7 Tag lines to control loads.

6.8 Operator is watching signal person.

6.9 Anyone can stop a lift in an emergency.

6.10 Picks and crane capacities are predetermined.

6.11 All lift exciding 85% of

6 Mod/Risk





Standard Reference


Page 5 of 9

cranes capacity will require a lift study.

6.12 Operator is monitoring outrigger pads(compression)

6.13 Large enough pads for ground conditions

6.14 No one is in the fall zone of panel being hoisted.

6.15 Load will be inspected prior to lift

6.16 Hardware will be tied to the structure.

6.17 Crew will not be under the load.

7. Disconnect tailing crane

7.1 Working under load

7.2 Equipment moving

8 Mod/High 7.1 Only crew needed to perform the task go into the zone.

7.2 Operators are aware of crews work

7.3 Operator only takes direction from the signal person

7.4 Signal person is the only one who directs the operator.

7.5 Tailing crane is unhooked and swung clear of the lift

7.6 Unneeded equipment is parked clear of the site.

6 Mod/Risk

8. Crew accepting tower 8.1. Electrical

8 Mod/High 8.1. Ground chain will be used to bleed off induction from the lift prior to touching by hand.

SWP 26.036 Grounding and Bonding

6 Mod/Risk





Standard Reference


Page 6 of 9

8.2. Falling from aloft 8.3. Pinch points 8.4. Falling tools 8.5. Strains

8.2. Rated and inspected tools (hotstick, gloves, ground chain).

8.3. 100% fall arrest. 8.4. Qualified people for

the task. 8.5. Lanyards and

harnesses inspected. 8.6. One person in the air

is directing the crane. 8.7. Crew is aware of

signal person’s intensions.

8.8. Proper tools for the job (drifts, spuds, hammers).

8.9. No one is below the tower.

8.10. Nose bags in the tower for holding extra tools.

8.11. Proper positioning while working.

8.12. Use correct tools for the task at hand.

8.13. Keep hydrated. 8.14. Use electric tools to

help on task.


9. Tighten bolts 9.1. Tool failure 9.2. Electrical

6 Mod/Risk 9.1. Inspection of tool. Safety glasses worn. Tag out and give to Foreman if defective. Proper tool for the job. Inspection of tools and electrical equipment.

9.2. GFCI breakers on the

SWP 26.001 Defective Tools

4 Mod/Risk





Standard Reference


Page 7 of 9

9.3. Noise

power source. Tag defective or worn equipment. Be aware of weather conditions.

9.3. Hearing protection worn.

9.4. Make the crew aware of task

9.5. Inspection of socket and driver

10. Disconnect Rigging 10.1. Communication 10.2. Falling from aloft

6 Mod/Risk 10.1. Clear hand signals to operators. Ensure crew below is aware of your actions.

10.2. 100% fall arrest; Softeners tied up if they are being used; Unhooked rigging sent down with the hook.

4 Mod/Risk

11. Crew Descends Tower 11.1. Falling from aloft 11.2. Falling tools

8 High/Risk 11.1. Experienced persons. Three point contact.

11.2. Fall zone below is clear. Extra tools sent down in nose bags.

6 Mod/Risk

12. Clean up and demobilize from site

12.1. Equipment Collision

12.2. Site conditions

4 Mod/Risk 12.1. Qualified operators and drivers; Back up beepers; Have signal person directing equipment.

12.2. Pile left over materials in one location; Mark materials if necessary. Trucks and light duty equipment is moved from site prior to


3 Low/Risk





Standard Reference


Page 8 of 9

demobilizing the crane.


Page 9 of 9


Document Description: JSA for Tower Panel Erection to the Bend Created by: B. Szumik Doc. Number: JSA 01.035 Date: July 27, 2010 Revision #: 1 Date Revised: Feb., 12 2016 Revised by: D. Stykalo

Page 1 of 8



Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 1. Mobilize to site

1.1 Traffic 4 Mod/Risk 1.1 Pull equipment into accesses where possible Four way flashers and pull to the side if needed while opening barriers. Flag persons and traffic control as required Secure loads

* Significant Concerns: Road conditions, time of day, weather, check height of utilities.


2 Low/Risk

2.1 Access site 2.1 Congested and right-away limits.

5 Mod/Risk 2.1 Park clear of work area. Only needed equipment

4 Mod/Risk

Exp

osur

e

Hazard

1 2 3 4 5 1 1 2 3 4 5 2 2 4 6 8 10 3 3 6 9 12 15 4 4 8 12 16 20 5 5 10 15 20 25

1-3 Low Risk




4-6 Low /

Moderate Risk


12-25 Unaccepta

ble Risk



Page 2 of 8


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating

2.2 Existing line

structures

placed in work area.

2.2 Ensure Operators and crew are aware of overhead lines (limits of approach); use Designated Signaler (spotter) if unsure of equipment proximity. Equipment and trucks to keep to designated roads and accesses. Communication between vehicles if necessary. Wait at wide spots to meet other vehicles.

* Significant Concerns: Equipment contact; Adhering to ROW boundaries.

3. Set up equipment 3.1 Equipment failure

6 Mod/Risk 3.1 Qualified operators. Daily inspections

completed. Operated within the

operating instructions of the unit.

Crane set up on level ground using outrigger pads.

Crane pad sufficient to support unit.

Be aware of site conditions.

Pads for man lift level.


4 Mod/Risk


Page 3 of 8


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating Radius of lift known.

4. Rig Panels 4.1 Rigging failure

6 Mod/Risk 4.1 Rated and inspected rigging for the lift.



Hold back rope inspection prior to attachment.

Shackles between rope and choked slings.

Panel weights predetermined.


4 Mod/Risk

5. Attach crane to load 5.1 Communication


6 Mod/Risk 5.1 Designated signal person; Line of site between operator and signal person; Communication with crew prior to starting.

5.2 No person is touching the crane or outriggers. Ground probe and chain; Limits of approach; Safety watch when in close proximity to utilities; Lift loads away from the existing ROW.


4 Mod/Risk

6. Hoist load 6.1 Energized circuit

8 High/Risk 6.1 Maintain clearances.

SWP 26.002 Electrical Work

6 Mod/Risk


Page 4 of 8


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 6.2 Equipment failure

6.2 Tag lines to control loads. Operator is watching signal person. Anyone can stop a lift in an emergency. Operator is monitoring outrigger pads. Large enough pads for ground conditions. No one is in the fall zone of panel being hoisted.

Crew only moves in to bolt once the panel is close to the legs location.

7. Hold back panels 7.1 Equipment failure 7.2 Equipment being

moved

5 Mod/Risk 7.1 Equipment is on stable ground.

7.2 Safety equipment on equipment that is working. Qualified operator. Operator stays in seat unit final hold back position is achieved. Lock out procedure in place for equipment being left attached to hold back ropes. Only designated and qualified operators will

3 Low/Risk


Page 5 of 8


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating be move the equipment.

Designated signal person will give signals to the hold back units if adjustment is needed.

8. Install spiders 8.1. Rigging 8.2. Working aloft

8.3. Pinch points

7 Mod/High 8.1 Rated and inspected slings.

8.2 Proper use of rigging. 8.3 Stay clear from the base

of the panel section being erected. Man lift training complete (qualified persons). Decent rope in unit. Unit is on level ground prior to aerial work. Fall arrest 100%. Others are aware of your actions. Gloves on at all times. Spuds and drifts used for lining holes.

Full nut on loose pieces.


5 Mod/Risk

9. Tighten bolts 9.1 Tool failure

9.2 Electrical 9.3 Noise

6 Mod/Risk 9.1 Inspection of tool.

9.2 Tag out and give to Foreman if defective.

9.3 Proper tool for the job.

Inspection of tools and electrical equipment. GFCI breakers on the

SWP 26.025 Use of Hand Tools

4 Mod/Risk


Page 6 of 8


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating power source. Tag defective or worn equipment. Be aware of weather conditions. Hearing protection worn. Make the crew aware of task.

Inspection of socket and driver.

10. Disconnect Rigging 10.1 Communication 10.2 Falling from aloft

8 High/Risk 10.1 Clear hand signals to operators.

10.2 Second signal person on the ground to relay if needed. Ensure rope fall zone is clear. Crew is aware of tasks. Check that no one is below operation.

Put shackles and steel slings in man lift.

6 Mod/Risk


11.1 Equipment Collision Site conditions

5 Mod/Risk 11.1 Qualified operators and drivers. Back up beepers. Have signal person directing equipment and trucks when backing up at tower locations. Corners of assembled steel have been flagged if they are close to


3 Low/Risk


Page 7 of 8


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating roadways. Flagging on the end of the arms. Leave body as low to the ground as possible. Be aware of changes to location once the pieces have been assembled. Leave access roads open.

* Significant Concerns: In winter, corners of

assembled steel should be marked.


Page 8 of 8


Document Description: JSA for Ground Assembly of Panels – Stage 1 Created by: B. Szumik Doc. Number: JSA 01.036 Date: July 27, 2010 Revision #: 1 Date Revised: Feb., 12 2016 Revised by: D. Stykalo

Page 1 of 9



Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation






2 Low/Risk

Exp

osur

e

Hazard

1 2 3 4 5 1 1 2 3 4 5 2 2 4 6 8 10 3 3 6 9 12 15 4 4 8 12 16 20 5 5 10 15 20 25

1-3 Low Risk




4-6 Low /

Moderate Risk


12-25 Unaccepta

ble Risk



Page 2 of 9


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 2. Access to site 2.1 Congested and right-

away limits

2.2 Existing line

structures

8 High/Risk 2.1 Park clear of work area. Only needed equipment placed in work area. ). Use Designated Signaler (spotter) if unsure of equipment proximity. Communication between vehicles if necessary. Wait at wide spots to meet other vehicles.

2.2 Ensure operators and crew are aware of overhead lines (limits of approach. Equipment and trucks to keep to designated roads and accesses.

* Significant Concerns: Equipment contact. Adhering to ROW boundaries.


6 Mod/Risk

3. Layout blocking and bundles

3.1 Site conditions

3.2 Moving Equipment

6 Mod/Risk 3.1 Assess site for walking hazards and uneven terrain. Remove tripping hazards.

3.2 Qualified operator, equipment checks have been completed. Backup beepers on equipment. Signal person in


4 Mod/Risk


Page 3 of 9


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating

3.3 Load shifting

congested areas or where workers are present.

3.3 Make sure forks are

centered on the load. Long pieces moved slowly. Banding in place on the bundles. Plan your drops to avoid unnecessary moving. Designated Signaler and workers are clear of the fall zone

* Significant Concerns: Equipment contacting

persons or vehicles. Material handler forks

when necessary. 4. Sorting of bundles 4.1 Communication

4.2 Pinch points (hands

and eyes)

5 Mod/Risk 4.1 Workers are aware of plan to move steel. Be aware of your partner’s hands and location prior to moving pieces.

4.2 Wear proper PPE. Be aware of pinch points if pieces shift. Do not position yourself

SWP 26.025 Use of Hand Tools SWP 26.050 Manual Lifting and Handling

3 Low/Risk


Page 4 of 9


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating

4.3 Improper use of tools

or tools not working

4.4 Strains and repetitive task

between bundles when banding is being cut.

4.3 Check your tools before

use. 4.4 Use proper lifting and

bending techniques. Get help as required for heavier pieces.

Use equipment as needed.

5. Set up of boom truck 5.1 Equipment set up 6 Mod/Risk 5.1 Qualified operators. Daily inspection of truck and crane. Spotter when putting

out riggers. Outrigger pads used at

all times. Set up on level ground. Equipment set up

maintaining limits of approach to existing lines.

Truck is grounded using ground probe and 4/0 ground chain.


4 Mod/Risk

6. Layout to heavy pieces 6.1 Equipment failure 6 Mod/Risk 6.1 Rated and inspected rigging used.

Tag line used on loads.


4 Mod/Risk


Page 5 of 9


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating Crew is aware of pieces

being moved Stay clear of the fall

zone. Stay within equipment

charts and limitations Designated signal person Operator does not leave

the unit when load is attached to crane.

* Significant Concerns: Use nylon slings

between winch line and load.

7. Layout of small pieces 7.1 Strains

7.2 Dehydration / Fatigue

7.3 Pinch Points

4 Mod/Risk 7.1 Use proper bending and lifting techniques when carrying and placing pieces.

7.2 Drink plenty of liquids. Buddy system, be

aware of weather conditions. Have proper clothing for the changing weather. Pieces are blocked properly.

7.3 Be aware of your

coworker’s hands and feet prior to moving

3 Low/Risk


Page 6 of 9


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating pieces. Use spuds and lining bars keeping digits clear of the bite. Ensure a full nut is on the piece before you leave it eliminating pieces coming apart.

8. Assembly of pieces

8.1 Pinch points 8.2 Strains / repetitive

motion 8.3 Dehydration / Fatigue

3 Low/Risk 8.1 Use blocking to support pieces. Be aware of your co-workers position. Clear communication between crew members. Spuds and bars used for lining.

8.2 Proper lifting techniques. Use machines if necessary.

8.3 Keep hydrated.

2 Low/Risk

9. Tighten panels 9.1 Tool failure, crescents, spud wrenches, impacts

9.2 Electrical

4 Mod/Risk 9.1 Inspection of tool. Tag out and give to Foreman if defective. Proper tool for the job. Inspection of tools and electrical equipment. Tag defective or worn equipment. Inspection of socket and driver.

9.2 GFCI breakers on the power source. Be aware of weather conditions.


3 Low/Risk


Page 7 of 9


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating

9.3 Noise

9.4 Contact with eyes 9.5 Slips and trips

Make the crew aware of task.

9.3 Hearing protection worn. 9.4 Wear proper PPE. 9.5 Be sure of footing. Clean

up unnecessary tools and blocking at site. Proper footwear for terrain or weather conditions.

10. Build spiders 10.1 Strains

10.2 Pinch points

4 Mod/Risk 10.1 Use proper bending and lifting techniques. Use equipment when needed. Buddy system for moving pieces.

10.2 Use tools to line holes and work in tight areas. Be sure crew members are aware of your work (moving pieces). Have clear communication. Blocking used to support pieces. Gloves worn at all times.

3 Low/Risk

11. Clean up and demobilization from site

11.0 Equipment Collision

5 Mod/Risk 11.0 Qualified operators and drivers.

Back up beepers Have signal person

directing equipment and trucks when backing up

SWP 26 027 Spotter and Signaller Practice

3 Low/Risk


Page 8 of 9


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating

11.1 Site conditions

at tower locations. Corners of assembled

steel have been flagged if they are close to roadways.

11.1 Leave panels as low to

the ground as possible. Be aware of changes to

location once the pieces have been assembled.

Leave access roads open.

In winter corners of assembled steel should be marked.


Page 9 of 9


Document Description: JSA for Rider Pole Installation and Removal Created by: L. Skinner Doc. Number: JSA 01.038 Date: Mar. 18, 2011 Revision #: 1 Date Revised: Feb., 12 2016 Revised by: D.Stykalo

Page 1 of 6



Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation






2 Low/Risk

Exp

osur

e

Hazard

1 2 3 4 5 1 1 2 3 4 5 2 2 4 6 8 10 3 3 6 9 12 15 4 4 8 12 16 20 5 5 10 15 20 25

1-3 Low Risk




4-6 Low /

Moderate Risk


12-25 Unaccepta

ble Risk



Page 2 of 6


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 2. Access to site or set

up Traffic Control (whichever is applicable)

2.1 Congested and right-away limits

2.2 Existing line

structures 2.3 Traffic

8 High/Risk 2.1 Park clear of work area. Only needed equipment placed in work area. ). Use Designated Signaler (spotter) if unsure of equipment proximity. Communication between vehicles if necessary. Wait at wide spots to meet other vehicles.

2.2 Ensure operators and crew are aware of overhead lines (limits of approach. Equipment and trucks to keep to designated roads and accesses.

2.3 Set up the necessary

Traffic control as per MTO Book 7.

* Significant Concerns: Vehicular Traffic Equipment contact

Adhering to ROW boundaries.


6 Mod/Risk


6 Mod/Risk 3.1 Qualified operators Daily inspections completed. Operated within the operating manual of the unit.

4 Mod/Risk


Page 3 of 6


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating RBD / Crane set up on level ground using outrigger pads. RBD / Crane pad sufficient to support unit. Be aware of site conditions.

Radius of lift known. 4. Excavate Holes 4.1 Underground Utilities

4.2 Energized Electrical circuits

5 Mod/Risk 4.1 Obtain Underground locates via Ontario One Call and or local Utilities.

4.2 Observe Limits of Approach to Electrical apparatus. As per Electrical Utility Safety Rule 129. Use approved Electrical Cover up where required.

* Significant Concerns: Gas and Electrical

contacts.


3 Low/Risk

5. Install Horizontal Poles 5.1 Communication

6 Mod/Risk 5.1 Designated signal person. Line of site between operators and signal person. Communication with crew prior to starting.


4 Mod Risk


Page 4 of 6


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 5.2 Energized Electrical

circuits

5.3 Falling Material

5.2 No person is touching the crane or outriggers. Ground probe and chain. Limits of approach. Safety watch when in close proximity to utilities.

5.3 Stay clear of the drop

zone

* Significant Concerns: See Rider Pole Installation for weight break downs

6. Install Vertical Poles 6.1 Pole Climbing

6.2 Strains/sprains 6.3 Communication 6.4 Energized circuit

8 Mod/High 6.1 Approved Climbing gear and pole belt with fall arrest system.

6.2 Rig poles to reduce unnecessary strains.

6.3 Operators only take

signals from designated signal person. Qualified operators; Line of site with signal person is maintained.

6.4 Maintain clearances

(limits of approach). Tag lines to control


6 Mod/Risk


Page 5 of 6


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 6.5 Falling materials

loads.Operator is watching signal person.

6.5 Anyone can stop a lift in

an emergency. RBD’s and crane capabities are predetermined. No one is in the fall zone of panel being hoisted. Hardware will be tied to the structure. Crew will not be under the load.

7. Rider Pole Removal 7.1 Review all hazards that were documented for the Rider Pole installation

4 Mod/Risk 7.1 Vehicle setup needs to be reviewed as per above. Weights need to be reviewed as per above. Limits of approach need to be reviewed as per above. Climbing review as per above

3 Low/Risk


Page 6 of 6


Document Description: JSA for Tower Dressing (Hanging of Insulators and Travelers)

Created by: V. Vidakovic Doc. Number: JSA 01.039 Date: Apr. 11, 2011 Revision #: 1 Date Revised: Feb., 12 2016 Revised by: D. Stykalo

Page 1 of 7



Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 1. Mobilize and Access

to Site

1.1 Traffic 1.2 Congestion and

Right-of-way Limits

4 Mod/Risk 1.1 Obey Speed Limits of the roads used. Four-way flashers and pull to the side if needed while opening barriers. Flag persons and traffic control if required. Secure loads.

1.2 Park clear out of work area. Only needed equipment parked in work area. Equipment and trucks to keep to designated roads and accesses.


2 Low/Risk

Exp

osur

e

Hazard

1 2 3 4 5 1 1 2 3 4 5 2 2 4 6 8 10 3 3 6 9 12 15 4 4 8 12 16 20 5 5 10 15 20 25

1-3 Low Risk




4-6 Low /

Moderate Risk


12-25 Unaccepta

ble Risk




Page 2 of 7


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating

1.3 Existing Line

Structures

Communication between vehicles if necessary. Wait at wide spots to meet other vehicles.

1.3 Ensure operators and

crew are aware of overhead lines (limits of approach). Use Designated Signaler (spotter) if unsure of equipment proximity.


6 Mod/Risk 2.1 Qualified operators Daily inspections completed. Operated within the operating manual of the unit. Boom Truck set up on level ground using outrigger pads. Boom Truck pads sufficient to support unit.



4 Mod/Risk

3. Attach Boom Truck to Load

3.1 Communication

6 Mod/Risk 3.1 Designated signal person; line of site between operator and signal person; communication with crew prior to starting.


4 Mod/Risk



Page 3 of 7


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 3.2 Energized circuits

3.2 No person is touching

the boom truck or outriggers; grounding for Boom Truck installed; limits of approach; safety watch when in close proximity to utilities; lift loads away from the existing ROW.

* Significant Concerns: Miscommunication Working in vicinity of energized lines, Induced voltage


4. Hoist Load (lift up insulators and travelers)

4.1 Energized Circuit

4.2 Equipment Failure

8 Mod/High 4.1 Maintain clearances; Tag lines to control loads if necessary; Operator is watching signal person; Anyone to stop a lift in an emergency.

4.2 Operator is monitoring outrigger pads. Pads size suitable for any ground conditions. No one is standing below load being hoisted. Crew only moves in to bolt once the assembly is close to the

6 Mod/Risk



Page 4 of 7


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating

4.3 Rigging Failure

attachment point. 4.3 Rated and inspected

rigging for the lift. Weight of the loads calculated. Hold back rope inspection prior to attachment (if used). No one is standing bellow load being hoisted. Crew only moves in to bolt once the assembly is close to the attachment point.

5. Climbing onto Tower/Moving with Tower

5.1 Fall from Height 8 High/Risk 5.1 Use double hook lanyard or other approved means of attachment, at all times once above 3 meters from the ground level. Proper PPE to be used at all times (safety footwear to be in good condition, hard hat, gloves). Inspect Safety Harness every time prior to climbing onto the tower.

In wet weather conditions and if tower is slipperty, use man lift for climbing onto the tower.

In wet weather conditions


6 Mod/Risk



Page 5 of 7


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating and if tower is slipperty, use man lift for climbing onto the tower.

* Significant Concerns: Slippery tower steel

(climbing path for the lineman)

Improper use of PPE (safety harness)

Damaged PPE (safety harness, safety footwear)

Note: if using a crane basket, the revised load chart must be at the operator controls

6. Disconnect Rigging 6.1 Communication

6.2 Falling from aloft

8 High/Risk 6.1 Clear hand signals to operators; second signal person on the ground to relay if needed.

6.2 Ensure rope fall zone is clear; crew is aware of tasks; check that no one is below operation; put shackles and steel slings in man lift (if used).

6 Mod/Risk

7. Clean up and demobilize off the site


5 Mod/Risk 7.1 Qualified operators and drivers; back up beepers; have signal person directing equipment and trucks when backing up at


3 Low/Risk



Page 6 of 7


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 7.2 Site Conditions

lower locations. 7.2 Ensure good

housekeeping practices are maintained.



Page 7 of 7


Document Description: JSA for Pulling Hard Line Created by: HSE Doc. Number: JSA 01.040 Date: Aug. 2011 Revision #: 1 Date Revised: Dec. 4, 2015 Revised by; D. Stykalo


Page 1 of 7

Exp

osur

e

Hazard 1 2 3 4 5

1 1 2 3 4 5 2 2 4 6 8 10 3 3 6 9 12 15 4 4 8 12 16 20 5 5 10 15 20 25

1-3 Low Risk




4-6 Low /

Moderate Risk




Task / Activity



Standard Reference


1. Survey Pull Out Area

1.1 Personnel falling or tripping

1.2 Contact with

energized lines; damage to conductors, and public safety

1.3 Rope contacts vehicles, vessels, trains, pedestrians and/or other conflicts.

6 Mod/Risk 1.1 Observe environment for hazards and arrange to have moved where possible.

1.2 Install rider poles to protect powerlines, roadways, waterways, and other obstacles or conflicts.

1.3 Obtain permits required for railroad, roadways, and waterway crossings. Have all traffic/pedestrian control devices placed

4 Mod/Risk

Document Description: JSA for Pulling Hard Line Created by: HSE Doc. Number: JSA 01.040 Date: Aug. 2011 Revision #: 0 Date Revised: Revised by:




Standard Reference


Page 2 of 7

as required. 2. Set up equipment 2.1 Overexertion –

strains and sprains

2.2 Fingers / hands and


2.3 Fall from

equipment.

4 Mod/Risk 2.1 Keep proper body position; do not extend arms or legs beyond strength positions. Ask for assistance.

2.2 Maintain proper work position outside of “bite” of any rigging; wear all necessary PPE; maintain focus on task being performed. Maintain eye contact and communication with equipment operators regarding task being performed.

2.3 Maintain equipment; steps clear from all obstructions i.e. mud, ice, oil, grease, etc.; clean work boot soles of mud, oil, etc.; observe placement of feet onto steps, maintain firm grip on grab devices. Observe and maintain condition of all provided fall protection devices. (handrails etc.)

SWP 26.050 Manual Lifting and Handling Section 10 Personal Protective Equipment

3 Low/Risk

3. Set up Radio Communication

3.1 Loss of/or poor communications that will disrupt or prevent

3 Low/Risk 3.1 Confirm all radios function properly; vehicles and equipment are in

2 Low/Risk





Standard Reference


Page 3 of 7

coordination of pulling operation.

assigned locations; establish and communicate emergency stop signal; stop pull if communications are lost.

4. Attach rope to pulling machine

4.1 Overexertion

4.2 Hands/Fingers and

other body parts caught between objects and pinch points.

4.3 Falls from

equipment. 4.4 Cross-phasing.

4 Mod/Risk 4.1 Keep proper body position; do not extend arms or legs beyond strength positions. Ask for assistance.

4.2 Maintain proper work position outside of “bite” of any rigging; wear all necessary PPE, maintain focus on task being performed.

4.3 Maintain eye contact and communication with equipment operators regarding task being performed. Make sure all equipment is adequately anchored where required.

4.4 Maintain equipment steps clear from all obstructions i.e. mud, ice, oil, grease, etc. clean work boot soles

3 Low/Risk





Standard Reference


Page 4 of 7

4.5 Hardline comes

loose from grip; swivel breaks or does not spin properly.

4.6 Equipment strikes

personnel.

of mud, oil, etc.; observe placement of feet onto steps, maintain firm grip on grab devices. Observe and maintain condition of all provided fall protection devices. (hand-rails etc.).

4.5 Confirm that rope goes through the same phase block as on the previous structure. Check prints for phasing. Check phasing schematic and both adjacent structures when phasing rolls. Check for proper size grip before installation. Inspect swivel for proper operation and defects, replace as necessary.

4.6 Ensure that back up alarms are working, and employees understand safety rules for backing up equipment. Maintain eye contact and





Standard Reference


Page 5 of 7

communications with operators; observe walking areas and remove/avoid obstacles.

5. Attach Rope to Conductor

5.1 Swivel breaks. 5.2 Grip slips. 5.3 Incorrect phasing of

rope.

5.4 Slips, Trips, and

Falls. 5.5 Cuts, punctures, and

pinched body parts.

6 Mod/Risk 5.1 Inspect swivel for proper operation and defects and replace as required.

5.2 Confirm grip is proper size for conductor and that it is installed and secured properly.

5.3 Ensure that rope goes through the same phase block as on previous structure.

5.4 Keep proper body position, do not extend arms or legs beyond strength positions. Observe environment for hazards and arrange to have removed where possible. Ensure employees are using proper footwear.

5.5 Wear all necessary PPE. Keep hands, fingers and all body parts clear of pinch points. Maintain eye

Section 9 Inspections-Monitoring SWP 26.043 Housekeeping

4 Mod/Risk





Standard Reference


Page 6 of 7

contact and communications with operators. Avoid / remove sharp objects wear possible. Carefully handle Kellum Grips and avoid/remove the sharp ends of broken wires.


Page 7 of 7


Document Description: JSA for Pulling Conductor Created by: HSE Doc. Number: JSA 01.041 Date: Aug. 2011 Revision #: 1 Revised by: D. Stykalo Date

Revised: Dec. 4, 2015


Page 1 of 9

Exp

osur

e

Hazard 1 2 3 4 5

1 1 2 3 4 5 2 2 4 6 8 10 3 3 6 9 12 15 4 4 8 12 16 20 5 5 10 15 20 25

1-3 Low Risk




4-6 Low /

Moderate Risk




Task / Activity



Standard Reference


1. Job Assignments

1.1 Lack of communications could lead to improper personnel positioning.

1.2 Lack of skills exposes inexperienced or unqualified person to injury.

3 Low/Risk 1.1 Conduct Tailboard to confirm hand signals to be used; confirm personnel assigned locations.

1.2 Supervisor assigns responsibilities according to experience, displayed skills, and specific certifications.

2 Low/Risk

2. Adjust and prepare equipment

2.1 Wire reel not in control

6 Mod/Risk 2.1 Adjust brake tension as required; insert pins and engagement dogs in rope puller.


4 Mod/Risk

Document Description: JSA for Pulling Conductor Created by: HSE Doc. Number: JSA 01.041 Date: Aug. 2011 Revision #: 0 Date Revised: Revised by:




Standard Reference


Page 2 of 9

3. Pull Conductor 3.1 Pole or structure member bending or breaking

3.2 Equipment failure. 3.3 Wire bird cages or

otherwise deforms. 3.4 Stringing breaks.

8 High/Risk 3.1 Observe line tension; observe rope-conductor connection point as it goes through travelers; operators shall concentrate on line tension indications; maintain communication between ground crews and equipment operators; personnel stay clear of structures.

3.2 Preventative Maintenance is to be current; pre-job inspection; operator observation during work; communicate all problems that arise during operations ASAP with mechanic.

3.3 Check travelers for proper function; keep conductor clear from rocks, brush, or other obstacles that could damage conductor.

3.4 Recheck traveler installation; observe travelers during pull

6 Mod/Risk





Standard Reference


Page 3 of 9

3.5 Conductor comes

out of traveler. 3.6 Clearance

structure leaning or falling.

3.7 Public exposed in

the work zone.

for excessive strain and non-rotating sheaves.

3.5 Ensure that travelers have been properly installed prior to pull; check that doors are facing proper direction and latches are properly secured.

3.6 Stop operations until structures are secured; Check medium that structure is set in (mud, soft soil) and secure with necessary guying and/or bracing.

3.7 Check all warning and information signs. Check for effectiveness of channeling devices. Add or reconfigure channeling devices to accommodate the necessary level of public safety. Implement the use of a “Safety Watch” or “Flag Persons” as necessary to assist the public and prevent





Standard Reference


Page 4 of 9

3.8 Hardline breaks. 3.9 Machines

inadvertently move or pull over.

3.10 Communication

breakdown. 3.11 Conductor winds

off reel.

exposure to workplace hazards. Implement the use of barriers and/or barricades as necessary.

3.8 Maintain proper tension; stop operation when hardline or conductor hangs up.

3.9 Maintain proper tension; anchor and chock equipment as necessary.

3.10 Confirm all radios function properly; ensure that vehicles and equipment are at assigned locations; establish and communicate emergency stop signal; stop operations if communications are lost.

3.11 Operator to observe wrap count and communicate that information with puller operator and Foreman. Both ends of this operation shall maintain continuous





Standard Reference


Page 5 of 9


other body parts caught between objects or in pinch points.

communication. 3.12 Maintain focus on task

being performed. Maintain communication regarding task being performed. Wear all necessary PPE.

4. Protect Conductor 4.1 Conductor gets damaged

4.2 Public

6 Mod/Risk 4.1 Observe line tension; observe rope-conductor-connection point as it goes through travelers; operators shall concentrate on line tension indications; maintain communication between ground crews and equipment operators; personnel stay clear of structures. Check travelers for proper function; keep conductor clear from rocks, brush, or other obstacles that could damage conductor.

4.2 Check all warning and information signs. Check for effectiveness of

4 Mod/Risk





Standard Reference


Page 6 of 9

channeling devices. Add or reconfigure channeling devices to accommodate the necessary level of public safety. Implement the use of a “Safety Watch” or “Flag Persons” as necessary to assist the public and prevent exposure to workplace hazards. Implement the use of barriers and/or barricades as necessary. Observe any low hanging wire or rope and make necessary adjustment to abate hazards to the public.

5. Secure Conductor 5.1 Conductor slips through grip.


6 Mod/Risk 5.1 Check grips size and verify the correct size for the conductor to which it is being applied. Check grip for functional effectiveness. Check grip for any damage and/or defects and make necessary corrections.

5.2 Maintain focus on task

4 Mod/Risk





Standard Reference


Page 7 of 9

other body parts caught/pinched between objects.


conductor. 5.4 Personnel struck by

equipment.

being performed. Maintain communication regarding task being performed. Wear all necessary PPE. Do not work/position personnel in the “bite” of any angles or areas of stored kinetic energy.

5.3 Personnel to avoid standing/working within the inside of any angle created by the conductor at either the pulling or payout ends of the “pull”.

5.4 Remain alert and focused at all times that work is ongoing. Maintain eye contact and communication with operators. Observe working/walking areas and remove/avoid obstacles. Ensure back-up alarms are functioning properly. Review worksite equipment backing procedures with





Standard Reference


Page 8 of 9

personnel prior to each shift.


Page 9 of 9


Document Description: JSA for Tension Stringing (General) Created by: H. McNeil Doc. Number: JSA 01.043 Date: Feb. 13, 2011 Revision #: 1 Date Revised: Dec. 4, 2015 Revised by: D. Stykalo


Page 1 of 5

Exp

osur

e

Hazard 1 2 3 4 5

1 1 2 3 4 5 2 2 4 6 8 10 3 3 6 9 12 15 4 4 8 12 16 20 5 5 10 15 20 25

1-3 Low Risk




4-6 Low /

Moderate Risk




Task / Activity



Standard Reference


1. Lay out travelers and P-line

1.1 Traffic, slips, trips and falls

3 Low/Risk a. Signs / cones b. Buddy systems * Significant Concerns:

Grounded travelers must be used at the first and last structure of the pull & at structures on either side of live line crossings.

2 Low/Risk

2. Hang travelers and P-line

2.1 Falling objects 2.2 Working at heights

8 High/Risk 2.1 Stay clear of tower 2.2 Full fall protection and

PPE, 100% tie off.


6 Mod/Risk

3. Pull hard line using dozer

3.1 Communication

8 High/Risk 3.1 Two-way radio, radio checks.

SWP 26.036 Grounding and

6 Mod/Risk

Document Description: JSA for Tension Stringing (General) Created by: H. McNeil Doc. Number: JSA 01.043 Date: Feb. 13, 2011 Revision #: 0 Date Revised: Revised by:




Standard Reference


Page 2 of 5

3.2 Loss of Load

3.3 Moving lines on the ground

3.4 Induction

3.2 Inspect connections and rigging.

3.3 Stay clear of spreader bar; stay clear of the bite.

3.4 Proper grounding must be used where required. EP zone must be set up around puller with barriers and grounding mats.

Bonding

4. Thread pull ropes through travelers

4.1 Falling debris

4.2 Slips, trips and falls

4.3 Body strains

4 Mod/Risk 4.1 Stand away from tower when pulling ropes.

4.2 Ensure debris is picked up.

4.3 Ensure proper body positioning.

SWP 26.043 Housekeeping SWP 26.050 Manual Lifting and Handling

3 Low/Risk

5. Grip hard line at slug sites

5.1 Rigging failure

5.2 Pinch points

5.3 Induction

8 High/Risk 5.1 Check grips for ice and debris. Inspect rated grips and slings.

5.2 Ensure proper body positioning. Rubber gloves must be used when handling the hard line.

5.3 Proper grounding must be used as required.


6 Mod/Risk

6. Load reels on stands and thread tensioner

6.1 Hoisting heavy loads

6.2 Moving equipment 6.3 Rigging failure

8 High/Risk 6.1 Proper rated rigging 6.2 Spotters 6.3 Tag lines

SWP 26 027 Spotter and Signaller

6 Mod/Risk





Standard Reference


Page 3 of 5

6.4 Induction 6.4 Proper grounding must be used where required. If reels are required to be changed out during a pull, the boom truck must be bonded into the EP Zone

Practice

7. Hook conductor to hard line

7.1 Rigging failure

7.2 Induction

8 High/Risk 7.1 Use and inspect proper rigging and connectors.

7.2 Inspect tools. Proper grounding must be used where required. EP zone must be set up around tensioner with barriers and grounding mats.


6 Mod/Risk

8. Pull conductor back to puller and grip

8.1 Communication failure

8.2 Personnel 8.3 Load limits

exceeded 8.4 Limits of Approach

(LoA)

6 Mod/Risk 8.1 Ensure communication, radio checks

8.2 Qualified personnel 8.3 Stay out of the bite 8.4 Ensure limits of

approach are reviewed and adhered to while performing work.

4 Mod/Risk

9. Splice / high energy joining, let up and sag

9.1 Blasting 9.2 Noise 9.3 Debris

8 High/Risk 9.1 Pre-blast warning, hearing protection, clear blasting area.

9.2 Hearing protection. 9.3 All vulnerable

6 Mod/Risk





Standard Reference


Page 4 of 5

9.4 Tension 9.5 Communication

failure 9.6 Working at heights 9.7 Induction

personnel and equipment in safe location.

9.4 Stay out of bite zone. 9.5 Radio checks, clear

communication. 9.6 Fall protection – 100%

tie off. 9.7 Rubber gloves to be

worn when handling wire for joining.

10. Tie in 10.1 Working at heights 10.2 Falling objects 10.3 Communication

with operator 10.4 Pinch points 10.5 Induction

8 High/Risk 10.1 Full fall protection, 100% tie off

10.2 All workers stay clear from fall zone.

10.3 Proper hand signals with operator.

10.4 Proper body positioning.

10.5 Proper grounding must be used where required.

* Significant Concerns: Ground boom truck to the tower. Bond the upper boom to the phase conductor being worked on. Skywire/OPGW is to be grounded as well.

6 Mod/Risk


Page 5 of 5


Document Description: JSA for Sagging Conductors and Sky Wires Created by: V. Vidakovic Doc. Number: JSA 01.044 Date: April 11, 2011 Revision #: 1 Date Revised: Dec. 4, 2015 Revised by: D. Stykalo


Page 1 of 7

Exp

osur

e

Hazard 1 2 3 4 5

1 1 2 3 4 5 2 2 4 6 8 10 3 3 6 9 12 15 4 4 8 12 16 20 5 5 10 15 20 25

1-3 Low Risk




4-6 Low /

Moderate Risk




Task / Activity



Standard Reference


1. Mobilization and Access to Site

1.1 Traffic 1.2 Congestion and

Right-of-Way Limits

4 Mod/Risk 1.1 Obey speed limits of the roads used. Four way flashers and pull to the side if needed while opening barriers. Flag persons and traffic control if required. Secure loads

1.2 Park clear out of work area. Only needed equipment parked in work area. Equipment and trucks to keep to designated roads and accesses. Communication between vehicles if


2 Low/Risk

Document Description: JSA for Sagging Conductors and Sky Wires Created by: V. Vidakovic Doc. Number: JSA 01.044 Date: April 11, 2011 Revision #: Date Revised: Revised by:




Standard Reference


Page 2 of 7

1.3 Existing Line

Structures

necessary. Wait at wide spots to meet other vehicles.

1.3 Ensure operators and crew are aware of overhead lines (limits of approach). Use Designated Signaler (spotter) if unsure of equipment proximity.


Traveling Speed ROW boundaries Equipment contact

with energized lines. 2. Set up equipment 2.1 Equipment failure 6 Mod/Risk 2.1 Qualified operators.

Daily inspections completed. Operated within the operating instructions of the unit. Dozer set up on hard ground. Be aware of site conditions. Sagging tension known. Man Lift set on level ground and radius known (if used).


Unauthorized use of equipment; Pulling capacity of dozer.


4 Mod/Risk





Standard Reference


Page 3 of 7

3. 3.1 Communication / Miscommunication


(working in vicinity of energized lines)

3.3 Rigging Failure

(sagging wire, single sheave)

3.4 Equipment Failure

8 High/Risk 3.1 Designated signal person. Continuous radio communication at all times during sagging. Communication with crew prior to starting.

3.2 No person is touching the dozer and other equipment. Running grounds to be installed. Limits of approach. Safety watch when in close proximity to utilities. Pulling away from the existing lines.

3.3 Rated and inspected rigging for the pull (sagging wire, sagging sheave). Sagging Tension of the section known. Hand line rope inspection prior to use. No one is standing below the wire being pulled.

3.4 Operator is monitoring path of pulling equipment Pads of man lift (if used) monitored No one is standing within range of the

SWP 26.027 Spotter and Signaller SWP 26.006 Crane and Rigging

6 Mod/Risk





Standard Reference


Page 4 of 7

3.5 Induction 3.6 Personnel Standing

in a Way of Wire Being Sagged

wire pulled 3.5 Equipment properly

grounded Running grounds installed during sagging Grounds installed onto the traveler at every 3km maximum

3.6 All personnel to stand clear from the wire being sagged and not standing in a bite.


Miscommunication Working in vicinity of energized lines Object falling from height Failure of sagging wire, sheave Induced current (especially within tie-in areas)

4. Climbing onto Tower/Moving within Tower

4.1 Falling from Height

8 High/Risk 4.1 Use double hook lanyard or other approved means of attachment, at all times once above 3 meters from the ground level. Proper PPE to be used at all times


6 Mod/Risk





Standard Reference


Page 5 of 7

(safety footwear to be in good condition, hard hat, gloves). Inspect Safety Harness every time prior climbing onto the tower. In wet weather conditions and if tower is slippery, use man lift for climbing onto the tower. Stop work if wind speed is over 10m/sec.


Slippery tower steel (climbing path for the lineman). Improper use of PPE (safety harness). Damaged PPE (safety harness, safety footwear). Note if using a crane basket, the revised load chart must be at the operator controls. Adverse weather conditions.

5. Clean up and Demobilize off the Site


4 Mod/Risk 5.1 Qualified operators and drivers. Back up beepers. Have signal person


3 Low/Risk





Standard Reference


Page 6 of 7

5.2 Site Conditions,

slips, trips, falls

directing equipment and trucks when backing up at tower locations.

5.2 Ensure all material, debris is picked up prior to moving equipment.


Backing up of equipment


Page 7 of 7


Document Description: JSA for Sagging and Dead-Ending Conductor Created by: H. McNeil Doc. Number: JSA 01.045 Date: Aug. 11, 2011 Revision #: 2 Date Revised: Dec. 4, 2015 Revised by: D. Stykalo


Page 1 of 12

Exp

osur

e

Hazard 1 2 3 4 5

1 1 2 3 4 5 2 2 4 6 8 10 3 3 6 9 12 15 4 4 8 12 16 20 5 5 10 15 20 25

1-3 Low Risk




4-6 Low /

Moderate Risk




Task / Activity



Standard Reference


1. Mobilize to site

1.1 Traffic

* Significant Concerns: Road conditions, time of day, weather check height of utilities

4 Mod/Risk 1.1 Pull equipment into access where possible. Four way flashers and pull to the side if needed while opening barriers. Flag persons and traffic control as required. Secure loads.


3 Low/Risk

2. Install Sag Boards 2.1 Falls from elevated position.

2.2 Over-tensioning

causing damage to

8 High/Risk 2.1 Maintain 100% connection to a fall arrest system while using aerial lifts.

2.2 Ensure proper sag has been derived from


6 Mod/Risk

Document Description: JSA for Sagging and Dead-Ending Conductor Created by: H. McNeil Doc.Number: JSA 01.045

Date: Aug. 11,2011 Revision#: 1 Date Revised: Revised by:


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference


Page 2 of 12

structures, structure members and/or anchoring devices.


Review JSA on climbing Poles or Towers

engineering specifications.

Check calculations regarding sag measurement technique – dynamometer, timing returns, or sagging sticks with targets.

3. Install Slack Dead End (Soft Side)

3.1 Hoist slips striking personnel.

3.2 Cuts from broken

glass on insulators.

3.3 Material and/or

tools falling on ground personnel.

6 Mod/Risk 3.1 Inspect and maintain hoists prior to use.

Keep handle in the “UP” position in order to lock it (keep it from ratcheting) and position hoist so that handle is away from worker.

3.2 Inspect insulators prior to lifting into work zone.

Wear work gloves and other necessary PPE.

Rig insulator string in such a manner that units do not strike structure or other objects that will cause breakage.

3.3 Secure step bolts, hand-lines, material bags, and other tools and material to be used aloft.

Do not throw items to the ground from the

Section 10 Personal Protective Equipment SWP 26.050 Manual Lifting and Handling

4 Mod Risk




Hazard Rating


Standard Reference


Page 3 of 12

3.4 Conductor slips

3.5 Strains & Sprains

due to overextension.

structure. Ground personnel

shall no stand directly under employees working aloft.

3.4 Check the grip size and verify the correct size for the conductor to which it is being applied.

Check grip for functional effectiveness.

Check grip for any damage and/or defects and make necessary corrections.

3.5 Keep proper body position; do not extend arms or legs beyond strength positions. Ask for assistance.

4. Sag Wire 4.1 Conductor slips in grip.

4 Mod/Risk 4.1 Check the grip size and verify the correct size for the conductor to which it is being applied.

Check grip for functional effectiveness. Check grip for any damage and/or defects and make necessary corrections.

4.2 Ensure proper sag has


3 Low/Risk




Hazard Rating


Standard Reference


Page 4 of 12

4.2 Excessive tension resulting in damage material structures, anchoring devices or structure members.

4.3 Conductor strikes

personnel.

4.4 Loss of

communication. 4.5 Hands, fingers and


4.6 Tools and/or

material falling on

been derived from engineering specifications.

Check calculations regarding sag measurement technique – dynamometer, timing returns, or sagging sticks with targets.

4.3 Personnel to avoid standing/working within the inside of any angle created by the conductor.

4.4 Confirm all radios function properly;

ensure that vehicles and equipment are at assigned locations;

Establish and communicate emergency stop signal;

Stop operations if communications are lost.

4.5 Keep hands/fingers clear of press head.

Linemen maintain eye contact and verbal

communications to actuate press head.

Wear all proper PPE. 4.6 Secure step bolts,

hand-lines, material




Hazard Rating


Standard Reference


Page 5 of 12

ground personnel. 4.7 Personnel fall from

pole / tower or crane basket.

4.8 Crane/man lift tips over.

bags, and other tools and material to be used aloft.

Do not throw items to the ground from the structure.

Ground personnel shall no stand directly under employees working aloft.

4.7 Maintain 100% connection to a fall arrest system while using aerial lifts.

4.8 Crane leveled. Outriggers fully extended; Proper stiff leg pads positioned under stiff legs. Crane operated within manufacturers’ load chart rating and safe radius work zone. Environmental factors considered per manufacturer specifications - i.e. high winds.

5. Adjust guys 5.1 Grip slips while re-tensioning guys.

4 Mod/Risk 5.1 Check the grip size and verify the correct size for the conductor to which it is being applied.

Check grip for

3 Low/Risk




Hazard Rating


Standard Reference


Page 6 of 12

5.2 Preform “releases”

and cuts/bruises soft tissue


other body parts caught between objects.

5.4 Strains and/or

sprains from overexertion.

functional effectiveness.


When using preforms ensure that preform has been fully installed (wrapped).

5.2 Check preforms for correct size.

Control ends while installing.

Check preform for damage/defects prior to use.

5.3 Keep hands/fingers clear of pinch points.

Linemen maintain eye contact and verbal communications to with one another.

Maintain focus on task at hand. Wear all proper PPE.

5.4 Keep proper body position.

Do not extend arms or legs beyond strength positions.

Ask for assistance. 6. Final Conductor Sag 6.1 Conductor slips.

8 High/Risk 6.1 Check the grip size and verify the correct size for the conductor to which it is being

6 Mod/Risk




Hazard Rating


Standard Reference


Page 7 of 12

6.2 Sag tension

exceeded. 6.3 Conductor strikes

personnel. 6.4 Loss of or poor

communication disrupting coordination of sagging operations.

applied. Check grip for

functional effectiveness.


Maintain tension within determined limits.

6.2 Check measurements for target placement, timing, or tension tables when using dynamometers.

Operator to maintain watch on pressure.

Assign a watch to observe conductor during sagging operations.


6.4 Confirm all radios function properly.

Ensure that vehicles and equipment are at assigned locations.

Establish and communicate emergency stop signal.

Stop operations if communications are




Hazard Rating


Standard Reference


Page 8 of 12


other body parts caught between objects.

6.6 Materials or tools

falling on ground personnel.

6.7 Personnel falling

from heights.

6.8 Crane/aerial lift tips

over.

lost. 6.5 Keep hands/fingers

clear of pinch points. Linemen maintain eye

contact and verbal communications to with one another.

Maintain focus on task at hand. Wear all proper PPE.

6.6 Secure step bolts, hand-lines, material bags, and other tools and material to be used aloft.




6.8 Crane leveled as required.

Outriggers fully extended.

Proper stiff leg pads positioned under stiff legs.

Crane operated within manufacturers’ load chart rating and safe radius work zone.




Hazard Rating


Standard Reference


Page 9 of 12

6.9 Slips, trips and falls.

All environmental factors considered per manufacturer specifications - i.e. high winds.

6.9 Ensure employees are wearing proper footwear.

Observe walkways and working surfaces for hazards and remove and/or avoid hazards.

7. Cutting in the Dead End

7.1 Conductor slips in the grip.

7.2 Sag tension

exceeded; equipment and/or material damaged; structures and/or structure members damaged.

8 High/Risk 7.1 Check the grip size and verify the correct size for the conductor to which it is being applied.

Check grip for functional effectiveness.

Check grip for any damage and/or defects and make necessary corrections. Maintain tension within determined limits.

7.2 Check measurements for target placement, timing, or tension tables when using dynamometers.

Operator to maintain watch on pressure.

Assign a watch to observe conductor

6 Mod/Risk




Hazard Rating


Standard Reference


Page 10 of 12

7.3 Conductor strikes

personnel.

7.4 Loss of

communication. 7.5 Hands, fingers and

other body parts caught in pinch points or crushing zones.

7.6 Material and/or

tools falling on ground personnel.

during sagging operations.


7.4 Confirm all radios function properly.

Ensure that vehicles and equipment are at assigned locations.

Establish and communicate emergency stop signal.

Stop operations if communications are lost.

7.5 Keep hands/fingers clear of pinch points.

Linemen maintain eye contact and verbal communications to with one another.

Maintain focus on task at hand.

Wear all proper PPE. 7.6 Secure step bolts,

hand-lines, material bags, and other tools and material to be used aloft.

Do not throw items to the ground from the




Hazard Rating


Standard Reference


Page 11 of 12

7.7 Personnel falling

form structures and/or aerial lifts.

7.8 Crane/aerial lift

turns over. 7.9 Conductor cut

short.

structure. Ground personnel

shall no stand directly under employees working aloft.



Outriggers fully extended.


Crane operated within manufacturers’ load chart rating and safe radius work zone.


7.9 Check required measurement for the insulator string specified at given structure.

Document Description: JSA for Sagging and Dead-Ending Conductor Created by: H. McNeil Doc. Number: JSA 01.045 Date: Aug. 11, 2011 Revision #: 1 Date Revised: Revised by:

Page 12 of 12


Document Description: JSA for Dead End Aloft Created by: V. Vidakovic Doc. Number: JSA 01.046 Date: April 13, 2011 Revision #: 1 Date Revised: Dec. 4, 2015 Revised by: D. Stykalo


Page 1 of 6

Exp

osur

e

Hazard 1 2 3 4 5

1 1 2 3 4 5 2 2 4 6 8 10 3 3 6 9 12 15 4 4 8 12 16 20 5 5 10 15 20 25

1-3 Low Risk




4-6 Low /

Moderate Risk




Task / Activity



Standard Reference



1.1 Traffic

1.2 Congestion and

Right-of-Way Limits

4 Mod/Risk 1.1 Obey speed limits of the roads used.

Four way flashers and pull to the side if needed while opening barriers.

Flag persons and traffic control if required.

Secure loads. 1.2 Park clear out of work

area. Only needed

equipment parked in work area.


3 Low/Risk

Document Description: JSA for Dead End Aloft Created by: V. Vidakovic Doc. Number: JSA 01.046 Date: April 13, 2011 Revision #: Date Revised: Revised by:




Standard Reference


Page 2 of 6

* Significant Concerns: Travelling Speed ROW boundaries

Equipment and trucks to keep to designated roads and accesses.

Communication between vehicles if necessary.

Wait at wide spots to meet other vehicles

2. Set up Equipment 2.1 Equipment Failure

2.2 Energized Circuits


Unauthorized use of equipment. Equipment contact with energized lines.

8 High/Risk 2.1 Qualified / experienced operators.

Daily inspections completed.

Operated within the operating instructions of the unit.


Crane set on level ground and pads secured.

2.2 No equipment positioned/parked close to energized circuits.

Crane-ground installed Crane-movement

radius known.

Section 9 Inspections-Monitoring SWP 26.036 Grounding and Bonding

6 Mod/Risk

3. Dead / Ending Aloft 3.1 Communication ground-lineman at the top of tower

8 High/Risk 3.1 Continuous hand- signal or radio communication at all times during operation.


6 Mod/Risk





Standard Reference


Page 3 of 6

3.2 Rigging Failure

(slings, chain hoist) 3.3 Equipment Failure 3.4 Induction * Significant Concerns:

Miscommunication Object falling from height Failure of sling wire/chain hoists Object falling from height Induced voltage

Communication with crew prior to starting

3.2 Rated and inspected rigging for the lifting (slings/ chain hoists).

Hand line rope inspection prior to use.

No one is standing below the load being lifted.

3.3 Pads of crane monitored during lifting of insulators.

No one is standing below the load.

3.4 Equipment properly grounded.

Temporary grounds installed between conductors and tower prior to start operation.

4. Installation of Implosive Sleeves

4.1 Transportation

4.2 Radio

communication

8 High/Risk 4.1 Driver trained-Transport of Dangerous Goods.

Implosive sleeves-in Day Box-at the back of the truck.

4.2 Detonators-in Type 6 Magazine, separated

6 Low/Risk





Standard Reference


Page 4 of 6

4.3 Flying / Falling

Materials During Blasting

* Significant Concerns: Explosive detonators Flying debris Injuries caused by blasing

from implosive sleeves & chained to the vehicle.

Clearance between implosive sleeves and steel sling minimum 16”(45cm).

Clearance between implosive sleeves and chain hoist minimum 24”(60cm).

Unused sleeves and/or detonators-returned to licensed magazine at the end of day.

4.3 Radios switched off when blasting.

Keep well clear/sufficient distance from the blast area during detonation (approx 150’).

Nylon slings are not to be used in rigging configuration.

No one on the tower or man lift during detonation.

Sound horn 3 times prior detonation.





Standard Reference


Page 5 of 6

5. Climbing onto Tower / Moving within Tower

5.1 Fall from Height

* Significant Concerns: Slippery tower steel (climbing path for the lineman) Improper use of PPE (safety harness) Damaged PPE (safety harness, safety footwear) Note if using a crane basket, the revised load chart must be at the operator controls Adverse weather conditions

8 High/Risk 5.1 Use double hook lanyard or other approved means of attachment, at all times once above 3 meters from the ground level.

Proper PPE to be used at all times (safety footwear to be in good condition, hard hat, gloves).

Inspect Safety Harness every time prior climbing onto the tower

In wet weather conditions and if tower is slippery, use man lift for climbing onto the tower

Stop work if wind speed is over 10m/sec


6 Mod/Risk


6.1 Equipment Collision / Site conditions


Back up of Equipment


Back up beepers. Have signal person



3 Low/Risk

Document Description: JSA for Dead End Aloft Created by: V. Vidakovic Doc. Number: JSA 01.046 Date: April 13, 2011 Revision #: 0 Date Revised: Revised by:

Page 6 of 6


Document Description: JSA for Installing Line Jumpers Created by: H. McNeil Doc. Number: JSA 01.047 Date: Aug. 11, 2011 Revision #: 2 Date Revised: Dec. 4, 2015 Revised by: D. Stykalo


Page 1 of 9

Exp

osur

e

Hazard 1 2 3 4 5

1 1 2 3 4 5 2 2 4 6 8 10 3 3 6 9 12 15 4 4 8 12 16 20 5 5 10 15 20 25

1-3 Low Risk




4-6 Low /

Moderate Risk




Task / Activity



Standard Reference


1. Mobilize to Site

1.1 Traffic Significant Concerns: Road conditions, time of day, weather, check height of utilities.

4 Mod/Risk 1.1 Pull equipment into accesses where possible.

Four-way flashers and pull to the side if needed while opening barriers.

Flag persons and traffic control as required.

Secure loads


3 Low/Risk

2. Job Assignments 2.1 Lack of communications could lead to improper personnel positioning.

4 Mod/Risk 2.1 Conduct Tailboard meeting.

Confirm communications to be used.

Confirm personnel

Section 6 Hazard Analysis

3 Low/Risk

Document Description: JSA for Installing Line Jumpers Created by: H. McNeil Doc. Number: JSA 01.047 Date: Aug. 11, 2011 Revision #: 1 Date Revised: Revised by:




Standard Reference


Page 2 of 9

2.2 Lack of skills exposes inexperienced or unqualified person to injury.

assigned locations and duties.

2.2 The supervisor assigns responsibilities according to experience, displayed skills and specific certifications.

3. Set up Aerial Lift 3.1 Falls from an elevated position.

3.2 Crane tips over or

becomes unstable.

3.3 Hydraulic hose

ruptures.

8 High/Risk 3.1 Maintain 100% connection to a fall arrest system while using aerial lifts.


Outriggers fully extended;


Crane operated within manufacturer’s load chart rating and safe radius work zone.


3.3 Inspect hose and fittings for leaks, wear or damage.



6 Mod/Risk





Standard Reference


Page 3 of 9

3.4 Equipment strikes

personnel or employees get caught in pinch points and/or crushing zones.

Establish the best work position possible to minimize exposure to high-pressure hydraulic system bursting failure.

3.4 Visually observe stiff legs making contact with pads.

Keep hands/fingers clear of pinch points;

Employees should maintain eye contact and verbal communications with one another.

Maintain focus on task at hand.

Wear all proper PPE.





Standard Reference


Page 4 of 9

4. Install Support Insulators

4.1 Hand / finger or other body part caught in press.

4.2 Sprains, Strains and

Overexertion.

4.3 Cuts and puncture

wounds.

4.4 Falls from elevated

position.

6 Mod/Risk 4.1 Keep hands/fingers clear of pinch points.

Linemen maintain eye contact and verbal communications when moving insulators into position.

Wear all proper PPE. 4.2 Keep proper body

position, do not extend arms or legs beyond strength positions.

Ask for assistance. 4.3 Wear work gloves and

all necessary PPE. Maintain

communications with other workers in the immediate area.



4 Mod/Risk

5. Measure Jumper Conductors

5.1 Material and/or tools falling on ground personnel.

6 Mod/Risk 5.1 Employees shall wear approved hard hats and other required PPE.

Secure step bolts,

4 Mod/Risk





Standard Reference


Page 5 of 9

5.2 Strains and sprains. 5.3 Cuts and

lacerations. 5.4 Falls from

elevations. 5.5 Slips and tripping.

handlines, material bags, and other tools and material to be used aloft.



5.2 Keep proper body position, do not extend arms or legs beyond strength positions.

Ask for assistance. 5.3 Wear work gloves and

all necessary PPE. Maintain

communications with other workers in the immediate area.

5.4 Review JSA on climbing wood & steel poles.

Maintain 100% connection to a fall arrest system while using aerial lifts.

5.5 Ensure employees are wearing proper footwear.

Observe walkways and working surfaces for hazards and remove and/or avoid





Standard Reference


Page 6 of 9

hazards.

6. Cut Conductor and Press Jumper Terminals

6.1 Hydraulic failure in press motor/press head system.

6.2 Hand, fingers or

other body parts caught in press head.

6.3 Fire or burns from

press motor.

6.4 Sprains and strains

from overexertion

6 Mod/Risk 6.1 Inspect hose and fittings for leaks, wear or damage.


Establish the best work position possible to minimize exposure to high-pressure hydraulic system bursting failure.

6.2 Keep hands/fingers clear of press head.

Linemen maintain eye contact and verbal communications to actuate press head.

Wear all proper PPE. 6.3 Position press motor to

establish best work area that minimizes exposure to burns from a potential fire.

Maintain an active fire extinguisher of the proper class in the basket or on the structure.



4 Mod/Risk





Standard Reference


Page 7 of 9

Ask for assistance. 7. Hang Jumpers 7.1 Falling objects

7.2 Strains, sprains due

to overexertion

8 High/Risk 7.1 Employees shall wear approved hard hats and other required PPE.

Secure step bolts, handlines, material bags, and other tools and material to be used aloft.




Ask for assistance.

6 Mod/Risk

8 Hanging the hook ladder (when using hook ladder)

8.1 Slips and/or trips. 8.2 Personnel caught

between objects and/or backed over by equipment.

6 Mod/Risk 8.1 Ensure employees are wearing proper footwear.

Observe walkways and working surfaces for hazards and remove and/or avoid hazards.

8.2 Drivers and ground personnel to be alert to equipment movement.

Back up alarms shall

SWP 26.043 Housekeeping SWP 26 027 Spotter and Signaller

4 Mod/Risk





Standard Reference


Page 8 of 9

8.3 Ladder falls. 8.4 Lineman falls from

ladder. 8.5 Ladder fails.

be functional. Operators shall be

aware of all operations in the work zone.

A safety watch for backing operations should be assigned as necessary.

8.3 Inspect hoisting/rigging equipment prior to raising the ladder.

Inspect the ladder and attachments prior to raising the ladder.

Secure ladder properly using ladder hoods and safety chains.

8.4 Utilize a retractable lanyard with an anchorage on the structure and the personnel attachment to an approved full body harness D-ring.

8.5 Ensure ladder is free of damage or defects; ensure ladder is approved for load and horizontal use.


Page 9 of 9


Document Description: JSA for Tie in Tangent (Clamping in) Created by: V. Vidakovic Doc. Number: JSA 01.048 Date: April 11, 2011 Revision #: 1 Date Revised: Dec. 4, 2015 Revised by: D. Stykalo


Page 1 of 5

Exp

osur

e

Hazard 1 2 3 4 5

1 1 2 3 4 5 2 2 4 6 8 10 3 3 6 9 12 15 4 4 8 12 16 20 5 5 10 15 20 25

1-3 Low Risk




4-6 Low /

Moderate Risk




Task / Activity



Standard Reference



1.1 Traffic

1.2 Congestion and Right-of-Way Limits

4 Mod/Risk 1.1 Obey speed limits of the roads used.

Four way flashers and pull to the side if needed while opening barriers.

Flag persons and traffic control if required.

Secure loads 1.2 Park clear out of work

area. Only needed

equipment parked in work area.

Equipment and trucks to keep to designated


3 Low/Risk

Document Description: JSA for Tie in Tangent (Clamping in) Created by: V. Vidakovic Doc. Number: JSA 01.048 Date: April 11, 2011 Revision #: 0 Date Revised: Revised by:




Standard Reference


Page 2 of 5

* Significant Concerns: Travelling Speed ROW boundaries

roads and accesses. Communication

between vehicles if necessary.

Wait at wide spots to meet other vehicles.

2. Set up Equipment 2.1 Equipment failure

2.2 Energized Circuits * Significant Concerns:

Unauthorized use of equipment. Equipment contact with energized lines.

8 High/Risk 2.1 Qualified / experienced operators.

Daily inspections completed.

Operated within the operating instructions of the unit.


Man Lift set on level ground and radius known (if used).

2.2 No equipment positioned/parked close to energized circuits.


6 Mod/Risk





Standard Reference


Page 3 of 5

3. Tie in (Clamping operation)

3.1 Communication ground->lineman at the top of tower

3.2 Rigging Failure

(chain hoists, shoes with slings, capstan on crew truck)

3.3 Induction * Significant Concerns:

Miscommunication Object falling from height Failure of chain hoist, sling wire, shoes, capstan Induced current

8 High/Risk 3.1 Continuous radio communication at all time during clamping.

Communication with crew prior to starting

3.2 Rated and inspected rigging for the lifting (chain hoists, slings, shoes).

Lifting Tension of the wire known.

Hand-line rope inspection prior to use.

No one is standing below the wire being clamped in.

3.3 Equipment properly grounded.

Temporary grounds installed during clamping

Grounds installed onto the travelers at every 3km. maximum (ahead of clamping in).

SWP 26.006 Crane and Rigging SWP 26.036 Grounding and Bonding

6 Mod/risk

4. Climbing onto Tower / Moving within Tower

4.1 Fall from Height

8 High/Risk 4.1 Use double hook lanyard or other approved means of attachment, at all


6 Mod/Risk





Standard Reference


Page 4 of 5

* Significant Concerns: Slippery tower steel (climbing path for the lineman) Improper use of PPE (safety harness) Damaged PPE (safety harness, safety footwear) Note if using a crane basket, the revised load chart must be at the operator controls Adverse weather conditions

times once above 3 meters from the ground level.

Proper PPE to be used at all times (safety footwear to be in good condition, hard hat, gloves).

Inspect Safety Harness every time prior climbing onto the tower.

In wet weather conditions and if tower is slippery, use man lift for climbing onto the tower.

Stop work if wind speed is over 10m/sec.

Lineman to move within tower using double lanyard technique.


5.1 Equipment Collision / Site conditions


Backup of Equipment





2 Low/Risk


Page 5 of 5


Document Description: JSA for Installing Spacer Dampers Created by: H. McNeil Doc. Number: JSA 01.049 Date: July 26, 2011 Revision #: 1 Date Revised: Dec. 4, 2015 Revised by: D. Stykalo


Page 1 of 7

Exp

osur

e

Hazard 1 2 3 4 5

1 1 2 3 4 5 2 2 4 6 8 10 3 3 6 9 12 15 4 4 8 12 16 20 5 5 10 15 20 25

1-3 Low Risk




4-6 Low /

Moderate Risk




Task / Activity



Standard Reference


1. Transporting carts to worksite

1.1 Equipment damage to pulley

3 Low/Risk 1.1 Carts tied to a vehicle upright with wheels.

2 Low/Risk

2. Cart inspection at work site or prior to use

2.1 Equipment damage or repairs / Unsafe equipment

3 Low/Risk 2.1 Inspection of: Pulley wheels for wear or cracks. If cracked, no use. Safety clips function properly. If defective, replace. Main welds on rails & cart frame. No use if defects, effect certified repairs. All bolts tight, torqued, if not, effect repairs or replacement by engineering specs.


2 Low/Risk

Document Description: JSA for Installing Spacer Dampers Created by: H. McNeil Doc. Number: JSA 01.049 Date: July 26, 2011 Revision #: 0 Date Revised: Revised by:




Standard Reference


Page 2 of 7

3. Equipment selection and inspection

3.1 Defective equipment

3.2 Wear or Damage 3.3 Forgetting

Equipment

3 Low/Risk 3.1 Inspection of: Fall arrest system and harness inspected up to date and daily. Double lanyards installed correctly for support. Rescue rope (min 75’) attached securely to cart. 15’ brake rope ½” or 5/8” attached secured in cart. Cloth bag secured for small tools. Tether strap for portable tools. Radio checks for designated radio on crew for communication or emergency. Engineering specs in vehicle at site.

2 Low/Risk

4. Transporting cart from ground to conductor location via boom trucks

4.1 Job communication not covered

4.2 Unstable load

4.3 Overloading 4.4 Improper rigging

8 High/Risk 4.1 Morning meeting to include working location.

4.2 Boom trucks set up with out-rigger pads.

4.3 Swing and radius within chart for equipment.

4.4 Cart attached by proper rope or rigging for approx 42-50lbs cart weight.

Section 6 Hazard Analysis

6 Mod/Risk





Standard Reference


Page 3 of 7

4.5 Falling material 4.6 No control of lift

zone 4.7 Lack of signals

4.8 Falls from elevation

4.5 Lift area clear using ground man

4.6 Workers in basket to signal for lift.

4.7 Lost signals, operator STOPS.

4.8 Basket workers 100% tie-off as per basket procedure.

5. Attaching cart to conductor

5.1 Falling material 5.2 Pinch points

5.3 Heavy loads

8 High/Risk 5.1 Cart to remain secured to boom basket or rigging lines till pulleys and safety clips attached.

5.2 Hands clear of pinch point between basket and cart Use Gloves.

5.3 Two men used in basket.

6 Mod/Risk

6. Workers transfer from boom-truck basket to cart

6.1 Fall

6.2 Distance beyond working length of double lanyards.

6.3 Hard hat blocking view

6.4 Not following procedure

8 High/Risk 6.1 100% tie-off using double lanyard system.

6.2 Conductor tie off exceeds 5000lbs as per procedures.

6.3 Tie-off point is conductor only

6.4 Chin-strap for operators.

6.5 Basket and cart must be less than 1’ apart and rope used for safety.


6 Mod/Risk





Standard Reference


Page 4 of 7

7. Removal of basket from cart area

7.1 Miscommunication 7.2 Basket strikes cart 7.3 Hand pinches

7.1 Forman in attendance. 7.2 Signal-man in basket

to call direction to swing or boom down.

7.3 Cart operator establishes conductor brake.


8. Loading spacers on cart via boom-truck basket or hand-line

8.1 Overloading cart 8.2 Falling material

8.3 Hand pinch

6 Mod/Risk 8.1 Using hooks to hang spacers.

8.2 Unit to handle span spacers (6) [approx 15 lbs each maximum with hardware.

8.3 Ground-man clears area below.

8.4 Hand-line to ground to hoist additional spacers as required.

4 Mod/Risk

9. Installing spacers and traveling on conductor

9.1 Pinch points at pulleys

9.2 Friction on hands 9.3 Uncontrolled cart

movement

6 Mod/Risk 9.1 Gloves and spare-gloves to be available.

9.2 Brake rope used in front of cart on conductor attached to insulators.

9.3 Rope available to anchor cart.


4 Mod/Risk

10. Pulling carts via vehicle (if required)

10.1 Uncontrolled speed 10.2 Miscommunication 10.3 Lack of signal-man

10.4 Rope attachment to basket unstable

6 Mod/Risk 10.1 Slow speed only. 10.2 Radio communication. 10.3 Extra ground-man

assigned. 10.4 Rope connected to

mid rail only, no connection to pulley

4 Mod/Risk





Standard Reference


Page 5 of 7

arms. 11. Installing spacers with

hand tools or impact tools

11.1 Falling material

11.2 Falling tools

4 Mod/Risk 11.1 Work area clear below.

11.2 Impact gun on tether. 11.3 Hand tools in cloth

bucket.

SWP 26.025 Use of Hand Tools

3 Low/Risk

12. Operator leaving the cart

12.1 Fall potential

12.2 Pinch points

12.3 Collisions 12.4 Cart movement

8 High/Risk 12.1 Boom truck basket signals to cart location.

12.2 Cart secured for transfer.

12.3 Double lanyard system when leaving cart to basket.

6 Mod/Risk

13. All steps rescue plan 13.1 Poor communication

13.2 Time factor for man

in harness

13.3 Availability of medical services

13.4 Retrieval of equipment

8 High/Risk 13.1 Cart secured to conductor or insulator overweight.

13.2 EMT notified and positioned near work area.at morning meeting

13.3 Morning meeting will notify who is to respond to a help call. 4 men (operator, 3 lineman/operator)

13.4 Boom trucks positioned, complete with outrigger portable pads.

13.5 Muskeg area boom-trucks have extra-large outriggers (Nodwell

Section 12 Emergency Preparedness Policy

6 Mod/Risk





Standard Reference


Page 6 of 7

boom can be available).

13.6 Emergency rescue rope hung on cart for operator use.

13.7 Ground-man signals via radio for assistance and team mobility.

13.8 Calls to 780-748-1911 and location relayed to local EMT for assistance anytime rescue is called.

13.9 Supervisor to clear ROW of obstructions via radio for possible transport off site.


Page 7 of 7


Page 1 of 4

Document Description: JSA for Conductor Removal Created by: M. Felczak Doc. Number: JSA 01.052 Date: May 1, 2011 Revision #: 2 Date Revised: May 11, 2017 Revised by: Mitch MacKenzie


Potential (source of) Hazard Recommended Loss Standard Post Mitigation Task / Activity Loss/Hazard Rating Prevention Barriers Reference Rating

1. Travel to

Jobsite 1.1 Road cond./weather 1.2 Traffic

1.3 Defective/Faulty Equip.

3 Low/Risk 10 High/Risk 10 High/Risk

1.1 Preplan routes. Check weather. Drive according to road conditions.

1.2 Obey traffic laws. Check weather reports. Preplan routes. Drive to road conditions. Drive defensively.

1.3 Do vehicle/equipment walk around and checklist prior to use.

SWP 26.013 Use of Company Vehicle SWP.26.001 Defective Tools

1 Low/Risk 2 Low/Risk 2 Low/Risk

Expo

sure

Hazard 1 2 3 4 5 1 1 2 3 4 5 2 2 4 6 8 10 3 3 6 9 12 15 4 4 8 12 16 20 5 5 10 15 20 25

1-3 Low Risk


4-6 Low /

Modera te Risk




12-25 Unaccept able Risk


Page 2 of 4

Document Description: JSA for Conductor Removal Created by: M. Felczak Doc. Number: JSA 01.052 Date: May 1, 2011 Revision #: 1 Date Revised:

May 11, 2017 Revised by:

Mitch MacKenzie

Task / Activity Potential (source of) Hazard Recommended Loss Standard Post Mitigation Loss/Hazard Rating Prevention Barriers Reference Rating 2. Inspect Tools and

Rigging 2.1 Defective/damaged

tools or rigging.

2.2 Tripping Hazards

3 Low/Risk 8 Mod/Risk

2.1 Inspect all tools and rigging prior to use. Tag and remove damaged item.

2.2 Keep area clear to reduce hazard.

SWP# 26.043 Housekeeping

1 Low/Risk 2 Low/Risk

3. Operating Equipment 3.1 Heavy equipment

3.2 Congestion

3.3 Induction

3.4 Aerial Work

3.5 Crush Points 3.6 Inadequate Tension

4 Mod/Risk 6 Mod/Risk 12 High/Risk 12 High/Risk

10 High/Risk 10 High/Risk

3.1 Qualified competent operators and spotters to be used when operating equipment. Inspect equipment daily before using.

3.2 Use laydown area outside of immediate work area and practice good housekeeping. Use spotter.

3.3 Use proper bonding and grounding techniques. Maintain limits of approach.

3.4 Identify drop zone. 100% tie-off of all workers, tools and material while aloft. Inspect all harness, tools and material before leaving the ground. Always position the basket out of the bite.

3.5 Stay clear of the bite, position hands and body clear from the line of fire. Identify line of fire hazard. Watch out for eachother in man basket.

3.6 Maintain tension of the conductor when gripping to install or cut. Good communication with everyone.

SWP# 26.027 Spotter and Signaler

SWP# 25.036 Grounding & Bonding SWP# 26.077 Control Drop Zone Safe Working Procedure for conductor removal on 739L-1 138kv

2 Low/Risk 2 Low/Risk 2 Low/Risk 2 Low/Risk 2 Low/Risk 2 Low/Risk

Page 3 of 4

Document Description: JSA for Conductor Removal Created by: M. Felczak Doc. Number: JSA 01.0111 Date: May 1, 2011 Revision #: 1 Date Revised:

May 11, 2017 Revised by:

Mitch MacKenzie

Task / Activity Potential (source of) Hazard Recommended Loss Standard Post Mitigation Loss/Hazard Rating Prevention Barriers Reference Rating

4. De-Mobilize 4.1 Tripping hazards


4.3 Removing leftover material

3 Low/Risk 10 High/Risk 6 Mod/Risk

4.1 Clear area of debris and any unused material when task is complete.

4.2 Use caution - have spotters when moving equipment.

4.3 Use caution, plan route before moving. Use correct tools for the job.

SWP# 26.043 Housekeeping SWP# 26.027 Spotter and Signaler SWP# 26.025 Use of Hand Tool SWP#26.050 Manual Lifting


2 Low/Risk

Page 4 of 4

Document Description: JSA for Conductor Removal Created by: M. Felczak Doc. Number: JSA 01.0111

Date: May 1, 2011 Revision #: 1 Date Revised: May 11, 2017

Revised by: Mitch MacKenzie


Document Description: JSA for Anchor Pull Testing Created by: H. McNeil Doc. Number: JSA 01.055 Date: Jan. 15, 2011 Revision #: 1 Date Revised: March 18, 2017 Revised by: Mitch MacKenzie


Page 1 of 4

Exp

osur

e

Hazard 1 2 3 4 5

1 1 2 3 4 5 2 2 4 6 8 10 3 3 6 9 12 15 4 4 8 12 16 20 5 5 10 15 20 25

1-3 Low Risk


8-10



4-6 Low / Moderate

Risk




Task / Activity


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference


1. Position anchor tester over top of anchor to be tested.

1.1 Positioning on side hill. 1.2 Crane, digger set up. 1.3 Suspended loads. 1.4 Moving Equipment

3 Low/Risk 3 Low/Risk 6 Mod/Risk 4 Mod/Risk

1.1 Use extra caution when placing equipment on side hill. Place stops on lower side of equipment to control movement if required. Use truck boom to lift into place. 1.2 Ensure level set up, outrigger pads, crane radius and boom angle. Use proper rigging. Competent operator required. 1.3 Stay clear of suspended loads, use tag line if required to position over anchor. 1.4 Use a spotter when moving equipment to testing position. Clear area of obstructions and identify all anchors.

SWP 26.027 Spotter and Signaler

1 Low/Risk 1 Low/Risk 2 Low/Risk 2 Low/Risk

Document Description: JSA for Anchor Pull Testing Created by: H. McNeil Doc. Number: JSA 01.055 Date: Jan. 15, 2011 Revision #: 1 Date Revised: May 18, 2017 Revised by: Mitch MacKenzie




Standard Reference


Page 2 of 4

* Significant Concerns Be aware of Tower Foundation Location.

2. Lower anchor tester to ground on top of anchor to be tested.

2.1 Pinch points 2.2 uneven ground 2.3 Suspended loads

4 Mod/Risk 3 Low/Risk 8 Mod/Risk

2.1 Use caution Lowering to ground. Keep fingers, toes out of pinch points, ensure proper body positioning. 2.2 Ensure proper footing on uneven ground. 2.3 Stay clear of suspended loads.


3. Attach anchor tester to the anchor. Mark anchor rod at ground level with felt pen.

3.1 Slips, trips and falls 3.2 Heavy lifting 3.3 Pinch points

3 Low/Risk 4 Mod/Risk 4 Mod/Risk

3.1 Watch footing and ground conditions. 3.2 Use proper lifting techniques and adequate manpower. 3.3 Wear Gloves, keep fingers, toes out of pinch points.







Standard Reference


Page 3 of 4

4. Tension Anchor *Slowly increase pressure to the required pull test tension using the anchor tester pressure gauge and anchor tester chart.

4.1 Pinch points 4.2 Rigging Failure 4.3 Anchor Failure

5 Mod/Risk 5 Mod/Risk 5 Mod/Risk

4.1 Ensure proper body positioning. 4.2 Inspect rigging prior to each use. 4.3 Stand behind the anchor while tension is being applied.



5. Once tension is reached hold for 2 – 3 minutes. Release tension when pull test is completed.

5.1 Rigging/Anchor Failure

5 Mod/Risk 5.1 Continue to remain at a safe distance from anchor tester. Stay out of bite.

3 Low/Risk

6. Remove rigging from anchor. Attach lifting sling and remove tester from anchor. Clean up area.

6.1 Slips, trips and falls 6.2 Heavy lifting (pulls, strains, sprains)


6.1 Watch footing and ground conditions. 6.2 Use adequate manpower.



Page 4 of 4

NAME (print) INITIAL DATE (dd/mm/yy) COMPANY

Document Description: JSA for Tower Material Hauling Created by: B. Szumik Doc. Number: JSA 01.058 Date: July 15, 2010 Revision #: 2 Date Revised: May 11, 2017 Revised by: Mitch MacKenzie

Page 1 of 7



Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation



1.2 Soft ground – tipping front end loader.

1.3 Other vehicular/personnel traffic – striking vehicles/personnel


1.1 Designated Signaler if near overhead lines.







4 Mod/Risk

2.1 Check weight of bundle to ensure not over the lift

SWP 26.006 Crane and

2 Low/Risk

Exp

osur

e

Hazard

1 2 3 4 5 1 1 2 3 4 5 2 2 4 6 8 10 3 3 6 9 12 15 4 4 8 12 16 20 5 5 10 15 20 25

1-3 Low Risk




4-6 Low /

Moderate Risk


12-25 Unaccepta

ble Risk



Page 2 of 7


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 2.2 Steel bundle falling 2.3 Striking vehicles or


steel bundles

2.5 Slipping, tripping,

falls

4 Mod/Risk 4 Mod/Risk 4 Mod/Risk 4 Mod/Risk

capacity of front end loader.



not under; use taglines if necessary. Ensure area clear of others. If high traffic area get workers to flag.

2.4 Position steel bundles on

blocking and ensure bundles are secure so as not to slide or tip over. Ensure hold downs are of sufficient strength and quantity to secure load.


tripping slipping hazards.



Check load chart capacity of front end loader against largest bundle weight to be

Rigging DOT Regs

2 Low/Risk 2 Low/Risk 2 Low/Risk 2 Low/Risk


Page 3 of 7


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating lifted. Do not over load trailer. Check capacity of trailer.

3. Travel to unloading site.



restrictions


3.1 Be wary of other drivers. Traffic control may be necessary at some location.


3.3 Check for any road

restrictions or if special permits required. Determine beforehand if there are any restriction or other work activity which may impede travel.












Page 4 of 7


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating Position trailer unit as

close as possible to steel bundles to minimize travel distance of front end loader. Ideally steel was positioned in an area away from overhead lines and on good ground.

5. Clean up area 5.1 Overhead hazards -electrical



5.4 Striking vehicles or


steel bundles

5 Mod/Risk 5 Mod/Risk 5 Mod/Risk 5 Mod/Risk 5 Mod/Risk




bundles so bundles do not come apart.


not under, use taglines if necessary.

5.5 Position steel bundles on blocking on the ground and ensure bundles are secure so as not to slide or tip

3 Low/Risk 3 Low/Risk 3 Low/Risk 3 Low/Risk 3 Low/Risk


Page 5 of 7


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating over.




Page 6 of 7



Page 7 of 7

Document Description: JSA for Receiving Tower Steel Created by: B. Szumik Doc. Number: JSA 01.059 Date: July 28, 2010 Revision #: 2 Date Revised: May 11, 2017 Revised by: Mitch MacKenzie

Page 1 of 6



Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation







1.2 Move trailer away from

soft ground. 1.3 If needed barrier area or



Position trailer unit as close as possible to lay down area to minimize travel distance of front



Exp

osur

e

Hazard

1 2 3 4 5 1 1 2 3 4 5 2 2 4 6 8 10 3 3 6 9 12 15 4 4 8 12 16 20 5 5 10 15 20 25

1-3 Low Risk




4-6 Low /

Moderate Risk


12-25 Unaccepta

ble Risk



Page 2 of 6


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating end loader. Ideally steel was positioned in an area away from overhead lines and on good ground.

2. Releasing steel bundles

2.1 Falling off trailer 2.2 Sudden tensioned

release of tie-down equipment


2.1 Use ladder to climb onto trailer and if needed to climb onto load. Watch for footing. Maintain 3 point contact.

2.2 Avoid bite when releasing loads. If bear trap used, use a controlled release. If steel banded, may have to use heavy gloves and face shield as banding may explode out .

* Significant Concerns: Be aware that the load will be under tension and will have shifted while being transported


3. Unload trailer 3.1 Front end loader tipping


4 Mod/Risk 4 Mod/Risk






Page 3 of 6


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 3.3 Striking vehicles or


steel bundles 3.5 Slipping, tripping,

falls


3.3 Workers clear of load, not under, use taglines if necessary. Ensure area clear of others. If high traffic area get workers to flag.

3.4 Position steel bundles on blocking and ensure bundles are secure so as not to slide or tip over.


tripping slipping hazards. 3.6 Ensure blocking is of

sufficient strength and quantity to keep steel off of ground and to ease future loading.



Check load chart capacity of front end loader against largest bundle weight to be lifted.



Page 4 of 6


Page 5 of 6



Page 6 of 6

Document Description: JSA for Tower Erection Created by: B. Szumik Doc. Number: JSA 01.063 Date: Jan. 4, 2010 Revision #: 2 Date Revised April 30, 2017 Revised by: M. MacKenzie


Page 1 of 9

Exp

osur

e

Hazard 1 2 3 4 5

1 1 2 3 4 5 2 2 4 6 8 10 3 3 6 9 12 15 4 4 8 12 16 20 5 5 10 15 20 25

1-3 Low Risk




4-6 Low /

Moderate Risk




Task / Activity



Standard Reference


1. Mobilize to site




2 Low/Risk

2. Access site 2.1 Congested and right-away limits.

2.2 Existing line structures

5 Mod/Risk 2.1 Park clear of work area. Only needed equipment placed in work area.

2.2 Ensure Operators and crew are aware of overhead lines (limits of approach); use Designated Signaler (spotter) if unsure of equipment proximity. Equipment and trucks to keep to designated

4 Mod/Risk

Document Description: JSA for Tower Erection Created by: B. Szumik Doc. Number: JSA 01.063 Date: B. Szumik Revision #: 2 Date Revised: April 30, 2017 Revised by: M. MacKenzie




Standard Reference


Page 2 of 9

roads and accesses. Communication between vehicles if necessary. Wait at wide spots to meet other vehicles.

* Significant Concerns: Equipment contact;


3. Set up equipment 3.1 Equipment failure 3.2 Strains / sprains

8 Mod/High 6 Mod/Risk

3.1 Qualified operators; Daily inspections




Crane pad sufficient to support unit;

3.2 Be aware of site conditions;

Pads for man lift level; Radius of lift known; Three point contact; Climb all the way to

the ground; Look at ground

conditions before you dismount.

Section 9 Inspections-Monitoring SWP 26.050 Manual Lifting and Handling

6 Mod/Risk 3 Low/Risk

4. Rig Lift 4.1 Rigging Failure

8 Mod/High 4.1 Rated and inspected rigging for the lift.

Softeners used if needed.

Steel slings choked


6 Mod/Risk





Standard Reference


Page 3 of 9

around members. Weight of the loads

calculated. Weights

predetermined. 5. Attach cranes to load 5.1 Communication



5.1 Designated signal person.

Line of site between operators and signal person.


5.2 No person is touching the crane or outriggers.

Ground probe and chain.

Limits of approach Safety watch when in

close proximity to utilities.

Lift loads away from the existing ROW.

Weather conditions monitored.

SWP 26.027 Spotter and Signaler Practice






Standard Reference


Page 4 of 9

6. Hoist load with two cranes

6.1 Two machine pick


6.3 Falling materials

8 Mod/Risk 8 Mod/High 8 Mod/High

6.1 Operators only take signals from designated signal person. Qualified operators. Extra spotter in place if needed. LMI monitored in crane as load transfer takes place. Line of site with signal person is maintained. Maintain clearances (limits of approach) Tag lines to control loads. Operator is watching signal person. Anyone can stop a lift in an emergency. Picks and crane capacities are predetermined.

6.2 All lift exciding 75% of cranes capacity will require a lift study. Operator is monitoring outrigger pads(compression) Large enough pads for ground conditions

6.3 No one is in the fall zone of panel being hoisted.

Load will be inspected prior to lift

SWP 26.027 Spotter and Signaler Practice SWP 26.077 Controlling & Maintaining






Standard Reference


Page 5 of 9

Hardware will be tied to the structure. Crew will not be under the load.

Drop Zones

7. Disconnect tailing crane

7.1 Working under load

7.2 Equipment moving

8 Mod/High 8 Mod/High

7.1 Only crew needed to perform the task go into the zone.

7.2 Operators are aware of crews work Operator only takes direction from the signal person Signal person is the only one who directs the operator. Tailing crane is unhooked and swung clear of the lift Unneeded equipment is parked clear of the site.

SWP 26.027 Spotter and Signaler Practice SWP 26.077 Controlling & Maintaining Drop Zones


8. Crew accepting tower 8.1. Electrical

8 Mod/High

8.1. Ground chain will be used to bleed off induction from the lift prior to touching by hand.


6 Mod/Risk





Standard Reference


Page 6 of 9

8.2. Falling from aloft 8.3. Pinch points

8.4. Falling tools

8.5. Strains

6 Mod/Risk 6 Mod/Risk 8 Mod/High 6 Mod/Risk

Rated and inspected tools (hotstick, gloves, ground chain).

8.2. 100% fall arrest. Qualified people for the task. Lanyards and harnesses inspected. One person in the air is directing the crane. Crew is aware of signal person’s intensions.

8.3. Proper tools for the job (drifts, spuds, hammers).

8.4. No one is below the tower. Nose bags in the tower for holding extra tools.

8.5. Proper positioning while working. Use correct tools for the task at hand. Keep hydrated. Use electric tools to help on task.

SWP 26.028 Fall Protection SWP 26.077 Controlling & Maintaining Drop Zones SWP 26.050 Manual Lifting and Handling

3 Low/Risk 3 Low/Risk 4 Mod/Risk 3 Low/Risk

9. Tighten bolts 9.1. Tool failure

6 Mod/Risk

9.1. Inspection of tool. Safety glasses worn. Tag out and give to Foreman if defective. Proper tool for the job. Inspection of

SWP 26.001 Defective Tools

4 Mod/Risk





Standard Reference


Page 7 of 9

9.2. Electrical 9.3. Noise


tools and electrical equipment.

9.2. GFCI breakers on the power source. Tag defective or worn equipment. Be aware of weather conditions.

9.3. Hearing protection worn. Make the crew aware of task


10. Disconnect Rigging 10.1. Communication 10.2. Falling from aloft


10.1. Clear hand signals to operators. Ensure crew below is aware of your actions.

10.2. 100% fall arrest; Softeners tied up if they are being used; Unhooked rigging sent down with the hook.



11. Crew Descends Tower 11.1. Falling from aloft 11.2. Falling tools

8 High/Risk 11.1. Experienced persons. Three point contact.

11.2. Fall zone below is clear. Extra tools sent down in nose bags.

SWP 26.077 Controlling & Maintaining Drop Zones

6 Mod/Risk


12.1. Equipment Collision

12.2. Site conditions


12.1. Qualified operators and drivers; Back up beepers; Have signal person directing equipment.

12.2. Pile left over materials in one location; Mark

SWP 26.027 Spotter and Signaler Practice SWP 26.043






Standard Reference


Page 8 of 9

materials if necessary. Trucks and light duty equipment is moved from site prior to demobilizing the crane.

Housekeeping


Page 9 of 9


Document Description: JSA for Tower Panel Erection to the Bend Created by: B. Szumik Doc. Number: JSA 01.064 Date: July 27, 2010 Revision #: 2 Date Revised: April 30, 2017 Revised by: M. MacKenzie

Page 1 of 9



Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation


1.1 Traffic 4 Mod/Risk 1.1 Pull equipment into accesses where possible Four way flashers and pull to the side if needed while opening barriers. Flag persons and traffic control as required Secure loads



2 Low/Risk

Exp

osur

e

Hazard

1 2 3 4 5 1 1 2 3 4 5 2 2 4 6 8 10 3 3 6 9 12 15 4 4 8 12 16 20 5 5 10 15 20 25

1-3 Low Risk




4-6 Low /

Moderate Risk


12-25 Unaccepta

ble Risk



Page 2 of 9


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation


away limits

2.2 Existing line

structures (240 kV)


2.1 Park clear of work area. Only needed equipment placed in work area. ). Use Designated Signaler (spotter) if unsure of equipment proximity. Communication between vehicles if necessary. Wait at wide spots to meet other vehicles.

2.2 Ensure operators and crew are aware of overhead lines (limits of approach. Equipment and trucks to keep to designated roads and accesses. Use Spotters as needed.


SWP 26.002 Electrical Work SWP 26.027 Use of Spotter


Set up equipment 3.1 Equipment failure

8 Mod/High

3.1 Qualified operators; Daily inspections




Crane pad sufficient to


6 Mod/Risk


Page 3 of 9


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 3.2 Strains / sprains

6 Mod/Risk

support unit; 3.2 Be aware of site

conditions; Pads for man lift level; Radius of lift known; Three point contact; Climb all the way to the

ground; Look at ground conditions before you dismount.


3 Low/Risk

4. Rig Panels 4.1 Rigging failure

6 Mod/Risk 4.1 Rated and inspected rigging for the lift.



Hold back rope inspection prior to attachment.

Shackles between rope and choked slings.

Panel weights predetermined.


4 Mod/Risk

5. Attach crane to load 5.1 Communication

6 Mod/Risk

5.1 Designated signal person; Line of site between operator and signal person; Communication with crew prior to starting.

5.2 No person is touching


4 Mod/Risk


Page 4 of 9


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 5.2 Energized circuits 8 Mod/Risk the crane or outriggers.

Ground probe and chain; Limits of approach; Safety watch when in close proximity to utilities; Lift loads away from the existing ROW.

6 Mod/Risk

6. Hoist load 6.1 Energized circuit


8 High/Risk 5 Mod/Risk

6.1 Maintain clearances.

6.2 Tag lines to control loads. Operator is watching signal person. Anyone can stop a lift in an emergency. Operator is monitoring outrigger pads. Large enough pads for ground conditions. No one is in the fall zone of panel being hoisted.

Crew only moves in to bolt once the panel is close to the legs location.

SWP 26.002 Electrical Work SWP 26.077 Controlling & Maintaining Drop Zones SWP 26.027 Use of Spotter


7. Hold back panels 7.1 Equipment failure 7.2 Equipment being

moved


7.1 Equipment is on stable ground.

7.2 Safety equipment on equipment that is working. Qualified operator.



Page 5 of 9


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating Operator stays in seat unit final hold back position is achieved. Lock out procedure in place for equipment being left attached to hold back ropes. Only designated and qualified operators will be move the equipment.

Designated signal person will give signals to the hold back units if adjustment is needed.

8. Install spiders 8.1. Rigging 8.2. Working aloft

8.3. Pinch points

7 Mod/High 6 Mod/Risk 6 Mod/Risk

8.1 Rated and inspected slings.

8.2 Proper use of rigging. 8.3 Stay clear from the base

of the panel section being erected. Man lift training complete (qualified persons). Decent rope in unit. Unit is on level ground prior to aerial work. Fall arrest 100%. Others are aware of your actions. Gloves on at all times. Spuds and drifts used for lining holes.


5 Mod/Risk 3 Low/Risk 3 Low/Risk


Page 6 of 9


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating Full nut on loose pieces.

9. Tighten bolts 9.1 Tool failure, crescents, spud wrenches, impacts

9.2 Electrical

9.3 Noise



9.1 Inspection of tool. Tag out and give to Foreman if defective. Proper tool for the job. Inspection of tools and electrical equipment. Tag defective or worn equipment. Inspection of socket and driver.

9.2 GFCI breakers on the power source. Be aware of weather conditions. Make the crew aware of task.



Section 10 Personal Protective Equipment SWP 26.001 Defective Tools SWP 26.002 Electrical Work


10. Disconnect Rigging 10.1 Communication 10.2 Falling from aloft


10.1 Clear hand signals to operators.

10.2 Second signal person on the ground to relay if needed.

SWP 26.027 Spotter and Signaler SWP 26.028



Page 7 of 9


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating Ensure rope fall zone is

clear. Crew is aware of tasks. Check that no one is below operation.

Put shackles and steel slings in man lift.

Fall Protection


11.1 Equipment Collision Site conditions

5 Mod/Risk 11.1 Qualified operators and drivers. Back up beepers. Have signal person directing equipment and trucks when backing up at tower locations. Corners of assembled steel have been flagged if they are close to roadways. Flagging on the end of the arms. Leave body as low to the ground as possible. Be aware of changes to location once the pieces have been assembled. Leave access roads open.


3 Low/Risk


Page 8 of 9



Page 9 of 9

Document Description: JSA for Tower Assembly of Panels Created by: B. Szumik Doc. Number: JSA 01.065 Date: July 27, 2010 Revision #: 2 Date Revised: April 29, 2017 Revised by: M. MacKenzie

Page 1 of 12



Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation






2 Low/Risk

Exp

osur

e

Hazard

1 2 3 4 5 1 1 2 3 4 5 2 2 4 6 8 10 3 3 6 9 12 15 4 4 8 12 16 20 5 5 10 15 20 25

1-3 Low Risk




4-6 Low /

Moderate Risk


12-25 Unaccepta

ble Risk



Page 2 of 12


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation


away limits

2.2 Existing line

structures (240 kV)








3.1 Site conditions



3.1 Assess site for walking hazards and uneven terrain. Remove tripping hazards.

3.2 Qualified operator, equipment checks have been completed. Backup beepers on equipment.




Page 3 of 12


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating

3.3 Load shifting

6 Mod/Risk

Signal person in congested areas or where workers are present.





when necessary.

SWP 26.027 Use of Spotter SWP 26.077 Controlling & Maintaining Drop Zones

3 Low/Risk

4. Sorting of bundles 4.1 Communication


& body)


4.1 Workers are aware of plan to move steel. Be aware of your partner’s hands and location prior to moving pieces.

4.2 Wear proper PPE. Be aware of pinch points if pieces shift. Do not

SWP 26.025 Use of Hand Tools SWP 26.050 Manual Lifting and Handling



Page 4 of 12


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating





position yourself between bundles when banding is being cut.





SWP 26.001 Defective Tools SWP 26.025 Use of Hand Tools SWP 26.050 Manual Lifting and Handling


5. Set up & Operate boom truck/Crane

5.1 Equipment set up

6 Mod/Risk

5.1 Qualified/competent operators.

Daily inspection of truck and crane. Spotter when putting





SWP 26.036 Grounding and Bonding SWP 26.027 Use of Spotter

4 Mod/Risk


Page 5 of 12


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 5.2 Rigging Failure 5.3 Communication 5.4 Energized Circuits

8 High/Risk 6 Mod/Risk 12 High/Risk

5.2 Rated and inspected rigging for the lift. Softeners used if needed. Steel slings choked around members. Weight of the loads calculated. 5.3 Designated signal person. Line of site between

operators and signal person.


5.4 No person is touching the crane or outriggers. Ground probe and chain. Limits of approach Safety watch when in close proximity to utilities. Lift loads away from the existing ROW. Weather conditions monitored.

SWP 26.006 Crane and Rigging SWP 26.027 Use of Spotter

5 Mod/Risk 3 Low//Risk 3 Low/Risk


Page 6 of 12


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 5.5 Falling Material/Load

8 Mod/Risk 5.5 No one is in the fall zone of panel being hoisted. Load will be inspected prior to lift. Hardware will be tied to the structure. Crew will not be under the load.


3 Low/Risk


Tag line used on loads. Crew is aware of pieces








4 Mod/Risk


4 Mod/Risk

7.1 Use proper bending and lifting techniques when carrying and placing pieces.


3 Low/Risk


Page 7 of 12


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating


7.3 Pinch Points

3 Low/Risk 6 Mod/Risk




coworker’s hands and feet prior to moving pieces. Use spuds and lining bars keeping digits clear of the bite. Ensure a full nut is on the piece before you leave it eliminating pieces coming apart.




motion


8.1 Use blocking to support pieces. Be aware of your co-workers position. Clear communication between crew members. Spuds and bars used for lining.





Page 8 of 12


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 8.3 Dehydration / Fatigue 3 Low/Risk 8.3 Keep hydrated. Buddy

system, be aware of weather conditions. Have proper clothing for the changing weather.

2 Low/Risk

9. Tighten panels 9.1 Tool failure, crescents, spud wrenches, impacts

9.2 Electrical

9.3 Noise









10. Build spiders 10.1 Strains

4 Mod/Risk

10.1 Use proper bending and lifting techniques. Use equipment when needed. Buddy system for moving


3 Low/Risk


Page 9 of 12


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 10.2 Pinch points

6 Mod/Risk

pieces.

10.2 Use tools to line holes and work in tight areas. Be sure crew members are aware of your work (moving pieces). Have clear communication. Blocking used to support pieces. Gloves worn at all times.

3 Low/Risk

11. Clean up and demobilization from site




11.0 Qualified operators and drivers.



Corners of assembled steel have been flagged if they are close to roadways.





In winter corners of assembled steel should

SWP 26.027 Spotter and Signaler Practice



Page 10 of 12


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating be marked.


Page 11 of 12



Page 12 of 12

Document Description: JSA for Tower Assembly Boxing In Created by: B. Szumik Doc. Number: JSA 01.066 Date: July 27, 2010 Revision #: 2 Date Revised: April 29, 2017 Revised by: M. MacKenzie

Page 1 of 12



Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation






2 Low/Risk

Exp

osur

e

Hazard

1 2 3 4 5 1 1 2 3 4 5 2 2 4 6 8 10 3 3 6 9 12 15 4 4 8 12 16 20 5 5 10 15 20 25

1-3 Low Risk




4-6 Low /

Moderate Risk


12-25 Unaccepta

ble Risk



Page 2 of 12


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation


away limits

2.2 Existing line

structures (240 kV)








3.1 Site conditions



3.1 Assess site for walking hazards and uneven terrain. Remove tripping hazards.

3.2 Qualified/Competent operator, equipment checks have been completed. Backup




Page 3 of 12


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating

3.3 Load shifting

6 Mod/Risk

beepers on equipment. Signal person in congested areas or where workers are present.





when necessary.

SWP 26.027 Use of Spotter SWP 26.077 Controlling & Maintaining Drop Zones

3 Low/Risk

4. Sorting of bundles 4.1 Communication


& body)


4.1 Workers are aware of plan to move steel. Be aware of your partner’s hands and location prior to moving pieces.

4.2 Wear proper PPE. Be aware of pinch points if

SWP 26.025 Use of Hand Tools SWP 26.050 Manual Lifting



Page 4 of 12


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating





pieces shift. Do not position yourself between bundles when banding is being cut.





and Handling SWP 26.001 Defective Tools SWP 26.025 Use of Hand Tools SWP 26.050 Manual Lifting and Handling


5. Set up & Operate boom truck/Crane

5.1 Equipment set up

6 Mod/Risk

5.1 Qualified/competent operators.

Daily inspection of truck and crane. Spotter when putting





SWP 26.036 Grounding and Bonding SWP 26.027 Use of Spotter

4 Mod/Risk


Page 5 of 12


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 5.2 Rigging Failure 5.3 Communication 5.4 Energized Circuits 5.5 Falling Material/Load

8 High/Risk 6 Mod/Risk 12 High/Risk 8 Mod/Risk

5.2 Rated and inspected rigging for the lift. Softeners used if needed. Steel slings choked around members. Weight of the loads calculated. 5.3 Designated signal person. Line of site between

operators and signal person.


5.4 No person is touching the crane or outriggers. Ground probe and chain. Limits of approach Safety watch when in close proximity to utilities. Lift loads away from the existing ROW. Weather conditions monitored. 5.5 No one is in the fall zone of panel being hoisted. Load will be inspected prior to lift.

SWP 26.006 Crane and Rigging SWP 26.027 Use of Spotter SWP 26.077

5 Mod/Risk 3 Low//Risk 3 Low/Risk 3 Low/Risk


Page 6 of 12


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating

Hardware will be tied to the structure. Crew will not be under the load.

Controlling & Maintaining Drop Zones


Tag line used on loads. Crew is aware of pieces








4 Mod/Risk




7.1 Use proper bending and lifting techniques when carrying and placing pieces.





Page 7 of 12


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating

7.3 Pinch Points

6 Mod/Risk



coworker’s hands and feet prior to moving pieces. Use spuds and lining bars keeping digits clear of the bite. Ensure a full nut is on the piece before you leave it eliminating pieces coming apart.

3 Low/Risk



motion 8.3 Dehydration / Fatigue

6 Mod/Risk 4 Mod/Risk 3 Low/Risk

8.1 Use blocking to support pieces. Be aware of your co-workers position. Clear communication between crew members. Spuds and bars used for lining.


8.3 Keep hydrated. Buddy system, be aware of weather conditions. Have proper clothing for the changing




Page 8 of 12


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating weather.

9. Tighten body 9.1 Tool failure, crescents, spud wrenches, impacts

9.2 Electrical

9.3 Noise









10. Assemble Arms 10.1 Strains

10.2 Pinch points


10.1 Use proper bending and lifting techniques. Use equipment when needed. Buddy system for moving pieces.

10.2 Use tools to line holes




Page 9 of 12


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating and work in tight areas. Be sure crew members are aware of your work (moving pieces). Have clear communication. Blocking used to support pieces. Gloves worn at all times.

11. Tighten Arms 11.1 Tool failure, crescents, spud wrenches, impacts

11.2 Electrical

11.3 Noise / Contact with eyes

11.4 Slips, trips and fall

4 Mod/Risk 5 Mod/Risk 4 Mod/Risk 4 Mod/Risk

11.1 Inspection of tool; Tag out and give to Foreman if defective; Proper tool for the job. Inspection of tools and electrical equipment. Tag defective or worn equipment. Make the crew aware of task. Inspection of socket and driver.

11.2 GFCI breakers on the power source. Be aware of weather conditions.

11.3 Hearing protection worn.

Wear proper PPE (gloves, safety glasses and hearing protection)

11.4 Be sure of footing

Clean up unnecessary tools and blocking at site. Proper footwear for terrain or weather conditions




Page 10 of 12


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 12. Clean up and

demobilization from site



5 Mod/Risk 12.1 Qualified/competent operators

and drivers. Back up beepers Have signal person


Corners of assembled steel have been flagged if they are close to roadways.

Flagging on the end of the wings.





In winter corners of assembled steel should be marked.

SWP 26.027 Use of Spotter SWP 26.043 Housekeeping

3 Low/Risk


Page 11 of 12



Page 12 of 12

Document Description: JSA for Installation of Dead Ends Created by: Mitch

MacKenzie Doc. Number: JSA 01.067 Date: May 14, 2017 Revision #: 0 Date Revised Revised by:


Page 1 of 7

Exp

osur

e

Hazard 1 2 3 4 5

1 1 2 3 4 5 2 2 4 6 8 10 3 3 6 9 12 15 4 4 8 12 16 20 5 5 10 15 20 25

1-3 Low Risk




4-6 Low /

Moderate Risk




Task / Activity



Standard Reference


1. Mobilize to site

1.1 Traffic 4 Mod/Risk 1.1 -Obey speed limits of the roads used. -Four way flashers and pull to the side if needed while opening barriers. -Flag persons and traffic control as required. -Secure loads.

* Significant Concerns: Road conditions, time of day, weather, check height of utilities, ROW Boundaries


2 Low/Risk

2. Access to site 2.1 Congested and right-away limits

8 High/Risk

2.1 -Park clear of work area. -Only needed equipment placed in work area. -Use Designated Signaler (spotter) if unsure of equipment proximity. Communication between vehicles if necessary. Wait at

6 Mod/Risk

Document Description: JSA for Installation of Dead End Created by: Mitch

MacKenzie Doc. Number: JSA 01.067 Date: May 14, 2017 Revision #: 0 Date Revised: Revised by:




Standard Reference


Page 2 of 7

2.2 Existing line structures (240 kV)

8 High/Risk

wide spots to meet other vehicles.

2.2 -Ensure operators and crew are aware of overhead lines (limits of approach. -Equipment and trucks to keep to designated roads and accesses. Use Spotters as needed.

* Significant Concerns: Equipment contact.


SWP 26.027 Use of Spotter

6 Mod/Risk

3. Set up Equipment 3.1 Equipment set up

6 Mod/Risk

3.1 -Qualified/competent operators. -Daily inspection of truck and crane. -Spotter when putting out riggers. -Outrigger pads used at all times. -Set up on level ground. -Equipment set up maintaining limits of approach to existing lines. -Truck is grounded using ground probe and 4/0 ground chain.

SWP 26.036 Grounding and Bonding SWP 26.027 Spotter & Signaler

4 Mod/Risk






Standard Reference


Page 3 of 7

3.2 Equipment Failure 3.3 Communication 3.4 Energized Circuits

8 High/Risk 6 Mod/Risk 12 High/Risk

3.2 -Qualified/Competent operators. -Daily Inspections completed. -Operated within the operating instructions of the unit. -Be aware of site conditions. Crane set on level ground and pads secured. 3.3 -Designated signal person. -Line of site between operators and signal person. -Communication with crew prior to starting. 3.4 -No person is touching the crane or outriggers. -Ground probe and chain. -Limits of approach -Safety watch when in close proximity to utilities. -Lift loads away from the

SWP 26.006 Crane and Rigging SWP 26.027 Spotter & Signaler

5 Mod/Risk 3 Low//Risk 3 Low/Risk






Standard Reference


Page 4 of 7

3.5 Falling Material/Load

8 Mod/Risk

existing ROW. -Weather conditions monitored. -Crane movement radius known. 3.5 -No one is in the fall zone of panel being hoisted. -Load will be inspected prior to lift. -Hardware will be tied to the structure. -Crew will not be under the load.


3 Low/Risk

4. Dead/Ending Aloft 4.1 Communication ground-lineman at the top of tower

4.2 Rigging Failure 4.3 Equipment Failure

6 Mod/Risk 10 High/Risk 10 High/Risk

4.1 Continuous hand signal or radio communication at all times during operation. 4.2 Rated and inspected rigging for the lifting (Slings/Chain Hoists) -Hand line rope inspection prior to use -No One is standing below the load being lifted. 4.3 Pads of Crane monitored during lifting of insulators. -No one standing below the

Procedure for Installation of Dead Ends SWP 26.077 Controlling & Maintaining Drop Zones







Standard Reference


Page 5 of 7

4.4 Induction

12 High/Risk

load. 4.4 Equipment properly grounded -Temporary grounds installed between conductors and tower prior to starting operation. -Follow bonding and grounding plan in place.

AltaLink EQ Bonding & Grounding

3 Low/Risk






Standard Reference


Page 6 of 7

5. Climbing onto Tower/Moving within Tower

5.1 Fall from Height 12 High/Risk 5.1 Use double hook lanyard or other approved means of attachment, at all times once above 6 feet from ground level - Proper PPE to be used at all times (Safety Footwear to be in good condition, hard hat, gloves) - Inspect safety harness every time prior to climbing onto tower. - In wet weather conditions and if tower is slippery, use man lift for climbing onto the tower. - Stop work if wind speed is over 36Km/hr


2 Low/Risk

6. Clean up and Demobilize off the site

6.1 Equipment collision/ Site Conditions

8 Mod/Risk

6.1 Qualified/Competent drivers. - Have signal person directing equipment and trucks when backing up at tower locations.

2 Low/Risk


MacKenzie Doc. Number: JSA Date: May 14, 2017 Revision #: 0 Date Revised: Revised by:

Page 7 of 7


Document Description: Setting up Material Lay Down Created by: M. Felczak Doc. Number: JSA 01.068

Date: June 15, 2014 Revision #: 1 Date Revised: May 12, 2017 Revised by: Mitch MacKenzie

Page 1 of 4



Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 1. Discuss with client

area best used for material lay down.

1.1 Placed in wrong area.

4-Low/Mod 1.1. Communicate with client and locate a convenient area close to work site for use.

1- Low

2. Level area using skid steer or loader

2.1. Congestion/site traffic

2.2. Heavy equipment

5- Low/Mod 2.1. Use spotter 2.2. Qualified operator to run

equipment.

SWP 26.027 2- Low

3. Organize material into task specific groups where possible.

3.1 Time wasted looking for material

4-Low/Mod 3.1 Group material in sensible piles. i.e. keep grounding material together, bolts in one area, reels separate (not spread out, high voltage connections together. Etc…

SWP 26.043 SOP 27.011 Material Placement in Laydown Yard

1- Low

Exp

osur

e

Hazard

1 2 3 4 5 1 1 2 3 4 5 2 2 4 6 8 10 3 3 6 9 12 15 4 4 8 12 16 20 5 5 10 15 20 25

1-3 Low Risk


8-10 Moderate

/ High Risk


4-6 Low / Moderate

Risk


12-25 Unacceptable

Risk




Page 2 of 4


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 4. Ensure area is clean

and any house keeping is complete. Area should look presentable and organized.

4.1 Tripping hazards that may have been created during unpacking of material.

4-Low/Mod 4.1 Always be on top of ongoing site cleanup. Remove any waste as you go.

1- Low



Page 3 of 4




Page 4 of 4

Document Description: JSA for Camp set up-Installation of gas fired heating

systems Created by: J. Friesen Doc. Number: Health, Safety & Environmental Policy Form Date: April 2018 Revision #: 1 Date Revised: Revised by:

This analysis is intended to identify broad scope of work hazards and does not replace the need for specific JSAs and Tailboards. Once all the hazards have been identified and recorded, a risk assessment shall be conducted.

Page 1 of 5

Exp

osur

e

Hazard 1 2 3 4 5

1 1 2 3 4 5

2 2 4 6 8 10

3 3 6 9 12 15

4 4 8 12 16 20

5 5 10 15 20 25

1-3 Low Risk


8-10



4-6 Low /

Moderate Risk




Task / Activity


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference


1. Excavation Authorization



1.1 Buried utilities. 1.2 Permit to work

12-25 Unacceptable risk

1.1 Obtain necessary excavation, ground disturbance clearance, utility locates.

1.2 Obtain necessary

permits to work, if required.

1.3 All workers involved in

the installation gas distribution shall work under the direction of a journeyman gasfitter with the appropriate class as per provincial regulations.

SWP 26.031 Excavations Workers to be trained in Ground Disturbance level 2

1-3 Low risk

2 Excavate trenches for installation of underground gas lines.

2.1 Contact with existing underground utilities.

8-10 Moderate/High risk

2.1 Ensure proper ground locates are performed before ground disturbance begins. Consult existing drawings of worksite or local landowners for information of buried utilities. Determine the safest

SWP 26,038 JSA 01.005A Excavation and trenching JSA 01.007 Hydrovacing trenching Natural gas and propane installation code

4-6 Low/moderate risk.

VALARD


systems Created by: Doc. Number: Health, Safety & Environmental Policy Form

Date: Revision #: Date Revised: Revised by:


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference


Page 2 of 5

method to remove soil; excavator or hydrovac. Journeyman to obtain proper gas permit for installation and ensure all gas piping systems are approved by an inspector.

B-149 Minimum depth of trench-24”

3 Equipment checks for mobile and stationary equipment.

3.1 Equipment failure 3.2 Fluid leaks

4-6 Low/Moderate risk

3.1 Inspect all equipment prior to use.

3.2 Ensure spill kit is on hand.

Section 25 HSE manual Vehicle/Equipment policy-inspections

1-3 Low risk

4 Remove soil to required depth and add a layer of sand above and below piping.

4.1 Pipe failure due to uneven terrain, rocks, etc.

4.2 3.2 Failure to add a sufficient layer of sand may result in puncture of gas line from rocks or hard surface.


4.1 Sand creates a protective layer between gas line and hard packed soil.

4.2 During backfill a layer of sand must be added above and below piping.

Natural gas and propane installation code B-149 Check provincial jurisdiction for level of sand for backfill. Workers operating equipment shall have PME training.


5 Install gas pipe in trench. Charge piping with air test. Use pipe threader for above ground installations only.

5.1 Failure to detect leaks will create hazardous condition.

5.2 Damaged or worn thread dies causing poor pipe connection.


5.1 Air test must be conducted before burial. Journeyman gasfitter to contact local inspector for inspection.

5.2 Competent worker to operate threading machine.

Natural gas and propane installation code B-149


6 Before back fill install electronic tracing wire and identification tape

6.1 Failure to install tracing wire and identification tape may result in utility


6.1 Install tracing wire and identification tape during backfill.

Natural gas and propane installation code


VALARD





Hazard Rating


Standard Reference


Page 3 of 5

strike B-149

7 Connect all rigid and flexible gas piping systems from propane distribution to dorms.

7.1 Improper installation of gas piping systems. Fire/explosion, loss of property and life.

7.2 Gas leaks from improper pipe connections.

7.3 Damage to gas piping


7.1 All workers to be under the direction of a journeyman gasfitter with appropriate class as per provincial jurisdiction.

7.2 All pipe joints to be soap tested for gas leaks.

7.3 All gas piping shall be adequately protected from Contact from vehicles and incidental contact from workers. Ensure all gas fired appliances are fully operational before turning camp over to maintenance crews.



8 Paint all rigid gas piping. 8.1 Failure of pipe due to rust and corrosion.


8.1 Ensure all rigid gas pipe is painted (yellow).



9 Install protective barriers for above ground piping.

9.1 Contact with trucks and equipment


9.1 Install effective barriers around above ground piping.



10 Create plan drawing of all underground utilities to be turned over camp maintenance post new construction.

10.1 Contact with underground utilities

12-25 Unacceptable risk.

10.1 A hardcopy or electronic plan of all underground utilities for to be developed for camp set up. Plans will also be turned over to camp maintenance after new construction.



VALARD





Hazard Rating


Standard Reference


Page 4 of 5

VALARD





Hazard Rating


Standard Reference


Page 5 of 5

NAME (print) SIGNATURE DATE COMPANY

Document Description: Camp Setup General Plumbing Created by: R. Gaudet Doc. Number: JSA

Date: April 2, 2018 Revision #: 0 Date Revised: Revised by:

Page 1 of 5



Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 1. Mobilize to Site 1.1 Slippery or uneven roads

1.2 Wildlife Interaction

1.3 Other Vehicle Interaction

6 Low/ Moderate

Risk

1.1.1 Drive to road conditions 1.1.2 Follow radio protocol 1.1.3 Equipment check daily 1.2.1 Scan side to side/ahead 1.2.2 Use passenger as second set of eyes 1.3.1 Use defensive driving 1.3.2 Follow radio protocol

SWP 26.013 Use of Company Vehicles Section 9 HSE Inspections and Monitoring, Hazard Awareness

3 Low Risk

Exp

osur

e

Hazard

1 2 3 4 5 1 1 2 3 4 5 2 2 4 6 8 10 3 3 6 9 12 15 4 4 8 12 16 20 5 5 10 15 20 25

1-3 Low Risk




4-6 Low / Moderate

Risk


12-25 Unacceptable

Risk




Page 2 of 5


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 2. Walk in work area 2.1 Slips, trips and falls due to

wet/slippery/uneven conditions.

4 Low/ Moderate

Risk

2.1.1 Observe work area for hazards and eliminate whenever possible. Guard and/or barricade or otherwise clearly identify hazards that cannot be removed.

SWP 26.043 Housekeeping Section 10, HSE Manual, PPE

2 Low Risk

3. Connect Interior Water Lines

3.1 Hands, fingers and other body parts caught in pinch points.

3.2 Tool failure while connecting fittings.

5 Low / Moderate

Risk

3.1.1 Work gloves and other PPE to be worn; designate a flagger for movement control; keep hands and body clear while maintaining safe distance from equipment; do not allow personnel in pinch points; recommendation of not wearing jewelry or excessively loose fitting clothing. 3.2.1 All tools are to be inspected prior to use. Tools that are not in good condition to be tagged out.

SWP 26.043 Housekeeping Section 10, HSE Manual, PPE SWP 26.001 Defective Tools

2 Low Risk

4. Connect Outdoor Sewage Lines (heat trace install, insulation wrap, connect ABS pipe)

4.1 Awkward or heavy lifts while moving material. Bending/ twisting in awkward positions when installing heat trace and insulation wrap.

5 Low / Moderate

Risk

4.1.1 If over 50 lbs., use of two workers is required. Use machines with taglines to assist as necessary.

SWP 26.050 Manual Lifting

2 Low Risk



Page 3 of 5


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 4.2 Hands, fingers and other

body parts caught in pinch points. Cuts when preparing insulation wrap.

4.2.1 Work gloves and other PPE to be worn; designate a flagger for movement control; keep hands and body clear while maintaining safe distance from equipment; do not allow personnel in pinch points; recommendation of not wearing jewelry or excessively loose fitting clothing.

SWP 26.043 Housekeeping Section 10, HSE Manual, PPE SWP 26.080 Use of Gloves

5. 5.1 5.1.

6. 6.1 6.1.

7. 7.1 7.1.

7. 8.1 8.1.

8. 9.1 9.1.

9. 10.1 10.1.



Page 4 of 5


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating



Page 5 of 5


Document Description: Camp Trailer Setup Created by: R. Gaudet Doc. Number: JSA


Page 1 of 5



Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation


1.2 Wildlife Interaction 1.3 Other Vehicle Interaction

6 Low/ Mod Risk



3 Low Risk

2. Walk in work area 2.1 Slips, trips and falls due to wet/slippery/uneven conditions.

4 Low/ Mod Risk



2 Low Risk

Exp

osur

e

Hazard

1 2 3 4 5 1 1 2 3 4 5 2 2 4 6 8 10 3 3 6 9 12 15 4 4 8 12 16 20 5 5 10 15 20 25

1-3 Low Risk


8-10 Moderate

/ High Risk


4-6 Low / Moderate

Risk


12-25 Unacceptable

Risk




Page 2 of 5


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 3. Unload from flatbed

trailers at site. Position trailer(s) at site and make level with blocking.


3.2 Working under suspended

loads (loader use to raise trailer).

3.3 Backing Incidents. 3.4 Hands, fingers and other

body parts caught in pinch points.

3.5 Improper setup of trailer

stands when off-loading or loading trailers


3.1.1 Be aware line height (overhead power line signs) and use a spotter when necessary.

3.2.1 Workers to identify hazards and note on tailboard/FLHA. Use extreme caution when lifting trailers; always be aware of surroundings. Use chains where necessary.

3.3.1 Use a spotter for backing. If

working alone, do a walk around to ensure no hazards or obstructions are in the area.

3.4.1 Work gloves and other PPE to be worn; designate a flagger for movement control; keep hands and body clear and maintain safe distance from equipment; do not allow personnel in pinch points; recommendation of not wearing jewelry or excessively loose fitting. clothing. 3.6.1 Make sure ground is level and inspect stands before use.

SWP 26.002 Electrical Work Canadian Electrical Code Section 9 HSE Inspections and Monitoring, Hazard Awareness SWP.027 Spotter and Signaler Practice SWP 26.043 Housekeeping Section 10, HSE Manual, PPE SWP 26.013 Use of Company Vehicles

1-3 Low Risk



Page 3 of 5


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 3.6 Trailers improperly

secured while traveling to and from sites

3.6.1 Check all straps/chains before use. Follow load securement procedures to prevent load shift.

4. Connect Trailers (install floors, attach roof, build stairs, install skirting).

4.1 Saw kickback when cutting wood.

4.2 Falling from heights when

attaching roof.

4.3 Hands, fingers and other

body parts caught in pinch points.


4.1.1 Maintain a firm grip with both hands on the saw and position your arms to resist kickback forces. Position your body to either side of the blade, but not in line with the blade.

4.1.2 Inspect all fall arrest equipment (harness, lanyard, etc.) before use. Tie off ladder. Inspect and attach lanyard to approved locations.

4.1.3 Work gloves and other PPE to be worn; designate a flagger for movement control; keep hands and body clear and maintain safe distance from equipment; do not allow personnel in pinch points; recommendation of not wearing jewelry or excessively loose fitting. clothing.

SWP 26.045 SWP.046 Operate Skill Saw or Table Saw SWP 26.028 Fall Protection SWP 26.043 Housekeeping Section 10, HSE Manual, PPE

1-3 Low Risk

5. Clean Up Work Area 6.1 Slips, trips and falls 4 Low/ Mod Risk

6.1.1 Observe work area for hazards and eliminate whenever possible. Guard and/or barricade or that otherwise clearly identify hazards cannot be removed.


2 Low Risk



Page 4 of 5


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating

6.1.2 Work gloves & other PPE to be worn; designate a flagger for movement control; keep hands and body clear and maintain safe distance from hazards; do not allow personnel in pinch points; recommendation of not wearing jewelry or excessively loose fitting clothing.

SWP 26.080 Use of Gloves Section 10, HSE Manual, PPE



Page 5 of 5


Document Description: Camp Fuel Tank Setup Created by: R. Gaudet Doc. Number: JSA


Page 1 of 5



Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 1. Mobilize to Site 1.1 Slippery or uneven

roads

1.2 Wildlife Interaction 1.3 Other Vehicle

Interaction

5 Low/ Mod Risk

1.1.1. Drive to road conditions 1.1.2. Follow radio protocol 1.1.3. Equipment check daily

1.2.1 Scan side to side/ahead 1.2.2 Use passenger as second set of

eyes

1.3.1 Use defensive driving 1.3.2 Follow radio protocol


3 Low Risk

2. Unload Tank(s) from Delivery Trailer using

2.1 Rigging Failure

8-10 Moderate

2.1.1 Inspect all rigging and use taglines to control movement. Rig lift with appropriate sized

SWP 26.006 crane and

4 Low / Moderate

Exp

osur

e

Hazard

1 2 3 4 5 1 1 2 3 4 5 2 2 4 6 8 10 3 3 6 9 12 15 4 4 8 12 16 20 5 5 10 15 20 25

1-3 Low Risk




4-6 Low /

Moderate Risk


12-25 Unaccepta

ble Risk




Page 2 of 5


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating Heavy Equipment and Install on Foundation.

2.2 Worker crushed by falling load.

2.3 Heavy equipment failure.



2.5 Slips, trips and falls

due to wet or slippery or uneven

/ High Risk

slings/shackles. 2.2.1 Communicate with workers in area; flag off area if needed.

Keep area clear to reduce hazard.

2.3.1 Qualified operator and spotters to be used while lifting and moving material. Inspect equipment daily before using.

Use caution while un-loading; strap material to equipment (if using front end loader / skidsteer); if using Crane - taglines to be used. Signalman to be clearly identified with gauntlet.

2.4.1 Work gloves and other PPE to be worn; designate a flagger for movement control; keep hands and body clear and maintain safe distance from equipment; do not allow personnel in pinch points; recommendation of not wearing jewelry or excessively loose fitting clothing. 2.5.1 Observe work area for hazards and

eliminate whenever possible. Guard and/or barricade or

Rigging Section 9 HSE Inspections and Monitoring, Hazard Awareness SWP.027 Spotter and Signaler Practice SWP 26.043 Housekeeping Section 10, HSE Manual, PPE Refer to JSA 01.014 Concrete Installation

Risk



Page 3 of 5


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating conditions.

otherwise clearly identify hazards that cannot be removed.

3. Inspect tank for

damage/leaks or missing components.

3.1 Slips, trips and falls due to wet or slippery or uneven conditions.

1-3 Low Risk



1 low Risk

4. Install Ground Rod(s) 4.1 Hand injury from being struck by hammer. Flying fragments of ground rod in eye.

4.2 Awkward or heavy

lifting while moving ground rod.

5 Low / Moderate

Risk

4.1.1 Use post pounder for ground rod to safely insert in ground and reduce chances of flying projectiles.

4.2.1 Use buddy system or machinery to Avoid unnecessary strain

Section 9 HSE Inspections and Monitoring, Hazard Awareness SWP 26.050 Manual Lifting and Carrying

2 Low Risk

5 Install Electrical and Grounding

5.1 Electrical shock.

5.2 Tripping over loose wire/debris. Slips, trips and falls due to wet or slippery or

4-6 Low / Moderate

Risk

5.1.1 Test to make sure isolation/de- energization completed. Check all extension cords for damage. Inspect gensets for defects. 5.2.1 Elevate, bury, or install cable

cover over electrical cord to eliminate tripping hazard. Observe work area for hazards

SWP 26.002 Electrical Work SWP 26.021 Electrical Extension Cords SWP 26.043 Housekeeping

2 Low Risk



Page 4 of 5


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating uneven conditions. and eliminate whenever possible.

Guard and/or barricade or otherwise clearly identify hazards that cannot be removed.

Section 10, HSE Manual, PPE

6 Clean Up Work Area 6.1 Slips, trips and falls 4 Low/ Mod

Risk

6.1.1 Observe work area for hazards and eliminate whenever possible. Guard and/or barricade or that otherwise clearly identify hazards that cannot be removed. 6.1.2 Use appropriate PPE, including dust masks to minimize hazards.

SWP 26.043 Housekeeping SWP 26.080 Use of Gloves Section 10, HSE Manual, PPE

2 Low Risk

7 Install No Smoking Signage

7.1 Pinch points 4 Low/Mod Risk

7.1.1 Use appropriate PPE, be aware of hand placement.

SWP 26.080 Use of Gloves

2 Low Risk



Page 5 of 5


Document Description: General Carpentry Created by: R. Gaudet Doc. Number: JSA


Page 1 of 5



Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation


1.2 Wildlife Interaction

1.3 Other Vehicle Interaction

6 Low/ Mod Risk



3 Low Risk

2. Walk in work area 2.1 Slips, trips and falls due to 4 Low/ 2.1.1 Observe work area for SWP 26.043 2 Low

Exp

osur

e

Hazard

1 2 3 4 5 1 1 2 3 4 5 2 2 4 6 8 10 3 3 6 9 12 15 4 4 8 12 16 20 5 5 10 15 20 25

1-3 Low Risk




4-6 Low / Moderate

Risk


12-25 Unacceptable

Risk




Page 2 of 5


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating wet/slippery/uneven conditions.

Moderate Risk

hazards and eliminate whenever possible. Guard and/or barricade or otherwise clearly identify hazards that cannot be removed.

Housekeeping Section 10, HSE Manual, PPE

Risk

3. Build decks, stairs, and other framing projects.

3.1 Tool failure, missing guards, cords frayed or broken.

3.2 Hands placed in line of fire,

or in pinch points as framing material cut or fastened together.

3.3 Awkward or heavy lifts while moving material.

3.4 Slips, trips, falls due to

slippery or uneven conditions; also due to scrap material not cleaned up.

5 Low / Moderate

Risk

3.1.1 Check guards on saws, use GFI protection on grounded equipment. All tools are to be inspected prior to use. Tools that are not in good condition to be tagged out.

3.2.1 Hands are not to be placed in line of fire of any power or hand tool.

3.3.1 If over 50 lbs., use of two

workers is required. Use machines with taglines to assist as necessary.

3.4.1 Housekeeping to be addressed 100% of the time; tripping hazard to be removed. Sand/grade as necessary to prevent poor site conditions.

SWP 26.043 Housekeeping Section 10, HSE Manual, PPE SWP 26.028 Fall Protection SWP 26.050 Manual Lifting SWP 26.045 Operate Table Saw SWP 26.046 Operate Circular Saw SWP 26.001 Defective Tools

2 Low Risk



Page 3 of 5


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 4. Connecting Boot

Rooms to Dorms. 4.1 Falling from heights when

working aloft. 4.2 Tool failure, missing guards,

cords frayed or broken.

4.3 Hands placed in line of fire, or in pinch points as framing material cut or fastened together.

4.4 Awkward or heavy lifts while

moving material.

6 Low / Moderate

Risk

4.1.1 Inspect all fall arrest equipment (harness, lanyard, etc.) before use. Tie off ladder. Inspect and attach lanyard to approved locations.

4.2.1 All tools are to be inspected prior to use. Tools that are not in good condition to be tagged out.

4.3.1 Hands are not to be placed in line of fire of any power or hand tool.

4.4.1 If over 50 lbs., use of two workers is required. Use machines with taglines to assist as necessary.

Section 10, HSE Manual, PPE SWP 26.028 Fall Protection SWP 26.050 Manual Lifting SWP 26.001 Defective Tools

2 Low Risk

5. Clean Up Work Area 5.1 Slips, trips and falls

5.2 Caught in pinch Points when lifting/moving

4 Low/ Mod Risk

5.1.1 Observe work area for hazards and eliminate whenever possible. Guard and/or barricade or that otherwise clearly identify hazards cannot be removed.

SWP 26.043 Housekeeping SWP 26.080 Use of Gloves Section 10, HSE Manual, PPE

2 Low Risk



Page 4 of 5


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating material and equipment 5.2.1 Work gloves & other PPE

to be worn; designate a flagger for movement control; keep hands and body clear and maintain safe distance from hazards; do not allow personnel in pinch points; recommendation of not wearing jewelry or excessively loose fitting clothing.

6 6.1 6.1.1

7 7.1 7.1.1

7. 8.1 8.1.1

8. 9.1 9.1.1

9. 10.1 10.1.1



Page 5 of 5


Document Description: JSA for Installation of Electrical utilities for Camp set up. Created by: J. Friesen Doc. Number: JSA

Date: April 2018 Revision #: 1 Date Revised: Revised by:

Page 1 of 4


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 1. Excavation

Authorization * Significant Concerns:


1.1 Buried utilities.

1.2 Permit to work 1.3 Lack of skill


1.1 Obtain necessary excavation, ground disturbance clearance, utility locates.

1.2 Obtain necessary permits

to work, if required.

1.3 All workers involved in the installation electrical utilities shall work under the direction of a journeyman Electrician with the appropriate class as per provincial regulations.

SWP 26,038 JSA 01.005A Excavation and trenching JSA 01.007 Hydrovacing trenching Canadian electrical code


2 Excavate trenches for installation of electrical feed from generators to dorms.


2.2 Noncompliance with local building codes


2.1 Ensure proper ground locates are performed before ground disturbance begins. Consult existing drawings of

Canadian electrical code


Exp

osur

e

Hazard

1 2 3 4 5 1 1 2 3 4 5 2 2 4 6 8 10 3 3 6 9 12 15 4 4 8 12 16 20 5 5 10 15 20 25

1-3 Low Risk


8-10 Moderate

/ High Risk


4-6 Low / Moderate

Risk


12-25 Unacceptable

Risk




Page 2 of 4


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating worksite or local landowners for information of buried utilities. Determine the safest method to remove soil; excavator or hydrovac.

2.2 Journeyman to obtain proper electrical permit for installation and ensure all work is approved by an inspector.

3 Equipment checks for mobile and stationary equipment

3.1 Equipment failure Fluid leaks

4-6 Low/Moderate risk


3.2 Ensure spill kit is on hand.

Section 25 HSE manual Vehicle/Equipment policy-inspections


4 Remove soil to required depth and install electrical cable in trench.

4.1 Insulation of electrical cable damaged due to due to uneven terrain, rocks, etc.


4.1 Add a layer of sand above and below, check local electrical codes for details of depth of sand

4.2 Refer to JSA for pulling cable.

Canadian electrical code JSA T-015 Pulling cable


5 Install identification tape during backfill.

5.1 Failure to install identification tape may result in utility strike


5.1 Install identification tape during backfill.



6 Connect all electrical cables to dorms

6.1 Fire or electrical fault 12-25 Unacceptable risk

6.1 Ensure appropriately sized electrical cable for voltage from distribution sea-can.

6.2 Ensure all wiring terminates in properly rated electrical panels.


1-3 Low risk

7 Install protective barriers for above ground piping


12-25 Unacceptable

7.1 Install effective barriers around above ground piping

Canadian electrical

1-3 Low risk



Page 3 of 4


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating risk code

8 Install grounds and bonding

8.1 Ungrounded system; electrical shock, touch potential


8.1 Ensure all electrical panels and dwellings are adequately grounded and bonded.



9 Check operation of Fire alarm and CO systems

9.1 Failure of alarms 12-25 Unacceptable risk

9.1 Perform required checks before buildings are occupied.



10 Trouble shooting electrical problems on start up.

10.1 Electrical shock 12-25 Unacceptable risk

10.1 Use lock out tag out 10.2 Inspect and use insulated

tools before use. 10.3 Use non-contact voltage

detectors.

SWP 26.032 Lockouts SWP 26.002 Electrical work


11 Create plan drawing of all underground utilities to be turned over camp maintenance post new construction.



11.1 A hardcopy or electronic plan of all underground utilities for to be developed for camp set up. Plans will also be turned over to camp maintenance after new construction.



10

11

12



Page 4 of 4


Document Description: JSA for Camp set up-Plumbing service drain lines Created by: J. Friesen Doc. Number: Health, Safety & Environmental Policy Form Date: April 2018 Revision #: 1 Date Revised: Revised by:

This analysis is intended to identify broad scope of work hazards and does not replace the need for specific JSAs and Tailboards. Once all the hazards have been identified and recorded, a risk assessment shall be conducted.

Page 1 of 4

Exp

osur

e

Hazard 1 2 3 4 5

1 1 2 3 4 5 2 2 4 6 8 10 3 3 6 9 12 15 4 4 8 12 16 20 5 5 10 15 20 25

1-3 Low Risk




4-6 Low /

Moderate Risk




Task / Activity


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference


1. Excavation Authorization * Significant Concerns:


1.1 Buried utilities. 1.2 Permit to work

5 Low/Mod 1.1 Obtain necessary excavation, ground disturbance clearance, utility locates.

1.2 Obtain necessary permits

to work, if required.

SWP 26.031 Excavations Workers to be trained in Ground level 2

1-3 Low risk

2. Excavate trenches for installation of service drain.



2.1 Ensure proper ground locates are performed before ground disturbance begins. Consult existing drawings of worksite or local landowners for information of buried utilities. Determine the safest method to remove soil; excavator or hydrovac.

2.2 Journeyman to obtain proper plumbing permit for installation and ensure all drainage piping systems are approved by an inspector.

JSA 01.007 Hydrovacing trenching SWP 26.031 Excavations

1-3 Low risk

3. Equipment checks for mobile and stationary


4-6 Low/Moderate


Section 25 HSE manual

1-3 Low risk

VALARD

Document Description: JSA for Created by: Doc. Number: Health, Safety & Environmental Policy Form





Standard Reference


Page 2 of 4

equipment.

3.2 Fluid leaks risk 3.2 Ensure spill kit is on hand. Vehicle/Equipment policy-inspections

4 Rough in of drainage service piping from dorms to lift stations. Use appropriate power tools as required for task.

4.1 Back, arm, shoulder strain from lifting drain piping.

4.2 Pinch points when working with tools/materials and camlocks on pipe connections.

4.3 Hand injury from drill/orbital bit.

4.4 Slips and trips on uneven surfaces.

4.5 Exposure to plumbing glue

4-6 Low/moderate risk

4.1 Use buddy system when handling long awkward pipe.

4.2 Wear appropriate gloves for task.

4.3 Be aware of pinch/crush hazards when using hammers, saws, etc.

4.4 Lay out plumbing materials in an orderly fashion to prevent trip hazards.

4.5 MSDS information on hand to prevent unnecessary exposure.

SWP 26.050 Manual lifting and handling. SWP 26.025 Use of hand tools. SWP 080 Tools materials and cutting MSDS inventory Alberta Plumbing code

1-3 Low risk

5 Connect service drain piping to lift stations/ sewage holding tanks.

5.1 Poor drainage leads to blockages and possible drainage system failure. Exposure to effluent.

8-10 Moderate/high risk.

5.1 All plumbing drain piping to be installed with appropriate grade. See local plumbing code to application.

Provincial plumbing code.

1-3 Low risk

6 Ensure all drainage, lift stations, and holding tanks are protected from freezing.

6.1 Drainage system failure. Exposure to effluent.


6.1 All plumbing drain piping to be protected from freezing with the use of heat tracing, insulation, etc.

Provincial plumbing and building code.

1-3 Low risk

7 Install protective barriers for above ground piping.



7.1 Install effective barriers around above ground piping.

Provincial plumbing and building code.


8 Create plan drawing of all underground utilities to be turned over camp maintenance post new



8.1 A hardcopy or electronic plan of all underground utilities for to be developed for camp set up. Plans will



VALARD






Standard Reference


Page 3 of 4

NAME (print) SIGNATURE DATE COMPANY

construction. also be turned over to camp maintenance after new construction.

VALARD






Standard Reference


Page 4 of 4

Document Description: JSA for Snow Removal with Equipment Created by: B.Dawson Doc. Number:

Date: Dec 11, 2018 Revision #: 0 Date Revised: Revised by:

Page 1 of 4



Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 1. Inspect Equipment 1.1 Slips/Trips

1.2 Pinch Points 1.3 Equipment Failure 1.4 Environmental 1.5 Poor Lighting

8-Mod/High 1.1. 3 point of contact when entering/exiting equipment

1.2. Proper gloves. Proper hand and finger placement around open panels or doors

1.3. Complete daily inspection. Document any deficiencies.

1.4. Ensure hydraulics are warmed and exercised. Watch for leaks when starting. Use spill tray. Have spill kit available

26.013 Company Vehicles 26.080 Gloves 26.029 Cold Weather

2- Low

Exp

osur

e

Hazard

1 2 3 4 5 1 1 2 3 4 5 2 2 4 6 8 10 3 3 6 9 12 15 4 4 8 12 16 20 5 5 10 15 20 25

1-3 Low Risk




4-6 Low / Moderate

Risk


12-25 Unaccepta

ble Risk




Page 2 of 4


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 1.5. Ensure adequate lighting

2. Assess Site to be cleared

2.1. Electrical Contact 2.2. Trip Hazards 2.3. Hidden Hazards

6-Low/Mod 2.1. Trace back any cords or lines from generators. Identify using rope, delineators, ribbon, etc

2.2. Ensure proper footing while walking area. Careful planned steps

2.3. Probe area upon entering. Identify obstructions.

26.050 Manual Lifting 26.021 Extension Cords

2- Low

3. Clearing Snow 3.1 Operating equipment

3.2 Property Damage 3.3 Miscommunication 3.4 Crush Points 3.5 Electrical Contact

8-Mod/High 3.1 Ensure operator is qualified and competent

3.2 Assign spotter. Spotter must be used within 1m of any facility or structure. (3m inside substation).

3.3 Establish communication between spotter and operator. If operator loses sight of spotter, equipment must stop until re-established

3.4 Spotter to stay out from fixed and moving objects.

3.5 Hand expose cables using a shovel.

26.050 Manual Lifting 26.025 Hand Tools 26.027 Spotters

4- Low



Page 3 of 4


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 4 Clean up work area

once complete task 5.1 Environmental 5.2 Housekeeping 5.3 Slips/Trips/Falls

6-Low/Mod 5.1 Place spill tray under equipment

5.2 Return tools and equipment

5.3 3 point of contact exiting equipment

26.050 Manual Lifting 26.025 Hand Tools 26.043 Housekeeping

3- Low



Page 4 of 4


Document Description: JSA High Pressure Washing Vehicles & Equipment Created by: J. Howie Doc. Number: JSA Date: April 3, 2018 Revision #: 0 Date Revised: Revised by:

Page 1 of 4



Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 1. Mobilize to site 1.1 Equipment failure

1.2 Poor driving

conditions 1.3 Wildlife and traffic 1.4 Wrong directions/

Miscommunications

5 Low/Mod 1.1 Complete walk around and equipment checklists (pre-trip inspections)

1.2 Be prepared for all conditions, drive to them

1.3 Use tire chains where

necessary

1.4 Pay attention to the road –no distracted driving

1.5 Do not use cell phones

while driving

HSE manual -Section 25 “Vehicle Policy”

2 Low Risk

Exp

osur

e

Hazard

1 2 3 4 5 1 1 2 3 4 5 2 2 4 6 8 10 3 3 6 9 12 15 4 4 8 12 16 20 5 5 10 15 20 25

1-3 Low Risk




4-6 Low /

Moderate Risk


12-25 Unaccepta

ble Risk



Page 2 of 4


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating

1.6 Plan the route before leaving, call for assistance

2. Set up of Pressure

Washer & Vehicle/Equipment

2.1 Exhaust fumes

2.2 Fuel spill, fire 2.3 Slips, Trips & Falls

6 Low – Moderate Risk

2.1 Set up in a well ventilated area (outdoors)

2.2 Use a spill tray when fueling. Allow engine to cool for 10 minutes before refueling.

2.3 Set up where there is no pedestrian traffic

2.4 Cone off area around washing set up

HSE Manual – Section 7 Environmental Policy

2 Low Risk

3. Operate High Pressure Washer

3.1 Hose Failure

3.2 Fittings and couplers (connection) failure

3.3 Nozzle failure

8 Mod. – High Risk

3.1 Inspect hoses for kinks, crushing, stretching or blistering, rusted or broken reinforcing wires

3.2 Inspect fittings and couplers for damage, proper assembly and proper connector type. Use whip checks.

3.3 Inspect nozzle for damage

HSE Policy Sect. 10 “PPE”

3 Low Risk


Page 3 of 4


Hazard Rating


Standard Reference

Post Mitigation

Rating 3.4 Pressure gun/wand

failure 3.5 Exposure to extreme

water pressure 3.6 Exposure to noise 3.7 Injuries from flying

debris 3.8 Reaction to cleansers

3.4 Inspect gun/wand for damage

3.5 Ensure gun/wand has trigger/deadman switch.

3.6 Wear hearing protection 3.7 Eye protection, gloves and

CSA boots 3.8 Review MSDS (SDS)


Page 4 of 4


Document Description: JSA for Installing Spacer Dampers Created by: H. McNeil Doc. Number: JSA

Date: July 26, 2011 Revision #: 0 Date Revised: Revised by:


Page 1 of 5

Exp

osur

e

Hazard 1 2 3 4 5

1 1 2 3 4 5

2 2 4 6 8 10

3 3 6 9 12 15

4 4 8 12 16 20

5 5 10 15 20 25

1-3 Low Risk


8-10



4-6 Low /

Moderate Risk




Task / Activity



Standard Reference


1. Transporting carts to worksite

1.1 Equipment damage to pulley

3 Low Risk 1.1 Carts tied to a vehicle upright with wheels.

3 Low Risk

2. Cart inspection at work site or prior to use

2.1 Equipment damage or repairs / Unsafe equipment

3 Low Risk 2.1 Inspection of: - Pulley wheels for

wear or cracks. If cracked, no use.

- Safety clips function properly. If defective, replace.

- Main welds on rails & cart frame. No use if defects, effect certified repairs.

- All bolts tight, torqued, if not, effect repairs or

1 Low Rick

Document Description: JSA for Installing Spacer Dampers Created by: H. McNeil Doc. Number: JSA 01.049



Hazard Rating


Standard Reference


Page 2 of 5

replacement by engineering specs.

3. Equipment selection and inspection

3.1 Defective equipment

3.2 Wear or Damage

3.3 Forgetting Equipment

8 – Moderate to High Risk

3.1 Inspection of: - Fall arrest system

and harness inspected up to date and daily.

- Double lanyards installed correctly for support.

- Rescue rope (min 75’) attached securely to cart.

- 15’ brake rope ½” or 5/8” attached secured in cart.

- Cloth bag secured for small tools.

- Tether strap for portable tools.

- Radio checks for designated radio on crew for communication or emergency.

- Engineering specs in vehicle at site.

3 Low Risk

4. Hoist cart to structure 4.1 Job communication not covered

4.2 Improper rigging


4.1 Morning meeting to include working location.

4.2 Cart attached by proper rope or rigging for approx 42-50lbs cart weight.

3 Low Risk




Hazard Rating


Standard Reference


Page 3 of 5

4.3 Falling material 4.4 Lack of signals

4.5 Falls from elevation

4.3 Lift area clear using ground man

4.4 Lost signals, ground man at the hoist STOPS.

4.5 Tie off at heights

5. Attaching cart to conductor

5.1 Falling material 5.2 Pinch points

5.3 Heavy loads


5.1 Cart to remain secured to rigging lines untill pulleys and safety clips attached.

5.2 Hands clear of pinch point between basket and cart Use Gloves.

5.3 Ensure adequate manpower

3 Low Risk

6. Workers transfer from tower to cart

6.1 Fall

6.2 Distance beyond working length of double lanyards.

6.3 Hard hat blocking view


6.1 100% tie-off using double lanyard system.

6.2 Conductor tie off exceeds 5000lbs as per procedures.

6.3 Tie-off point is conductor only

3- Low Risk

7. Installing spacers and traveling on conductor

7.1 Pinch points at pulleys

7.2 Friction on hands


7.1 Gloves and spare-gloves to be available.

7.2 Brake rope used in front

3 - Low Risk




Hazard Rating


Standard Reference


Page 4 of 5

7.3 Uncontrolled cart movement

of cart on conductor attached to insulators.

7.3 Rope available to anchor cart.

8. Installing spacers with hand tools or impact tools

8.1 Falling material 8.2 Falling tools


8.1 Work area clear below. 8.2 Impact gun on tether. 8.3 Hand tools in cloth

bucket.

3 – Low risk

9 Operator leaving the cart

9.1 Fall potential 9.2 Pinch points 9.3 Collisions 9.4 Cart movement


9.1 Boom truck basket signals to cart location. 9.2 Cart secured for

transfer. 9.3 Double lanyard system

when leaving cart to basket.

3 Low Risk




Hazard Rating


Standard Reference


Page 5 of 5


VALARD

Document Description: JSA for Tower Material Hauling Created by: Bill Szumik Doc.

Number: JSA 01.2011.001

Date: July 28, 2010 Revision #: 0 Date Revised: Reviised by:

This JSA is to aid the site supervisor in planning the work to be used in conjunction with other job planning tools, such as the daily tailboard sheet and other applicable procedures, etc. This should not be viewed as the complete job plan but as a starting point. Normal proper personnel protective equipment should be worn at all times and is not addressed in this JSA unless there is a specific need. Job Steps Major Hazards Barriers/Controls/Fixes Significant Concerns

Page 1 of 2

Job Steps Major Hazards Barriers/Controls/Fixes Significant Concerns Position trailer Over head hazards

electrical - contact with live circuits. Soft ground – tipping front end loader Other vehicular/personnel traffic – striking vehicles/personnel

• Designated Signaller if near overhead lines. • Move trailer away from soft ground. • If needed barrier area or have extra workers to keep

others away.

Position trailer unit as close as possible to steel bundles to minimize travel distance of front end loader. Ideally steel was positioned in an area away from overhead lines and on good ground.

Load trailer Front end loader tipping Steel bundle falling Striking vehicles or personnel Improper secured steel bundles

• Check weight of bundle to ensure not over the lift capacity of front end loader.

• Check banding on bundles so bundles do not come apart.

• Workers clear of load, not under, use taglines if necessary.

• Position steel bundles on blocking and ensure bundles are secure so as not to slide or tip over.

• Trailer deck to be clear of tripping slipping hazards. • Ensure area clear of others. If high traffic area get

workers to flag. • Ensure hold downs are of sufficient strength and

quantity to secure load.

Ensure front end loader operator is competent to operate front end loader. Check load chart capacity of front end loader against largest bundle weight to be lifted. Do not over load trailer. Check capacity of trailer.

VALARD

Document Description: JSA for Tower Material Hauling Created by: Bill Szumik Doc.

Number: JSA 01.2011.001


Job Steps Major Hazards Barriers/Controls/Fixes Significant Concerns

Page 2 of 2

Travel to unloading site Other vehicular traffic Taking poor route Right of way restrictions

• Be wary of other drivers. • Traffic control may be necessary at some location. • Know route beforehand and take less travelled route

to unloading site. • Check for any road restrictions or are special

permits required. • Determine beforehand if there are any restriction or

other work activity which may impede travel.

A pre job drive to site by tractor trailer operator may be warranted. May need special permits.

Position trailer at site Soft ground – tipping front end loader Other vehicular/personnel traffic – striking vehicles/personnel

• Move trailer away from soft ground. • If needed barrier area or have extra workers to keep

others away.

Position trailer unit as close as possible to steel bundles to minimize travel distance of front end loader. Ideally steel was positioned in an area away from overhead lines and on good ground.

Unloading at site Over head hazards electrical Front end loader tipping Steel bundle falling Striking vehicles or personnel Improper secured steel bundles

• Designated Signaller if near overhead lines. • Check weight of bundle to ensure not over the lift

capacity of front end loader. • Check banding on bundles so bundles do not come

apart. • Workers clear of load, not under, use taglines if

necessary. • Position steel bundles on blocking on the ground

and ensure bundles are secure so as not to slide or tip over.

• Ensure area clear of others. If high traffic area get workers to flag.


Page 1 of 8

Document Description Tower Rescue Procedure Created By: Work Methods Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.001

Date: Mar. 24, 2015 Revision: 2 Revised by: D. Page Date: June 5, 2018

27.001 Tower Rescue Procedure Purpose The purpose of this document is to provide our employees with a Safe procedure to be used in the event that a fall from height has occurred, leaving the worker suspended by their fall arrest system. Only qualified trained personnel who have completed and passed Valard’s Rescue Training Program or equivalent are considered competent to perform rescue training. This training exercise shall be used in conjunction with a documented Fall Protection Plan (FPP). All applicable rescue and escape methods must be practiced annually. Note: Prior to the commencement of any work requiring the use of a Fall Protection System, the supervisor on site must ensure that all staff requiring the use of a Fall Protection System has completed up to date Fall Protection Training. A Fall Protection Plan (FPP) MUST be completed, reviewed and signed by ALL crew members completing this rescue exercise. All rescue plans should be based on the premise that the victim is injured, unresponsive and/or unable to help with the rescue. Victims must be rescued promptly. If the victim is not breathing, you will have approximately 4 minutes before permanent brain damage can occur due to lack of oxygen. If the victim is breathing but suspended motionless in a fall restraint system, you have approximately 15 minutes before restricted blood circulation causes injury as well. Completing a rescue plan will assist to ensure that a rescuer can quickly and safely reach the victim by assessing the condition of the victim, ability to apply appropriate first aid and safely lower the victim to the ground. The “plan” should also factor in any equipment, which may be available on site, to aid in the rescue, such as a Helicopter, Man lift, Crane basket or Bucket truck. Remember these may be the primary means of rescue however, during the discussions of your FPP you need to identify, document and practice “how” they will be used PRIOR to the commencement of any work. Whenever working at heights exceeding 3m (10ft.), a FPP and fall protection system is required. It must be understood that in the event of a fall, there is always the possibility that a victim may strike an object during the fall, or that the injury itself may have been the cause of the fall. In either case, the worker may or may not be able to return to their work position without your assistance and you will need to assess the situation to identify what the causal factors are that may have caused the worker to be arrested in the first place (equipment failure, human error, electrocution, etc.), in order to ensure that you are not injured in the attempt to rescue the victim. Once the injured worker reaches the ground, first aid will be applied as required and the worker will be transported to the hospital. Tower rescue must be practiced and documented annually, at a minimum.

Page 2 of 8



Rescue Equipment A dedicated rescue rope is preferred for emergency rescue. Note: This should only be used if a helicopter, man lift or crane basket cannot reach the injured worker. The presently available Rescue Rope Kits use 11 mm (7/16 in.) kernmantle rope 500 feet, breaking strength of 7200 lbs. The following accessories are also in the rescue kit.

CMI RC103 Pulley

Anchor Sling

Rescue 8

Page 3 of 8



Large karabiner

Small karabiner

Rigging the Figure 8 Device To brake with the right hand, stand with the rope on the right side. Hold the figure 8 in your left hand with the large hole away from you. Rig the Figure 8 device as shown in the steps below.

Step 1 Push a loop through the large

hole of the Figure 8.

Step 2 Pull the loop over the small

end of the Figure 8.

Step 3 Connect the small hole of the

Figure 8 to your harness with a karabiner.

Rigging the Figure 8

Controlling Rate of Descent

The rate of descent is based on the position and amount of tension on the tail of the rope. To decrease speed of the descent, do any one of the following: • Hold the rope tighter with your breaking hand, • Push the rope tighter against the body, • Wrap the rope around more body surface (buttocks), or • Have ground personnel tension on the rope (this is particularly useful should the

person aloft slip or become unconscious).

Page 4 of 8



Controlling the Rate of Descent

Locking off a Figure 8 The Figure 8 device can be locked off to prevent descent before exiting the bucket. While holding the rope tightly in your brake hand, move it towards the Figure 8. When the hand is about 8 in. (200 mm) away smoothly draw the rope over the top of the Figure 8 and wedge it down between the Figure 8 and the standing line. One wrap will support the weight of most people, and a second wrap will secure it. A third wrap held with an overhand knot tied to the standing line can be used to provide additional security.

Locking off a Figure 8

Rescue from a Tower This rescue would be used when a victim wearing a full body harness, lanyard and shock absorber has fallen off the structure and is hanging from a fixed anchor point such as a tower arm. This rescue is to be carried out by two persons; one rescuer in the tower and one rescuer on the ground. You will need:

1. One Rescue Kit containing; a. rescue rope (all rescue ropes are 500 feet in length) b. anchor sling c. rescue block d. Figure 8 e. large karabiner

Page 5 of 8



2. Tag Line, long enough to suit the length that the fall victim is above the ground 3. A sharp knife

Method 1 – From ground Step Action

Rescuer #1 1 Call 911 and call for help from other workers

2 Call to the victim, if the victim is “non” responsive, assess the surroundings to identify causal factors

3 If deemed clear, climb the tower carrying the rescue rope and a block to a point beside or above the victim (if a rescue rope and/or block are not already aloft or raise it with a handline).

4 Attach the block to a steel member using the anchor sling, taking into account the anchor point of attachment and rescue descent path. Reeve the rescue rope through the block and attach to the back “D” ring. In the event back “D” ring is not accessible then use the front “D” ring. Note: If the victim is nonresponse and possibly not breathing, make every attempt possible to reach the victim to administer First Aid immediately

5 If the rescuer can reach the back “D” ring on the injured workers harness. • Connect the rescue rope directly into the back “D” ring. • Connect a tag line (if required) into the back “D” ring, ensuring that ground

personnel can effectively tag the victim clear of all obstructions. If the rescuer cannot reach the back “D” ring on the victim’s injured workers harness: • Raise a switch stick and anchor hook to the rescue location on the structure. • Connect the rescue rope to the anchor hook. • Connect the rescue rope to the victim’s back “D” ring using the switch stick and

anchor hook. • Connect a tagline (if required) to the rescue rope and allow it to slide down to

the anchor hook, ensuring that ground personnel can effectively tag the victim clear of all obstructions.

Note: The tagline, if required, must not be connected directly on the victim. Connecting directly to the victim will put undue stress on the body when tagging out.

Rescuer # 2 6 Run the rope through a Figure 8 (see attached drawing above) anchored to the

tower leg (or through a karabiner and tie a munter hitch) to provide a friction brake.

7 Raise (the rescuer on the tower and the rescuer on the ground) the injured worker with the rescue rope together to take weight from the victim's fall arrest. If the victim is connected to the rescue rope through an anchor hook, connect the

Page 6 of 8



karabiner from the victim's shock absorber onto the karabiner on the anchor hook. This provides a safety connection in the event that the victim somehow comes loose from the anchor hook.

8 Detach the victim from their fall arrest (i.e. cut the fall arrest rope/pole strap). The full weight of the injured worker will then be taken on the rescue line controlled by the rescuer # 2 on the ground.

9 Lower the victim, controlling the rate of descent. Tagging the victim around an obstruction will have to be done by others (if available) on the ground.

10 Administer First Aid Immediately

Using the back “D” ring

Page 7 of 8



Method 2 – Helicopter Note: All crew members assigned with the task of performing helicopter work must be deemed competent in performing this procedure by means of theory and practical applications and must have radio communication at all times. Crew will have tower rescue kit pre-inspected and on site at ALL times in the event that a workplace accident/injury occurs, resulting in a tower rescue to be performed. Step Action

1 Call 911 and call for help from other workers 2 Helicopter picks up rescue kit, long line and grapple hook and two crew members.

3 Helicopter drops off Rescuer # 1 on tower with “rescue kit” and “tag line” and then descends to the ground with Rescuer # 2.

4 Rescuer # 1 then calls to the victim, if the victim is “non” responsive, assess the surroundings to identify causal factors

5

Rescuer # 1 then attaches the block to a steel member using the anchor sling, taking into account the rescue descent path. Using tag line, lower the remainder of the rescue kit to Rescuer #2 on the ground. Once rescue kit is lowered to the ground, reeve the rescue rope through the block and attach to the back “D” ring. In the event back “D” ring is not accessible then use the front “D” ring. Note: If the victim is nonresponse and possibly not breathing, make every attempt possible to reach the victim to administer First Aid immediately

6

If the rescuer can reach the back “D” ring on the injured workers harness. • Connect the rescue rope directly into the back “D” ring. • Connect a tag line (if required) into the back “D” ring, ensuring that ground

personnel can effectively tag the victim clear of all obstructions. If the rescuer cannot reach the back “D” ring on the victim’s injured workers harness: • Raise a switch stick and anchor hook to the rescue location on the structure. • Connect the rescue rope to the anchor hook. • Connect the rescue rope to the victim’s back “D” ring using the switch stick and

anchor hook. • Connect a tagline (if required) to the rescue rope and allow it to slide down to

the anchor hook, ensuring that ground personnel can effectively tag the victim clear of all obstructions.

Note: The tagline, if required, must not be connected directly on the victim. Connecting directly to the victim will put undue stress on the body when tagging out.

7 Rescuer # 2, run the rope through a Figure 8 (see attached drawing above) anchored to the tower leg (or through a karabiner and tie a munter hitch) to provide a friction brake.

Page 8 of 8



8 Raise (the rescuer on the tower and the rescuer on the ground) the injured worker with the rescue rope together to take weight from the victim's fall arrest. If the victim is connected to the rescue rope through an anchor hook, connect the karabiner from the victim's shock absorber onto the karabiner on the anchor hook. This provides a safety connection in the event that the victim somehow comes loose from the anchor hook.

9

Detach the victim from their fall arrest (i.e. cut the fall arrest rope/pole strap). The full weight of the injured worker will then be taken on the rescue line controlled by the rescuer # 2 on the ground.


11 Run the rope through a Figure 8 anchored to the tower leg (or through a karabiner and tie a munter hitch) to provide a friction brake.

12 Raise (the rescuer on the tower and the rescuer on the ground) the injured worker with the rescue rope to take weight from the victim's fall arrest. If the victim is connected to the rescue rope through an anchor hook, connect the karabiner from the victim's shock absorber onto the karabiner on the anchor hook. This provides a safety connection in the event that the victim somehow comes loose from the anchor hook.

13 Detach the victim from their fall arrest (i.e. cut the fall arrest rope/pole strap). The full weight of the injured worker will then be taken on the rescue line controlled by the rescuer # 2 on the ground.


15 Administer First Aid Immediately

Document Description Bucket Rescue And Escape Procedure Created By: Work Methods Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.002

Date: Mar. 24, 2015 Revision: 2 Revised by: D. Page Date: April 20, 2015

27.002 Bucket Rescue and Escape Purpose The purpose of this document is to describe methods of bucket rescue and escape in the event of equipment failure and/or worker injury. Only qualified personnel who have successfully completed Valard’s Fall Protection Training Program are considered competent to perform rescue training. This training exercise shall be used in conjunction with a documented Fall Protection Plan (FPP). All applicable rescue and escape methods must be practiced and documented annually at a minimum. Note: Prior to the commencement of any work requiring the use of a Fall Protection System, the supervisor on site must ensure that all staff requiring the use of a Fall Protection System has completed up to date Fall Protection Training. A Fall Protection Plan (FPP) MUST be completed, reviewed and signed by ALL crew members completing this exercise. All rescue plans should be based on the premise that the victim may be injured, unresponsive and/or unable to help with the rescue. Victims must be rescued promptly. If the victim is not breathing, you will have approximately 4 minutes before permanent brain damage can occur due to lack of oxygen. Completing a rescue plan will assist to ensure that a rescuer can quickly and safely assess the situation, lower the victim to the ground, remove the victim from the bucket or Manbasket, assess the condition of the victim, and apply appropriate first aid as required while waiting for assistance to arrive on the scene. The “FPP” should also factor in the equipment’s “emergency lowering device”, safe location to lower the victim in the event of an incident, ability of the bucket itself (able to dump), rescue equipment on site in the event bucket does not “dump”, 911 location, first aiders on site and the role that each person will take (if more than 2) in the event of an incident.



Understand the use of the Emergency Power/Lower Controls device: Understanding the unit and its functions/controls prior to use can be pivotal when a rescue situation is necessary. Some bucket trucks are similar in design but Do Not always has same functions or capabilities. Emergency Power Some systems consist of a hydraulic pump driven by a DC motor, which is powered by the truck engine battery. The system is connected in parallel with the main pump and is designed for non-continuous operation. Toggle switches are used to energize the system at the upper and lower controls. Emergency power is only available when the primary power source is not operating. Caution: Do not operate emergency power longer than thirty (30) seconds at a time. After 30 seconds shut off power and wait a few minutes for motor to cool.

Lower Controls The lower controls are mounted to the side of the turret or at the back of truck. A selector switch or toggle will indicate upper or lower control operation. Toggle switches operate all boom functions at reduced speeds. An emergency stop palm button is also provided. The emergency stop kills power to the controls, control valve, and stops the chassis engine The picture given below is a standard design lower control board. Labeled clearly with functions



1.0 Bucket Rescue 1.1 Miller Rescue Rig

The Miller rescue device (Figure 3) is recommended for use on aerial devices that will not articulate enough for the bucket(s) to reach the ground. The rescue device is comprised of a set of rope blocks, which are mounted to the boom of an aerial device. The rope blocks are stored in a Velcro enclosed vinyl bag. The rescue device must be installed on the boom according to manufacturer’s instruction before the aerial operations begin. 1.1.1 Procedure

Step Action 1 Call for help, assess the situation to determine the “cause” of the incident and, if

“safe” to do so, lower the bucket(s) from the accident area and position against one side of the truck clear of any obstructions.

2 Open the Miller rescue device kit allowing all of the rope to fall out onto the ground. If you cannot reach the Rescue Rig it can be opened easily with a switch stick. Note: It is important that all of the rope falls onto the ground. Do not allow the rope to become entangled on any object as this could hinder the free movement of the rope and thus the rescue itself

3 Pull enough rope through the block and tackle to allow the snap hook to be connected to the rear D-ring of the victim's full body harness and then detach the victim's safety lanyard.

4 Move the upper boom 3 to 5 feet away from the side of the truck. This will ensure adequate space for the victim to pass between the bucket(s) and the side of the truck to the ground.

5 While positioned on the ground, pull down on the fall line and extract the victim from the bucket (Figure 4).

6 Guide the victim to the ground and into a suitable position to administer appropriate first aid.



Figure 3 Figure 4

2.0 Emergency Bucket Escape If an aerial device loses power, either from engine failure or hydraulic system failure, the worker in the bucket must have a safe method of reaching the ground. The following emergency escape kits are designed for the safe evacuation of workers from an aerial bucket, man basket or cable car. Two different kits are available for use. 1. Figure 8 Bucket Escape Kit 2. Miller Emergency Descent Kit 2.1 Key Considerations

• Be sure you have a clear descent path to the ground. If the disabled bucket is located

directly over live electrical apparatus the operator should not attempt to descend to the ground using the methods detailed here. In this instance, another aerial device should be used or the operator may be able to safely transfer to a nearby structure to descend.

• If the aerial device is equipped with an emergency 12-volt back-up system it may be utilized to safely return the booms into a stowed position, in the event of the hydraulic pump or engine failure. It is not necessary to remove the worker from the bucket while operating this back-up power supply. Caution: Do not operate emergency power longer than thirty (30) seconds at a time. After 30 seconds shut off power and wait a few minutes for motor to cool.

• Bucket escape procedures must be practiced and documented annually, so that crewmembers will be ready for any emergency. Procedures should be practiced with the bucket approximately 3 meters (10 feet) above the ground.

• Bucket escape kits must be inspected monthly to ensure all components and instructions are included and kit is in good condition.

• Bucket escape kits are kept in a yellow vinyl bag and must be stored in a clean dry location on the vehicle where it is readily available for emergency rescue.

• Bucket escape kits using the descent device should always be stored with the descent



device preset ready for use. 2.2 Method 1- Figure 8 Bucket Escape Kit

All new purchased Figure 8 escape kits will be as illustrated in Figure 5. The end connector has a 5000 lb. gate capacity to prevent rollout. These kits are similar to the Dedicated Rescue Kits and can also be used for pole top and tower rescue.

Figure 5: Figure 8 Bucket Escape Kit Contents



2.2.1 Using a Figure 8 Descent Device

Rigging the Figure 8 Device To brake with the right hand, stand with the rope on the right side. Hold the figure 8 in your left hand with the large hole away from you. Rig the Figure 8 device as follows:

Step 1 Push a loop through the large hole of the Figure 8.

Step 2 Pull the loop over the small end of the Figure 8.

Step 3 Connect the small hole of the Figure 8 to your harness with a karabiner.

Figure 6: Rigging the Figure 8

Controlling Rate of Descent The rate of descent is based on the position and amount of tension on the tail of the rope (Figure 7). To decrease speed of the descent, do any one of the following: • Hold the rope tighter with your breaking hand, • Push the rope tighter against the body, • Wrap the rope around more body surface (buttocks), or • Have ground personnel apply tension on the rope (this is recommended should the

person aloft slip or become unconscious).

Figure 7: Controlling the Rate of Descent



Locking Off a Figure 8 The Figure 8 device can be locked off (refer to Figure 8) to prevent descent before exiting the bucket. While holding the rope tightly in your brake hand, move it towards the Figure 8. When the hand is about 8 in. (200 mm) away smoothly draw the rope over the top of the Figure 8 and wedge it down between the Figure 8 and the standing line. One wrap will support the weight of most people, and a second wrap will secure it. A third wrap held with an overhand knot tied to the standing line can be used to provide additional security.

Figure 8: Locking off a Figure 8

2.2.2 Procedure

Use the Figure 8 kit to escape from an aerial device bucket as follows:

Step Action 1 Pull the "Escape Kit" up with an emergency rope (tag line), disengage your lanyard

from the anchor attachment point and attach the snap end of the escape rope.

2 Take the free snap end of the lanyard and, starting from the left side, thread it through the harness loop (located beside the leg strap) or thread lanyard behind the leg support strap. See Figures 9, 10 and 11 for details on lanyard positioning.

3 Bring the lanyard across the abdomen and thread it through the opposite side loop or leg support strap.

4 Pull all the slack out of the lanyard and bring it back across the abdomen area to the left side and snap it back onto itself, behind the leg support strap. Note: The lanyard is now an attachment point for the Karabiner. Open the karabiner and snap it around the double lanyard.

5 Check to make sure that the rope is free of tangles, twists, or knots and drop the rope to the ground.

6 Pull enough slack through the Figure 8 toward the anchor to ensure the Figure 8 will not bind on the lip of the bucket as you step out. Lock off the Figure 8 by passing the down line over top of and across the Figure 8. Pull the line down firmly.



7 Use the step on the outside of the bucket as an aid, step over the edge of the bucket making sure there is tension on the rope just before the Figure 8 descent device.

8 Unlock the rope by passing the down line back across the Figure 8. Give the rope a quick snap to free it from the bite and slowly ease away and down from the bucket by letting slack in the fall line of the rope. Your weight will cause the Figure "8" to slide down the rope.

2.2.3 Positioning of Lanyard

Figure 9: Miller 8095

Thread lanyard (from behind) under the leg strap, below waist belt.

Figure 10: Jelco 700/735

Thread lanyard through the loop at the hip, above leg connector buckle.



Figure 11: Sala Exofit

Thread lanyard through loop at the shoulder/leg strap junction, above leg connector

2.3 Method 2 - Miller Emergency Escape Kit The Miller Descent Kits are made up of components as indicated in Figure 12. Each kit should contain proper operating and maintenance instructions. Miller Emergency Escape Kits are available in the following lengths.

Length 15 m (50 ft.) 22 m (75 ft.)

Figure 12: Miller Escape Kit Contents



Figure 13: Miller Descent Device

Minimum 2 turns for the first 175lb 1 additional turn for each 50 lb.

2.3.1 Using the Miller Descent Device

The rate of descent is based on the number of turns around the device and the amount of tension you put on the fall line under the descent device. The rope must be wound around the device as illustrated in Figure 13. Key Points

• The Miller descent device must only be used with the cover securely in place. • The Miller descent device is not reversible. If used upside down, the cover may come off, leaving the rope free to uncoil.



2.3.2 Procedure

Use the Miller Descent Kit to escape from an aerial device bucket as follows:

Step Action 1 Pull the emergency descent kit up using the emergency rope (tag line).

2 Remove the outer cover by unscrewing the large thumbnut to its stop position, depress spring plunger and slide down the cover. Check to ensure the correct amount of wraps is applied to the device (Figure 13). Reposition cover.

3 Lock the rope in place by putting a half hitch around the locking lug.

4 Attach the snap end of rescue rope to an approved anchor attachment point. Note: Utilize the hose protector located at the end of the rope to protect the rope from any sharp edges.

5 Drop the rope to the ground making sure the rope is free of tangles, twists and knots. Ensure the rope extends all the way to the ground.

6 Secure crossover link to leg support straps or side D-rings of your full body harness with connectors provided. Refer to Figures 9, 10 and 11 for connection locations.

7 Attach crossover link to Miller Descent Device using karabiner supplied and disconnect lanyard from the anchor attachment on the aerial device.

8 Remove all but enough slack to allow you to climb out of the bucket. Lock the device in place by putting a half hitch around the locking lug.

9 Unlock the rope and slowly ease away and down from the bucket by letting slack in the fall line of the rope. Your weight will cause the descent device to slide down the rope. Have ground personnel apply tension on the rope.

Page 1 of 3

VALARD

Document Description Spill Contingency Procedure Created By: Hayley McNeil Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.005

Date: May 1, 2010 Revision: Revised by: Date:

The Spill Contigency Procedure is intended to assist Valard Contruction and their contractors address commitments to the environment, safety, and legisliative compliance during the construction on the Transmission Line projects and operation of the Work Camp. The inadvertent release of oils, fuels, or gases used in heavy equipment and vehicles is a risk associated with construction. These events may occur as a result of mechanical breakdowns or accidents. Risks can be mitigated through established preventative practices and procedures, use of properly maintained equipment and through the use of spill kits and other materials in the event of an occurrence. PREVENTION: The Valard will take the following precautions as a minimum:

• Inspect all mechanical equipment prior to moving it onto the work site, and at regular intervals once working on the site.

• Equipment must be mechanically sound with no oil leaks. If a leak is detected the equipment will be removed from service until the leak has been fixed.

• Defective fueling equipment, fittings and filters must be replaced immediately when identified.

• Maintenance and refueling will not be done within 100 Meters of watercourse or wetland. • Fuel storage areas will be clearly marked and/or protected to prevent damage from

vehicles • Waste oils and lubricants will be retained in a closed container, and disposed of in an

environmentally acceptable manner. PREPAREDNESS: Spill kits and shovels will be located on each piece of equipment and in all pickup trucks on site. Clean-up materials will be accessible and an adequate inventory will be maintained in the areas of fuel, oil, lubricant and/or chemical storage. MSDS will be maintained for all hazardous material on the project and copies will be available with the onsite medic, Valard’s office, mechanics service trucks, and storage sea-cans.

RESPONSE: In the event of a spill it is of paramount importance that the discharge be stopped at its source and that the spilled material be contained when it is safe to do so. Shovels and other had tools should be used for immediate containment and/or channelization of the spill material into the containment area. In the event of a spill, the following actions should be initiated by the first person on the scene in the listed orders:

• Notify the crew and stop operations if workers, the environment or infrastructure are

endangered then move a safe distance away up-wind or crosswind.

Page 2 of 3

VALARD



• Contact the Construction Manager and notify them of the spill or hazardous material. Details should include location, type of material and volume, your name and contact number.

• Keep a safe distance and approach from up-wind. Look for WHMIS or TDG safety marks to identify the spilled or hazardous material, and assess the hazards.

• Refer to Product MSDS, and/or call CANUTEC for information about appropriate response.

• Report the hazardous material or spill to the appropriate authorities including Environmental Protection Services, Valard Management, contractors and others in the affected area.

• If safe to approach and you have the required PPE, stop the product flow and / or secure the site. Act quickly to shut off pumps, close valves, etc.

• Warn other people in immediate vicinity. Take precautionary measures such as enforcing “No Smoking” and extinguishing any flame or sources of ignition.

• Contain the spill. Block off drains, culverts, ditches. Surround product with dirt or clay, peat, straw, sand, or commercial absorbents to assist with containment.

• Be aware of your surroundings. Do NOT allow yourself to get ‘overcome’ by toxic fumes. ALWAYS have an escape route and Do NOT put yourself at unnecessary risk.

• Develop a remediation plan with regulatory approvals and commence recovery, clean-up and restorative action as appropriate.

• If not safe, all workers must go directly to the muster point and remain there until further direction is provided by the Construction Manager.

Spill Containment Procedures Containment procedures shall be immediately initiated to limit the spread of the spill and to minimize impacts on water bodies or other areas of the environmental concern, and to prevent damage to property. If the spill source is leaking a fuel truck, the tanker shall be pumped dry (into appropriate containers or another tanker). Culverts shall be blocked to limit the spill. A shallow depression shall be excavated or a surface berm constructed in the path of a spill to stop and contain the flow. If feasible, without unduly delaying containment efforts, topsoil shall be salvaged and stored separately during excavation. All free products shall be collected with a vacuum truck and transported to a hazardous waste treatment facility. Sorbent materials shall be applied to contain and recover spilled material. Heavily contaminated soil and vegetation, as well as used sorbent material, shall be disposed of at an approved hazardous waste treatment facility. Traffic shall be minimized on contaminated soils. Wildlife shall be restricted from entering the area affected by the spill. If necessary a fence will be erected.

Page 3 of 3

VALARD



Spills Adjacent to or in a Water Body Berms or trenches shall be constructed to contain spilled product prior to entering into a water body. If spilled material enters into a water body, booms, skimmers and sorbents shall be deployed, if feasible, to contain and recover spilled material. Free Product shall be recovered. Containment areas, including downstream shorelines, shall be cleaned up in consultation will spill response specialists and the appropriate government agencies. Spot Spills Since impact from small spot spills can generally be minimized if immediate action is taken, all small spot spills shall be cleaned up immediately and reported to the project HS&E advisor.

Page 1 of 4

VALARD

Document Description Accessing Landowner’s Property/ROW Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.006

Date: Sept. 23, 2010 Revision: 1 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Jan. 28, 2011

27.006 ACCESSING LANDOWNER’S PROPERTY/RIGHT OF WAY

This procedure is to identify the steps to be taken to prevent any incidents from occurring and to be completed in a safe and efficient manner.

All crews are required to review and ensure the ROW (Right of Way) requirements as specified in the contract for their particular job is known and permission is signed before entering any land. If access information is not indicated in your daily work package, obtain this information from a foreman or supervisor prior to entering any property. Report all damage to your foreman or supervisor immediately. The landowner should also be contacted as repairs due to ruts can frequently be completed immediately thus leaving little minimal or no damage. General Guidelines Stay on adjacent roadways if possible. On new power line construction ensure all permits are in place and stay as close as possible to the centre of the new line being constructed. Most lines offer a maximum allowance of 30 (thirty) feet wide. Fifteen (15) feet on each side of the pole is the maximum traveling area allowance. If you are unable to stay within this ROW area a foreman or supervisor must be contacted and permission to operate equipment outside the designated ROW obtained. ( See Permission Form Next Page) If there are any damages that require repairs the repair Form is to be used and a copy forwarded to the Edmonton office. A Temporary Storage Yard, Access and Work Space Agreement Form is to be completed prior to accessing any landowner’s property, signed and copy sent to the Edmonton office.

Page 2 of 4

VALARD



LAND USE PERMISSION FORM

I give Valard Construction LP permission to enter my property to complete work as required on the powerline system on my land for the following work:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

I will provide Valard with an access and egress point and identify them prior to work commencing. Valard will after the work is completed:

A. Insure that there is no damage to the property (in cases where there may be damage) Valard will inform the landowner of the damage and will endeavour to repair the damaged land to its original condition.

B. Any ruts caused by the equipment shall be repaired prior to Valard leaving the site or if agreed to will return on an agreed date to perform the repairs.

C. If a third party is required to perform any work to correct damage property then that will be agreed upon before the crew leaves the site. The foreman of the crew will discuss this with the landowner and have an agreement signed by both parties.

Landowner;___________________ Signature:________________________ Print name Valard Representative: _________________ Signature;____________________ Print name Date:__________________

Page 3 of 4

VALARD



REPAIR AGREEMENT

Valard will repair the following damage:

A.

B.

C.

D.

Agreement on the repairs as listed above:

Valard Rep:___________________ Signature:________________________

Landowner ___________________ Signature: _______________________

Repairs completion sign off: I ______________________have checked the repairs and found them acceptable. Landowner’s name (printed) Signature:_________________________________ Date:______________________

Page 4 of 4

VALARD



Temporary Storage Yard, Access and Work Space Agreement

I,_________________________________ of _____________________________ in the province of Print name town/city

_________________, being the registered owner of the following lands: Legal Description: _______________________________ _______________________________ _______________________________ and/or.

Address: _______________________________ _______________________________ _______________________________ In the consideration of the sum of ________________________________ Dollars paid to me/us by Valard Construction LP, to access and utilize the area as identified in red on the attached sketch.

Valard Construction LP will indemnify the owner of the said lands against all actions or claims that may be lawfully brought against the owner by reason of any activities carried out by Valard Construction LP or any person claiming through or under Valard Construction LP, in the exercise of any or all the rights hereby granted. It is further understood that the subject agreement is temporary and will expire on the __________ Day of ________________, 2011.

Valard Construction LP will be responsible for any damages that may be caused to fences, property and/or crops as a result of our activities. Dated at: __________________________ in the Province of _________________________

This_________ day of ___________________, 2011.

Landowner__________________________ Valard’s Representative_______________________ Print Name Print Name

______________________________________ ______________________________________ Landowner’s Signature Valard’s Rep. Signature

Page 1 of 3

VALARD

Document Description Equipment Ice Crossing Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.007

Date: Jan. 13, 2006 Revision: 1 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Mar. 8, 2011

27.007 EQUIPMENT CROSSING ON ICE

The purpose of this procedure is to: • Specify rules of good safety practice for all Valard employees and contractors

engaged in operations on ice covers; • Provide information on the thickness of ice required to support moving and

stationary loads; • Specify methods for determining ice thickness and quality

Final decisions about ice crossings have to be made on site by an experienced individual. Before any equipment crosses over any water course, the thickness of the ice must be checked by cutting a hole in it. NOTE: Bulldozers will not use blade or ripper tooth to check ice. The minimum ice thickness of clear blue ice for continuous travel is as follows:

• The first 1,000 kilograms (2,200 pounds) require 14 centimetres (5.5 inches) of

ice • Each additional 1,000 kilograms require 4 centimetres (1.6 inches) • After 50 centimetres (19.7 inches) total thickness of ice, each additional 10,000

kg (22,000 pounds) needs 16 centimetres (6.3 inches) of ice • Therefore, 1 5,000 kilogram (11,000 pounds) service truck needs 30 centimetres

(10 inches) of blue ice • D3 Cat needs approximately 50 centimetres (20 inches) of blue ice • D5H Cat need approximately 60 centimetres (24 inches) of blue ice • D6 LGP needs approximately 65 centimetres (26 inches) of blue ice • D65 LGP Komatsu approximately 75 centimetres (30 inches) of blue ice • D7 LGP approximately 80 centimetres (31 inches) of blue ice • D85 Komatsu approximately 85 centimetres (33 inches) of blue ice

Preventive measures and considerations to ensure safe procedures have to do with effective weight – bearing ice. Ultimately, one must consider the following:

• White ice is only half as effective as Blue ice • If water lies between layers of ice, use only the depth of the top layer of ice • A vehicle speed of less than 30 kilometres an hour is recommended to avoid

wave buildup under the ice • Add 20% to above thickness for saline ice • Determine where the channels are on rivers and check periodically. These areas

will be first to thin when temperatures warm up and water starts to run • A river will continually eat at the bottom of the ice bridge, so the thickness must

be checked before every crossing

Determining ice thickness • Prior to use, the ice should be measured to determine whether its effective

thickness is adequate to support the expected load. The table below should be used as a guide to the required thickness for the loads involved.

Page 2 of 3

VALARD



• To initially determine effective ice thickness, the rule of thumb "one inch (2.5 cm) of clear blue ice for every thousand pounds (450 kg)" may be used.

LOADS ON BLUE ICE

Caution

• Ice that is less than six inches (15 cm) thick should not be used for any crossing. Because of natural variations, thickness may be less than 2 inches (5 cm) in some areas.

• The effective thickness can vary considerably in an ice cover. In particular, dangerously thin areas can occur due to currents in the covers of rivers and estuaries, and on lakes near the inlet or outlet of rivers and streams. Careful attention should be given to reduced ice thickness close to shorelines and around ridges and leads.

• The thickness can be determined by drilling test holes spaced at a maximum of 50 feet (15 m) apart in rivers, and 100 feet (30 m) apart on a lake.

• Crossings should be checked for ice thickness once a week when average air temperatures vary between -15 and -5 degrees Celsius; and daily when the temperature is above -5 degrees Celsius. Checks can be less frequent when ice thickness substantially exceeds requirements. A new hole should be drilled for each ice measurement.

• Ice that is no longer supported by water, due to lowering water levels, may be too weak to support the loads to be applied; conversely, a rising water level can result in the formation of two ice layers with an intervening water layer. Ice thickness tests will reveal these conditions.

Operating precautions • Following are a number of general precautions which should be taken when testing

for ice thickness or crossing ice covers: (a) All persons involved in operations over ice covers should be familiar with

the hazards involved, the precautions to be taken and the basic rescue techniques required in case of a breakthrough.

Required Minimum Ice Thickness in

inches

Description of Safe Moving Load

4 One person on foot 5 One Snowmobile 7 A single passenger automobile 8 A 2 ½ Ton Truck 9 A 3 ½ Ton Truck 10 A 7 to 8 Ton Truck 14 A 10 Ton Truck 19 A 20 Ton truck 24 A 30 Tom Truck 30 A 40 Ton Truck

Page 3 of 3

VALARD



(b) Single persons or single vehicles should not venture onto an ice cover when there is no help at hand.

(c) When testing, persons on foot should be securely roped together, with minimum spacing of 50 feet (15 m).

(d) Light vehicles used during test periods and initial build-up should be equipped with an extended frame of logs to provide support if the vehicles break through the ice cover.

(e) A rope at least 50 feet (15 m) long, or equivalent to water depth, with a float, may be attached to test vehicles as an aid to marking and recovery.

(f) Vehicle doors and cab hatches should be removed or lashed open; seat belts must NOT be worn.

(g) Adequate spacing must be maintained between vehicles; it is recommended that an interval of at least 100 feet (30 m) be observed.

(h) Vehicle speed should not normally exceed 10 m/h (15 km/h) in order to avoid the effects of the hydrodynamic wave, nor should speed be less than 1 m/h (1.5 km/h) in order to avoid the effects of stationary load.

(k) Equipment required for rescue operations, such as "mats" (chained or wire-linked small logs or heavy planks as a platform for rescue vehicles) jacks, hoists, etc., should be available near by.

(l) Frequently it is the second vehicle in a convoy which encounters ice failure problems. Before a second heavily loaded vehicle proceeds along the ice bridge, it is advisable to have it preceded by a more lightly loaded vehicle to check the route.

Steps:

1. Review hazards and record on the tailboard with a plan to address them.

2. Identify area of crossing (to be determined by experienced person)

3. Check condition of ice (blue or white)

4. Worker to wear PFD and attached to a 50 foot rope.

5. Second worker must be present (no one is to walk on ice alone).

6. Drill hole to determine thickness of ice on river every 30 feet.

7. Using Table calculate load rating of ice.

8. Cross the ice with equipment that is less than the load rating of the ice.

9. Test ice whenever the weather warms up above freezing.

10. Cross the ice at no more than 15 km per hour and not less than 1.5 km per

hour.

11. Insure adequate spacing between vehicles.

Page 1 of 2

VALARD

Document Description Material Placement in Laydown Yard Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.011


27.011 Material Placement in Laydown Yard This procedure is to identify the steps to be taken to prevent any incidents from occurring and to be completed in a safe and efficient manner.

Safety Equipment required;

• Hard hat

• Safety glasses

• Protective boots

• High visibility vest or outerwear

• Fall arrest equipment to be worn above 6 feet. Steps:

1. Write tailboard, discuss and sigh off.

2. Setup equipment Crane/Boom truck and/or Zoom boom/Forklift.

3. Flagg off area where material is being lifted.

4. Install outrigger pads under the equipment’s outriggers.

5. When installing out rigger pads insure pads are placed under the outrigger

properly.

6. If ground is unstable and outrigger pushes the pad into the ground, lift outrigger

and install more pads until the machine is stable.

7. If at any time the vehicle becomes unstable while working on the job, stop and add

more pads to prevent the vehicle from becoming unstable to the point of tipping

over.

8. All workers are responsible for the vehicle setup. Pay attention to the stability of the

machine at all times, and let the operator know of any potential problems.

9. Unload material from truck deck. Fall arrest to be worn above 6 feet.

10. If material is large a minimum of 2 (two) slings rated for the load are to be used.

11. Place material on dunnage. (Insure dunnage is placed in position to insure sling

placement is not obstructed by other material or dunnage).

12. Material must be placed in a stable manner.

13. Clean up area and sign off on tailboard as completed.

Page 2 of 2

VALARD

Document Description Material Placement in Laydown Yard Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.011


Hazards Vehicle tipping.

• Make sure outrigger pads are being used. Once outriggers are down swing boom over the side of the vehicle to check stability.

• When lifting loads with the boom extended out, keep the load close to the ground until load can be safely handled.

Material Damage. • When laying down material place it on sufficient sized dunnage to be able to

support the load. • Do not place more that 2 pieces of material on each other. • Dunnage must be placed in between each piece.

Page 1 of 2

VALARD

Document Description Hauling Metal Structures Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.012


27.012 HAULING METAL STRUCTURES This procedure is to identify the steps to be taken to prevent any incidents from

occurring and to be completed in a safe and efficient manner.

Personal Protective Equipment Required; • Hard hat • Safety Glasses • Gloves • High Visibility Vest

HAZARDS AND CONTROL MEASURES: Loading Steel • Control method: • Make sure proper rigging is being used. • Check load charts to make sure weights are within lifting capacities of boom

truck. • Stay clear of load when lifting and lowering into place. • Place stakes to prevent material from falling of the sides of the trailer.

Unloading Steel • Control method: Make sure proper rigging is being used. • Check load charts to make sure weights are within lifting capacities of boom

truck. • Stay clear of load when lifting and lowering into place.

SEQUENCE OF WORK

Complete tailboard, discuss and sign off. 1. Loading of Steel • Set up Hi-boy • Use sling/shackle to lift structure • Place barriers on trailer sides to prevent material from falling off while loading. • Driver must have the exact directions to worksite.

Hauling

• Tie down and secure load as per Load securement standards • Arrange for travel permits if required (long/heavy load) • If traveling on Ice Roads Follow Ice Road Chart Ice must be of sufficient

thickness.

Page 2 of 2

VALARD

Document Description Hauling Metal Structures Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.012


• Door must not be closed • Speed must be maintained as per guidelines. 2. Traveling on highways. • Check load weight and to ensure unit is not overloaded.

(Refer to Valard Safe Work Practice re “Vehicles” • Speed limits must be followed • If provincial borders are to be crossed insure that permits are available. 3. Traveling on Right of Way. • If right of way is snow covered have tire chains available 4. Unloading Steel • Clear snow from work site. • Set up Hi-Boy • Setup outriggers c/w outrigger pads • Use sling/shackle to unload steel • Lay down bundles on blocking • Lay out bundles to minimize moving steel for assembly HAZARDS AND CONTROL MEASURES: Loading Steel - Control method: Make sure proper rigging is being used. Check load charts to

make sure weights are within lifting capacities of boom truck. Stay clear of load when lifting and lowering into place. PPE required -hard hat and steel toe boots.

Unloading Steel - Control method: Make sure proper rigging is being used. Check load charts to

make sure weights are within lifting capacities of boom truck. Stay clear of load when lifting and lowering into place.

Page 1 of 4

VALARD

Document Description Installing Augured Footings Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.013

Date: Sept. 2011 Revision: Revised by: Date:

27.013 AUGERED FOOTING PROCEDURE This procedure is to identify the steps to be taken to prevent any incidents from occurring and to be completed in a safe and efficient manner. Safety Equipment required: 1. Safety Glasses, hardhat, and boots 2. Fall Arrest equipment and temporary barriers 3. Hi-visibility vest Tools and Equipment required: 1. Track mounted augering machine 2. Rebar cage 3. Various formworks depending on soil conditions e.g. masonite sheets, sonotube, corrugated

steel culverts, casings, etc. 4. Footing framework and anchor bolt template 5. Slings 6. Shackles (sized for the weight being lifted) Steps: 1. Complete tailboard. 2. If hold off is required, make sure switching is in place. 3. Setup augering machine and crane at site, level complete with outrigger pads where

applicable. 4. If working near existing power lines the crane must grounded. 5. Attach slings to the identified attachment points 6. Only one signalman is to be used. Because of the hazards associated with aerial devices coming in contact with overhead energized conductors, the operator of any aerial device MUST always stand on the designated operator’s platform while performing any operation which could potentially bring the aerial device within the limits of approach of energized conductors. All other personnel MUST remain clear of the vehicle, the boom, the winch line and any of its accessories while the aerial device is being operated unless proper protective equipment is utilized. To ensure that the “Limits of Approach” are not encroached a “Dedicated Observer” must be appointed and positioned to aid the operator in performing these tasks. All vehicles must be suitably grounded prior to any hoisting activities in close proximity to energized conductors. The following hazards must be addressed: 1. GRAVITY • Suspended loads • Falling materials

Page 2 of 4

VALARD



• Working within the “drop zone” • Hoisting equipment 2. MECHANICAL • working near rotating machinery • Failure of rigging equipment Prepare a tailboard job plan identifying: • The tasks to be performed • The potential hazards associated with the job • Emergency response plan • Crew member duties Before augering is to begin gas, electrical and other services in and near the area to be excavated must be accurately located and marked. A Dig Monitor shall be identified to observing the digging operation. When working under or in the vicinity of live conductors, all equipment must be grounded and the safe limits of approach to the live conductor must be maintained at all times. A qualified dedicated observer and signal the operator whenever the equipment approaches these specified distances as per provincial legislation. Particular care is to be given to moving parts such as the kelly bar and auger of the digging machine. The swing area of the auger machine must be clearly identified and workers are to be kept clear at all times. A level area extending at least 1m (3 ft.) from the upper edge of the excavation must be kept clear of equipment, excavated soil, and rock and construction material. Before starting work, visual barriers must be installed to identify clearly the safe work area(s) for the worker, and/or to identify hazardous area(s) for people not involved in the work. If a person could fall into an excavation that is more than 3 m (10 ft.) deep, a temporary barrier or a protective cover must be installed. The barrier must be at least 1.1 m (3.5 ft.) high and a minimum 1.8 m (6 ft.) from the edge. Access within this area will be permitted only with the use of an approved fall protection system. See sketches below for approved anchorages of the fall arrest equipment. Furthermore, no worker shall enter an augered excavation unless confined space entry procedures are followed. The steel liner must extend a minimum of 0.6 m (2 ft.) above ground level, be supported on two sides by steel wire rope, extend to within 1.2 m (4 ft.) of the point where work is to be done, and the distance between the liner and perimeter of the hole must not be greater than 100 mm (4 in.).

Page 3 of 4

VALARD



If protective covering is used it must completely cover the opening, be securely fastened, identified as covering an opening and be capable of supporting all loads it may be subjected to. The following steps combined with the use of the framework will allow for the safe installation of the tower foundations. The framework is used for securing the anchor bolts and the circular form. It consists of a main frame, a small frame, an anchor bolt template and a bolt support plate. The template is bolted or nailed to the bottom of the small frame, which in turn is fastened to the main frame by means of clamps. The main frame is generally located and supported on four stakes (Peg anchors). The frame set must be properly designed to ensure that the elevation of the anchor bolts is right with respect to the finished concrete. 1. Auger the footing hole to the required depth in accordance with the design. All workers to

maintain a safe distance from the rotating shaft and auger. 2. Install the main frame in accordance with the procedure. Check its horizontal and vertical

location. 3. Install formwork. The form is set flush with the top of the main frame, which usually

coincides with the top of concrete; and extended 0.3 m to 1.3 m (12 in. to 4ft. ).), into the ground depending upon the soil conditions. When masonite sheets are used, the circular length is pre-calculated and the nailing positions marked. The sheets are nailed to the main frame at eight locations to form a circle. The joints of the sheets are overlapped approx. 0.3 m to 0.4 m (12 in. to 16 in.).

4. Sling the crane to the attachment points on the rebar cage and install the rebar cage. Maintain specified concrete cover and secure it in position.

5. Install the small frame and the anchor bolt template. 6. Install the hopper at the augered hole and pour the concrete. The hopper is usually hung on

the concrete truck chute. Pour the concrete up to approximately 1/3 hole depth then back fill the space between the form and the ground with soil. Continue pouring until the concrete level reaches approx. 0.6 m to 0.9 m (2 ft. to 3 ft.) below finished grade.

Page 4 of 4

VALARD



7. Installation of two to four anchor bolts, push the bolts vertically into the concrete through the template. The anchor bolts are held in place by either the template or the bolt support plate

8. Check that the elevation and center of anchor bolts are correct. 9. For anchor tower footings, where a large number of anchor bolts are used, the small frame,

template, bolt support plate and anchor bolts are pre-assembled as a whole set. Pour concrete to the elevation near the bottom of anchor bolts; install the small frame set, and protect the bolt threads from concrete spatters, then bring the concrete to grade to grade.

10. Finish the concrete surface using a wooden or magnesium trowel. Do not over finish, as it will bring a layer of mortar to the surface, which is not desirable. The concrete under the template, where the shoe footing is to be seated, should be level and flat. In the other areas the concrete should be sloped away from the edges of the template to facilitate drainage.

Page 1 of 1

VALARD

Document Description Installing Power Installed Anchors Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.014

Date: Sept. 2009 Revision: 1 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Jan. 7, 2011

27.014 INSTALLING POWER INSTALLED ANCHORS This procedure is to identify the steps to be taken to prevent any incidents from occurring and to be completed in a safe and efficient manner. Safety Equipment required: 1. Safety Glasses, hardhat, and boots 2. Hi-visibility vest Tools and Equipment required: 1. Digger truck c/w outrigger pads 2. Anchor attachment head and anchor installation wrench 3. Power Installed Anchor (PISA) Steps: 1. Complete tailboard. 2. Setup digger at site, level complete with outrigger pads. Operator must be trained and competent. 3. If working near existing power lines the digger must grounded. 4. Remove earth auger from the Kelly bar. 5. Install anchor wrench attachment head to the Kelly bar 6. Attach anchor installation wrench to head and load PISA and guide to anchor location. 7. Digger operator to begin installation (all crew members must be clear of area). 8. Install PISA to proper depth and digger operator lifts installation wrench bar slowly out. While lifting the wrench out the operator must adjust the boom to limit the amount of swing when the wrench clears the PISA. All crew members must be clear of swing area. 9. If no further anchor installation required, reinstall the earth auger and stow the equipment.

Worker is too close.

Proper distance.

Page 1 of 2

VALARD

Document Description Anchor Pull Testing Created By: Andy Felczak Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.018

Date: Jan. 2011 Revision: 1 Revised by: Date:

27.018 Anchor Pull-Test procedure

This procedure is to identify the steps and hazards involved in pull-testing anchors using a crawler. Because of the hazards involved with this procedure one person will be charge. All equipment will be inspected before the start of the pull and at regular intervals. All tests must be documented A customer representative will be present during the procedure. All equipment shall be certified by the manufacturer.

Safety Equipment Required;

• Hard hat • Safety Glasses • Safety Boots with green triangle and Omega sign. • FR clothing • Gloves • Hearing protection

Tools and Equipment required:

1. 750 John Deere crawler 2. Dynamometer Certified within 12 months of use 3. Shackles and slings with Certification 4. Black felt marker

Steps: 1. Tailboard or safe work plan. 2. Prior to using any crawler, ensure that all crew members are cautioned about working

around these units to eliminate the hazards associated with crushing injuries from tracks or blades.

3. Setup crawler in front of lead on anchor Attach dynamometer to sling on blade, with sling to shackle on anchor rod.

4. Tighten sling and get 45 degree matching angle on rod . 5. Mark rod at ground line with a black felt pen. 6. Gradually bring up pressure 7. Ensure that all of shackles are secure. 8. Increase pressure gradually at 25 percent holding at each step for 1 minute. 9. If anchor creep exceeds 4 inches [100mm] before 100% of load is attained stop

remove and reinstall anchor. 10. Side guy anchors will be pulled to 10,000 lbs.[44.482kN] 11. Deflections and dead-ends will be pulled to 20,000 lbs.[88.964kN]

Page 2 of 2

VALARD

Document Description Anchor Pull Testing Created By: Andy Felczak Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.018

Date: Jan. 2011 Revision: 1 Revised by: Date:

12. This will be held for 2 minutes. 13. When the pull is complete slowly release the tension. 14. Disconnect all slings and shackles. 15. Clean up worksite.

Page 1 of 1

VALARD

Document Description Guy Wire Modification Created By: S. Eirickson Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.019

Date: Nov. 2009 Revision: 1 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Jan.7, 2011

27.019 GUY WIRE MODIFICATION WITH EPOXY RODS PROCEDURE Note: The following procedures will be used to address some of the issues encountered during construction. At all times, the lineman will use fall arrest, and when needed a second point of attachment. All tools and hardware will be inspected and used in the appropriate manner. Care and consideration will be given to all tools/hardware while performing the work as well as during transport to/from the job. The environmental impact will be minimized and a neat and tidy work area will be left behind. Safety Equipment Required;

• Safety glasses, boots, and hardhats • Hi-Vis Vests • Harnesses, lanyards • Lineman belts, pole straps

Steps:

1. Travel to work area. 2. Once onsite, a tailboard will be conducted and all workers will sign on. 3. Guy wires will be jacked from ground and the preform released. 4. Workers will jack down on guy wires and disconnect when slack. 5. Guy wire will be lowered to ground on hand line where ground crew will attach

epoxy rod and pull back up to lineman. 6. Lineman will re-attach to pole. 7. Lineman will climb down pole, guy wires will be re-pulled, and new performs will

be used to secure to anchor.

Page 1 of 1

VALARD

Document Description Guy Wire Relocation Created By: S. Eirickson Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.020

Date: Nov. 2009 Revision: 1 Revised by: Date:

27.020 MOVING GUY WIRES TO NEW LOCATION ON POLE PROCEDURE Note: The following procedures will be used to address some of the issues encountered during construction. At all times, the lineman will use fall arrest, and when needed a second point of attachment. All tools and hardware will be inspected and used in the appropriate manner. Care and consideration will be given to all tools/hardware while performing the work as well as during transport to/from the job. The environmental impact will be minimized and a neat and tidy work area will be left behind. Safety Equipment Required;


Steps:

1. Travel to work area. 2. Once on site, a tailboard will be conducted and signed by all workers. 3. Guy wires will be jacked from ground and the preform will be released. 4. Workers will jack down the guy wires and release them when slack. 5. A lineman will climb the wood pole and disconnect the guywire. 6. Guy wire will be lowered to ground using a hand line. 7. Lineman will disassemble guy attachment hardware that will be used on

the new location on the pole. 8. Lineman will measure down to new location and mark pole for drilling. 9. Ground crew will pull drill up to lineman who will proceed to drill new holes

in pole. 10. Guy fitting will be reattached in new location, tightened and bonded. 11. Ground crew will then pull guy wire back up to the lineman who will

reattach in new location. 12. Lineman will then climb down pole and ground crew will re-pull guys and

attach to anchors using new preforms.

Page 1 of 2

VALARD

Document Description Single Lift Lifting Created By: S. Eirickson Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.024

Date: Nov. 2009 Revision: Revised by: Date:

27.024 SINGLE LIFT LIFTING PROCEDURE

Note: The following lifting procedures will assume that all site preparation work has been completed and the mono pole is assembled. Safety Equipment Required;

• Safety glasses • Boots • Hard hats • Hi-Vis Vests • Harnesses, lanyards

Steps:

1. Travel to work area. 2. Conduct daily tailboard with crew and sign-off. 3. Set-up and level lifting crane using crane mats and pads to crane operator’s

requirements. Lift radius to be within the safe working dimensions as per the lift plans.

4. Perform visual inspection of the rated slings and shackles and check for any signs of wear or damage.

5. Choke pole at the predetermined positions using a shackle and attach tag lines. 6. Lower load block and hook sling to crane. 7. Slowly raise crane load block till there is 0.6m to 1.5m of slack in the sling.

Signalman will stop lift at this point and crew will insert softeners to prevent sharp edges from rubbing against sling.

8. Signalman will direct crane operator to start hoisting again until sling is taut. 9. Hoisting will be stopped to do one last check to ensure proper positioning of the

choker and that the softeners are in place. 10. Once the rigging is secure the lift will begin with the signalman directing the

crane operator to start hoisting pole. 11. The crane operator will boom-up, raising the pole from its blocking. 12. Using boom-up, load line up, and swing, the crane operator will raise the pole to

vertical while watching signals from the signalman. 13. Once vertical and standing on base plate, slowly raise till pole is completely off

the ground. 14. Once signalman is satisfied the load is under complete control, he will signal the

operator to swing the pole over the foundation. 15. When pole is in position, the signalman will signal the crane operator to lower

pole onto bolt cluster. 16. Crew will secure pole by fastening nuts snug tight to anchor.

Page 2 of 2

VALARD

Document Description Single Lift Lifting Created By: S. Eirickson Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.024

Date: Nov. 2009 Revision: Revised by: Date:

17. When pole is secured, signal man will signal crane operator to lower load line, releasing tension from sling

18. Crew will unhook sling from pole. Crane operator will retract boom and demobilize crane to the next site.

*A tailboard will be used at each structure site to identify site conditions, hazards, workers roles & responsibilities, and emergency contacts.*

Page 1 of 2

VALARD

Document Description Tower Erection/Paneling & Topping Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.031


27.031 TOWER ERECTION/PANELING & TOPPING PROCEDURE This procedure is to identify the steps to be taken to prevent any incidents from occurring and to be completed in a safe and efficient manner. Safety Equipment required: 1. Safety Glasses, hardhat, and boots 2. Fall Arrest equipment. 3. hi-visibility vest Tools and Equipment required: 1. Crane c/w outrigger pads 2. Slings 3. Shackles (sized for the weight being lifted) 4. Hand lines Steps: 1. Check weather conditions Maximum wind speed 30 km per hour 2. Complete tailboard. 3. If hold off is required make sure switching is in place. 4. Setup cranes at site, level complete with outrigger pads 5. If working near existing power lines the crane must grounded and bonded to the tower

creating an Equal Potential work zone. 6. Attach slings to the identified attachment points 7. Only one signalman is to be used. Because of the hazards associated with aerial devices coming in contact with overhead energized conductors, the operator of any aerial device MUST always stand on the designated operator’s platform while performing any operation which could potentially bring the aerial device within the limits of approach of energized conductors. All other personnel MUST remain clear of the vehicle, the boom, the winch line and any of its accessories while the aerial device is being operated unless proper protective equipment is utilized. To ensure that the “Limits of Approach” are not encroached a “Dedicated Observer” must be appointed and positioned to aid the operator in performing these tasks. All vehicles must be suitably grounded prior to any hoisting activities in close proximity to energized conductors. The minimum limit of approach for 240 kV for un-insulated equipment is 5 metres. The following hazards must be addressed: 1. GRAVITY • Suspended loads • Falling materials • Working within the “drop zone” • Hoisting equipment /tools /material aloft

Page 2 of 2

VALARD

Document Description Tower Erection/Paneling & Topping Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.031


2. MECHANICAL • Failure of rigging equipment • Securing of objects on load hooks of hand lines • Use of tool bags Prepare a tailboard job plan identifying: • The tasks to be performed • The potential hazards associated with the job • Emergency response plan • Crewmembers The following steps will provide a guide for the safe and efficient handling of structures with consideration for the proper use of the equipment available.

• Crane operator must be trained and competent in its operation and use. • Equipment must have current certification and visually inspected all related lifting

hardware. • Select a sling having suitable length and a rated capacity for the load it is lifting.

Note: Check manufacturer’s identification tag for capacity. • Slings shall not be pulled from under loads when the load is resting on the sling. • Tag lines must be used • Lift structure and place it on a support to prevent it from falling. • Only one person to be in charge of lift. • Stay clear of load and pinch points

The following steps combine the assembly and erection of the tower as it is being built from the ground up. This procedure allows for the use of a smaller crane because the loads are much smaller and can be guided into place from structure. 1. If lift is near existing energized power lines crane must be grounded and bonded to the

system. Hold off is required. 2. Assemble the 2 longitudinal faces of one section (normally a 20 foot section) i.e. 2 panels. 3. Lift the panel onto the stub legs (first section) or the splice plates (subsequent sections). 4. Bolt the panel to the stub legs or the splice plates. 5. Lift the opposite face and bolt it to the stub legs or splice plates. 6. Web in the transverse faces. 7. Lift structure and place on pads for bolt up. (Crane and slings must be sized for the load) 8. Once all panels are secure, remove crane boom from the area. 9. To install the box section with the arms a larger crane will be needed. 10. Install a yellow or red flag on the crane head as a visual barrier. 11. Install warning flags around the crane on ground level as a warning barrier for workers. 12. Install a four-legged sling to the top corners of the section and connect it to the crane hook. 13. Tag lines may be attached to the bottom of the section to aid in guiding it when required.

Bolts may be placed in nosebags attached to this section. 14. The top of the tower is attached to bottom section and crane is removed.

Page 1 of 2

VALARD

Document Description Structure Body Erection V1S/V1L Created By: B. Szumik Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.032

Date: Sept. 23, 2010 Revision: Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Jan. 7, 2011

27.032 Procedure: Body Erection ERCT 1 (Erection of Body and Arms for V1S and V1L Structures)

Scope: The scope of this document deals with:

• Erection of the body and arms

Mark-up data:

Activity Assignment Erection of column and wing assembly Crew:

Canadian Union of Skilled Workers- Supervisor/Worker Operating Engineers

Tool /Equipment List: 200 Metric ton crane

Rated steel and nylon slings Impact wrench and torque limiting device

65 ton tailing crane Extension cords Ground Chains Crew trucks Spud wrenches & bull pins Sockets and hand tools Tag lines ¾ inch bolts Ground probes Generator or inverter

Skills/Experience/Training

Qualified operators Rigging competencies

Electrical Awareness Knowledge/experience at tower erection

Equipment competency Electrical Awareness Off road/ROW driving experience

Communications: • Direction from Structure Senior Foreman to the Erection Foreman

Deliverables: • Coded Time reports daily • Construction Crew to torque and mark bolts • QC document

Access and Permits: • Bruce Nuclear security clearance as required. • Maps and road restriction information.

Prerequisites: • Foreman has work package. • All materials at site

Page 2 of 2

VALARD

Document Description Structure Body Erection V1S/V1L Created By: B. Szumik Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.032


Reporting: • Completed timesheet “coded” ERCT 1 daily • Submit tailboard daily

List of activities in sequence: • Set up cranes at location on provided pads. • Tower pick will be rigged at predetermined points, tag lines will be attached • Signal person will appoint two persons to control the taglines. • Appointed spotter will be in place maintaining clearance. • The structure will be inspected prior to lift for loose pieces. • The load is attached to the crane. • The tailing crane will be attached to the bottom section of the lift. • Crane one and crane two will both take weight of the load, signal person will direct both

units. • Crane one and two will work in unison until the structure is 10-15 feet in the air. • Crane two will maintain ground clearance at the bottom of the structure while crane one

continues hoisting. • Once the structure is hanging vertical crane two will be released. • Freed rigging will be removed. • Linemen are in place in the tower to accept the structure at the point of connection. • The linemen will signal the crane to bring the structure into place. • A ground will be used to bleed off the induction from the load prior to connection. • The signal person will lower the load into place to make the connection. • Once the splice is developed and sufficiently bolted the crane will be released. • The line man will disconnect the crane from the load. • Line crew will finish bolting and torquing. • Follow bolt specifications on Lockwell drawings. • Tighten the bolts in the sections to torque.

Contingencies: • Missing pieces of steel will be documented at site by crew Forman on material inventory

sheet (part of the bill of lading package), all documents will be returned at the end of the shift and submitted to the office.

• Lifts may be delayed upon change in weather.

Page 1 of 2

VALARD

Document Description Installation of Rider Poles Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.035


27.035 INSTALLATION OF RIDER POLES This procedure is to identify the steps to be taken to prevent any incidents from

occurring and to be completed in a safe and efficient manner. Safety Equipment Required;

1. Climbing belt and choker strap 2. Hi- visibility vests 3. Safety glasses 4. Boots 5. Gloves

Equipment required; 1. Ropes 2. Blocks 3. Steel Slings 4. Shackles For the rider arm. 5. Rope Assorted lengths 6. Nodwell, Excavator, one ton truck, Bulldozer 7. Boom Truck

Steps; 1. Calculated the height of the energized circuit from the ground. 2. Insure that one-call has identified and underground lines etc. 3. Attach reflective yellow/black markers on rider poles. 4. Check voltage of lines to be crossed. 5. Determine the height of the poles keeping minimum clearances as required by code. 6. Combine the two measurements to determine the length of the poles required to

meet this. (Allow for deep setting as well as pole height for decking). 7. Install rider poles as per SWP 26.002 Electrical Work maintaining limits of Approach

at all times. 8. Raise cross arms with boom truck or by carrying up a sling and deck blocks using a

climbing belt with choker strap. 9. Attach the deck block at the top of the pole and one 3 ft above ground level. Run

rope through both blocks to the ground and attach it to the rider arm. 10. Use dozer or Nodwell to pull the rope to raise arm into place. Maintain limits of

Approach at all times.

Page 2 of 2

VALARD

Document Description Installation of Rider Poles Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.035


11. Worker is to maintain his position and be seen by the operator at all time. He must be knowledgeable in hand signals; all others are to stay clear of this activity.

12. After raising the arm, worker will attach a steel sling from the main pole to the rider arm with a shackle. The steel sling must be on the face of the pole to prevent contact with the conductor.

13. Lower all rigging equipment with a hand line. 14. Restore the environment as much as is possible to its original state. 15. Clean up work area after work is completed

Page 1 of 2

VALARD

Document Description Stringing Over Rider Poles Created By: Andy Felczak Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.036


27.036 Procedure for Stringing Over Rider Poles

This procedure is to identify the steps and hazards involved in stringing conductor over rider poles. Because of the hazards involved with this procedure one person will be charge. All crewmembers involved will attend a safe work plan [tailboard] Traffic will be controlled at all times If crossing energized lines, lines will be de-energized or re-closer devices will be disabled.

Safety Equipment Required; • Safety Glasses • Hardhat • Boots • Fall Arrest equipment • Fire Retardant Clothing • High Visibility clothing • Rubber Gloves • Live Line pole tongs • Road Signage


1. Conductor pulling equipment [dozer or nodwell] 2. Rope pulled over rider arms 3. Barriers or traffic cones

Steps:

1. Tailboard or safe work plan. 2. Prior to using any crawler, ensure that all crewmembers are cautioned about

working around these units to eliminate the hazards associated with crushing injuries from tracks or blades.

3. If crossing energized lines get recloser blocking or de-energize line. 4. If crossing roads control traffic and pedestrians. No vehicles will be allowed

through work area unless employee in charge allows access, with a spotter. 5. Pull conductor or shield wire past rider poles leaving sufficient lead rope to go

over rider arms and back to spreader bar on pulling equipment. 6. Disconnect lead ropes from pulling equipment and pull back, keeping ropes

separate.

Page 2 of 2

VALARD

Document Description Stringing Over Rider Poles Created By: Andy Felczak Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.036


7. Attach lead rope to rope over rider arms and pull lead rope over until enough lead rope is available to attach to pulling equipment.

8. Continue this until all ropes are connected to spreader bar on pulling equipment. 9. Pulling equipment will proceed taking up slack until wire has cleared the rider

arms. 10. One person will observe until conductor is through next structure. 11. Remove stringing rope over rider arms. 12. Remove traffic barriers 13. Clean up worksite.

VALARD

Document Description: Typical Crossing - Tension Stringing Set-up Diagram Created by: J. Rideout Doc.

Number: Safe Operating Procedure 27.037

Date: Aug. 2008 Revision #: 1 Date Revised: Revised by:

Page 1 of 1

Page 1 of 3

VALARD

Document Description Crossing Energized Lines

Created By: W. Stewart Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.038

Date: Aug. 1, 2011 Revision: Revised by: Date:

27.038 CROSSING ENERGIZED LINES

Safety Equipment Required:

1. Safety glasses 2. Boots and 3. Hardhat 4. Hi-Vis Vest 5. Ground gradient mat 6. Temporary ground cable leads 7. Temporary ground probe(s) 8. Running ground bracket(s) 9. Certified live line stick 10. Climbing belt and safety strap 11. Fire Retardant Clothing


1. Tensioner 2. Puller 3. Bucket truck or crane 4. Bull rope(s) (sufficient length to complete the task) 5. Travelers 6. Ropes 7. Blocks 8. Slings 9. Shackles For the rider arm 10. Nodwell, Excavator, one ton truck, Bulldozer

Steps

1. Rider Poles will have been previously installed. Check to ensure that Cross Arms are located at least 4 meters above existing energized conductors.

2. Reclosures on the existing circuit need to be set on the non reclose function. 3. Using an aerial work platform, a clean dry lead line is passed over the

energized circuit, using the Cross Arms to support the rope and maintain clearances. Once the rope is fished across, tension will be maintained on the ends to keep the rope’s above and clear of the energized circuit.

Note:

Rubber gloves should be worn when passing the lead ropes over the energized conductors.

Page 2 of 3

VALARD



Date: Aug. 1, 2011 Revision: Revised by: Date: A Signal Person/Observer should be used to ensure Safe Limits of

Approach are maintained. Aerial device should be grounded

4. The lead line is used to pull the main pulling line/s over the riders. Tension is

maintained to ensure the belly of the rope doesn’t get too close to the energized conductors.

Note:

Rubber gloves should be worn when handling the ropes during this operation.

5. Continue to pull out Pulling Ropes or Hard Lines through the remaining towers until the Tensioner site is reached.

Note:

See grounding and bonding requirements for equipment while stringing.

An observer should remain at the crossing site to ensure necessary clearances are maintained.

Adequate communication is necessary between observer and stringing crews.

6. Using Pulling Ropes or Hard Lines, which are connected to the appropriate

conductors, the conductors or OPGW will be pulled in and sagged as per specifications. Note:

An Observer should remain at the Rider Pole site until all the new conductors and OPGW are installed.

See equipment grounding and bonding requirements while stringing Hazards and Control Methods:

Hazard: Fall from elevation and falling objects

Control: Use fall arrest in the bucket at all times. Stay clear of the area when workers are working from heights

Hazard: Pulling in wire

Control: Make sure radio contact is maintained at all times

Page 3 of 3

VALARD



Date: Aug. 1, 2011 Revision: Revised by: Date:

Hazard: Electrical Shock

Control: Use proper grounding procedures when working in the vicinity of overhead power lines and when installing splice. Ensure non-reclosure is in place on energized circuit. Wear hot line gloves Ensure a signal person is dedicated to ensuring that limits of approach are maintained. Use proper grounding

Safe Work References:

SWP 26.001 – Defective Tools Practices SWP 26.002 – Electrical Work SWP 26.006 – Hoisting and Rigging SWP 26.007 – Use of Cable Clamps and Wire Ropes SWP 26.013 – Use of Company Vehicles SWP 26.014 – Environmental Work Practices SWP 26.020 – Use of Elevated Work Platforms SWP 26.025 – Use of Hand Tools SWP 26.027 – Spotters and Signalers SWP 26.028 – Fall Prevention SWP 26.029 – Cold Weather Work SWP 26.036 – Bonding and Grounding

Page 1 of 4

VALARD

Document Description Stringing Transmission Lines Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.039


27.039 STRINGING PROCEDURE This procedure is to identify the steps and hazards in stringing of transmission line

conductors. Because of the hazards associated with aerial devices coming in contact with overhead energized conductors, the operator of any aerial device MUST always stand on the designated operator’s platform while performing any operation which could potentially bring the aerial device within the limits of approach of energized conductors. All other personnel MUST remain clear of the vehicle, the boom, the winch line and any of it’s accessories while the aerial device is being operated unless proper protective equipment is utilized. To ensure that the “ Limits of Approach” are not encroached a “Dedicated Observer” must be appointed and positioned to aid the operator in performing these tasks. All vehicles must be grounded prior to any hoisting activities in close proximity to energized conductors. The minimum limit of approach for un-insulated equipment is 10ft. Safety Equipment Required;

• Safety glasses

• Boots

• Hardhat

• Hi-Vis Vest

• Ground gradient mat

• Temporary ground cable leads

• Temporary ground probe(s)

• Running ground bracket(s)

• Certified live line stick

• Fire Retardant Clothing Tools and Equipment required:

1. Dozer (cat) or Nodwell 2. Trailer for wire spools 3. Bucket truck or crane 4. Shackles/slings 5. Bull rope(s) (sufficient length to complete the task) 6. Travelers

Steps: 1. Complete tailboard, discuss with the crew and signoff. 2. Prior to using any craning devices, ensure that all crewmembers are cautioned

about working around these units to eliminate the hazards associated with crushing injuries from vehicle stabilizer outriggers.

Page 2 of 4

VALARD



3. Setup stringing trailers and load wire. 4. Check all rigging equipment to ensure that it’s in good condition and rated for

the load before hoisted. Verify the weight of the reels to ensure that all rigging equipment is of sufficient rating

5. Temporary ground mats must be installed if working in close proximity of energized circuits or where there is the potential for induction.

• Worker(s) at the reel trailer must stand on ground mat at all times.

• Work area must be fenced to prevent worker(s) from stepping off ground mat onto the ground thus creating a difference of potential.

• As an alternative, a guard could be positioned to prevent any person from encroaching on the gradient mat or the worker stepping off the mat

6. Bond conductor trailer to a temporary ground probe or anchor rod. 7. Install Kellum grips on conductor(s) as per manufacturer’s specifications. 8. Attach pulling bull ropes to the Kellum grips using appropriately rated swivels

and approved shackles. 9. Pull off sufficient conductor to pass through the travelers supported on the rear

of the cable reel trailer. 10. Attach running grounds to each conductor with the ground lead attached to a

temporary ground probe or anchor rod. 11. Ensure that all of the ground leads are attached to a common point/connection

to eliminate a difference of potential. 12. Attach the pulling bull ropes to the spreader bar on the dozer/Nodwell. 13. Verify that good radio communications have been established and that all

crewmembers are instructed and familiar with proper radio protocol for stringing. A dedicated radio frequency should be allocated for this process. If this is not possible then all other work crews must be notified of the stringing process so that any potential conflicting radio transmissions are minimized.

14. When all preliminary work has been completed, start pulling out conductor. 15. Good radio contact must be maintained at ALL times between personnel at reel

trailer(s) and the dozer/Nodwell. 16. Apply a little brake pressure on the reel axle(s) to ensure that the reel(s) of wire

doesn’t spin to fast resulting in potential conductor damage. 17. When reaching the first structure, the dozer/Nodwell must go past the structure

far enough to ensure that there is sufficient rope to go up the structure, through the travelers and back down to the dozer/Nodwell.

18. Once adequate slack has been pulled past the structure reverse the dozer /Nodwell to relieve tension on the bull lines so that the bull lines can be detached from the machine. The bull lines can then be pulled back to the structure. Use caution to prevent tangling of the rope(s) as the rope is being coiled at the base of the structure.

Page 3 of 4

VALARD



19. Hang ropes through the travelers using an aerial device/bucket. Fall arrest must be worn and connected at all times when the lineman is in the bucket. As an alternate method, “P” lines could be previously installed through pre-hung travelers and secured to the butt of the pole. These ropes could be used to pull the bull lines up the pole, through the traveler and back down to the ground.

20. Ground aerial device at each location when working in close proximity to energized conductors.

21. Re-attach ropes to the spreader bar on the dozer/Nodwell after the ropes have been hung through the traveler.

22. Stay in radio contact at all times with workers at reel trailer and operator running dozer/nodwell. Monitor the bull ropes for increased tensions, which could indicate defective travelers at structures or the conductor becoming snagged on the ground. An observer should follow the kellem grips as they pass through the sheave of the traveler.

23. Once workers are clear of the structure, proceed to the next structure. 24. Conductor running grounds will be installed on travelers approximately every 10

spans. The uses of travelers with neoprene sheaves pose a potential hazard of induction that must be eliminated utilizing running grounds.

25. Repeat this procedure until the conductor is at the tie- down site or a dead-end structure.

26. Once the conductors have reached the tie-down area temporary portable grounds are to be placed on the conductors. Also the conductors are to be bonded to each other. This will ensure that any induction will be drained off and all conductors will be at the same potential. Alternately the conductor could be dead-ended at the structure.

27. The sagging process can now be undertaken. 28. Refer to the sag charts to determine the:

• Location of the span(s) to sag from

• The ambient air temperature 29. Prior to sleeving the 2 ends of the line sections together portable jumper

grounds must be applied to each end on the wire utilizing a live line stick so that there isn’t a difference of potential when installing the sleeve.

30. When line sections exceed 3 Kms. portable grounds must be applied. The only exception to this work practice is that if there will be NO work being performed in this line section and the line is sitting dormant, grounds are not necessary. There MUST be an open point between the 2 line sections. When any 2-line sections are to be connected to each other, temporary grounds are to be installed on each line section to drain any potential induction and a temporary jumper must be installed prior to the installation of the permanent loop at the structure.

Page 4 of 4

VALARD



31. Safety slings must be installed at corners to prevent the contact of either the bull line or the new conductor with any energized adjacent circuits in the case of an equipment failure (traveler) during stringing or sagging.

32. Working grounds utilizing approved live line techniques and certified live line tools must be applied to the new circuit prior to clipping in conductors

33. All grounding work methods must adhere to Valard’s Equal-potential grounding policies.

Page 1 of 3

VALARD

Document Description Conventional Stringing Created By: S. Eirickson Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.040


27.040 This procedure is to identify the steps and hazards in stringing of transmission line conductors

Note: The use of rider poles at roadways and energized circuit crossings should be determined, and installed , prior to stringing. Any traffic control plans should be arranged prior to work beginning. Restrictions and regulations re any pipeline crossing must also be considered. Safety Equipment Required;

• Safety glasses • Boots Hardhats • Hi-Vis Vests • Fire Retardant Clothing


1. Dozer (cat) or Nodwell 2. Trailer for wire spools 3. Bucket truck and or crane 4. Shackles/slings 5. Bull rope(s) (sufficient length to complete the task) Usually app. 150ft. 6. Travelers 7. Spacer Carts 8. Temporary ground cable leads 9. Certified live line stick 10. Temporary ground probe(s)

Steps:

1. Complete tailboard, discuss with the crew and signoff. 2. Ensure that workers and 3rd parties stay clear of stringing equipment. 3. Prior to using any craning devices, ensure that all crewmembers are cautioned

about working around these units to eliminate the hazards associated with crushing injuries from vehicle stabilizer outriggers.

4. Setup stringing trailers and load wire. 5. Check all rigging equipment to ensure that it’s in good condition and rated for

the load before hoisted. Verify the weight of the reels to ensure that all rigging equipment is of sufficient rating

6. Install Kellum grips on conductor(s), as per manufacturer’s specifications. 7. Attach pulling bull ropes to the Kellum grips using appropriately rated swivels

and approved shackles.

Page 2 of 3

VALARD



8. Pull off sufficient conductors or hardlines to pass through the guide travelers or blocks.

9. Attach the pulling bull ropes to the spreader bar on the dozer/Nodwell. 10. Verify that good radio communications have been established and that all crew

members are instructed and familiar with proper radio protocol for stringing. A dedicated radio frequency should be allocated for this process. If this is not possible then all other work crews must be notified of the stringing process so that any potential conflicting radio transmissions be minimized.

11. When all preliminary work has been completed, start pulling out conductor. 12. Good radio contact must be maintained at ALL times between personnel at reel

trailer(s) and the dozer/Nodwell. 13. Apply a little brake pressure on the reel axle(s) to ensure that the reel(s) of wire

doesn’t spin to fast resulting in potential conductor damage. 14. If at any time during the stringing operation, the conductors need to be handled,

radio communication will let all workers know that work has stopped. 15. When reaching the first structure, the dozer/Nodwell must go past the

structure far enough to ensure that there is sufficient rope to go up the structure, through the travelers and back down to the dozer/Nodwell.

16. Once adequate slack has been pulled past the structure reverse the dozer /Nodwell to relieve tension on the bull lines so that the bull lines can be detached from the machine. The bull lines can then be pulled back to the structure. Use caution to prevent tangling of the rope(s) as the rope is being coiled at the base of the structure.

17. Hang ropes through the travelers using an aerial device/bucket. Fall arrest must be worn and connected at all times when the lineman is in the bucket. As an alternate method, “P” lines could be previously installed through pre-hung travelers and secured to the butt of the pole. These ropes could be used to pull the bull lines up the pole , through the traveler and back down to the ground.

18. Re-attach ropes to the spreader bar on the dozer/Nodwell after the ropes have been hung through the traveler.

19. Stay in radio contact at all times with workers at reel trailer and operator running dozer/nodwell. Monitor the bull ropes for increased tensions which could indicate defective travelers at structures or the conductor becoming snagged on the ground. An observer should follow the kellem grips as they pass through the sheave of the traveler.

20. Workers must only handle the bull ropes. 21. When crossing rider pole locations, finger lines or ropes should be installed so as

to pass over the riders. This will allow control of the conductive wires while they are being pulled over the riders.

Page 3 of 3

VALARD



22. Once workers are clear of the riders or structure, proceed to the next structure. 23. A spotter should remain at the rider location to ensure conductors stay clear of

road crossing or energized circuits. 24. If energized parallel circuits exist, conductor running grounds will be installed

on travelers approximately every 10 spans. The use of travelers with neoprene sheaves pose a potential hazard of induction that must be eliminated utilizing running grounds. If there are no energized parallel circuits but one or more live circuit crossings, then running grounds need to only be installed at the crossings.

25. Overhead wires being installed on metal sheaved travelers connected to the structure grounding will not require running grounds.

26. Repeat this procedure until the conductors are at the tie-down site, dead-end structure.

27. Once the conductors have reached the tie-down area temporary portable grounds are to be placed on the conductors so the conductors are to be bonded to each other. This will ensure that any induction will be drained off and all conductors will be at the same potential. Alternately the conductor could be dead-ended at the structure.

28. The sagging process can now be undertaken. 29. Refer to the sag charts to determine the :

• Location of the span(s) to sag from • The ambient air temperature

30. Prior to sleeving the 2 ends of the line sections together portable jumper grounds must be applied to each end on the wire utilizing a live line stick so that there isn’t a difference of potential when installing the sleeve.

31. When line sections exceed 3 Kms. portable grounds must be applied. The only exception to this work practice is that if there will be NO work being performed in this line section and the line is sitting dormant, grounds are not necessary. There MUST be an open point between the 2 line sections. When any 2 line sections are to be connected to each other, temporary grounds are to be installed on each line section to drain any potential induction and a temporary jumper must be installed prior to the installation of the permanent loop at the structure.

32. Safety slings must be installed at corners to prevent the contact of either the bull line or the new conductor with any energized adjacent circuits in the case of an equipment failure (traveler) during stringing or sagging.

33. Working grounds must be applied to the new circuit prior to clipping in conductors.

Page 1 of 3

VALARD

Document Description Slack Stringing Created By: B. Szumik Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.042

Date: Sept. 23, 2009 Revision: 0 Revised by: A. Felczak Date:

27.042 SLACK STRINGING PROCEDURE CYPRESS SE This procedure is to identify the steps and hazards in slack stringing of transmission line conductors on the Cypress SE project. This particular phase of the project requires the slack stringing of three, 266 AWG conductors and a single shield wire for a distance of 1.6 km. Wood poles are used and as well as 138 kV horizontal insulator line posts in the construction of this line. The one single-phase distribution line in this area will be isolated and de-energized for the entire stringing and clipping operations. As the line follows an old abandoned concession road, traffic will be minimal or none existent. The road will be blocked off during the stringing operation. Safety Equipment Required:

• Safety glasses

• Boots

• Hardhat

• Hi-visibility vest

• Fire Retardant Clothing Tools and Equipment required:

• Front end loader

• Trailer for wire spools

• Bucket truck or crane

• Shackles/slings

• Bull rope(s) (sufficient length to complete the task)

• Travelers



• Certified live line stick Steps: 1. Complete tailboard, discuss with the crew and signoff. 2. Prior to using any craning devices, ensure that all crew members are cautioned about working around these units to eliminate the hazards associated with crushing injuries from vehicle stabilizer outriggers. 3. Setup stringing trailers and load wire.

Page 2 of 3

VALARD



4. Check all rigging equipment to ensure that it’s in good condition and rated for the load before hoisted. Verify the weight of the reels to ensure that all rigging equipment is of sufficient rating 5. Install Kellum grips on conductor(s) as per manufacturer’s specifications. 8. Attach pulling bull ropes to the Kellum grips using appropriately rated swivels and approved shackles. 9. Attach the pulling bull ropes to the spreader bar on the front-end loader. 10. Verify that good radio communications have been established and that all crewmembers are instructed and familiar with proper radio protocol for stringing. A dedicated radio frequency should be allocated for this process. If this is not possible then all other work crews must be notified of the stringing process so that any potential conflicting radio transmissions are minimized. 11. When all preliminary work has been completed, start pulling out conductor. 12. Good radio contact must be maintained at ALL times between personnel at reel trailer(s) and the front end loader. 13. Apply a little brake pressure on the reel axle(s) to ensure that the reel(s) of wire doesn’t spin to fast resulting in potential conductor damage. 14. When reaching the first structure, the front end loader must go past the structure far enough to ensure that there is sufficient rope to go up the structure, through the travelers and back down to the front end loader. 15. Once adequate slack has been pulled past the structure reverse the front-end loader to relieve tension on the bull lines so that the bull lines can be detached from the machine. The bull lines can then be pulled back to the structure. Use caution to prevent tangling of the rope(s) as the rope is being coiled at the base of the structure. 16. Hang ropes through the travelers using an aerial device/bucket. Fall arrest must be worn and connected at all times when the lineman is in the bucket. As an alternate method, “P” lines could be previously installed through pre-hung travelers and secured to the butt of the pole. These ropes could be used to pull the bull lines up the pole, through the traveler and back down to the ground. 17. Re-attach ropes to the spreader bar on the front end loader after the ropes have been hung through the traveler. 18. Stay in radio contact at all times with workers at reel trailer and operator running front end loader. Monitor the bull ropes for increased tensions, which could indicate defective travelers at structures or the conductor becoming snagged on the ground. An observer should follow the Kellum grips as they pass through the sheaves of the travelers. 19. Once workers are clear of the structure, proceed to the next structure. 20. Repeat this procedure until the conductor is at the tie- down site or a dead-end structure. 21. Once the conductors have reached the tie-down area temporary portable grounds are to be placed on the conductors. Also the conductors are to be bonded to each other. This will ensure that any induction will be drained off and all conductors will be at the same potential. Alternately the conductor could be dead-ended at the structure.

Page 3 of 3

VALARD



22. The sagging process can now be undertaken. 23. Refer to the sag charts to determine the:

• Location of the span(s) to sag from. • The ambient air temperature.

24. Once sagging is complete then clipping in can take place.

Page 1 of 1

VALARD

Document Description Sagging Wire Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.043


27.043 SAGGING PROCEDURE This procedure is to identify the steps to be taken to prevent any incidents from

occurring and to be completed in a safe and efficient manner. Safety Equipment required;

• Hard hat • Safety glasses • Approved boots • Gloves • Fire Retardant clothing • Fall Arrest Equipment

Equipment required: • Ground probe • Ground chains • Dynometer • Radios for communication

Hazards: Falling from Elevation:

• Complete fall arrest to be used at all times. Pickers must have bucket rescue devices on site.

Equipment Setup: • Refer to Valard’s procedure 27.023 on setting up equipment.

Grounding: • Ground vehicle when working near power lines.

Radio Communication: • Check radios for range and signal. If radio contact is lost stop job and make changes as

necessary. Be sure radios are charged at all times. Steps; 1. Complete tailboard, discuss and sign off. 2. Make sure sagging equipment is in good working condition. 3. Hang sag markers as per specifications for temperature and span length 4. Use sagging scope to check sag of wire or dynometer to measure tension. 5. Slack is adjusted using jacks at the snub down site or dead end. 6. Radio communication must be used at all times when sagging. 7. Clean up work area before leaving.

Page 1 of 2

VALARD

Document Description Deadending Conductor Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.045

Date: Sept. 23, 2003 Revision: 2 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Jan. 7,2011

27.045 DEADENDING CONDUCTOR

This procedure is to identify the steps to be taken to prevent any incidents from

occurring and to be completed in a safe and efficient manner.

Because of the hazards associated with aerial devices coming in contact with overhead and underground energized conductors, the operator of any aerial device must always stand on the designated operator platform while performing any operation which could potentially bring the aerial device within the limits of approach of energized conductors, and all other personnel must remain clear of the vehicle, the boom, boom accessories, and winch line while the aerial device is being operated unless proper protective equipment is utilized.

Safety Equipment required:

• Hard hat • Safety glasses • Boots • Fall arrest Equipment • Ground chains • Bucket rescue equipment

Equipment required:

• Digger Derrick • Slings and shackles • Dynometer • Jacks

Steps: 1. Complete tailboard discuss and signoff. 2. Setup equipment as per Equipment Setup procedure using outrigger pads to complete

the job. 3. Have lineman hang the dollies on dead end structure using proper rigging. 4. Hang ropes through the dollies and attach to the cat. 5. When ropes and rigging is complete lineman will clear the structure. 6. Once workers are clear of the structure, begin pulling up the wire while keeping in

contact with the sagging crew. 7. When conductor is close to being in sag install jacks on the conductor. 8. Complete final sag using a dyno or sag boards. 9. Once wire is in sag lineman will dead end conductor using utility supplied material.

10. When dead-ending is complete remove pulling ropes from cat and trim wire. 11. Cleanup jobsite and complete the dead end Q/A form. Hazards Equipment and tools

Page 2 of 2

VALARD

Document Description Deadending Conductor Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.045

Date: Sept. 23, 2003 Revision: 2 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Jan. 7,2011

• Setup equipment using equipment setup procedures. Make sure proper grips and jacks are being used.

• Check slings and shackles for wear. Falling and falling objects.

• Fall arrest must be worn at all times. • Stay clear of structure when linemen are working. • Make sure material or equipment is secure when sending things up on the

handline. Induction

• Use proper EPG procedures at all times. See SWP 26.036 Bonding & Grounding • Make sure continuity is maintained at all times when working on jumpers.

Page 1 of 1

VALARD

Document Description Jumper Weight Installation Created By: S. Eirickson Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.046

Date: Nov. 2009 Revision: 1 Revised by: Date:

27.046 JUMPER WEIGHTS INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Note: The following procedures will be used to address some of the issues encountered during construction. At all times, the lineman will use fall arrest, and when needed a second point of attachment. All tools and hardware will be inspected and used in the appropriate manner. Care and consideration will be given to all tools/hardware while performing the work as well as during transport to/from the job. The environmental impact will be minimized and a neat and tidy work area will be left behind. Safety Equipment Required;


Steps:

1. Travel to work area. 2. Once on site, a tailboard will be conducted and signed by all workers. 3. Materials and tools will be unloaded and work will commence. 4. Two linemen will climb the wood pole using fall arrest and 2nd point of

attachment when going around obstacles on pole. 5. The first lineman up the pole will take the hand line block up to help lift

required materials. 6. Lineman will hang the hand line. 7. Ground crew will pull up ladder to be hung on the cross arm and attach safety

straps. 8. Lineman will push the ladder out on cross arm. 9. Lineman will position himself on cross arm to slide out to ladder. Worker shall

maintain fall arrest at all times. 10. Once worker and ladder are in position in the work area, he will transfer

himself onto the ladder and climb down into position. 11. Ground crew will assemble weights and attach appropriate hardware. 12. Lineman will signal ground crew to hoist weights up to him either pulling by

hand or through use of equipment. 13. Once in proper position, the lineman will attach the weights to the yoke plate. 14. The lineman will disconnect hand line from weights. 15. Lineman will then proceed to climb ladder and move operation to the next

pole to repeat until structure is complete.

Page 1 of 2

VALARD

Document Description Installation of Implosive Sleeves Created By: H. McNeil Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.047

Date: Dec. 15, 2010 Revision: Revised by: Date:

27.047 Installation of Implosive Sleeves This procedure is to identify the steps and hazards in using implosive for dead end terminations and in-line connections. For the purpose of this procedure a Blaster is one who has been suitably trained in the Safe Use and Installation of EXCONEX. Safety Equipment required:

• Hard hat • Safety Glasses • Boots • Hearing protection • Hi-vis outerwear • Fire retardant clothing

Procedure: 1. The certified blaster is responsible for the safety of workers and equipment, and

for following regulatory requirements covering the use, storage, handling and transportation of explosives within the blast and danger areas.

2. Assess the work area. • Where the implosion will occur within a one-mile radius of any residence,

notify area residents, municipal authorities, police department, and other crews about upcoming blasts - this must be done before actual blasting.

• Signs shall be posted on all roadways leading to a blasting area in accordance with government rules and regulations.

• Maintain safe distances of the blasting site from other employees, vehicles, equipment, structures, and fire hazard sources. Perform blasts during pre-determined times. Do not perform work during electrical storms or adverse weather conditions.

3. The certified blaster on site must be in constant communication with all guards. Guards must be posted at all access routes to stop/eliminate the public from entering.

4. During handling of all explosive components avoid conditions of shock, exposure to flame, heat, impact, and friction. Do not jerk or break shock tubing. Do not drive equipment over shock tubing. Make sure that shock tubing does not become entangled with machinery or moving equipment. Keep all explosive components in clean and dry condition. Do not smoke while handling or within 8 meters of explosives. Keep detonator and Implode Sleeves separate until final installation. Use only appropriate tools.

5. Identify the implosion devices to be used and follow the manufacturer’s instruction manual for the safe installation of the specific device(s).

Page 2 of 2

VALARD

Document Description Installation of Implosive Sleeves Created By: H. McNeil Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.047

Date: Dec. 15, 2010 Revision: Revised by: Date:

6. The certified blaster is responsible for: • Establishing a minimum 50-meter radius blast area, which includes all

workers and equipment not involved in preparing the blast device, and other people, equipment and combustible material.

• Conducting a risk assessment and placing appropriate barriers to protect any workers and or equipment within this blast area.

• Vehicles and/or equipment involved in the preparation of the blast procedure may remain within the 50 meter radius blast area provided they partially open their windows and take any other necessary precautions.

• Establishing and managing the danger area for the purpose of preventing damage or injuries from the effects of the blast.

7. The Certified Blaster must notify all workers on site about the upcoming blast(s). He must make sure that all the workers on site know the sequence of pre-blast warning signals. All workers on site must wear required Personal Protective Equipment. Fire extinguishing equipment must be readily available. • Perform blasts parallel to wire sling and not jacking device. Make sure that

support insulator is not at a right angle to the connector. • Just before the detonation the Certified Blaster must: notify workers in the area of upcoming blast by activating three standard

two second air horn signals. Perform a 10 second countdown. Initiate the detonating device. • If at any time the countdown is interrupted, the Certified Blaster must

ensure that the blasting area is clear, repeat the entire process of three two second horn signals, a 10 second countdown, and then perform the blast.

8. After the blast has been completed the Certified Blaster must inspect the blasting area. Once determined that the blast has been completed and the area is safe, the Certified Blaster shall sound a four second clear signal. • If misfire occurs, The Certified Blaster shall wait 10 minutes before

entering the blast area. Once the Blaster has determined there has been a misfire, the misfired detonator must be destroyed by taping another detonator to the misfired detonator and blasting it off. If this fails, stop work, secure the area, and immediately notify your supervisor of the misfire.

Page 1 of 2

VALARD

Document Description RELEASING BUTT DOWN


Date: July 2011 Revision: Revised by: Date:

27.049 Releasing Butt Down

Safety Equipment Required:

1. Hi- visibility vests 2. Safety glasses 3. Boots 4. Gloves 5. Fire Retardant clothing

Equipment:

1. Ropes 2. Blocks 3. Slings, grips 4. Shackles For the rider arm. 5. Nodwell 6. Excavator 7. one ton truck 8. Bulldozer 9. Boom Truck

Steps:

1. Tailboard N/A. This is part of the stringing operation and will be covered in the stringing tailboard.

2. Site should be at the following state. Conductor is gripped off to stub or spreader bar. Ground mats in place and grounded. Conductor has ground chains installed. Communication established with the cat. First span back has been clipped in.

3. Install sheave to spreader bar or stub and thread a ¾ double braid rope that will be used to control the release of the conductor from the tie downs.

4. Take the slack out of the setting and start to take up tension on the conductor. At this time stop the cat and install the “let-up clamp” on the conductor to the rope through the sheave. Rope is anchored to pick up that will be used to control the clearing of the conductor. The “let-up” clamp is rigged so it can be lowered after span is “soft sagged’ Take tension on the “let-up” clamp( back up the pick up)

5. Start the sagging operation again until there is slack in the cable between the butt down and the grips. Remove the grips.

6. Remove the ground chains with hot stick. 7. From this point on it is a matter of coordinating the release of the conductor with

the taking up the slack by the cat. This is accomplished by an observer at the first span back who controls the progress of the cat taking up the slack and the pick up releasing slack into the setting as the conductor. He does this by keeping the insulator string vertical.

8. When the conductor reaches in sag tension the “let-up” clamp is released from

Page 2 of 2

VALARD

Document Description RELEASING BUTT DOWN



the conductor and is lowered to the ground. Hazards and Control Methods:

Hazard: Release of Potential Energy

Control:

Proper Rigging is essential Stay clear of pinch points Communication is essential for the coordination of pulling up the conductor and letting is up from the butt down. All activity will stop if communication fails

Hazard: Electrical Shock

Control: Use of grounding procedure

Safe Work References:

SWP 26.001 – Defective Tools Practices SWP 26.002 – Electrical Work SWP 26.006 – Hoisting and Rigging SWP 26.007 – Use of Cable Clamps and Wire Ropes SWP 26.013 – Use of Company Vehicles SWP 26.014 – Environmental Work Practices SWP 26.020 – Use of Elevated Work Platforms SWP 26.025 – Use of Hand Tools SWP 26.027 – Spotters and Signalers SWP 26.028 – Fall Prevention SWP 26.029 – Cold Weather Work SWP 26.031 – Excavations SWP 26.036 – Bonding and Grounding

Page 1 of 2

VALARD

Document Description Use of Cable Car for Installing Hardware Created By: H.McNeil Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.050

Date: Aug. 10, 2011 Revision: 1 Revised by: Date:

27.050 Use of Cable car (stringing buggy) for Installing Hardware

This procedure is to identify the steps and hazards involved in installing aerial marker balls and spacers with a cable buggy on the Johnson Ridge from JR115 to JR109.

Safety equipment required: • CSA approved work boots • Hard hat or helmet, • High visibility vest • Safety glasses • Gloves • Fall arrest equipment • Emergency rappel kit

Tools and equipment required: 1. Cable buggy (certified to 350 lbs capacity) 2. Capstan Hoist (10, 000 lbs) 3. 5/8” rope 4. 1/2” Power braid rope 5. Marker balls 6. Air Flow Spoilers 7. Bird Diverters 8. Radio or two-way communications 9. Chain jack/hoists 10. 6” Travelers 11. Helicopter

Hazards:

Fall from heights, falling objects, mechanical failure, slips/trips, weather/wind, rope failure, pinch points, hydraulic failure, and wire/rope under tension – hit by/struck by. Equipment setup prior to commencing work:

1. Ensure capstan hoist is in good mechanical condition, and capstan hoist is secured to the butt of the pole.

2. Check all rope to ensure it is of proper strength and length and in good condition. 3. Engineering certifications for cable buggy and associated rigging are on site.

Page 2 of 2

VALARD

Document Description Use of Cable Car for Installing Hardware Created By: H.McNeil Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.050

Date: Aug. 10, 2011 Revision: 1 Revised by: Date:

4. Verify that tools and equipment are not over the maximum load capacity of buggy. 5. Spacer buggy is attached via rope on one side and hooked to capstan hoist so that

buggy’s ascent and descent can be controlled. Ensure that no sharp edges are in contact with the rope.

6. Worker has two means of support– one via the cable buggy secured to conductor cable, plus appropriate fall protection.

7. Check and ensure that all PPE is in good condition. 8. Check that radios are charged, verified for range and signal strength prior to

commencing work. Work must stop if there is no communication between worker in cable buggy and operator of puller.

Steps: 1. Review procedure, complete tailboard/hazard assessment including the safety

procedures for activities involving helicopter, discuss and sign off so that everyone is aware of the work plan and associated hazards, and rescue plan.

2. The work will only take place in good weather conditions and visibility. 3. The helicopter will deliver tools and materials to the sites, and after materials are on

site the helicopter will transport workers back and forth to the sites. 4. Worker will ascend the pole via bucket truck or climb, use a chain jack to secure the

cable buggy and attach buggy to the conductor cable, and then climb in and secure himself in the buggy, maintaining 100% tie-off at all times.

5. Capstan Hoist slowly controls the descent of the cable buggy from span to span, stopping as required so that spacers can be removed, clearing the path to install applicable hardware.

6. Once the buggy arrives at the structure the worker will tie-off and use the chain jack to secure the buggy and move buggy to other side of the structure, and repeat the process as the capstan hoist slowly lets the buggy descend to JR 109.

Page 1 of 3

VALARD

Document Description Potential Energy Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.056

Date: Sept. 23, 2010 Revision: Revised by: Date:

27.056 Potential Energy This procedure is to identify the steps to be taken to prevent any incidents from occurring

and to be completed in a safe and efficient manner.

Purpose The purpose of this procedure is to determine if the energy source(s) associated with a work assignment have the potential to harm workers. If so, the energy must be controlled using the general lockout/tagout procedure, equipment-specific lockout procedure, or alternative energy control, as appropriate. The procedure includes requirements for showing that a hazard analysis was completed.

Scope and Applicability The procedure covers all work that involves working on or near exposed electrical conductors or circuit parts or work that involves installation, servicing, and maintenance on equipment, machinery, or systems that may release hazardous energy.

Energy Types: Additional Information

Electrical Electrical energy refers to generated electrical power, stored power, and static electricity. Electrical energy originating from generated electricity or stored electrical energy in a battery can be switched on and off or disconnected. The stored electrical charge in a capacitor and static electricity can only be dissipated or controlled.

Thermal Thermal energy – what we experience as heat or cold – is commonly produced by mechanical devices (combustion and/or friction), electrical resistance, and chemical reactions (or changes of state). Thermal energy can be controlled and/or dissipated. Burns can occur due to both heat and cold, and the severity of a burn depends on temperature and duration or contact. The threshold for injury due to contact with hot liquids (which can cause burns or scalding) is 52°C (120°F). The threshold for injury to tissues due to cold is slightly below freezing (27°F or -3°C). All cryogenic liquids present a cryogenic burn hazard. Contact hazards with hot or cold surfaces are typically controlled with insulation, personal protective equipment (PPE), and/or time sufficient to allow cooling or warming.

Kinetic Kinetic energy is the extra energy an object possesses due to its motion. Setting an object into motion requires that the object be accelerated to attain motion, and this energy, if hazardous, must be dissipated. No threshold is proposed for kinetic energy; each situation must be evaluated.

Potential Potential energy can be thought of as the energy stored within a physical system. Objects at an elevated level, for instance, contain more potential energy than when they are

Page 2 of 3

VALARD



physically lowered, load suspended when lifting or moving with a crane/boom truck or any other approved lifting device. This also referred to as configurational energy, and it can be eliminated by lowering an object in a controlled manner. Potential energy is also stored in a compressed spring, which can be released in a controlled manner. No threshold is proposed for potential energy; each situation must be evaluated.

Pneumatic and Hydraulic Pneumatic and hydraulic energy refers to the energy inherent in the pressure that a gas or liquid is under. Pressure is generally expressed as psig (pound-force per square inch gauge), which expresses pressure relative to the surrounding atmosphere. A system can be under positive pressure (greater than atmospheric pressure) or negative pressure (vacuum). Pneumatic refers to pressurized air or gas, as in compressed air or gas in a compressed gas cylinder. Hydraulic refers to pressurized liquid, such as water in a hose pressurized by a pump. Releasing pneumatic or hydraulic pressure involves identifying the pressure source. If equipment is producing pressure, turn it off. If the pressure is stored, allow it to release or dissipate under controlled conditions. Note This section describes thresholds for non-hazardous gases; hazardous gases and liquids at any pressure must be locked out due to their chemical hazards (for example toxic, flammable, reactive).

Pneumatic Injury Thresholds Provided that skin and eyes are protected and no potential for deadheading (point blank exposure of the jet to bare skin) exists, the pressure required to inflict pneumatic jet injuries to healthy unbroken skin is over 600 psi. Pneumatic sources directed at eyes or ears can cause injuries at significantly lower pressures, depending on the proximity and diameter of the jet. The Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) places the threshold for air pressure that can penetrate through open wounds or cause damage if directed at body openings at 30 psig.

Hydraulic Injury Thresholds The pressure required to break intact healthy skin delivered by a hydraulic jet is over 600 psi. Depending on the diameter of the jet and distance between it and the affected area, much lower pressures are hazardous to eyes, ear drums, and open wounds. Hydraulic injection injuries at distances up to 4 inches between the skin and jet have been recorded. In larger piping systems, a hazard may be present if the liquid momentum conveyed by water and other liquids is sufficient to knock a worker down.

Compressed Air and Water Utility Systems Nearly every industrial or commercial installation uses utility water or compressed air systems operating at pressures up to 150 psig. Common practice has shown that wearing normal PPE such as coveralls, gloves, and safety glasses provides worker protection and lockout/tagout is not normally used or required for servicing and maintenance of these systems. The need for lockout/tagout may be indicated for pressures below 150 psig in such systems due to secondary factors such as water temperatures that exceed 120°F or working at

Page 3 of 3

VALARD



elevation, since a sudden release could activate the startle reflex that may cause a fall. Take into account all secondary hazards present in a particular work environment.

Compressed Gas Compressed gas cylinders or subsequent valves feeding downstream systems are subject to lockout/tagout where 1) the system is being serviced or modified, and 2) the gas is flammable, the gas is toxic, or the delivery pressure can exceed 150 psig with the regulator valve fully open. Lockout/tagout does not apply to cylinder installation and removal.

Chemical There is no threshold below which it can be categorically stated that no hazard exists for a system that may release hazardous chemical solutions at any pressure. This also applies to systems that contain flammable liquids or gases or any gases with a potential of creating a hazardous atmosphere, including gases used for fire suppression systems. Lockout/tagout may be necessary based on the hazardous properties of the chemical or to prevent a chemical release that poses environmental consequences. For more information on the properties of hazardous chemicals, see the appropriate MSDS on the chemical.

Potentially Hazardous Energies in Combination The following partial list of possible dangerous combinations of hazardous energies is meant to illustrate the types of configurations to watch for; many other combinations of energies may be hazardous.

Water and electricity. Consider the potential for shock or arc flash hazard when working on water lines over electrical components or when working on electrical systems in a wet location.

Compressed air and toxic materials. Consider results of inadvertent activation (will it generate toxic or radioactive dusts or aerosols that create contamination or personal exposure?)

Work on a ladder and unexpected energy or noise. Consider the location of overhead water or air lines when placing the ladder; consider the effect of unexpected impact of air or water or elevated noise level from release of compressed air. (A startled worker may fall or drop tools.)

Inert gas in a confined space. Consider asphyxiation hazards in a work location with poor or no ventilation; shut the gas source off and lock it out avoids oxygen depletion.

Magnetic fields and metal. Consider that ferrous tools may be propelled by strong magnetic fields.

Pneumatic and thermal. Consider thermal and pneumatic hazards near live steam or pressure relief valves.

Note; Review Safe Work Practice 26.015 Lockout

Page 1 of 1

VALARD

Document Description LIVE LINE TOOL RECERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS

Created By: HSE Department Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.070 Date: Aug. 18, 2011 Revision: 1 Revised by: Date:

LIVE LINE TOOL RECERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS

Protective Equipment

Maximum Use Voltage Phase to Phase

Retest Frequency

Rubber Gloves Class 00 500 V 6 Months Class 0 1,000 V 6 Months Class 1 7,500 V 6 Months Class 2 17,000 V 6 Months Class 3 26,500 V 6 Months Class 4 36,000 V 6 Months

Rubber Blankets, Line Hose, Couplers and Hoods

Class 0 1,000 V 1 Year Class 1 7,500 V 1 Year Class 2 17,000 V 1 Year Class 3 26,500 V 1 Year Class 4 36,000 V 1 Year

Bypass Jumper/Tubes

15 kV 15,000 V 1 Year 36 kV 35,000 V 1 Year 46 kV 46,000 V 1 Year

Fibre/Plastic Cover-up

Class 2 14,600 V 1 Year Class 3 26,400 V 1 Year Class 4 36,600 V 1 Year Class 5 48,300 V 1 Year Class 6 72,500 V 1 Year

Grounding Cables All Sizes 1 Year

Insulated Pole Platform 15,000 V FRP Live Line Tools 3 Year

Hydraulic Pruners/Pole Saws 3 Year Insulated Aerial Devices

As per the individual unit’s current test certification

1 Year Insulated Aerial Device

Barehand

6 months

Bucket Liner 1 Year

Page 1 of 1

VALARD

Document Description Traffic Accommodation Plan Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27. 071

Date: June 2, 2010 Revision: Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Jan. 7, 2011

Notes • Use this sheet in order to document your written Traffic Control Plan (TCP) and keep with the Job Planning documents. • Where a job involves moving to set-up at several different locations during the day (e.g., several poles), after each move, check

this plan to determine if there is a need for changes (e.g., changed road conditions, traffic volume, etc.). Where conditions do not change, continue to use the same TCP. Create a new TCP if work activity, hazards or measures change.

Work duration Work location Posted Speed Limit – Non-Freeway Mobile Operations Shoulder < 50 km/h Very Short— less than 30 minutes Encroachment in right lane 60 km/h

Work Short— 30 minutes to 24Hrs Lane c losure 70 km/h Zone Long — more than one day Intersection 80 km/h

90 km/h Volume of Traffic Visibility Posted Speed Limit - Freeway Low (less than 10 vehicles in 3 min.) Less than 150 m 80 km/h High (more than 10 vehicles in 3 min.) More than 150 m 90 km/h Night Operations 100 km/h Hil ls/Curves

Traffic ❑ Draw Diagram

Control Diagram

Traffic Devices S i gn s Barricades Police Arrow board Used

C o n e s Blocker Truck Crash Truck 360 degree Beacon Light plus Four Way flashers

Other Devices (specify)

Traffic Traffic Control Persons Required? ❑ Yes No Number ❑ High visibility clothing worn by all workers Control ❑ Night time arm/leg high visibility worn Persons Means of communication ❑ Radio Visual Signals (Must not perform any other work while The Handbook for Construction Traffic Control Persons Third Revised Edition along with this plan are designed to help meet the requirement for written instructions

Name Location Trained directing traffic) Written/Oral instructions

Name Location Trained Written/Oral instructions

Name Location Trained Written/Oral instructions

Page 1 of 1

Document Description Security Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.079

Date: Feb. 28, 2013 Revision: Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Mar. 23, 2018

27.079 SECURITY This procedure is developed to identify and to prevent any occurrence access and theft at all Valard’s Sites; Head Office: All doors shall be locked on each floor at all time, access will only be by the use of a

access card. All visitors must access the office at the reception area and sign in on the visitor’s sign in

sheet on the receptions desk and it to be signed out when exciting the premises. The receptionist area doors are to be locked at 5:00 pm. Access to the underground parking shall prevented unless activated by an employee’s

access card. All other office emergency procedures are located at each exit door of the office.

Substations; All Sea Cans shall be locked with high security locks and a steel box cover to prevent

open access to the lock itself. All material of value will not be placed on site unless required for installation. Security shall be coordinated with the owner of the substation and surrounding area. Area will set up a contract with a local security company if the local area requires it. All spools of wire shall be placed in a locked area. Local police are to be notified of the worksite and its valuable contents.

Transmission Work Sites; All material placed on a site shall be placed to prevent individuals from being able to see

any spools of wire and all valuable items. Where there is local traffic in the material laydown area a sign stating the No entry is

permitted and that it is monitored 24 hours a day. Any outside individuals that are seen in the area are to be informed that if they are seen

in the area again without permission shall be notified to the local police. In cases where there are individuals that are not permitted are seen then a security firm

shall be hired to patrol the area or a Valard employee shall have a trailer located in the material laydown area which contains sleeping accommodate to prevent any others from unlawfully entering Valard’s sites.

Page 1 of 4

VALARD

Document Description Use of Helicopter for Material Placement & Crew Delivery - Dokie

Created By: H. McNeil Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.081 Date: Aug. 11, 2011 Revision: 1 Revised by: Date:

This plan details the operations performed in the use of helicopters to fly equipment and personnel into the Dokie Wind Farm Project Area. The activities covered by this plan should be of approximately 4 days in duration.

1. Pre-Flight Preparation

1.1. Helicopter Selection

Load Weights: 2000 lbs depending on required weight of fuel on board. Suitable Helicopter: Bell 206 12,000 vertical reference hours 15,000 turbine hours experience

1.2. Pilot-Provided Orientation

The pilot will orientate the crew on the use of helicopter lifting in regard to the activities to be

performed. The pilot and ground crew will review the appropriate communication protocol, procedures and

emergency protocols. Flight direction of loads will be discussed. All necessary documentation will be provided by the Pilot and available for review. The pilot should be advised of any passengers who are riding in a helicopter for their first time or of

any passengers whom are susceptible to motion sickness or significant medical concerns. The pilot will hold a safety briefing with passengers to ensure they are in understanding of the risks

involved with helicopter transportation and of the particular helicopter in which they will travel.

1.3. Review & Preparation

Activities Supervisor: Darren Windross

# Of Crews: 1 (including supervisor)

Pre-determined delivery location is identified to pilot. Staging area will be ensured to be free of debris and articles that may become airborne. The pilot

will confirm this.

Preparation:

1. The staging area will be laid to reduce foot travel and to ensure no potential of load interference. 2. Loads will be prepared with rated web slings and cargo nets or fly bags. 3. Lifting order will be reviewed and discussed.

Controls:

1. A barricade will be placed at the access point to the fly staging area – no unauthorized people will be permitted to the site.

2. Radio Calling a) Notification of the activity will be announced over the area’s relevant radio frequencies. b) Pilot ground crew communication.

Page 2 of 4

VALARD



3. Lifts made away from roads, facilities and equipment.

2. Delivery Procedure

2.1. Load Hookup

1. Crew gets in position and stands in readiness to receive. 2. Communication between supervisor and pilot confirms they are ready to connect the load. 3. Receive the hook wearing appropriate PPE. 4. Hook load and indicate to the pilot the load is hooked using hand signals or by radio

communication. 5. Clear the load about to be lifted by moving backwards facing the load. 6. Load is lifted and transported to delivery location. 7. Once pilot clears the area with the load, the next load is prepared. 8. Re-approach is radioed from pilot to ground crew. 9. Repeat until all loads are delivered. 10. Ground Crew clears the area to a pre-determined location to allow the pilot to land. 11. Operation is concluded.

2.2. Load Release

1. Pilot will radio the incoming load on approach. 2. Crew members will stand with arms raised to direct the placement of the long lined load. 3. One crew member will communicate with the pilot on the radio. 4. When the load is approaching the ground the crew will remain clear and allow the pilot to release

the load.

3. Passenger Transport

3.1. Passenger Information 1. Helicopters are provided with seatbelts. They should be secured at all times once on board. If

provided, shoulder harnesses and ear protection (ear defenders or headsets) should be worn. 2. Do not throw any objects from the helicopter. 3. Ensure that all items inside the cabin are secured and that no objects are hanging outside. As

well, ensure cabin doors are fastened and locked.

3.2. Embarking and Disembarking

1. Never exit towards the rear of the Helicopter. Always walk away from the helicopter from the front. If ground clearances are questionable, it is wise to crouch until the helicopter takes off. However take special care that personal belongings, hardhats and light articles are secured to prevent prop wash blowing things away or into rotors.

2. Approach helicopter at approximately 10:00 o’clock to 2:00 o’clock of pilot for their optimal vision.

3. Walk parallel to helicopter to maximize helicopter blade to ground clearance. 4. Never walk uphill when exiting a helicopter or downhill when entering a helicopter. 5. Before approaching the helicopter, ensure that the pilot has seen you and that the hand signals

you have been instructed to use are exchanged. 6. On uneven ground proceed only on the downhill side of the helicopter. Uneven terrain can

significantly affect ground to helicopter blade clearances.

Page 3 of 4

VALARD



7. Do not carry anything above the level of your of your shoulders. Carry long objects parallel to the ground.

8. Secure all personal belongings, particularly headgear to prevent blade wash from blowing loose articles away or into blades.

4. Fueling

4.1. Fuel Storage 1. Secondary fuel containments will be located a pre-determined locations in accordance with

Transport Canada Regulations and to minimize the impact of rotor wash when landing for fuel.

4.2. Normal Fueling (aircraft shutdown) 1. Helicopter Crew Personnel will be the only ones permitted in the re-fueling area while this the

helicopter is being fueled.

a. Prior to commencement of fuelling operations, ground crews shall ensure that: b. Fuel to be dispensed is of the appropriate type and is free of contaminates and /or

biological agents. c. The refueling equipment is in proper operating condition; all valves, piping tanks, hose

nozzles. d. Accompanying equipment are in satisfactory condition, undamaged and free from leaks. e. All fire extinguishers are appropriately charged, current and properly placed. f. The landing area is free of debris. g. All non-essential personnel are cleared from the fueling area. h. Ensure that the aircraft will remain clear of any objects as it settles on its oleos to avoid

any unintended contact.

4.3 Rapid Fueling (Rotor turning) 1. Helicopter Crew Personnel will be the only ones permitted in the re-fueling area while this the

helicopter is being fueled

a. For rapid (rotor turning) refueling the following shall be accomplished by the pilot prior to initiating:

b. Stabilize the helicopter at a flat pitch and appropriate idle RPM in accordance with the RFM.

c. For mulit-crew aircraft, at least one pilot shall remain at the controls of the helicopter at all times.

d. For single pilot aircraft circumstances may require the pilot to exit the aircraft. The decisions to remain at ground idle or shut the aircraft down rests with the PIC. Under no circumstances shall the pilot exit the aircraft prior to properly securing the flight controls and setting engine RPM to ground idle.

e. Ensure that the appropriate communications are established with the ground crew, either through plug-in ICS, mobile radio, or hand signals.

f. Verify that the area surrounding the aircraft is clear of non-essential personnel and all debris.

g. For All refueling operations: h. Ensure that the fueling equipment is grounded. i. Ensure the aircraft is grounded. j. Ground the fueling equipment to the aircraft.

Page 4 of 4

VALARD



k. Ensure that all the crewmembers are ready for refueling operation to commence.

Page 1 of 2

VALARD

Document Description Rope Flying Created By: Vjeko Vidakovic Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.084

Date: April 8, 2011 Revision: 1 Revised by: Hayley McNeil Date: Aug. 2011

27.084 Rope Flying Procedure This procedure is to identify the steps to be taken to prevent any incidents from

occurring and to be completed in a safe and efficient manner. Tools and Equipment:

• Fly Rope Carrier • Helicopter • Various Shackles • Fly Rope Anchors • Portable Radios • Appropriate Road signs

Steps:

• Set fly rope carrier into position. • Boom truck shall be set behind the carrier in order to replace the fly rope reels

during the operation (if applicable) • Operator to check that Fly Rope Carrier is in good condition and operate electrical

and mechanical releases, making sure that it is in functioning properly. • Establish radio contact between fly rope carrier operator -> helicopter pilot -

>foreman. • Fly rope carrier operator adjusts brake pressure as per pilot instruction. • Place towing arrangement on the ground midway between puller and first tower

(leaving at least 15m of slack in the rope, enabling pilot to pick up the rope and maneuver into position).

• Hook up man stands stand holding the fly rope end and MUST be visible to pilot at all times (wearing rubber gloves).

• Pilot lowers the helicopter in order to hook up towing arrangement with fly rope. • Hook up man will signal to pilot that hook up has been made - helicopter can start

flying operation and clear away in crouch position (always visible to the pilot). • Pilot will start pulling of the rope, advising the fly rope carrier operator to release

breaks. • Adjust the tension on the fly rope during the operation, as per pilot’s instruction. • Stop the flying (pulling) at each structure until rope is inserted into traveler. • Position lineman at each dead/end structure to assist pilot to insert the rope into

traveler. • Pull the rope through the last traveler in section and past the tie down area until

rope can be reached from the ground.

Page 2 of 2

VALARD

Document Description Rope Flying Created By: Vjeko Vidakovic Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.084

Date: April 8, 2011 Revision: 1 Revised by: Hayley McNeil Date: Aug. 2011

• Crewman will hold the rope on the ground and grip it off to the anchor provided. • Pilot will move helicopter backward until enough slack is obtained so that rope can

be disconnected from the towing arrangement suspended at the bottom of the helicopter.

• Grip the fly rope at the other end of the section that is at the puller site. • Move helicopter back to puller site to attach the next fly rope, repeating the same

procedure as described above.

Contingencies: • Equipment will be available in case that breakdown occurs; extra ropes and tools

will be available if required.

• Mechanic shall be on standby in case that fly rope carrier breaks down.

Page 1 of 3

VALARD

Document Description Wire Stringing with Helicopter Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.085

Date: Sept. 23, 2003 Revision: Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Mar. 28, 2011

27.085 HELICOPTER WIRE STRINGING PROCEDURE for North Steepbank Extension 72 kV Line Construction 29PL6-38/39 Project

This procedure is to identify the steps to be taken to prevent any incidents from

occurring and to be completed in a safe and efficient manner. In addition to this procedure the SWP 26.030 Helicopter Safe Work Practice must be reviewed.

SAFETY EQUIPMENT:

1. Safety glasses 2. Hard hat c/w chin strap 3. Safety boots 4. Gloves 5. High Visibility outwear 6. Hearing protection

EQUIPMENT:

• Helicopter; type: as required. • 100’ Long line with belly hook, suitable ballast weight and load hook • 10ft 5/8 cable sling • Rated swivel • Rated pulling sock banded and taped • Rated slings and grips for both towers. • 2 man baskets • 1 crane for loading wire. • 1 tensioner • 1 reel trailer

SUPERVISOR'S RESPONSIBILITY Insure that tailboard is completed with hazards identified and reviewed with

the crew. Confirm site’s are free of debris and loose rigging and or material Flag of area that designated as a work zone. Insure that maximum conductor weight 80 feet of sag @ 0° C = 4000lbs is

maintained. Insure that appropriate sized rigging is available and certified. Confirm sag marks are in place Insure that sager has a radio with the same frequency as the pilot Confirm clear communication with all parties. Helicopter landing site is to be marked and flagged to prevent unauthorized

entry. Monitor radio to ensure that all communication and directions are understood

ITEMS TO BE REVIEWED WITH WORKERS • Overall plan to be reviewed including SWP 26.030 and this procedure • Review with each 4 man crew their location and responsibilities,

Page 2 of 3

VALARD



Once wire is hung in dolly crew leader to make contact with helicopter pilot, tensioner operator, and receiving crew.

HELICOPTER WILL LIFT OFF WHEN ALL PARTIES ARE READY Communication to be kept up during the stringing process with pilot and

tensioner. Keep phrases as short as possible. COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT. • Frequency of communication radio is to be 140.400 • Foreman on each crew, sager and tensioner operator will be issued radios. • Meeting with pilot to discuss directions and commands • Helicopter hand signals if radio fails use these hand signals. See chart below.

Page 3 of 3

VALARD



Steps

1. Clear site of all tripping hazards 2. Flag or fence off all environmentally sensitive areas to prevent any entry. 3. Confirm radio communication 4. Communicate plan to all workers 5. This method requires the use of a helicopter with 10,000 lbs. rating. ( VERTOL)

In the event of equipment failure, IE: tensioner seizes, wire will be flown back to reel side of river. STR#38

6. Setup reels and tensioner back of STR#38 7. Thread wire thread through tensioner and dolly on tower. 8. Wire to be gripped off at tower to hold it in position with enough tail to allow for

helicopter connection. 9. Rated kellum grip, banded and taped, installed with rated swivel and cable and

shackle for connection to helicopter. 10. Set up crane at STR#37 and ready rated cable sling and grip to capture wire. 11. Establish communication with pilot, tensioner operator, crew at STR# 37, and

stringing foreman. 12. Connect chopper to lead cable on wire and move away from area. 13. Chopper will take the weight until hold back sling becomes slack, and hold

position. 14. Remove grip from wire and secure sling so it will not interfere with the dolly. 15. Begin pulling wire maintaining minimum tension needed for chopper and to

maintain ground clearance. This will be determined by the use of sag charts and site sag of wire belly.

16. Once wire has past STR#37 by 20’ the brakes will be applied on tensioner. 17. The chopper will move the conductor into position at the tower wing and the crew

will install the grip, secure wire tail with rope to avoid kinking, and clear out of area. 18. The chopper will then release tension and if all looks good release the wire. 19. Wire will be gripped off to dead end assembly with 6-ton jack and grip at STR# 38. 20. Wire will be back gripped, cut and prepped for next phase. Or lowered to the

ground for reel change. 21. This procedure will be repeated until all 6 conductors are installed starting with the

bottom wire on #39 Line. 22. 2 wires to be pulled from each reel. Leftover wire to be used for #38 to #39.

• Conductor is 1033 ACSR Curlew. • Weight per foot-1.329lbs. • Final sag tension @ 0° C is 8000lbs.

Page 1 of 4

Document Description AED Program and Inspection

Created By: R. Hiscock Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.086 Date: Jan. 2, 2019 Revision: 0 Revised by: Date:

Scope and Purpose The purpose of this document is to ensure that all proper procedures are followed when you are assigned an AED unit. For additional information on AED Operating Instructions, please refer to the Operator’s Manual.

AED Request If you require an AED for an upcoming project, email [email protected]. A form will be sent to you for completion prior to receiving the AED. By signing out the AED, you are responsible for the overall care of the unit and maintaining the mandatory monthly inspections. Once the project is complete, the AED must be returned or re-assigned to your new project.

Monthly Inspection All AED units are to be inspected using form 9.9 AED MONTHLY INSPECTION FORM from Valard’s Health & Safety Manual This inspection form shall be submitted within the first week of each month to the Corporate Safety office by email: [email protected] All fields must be filled in on the checklist monthly, or it will be sent back to you for completion.

Please note that in the winter months, the AED unit must be kept in a warm area, and not left in a vehicle overnight. Failure to comply may lead to AED not functioning properly.

If AED is being stored in hotel/camp room overnight, it must be brought back to site the following morning.

Maintaining a State of Readiness Your AED does not require routine maintenance. It performs an automatic self-test once a week and every time you turn it on. The electrode indicators briefly flash during the test. If the automatic self-test detects a condition that requires attention, the OK symbol in the readiness display will fade and either the CHARGE-PAK symbol, the ATTENTION symbol, or the WRENCH symbol will appear, depending on the type of condition detected. Each month, the following shall be inspected and recorded:

• Check to make sure that the OK symbol is visible in the readiness display • Check the use by date on the electrode packet (visible through the defibrillator lid in the

upper right corner) and all other electrode packets. If the date has passed replace the electrode packet and battery charger.

• Check that the following supplies are stored with your AED: o CPR/AED Rescue kit o Pre-connected electrode pads

Replacing the Charge-Pac Battery Charger and the Quick-Pak Electrode Packet CHARGE-PAK battery charger and the QUICK-PAK electrodes are a set and have the same expiration date. Always replace the battery charger and electrodes at the same time to keep the replacement cycles in sync.

Page 2 of 4



Use the Physio-Control replacement kit to replace the battery charger and the electrode packet as follows:

• After using the AED • If the CHARGE_PAK symbol appears in the readiness display • When the use by date is reached or passed • Once both change outs have been completed, you must fill out the AED Battery and Pad

Change Out Form and return to the address listed on the bottom of the form The Physio-Control replacement kit includes a CHARGE-PAK battery charger, two QUICK_PAK electrode packets, and a CHARGE-PAK battery discharger. The discharger depletes a used battery charger so that it is ready for recycling or disposal. Replacing the CHARGE-PAK Battery Charger To replace the CHARGE-PAK Battery Charger:

1. Press the release latch (in the direction of the arrow) to

Remove the used battery charger. The battery charger springs outward from the defiibrillator.

2. Insert the new battery charger into your defiibrillator and push

until you hear it click into position.

3. Confirm that the symbol disappears and that the OK symbol appears in the readiness display.

NOTE: If the symbol appears after you replace the battery charger, the internal battery is very low and needs time to charge. Iyt may take up to 3 days if you had the defibrillator on for a long time or if you delivered many shocks. The OK symbol appears when the internal battery is charged.

Remember: If the defibrillator is needed for an emergency, attempt

to use it even if the symbol is visible.

CAUTION!

Keep the defibrillator at temperatures between 0° - 50° (32° - 122°F) while the new battery charger charges the internal battery may not charge efficiently at lower temperatures. Temperatures exceeding 50°C (122°F) for longer than seven days can permanently damage the internal battery.

Page 3 of 4



Replacing the QUIK_PAK Electrode Packet To replace the QUIK_PAK Electrode Packet:

1. Press the ON/OFF button to open the defibrillator lid (voice instructions will sound)

2. Press and hold down the ON/OFF button for 2 seconds to turn off the defibrillator and save battery power.

3. Remove the outdated or used electrode packet: a. Unplug the electrode connector from the

connector receptacle. b. Slide the anchor pin from the slot. c. Discard the outdated or used electrode

packet according to the local regulations.

4. Install the new electrode packet. a. Slide the anchor pin into the slot. b. Plug the electrode connector into the

receptacle. c. Ensure that the new electrode packet is

centered on the defibrillator and is tucked behind the lip before closing the lid.

d. Close the lid. Confirm that the packet USE by Date is visible through the upper right-hand corner of the lid.

Page 4 of 4



Lost/Stolen AED If an AED that has been assigned to you has been lost or stolen, you must email [email protected] and declare so. You will be required to fill out an AED Lost/Stolen Report form prior to a replacement being sent.

Returning an AED If you no longer require an AED that was assigned to you, please contact [email protected]. They will inform you of all shipping procedures to have the AED returned to the proper location.

Page 1 of 3

Document Description Ice Crossing with Equipment

Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.087 Date: Jan. 2009 Revision: 2 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Nov. 3 2011

27.087 EQUIPMENT CROSSING ON ICE The purpose of this procedure is to specify rules of good safety practice for all “Company” employees and contractors engaged in operations on ice covers and to provide information on the thickness of ice required to support moving and stationary loads and to specify methods for determining ice thickness and quality Final decisions about ice crossings have to be made on site by an experienced individual. Before any equipment crosses over any watercourse, the thickness of the ice must be checked by cutting a hole in it. NOTE: Bulldozers will not use blade or ripper tooth to check ice. The minimum ice thickness of clear blue ice for continuous travel is as follows: The first 1,000 kilograms (2,200 pounds) require 14 centimetres (5.5 inches) of ice Each additional 1,000 kilograms require 4 centimetres (1.6 inches) After 50 centimetres (19.7 inches) total thickness of ice, each additional 10,000 kg (22,000 pounds) needs 16 centimetres (6.3 inches) of ice Therefore, 1 5,000 kilogram (11,000 pounds) service truck needs 30 centimetres (10 inches) of blue ice D3 Cat needs approximately 50 centimetres (20 inches) of blue ice D5H Cat need approximately 60 centimetres (24 inches) of blue ice D6 LGP needs approximately 65 centimetres (26 inches) of blue ice D65 LGP Komatsu approximately 75 centimetres (30 inches) of blue ice D7 LGP approximately 80 centimetres (31 inches) of blue ice D85 Komatsu approximately 85 centimetres (33 inches) of blue ice Preventive measures and considerations to ensure safe procedures have to do with effective weight – bearing ice. Ultimately, one must consider the following: White ice is only half as effective as Blue ice If water lies between layers of ice, use only the depth of the top layer of ice A vehicle speed of less than 30 kilometres an hour is recommended to avoid wave buildup under the ice Add 20% to above thickness for saline ice Determine where the channels are on rivers and check periodically. These areas will be first to thin when temperatures warm up and water starts to run A river will continually eat at the bottom of the ice bridge, so the thickness must be checked before every crossing Determining ice thickness Prior to use, the ice should be measured to determine whether its effective thickness is adequate to support the expected load. The table below should be used as a guide to the required thickness for the loads involved. To initially determine effective ice thickness, the rule of thumb "one inch (2.5 cm) of clear blue ice for every thousand pounds (450 kg)" may be used.

Page 2 of 3



LOADS ON BLUE ICE Caution Ice that is less than six inches (15 cm) thick should not be used for any crossing. Because of natural variations, thickness may be less than 2 inches (5 cm) in some areas. The effective thickness can vary considerably in an ice cover. In particular, dangerously thin areas can occur due to currents in the covers of rivers and estuaries, and on lakes near the inlet or outlet of rivers and streams. Careful attention should be given to reduced ice thickness close to shorelines and around ridges and leads. The thickness can be determined by drilling test holes spaced at a maximum of 50 feet (15 m) apart in rivers, and 100 feet (30 m) apart on a lake. Crossings should be checked for ice thickness once a week when average air temperatures vary between -15 and -5 degrees Celsius; and daily when the temperature is above -5 degrees Celsius. Checks can be less frequent when ice thickness substantially exceeds requirements. A new hole should be drilled for each ice measurement. Ice that is no longer supported by water, due to lowering water levels, may be too weak to support the loads to be applied; conversely, a rising water level can result in the formation of two ice layers with an intervening water layer. Ice thickness tests will reveal these conditions. Operating precautions Following are a number of general precautions which should be taken when testing for ice thickness or crossing ice covers: (a) All persons involved in operations over ice covers should be familiar with the

hazards involved, the precautions to be taken and the basic rescue techniques required in case of a breakthrough.

(b) Single persons or single vehicles should not venture onto an ice cover when there is no help at hand.

Required Minimum Ice Thickness in inches

Description of Safe Moving Load

4 One person on foot 5 One Snowmobile 7 A single passenger automobile 8 A 2 ½ Ton Truck 9 A 3 ½ Ton Truck 10 A 7 to 8 Ton Truck 14 A 10 Ton Truck 19 A 20 Ton truck 24 A 30 Tom Truck 30 A 40 Ton Truck

Page 3 of 3



(c) When testing, persons on foot should be securely roped together, with minimum spacing of 50 feet (15 m).

(d) Light vehicles used during test periods and initial build-up should be equipped with an extended frame of logs to provide support if the vehicles break through the ice cover.

(e) A rope at least 50 feet (15 m) long, or equivalent to water depth, with a float, may be attached to test vehicles as an aid to marking and recovery.

(f) Vehicle doors and cab hatches should be removed or lashed open; seat belts must NOT be worn.

(g) Adequate spacing must be maintained between vehicles; it is recommended that an interval of at least 100 feet (30 m) be observed.

(h) Vehicle speed should not normally exceed 10 m/h (15 km/h) in order to avoid the effects of the hydrodynamic wave, nor should speed be less than 1 m/h (1.5 km/h) in order to avoid the effects of stationary load.

(k) Equipment required for rescue operations, such as "mats" (chained or wire-linked small logs or heavy planks as a platform for rescue vehicles) jacks, hoists, etc., should be available near by.

(l) Frequently it is the second vehicle in a convoy, which encounters ice failure problems. Before a second heavily loaded vehicle proceeds along the ice bridge, it is advisable to have it preceded by a more lightly loaded vehicle to check the route.

Steps:

1. Review hazards and record on the tailboard with a plan to address them. 2. Identify area of crossing (to be determined by experienced person) 3. Check condition of ice (blue or white) 4. Worker to wear PFD and attached to a 50 foot rope. 5. Second worker must be present (no one is to walk on ice alone). 6. Drill hole to determine thickness of ice on river every 30 feet. 7. Using Table calculate load rating of ice. 8. Cross the ice with equipment that is less than the load rating of the ice. 9. Test ice whenever the weather warms up above freezing. 10. Cross ice at no more than 15 km per hour and not less than 1.5 km per hour. 11. Insure adequate spacing between vehicles.

Page 1 of 3

Document Description Setting H-Frames Created By: B. Kowaski Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.115

Date: May 18, 2017 Revision: 0 Revised by: Date:

27.115 SETTING H-FRAMES

This procedure is to identify the steps and hazards in Setting H-Frames and must be available while the work is in progress

Safety Equipment:

• Hard Hat • Safety Glasses • Gloves • Hearing protection • Hi-Vis vest • Spotter to have a different coloured hi-vis vest

Tools and Equipment: • 30 Ft Slings (2) /20,000lb Rating • 24 Ft Slings (2) /20,000lb Rating • Spreader bar (1) • 1 ¼” Shackles (4) • 1” Shackles (4) • Softeners for slings (8) • Carpenters transits (2) • Plumb bobs (3) • Shovels (4) • Harness and basket rescue kit (1) • Pickup (1) • 1-Ton (1) • 80 Ton Crane (1) • 23 Ton Picker (1) • Digger Truck (1) with Pole Tongs • Gravel Truck (1) with conveyor • Hydrovac Truck (1) • Air compressor (1) • Air Tampers (4)

Page 2 of 3



Manpower Requirements:

• 1 – Foreman • 1 – Journeyman Power Lineman • 2 – Apprentice Power Lineman • 1 – Boom Truck Operator (Competent/Qualified) • 1 – Crane Operator (Competent/Qualified) • 1 – Digger Operator (Competent/Qualified) • 1 - Laborer

Steps:

1. Travel to job site 2. Review procedure and engineered lift plan. Complete Hazard Assessment and

Tailboard with all personnel involved prior to starting any work on site 3. Inspections to be completed on all Tools/Equipment and Rigging before any work

commences 4. Equipment logs to be completed before any work commences 5. Set up 80 Ton Crane level and at the proper radius for lifting each individual structure 6. Set up 23 Ton Picker or General Digger near the bottom section of H-Frame for

tailing 7. Prior to setting the structure, the Crew will level both holes with ¾ washed rock and

measure for setting depth 8. The rigging for the 80 Ton Crane will be choked below the top of the x-braces, using

20,000lb rated sling and a 1 ¼”shackle 9. Softeners will be used to prevent any damage to the sling where there are sharp

edges 10. A designated Signalman will give signals to the Operators while doing the lift 11. Direction will be given to the Crane Operator to tighten up the winch line by the

Signalman. The rigging will then be double checked by the Rigger before proceeding with the lift

12. The rigging for the Tailing Crane will be attached with the sling being basketed two feet from the end of the butt section of each pole and hooked up to a spreader bar using 1” shackles

13. Direction will be given to the Tailing Operator by the Signalman to tighten up the winch line. The rigging will then be double checked by the rigger before proceeding with the lift

14. The Tailing Crane will keep the butts of the poles approximately two feet off the ground and swing the boom to keep the winch line straight up and down as the 80 Ton Crane is doing the main lift

15. Once the 80 Ton Crane has the H-Structure vertical and the Signalman will stop the lift and the Tailing Crane will be unhooked from the Structure

Page 3 of 3



16. The Structure will be swung over the two holes and will be lowered with the Lineman guiding the butts into the holes until it is sitting firmly on the bottom

17. The Structure will be checked for plumb using a Plumb Bob and/or transit. If one side has to be raised the crane will hoist the Structure high enough that the gravel can be placed evenly across the bottom of the hole

18. Once the Structure is level the Digger Truck will clamp onto the pole utilizing pole claws to plumb one side of the Structure

19. The Gravel Truck will then be backed up close to the pole that is plumb, and will fill the hole ½ way with ¾” washed rock

20. The Digger will then grab the other pole and square off the Structure 21. Once the structure is plumb and squared each hole will have gravel placed in 6 inch

lifts and mechanically tamped. 22. The Signalman can give enough direction to the Crane Operator to lower the winch

until there is enough slack to unhook the shackles from the H-Structure 23. A Lineman will then go up in a man basket and clear all the rigging 24. The equipment will then de-mob and move to the next site

Contingencies:

1. Mechanic will be available in the event a breakdown occurs 2. Extra ropes and tools will be available if required 3. Muster Point will be the Crew Leader’s truck 4. Tailboard, ERP and Job Procedure is all in the Crew Lead’s truck 5. Spill trays and spill kits are on all equipment 6. Always stay clear of Line of Fire; NEVER walk under or place limbs underneath a

suspended load

Page 1 of 5

Document Description Site Preparation-Butt-Down Areas Created By: B. Kowaski Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.116

Date: June 09, 2017 Revision: 0 Revised by: Date: 27.116 PREPARATION-BUTT-DOWN AREAS

This procedure is to identify the steps and hazards in Preparation of Butt Down Areas

This procedure deals with preparation of stringing pull sites (puller and/or tensioner). Activity includes clearing of pull sites, installation of screw anchors or dead-man anchors for anchoring of conductors and OHSW (when pull site is in the middle of span), installation of ground matting, ground roads, set up of stringing equipment.

Safety Equipment:

• Hard Hat • Safety Glasses • Gloves • Hearing protection • Hi-Vis vest • Spotter to have a different coloured hi-vis vest

Tools and Equipment: • Crew Cab (2) • Megger (1) (Ground resistance measurement) • Radial Boom Digger (1) • Boom Truck (1) (28-30T rated) • Back-hoe (1) (200 or bigger) • 13 mm wire rope (As required) • Slug Plates (6) (Tested to minimum of 50000LBS) • Slug Anchors or helix anchors (6 sets) (As per design) • Non-metallic rope (As required) • Ground rods (As required) • Ground matting (As required) • Anchor bars and grout (As required) • Orange fencing (As required) • 4’x8’ orange fencing (As required) • Cross clamps (As required) (Attached to ground rods) • “Danger Limit of Approach”-signs (As required) • Orange flags (As required)

Page 2 of 5


Date: June 09, 2017 Revision: 0 Revised by: Date: Manpower required:

• 1- Foreman • 3 – Ground Man • 1 – RBD Operator (Competent/Qualified) • 1 – Boom Truck Operator (Competent/Qualified)

Job Steps:

1. Set out anchors positions for slug bars as per Detailed Stringing Plan 2. Depending on site ground conditions; use dead-man or drilled anchors as anchoring points for

the conductors. If it is normal or wet soil, use cements anchors for anchoring of conductors. Design of dead-man or drilled anchors shall be done by qualified engineer.

3. If dead-man anchors are used: Dig the hole as per design, install two slings on each anchor and extend it to the ground level. Backfill the hole properly and compact it thoroughly during backfilling. Use one dead-man anchor for anchoring of two sub-conductors. Total of six anchors shall be installed on any slug site for this project.

4. If screw anchors are used: Mark anchors positions on the ground and position RBD level for the first screw anchor to be drilled.

5. Install all screw anchors as per design. Rake the anchors as required per design. The anchors shall be installed in groups of four anchors.

6. Test anchors with dynamo to ensure they are rated for loads that will be applied to them 7. Make sure that area is free from any materials/equipment that could obstruct installation of the

matting. 8. Layout grounds mats and connect it using properly rated connectors. 9. Once matting is completed, install slug plates by connecting them to slings protruding to the

ground level from dead-man anchors or connecting them to front screw anchors of each group of four. Note that slug plates shall be tested / certified to designed load. Front and back screw anchors shall be inter-connected by certified chains and shackles.

10. Install ground rods as needed in order to obtain proper ground resistance (measure with megger).

11. For sites where poor ground resistance reading are encountered, install additional ground rods outside the grounding mat (other option is to connect the slug-site matting with adjacent towers by means of #2 ACSR wire).

12. Install a fence 1 FT in from the outer edge of the ground mat. 13. Install the outer fence 5 FT outside of the first fence (this fence should not be connected to the

grounding mat). 14. Make one entrance into each area. Install plywood or walkways at the entrance to the ground

mats. Walkway is to be covered by clean rated rubber blankets.

Page 3 of 5


Date: June 09, 2017 Revision: 0 Revised by: Date:

15. Position each piece of equipment (puller, tensioner, etc.) just behind slug anchors. Use heavier equipment to anchor lighter equipment using properly rated rigging (anchor tensioner to reel carriers, puller to reel winder, etc.)

16. Fly rope carrier may be set outside matting area and anchored by truck or excavator. 17. Connect each machine to the ground matting using rated and tested ground leads. 18. Ensure that all fencing is put back if removed due to placement of the equipment or reels. 19. If OPGW pulls do not coincide with conductor slug sites, prepare smaller slug sites as per

OPGW pulling schedule. The distance of OPGW slug should be not less than 3 x height of the adjacent structure.

20. Check communication throughout the pulling section prior start any operation. Drawings:

1. Typical slug-site lay-out 2. Certified design/drawing for screw piles or dead-man conductor anchoring

Contingencies:

1. Equipment will be available in case that breakdown occurs; extra ropes and tools will be

available if required.

2. Mechanic shall be on standby in case that any piece of equipment breaks down.

Page 4 of 5


Date: June 09, 2017 Revision: 0 Revised by: Date: Figure 1: The running ground required will provide protection from static electricity, induction, or accidental contact with an energized conductor. Grounds ensure that protective equipment will operate.

Page 5 of 5


Date: June 09, 2017 Revision: 0 Revised by: Date:

Page 1 of 3

Document Description Installation Of Spacer Dampers Created By: B. Kowaski Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.117

Date: Nov 1, 2014 Revision: 1 Revised by: B. Kowaski Date: June 27, 2017

27.117 Installation of Spacer Dampers This procedure is to identify the steps to be taken to prevent any incidents from occurring and to be completed in a safe and efficient manner. This procedure must remain on site while work is being performed. Safety Equipment Required:

• Hard hat • Safety glasses • Face Shield • Boots • Leather gloves • Hi-visibility vest • Fall Arrest Harness c/w Lanyard.

Required Tools and Equipment:

• Crew Truck (1) • Man Lift (1) *Optional • Chain Hoist 1.5T (2) • Boom Truck/Crane (1) (40-50T Rated) • Cable Car (6) • Universal lifting davit (6) • Rigging slings (belts) (4) Rated 2T SWL • Torque wrenches (6) • Various Shackles (4) • Torque wrenches (6) • Hand Line Ropes (18-20mm dia-60m long) (2) Incl. snatch block (1.5T) • Hand Tools (1 set) (Pliers, Spanners, Screw-driver) • Emergency rescue kit (1 set)

Manpower Required:

• 1 - Foreman • 6 – Power Lineman • 2 – Ground man • 1 - Operator

Page 2 of 3



Job Steps: • Inspect the cable cars at the ground level (start the motor, make sure that both front and

reverse gears are working, check brakes, etc). • Provide portable extinguisher at each cable car. • Position the Cable Car bellow first tower to start installation. • Position the boom truck (or crane) just next to it. Boom truck (crane) positioned as per

instruction (on level ground and away from existing lines). • Alternatively : Cable cars could be lifted up by hand line (if light spacer carts are used). • Note: Lineman already climbed onto the tower (using double lanyard system) and

positioned at each conductor arm. • Install temporary ground between cross arm and conductor. • Linemen descends down the insulator set to the conductor level (or crosses over the D/E

insulator set. • Attach the cable car to the boom of boom truck (crane) and lift it up to bottom x-arm first. • Lineman at the conductors shall guide the cable car when close to conductor and close in

traction wheel against each sub conductor. • Lineman climbs into cable car, belting into a car and un-belt from the bundle. • Perform visual and mechanical circle check as described above. • Place odometer on “zero” reading and starts moving towards position of first spacer-

damper. • The lineman in lowest cable car moves first, followed by lineman on middle phase and then

lineman at the top conductors. They should never be exactly one above the other due to possibility of dropping tools or materials.

• When cable car reaches first spacer-damper location, put on the brakes and turn off the motor.

• Position spacer-damper within tolerance using setting tool (square). Examine the spacer-damper prior installation.

• Tighten spacer-damper bolts to specified torque. • Start motor, release breaks and move next spacer-damper position. • Once cable car reaches next tower, the cable car is designed to go through if it is

suspension (tangent) tower. In case of angle or dead/end tower, the cable car shall be lowered down to the ground level on one side and lifted up to the conductor level on the other side of the tower, using boom truck or crane (or hang line in case of light spacer carts).

Page 3 of 3



Contingencies: • Equipment will be available in case of breakdown occurs, hold back ropes and tools will be

available.

• Man Lift provided in case of bad weather and/or slippery tower steel.

Cable car in position (next to tangent tower)

Page 1 of 2

Document Description Installing Travelers on H-Structures Created By: B. Kowaski Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.118

Date: Aug. 20, 2016 Revision: 1 Revised by: M. MacKenzie Date: June 20, 2017

27.118 INSTALLING TRAVELLERS ON H-STRUCTURES

This procedure is to identify the steps and hazards Installing Travelers on H-Structures and must be available while the work is in progress

This procedure deals with hanging the travelers to the insulators on a steel H-structure. The works are to be done in conventional way, using a picker with man basket and a winch truck. Use of helicopter is not required for this method.

Safety Equipment:

• Hard Hat • Safety Glasses • Gloves • Hearing protection • Hi-Vis vest • Spotter to have a different coloured hi-vis vest • Specialty PPE (Fall Protection) • Delineators (Mark Drop Zone)

Tools and Equipment: • 23 Ton Boom Truck with Man Basket (1) • 1 Ton with Rope Winch (1) (SWL On Rope 3780LBS) • 1 Ton Crew Truck (1) • Hanging Sling/Soft Sling (4) (2-3mm Long – 2T SWL) • Various Shackles (4) (Rated 2T) • 2 Ton Sheaves (2) (Rated 2T) • 5/8 Power Braid Rope (300ft) (SWL 3780LBS) • Hand Line Sheave (1) (SWL 1200LBS) • Hand Tools (Pliers, Wrench, Kliens)


• 1 – Foreman • 1 – Journeyman PLT • 1 – Picker/Boom Truck Operator (Competent/Qualified) • 1 – Ground Man • 1 – Winch Truck Operator

Page 2 of 2

Document Description Installing Travelers on H-Structures Created By: B. Kowaski Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.118

Date: Aug. 20, 2016 Revision: 1 Revised by: M. MacKenzie Date: June 20, 2017

Job Steps: 1. Insulators, and travelers are already at site. 2. Go over tail board with all personal involved. 3. Complete all inspections on equipment and tools before use. 4. Set up picker with man basket ,making sure that the truck is set up level and the

outriggers are on stable ground. 5. Set up winch truck on same side of the structure as the picker so the rope does not have

to be passed around the poles. And line up the fare lead to the center phase. 6. Maintain limits of approach when working near any energized lines. 7. One lineman will go up in the man basket to do the rigging. The lineman will use hand

signals to instruct the crane operator where the basket is to be positioned. 8. The lineman will also use hand signals to instruct the winch truck operator. 9. A 2”nylon sling will be basketed over the arm and a 2 ton sheave will be connected to

the sling. 10. The 5/8 rope will be placed in the sheave and the tail of the rope will be lowered to the

ground and connected to the bundle traveler. 11. The traveler will be winched up until it is hanging even with the bottom of the glass. 12. The lineman will connect the traveler to the glass using a socket clevis that is rated for

25000lbs. 13. Once connected the winch will be lowered and the rigging will be removed from the

traveler. 14. Inspect the traveler attached to the glass (movable gate should operate smoothly; no

damaged sheaves). 15. Make sure that all wheels are turning freely. 16. For the center phase install a hand line sheave to the lifting rope and connect to traveler

to keep the traveler clear of the x-braces as it is being winched up. 17. Hang OHSW travelers on to the designated peaks using the man basket.

Contingencies:


suspended load

Page 1 of 6

Document Description Let-out and Sagging of Conductors and OHSW Created By: B. Kowaski Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.119


27.119 Let-out and Sagging of Conductors and OHSW This procedure is to identify the steps to be taken to prevent any incidents from occurring and to be completed in a safe and efficient manner. This procedure must remain on site while work is being performed. Safety Equipment Required:

• Hard hat • Safety glasses • Face Shield • Boots • Leather gloves • Hi-visibility vest • Fall Arrest Harness c/w Lanyard. • Bucket Rescue Kit.


• Backhoe (2) (PC200 or similar) • Crew Truck (6) (Incl. Saggers) • Man Lift (3) (Optional) • Sagging Sling (1) (20m long-rated 20000LBS • Webbing Sling (2) (Rated 20000 Lbs, 20FT long • Let-out Ropes (2) (Approx 200m long-rated • Various Shackles (20) Rated 15000LBS • Dynamometer (5) (20000LBS rated) • Grounding Chains (10) • Hand Line Ropes (2) (18-20mm dia-60m If Required) • Running Grounds (4) • Hand Tools (1) (Pliers, spanners, screw-driver) • Live Line Tool to install grounds (Visible tool testing due dates)

Manpower Required:

• 2 - Foreman • 6 – Power Lineman • 5 - Operator • 6 – Ground man

Page 2 of 6



Job Steps:

1. Let-out of Conductors and OHSW 2. Note: All conductors are already connected to slug bars on one side. The conductors are

pulled out in the opposite direction and gripped on the other side of the slug bars under lower tension and are ready to be spliced.

3. Splice all sub-conductors at the slug site. 4. Install two single travelers on the top of slug bar and insert let-out ropes into each of the

travelers, then connect the ends of the rope to the grips that are holding conductors on forward side (low tension side).

5. Pull slowly the let-out ropes by heavy equipment located outside matting area and remove grips on forward side.

6. Get ready for pulling conductors at the forward site. Grip both sub-conductors in front of slug and pull it with sagging wire (rated 25000LBS), traded through evener block- (20000LBS). Connect evener block with dynamometer (20000LBS) and use webbing sling (20000LBS) to connect dynamometer to pulling equipment. Dynamometer will be used in order to not over tension wires. Install two single travelers in inverted position at the slug bar and insert sub-conductors into them.

7. Tie 2 sub-conductors vertically to the slug bar to prevent the upward movement. 8. Pull slowly 2 sub-conductors at the forward slug site until grips on backward side at let-

out slug site, are free and can be removed. Unshackle it from the slug bar. 9. Attach two let-out ropes that are already inserted into two single sheave travelers at the

top of slug bar to let-out lips (rubberized in order to prevent damage to sub- conductors) of both two sub-conductors of the first bundle to be let-out. Now, two sub- conductors are ready to be let-out.

10. Position the observer at the last tied in structure to monitor the movement of the suspension clamps and vertical movement of the suspension assembly.

11. Pull up with machine at the forward slug site, releasing the let-out lips vertically at the let-out site, until tension is off the lips at the let-out slug site. Stay in constant communication between observer at the last tied in structure-let-out slug site and forward slug site. Use separate radio channel if there is any helicopter works going at the same time.

12. This procedure continues until the let-out site has no tension on ropes. 13. The let-out lips will then be dumped off the wire and let to the ground, controlled by a P

line (small rope-dia 10-12mm) previously installed (to prevent damage to other wires in slug site during the fall of lips).

14. Then, the forward end will contact the last tied in tower to confirm the position of shoes on bundle. If necessary, adjust the shoes (clamps) position and then re-install grips and temporary grounds at the forward side.

15. Put the bundle back to slug grips and install grounding chains onto the conductors. 16. Repeat the same procedure until all conductors are let-out. 17. Let-out OHSW in the same manner as explained above. 18. Now, conductors are ready for sagging.

Page 3 of 6



Sagging at the slug site:

1. Start sagging with center bundle if possible. 2. Get ready for sagging of the conductors at the forward site. Grip both sub-conductors in

front of slug and pull it with sagging wire (rated 20000LBS), threaded through evener block-(20000LBS). Connect evener block with dynamometer (20000LBS) and use webbing sling (20000LBS) to connect dynamometer to pulling equipment. Dynamometer will be used in order not to over tension wires. Install two single travelers in inverted position at the top of slug bar and insert sub-conductors into it.

3. The wire will then be put into the single travelers on the slug bar. 4. Remove grounds from both sub-conductors. 5. The both sub-conductors are now ready to be pulled out of the grips at slugs and to be

sagged. 6. The operator of the pulling equipment will be signaled by an appointed signaling person

positioned at the slugs to take up the slack in the conductors until tension is released from the grips holding the conductors at the slug site. Remove the grips off the sub-conductors.

7. Depending on the length of the pull there will be 2-3 spans marked with sag boards. These sag boards will be installed in accordance with calculated temperature sag sheet.

8. There will be a sagger assigned to each span where sags are marked with sag boards and will have a fixed scope or free hand to sight the wire in to the sag board.

9. If there is a change in temperature from what the boards were hung at, each sager will be given a calculated adjustment to compensate for the temperature change.

10. The wire will then be pulled up while the sager watch to not over pull. 11. The back sager (being the farthest away from the pulling end) will direct the person at

the pulling end to take up the wire and then will stop pulling when it is roughly 6” low to the sag mark.

12. The back sager will now instruct the pulling end to take it up slow until the wire in his span is on the boards. He will then stop the pull, check that his wires are level and on the board.

13. If he is satisfied with this he will call them good and the pulling end will then work with the next sager and use the same procedures as with former sager. This procedure will be followed with each sager in the pull working backwards to the pulling site.

14. Note: As each sag is being worked with, the pulling end will check with the other saggers, having completed their sagging already, that the conductors at their site are still good and not being pulled over or remain lower than the design sag.

15. Now that both two sub-conductors have been brought to the designed sag in each section and confirmed good by the sag crew, the wires can be grounded and gripped into the slug.

16. Once the wires have been gripped, all saggers will be instructed to give a final check to ensure there are no adjustments to be made.

17. Note that sagging crew may decide to pull one by one sub-conductor into full sag, repeating the above procedure step by step.

18. Repeat the same procedure all three phases as well as OHSW.

Page 4 of 6



Sagging at the Dead End structure:

1. When sagging at the D/E structure, position pulling equipment behind the structure at least 2 x conductor attachment height.

2. Install grips on both sub-conductors as close as possible to the ground level (depending on the conductor tails length).

3. Depending on the pulling equipment, 1x1 or 2 sub-conductors shall be pulled to full sag. 4. Hook the steel wire rope of appropriate rating (15000LBS each) to the grips and then

connect it to the winches of the Bulldozer (D8 or similar) or to the backhoe by means of appropriately rated webbing sling (20FT long). Install Dynamometers on to pulling wires as close as possible to the pulling equipment.

5. Pull slowly until grips installed on the sub-conductors at the structure arm could be removed.

6. Once grips are removed, start sagging of the wires with further sager and repeat similar procedure as explained above.

7. Once wires are on the sag boards with all saggers, re-install grips at the x-arm of the structure or install D/E insulator string and grip all sub-conductors at the rear end of the string directly.

8. Repeat similar procedure until all bundles and OHSW are sagged to designed sag. Contingencies:

1. Equipment will be available in case of breakdown occurs, hold back ropes and tools will be available.

2. Man Lift provided in case of bad weather and/or slippery tower steel for the saggers.

Page 5 of 6



Page 6 of 6



Page 1 of 5

Document Description Pulling of Conductors and OHSW Created By: B. Kowaski Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.120

Date: Dec. 2014 Revision: 1 Revised by: B. Kowaski Date: June 09, 2017

27.120 PULLING OF CONDUCTORS AND OHSW (SWEATD PROJECT)

This procedure is to identify the steps and hazards in Pulling of Conductors and OHSW and must be available while the work is in progress

This deals with: 1. Tension Stringing Method Pulling of Conductors and OHSW 2. Slack Stringing Method for Pulling of Conductors and OHSW Safety Equipment:

• Hard Hat • Safety Glasses • Gloves • Hearing protection • Hi-Vis vest • Spotter to have a different coloured hi-vis vest • Specialty PPE (Fall Protection)

Tools and Equipment:

• Crew Cab (5) • Crane (1) (40 ton rated-for loading of reels) • Big Puller (1) (20000 LBS) • Track hoe (1) (200 or bigger) • Tensioner for Conductor (1) (20000 LBS) • Reel Trailers (2) • Four drum rope puller (1) (9000LBS) • OHSW/OPGW Tensioner (1) (4000LBS) • Single drum rope puller (1) • Running Board for conductor (2) • ¾” slings 15-20FT (12) (For anchoring conductors & equipment) • Crane/Boom Truck 23 ton (As req.) (With man basket) • Conductor Grips (24) To suite conductor size (Chicago type) • OHSW Grips (6) Chicago Type or Preformed • Pulling Socks for Conductor (12) (To Suite conductor size) • Pulling Socks for OHSW (4) (Killam Grip- To suite wire size) • Swivel 20000 LBS (1) (In front of running board) • Swivel 10000LBS (8) (At the back of running board) • Swivel 5000LBS (4) (For pulling OHSW)

Page 2 of 5



• Running Ground for conduct. (2 sets) • Running Ground for OHSW (2 sets) • Miscellaneous small tools (2 sets) (Hammer, pliers, tie wire, plastic tape) • Cable Cutter (2) (With cutting dies for conductor & OHSW)


• 2 – Foreman • 6 – Power Line Technician • 4 – Operators (Puller, 624 Loader-2, Tensioner, Crane, Boom Truck,

Puller/Tensioner) • 4 – Ground Man •

• Flagging Crew and Traffic Signs: (if crossing over public roads, railways, and navigable rivers) shall be positioned at all major crossings within the pull. Vehicle with flashing lights and flagger, with required traffic signs, shall stop any traffic while running board and or socks cross over road or railway. If required, rider poles to be installed at the crossing point as per Procedure for Installation and Removal of Rider Poles.

Job Steps:

1. Position two (2) reel trailers, each loaded with 2-4 conductor reels, just behind tensioner. 2. Ground it to the ground mat, as per Site Preparation-Butt-down Areas procedure. Anchor

tensioner to the ground anchor or connect it with both reel carriers by sling wires or belts (min.3/4”-8-10000LBS).

3. Feed sub-conductors through the bull wheels of tensioner. 4. Assign radio channel for pulling operation that is not interfering with channel used by

helicopter operations, if in progress at the same time. 5. Anchor Puller to the ground anchor or to the Hard Line Winder. Use slings min. ¾”-

12000LBS. 6. Connect Hard Line to the fly rope end at the puller site. Note that running ground needs

to be installed on the Hard line (if it is steel hard line) in front of the puller and start pulling of Hard-Line from Tensioner towards Puller. Puller will be operated in backward mode, controlling pulling tension. Use puller/tensioner, set at the tensioner side, to pull the Hard line. Note that Puller/Tensioner (P/T) needs to be anchored by means of heavy equipment prior start pulling (bulldozer/loader/backhoe) by 2 x dia ¾”x10-12FT long sling wires.

7. Assign lineman to follow the head of Hard line all the way from puller to tensioner. 8. Position lineman with boom truck at heavy angle structures in order to assist pulling of

the Hard line through, where required.

Page 3 of 5



9. Position Flaggers at any major road/railway/river crossing as well as any line crossing where rider poles are installed.

10. Control tension of the Hard line while pulling in order to not to interrupt any traffic or rub heavily on the rider poles or any other obstacles.

11. Once Hard line reaches the tensioner end, grab it in front of tensioner and install temporary ground on it. Disconnect it from rope and connect with running board front end by means of 20000LBS swivel. Note that two sub-conductors are already in front of tensioner and are connected to rear end of running board by means of pulling socks (Kellem grips) and swivel joints.

12. Install running grounds on both sub-conductors. 13. Remove temporary ground that is installed earlier on the Hard line. 14. Slowly start pulling by removing the slack of the Hard line first. 15. Continue at slow speed rate until running board passes first tower. 16. Assign observer to follow the running board at all times during pulling. Due to various

obstacles along the pulling section, this may require more than one observer. Dead End structures in heavy angle shall have full time observer stationed at it. Note that double traveler may have to be used on the arms of heavy angle structures.

17. Running board observer shall stay in radio contact with puller and tensioner operator at all times during the operation. The observers will advise on information such as: position of the running board, running board is approaching any structure; pulling tension should be increased/decreased etc.

18. Slow down the pulling when warning markers on the conductor reels are down to last layer left on the reels.

19. Continue with slow pull until only two to four wraps are remaining on the conductor reels. 20. Stop pulling. 21. Cut the ends of both sets of the reels (front set that is just pulled out and set to follow). 22. Connect ends of reels by means of Kallem grips. Tie the Kellem grips properly and call

puller to “sock-out” the Kellem grips. 23. As Kellem grips come out of the tensioner, hold the pulling. 24. As pulling stops for installation of the implo-sleeves, ground both sub-conductors in front

of the tensioner far enough to allow for the attaching slings and grips. Slings used for this purpose shall be at least dia 3/4” and 20-30FT long.

25. Install grips and slings on each sub-conductor in front of tensioner. As the sub- conductors could be high in some cases, use ladder or man lift to install the slings and grips.

26. Push forward slowly by tensioner until sling wires take the tension and Kellem grips are lose and can be removed.

27. Remove Kellem grips from both ends and install implo-sleeves as per manufacturer’s instruction and procedure.

28. Once sleeves are completed, tie back sub-conductors by tensioner in order to remove the grips and slings in front of tensioner.

29. Remove grounds installed in front of tensioner. 30. Reinstall running grounds on each sub-conductor. 31. Continue with pulling until second/third sets of reels are completed.

Page 4 of 5



32. Once the board has passed through to the last structure, pull until conductors enter the slug area.

33. Once the board has entered the slug site at the puller end and the operator is satisfied that there is enough wire to safely grip into the slug, alert the tensioner end and halt the pull.

34. Each of the conductors will then be grounded and transferred into the slug. If the position of tensioner is not in line with slugs, attach the bundle to heavy equipment (backhoe or loader) and transfer it (walk) to the slugs.

35. Note that once back hoe/loader has taken over the load of the bundle, puller shall release the Hard line and detach the running board and Kellem grips from the head of the bundle.

36. Advise the tensioner site that all sub-conductors have been secured and grounded. 37. The tensioner end can then even up the wires if needed and grip it into the slugs using

the same methods as the puller end. Note that tensioner side may place the bundle into the slug at first in which case the leveling of the bundle shall be carried out at the puller site prior gripping of the sub-conductors into the slugs.

38. Repeat the same procedure until all conductors are pulled out. 39. Note that pulling section may begin and/or end at the dead-end structure. In that case all

sub-conductors shall be “short-gripped” to the cross arms of the D/E tower. 40. Pull OHSW using Puller/Tensioner, positioned at the tensioner site. 41. Small tensioner for pulling of the OHSW shall in normal case, be positioned at the puller

side but the positions could be inverted in some cases. 42. OHSW shall be connected tot the end of fly rope and pulled in by the same rope. 43. Head of OHSW shall be connected to the rope end by means of Kellem grip and swivel-

5000LBS. 44. Constant communication on separate channel (if parallel with pulling of the conductors)

shall be maintained during stringing of OHSW. 45. Once pulled in, OHSW shall be put into slugs in the same manner as conductors. 46. Safe clearance from the pulling conductors/OHSW to the ground and any obstacles,

such as rider pole, shall be kept at all times during puling operation. 47. Special care shall be taken where the pulling comes close or crosses existing lines. LOA

shall be maintained at all times during pulling as well as reclosure blocking will be in place.

48. In order to avoid damages of the conductors during the pulling operation, the conductors shall be handled with extreme care. However, if the any damage occurs, it will be treated in accordance with Specification for Conductors and OHSW installation.

Page 5 of 5



Typical Tension Stringing Crossing Diagram

Contingencies:


suspended load

Page 1 of 2

Document Description Tie In Tangent (Clamping In) Created By: B. Kowaski Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.121


27.121 Tie in Tangent (Clamping in) This procedure is to identify the steps to be taken to prevent any incidents from occurring and to be completed in a safe and efficient manner. This procedure must remain on site while work is being performed. Safety Equipment Required:

• Hard hat • Safety glasses • Face Shield • Boots • Leather gloves • Hi-visibility vest • Fall Arrest Harness c/w Lanyard


• Crew Truck (1) • Man Lift (1) *Optional • Chain Hoist 3T (2) • Retractable Lock (3) • Rigging slings (belts) (2) (1.5-2m Long -Rated 3T) • Grip All Stick (1 Set) • Various Shackles (4) • Hand Line Ropes (18-20mm dia-60m long) (2) Incl. snatch block (1.5T) • Hand Tools (1 set) (Pliers, Spanners, Screw-driver)

Manpower Required:

• 1 - Foreman • 3 – Power Lineman • 2 – Ground man

Page 2 of 2

Document Description Tie In Tangent (Clamping In) Created By: B. Kowaski Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.121


Job Steps: • Once two linemen are on the top of tower (lifted up by man lift or climbed using double

lanyard), attach temporary ground (grip all stick) to the sub conductors of the phase to be tied in first.

• Lift up lifting shoes, rigging slings and chain hoists onto the tower. • Attach the rigging set (chain hoist, sling, lifting shoes) to the end of tower arm. • Take up load on the chain hoists, raising sub conductors approximately 50 to 70 mm off the

traveler sheaves. • Wrap the end of the hand line around center sheave of the traveler and open the hinged

trap door of the helicopter arm assembly. • Jack up the conductor bundle until it is cleared above traveler sheaves. • Disconnect traveler from the insulator string and lower it to the ground. Use 1T truck or any

other available equipment to lower the traveler. • Remove the hand line from the traveler once it reaches ground. • Connect the suspension clamps to the hand line and lift it up into position. • Connect the suspension clamps to the insulator string, as per suspension assembly

drawing, making sure that that the ball is properly seated in the socket and that cotter key is properly installed.

• Place each sub conductor into the individual clamp and tighten properly (making sure that insulator assembly is vertically plumbed after the clamps are tightened and rigging set removed).

• Remove the rigging set to the next phase and continue with clamping. • Use 1.5 T Chain hoist to tie in sky wire and OPGW.

Contingencies: • Equipment will be available in case that breakdown occurs. Hold back ropes and tools will

be available.

• Man Lift provided in case of bad weather and/or slippery tower steel.

Page 1 of 3

Document Description Setting H Frames Created By: Darren Windross Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.136

Date: Revision: 6 Revised by: W Procyshyn Date: 08/16/2018

SOP 27. 136 Setting 2 Pole H- Frames 1. Tool/Equipment List:

1.1 2 - 40 ft. poly Slings Rated for 40000 lbs. 1.2 2 – 10 ft. Poly Slings rated for 53000 lbs. 1.3 1 – Spreader Bar rated for loa 1.4 2 - 11/ in. Shackles 1.6 360 ft. - Poly Rope 1.7 Carpenter’s transits 1.8 8 - Softeners for slings 1.9 3 - Plumb bobs/Transit 1.10 4 – Shovels 1.11 1 – 350 Excavator 1.12 4- 1 ton pickups 1.13 1 – 200-ton Crane 1.14 1 250 Excavator with claws 1.15 1 – Backhoe or Loader 1.16 2 Gravel Trucks 1.17 Conveyer 1.18 Laser Level 1.19 1- Air compressor mounted on car hauler 1.20 10 – Air Tampers

2. Manpower Required: 2.1 1 – Foreman with Supervisor Leadership Training 2.2 2 – PLT Journeymen c/w EQ Bonding & Grounding training and JM certificate 2.3 4 – PLT apprentices c/w Fall Pro & Ground disturbance training 2.4 1 – Gravel Truck operator c/w driver’s license 2.5 1 – Crane operator with Crane and hoisting certificate 2.6 1 – Excavator operator c/w PME training 2.7 1 - Labourer c/w site orientation

3. Jobsite Communication 3.1 All direction to be from the Construction Manager to Crew Foreman 3.2 All direction to workers from the Foreman

4. Deliverables 4. 1 Coded Time Reports done daily 4.2 Daily Tailboard and Emergency Response Plan 4.3 Applicable Daily Equipment Checks

Page 2 of 3



4.4 Daily NSC Equipment Logs 4.5 Construction crew to inspect all material are available and insure they are in good condition 4.6 This procedure to be available on site during the work process 4.7 Engineering Plan approved and available prior to work commencing

5. Access 5.1 Maps and Road Restrictions to be available 5.2 All equipment must stay on rig mats when crossing pipeline right of ways

6. Prerequisites 6.1 Foreman to have work package c/w Drawings/ ERP/ Quality Documents 6.2 All Materials on site 6.3 Drop zones to be established setup and maintained 6.4 Grounding Plan to be developed on site daily if required

7. Procedure Steps 7.1 Travel to Jobsite 7.2 Review procedure, engineering lift plan, all IFC drawings and QA requirements 7.3 Complete Hazard Assessment and Tailboard daily with all personnel involved 7.4 Equipment logs to be completed before any work commences 7.5 Set up 200Ton Crane level and at the proper radius for lifting each individual structure 7.6 Set up 350 Excavator and spreader bar near the bottom section of H-Frame for tailing 7.7 Prior to setting the structure, the Crew will level both holes with ¾” to 1.5” washed rock and measure for setting depth. Mark setting depth onto each pole of H-frame with chalk 7.8 The rigging for the 200 Ton Crane will be choked below the bottom cross arm, using 20,000lb rated sling and a 1 ¼” shackle 7.9 Softeners will be used to prevent any damage to the sling where there are sharp edges 7.10 A designated Signalman will give signals to the Operators while doing the lift 7.11 Direction will be given to the Crane Operator to tighten up the winch line by the Signalman. The rigging will then be double checked by the Rigger before proceeding with the lift 7.12 The rigging for the Tailing Crane will be attached with the sling being basketed two feet from the end of the butt section of each pole and hooked up to a spreader bar using 1” Shackles 7.13 Direction will be given to the Tailing Operator by the Signalman to tighten up the rigging. The rigging will then be double checked by the rigger before proceeding with the lift

Page 3 of 3



7.14 The 350 Excavator and spreader bar tailing, will keep the butts of the poles approximately two feet off the ground and walk towards the 200ton crane to keep the winch line straight up and down as the 200ton Crane is doing the main lift 7.15 Once the 200 Ton Crane has the H-Structure vertical, the Signalman will stop the lift and the 350 excavator and spreader bar tailing will be unhooked from the Structure 7.16 The Structure will be swung over the two holes and will be lowered with the Lineman guiding the butts into the holes until it is sitting firmly on the bottom 7.17 The Structure will be checked for initial plumb using a Plumb Bob and/or transit. If one side has to be raised the crane will hoist the Structure high enough that the gravel can be placed evenly across the bottom of the hole 7.18 Once the Structure is level, the 250 excavator with clam, will clamp onto the left or right pole and plumb one side of the structure as per the direction of the signal man. 7.19 The Gravel Truck will then be backed up close to the pole that is plumb, and will fill the hole ½ way with ¾” to 1.5” washed rock 7.20 The 250 excavator with clam, will then grab the other pole and square off the Structure 7.21 Once the structure is plumb and squared each hole will have gravel placed in 2’ lifts and mechanically tamped. 7.22 The Signalman can give enough direction to the Crane Operator to lower the winch until there is enough slack to release the pull pin shackles via 3/8” poly rope from the H-Structure 7.23 The equipment will then de-mob and move to the next site

3. Contingencies: 8.1 Mechanic will be available in the event of equipment breakdown of failure 8.2 Extra ropes and tools will be available if required 8.3 Muster Point will be the Crew Leader’s truck 8.4 Tailboard, ERP and Job Procedure to be located in the Crew Lead’s truck 8.5 Spill kits to be located in all equipment 8.6 Always stay clear of Line of Fire; NEVER walk under or place limbs underneath a suspended load

Page 1 of 3

Document Description Setting H Frames VC7608 Created By: Darren Windross Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.136(A)

Date: Revision: 7 Revised by: J. Repchinsky Date: Oct. 15, 2018

SOP 27. 136(A) Setting 2 Pole H- Frames VC 7608 1. Tool/Equipment List:

1.1 2 - 40 ft. poly Slings Rated for 40000 lbs. 1.2 2 – 10 ft. Poly Slings rated for 53000 lbs. 1.3 1 – Spreader Bar rated for loa 1.4 2 - 11/ in. Shackles 1.6 360 ft. - Poly Rope 1.7 Carpenter’s transits 1.8 8 - Softeners for slings 1.9 3 - Plumb bobs/Transit 1.10 4 – Shovels 1.11 1 – 350 Excavator 1.12 4- 1 ton pickups 1.13 1 – 200-ton Crane 1.14 1 250 Excavator with claws 1.15 1 – Backhoe or Loader 1.16 2 Gravel Trucks 1.17 Conveyer 1.18 Laser Level 1.19 1- Air compressor mounted on car hauler 1.20 10 – Air Tampers

2. Manpower Required: 2.1 1 – Foreman with Supervisor Leadership Training 2.2 2 – PLT Journeymen c/w EQ Bonding & Grounding training and JM certificate 2.3 4 – PLT apprentices c/w Fall Pro & Ground disturbance training 2.4 1 – Gravel Truck operator c/w driver’s license 2.5 1 – Crane operator with Crane and hoisting certificate 2.6 1 – Excavator operator c/w PME training 2.7 1 - Labourer c/w site orientation

3. Jobsite Communication 3.1 All direction to be from the Construction Manager to Crew Foreman 3.2 All direction to workers from the Foreman

4. Deliverables 4. 1 Coded Time Reports done daily 4.2 Daily Tailboard and Emergency Response Plan 4.3 Applicable Daily Equipment Checks

Page 2 of 3



4.4 Daily NSC Equipment Logs 4.5 Construction crew to inspect all material are available and insure they are in good condition 4.6 This procedure to be available on site during the work process 4.7 Engineering Plan approved and available prior to work commencing

5. Access 5.1 Maps and Road Restrictions to be available 5.2 All equipment must stay on rig mats when crossing pipeline right of ways

6. Prerequisites 6.1 Foreman to have work package c/w Drawings/ ERP/ Quality Documents 6.2 All Materials on site 6.3 Drop zones to be established setup and maintained 6.4 Grounding Plan to be developed on site daily if required

7. Procedure Steps 7.1 Travel to Jobsite 7.2 Review procedure, engineering lift plan, all IFC drawings and QA requirements 7.3 Complete Hazard Assessment and Tailboard daily with all personnel involved 7.4 Equipment logs to be completed before any work commences 7.5 Set up 200Ton Crane level and at the proper radius for lifting each individual structure 7.6 Set up 350 Excavator and spreader bar near the bottom section of H-Frame for tailing 7.7 Prior to setting the structure, the Crew will level both holes with ¾” to 1.5” washed rock and measure for setting depth. Mark setting depth onto each pole of H-frame with chalk 7.8 The rigging for the 200 Ton Crane will be choked below the bottom cross arm, using 20,000lb rated sling and a 1 ¼” shackle 7.9 Softeners will be used to prevent any damage to the sling where there are sharp edges 7.10 A designated Signalman will give signals to the Operators while doing the lift 7.11 Direction will be given to the Crane Operator to tighten up the winch line by the Signalman. The rigging will then be double checked by the Rigger before proceeding with the lift 7.12 The rigging for the Tailing Crane will be attached with the sling being basketed two feet from the end of the butt section of each pole and hooked up to a spreader bar using 1” Shackles 7.13 Direction will be given to the Tailing Operator by the Signalman to tighten up the rigging. The rigging will then be double checked by the rigger before proceeding with the lift

Page 3 of 3



7.14 The 350 Excavator and spreader bar tailing, will keep the butts of the poles approximately two feet off the ground and walk towards the 200ton crane to keep the winch line straight up and down as the 200ton Crane is doing the main lift 7.15 Once the 200 Ton Crane has the H-Structure vertical, the Signalman will stop the lift and the 350 excavator and spreader bar tailing will be unhooked from the Structure 7.16 The Structure will be swung over the two holes and will be lowered with the Lineman guiding the butts into the holes until it is sitting firmly on the bottom 7.17 The Structure will be checked for initial plumb using a Plumb Bob and/or transit. If one side has to be raised the crane will hoist the Structure high enough that the gravel can be placed evenly across the bottom of the hole 7.18 Once the Structure is level, the 250 excavator with clam, will clamp onto the left or right pole and plumb one side of the structure as per the direction of the signal man. 7.19 The Gravel Truck will then be backed up close to the pole that is plumb, and will fill the hole ½ way with ¾” to 1.5” washed rock 7.20 The 250 excavator with clam, will then grab the other pole and square off the Structure 7.21 Once the structure is plumb and squared each hole will have gravel placed in 2’ lifts and mechanically tamped. 7.22 The Signalman can give enough direction to the Crane Operator to lower the winch until there is enough slack to release the pull pin shackles via 3/8” poly rope from the H-Structure 7.23 The equipment will then de-mob and move to the next site

3. Contingencies: 8.1 Mechanic will be available in the event of equipment breakdown of failure 8.2 Extra ropes and tools will be available if required 8.3 Muster Point will be the Crew Leader’s truck 8.4 Tailboard, ERP and Job Procedure to be located in the Crew Lead’s truck 8.5 Spill kits to be located in all equipment 8.6 Always stay clear of Line of Fire; NEVER walk under or place limbs underneath a suspended load

Page 1 of 3

Document Description Erection of a “V” Type Tower using Crane Created By: J. Friesen Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.143


27.143 ERECTION OF A “V” TYPE TOWER USING A CRANE This procedure applies to the erection of a “V” type tower using a crane to prevent injury to workers or disruption of production while performing this task. PPE Required:

• Hard Hat • Safety Glasses • Appropriate Gloves • CSA Approved Boots • Hearing Protection • Hi-Vis Outerwear • Fall Arrest Harness and Lanyard • Tower Rescue kit • Bucket Rescue kit

Equipment Required:

• Mobile work platforms • Mobile crane • Chain Hoists (1-1 ½ ton) (1-3 ton) • Excavator (350) • Shackles (rated) • Steel slings (rated) • Nylon slings (rated) • Sling Softeners

Tools Required:

• Torque wrenches • Wrenches (spud and open ended) • Generator • Extension cord • Impact gun c/w sockets • Sling Softeners • Sledge hammer • Batteries/Chargers

STEPS:

Page 2 of 3



1. Crane operator to set up crane ensuring full extension of all outriggers on pads (use rig

mats on unstable ground). 2. Designated signalperson to guide crane boom into position and rigger to connect

rigging assembly at the predetermined lifting points on the upper section of the tower. 3. Rigger to connect the excavator to the rigging assembly on the lower section of the

structure. 4. Grounds crew to attach (½ - ⅝ rope) tag lines to control the load as it is being hoisted

and maneuvered into place. 5. Signalperson will direct both crane and tailing crane/excavator to hoist slowly, taking up

slack in the rigging assembly. 6. Once the slack has been removed from the rigging assembly, the signalperson shall

direct the cranes to STOP and confirm that the lifting hooks are positioned and seated correctly, centrally over the load lifting points. Adjust the rigging assembly as necessary to minimize the ‘drift’ of the load as it is being lifted

7. Signalperson will signal operators to slowly hoist tower section off the ground taking the weight of the structure in preparation of full lift.

8. Once the load has been completely transferred to the lead crane, the ground and the tailing the rigging can be removed from the excavator.

9. The signalperson shall signal the crane operator to hoist up and swing the tower into position over the footing.

10. Once the tower is in position over the footing, the section can be lowered onto the footing and set the tower.

11. Crew (2 – 3 per anchor location) to take guy wires out to each of the guy positions and connect the chain hoist assembly to the guy wire.

12. Crew to bolt tower footing to tower base (following the bolting specifications on the IFC specs.) torqueing, then marking with a red marker.

13. In preparation of guy connection, crew to position themselves to plumb tower, one in-line with the ROW and the other 90 degrees off the tower.

14. Groundsperson will signal crane operator to lean tower toward two guys, catch guys at end of adjustment and attach to the guy fittings on both anchor rods.

15. Rotate crane to roughly plumb tower. Grab two remaining guys with turfer, rope blocks or chain jack (rated) and attach to guy fittings. Rigging at the guy wire will be 1 or two rated jacks attached to a yoke plate (if required).

16. Plumb tower using nuts on guy fittings and snug backer nut (not final tension). 17. Signalperson will signal the lead crane operator to lower his hook and let slack into the

rigging assembly. 18. Crews to ascend the tower (climb or man-lift) to release the rigging from the structure. 19. Once released, designated lineman on tower will signal to the crane operator to move

the hook and rigging away from the structure.

Page 3 of 3



20. Crew member will guide disconnected rigging assembly away from the structure.

Page 1 of 3

Document Description Assembling Steel H Frame Structures Created By: V. Vidakovic Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.147

Date: Feb 22, 2018 Revision: 2 Revised by: J. Repchinsky Date: Oct. 3, 2018

SOP 27.147 Assembling Steel H Frame Structures

1) Tool /Equipment List:

Item Description Quantity Remarks 1. Crew truck 2 2. Loader/Zoom boom 1 With softeners on forks 3. Picker 1 26 ton or larger 4. Nylon slings Required amount Properly rated 5. Spud bars 6 6. Impact wrenches 3 7. sockets Required amount impact 8. Back up wrenches 3 9. Hammers

10. Blocking/pole cows Required amount 11. Generator 1 12. Extension cords 2 100’ long

Personnel Requirements Quantity Knowledge and Training Requirements

Foreman 1 • Leader ship trained and qualified. • Trained in basic rigging and qualified. • First aid trained.

Loader operator/Zoom boom 1 • Power mobile equipment certified and qualified

for loader. • Trained in basic rigging.

Picker operator 1 • Certified and qualified. • Log book training. • Trained in Basic rigging.

Lineman 2 • Certified and qualified. • Trained in basic rigging.

Laborer 2 • Trained and qualified In the use of chainsaws (if

using chainsaw) • Trained in basic rigging.

3) Deliverables:

Page 2 of 3



3.1 Coded time reports daily 3.2 Completed tailboard 3.3 Applicable equipment inspections

4) Access to Site:

4.1 All equipment will be clean prior to entering the work site. 4.2 Slow down when passing farms on way to work when traveling on gravel roads.

5) List of activities in sequence:

5.1 The foreman in charge of each crew will go over tail board and procedures before starting any work with all personnel involved in the task.

5.2 Designated signal man or spotters will be documented on tail board. 5.3 Designated certified operator for each piece of equipment will be documented on the tail

board. 5.4 Operators will inspect their equipment and fill out any required paper work prior to starting

their equipment. 5.5 Rigging will be inspected before each use. 5.6 Materials are to be counted and confirmed that the quantities are correct with the assembly

drawing. 5.7 The assembly foreman will select an area for the structure to be assembled where it is close

to the stakes and level. 5.8 Picker will be set up in the middle of where the structure is to be assembled. 5.9 Steel will be moved around the site using a loader or zoom boom, and placed where the

picker will be able to reach the steel. 5.10 Tag lines shall be used when suspending a load with slings. 5.11 Spotters will give direction to the operator when picking and placing steel or other materials. 5.12 All personnel will stay clear of any suspended loads. 5.13 Softeners shall be installed prior to hoisting steel using the forks on loaders or zoom booms. 5.14 The pole sections will be placed on blocking or pole cows making sure that it is left in a secure

position. 5.15 Spud bars will be used for lining up bolt holes, the worker must keep their hands clear of any

pinch points when making a connection. 5.16 The structure will be assembled starting at the top and working towards the bottom, making it

easier to square off the structure as it is being assembled. 5.17 The top section of one pole will be connected to the top inside arm. 5.18 The top section of the second pole will be connected to the opposite end of the inside arm. 5.19 Second section of the pole will now be connected to the first section of pole. 5.20 The second inside arm will then be attached to both poles. 5.21 The remaining sections of poles can be assembled to both poles. 5.22 The structure can then have the x-braces attached.

Page 3 of 3



5.23 Outside arms can be assembled in any order. 5.24 Once all the steel has been assembled the bolts can be tightened following the turn of nut

method, following the procedure supplied by the manufacture. 5.25 After each bolt has been properly tightened it will be marked with a black paint marker. 5.26 The structure will be inspected for scratches or imperfections on the steel. 5.27 Any areas where the galvanization has been removed, the area will be cleaned with paint

thinner and painted with a product supplied by Sask power. 5.28 Foreman will fill out required QA documents once structure is complete. 5.29 Site will be cleaned up and structure left on blocking in a safe manner. 5.30 If the structure is in an area where it can’t be seen very well it will be marked with orange

traffic cones or flagged.

6) Contingencies: 6.1 Mechanic will be called out if required. 6.2 Extra equipment will be available to ensure continuity of work in event of a break-down. 6.3 All equipment must have first aid and spill kits in accordance with the ERP. 6.4 All equipment must have firefighting gear in accordance with quantities detailed in the ERP. 6.5 ERP is in all Supervisor’s trucks. 6.6 Crew will have MSDS information on site for the products required for the steel repairs.

Note 1: The purpose of this procedure is to aid the site supervisor/foreman in planning of the work for Assembling Steel H structures and applicable procedures. This should not be viewed as the complete job plan but as a starting point. Any changes or details not covered herein, shall be discussed with crew and recorded in Daily Tailboard.

Page 1 of 3

Document Description Slack Stringing Created By: J. Brennan Doc. Number Safe Operating Procedure 27.162

Date: Dec. 14, 2018 Revision: 1 Revised by: J. Brennan Date: Dec. 19, 2018

SOP 27.162 SLACK STRINGING PROCEDURE FOR BYPASS L0104 This procedure is to identify the steps and hazards in slack stringing of transmission line conductors on the NB Power L0104 Bypass. This particular phase of the project requires the slack stringing of three, 2/0 conductor for a distance of 2.2 km. Aerial Device and Crane will be used between str 26-27 (on both sides of roadway) in place of rider poles to maintain conductor clearance over road crossing. Traffic plan will be set up as per NB WATCM. All stringing will be completed with a hold-off for parallel 69KV line 0104. Safety Equipment Required:

• Safety glasses

• Boots

• Hardhat


• Fire Retardant Clothing

• Fall Protection Equipment Tools and Equipment required:

• Truck

• Marooka

• Trailer for wire spools

• Bucket trucks

• Crane

• Shackles/slings

• Bull rope(s) (sufficient length to complete the task)

• Travelers



• Running Ground

• Certified live line stick Steps: 1. Complete tailboard, discuss hazards with the crew and signoff. 2. Ensure proper Work Protection is in place, hold off for L0104

Page 2 of 3



3. Prior to using any craning devices, ensure that all crew members are cautioned about working around these units to eliminate the hazards associated with crushing injuries from vehicle stabilizer outriggers. 4. Setup stringing trailers and load wire at str 47 5. To create an Equal Potential Zone, set up grounding grid mat and running ground at str 47, set up grounding grid at str 22. 6. Check all rigging equipment to ensure that it’s in good condition and rated for the load before hoisted. Verify the weight of the reels to ensure that all rigging equipment is of sufficient rating 7. Install Kellum grips on conductor(s) as per manufacturer’s specifications. 8. Attach pulling bull ropes to the Kellum grips. 9. Attach the pulling bull ropes to the truck or tracked equipment depending on conditions. 10. Verify that good radio communications have been established and that all crewmembers are instructed and familiar with proper radio protocol for stringing. A dedicated radio frequency should be allocated for this process. If this is not possible then all other work crews must be notified of the stringing process so that any potential conflicting radio transmissions are minimized. 11. When all preliminary work has been completed, start pulling out conductor. 12. Good radio contact must be maintained at ALL times between personnel at reel trailer(s) and the truck or tracked equipment. 13. Apply brake pressure on the reel axle(s) to ensure that the reel(s) of wire doesn’t spin to fast resulting in potential conductor damage. 14. When reaching the first structure, the truck must go past the structure far enough to ensure that there is sufficient rope to go up the structure, through the travelers and back down to the truck. 15. Once adequate slack has been pulled past the structure reverse the front-end loader to relieve tension on the bull lines so that the bull lines can be detached from the machine. The bull lines can then be pulled back to the structure. Use caution to prevent tangling of the rope(s) as the rope is being coiled at the base of the structure. 17. Re-attach ropes to the truck. 18. Stay in radio contact at all times with workers at reel trailer and operator running the truck or tracked equipment. Monitor the bull ropes for increased tensions, which could indicate defective travelers at structures or the conductor becoming snagged on the ground. An observer should follow the Kellum grips as they pass through the sheaves of the travelers. 19. Once workers are clear of the structure, proceed to the next structure. 20. Repeat this procedure until the conductor is at the tie- down site or a dead-end structure. 21. Once the conductor has reached the tie-down area temporary portable grounds are to be placed on the conductor using grounding grid at str 22. Repeat steps for other 2 conductors. Also the conductors are to be bonded to each other. This will ensure that any

Page 3 of 3



induction will be drained off and all conductors will be at the same potential. Alternately the conductor could be dead-ended at the structure. 22. The sagging process can now be undertaken. 23. Refer to the sag charts to determine the:

• Location of the span(s) to sag from. • The ambient air temperature.

24. Once sagging is complete clipping in can take place, a working bond out of the bucket will be required before handling conductor. 25. Complete deadends at str 22 and 47. 26. Hand lay conductor between str’s 22A-22 and 47A-47. 27. Hang conductor using ropes and travelers. 28. Ground and bond both deadend structures (22-47) in direction of tap (22A-47A). 29. Deadend conductor (refer to sag requirements) 30. Install loops at str 22-47. 32. Remove grounds and clean-up worksite.

Page 1 of 2

Document Description Defective Tools Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.001

Date: Oct. 10,2003 Revision: 3 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Jan. 6, 2012

26.001 DEFECTIVE TOOL PRACTICE Defective tools can cause serious and painful injuries. If a tool is defective in some way,

DO NOT USE IT. Tools, equipment and machinery will be considered defective if:

1. The unit has been damaged or modified so that it is not to manufacturer’s design specifications or

2. The unit does not comply with government regulations.

Defective tools must be removed from service immediately and tagged. For further information refer to Section: 17.3 Removal of defective Tools, Machinery and Equipment Be aware of problems such as:

• Chisels and wedges with mushroomed heads • Split or cracked handles • Chipped or broken drill bits • Wrenches with worn out jaws • Tools which are not complete, such as files without handles • Power tools with guards removed • Broken or inoperative guards, • Insufficient or improper grounding due to damage on double insulated

tools, • No ground wire (on plug) or cords of standard tools, • The on/off switch not in good working order, • Tool blade is cracked, • The wrong grinder wheel is being used, or • The guard has been wedged back on a power saw.

Regulatory References Alberta Part 25, Tools, Equipment, and Machinery – All Sections British Columbia Part 24, Building Structures, and Equipment – Section 4.3

Page 2 of 2

Document Description Defective Tools Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.001

Date: Oct. 10,2003 Revision: 3 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Jan. 6, 2012

Yukon Part 24, Hand Tools & Power Driven Portable Tools – Section 4.03(i) Saskatchewan Part X, Machine Safety – Section 134-152 Manitoba Part 16- Machine, Tools, & Robots- Section 16.1-16.28 Ontario Part II - General Construction – Section 93-95 NWT Part V- Guards and Protective Devices on Machinery- Section 73-131

Page 1 of 18

Document Description Electrical Work Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.002

Date: Sept. 23, 2003 Revision: 9 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Apr. 27, 2018

26.002 ELECTRICAL WORK Definitions of a utility worker and a qualified utility worker are; A qualified utility employee is:

An individual who is a Power Line journeyman or Sub-station Power Systems Electrician (PSE) journeyman, trained and experienced to work safely on energized electrical equipment or lines in accordance with the requirements of the safety rules while performing duties assigned by an employer.

A utility employee is: 1) An employee trained to recognize hazards associated with energized electrical

equipment or lines, and trained and experienced to work safely near energized electrical equipment or lines but not on them and in accordance with the requirements of the safety rules while performing duties assigned by and employer, and

2) An Journeyman Electrician trained and experienced to work safely on energized electrical equipment or lines operating at voltages below 750 volts between the conductors in accordance with the requirements of the safety rules while performing duties assigned by an employer.

Policy 1. Only qualified electrical workers are permitted to construct, install, alter, repair, or

maintain high voltage electrical equipment. Qualified workers shall be trained on the use of special precautionary techniques, specific PPE requirements (e.g. Arc Flash), insulating & shielding materials, and insulated tools.

2. A Hazard Assessment must be done to identify all electrical hazards including a mitigation plan to eliminate the hazards and documented prior to them starting to work. Safe work practices shall be employed to prevent electric shock or other injuries resulting from either direct or indirect electrical contacts. Tailboards must also be completed prior to working on any line. (FLRA/HA)

3. All Valard employees working on or near energized lines must complete “Electrical Awareness” training. This is provided during the employee’s orientation See Section 8 “orientation overview”.

4. Employees working near high voltage electricity who are not qualified electrical workers shall be provided awareness training. Employees shall be trained in safety related work practices that pertain to their respective job assignments, clearance distances, Lockout Tagout, long dimensional conductor objects clearances, Arc Flash Protection, and conductive materials awareness. Training is to be provided by Valard’s Energized Services Training division. All electrical tools used in either Outdoor or damp locations shall be connected to a ground Fault Circuit Interceptor (GFCI)

5. All electrical equipment must meet Canadian Electrical Code Standards and be approved for use and of the type and rating as required by specifications listed.

6. No flammable liquids are to be stored within 100 metres of energized electrical equipment.

7. A worker shall not approach high voltage electrical equipment within the safe limit of approach distance unless the equipment has been de-energized and locked and tagged out as per SWP 26. 032 Lockouts. Failure to follow this practice may lead to disciplinary action being taken.

Page 2 of 18



8. All electrical work shall be analyzed for Arc flash and appropriate protective clothing shall be worn. This may include an arc flash suit with approved face shield and appropriate headgear, arc flash barrier designed for the work area, safety glasses and type 1 class 0 rubber glove with leather protectors designed for the voltage of the switch gears and equipment.

9. All employees that work on or near any energized lines or equipment must wear as a minimum;

• Fire Retardant outerwear, Sleeves must reach the wrist section, i.e. short sleeves are not permitted.

• Non-synthetic under clothing, such as: cotton, wool or silk. • Hi visibility vest (may be a part of the Fire retardant clothing) • CSA boots with a green triangle and an Omega symbol. • Safety Glasses CSA/ANSI as identified in Section 10 Personal Protective

Equipment. • All metal articles that are in contact with workers skin must be removed.

10. No worker is permitted to work on energized lines that cannot be isolated and locked out unless the worker is qualified by specialized training by Valard’s Energized Service Division prior to commencing any work on a energized line.

11. Rubber gloves shall be worn when: controlling poles by using tools and/or ropes in the proximity of energized overhead apparatus, stringing or sagging conductors in the proximity of energized overhead apparatus or when workers on the ground are guiding materials being raised and distances specified in the "Safe Limits of Approach" for non-insulated booms cannot be maintained.

12. All workers working near energized lines must notify the controlling authority and advise them of the work scope, duration and location. A means of communication must be in place prior to the work commences.

13. Adequate jumpers shall be used when cutting, splicing or repairing a neutral conductor, neutral bus or skywire, in order to prevent a potential difference shall be used and installed/removed using approved work procedures.

14. Workers operating stringing equipment shall be either qualified or authorized or under the direct supervision of an authorized worker, and shall follow approved documented procedures.

15. Only approved non-conductive portable ladders shall be used when working on or in proximity to energized apparatus. Metal ladders or metal measuring tapes are not permitted.

16. Workers who work in a bucket shall be trained in bucket rescue annually and must demonstrate the ability by performing a rescue annually. Those who climb poles must be trained in pole top rescue and be able to demonstrate the ability to perform a rescue annually, whenever the worker is required to work from a ladder the worker must be trained in ladder rescue and be able to demonstrate it by performing a rescue. When the worker is expected to work in any of the above work activities a rescue plan must be developed and reviewed by all workers.

17. If parts cannot be de-energized, tagging must be applied in any event and barriers such as insulated blankets must be used to protect against accidental contact. Arc Flash PPE must be worn.

18. All workers who work on powerlines must be trained in Rescue techniques and must retrain annually in case of an electrical contact.

Page 3 of 18



19. Workers who work on lines must review the Tower rescue and pole top rescue annually as per SOP 27.001 Tower Rescue and 27.003 Pole Top Rescue in cases where there may be a electrical contact.

Limits of Approach

No employee shall approach or allow conducting objects, or equipment to approach energized lines, or equipment closer than the limits of approach as specified in each Provincial jurisdiction. Valard’s specific Limits of Approach may exceed specific utility or provincial requirements. Any deviation of these limits must be documented on the job plan Working on Client’s Utility Power lines/Substations To work on Utility lines, the following are to be met;

a) All utility workers are to review and possess a copy of the “ Alberta Electrical Utility Code 3rd Edition 2007 “

b) Workers must have a copy of the Client’s Safe Work Practices for the applicable task. This must be reviewed prior to working on any line or equipment and where applicable referred to in the “tailboard”.

c) Workers are to receive a copy of the client’s safety rules and these are to be reviewed prior to work commencing. A copy of this rulebook is to be kept at the worksite for future reference.

d) A foreman (Qualified Utility Worker) must be present on the worksite, which will insure that all safe work practices and procedures are followed and the safety rules are available and understood by all of the workers under his direction. In case of his absence a “Person in Charge” must be appointed, this person must be a Qualified Utility employee and must also insure that all safe work practices and procedures are followed and the safety rules are available and understood by all of the workers under his direction and all of the equipment/tools are suitable for the task at hand. Both the Foremen and the “Person in Charge” is also responsible to insure that records are kept of all activities, training and is responsible that when visitors or any other unauthorized personnel are kept away from any hazardous conditions. Visitors must receive an overview of the tasks being performed and where and when they are permitted to enter any area; this visitor also must be escorted by either the foreman or the “Person in Charge” during the visit.

e) All aerial devices that are to be used on lines/equipment must be equipped with controls in the bucket and at ground level. An operator must be located at the lower controls at all times in case there is a problem with the controls and in case of an emergency and the worker in the bucket can not operate.

f) Where the electrical system equipment exists, a hold-off shall be established for equipment protection and must not be used in place of a work permit whenever: a live line work procedures are being performed, stringing, sagging, raising, or lowering conductors or stringing ropes in proximity to energized apparatus,

Page 4 of 18



installing or removing loops of airbreak switches, load interrupters, loadbreak switches, and bypass tubes, installing or removing live line openers (conductor and clamp assembly), moving energized cables over 750 V, a supervisor, worker, or controlling authority considers it necessary or it is determined during job planning.

Working on Energized Lines To work on energized lines using rubber gloves, employees must be trained by a utility company or an approved trainer. If no training has been received no worker is qualified to work on a line using rubber gloves. Workers working on energized circuits of 300 volts or less phase-to-phase shall wear a type 1 class 0 rubber glove with leather protectors. When work is to be performed on switching equipment arc flash protective clothing and/or a blast shield must be in place. Arc flash calculations must be performed on client’s equipment by its engineering department. Workers performing tasks near energized equipment must wear eye protection as per ARC Flash calculations. When operating gang switches, or working near energized lines class 3 rubber gloves must be used with leather protectors. All PPE, which is to be worn, must be inspected daily and replaced immediately if damaged or if the certification has expired. All work on energized equipment and lines must b performed with a minimum of two (2) Qualified Utility Workers. Working on Isolated Lines and Equipment Before working on an isolated, or de-energized line or equipment, either under 750V or high voltage equipment it must be tested with a potential tester designed for each specific system, under 750V or over and then grounded. All Electrical-testing devices shall only be used in accordance with the manufacturers' specifications and approved work procedures. Lines that are isolated or de-energized must be treated as energized if the above steps have not been taken. Safety Interlocks Guards and safety interlocks must NOT be removed except for troubleshooting and/or testing, and approved work procedures must be used to protect employees and the public from any exposed hazards. Safety interlocks must NOT be by-passed by the use of devices such as jumpers or spare keys except for the following situations:

• The device to be worked on or operated an the associated interlock system are both contained within an isolated zone

• Troubleshooting and/or testing is being performed by a competent worker and the following conditions are met

• A documented job plan identifying hazards and the use of barriers to control these hazards has been completed and communicated to all members of the

Page 5 of 18



work group, and at least one member of the work group remains within view of the device for which the interlock has been by-passed, and close enough to prevent any unauthorized personnel from entering the work area.

• The safety interlock system must not be by-passed before the guaranteed isolation zone is established and it must be returned to service before the isolation is surrendered.

Tree Trimming No Worker is allowed to brush trees in the vicinity of energized power lines, unless they have been trained as a qualified tree arbourist. Before cutting or trimming trees, permission must be obtained from the landowner, and the utility the work is being completed for. This can be completed if there are no energized lines in the vicinity. When using chainsaws refer to the HS&E Manual SWP 26.003 Safe Use of Chainsaws. Underground Lines When working on an underground system, the following rules may apply. All cables and equipment will be considered energized until tested for potential, and

grounded. Underground cables must be identified before any work is done to them.

Cables must be spiked before being cut. Employees must wear appropriate PPE including rubber gloves, and a tested hot stick when switching or removing/installing load break elbows on an energized circuit. Elbows must be parked and grounded when removed from the bushing.

Live Line Work 1. No employee may use live line tools on energized lines, or equipment unless

they have been trained in proper tool usage. 2. Employees doing live line work must give their full attention to the work at hand. 3. Live line work will not be done in the following conditions:

• At night • In adverse weather • When visibility is obscured

4. “Second points of contact” must be insulated, or removed from the immediate live line work zone. These include: • Ground wires • Guy wires • Secondary conductors

5. Neutral conductors associated with distribution circuits must not be cut or disconnected until they have been by-passed with jumper cables that are capable of carrying the primary voltage of the circuit.

Page 6 of 18



6. Live line work may only be done on one conductor at a time, on any single pole structure.

7. Live line work must not be done on adjacent structures at the same time. 8. When live line work is done on circuits protected by automatic re-closing

equipment, the re-closing devices must be blocked and tagged before live line work commences, and not restored until the work is complete, or workers are clear at the end of the shift.

9. When using live line tools, employees must not place their hands or any conductive material closer than the Limits of Approach specified in the Safe Work Practice.

10. Energized metal parts of live line tools or tie wires on energized conductors must not be brought into contact with cross-arms, poles, apparatus, or associated hardware.

11. Holdout ropes or live line tools being used to spread, or raise conductors must be securely fastened. They must not be held by employees except as necessary to secure or release them.

12. All live line tools and equipment must be inspected for mechanical and electrical strength and wiped clean before each job is started. When any employee changes position on a pole or tower, co-workers should be informed.

Live Line Tools 1. Live line tools and equipment, rubber gloves and cover-up equipment may only be

used if they are in good condition. They must be specifically designed, constructed, and tested for the purpose for which they are used and must not be used for other purposes.

2. Metal rulers, measuring tapes, or wire reinforced fabric tapes or other conductive tools must not be used up poles, or in areas where exposed live apparatus could make their use hazardous.

3. An approved tool bag must be used for raising tools or materials to workers on poles, trees, or structures. Under NO circumstances may articles be thrown to workers.

4. Approved and tested live line tools, equipment, rubber gloves, and cover-up equipment must be used for work inside Limits of Approach on live lines, or apparatus at the following voltages:

• From 250 volts to 25,000 volts phase-to-phase (14.4 kV phase-to-ground) • At lower voltages where work is hazardous

5. Approved and tested live line tools, and equipment must be used for work on live lines, or apparatus at voltages above 25 kV phase-to-phase. Rubber gloves, and cover-up equipment IS NOT permitted at these higher voltages.

6. Before climbing through or working in a dangerous position, workers must protect themselves from electrical hazards. Equipment for this purpose includes the following:

• Line hose • Insulator hoods

Page 7 of 18



• Shields These items must have sufficient voltage rating, and be distributed to cover all wire and apparatus that could endanger the workers.

7. All protective equipment, including rubber blankets, hoses, hoods, shields, and gloves must receive periodic testing by an approved service shop. Dates of next tests must be visibly marked and never exceeded.

8. No repairs or alterations may be made to live line tools or equipment other than by an approved service shop.

9. Live line tools are to be properly stored by being placed on racks, and tied down securely. Rubber protective equipment is to be placed into approved protective bags, and then stored in a cool location out of the sun. Such items must be kept free from dirt and moisture and should not be laid directly on the ground. Fiberglass surfaces should be kept clean and glossy so that moisture forms into beads.

10. Workers must thoroughly inspect rubber protective equipment, live line tools, and equipment before use and whenever damage is suspected.

11. Tools or equipment that show any signs of damage must be withdrawn from service immediately, and be forwarded with an explanatory note to an approved safety service shop.

12. High voltage protective rubber left in service for a long time (i.e. overnight) must not be expected to offer protection. Such items must be removed, inspected, and cleaned before being used again. If suspected, they must be sent for electrical tests.

13. Rubber gloves must not be worn inside out. They must not be worn without approved leather covers. The leather outer gloves must never be used for any other purpose. Watches, bracelets, and rings must not be worn with rubber gloves.

14. Blocks, ropes, slings, and other tackle provided for live line work must not be used for any other purpose. It must be kept clean, dry, and free from foreign substances. Moisture in rope allows it to conduct electricity, making it extremely dangerous for live line work. If live line rope becomes damp, it must be allowed to dry uncoiled in a heated area for a minimum of 48 hours.

Grounding and Bonding 1. The two booklets listed below explain the requirements for grounding and bonding in

Alberta and British Columbia. All line crewmembers must have access to the booklet corresponding to the location of work, and must sign a document stating that they have read it.

• Equipotential Bonding and Grounding Application Guide, TransAlta Utilities Corporation.

• Temporary Safety Grounding and Bonding, BC Hydro Corporate Safety Dept.

2. Workers must not make contact with any electrical conductors, which normally carry high voltage unless the conductors are rendered safe for work to be done on them. High voltage is defined as 750 volts or above.

3. When bonding or grounding is required, it will be placed at such locations and arranged so that each worker is protected from exposure to hazardous voltages.

Page 8 of 18



4. Equipment such as ground rods, leads, and clamps must have the following electrical qualities: • Must be capable of conducting the maximum fault current that could flow at the

work location for the time necessary to clear the fault. Values for fault current have been calculated for all locations, and are available from the control centre of electrical power utilities.

• It must have low impedance such that it will not interfere with the operation of protective relays in the affected part of the power system. Jumper cables are not to be used for grounding and bonding.

• Ground chains must have the compression ferrows on the end of the wire. • Duckbills must have a threaded end so the cable will fasten to them. • Ground chains and duckbills must be tested yearly.

5. The procedure for installing a ground is as follows: a) Connect one end of the ground lead to a solid ground. The following are suitable

for this purpose: • The station ground grid in a substation • The counterpoise ground at a URD transformer • The neutral conductor on a distribution power line

The following are not considered suitable for protective grounding: • A transmission tower footing • A wood-pole ground wire or guy wire • If a ground rod is necessary, it shall be a straight (not spiral), galvanized, or

copper-clad steel rod. It should be driven into the ground to a depth of at least 1 metre at a distance of about 10 metres from the immediate work area.

• Test the conductors to be grounded and establish that they are de-energized. • Using a hot-stick, connect the unattached end of the ground lead to the

conductor. • Secure the ground lead with rope so that it will not cause harm by whipping if

fault current flows.

Working grounds are temporary devices, which must be removed when the job is finished. The procedure for removal is the reverse of the attachment. The securing rope is removed; the ground lead is taken off the conductor, using a hot-stick and then removed from the ground rod. 6. The procedure for creating an equipotential zone for a worker on a wood pole is as

follows: • Strap a pole-band firmly around the pole at a level below where the worker’s

spurs will be, but high enough to be well beyond reach from the bottom of the pole.

• Connect a ground lead to the neutral (if there is one) or to a properly driven ground rod.

• Connect the other end of the grounded ground lead to the pole band.

Page 9 of 18



• Test to ensure that the line to be grounded is de-energized. • Connect a second ground lead to the pole-band. • Using a hot-stick, connect the unattached end of the second lead to the

conductor. • Secure the ground lead with rope as described in paragraph 5.

7. On the three-phase transmission and distribution lines it is normal practice to connect all three phases to each other and to ground. An exception is at 230 kV and higher when only one phase is being worked on, and the underground phases are well beyond limits of approach.

8. Vehicles involved with high voltage work on the power system are normally grounded by means of a ground lead connected between the vehicle chassis and the following: • The station ground grid in a sub-station • The system neutral or a ground rod elsewhere on the power system

This applies whether or not the line or apparatus is energized, de-energized, or dead. Workers on the ground must stay clear of vehicles that have booms or buckets in the vicinity of lines, or apparatus that could be energized at high voltage. If ground workers are required to approach vehicles, they must use caution because they are subject to step potential during a fault.

***NOTE: An important exception to paragraph 8 is in the jurisdiction of BC

Hydro, where the policy for aerial man-lifts during work on energized overhead lines and apparatus, is for the vehicles to remain ungrounded. In this case, if ground workers are required to approach vehicles they must first request that the work aloft be suspended. Good communication is necessary between workers on the ground, and those in the buckets to ensure that workers aloft do not work in energized conductors unless all ground workers are clear.

Page 10 of 18



These are the safe limits of approach for Valard’s employees. For the most part they exceed specific utility or provincial requirements. Any deviation of these limits must be documented on the job plan.

Table 1 – Safe Limits of Approach for Non Insulated Booms Operated by Competent Workers

Diggers, cranes, etc. and their loads

Only competent workers or workers under the continuous direction of a competent worker may approach, work, or allow material or conductive tools to approach exposed energized electrical apparatus to limits as stated. In planning the task to be performed, consideration must be given to the worker’s position in relation to the exposed energized apparatus such that planned movements of the worker’s body or conductive tools, material or vegetation will not result in any encroachment upon these limits. The vehicle must be grounded when the boom or load is within 20 feet of an energized circuit. Note an aerial device with a lower boom insert does not require grounding, unless local utility practice dictates so.

Voltage Range (Phase to Phase)

Minimum Clearance

750 to 25,000

1.2 m (4 ft.)

>25,000 to 50,000

1.5 m (5 ft.)

>50,000 to 250,000

3.0 m (10 ft.)

>250,000 to 550,000

6.0 m (20 ft.)

Table 2 – Safe Limits of Approach for Competent Workers Or workers under the direct supervision of a competent worker

Only competent workers or workers under the continuous direction of a competent worker may approach, work, or allow material or conductive tools to approach exposed energized electrical apparatus to limits as stated. In planning the task to be performed, consideration must be given to the worker’s position in relation to the exposed energized apparatus such that planned movements of the worker’s body or conductive tools, material or vegetation will not result in any encroachment upon these limits.


Minimum Clearance

750 to 25,000

0.95 m (3.2 ft.)

>25,000 to 50,000

1.2 m (4 ft.)

>50,000 to 150,000

1.7 m (6 ft.)

>150,000 to 250,000

2.2 m (7 ft.)

>250,000 to 550,000

3.7 m (12 ft.)

Page 11 of 18



Table 3 – Absolute Safe Limits of Approach for Competent Workers Or workers under the direct supervision of a competent worker

Competent workers or a worker(s) in training under the continuous direction of an competent Worker may approach or allow material or conductive tools to approach exposed energized electrical apparatus as stated in the Absolute Limit section, only when the following conditions are adhered to: • for all work up to 50 kV, rubber gloves must be worn while in the Restricted Zone; • barriers and/or cover-up must be installed where practical to minimize exposure to energized electrical apparatus and all second points of contact; • a Dedicated Observer must be in place, who is competent in the task being performed and having no other duties which would distract from monitoring the work continuously; • either the worker performing the work or the Dedicated Observer must have successfully completed the 4th year of formal Power Line Worker apprenticeship training program or equivalent; and • the worker’s position in relation to the exposed energized electrical apparatus shall be such that movements of the Worker’s body or conductive tools, material or vegetation will not result in any encroachment.


Minimum Clearance

750 to 15,000

0.55 m (1.8 ft.)

>15,000 to 25,000

.650 m (2.2 ft)

>25,000 to 50,000

.750 m (2.6 ft.)

>50,000 to 150,000

1.4 m (5 ft.)

>150,000 to 250,000

1.9 m (6 ft.)

>250,000 to 550,000

3.15 m (11 ft)

Limits of Approach For British Columbia

No employee may approach any exposed electrical conductor that is energized with a voltage above 750 volts closer than the distances permitted by Table 1 unless the conductive parts are dead, or suitably insulated. ***Note: The distances in these tables are minimum distances. They take no account

of possible voltage hazards due to surges, humidity, etc, and they make no allowance for unplanned or accidental movement by workers. The term DEAD means incapable of delivering power and containing no stored energy. Normally such parts are isolated, grounded, or blocked.

No employee may take any conducting object with the Limits of Approach to any exposed, normally energized parts, unless the object is held by an approved insulating handle. The four columns in the Limits of Approach table are explained as follows: Column 1 is the minimum distance that a qualified person may approach to an

energized source with the constant supervision of another qualified person.

Page 12 of 18



Column 2 is the minimum distance that a qualified person may approach to an

energized source without supervision. Column 3 is the minimum distance that a qualified person may approach while

operating or directing the operation of equipment. Limits of Approach for BC

Column 4 is the minimum distance that an unqualified person may approach to work or operate equipment without supervision

LIMITS OF APPROACH

Column 1 Column 2 Column3 Column 4

Nominal Voltage to Ground Kv

Voltage Phase to Phase

Absolute Limit of Approach for Qualified Workers

Normal Limit of Approach

Limit of Approach for Uninsulated Equipment Operated by Qualified Workers

Limit of Approach for All Uninsulated Equipment

M Ft M Ft M Ft M Ft 4 & 12 751V to

20kV 0.30 1.00 0.60 2.00 0.90 3.00 3.00 10.00

25 Over 20kV to 30kV

0.45 1.50 0.75 2.50 1.20 4.00 3.00 10.00


0.60 2.00 0.90 3.00 1.50 5.00 3.00 10.00

138 Over75kV to 150kV

0.90 3.00 1.50 5.00 3.00 10.00 4.50 15.00


1.40 4.50 2.10 7.00 3.00 10.00 6.00 15.00


1.70 5.50 2.60 8.50 4.50 15.00 6.00 20.00


2.10 7.00 3.00 10.00 6.00 20.00 6.00 20.00


2.70 9.00 3.70 12.00 6.00 20.00 6.00 20.00

Page 13 of 18



Limits of Approach for Alberta Limits of Approach Distances in Millimeters for Utility Employees

Voltage Levels Utility Employees Nominal

Voltage to Ground

kV

Nominal Voltage Phase

to Phase kV

Maximum Operating


kV

Limits of Approach to Exposed Energized Parts

kV

Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 4(1) 0.6 (DC Only) 800

2.4 4.16 4.58 800 8 13.8 15.18 850

14.4 25 27.5 950 19.9 34.5 37.95 1050

69,72 79.2 1350 138,144 158.4 1650 230,240 285 2150 500 550 3450

NOTE: (1) Limit of approach distances in Column 4 have been calculated using IEEE minimum tool distances plus 750 mm safety factor, rounded to the nearest 50 mm.

Limits of Approach Distances in Millimeters for Qualified Utility Employees Voltage Levels Qualified Utility

Employees Nominal Voltage to

Ground

kV

Nominal Voltage

Phase to Phase

kV

Maximum Operating


kV

Limits of Approach to Exposed Energized

Parts

kV Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 4(1)

0.6 (DC Only) 500 2.4 4.16 4.58 500 8 13.8 15.18 550

14.4 25 27.5 650 19.9 34.5 37.95 750

69, 72 79.2 1050 138, 144 158.4 1350 230, 240 285 1850 500 550 3150

NOTE: (1) Limit of approach distances in Column 4 have been calculated using IEEE minimum tool distances plus 450 mm safety factor, rounded to the nearest 50 mm.

Page 14 of 18



Limit of Approach Distances in Millimetres for Qualified Utility Employees Performing Live Line Work

Work Using Rubber Gloves

Voltage Levels Qualified Utility Employees

Nominal Voltage to

Ground

kV

Nominal Voltage

Phase to Phase

kV

Maximum Operating Voltage

Phase to Phase

kV

Limit of Approach for Work Performed from a Rated Insulated Device Unprotected Body Parts to Exposed Work Phase

mm

Unprotected Body Parts to

Exposed Adjacent Phases, Structure

Surfaces or Ground Parts

mm Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 4(1) Column 5(2)

2.4 4.16 4.58 40(3) 500 8 13.8 15.18 120 550

14.4 25 27.5 210 650 19.9 34.5 37.95 290 750

69,72 79.2 (4) (4) 138,144 158.4 (4) (4) 230,240 285 (4) (4) 500 550 (4) (4)

NOTE:

(1) Limit of approach distances in Column 4 have been calculated using IEEE minimum tool distances rounded to the nearest 10 mm.

(2) Limit of approach distances in Column 5 have been calculated using IEEE minimum tool distances plus 450 mm safety factor, rounded to the nearest 50 mm.

(3) Work performed directly from a pole or structure on electrical equipment or lines operating at voltages below 5 kV between conductors must be done in accordance with Rule 4-142.

(4) Live line work using rubber gloves is not normally done at these voltage levels. Rubber insulating equipment may be required to handle isolated and grounded lines that normally operate at these voltage levels.

Page 15 of 18



ONTARIO’S ELECTRICAL UTILITIES SAFE LIMITS OF APPROACH TABLES

Table 1B Restricted Limits of Approach for Authorized Workers

Authorized workers or a worker(s) in training under the continuous direction of an competent Worker may approach or allow material or conductive tools to approach exposed energized electrical apparatus as stated in the Absolute Limit section, only when the following conditions are adhered to: • for all work up to 50 kV, rubber gloves must be worn while in the Restricted Zone; • barriers and/or cover-up must be installed where practical to minimize exposure to energized electrical apparatus and all second points of contact; • a Dedicated Observer must be in place, who is competent in the task being performed and having no other duties which would distract from monitoring the work continuously; • either the worker performing the work or the Dedicated Observer must have successfully completed the 4th year of formal Power Line Worker apprenticeship training program or equivalent; and • the worker’s position in relation to the exposed energized electrical apparatus shall be such that movements of the Worker’s body or conductive tools, material or vegetation will not result in any encroachment.


Restricted Zone

Minimum Clearance

750 to 15,000

0.9 m to 0.3 m (3 ft. to 1 ft.)

0.3 m (1 ft.)

>15,000 to 35,000

0.9 m to 0.45 m (3 ft. to 1 ft.)

.45 m (1.5 ft)

>35,000 to 50,000

1.2 m to 0.6 m (4 ft. to 2 ft.)

0.6 m (2 ft.)

>50,000 to 150,000

1.5 m to 0.9 m (5 ft. to 3 ft.)

0.9 m (3 ft.)

>150,000 to 250,000

2.1 m to 1.2 m (7 ft. to 4 ft.)

1.2 m (4 ft.)

>250,000 to 550,000

3.7 m to 2.75 m (12 ft. to 9 ft.)

2.75 m (9 ft)

Table 2A Non-Insulated Booms and Non-Insulated Portion of Aerial Devices

• Only authorized workers or workers under the continuous direction of an authorized worker, are permitted to operate non-insulated booms or non-insulated portion of aerial devices in proximity to exposed energized apparatus.

• The distances stated must be strictly followed for all parts of

the equipment, including the booms, hoisting cables and any part of the load being hoisted. Additional clearance must allow for any change in boom angle, swing of the hoisting cable and load while it is being moved.


Minimum Clearance

750 to 35,000 0.9 m (3 ft.)

>35,000 to 50,000 1.2 m (4 ft.)

>50,000 to 150,000 2.4 m (8 ft.)

>150,000 to 250,000

3 m (10 ft.)

>250,000 to 550,000

4.6 m (15 ft.)

Page 16 of 18



Table 2B Certified Insulated Aerial Devices

• Only authorized workers or workers in training under the continuous direction of an authorized worker, are permitted to operate certified insulated aerial devices in proximity to exposed energized apparatus as per the distances specified.

• For voltages up to and including 50 kV, approved barriers

and/or cover-up must be installed when the minimum clearance stated in this table cannot be maintained.

• For voltages greater than50 kV, where there are no approved

barriers, the stated limits in this table must never be reduced.

Note: At all times, “Safe Limits of Approach” for authorized workers must be maintained.


Minimum Clearance

750 to 15,000

0.3 m (1 ft.)

>15,000 to 50,000

0.45 m (1.5 ft.)

>50,000 to 150,000

0.9 m (3 ft.)

>150,000 to 250,000

1.2 m (4 ft.)

>250,000 to 550,000

2.75 m (9 ft.)

MANITOBA’s LIMITS OF APPROACH

High Voltage in kV

COLUMN 1 Absolute Limits of

Approach or Qualified Manitoba Hydro Employees

COLUMN 2 *Others Under Direct

Supervision of a Qualified Manitoba Hydro Employee

COLUMN 3 *Others Not Under

Direct Supervision of Qualified Manitoba Hydro Employees

Phase to Phase AC Voltage cm. Ft. cm ft. cm ft.

Over 750 volts to 25 30 1.0 60 2.0 300 10.0

Over 25 to 50 60 2.0 120 4.0 300 10.0

Over 50 to 75 75 2.5 150 5.0 300 10.0

Over 75 to 150 105 3.5 240 8.0 450 15.0

Over 150 to 300 150 5.0 300 10.0 450 15.0

Over 300 to 450 210 7.0 450 15.0 600 20.0

Over 450 to 600 300 10.0 600 20.0 600 20.0

DC Voltage (+ or – to ground)

150 and below 150 5.0 300 10.0 450 15.0

Over 150 to 300 210 7.0 450 15.0 600 20.0

Over 300 to 500 270 9.0 600 20.0 600 20.0

Page 17 of 18



Nalcor Minimum Air Insulation Distances (MAID) and Minimum Approach Distances (MAD) for voltages up to 735 kV

Qualified Persons

Nominal Operating Voltage

Minimum Air Insulation (MAID)

Minimum Approach Distance (MAD)

Phase to phase

Phase to ground Mm M MM M

4.16 kV 2.4 kV 140 0.14 750 0.75

12.47 kV 7.2 kV 140 0.14 750 0.75

13.8 kV 7.96 kV 140 0.14 750 0.75

24.94kV 14.4 kV 290 0.29 900 0.90

33 kV 19.05 kV 390 0.39 1000 1.00

34.5 kV 19.92 kV 390 0.39 1000 1.00

46 kV 26.56 kV 490 0.49 1100 1.10

66 kV 38.105 kV 600 0.60 900 0.90

69 kV 39.837 kV 600 0.60 900 0.90

138 kV 79.674 kV 900 0.90 1200 1.20

230 kV 132.79 kV 1400 1.40 1700 1.70

735 kV 424.35 kV 5400 5.40 5700 5.70

Page 18 of 18



Regulatory Reference: Alberta Part 40- Utility Worker – Electrical British Columbia

Part 19- Electrical Safety

Yukon Part 9-Electrical Safety Saskatchewan Part XXX- Additional Protection for Electrical Workers- Sections 450-467 Manitoba Part 38- Electrical Safety Ontario Part II – General Construction – Section 181-196 – Electrical Hazards

NWT Part V – Construction & Maintenance- Section 95(1)(2)(3)(4)(5) – Electrical

Protection

Page 1 of 2

VALARD

Document Description Use of Chainsaws Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.003


26.003 USE OF CHAIN SAWS

The following are the minimum required practices to be used with this equipment Tool and Worker Certification

• Users of this equipment must be adequately qualified, suitably trained and with sufficient experience to use this tool without supervision, or be under the direct supervision of a worker who is qualified.

Personal Protective Equipment

Hard Hat, Safety Glasses, Face Shield, Leather Gloves, Protective Leggings, Safety Boots, Hearing Protection

Use and Maintenance

• Shall be equipped with operational chain brakes and chains designed to

minimize kickbacks • The correct methods of starting, holding, carrying, or storage and use of the

saw as directed by the manufacturer must be used. • The chain must be sharp, have the correct tension, and be adequately

lubricated during operation. • Must be adjusted so that the chain stops when the motor is idling • Ensure that the chain brake is functioning properly and adequately stops the

chain • When carrying/transporting a chain saw the bar guard must be in place, the

chain bar must be toward the back and the motor must be shut off. • Fuelling of the saw must be done in a well-ventilated area. Never fuel a saw

that is running or hot. • An approved safety container must be used to contain the fuel used along with

a proper spout or funnel for pouring. • To be started with the chain brake engaged • The chain saw must not be adjusted when the motor is idling • The chain saw must not be used for cutting above shoulder height. • When work is completed make sure the chain brake is engaged

Any employee who uses a chainsaw while aloft on a pole do so only from an

approved elevated work platform.

Page 2 of 2

VALARD

Document Description Use of Chainsaws Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.003


For each of the events listed below, chainsaw motors must be stopped and switched off. For pneumatic, hydraulic, or electric chainsaws the power supply must be disconnected when:

• Adjusting the chain or cutting bar • Refueling the saw • Carrying it between cutting locations • Handing it to another person • Leaving it unattended

Regulatory Reference Alberta OH&S Code Part 25 Section 376(1) (2) CSA Standard Z762.1-M-77 “Chainsaws” OH&S Act Sections 14(1) and 15(1) OH&S Code Part 25 Section 375 (1) (2) (3) (4) British Columbia

Part 2- Application- Section 2.2- General Duties Part 12 - Tools, Machinery and Equipment Sections 12.72 and 12.73 Yukon Act 1 – Definition of “Competent Person” (a)(b)(c) Part 1- General_ Section 1.06- Training of Worker Part 4 -Hand Tools and Power Driven Portable Tools/ Chainsaws Sections 4.10 & 4.11

Manitoba

Part 1- Definition and General Matters – Definition “Competent” Part 16 – Machines, Tools, and Robots – Section 16.3(a)(b)- Duty to Inform Part 16-Machines, tools and Robots Division 1 Chainsaw Requirements Sections 16.7(1) and 16.27(2)

Saskatchewan Part I – Preliminary Matters – Section 2(1)(M) Definition “Competent” Part I – Preliminary Matters – Section 19(1)(2)(3)(4) – Training of worker

Part X - Machine Safety- Sections 146(1) and 146(2)

Ontario Part I – General- Section 1 – Definition “Competent Worker” (a)(b)(c)

Part II- General Construction- 145/00 Section 29 Training of Worker and Sections 112(1)(2)(3) inclusive

NWT Part I – General Safety – Section (9)(10) –Instruction to Workers

Page 1 of 2

Document Description Use of Handheld Grinders

Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.004 Date: Sept. 23, 2003 Revision: 4 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Jan. 3, 2012

26.004 USE OF HAND HELD GRINDERS The following are the minimum required practices to be used with this equipment Tool and Worker Certification � Users of this equipment must be adequately qualified, suitably trained and with

sufficient experience to use this tool without supervision, or be under the direct supervision of a worker who is.

Personal Protective Equipment � Hard Hat, safety glasses, safety boots, face shields, gloves, hearing protection,

respiratory protective equipment is required when harmful dusts/vapours are created.

Use and Maintenance

� Familiarize yourself with the grinder operation before commencing work. � Never use the grinder for jobs for which it is not designed. � A 7” Grinding Wheel turning 8600 RPM has a surface speed of 180 MPH. � A 7” Grinding Wheel mounted on a 4-1/2” grinder turning 11000 RPM will have a

�surface speed of 230 MPH. Safe Mounting of the Wheel � Always use the correct flange nuts and backing pads � Nut must centre wheel on spindle � Run the machine - before grinding run machine, when mounting wire wheels, when

mounting cut-off wheels on grinders or when mounting other wheels to grinders � Always use safety glasses. � Wear proper apparel. � Protect your hearing. � Remove adjusting keys and wrenches. � Secure work � Don’t overreach � Avoid accidental starting. � Check for damaged parts. � Never leave tool running unattended. Turn the power off. � Inspect the tool and extension cord periodically. DO NOT USE TOOL IF SWITCH DOES NOT TURN IT ON AND OFF � Keep handles free from oil and grease. � Compare the speed marked on the wheel and to the speed marked on the grinder. � Never exceed the maximum wheel speed (every wheel is marked).

Page 2 of 2

Document Description Use of Handheld Grinders


� When mounting the wheels, check them for cracks and defects, ensure that the mounting flanges are clean and the mounting blotters are used. Do not over tighten the mounting nut.

� Before grinding, run newly mounted wheels at operating speed to check for vibrations.

� Do not use grinders near flammable materials. � When using a zip disk (cutting disk) do not use it as a grinder. (Do not use the face

of disk to grind or for de-burring). � Use the correct sized disk as per manufacturer’s recommendation. � Grinders are never to be used with handles or guards removed. Grinders with

guards or handles removed are to be taken out of service as per Valard Construction’s defective tools policy.

� When clamping material secure material safely and effectively Regulatory Reference

Alberta Part 25- Tools, Equipment, & Machines- Section 375 (1) (2) (3) (4) – Grinders British Columbia Part 12- Tools, Machine, & Equipment – Section 12.44-12.50 Yukon Part 7- Machinery and Machine Guarding- Section 7.10 (a)(b)(c)(d)(e)(f)

Saskatchewan Part X – Machine Safety- Section 145- Grinding Machines Manitoba Part 16- Machines, Tools and Robots- Sections 16.22(1)(2)(3) Ontario Part II- General Construction- Section 93- Equipment General NWT Part V- Construction and Maintenance- Section 132-136

Same size materialcan be stacked Angled material Rectangular material

Page 1 of 2

Document Description Working with Hazardous Chemicals


26.008 WORKING WITH ACIDS/CHEMICALS The following are the minimum required practices to be used with any hazardous chemical.

Worker Certification Users of this equipment must be adequately qualified, suitably trained and with sufficient experience to work without supervision, or be under the direct supervision of a worker who is. Workers that are required to with or in the workspace that chemicals are being used or stored shall follow the following;

o Shall not work in areas that the occupational exposure limit is exceeded.

Personal Protective Equipment Required Hard Hat, mono-goggles, face shield, Chemical gloves and protective clothing (consult MSDS), Respiratory Protective equipment (consult MSDS) and the specific procedures that address the Chemical or Biological Hazards

Use and Maintenance • Obtain and review the Material Safety Data Sheet(s) of the Material(s) to be used

for the task. • Acids/chemicals are volatile and may react with other substances, refer to the

MSDS for information • Acids/chemicals can create fire and explosion hazards, consult MSDS for

flammability information • When diluting or preparing solutions, slowly add acid to water to avoid boiling

and splattering. • If solutions are decanted into containers other than their original ones, they must

have appropriate WHMIS labelling. • Store in closed containers in well ventilated area • Post Signs indicating use of acids/chemicals in the area • Ensure end of the job clean up is performed as per manufacturers instructions,

refer to MSDS.

Regulatory Reference Alberta Part 1- Section 1 -Definition of a Competent Worker Part 1 -Section 14 - (1) Duties of Workers Part 4 -Chemical Hazards- All Sections British Columbia Part 2- Application- Section 2.2- General Duties Part 5 – Chemical and Biological Substances – All Sections Yukon

Act 1 – Definition of “Competent Person” (a)(b)(c) Part 1- General_ Section 1.06- Training of Worker

Page 2 of 2

Document Description Working with Hazardous Chemicals


Part 8-Material and Storage – Section 8.16-8.18 – Hazardous Substance Saskatchewan Part 1 – Preliminary Matters – Section 2(1)(M) Definition “Competent” Part 1 – Preliminary Matters – Section 19(1)(2)(3)(4) – Training of worker Part XXI- Chemical and Biological Substances – All Sections Manitoba Part 1- Definition and General Matters – Definition “Competent”

Part 16 – Machines, Tools, and Robots – Section 16.3(a)(b)- Duty to Inform Part 36- Chemical and Biological Substances- All Sections Ontario Part 1 – General- Section 1 – Definition “Competent Worker” (a)(b)(c) NWT Part 1 – General Safety – Section (9)(10) –Instruction to Workers

Page 1 of 3

Document Description Welding, Cutting and Burning Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.009


26.009 WELDING, CUTTING AND BURNING

Work involving welding, cutting and burning can increase the fire and breathing hazard on any job, and the following should be considered prior to the start of work.

Tool and Worker Certification Users of this equipment must be adequately qualified, suitably trained and with sufficient experience to use this tool without supervision, or be under the direct supervision of a worker who is.

Training All workers that weld, cut or burn shall;

• Shall receive Hot Work training • Shall receive Permit training as required for Hot Work. (Permit is to be

issued prior to any hot work commences). •

Personal Protective Equipment Required Personal protective equipment will vary depending on the task being performed, as a minimum: • Safety boots, Hardhat, safety glasses • 20# fire extinguisher (within 25 ft. of work area) • Fire Resistant Clothing • Leather Sleeves

Welding • Hard hat with welder's face shield • Safety glasses • Safety boots • Protective clothing, • Gloves. • Respiratory protective equipment may be required depending on the material

being welding (eg. Galvanized, stainless). Check the MSDS before welding. Cutting

• Hard hat • Cutting goggles with #5 lens (sunglasses/tinted safety glasses are not

acceptable) • Gloves • Safety Boots • Respiratory protection may be required for some materials, check the MSDS

before cutting

Use and Maintenance • Always ensure that adequate ventilation is supplied since hazardous fumes can

be created during welding, cutting or burning.

Page 2 of 3



• Where other workers can be exposed to welding flash they must be protected by the use of screens.

• Always have fire fighting or prevention equipment on hand before starting welding, cutting or burning.

• Check the work area for combustible material and possible flammable vapours before starting any Hot Work.

• A permit must be issued prior to any Hot Work commences. • A welder should never work alone. A fire or spark watch shall be present during

and a minimum of 1 hour after the task is completed to insure that there is no opportunity for a fire to develop after completion of the work.

• Check cables and hoses for leaks prior to use and protect them from slag or sparks.

• Never weld or cut lines, drums, tanks, etc. that have been in service without making sure that all precautions have been carried out and permits obtained.

• Never enter, weld or cut in a confined space without proper gas tests and a required safety watch.

• When working overhead, use fire resistant materials (blankets, tarps) to control or contain slag and sparks.

• Cutting and welding must not be performed where sparks and cutting slag will fall on cylinders (move all cylinders away to one side).

• All cylinders must be equipped with a Flashback Arrestor. • Open all cylinder valves slowly. The wrench used for opening the cylinder

valves should always be kept on the valve spindle when the cylinder is in use. • All cylinders must be secured in an upright position; in a separated containment

areas and caps must be replaced after use at all times.

Regulatory Reference Alberta

Section 1(1)g Definition of Competent Worker Section 14(2) Direction of Workers Section 15(1) Worker Training Part 10-Fire and Explosion Hazards- Section 171(1) (2)(3)(4) (5)(6)(7)(8)-Welding British Columbia Part 2- Application- Section 2.2- General Duties Part 12- Tools, Machinery, and Equipment – Section 12.112-12.126 Yukon Act 1 – Definition of “Competent Person” (a)(b)(c) Part 1- General_ Section 1.06- Training of Worker Part 13- Trades and Miscellaneous – Section 13.08-13.02- Welding cutting and allied processes Saskatchewan Part 1 – Preliminary Matters – Section 2(1)(M) Definition “Competent”

Page 3 of 3



Part 1 – Preliminary Matters – Section 19(1)(2)(3)(4) – Training of worker Part XXV- Fire and Explosion Hazards- Section 373 – Gas Burning and Welding Equipment Manitoba

Part 1- Definition and General Matters – Definition “Competent” Part 16 – Machines, Tools, and Robots – Section 16.3(a)(b)- Duty to Inform Part 17- Welding and Allied Processes – All Sections Ontario Part 1 – General- Section 1 – Definition “Competent Worker” (a)(b)(c) Part II- General Construction – Welding NWT

Part 1 – General Safety – Section (9)(10) –Instruction to Workers Part V- Construction and Maintenance- Section 154-164- Welding and Burning

Page 1 of 2

Document Description Working with Propane


26.011 USE OF PROPANE

The following are the minimum required practices to be used with this equipment

Worker Certification Propane users must be adequately qualified, suitably trained and with sufficient

experience to work without supervision, or be under the direct supervision of a worker who is.

Personal Protective Equipment Required Hard Hat Safety Glasses Safety Boots Gloves

Use and Maintenance 20# fire extinguisher must be available near the propane cylinder and its

work area. Compressed gas systems must be used, stored and transported in accordance

with manufacturer’s specifications All trucks, cranes or equipment used to handle propane tanks must be equipped

with a fire extinguisher appropriate for the size and type of tank being handled Tank valves and regulators are to be removed from the tank prior to any

movement of the tank. Slings must be used in a "choker" fashion when loading, off-loading or lifting

propane tanks "Lifting lugs" provided on tanks are not to be used. Slings are to be wrapped

around the shell of the tank Propane bottles are to be transported in the upright position A competent qualified worker must do all connections and disconnections Tanks are not to be hooked up and used without proper regulators. When in use, propane bottles are to be securely held in an upright position. All system components must be kept clean and free of oil, grease or other

contaminants that may cause a failure of the system or may burn or explode. All propane vale must be clear of obstruction and no material is to be placed on or

near the valves. Do not allow sparks, flame or other heat sources come into contact with cylinders,

regulators or hoses. Tanks shall not to be heated to increase flow. Propane is heavier than air and invisible, it may collect in confined spaces and low

areas, do not open any propane connection unless all valves are placed in a closed position.

Propane bottles must not be placed in any confined space, they must be in well ventilated areas at all times.


Section 1(1)g Definition of Competent Worker

Page 2 of 2

Document Description Working with Propane


Section 14(2) Direction of Workers Section 15(1) Worker Training Part 10-Fire and Explosion Hazards- Section 171(1) (2)(3)(4) (5)(6)(7)(8)-Welding British Columbia Part 2- Application- Section 2.2- General Duties Part 12- Tools, Machinery, and Equipment – Section 12.112-12.126 Yukon Act 1 – Definition of “Competent Person” (a)(b)(c) Part 1- General_ Section 1.06- Training of Worker Part 13- Trades and Miscellaneous – Section 13.08-13.02- Welding cutting and allied processes Saskatchewan Part 1 – Preliminary Matters – Section 2(1)(M) Definition “Competent” Part 1 – Preliminary Matters – Section 19(1)(2)(3)(4) – Training of worker Part XXV- Fire and Explosion Hazards- Section 373 – Gas Burning and Welding Equipment Manitoba

Part 1- Definition and General Matters – Definition “Competent” Part 16 – Machines, Tools, and Robots – Section 16.3(a)(b)- Duty to Inform Part 17- Welding and Allied Processes – All Sections Ontario

Part 1 – General- Section 1 – Definition “Competent Worker” (a)(b)(c) Part II- General Construction NWT Part 1 – General Safety – Section (9)(10) –Instruction to Workers Part V- Construction and Maintenance- Section 154-164

Page 1 of 2

Document Description Use of Portable Ladders Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.012

Date: Sept. 23, 2003 Revision: 5 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Feb. 21, 2017

26.012 USE OF PORTABLE LADDERS The following are the minimum required practices to be used with this equipment. If there are other means to either access a work area or another means of providing an elevated work area, the use of a ladder will be used if there are no other means to access work area or to work from. Tool and Worker Certification Users of this equipment must be adequately qualified, suitably trained and with sufficient experience to use this equipment without supervision, or be under the direct supervision of a worker who is.

Use and Maintenance Extension Ladders

• When setting up a ladder, secure the base and "walk" the ladder up into place. • The ladder must be set at the proper angle of “one (1) foot” horizontal to every

four (4) feet vertical. • Before using a ladder, make sure it is placed on a level base and secured

against movement. • Only CSA Standard ladders will be used. • All manufacturer’s labels including load bearing capacity must be legible. • Ladders shall protrude one metre above the intended landing point. • Workers shall not work from the top two rungs of a ladder. • Don't overreach while on a ladder. It is easier and safer to climb down and move

the ladder over a few feet to a new position. • Always face the ladder when using it. Grip it firmly and use the three-point

contact method when moving up or down. • The minimum overlap on an extension ladder should be one metre unless the

manufacturer specifies the overlap. • Keep both metal and wood ladders away from electrical sources. • Ladders used on electrical work shall be manufactured of non conductive

material • Ladders are not to be painted. • Extension ladders must be equipped with safety shoes. • Wooden ladders must be built to the specifications in the appropriate

Provincial/Territorial Regulations. • All ladders must be inspected before each use and defective ladders must be

taken out of service.

Step ladders • No work is to be done from the top two steps of a stepladder, counting the top

platform as a rung. • The stepladder is to be used in the fully opened position with the spreader bars

locked. • Don't overreach, climb down and move the ladder over to a new position. • Only CSA Standard Step ladders will be used. • Ladders are not to be painted.

Page 2 of 2

Document Description Use of Portable Ladders Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.012

Date: Sept. 23, 2003 Revision: 5 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Feb. 21, 2017

Regulatory Reference Alberta Part 8-Entrances, Walkways, Stairways and Ladders- Section 124-137 British Columbia Part 13- Ladders, Scaffolds, and Temporary Work Platforms – Section 13.4-13.6 Yukon Part 10- Construction and Building Safety- Section 10.21-10.29 – Ladders Saskatchewan Part XVI- Entrances, Exits, & Ladders – Section 252-256 Manitoba

Part 1 – Preliminary Matters – Section 2(1)(M) Definition “Competent” Part 1 – Preliminary Matters – Section 19(1)(2)(3)(4) – Training of worker Part 13- Entrances, Exits, Stairways and Ladders – Section 13.7-13.21 Ontario Part II- General Construction – Section 78-76 – Ladders NWT Part V- Construction and Maintenance- Section 246-249 - Ladders

Document Description USE OF COMPANY VEHICLES Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.013

Date: Sept. 23, 2003 Revision: 10 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: July 29, 2016

26.013 USE OF COMPANY VEHICLES The policy of Valard Construction is to ensure that all vehicles on our projects are driven and maintained in a consistent manner. This guideline is to be considered as a minimum. All Government or client standards that exceed this guideline will then be considered as a minimum. No commercial vehicle shall be driven if a major defect is present on the vehicle. No one including motor carriers, shipper, consignee or other person is to allow a driver to operate a vehicle if their faculties are impaired to the point where it is unsafe to drive the unit. A driver of a National Safety Code vehicle (NSC) (vehicle or combination of vehicles registered for 11,794 kilograms or more) is required by law to conduct a pre-inspection of the vehicle or combination of vehicles prior to operating them at the beginning of a work shift, and a post inspection of these vehicles after the operator ceases to operate them at the end of a work shift. These drivers must maintain a driver’s log book and keep it up to date as required by Alberta Transportation please see Addendum 1 for full details. Other types of Vehicles are to follow Section 25.3 of this manual for inspections. All collisions must be reported [email protected] as soon as possible and investigated.

MANDATORY VEHICLE INSPECTIONS TRUCKS AND TRAILERS All Commercial vehicles registered for a weight of 11,794 must not be operated unless they have a valid commercial vehicle inspection certificate, please see Addendum 1 for full details.

PRE TRIP INSPECTIONS The daily vehicle inspections are intended to ensure early identification of vehicle problems and defects, and to prevent the operation of vehicles with conditions that are likely to cause accidents or vehicle breakdown.

• A walk around the vehicle is usually a good way of beginning a pre-trip inspection to check headlights, signal and brake lights, tire condition and pressure, fluid levels (oil, transmission, brake etc.), external loads, etc.

• Pre/Post-trip inspection consists of the following as a minimum: o Condition of Wheels and Rims o Headlights/taillights and signal lights o Brakes must be checked including trailer brake connections o Springs checked for cracks etc. o Coupling devices o Steering mechanism (no Play) o Windshield and wipers o Rear vision mirrors o Emergency equipment (as listed in Section 3 below.) o Horn o Decals in the right place Side marker lights o Check Air and Electrical lines o Check Frame and body o Cargo Securement

Page 1 of 15



o Fuel tank area o Parking brake o Exhaust system o Dash gauges o Test low air warning device

• All deficiencies must be logged and reported to the Fleet department in Leduc, AB.

• A visual check of the driver and passenger compartment is usually appropriate also.

DRIVER’S RESPONSIBILIIES 1. All vehicle/equipment operators must have a current valid license issued by the

appropriate Government department for the equipment they are operating. 2. Drivers must complete a daily log book if they are operating any

vehicle/equipment, which falls under NSC jurisdiction, please see Addendum 1 for full details. This includes all equipment with the numbers beginning with a 3 series and up and others, which will be identified as to log book requirements. When operating smaller vehicles all work repairs performed on these vehicle must be forwarded to the corporate office.

3. Drivers must report all reportable conditions and items not in proper order to the mechanical shop in their area or work.

4. Drivers/Operators must verify the condition of the equipment they are operating on a continuous basis and be satisfied that the vehicle remains safe and will not endanger either the operator or any other worker or person. Long haul operators must stop every three (3) hours or after 240 kilometers at a safe location to do a vehicle/load securement inspection and a break from driving

5. No one is permitted to operate any vehicle or equipment while under the influence of alcohol (over .04) or any illegal drugs or prescribed drugs that may influence awareness or driving habits, cause drowsiness or other conditions that may cause any impairment.

6. When parking any vehicle in a parking lot, it is expected that the operator first drive through in order that the unit is facing out of the parking space, or the unit is to be backed in. This insures that the unit is driven straight out rather than having to back out into traffic areas, both vehicular and pedestrian traffic.

7. Drivers are not permitted to talk on a cell phone or text while driving. On ISN client’s sites it is not permitted to use a cell phone to either talk or text or use a hands free system. Drivers must turn off the roadway and park in a safe zone prior to using the phone system.

8. Smoking is not permitted in any company vehicle/equipment. 9. All drivers shall have their drivers abstracts reviewed annually and on the date

which their license expires to insure that a renewal has been obtained. 10. The driver including the passengers must wear their seatbelts at all times while

in the vehicle. This includes while driving on the right of way.

Page 2 of 15



11. If the driver of the unit is backing up and their vision is blocked they must use a spotter if available.

12. The driver of the vehicle must insure that their vision is not impaired by ice, snow or dirt.

13. Ignition must be switched off when being refueled. No smoking is allowed within 3 meters of the fueling area

14. Vehicles must be driven with headlights on at all times. 15. Loads must be properly secured. 16. Hard hat, safety glasses, Boots, gloves and a hi-vis vest (to be worn when

inspecting equipment or loading/unloading of truck) 17. The trucks belonging to Valard Construction will be equipped with the emergency

equipment listed below. The driver is responsible for checking all equipment before the trip begins. • Back-up alarms when rear vision is restricted. • First aid kit • Fire extinguisher (20 lb. minimum) • Road flares and beacon • Spare tire and proper tools for tire change. Jack-alls are not allowed • Survival equipment when needed • Tow hook, front and back • VHF radio with utility frequencies • Flash light • Matches • Axe

18. Appropriate permits for road trip

OPERATOR’S TRAINING The following is a list of training which operators need to receive;

o Use of fire extinguishers, flares, cones and flagging o Load securement o Hours of service o Pre and post vehicle inspections o Rules of the road and safety laws (Traffic Safety Act) o Driving evaluations o Bills of lading, manifests, time recording and weigh slips

RECORD KEEPING Valard will retain the following documentation in each operator’s drivers’ files;

• Copy of their driver’s license • Copy of the driver’s abstract, employment history, record of administrative

penalties, collisions and training for a period of 5 years from completion date • Copy of convictions for a period of current year and previous 4 years • Copy of dangerous goods training certificate for a period of 5 years

Page 3 of 15



• Copy of vehicle maintenance for a period of the current year and 4 previous years

• Copies of vehicle trip inspections and driver’s daily record (log Book) for a period of 6 months after receiving the reports

MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTIONS: The following requirements shall apply to all Valard’s and all leased units; 1. All units must have a scheduled inspection and servicing as per the

manufacturer’s recommendations this maintenance plan must be available in each location where inspections are carried out and a copy in the place of business (Edmonton office)

2. Pre and post trip inspections must be performed by each driver operating the unit a copy must be kept in the unit in case it may be requested by a peace officer

3. When the person completing to inspection if they believe or suspect a defect of the unit they must report the defect to Valard Fleet;

• Immediately if the defect as determined by the inspection schedule, or

• In a timely manner, and no later than the next required trip inspection. 4. Trip inspection reports and Copies of daily log book records must be sent to

Fleet Services within 20 days, these shall be recorded within 30 days after being submitted by the driver and be maintained in chronological order for a period of 6 months.

JOURNEY MANAGEMENT All drivers will attend a Journey Management training seminar and will be presented a copy of this Safe Work Practice for future reference. This program contains the following information of the company’s expectations and the drivers’.

EMPLOYER’S RESPONSIBILITIES; To inform all drivers of this policy. • Inform drivers that travel needs are to be reviewed prior to travelling.

o This includes the need for the trip o Number of stops. (Fewer trips and more stops to minimize the number of

driving hours.) Trips should be scheduled to minimize the number of road trips.

o Trips are to be done during daylight hours. (Wild animals are more prevalent during dawn and dusk on the road.)

o When travelling in unfamiliar places a map should be available in the vehicle and a GPS. (Smart phone GPS shall not be used.)

o Trips taken during winter months, the driver must check the road conditions by calling the provincial motor associations prior to departing. (If road conditions are in poor condition then the need for the trip needs to be re-evaluated.)

Page 4 of 15



o All vehicles are to be equipped with a first aid kit, emergency flares and an emergency kit containing matches, candles, blanket, and a small shovel as a minimum.

` Trips that are taken for meetings require the following analysis: • Is this trip necessary? • Can utilizing the Video conferencing systems eliminate this trip? • Is there a safer means of travel (i.e. airplane, train or other mass transit

systems)?

EMPLOYEE’S RESPONSIBILITIES The following are the responsibility of the employee driving the vehicle:

• Communicate with the supervisor or a foreman as to the expected duration of the trip.

• The destination of the trip. • The anticipated time of the return (provided that this is not a one way trip). • Insure that there is a means of communication in case of an incident. This may

be either a cell phone or if equipped a truck CB radio or truck to truck communication system.

• Rest beaks must be taken at regular intervals, maximum of 3 hours driving then a 15-minute break, as a minimum must be taken. This is in order to be able to stretch out limbs, get fresh air etc.

• If driving late at night consider stopping and getting a hotel room to sleep before continuing the trip.

FLEET SAFETY ADVISOR Duties and Responsibilities are: 1. Audit log books, infractions 2. Address log book deficiencies with the driver in question 3. Send letter and a copy of the deficiency along with a signed and dated letter

stating a plan to address the deficiency. Signed by both driver and the Fleet Safety Advisor and put a copy in the Driver’s file.

4. Do ride along with the drivers (checking for bad habits) Provide written feedback with an action plan, do follow-up and document results in Driver’s file.

5. Complete spot checks of vehicles. 6. Train drivers are to be instructed on fire extinguisher use, Use of Flags and

flares, googles (safety glasses) and hardhats.

PARKING AND WORKING NEAR VEHICLES 1. Vehicles must always be parked to the right and clear of the road if possible. If

parking on the road is necessary, hazard flashers must be put on. 2. If two or more trucks are to be parked along a roadway, they must be parked on

the same side of the road. 3. Doors must only be opened when traffic is clear. 4. Hydraulic brake locks must not be used for parking. 5. On sloping grade, vehicles must be prevented from rolling.

Page 5 of 15



6. Traffic must be controlled whenever its presence at a job site might cause a hazard to workers or to the public. The use of flag-persons or cones should be pre-planned.

7. Workers near traffic must wear high-visibility vests or coveralls. 8. Ignition keys must not be left in unattended vehicles.

LOADING AND UNLOADING 1. All loads must be properly secured.

• Decks of trucks and trailers must be level for loading and unloading. • Decks must be kept free of gravel, mud, and loose tools, etc. • People not actually involved in loading and unloading must be kept clear. • No person may stand or walk beneath a suspended load. • When a winch is pulling a load on a vehicle deck, no person is allowed on the

deck. • When a vehicle-mounted crane is used for lifting a load, the outriggers must

be extended. • Loads that extend more than 1.5m beyond the rear of a truck, the projecting

end must be marked with a red flag during daylight and a red light after dark.

DAILY DRIVING AND ON-DUTY TIME • No motor carrier shall request, require or allow a driver to drive and no

driver shall drive after the driver has accumulated 13 hours of driving time in a day.

• No motor carrier shall request, require or allow a driver to drive and no driver shall drive after the driver has accumulated 14 hours of on-duty time in a day.

MANDATORY OFF-DUTY TIME • No driver shall drive after the driver has accumulated 13 hours of driving

time unless the driver takes at least 8 consecutive hours of off-duty time before driving again.

• No driver shall drive after the driver has accumulated 14 hours of on-duty time unless the driver takes at least 8 consecutive hours of off-duty time before driving again.

• No driver shall drive after 16 hours of time have elapsed between the conclusion of the most recent period of 8 or more consecutive hours of off-duty time and the beginning of the next period of 8 or more consecutive hours of off-duty time.

• No driver shall operate a vehicle for more than 70 hours. A minimum of 36 consecutive uninterrupted off duty hours must be taken before commencing driving again.

DAILY OFF-DUTY TIME • The driver shall take at least 10 hours of off-duty time in a day.

Page 6 of 15



• Off-duty time other than the mandatory 8 consecutive hours may be distributed throughout the day in blocks of no less than 30 minutes each.

• The total amount of off-duty time taken by a driver in a day shall include at least 2 hours of off-duty time that does not form part of a period of 8 consecutive hours of off-duty time as required by legislation.

DAILY LOGS

INTERPRETATION • A requirement that a driver record time in a daily log is a requirement to

record the time using the local time at the driver's home terminal.

REQUIREMENT TO FILL OUT A DAILY LOG • Every driver shall fill out a daily log each day that accounts for all of the

driver's on-duty time and off-duty time for that day. This section does not apply if: • The driver operates a commercial vehicle within a radius of 160 km of the

home terminal; • The driver returns to the home terminal each day to begin a minimum of 8

consecutive hours of off-duty time; • The motor carrier maintains accurate and legible records showing, for each

day, the driver's duty status and elected cycle, the hour at which each duty status begins and ends and the total number of hours spent in each status and keeps those records for a minimum period of 6 months after the day on which they were recorded.

CONTENT OF DAILY LOGS At the beginning of each day, the driver shall enter legibly the following information in the daily log: • The date, the start time if different than midnight, the name of the driver. • The commercial vehicle license plates or unit numbers; • The odometer reading of each of the commercial vehicles operated by the

driver; • The names and the addresses of the home terminal and the principal place

of business of every motor carrier by whom the driver was employed or otherwise engaged during that day;

• In the "Remarks" section of the daily log, if the motor carrier or driver was not required to keep a daily log immediately before the beginning of the day, the number of hours of off-duty time and on-duty time that were accumulated by the driver each day during the 14 days immediately before the beginning of the day; and

• The driver shall record in the daily log the hours in each duty status during the day covered by the daily log, and the location of the driver each time their duty status changes, as that information becomes known.

• At the end of each day, the driver shall record the total hours for each duty status and the total distance driven by the driver that day, excluding the distance driven in respect of the driver's personal use of the vehicle, as well

Page 7 of 15



as the odometer reading at the end of the day and sign the daily log attesting to the accuracy of the information recorded in it.

POSSESSION OF DAILY LOGS AND SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS BY DRIVERS • No driver who is required to fill out a daily log shall drive unless the driver has

in their possession. • A copy of the daily logs for the preceding 14 days; • The daily log for the current day, completed up to the time at which the last

change in the driver's duty status occurred.

DISTRIBUTION AND KEEPING OF DAILY LOGS • A driver shall, within 20 days after completing a daily log, forward the original

daily log and supporting documents to the home terminal.

Page 8 of 15



DUTY STATUS (OVERVIEW & Explanation) ____________________________ ________________________

NAME DATE Cycle 1 (7 days) ___ _______ (Hour at which day begins -- Use local time at home

terminal)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Total Hours

1. Off-duty time other than time spent in a sleeper berth

2. Off-duty time spent in a sleeper berth

3. Driving time

4. On-duty time other than driving time

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Remarks ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________ Total distance driven _____________

____________________ Signature

Page 9 of 15



INSTRUCTIONS

Fill out the grid as follows: 1. For each duty status,

• Mark the beginning time and the end time, and • Draw a continuous line between the time markers;

2. Record the name of the municipality or give the location on a highway or in a legal sub-division and the name of the province or state where a change in duty status occurs;

3. If the driver is engaged in making deliveries in a municipality that result in a number of periods of driving time being interrupted by a number of short periods of other on-duty time, the periods of driving time may be combined and the periods of other on-duty time may be combined; and

4. Enter on the right of the grid the total number of hours of each period of duty status, which total must equal 24 hours.

LOAD SECUREMENT The legal requirements for load securement are to insure that the load may not shift, slip, blow off or fall off during transport. It is the driver’s responsibility to ensure the load is secure, and in place at all times as per NSC Standard 10: Load Securement. Loose objects on the truck/trailer must be secured or stored in a confined space. This includes deck pins, slings, hoses, buckets, catch pans, tools etc. Deck pins, boomers chains should be removed from truck or trailer and stored or secured properly. Loose mud/rocks must be cleaned from the loads prior to transporting loads on the highway. Truck and trailer decks must be clean of any loose material left by the load, prior to travel on the highway. INSPECTION 1. The driver of a vehicle shall inspect the vehicle’s cargo and the cargo Securement

system used and make the necessary adjustments: • Before driving the vehicle, and • Not more than 80 kilometres from the point where the cargo was loaded, • If the unit is driven daily the vehicle must be inspected every 24 hours as a

minimum. 2. The driver of the vehicle shall re-inspect the vehicle’s cargo and the Securement system

used to make necessary adjustments to the cargo or Securement as necessary, including adding more securing devices, at the earliest time:

• There is change of the duty status of the driver, • The vehicle has been driven for 3 hours • The vehicle has been driven for 240 kilometres

Page 10 of 15



GENERAL REQUIREMENT Cargo shall be firmly immobilized or secured on or within a vehicle by structures of adequate strength, blocking, bracing, dunnage or dunnage bags, shoring bars, tiedowns or a combination of these.

PLACEMENT OF ARTICLES OF CARGO Where the articles of cargo on or within a vehicle are placed beside each other and secured by tiedowns that pass over 2 or more articles, the articles shall be:

• Placed in direct contact with each other, or • Prevented from moving towards each other while the vehicle is on the highway

PREVENTION OF ROLLING Where any cargo or portion thereof may roll, it shall be restrained by chocks, wedges, a cradle or another securing device that prevents the cargo from rolling.

MINIMUM NUMBER OF TIE DOWNS Where an individual article of cargo is not blocked or immobilized by a front end structure, bulkhead, by other immobilized cargo or by another device that prevents it from moving forward, it shall be secured by at least:

• 1 tie down where the article is 1.52 metres (5 feet) or shorter and weighs not more than 500 kilograms,

• 2 tie downs where the article is o 1.52 metres or shorter and weighs more than 500 kilograms, or o Longer than 1.52 metres but no longer than 3.04 metres regardless of its

weight, or • Where the article is longer than 3.04 metres

o 2 tie downs for the first 3.04 metres of length, and o 1 extra tie down for each additional 3.04 metres or fraction of 3.04 metres.

POLE TRAILERS This applies to logs, regardless of the length of individual logs, transported on pole trailers. The logs shall be secured by:

• One or more tie downs at each bunk the first tie down must be within the first metre from the front of the pole.

• Two or more tie downs used as wrappers that encircle the entire stack of logs at sufficient locations along the stack to secure it effectively.

Where wrappers are used on a stack of logs, the wrappers at the front and rear ends of the stack shall not be less than 3.04 metres (10ft.) apart. Where the vehicle is transporting one or two logs with diameters greater than 0.6 metres (2ft.), each log shall be immobilized with chocks or an equally effective method that prevents the logs from moving. Where the log with a diameter greater than 0.6 metres (2 ft.) rises above the bunk, it shall be secured to the underlying logs with at least 2 additional tie downs used as wrappers.

Page 11 of 15



HEAVY VEHICLES AS CARGO Heavy Vehicles shall be transported and secured:

• Accessory equipment on a heavy vehicle shall be completely lowered and secured to the vehicle (e.g. buckets, augers and all loose items).

• Articulated vehicles shall be restrained in a manner that prevents articulation. • A heavy vehicle with crawler tracks or wheels shall be restrained against moving

sideways, forward, rearward and vertically by at least 4 tie downs. These tie downs if chain type must be marked with grades or Working Load Limits. Utility chain is not acceptable.

VEHICLE WEIGHTS AND DIMENSIONS • All loads must be transported at the Legislative legal weights and dimensions. • Any load that exceeds legal weight and dimension must have a special permit. • This permit must be arranged through Fleet Services. • All conditions must be met. • It is the driver's responsibility to ensure he has read and understood the conditions. • When operating at legal axle weights, the truck shall be registered for the weight that

it carries. • Legal dimensions (size):

Width: 2.6 metres (8' 6") Height 4.15 metres (13' 6") Length:

o Single vehicle 12.5 metres (41'0") o Truck-trailer and semi-trailer 23.0 metres (75'6") o Truck and towed trailer combination 23.0 metres (75'6") o Truck-trailer, semi-trailer and full trailer

and or semi-trailer in combination 25.0 metres (82'0")

Permits are required for the movement of vehicles and their loads that exceed the above legal dimensions.

LEGAL WEIGHTS • Legal weights are dependent on a variety of factors including the number of axles

and tire size. • Permits are required for the movement of these vehicles and their loads, which

exceed the legal weight.

ROAD RESTRICTIONS AND SEASONAL ROAD BANS • From time to time, roads are restricted due to construction, maintenance or seasonal

conditions such as spring thaw. • If there is movement of vehicles on unnumbered highways and on county roads

during spring thaw, the local county office must be contacted to determine the road conditions if any are in effect.

There are also route restrictions due to dimensional constraints of highway by overhead structures and bridges.

Page 12 of 15



There are areas in Alberta identified as "the High Load Corridor" which has overhead utility lines raised to accommodate loads up to 9 metres high. Permits for moving these high loads through these corridors are required and can be obtained through Fleet Services.

BUCKET TRUCK PROCEDURES 1. “Bucket Truck” - is a vehicle-mounted aerial lifting device with an articulating or

telescopic boom used to position workers. 2. When traveling to and from the job site, the boom must be cradled in a padded support

and fastened down. Outriggers must be retracted and the power takeoff disengaged. 3. When using the bucket, outriggers must be extended to stabilize the vehicle at all times. 4. The vehicle must be legally parked, with traffic cones and flag persons properly

positioned when required. 5. When maneuvering an elevated bucket, the operator must face the direction of motion

and keep checking the elbow of the boom. 6. When two workers are elevated, signals must only be given by one of them. 7. Climbing spurs must not be worn while working in buckets. 8. Buckets must be kept clean. All tools not in use must be properly secured or removed.

When a hydraulic power tool is not in use, it must be disengaged from its power source. No electrical power tools may be used in a bucket near primary conductors.

9. The insulated section in the boom must be at least 1.5m and never less than the normal limits of approach for the voltage being worked on. In order for a telescoping boom to be acceptable, the required clear insulation must be effective in all positions of the boom, including fully retracted.

10. The outer boom may be brought to a position that puts the workers up to, but not inside, normal (column 2) limits of approach unless other guarding precautions have been taken. The lower steel boom and knuckle must maintain Column 3 Limits of Approach.

11. Each bucket truck must undergo annual tests and have a valid sticker to certify its insulation. Without this, the vehicle is considered un-insulated.

12. If a worker has to approach a high voltage line or equipment in such a way, as not to have the insulated portion of the boom as back-up protection, then the bucket must be kept no closer than Column 3 Limits of Approach. An example would be working on a grounded circuit over live under build.

13. The buckets themselves may have no insulated value. They must not be relied upon to provide back-up protection.

14. It is mandatory that people on the ground stay well clear of aerial lifting devices that are working on energized equipment. They must maintain Column 2 Limits of Approach from the vehicle until the following conditions prevail: • Work aloft has ceased, and conductors are controlled and stable. • The person aloft, or in the vehicle has given verbal permission for the ground

workers to touch the vehicle. • Work aloft or in the vehicle must not resume until the ground workers have moved

away, and verbally indicated their intention to remain clear. 15. At no time is it permissible to move the vehicle with a worker in the bucket. 16. In Alberta when operating any equipment such as Backhoe, Trackhoe, Grader, Dozer

the following Limit of Approach chart must be complied with.

Page 13 of 15



Safe Limits of Approach distances from overhead lines for persons and equipment.

(1) Conductors must be insulated or covered throughout their entire length to comply with this group.

(2) Conductors must be manufactured to rated and tested insulation levels.

POWERED MOBILE EQUIPMENT All workers operating any powered mobile equipment must be qualified, trained and deemed competent by a trainer using the skills checks as per the training manual. Skill checks are required on a 3-year renewal schedule for all operators. 1. Equipment must be checked daily prior to its use. (Equipment check form) Any defects

must be reported to fleet management to have the unit repaired before operating it. 2. All maintenance records must be kept on the Fleet management program. 3. All powered equipment is serviced based on operating hours. Items that are to be

inspected are any safety devices, oil level (change if required), condition of glass, and including all manufacturers’ recommendations.

4. All powered Equipment must have an overhead guard including Roll Over protection to prevent any injury to the operator from falling objects.

5. When leaving any powered mobile equipment it must be secured to prevent its movement, this includes insuring that any equipment that has a boom or arm that can be raised must be placed on the ground to prevent it from dropping.

6. Seatbelts must be worn at all times when operating any powered mobile equipment. Regulatory Reference

Alberta Act, Section 1(1)g Definition of Competent Worker Act, Section 14(2) Direction of Workers Act, Section 15(1) Worker Training Part 19 -Powered Motorized Mobile Equipment -All Sections

Operating voltage between conductors of overhead powerlines

Safe Limit of Approach distance for persons and equipment

0-750 Volts Insulated or polyethylene covered conductors 300 millimetres

0-750 Volts Bare, uninsulated 1.0 metre

Above 750 Volts Insulated conductors (1) (2) 1.0 metre

750 – 40 kV 3.0 metres

69 – 72 kV 3.5 metres

138 – 144 kV 4.0 metres

230 – 260 kV 5.0 metres

500 kV 7.0 metres

Page 14 of 15



Regulation 315/2002TrafficSafety Act- Commercial Vehicle Dimensions and weight Regulations British Columbia

Part 2- Application- Section 2.2- General Duties Part 16- Mobile Equipment – All Sections Yukon

Act 1 – Definition of “Competent Person” (a)(b)(c) Part 1- General_ Section 1.06- Training of Worker Part 6- Mobile Equipment – All Sections Saskatchewan

Part 1 – Preliminary Matters – Section 2(1)(M) Definition “Competent” Part 1 – Preliminary Matters – Section 19(1)(2)(3)(4) – Training of worker. Part XI – Powered Mobile Equipment- All Sections Manitoba

Part 1- Definition and General Matters – Definition “Competent” Part 16 – Machines, Tools, and Robots – Section 16.3(a)(b)- Duty to Inform Part 22- Powered Mobile Equipment Ontario Part 1 – General- Section 1 – Definition “Competent Worker” (a)(b)(c) Part II- General Construction- Sections 93-105 NWT

Part 1 – General Safety – Section (9)(10) –Instruction to Workers Part V- Construction and Maintenance- Section 200-239 ADDENDUM 1 – NSC VEHICLES

Page 15 of 15

Document Description NSC Vehicles – Addendum 1 Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.013

Date: July 27, 2016 Revision: Revised by: Date: AUTHORIZED DRIVERS

Authorized drivers include all employees that are permitted to operate National Safety Code vehicles

registered to Valard Construction. Authorized drivers include:

• managers/owners who drive; • part-time or occasional drivers; • company mechanics who test drive vehicles or drive part-time; • safety staff who train drivers; • lease operators who have their vehicles registered to the company; • contractors who have their vehicles registered to the company; • anyone else authorized to operate a company vehicle.

All authorized drivers must follow the policies and procedures found in this safety program. By following the policies in this program, all authorized drivers will be more aware of how to operate safely and to prevent collisions.

Page 1 of 33


Date: July 27, 2016 Revision: Revised by: Date:

SAFE USE AND OPERATION OF VEHICLES Valard Construction will ensure all drivers are aware of the safe use and operation of commercial vehicles. Drivers must comply with all transportation safety laws, including those related to:

SPEED LIMITS Drivers must obey all posted speed limits and reduce speed according to road, weather, visibility conditions and vehicle type.

SEAT BELT USE All authorized drivers, while operating or travelling as a passenger in company vehicles, must wear seat belt(s) at all times.

DRUG AND ALCOHOL USE

The possession and/or consumption of alcohol, illegal drugs, or the misuse of prescription drugs are strictly prohibited while drivers operate company vehicles and other equipment.

DEFENSIVE DRIVING

Authorized drivers must operate company vehicles in a professional and courteous manner. Drivers must be prepared to avoid collision causing situations by practicing and by promoting the principles of defensive driving.

For example, drivers must be aware of their surroundings and look ahead. Drivers should leave a safe distance between vehicles, keep the vehicle under control at all times and be prepared for changes in road, weather and traffic conditions.

Distracted Driving

As part of practicing the principles of defensive driving, authorized drivers must remain focused and follow all distracted driving laws. The following activities conducted while driving are considered distracted driving:

• using hand-held cell phones;

• texting or emailing (even when stopped at red lights);

• using electronic devices like laptop computers, video games, cameras, video entertainment displays, and programming portable audio players (e.g. MP3 players);

• entering information on GPS units;

• reading printed materials in the vehicle;

• writing, printing or sketching; and

• personal grooming (brushing teeth, putting on makeup, clipping nails, shaving, etc.).

Page 2 of 33



CARGO SECUREMENT

The carrier and driver must ensure that all cargo transported is contained, immobilized or secured in accordance with National Safety Code Standard 10. The following are some general guidelines for ensuring cargo is secured in a safe manner. Generally, cargo transported on a commercial vehicle must not:

• leak, spill, blow off, fall from, fall through or otherwise dislodge from the commercial vehicle; or

• shift upon or within the commercial vehicle to such an extent that the commercial vehicle’s stability or maneuverability is adversely affected.

Drivers must inspect the cargo and its securing devices within the first 80 kilometres after beginning a trip. Drivers must re-inspect cargo when any one of the following occurs:

• change of duty status (e.g. from “driving" to “on-duty not driving”);

• after driving for 3 hours; or

• after driving 240 kilometres.

An employee or driver will not use any vehicle to transport goods unless;

• the vehicle is constructed to carry the goods, and

• there is equipment on the vehicle or attached to the vehicle that is capable of securing the goods to ensure the vehicle can be operated safely when loaded without danger of turning over the vehicle or the load shifting, swaying, blowing off, falling off, leaking or otherwise escaping.

Drivers are not permitted to transport any cargo unless it is properly secured. For more detailed information, refer to the company cargo securement training program.

FUELLING Before fuelling, the driver must:

• shut off engine;

• not smoke;

• check for fuel leaks;

• not overfill the tank;

• not leave nozzle unattended; and

• replace filler cap when finished fuelling.

Page 3 of 33



PROPER RECORD COMPLETION Valard Construction will train staff in hours of service records, bill of lading/manifests, dangerous goods records, weigh slips, and other documents that are required to be completed by law. A record will be maintained on each driver’s file showing that the employee has this knowledge or any training received. The company will evaluate each type of record for proper completion.

1. Hours of Service Records

Refer to the following resources for more information on federal hours of service requirements:

Commercial Vehicle Drivers Hours of Service Regulations (SOR/2005-313) Reference Guide for Hours of Service Training Development

Module 7 of the Commercial Vehicle Safety Compliance in Alberta manual

Daily Log Completion

Unless exempted by law, all authorized drivers must complete daily logs for every calendar day they are employed by the company. The following information provides a brief summary for what must be included in a daily log:

At the beginning of each day:

• the start time of day if different than midnight, the name of the driver and, if the driver is a member of a team of drivers, the names of the co-drivers;

• in the case of a driver who is not driving under the provisions of an oil well service permit, the cycle that the driver is following;

• the commercial vehicle licence plates or unit numbers;

• the odometer reading of each of the commercial vehicles operated by the driver;

• the names and the addresses of the home terminal and the principal place of business of every motor carrier by whom the driver was employed or otherwise engaged during that day;

• in the “Remarks” section of the daily log, if the motor carrier or driver was not required to keep a daily log immediately before the beginning of the day, the number of hours of off-duty time and on-duty time that were accumulated by the driver each day during the 14 days immediately before the beginning of the day; and

• if applicable, a declaration in the “Remarks” section of the daily log that states that the driver is deferring off-duty time under section 16 and that clearly indicates whether the driver is driving under day one or day two of that time.

Page 4 of 33

http://laws-lois.justice.gc.ca/eng/regulations/SOR-2005-313/



http://www.transportation.alberta.ca/675.htm


http://www.transportation.alberta.ca/Content/docType276/Production/Module7.pdf

http://www.transportation.alberta.ca/Content/docType276/Production/Module7.pdf



During the course of the day:

• the hours in each duty status during the day covered by the daily log, in accordance with Schedule 2, and the location of the driver each time their duty status changes, as that information becomes known.

At the end of each day:

• the total hours for each duty status and the total distance driven by the driver that day, excluding the distance driven in respect of the driver’s personal use of the vehicle, as well as the odometer reading at the end of the day and sign the daily log attesting to the accuracy of the information recorded in it.

Electronic Daily Logs

Electronic daily logs generated by Electronic Logging Devices (ELDs) may be submitted as long as they contain the same information in the same format that is required by regulation for a handwritten daily log. Failing to produce an electronic daily log will be treated the same as failing to produce a daily log in handwritten format. This includes if the electronic daily log data is:

• illegible;

• inoperable due to driver error;

• inoperable due to device malfunction, or

• unavailable for any other reason.

For more information, refer to the Electronic Log Policy: www.transportation.alberta.ca/5610.htm

Retention and Distribution of Log Books

Drivers must forward the original copy of their daily log and supporting documents to their home terminal within 20 days of the completion of the daily log.

Within 30 days of receiving the daily logs and supporting documents, the company will deposit these records at the principal place of business and retain all daily logs and supporting documents in chronological order for each driver for at least 6 months.

Hours of service records will be maintained at the following location:

Valard Construction #204, 4209 – 99 Street Edmonton, AB T6E 5V7

Page 5 of 33





Time Records for Drivers Operating within 160 kilometers of the Home Terminal

Authorized drivers are not required to maintain a daily log where ALL of the following conditions are met:

• Driver/vehicle does not operate beyond 160 kilometers radius of the home terminal; • Driver returns to home terminal each day to begin a minimum of 8 consecutive hours of off-

duty time; • The company maintains and retains for a period of 6 months accurate and legible records

showing, for each day the driver’s duty status and elected cycle, the hour at which each duty status begins and ends and the total number of hours spent in each status;

• The driver is not driving under a permit issued under the Commercial Vehicle Drivers’ Hours of Service Regulation.

When a driver was not required to keep a daily log before the beginning of the day (radius operation), the driver shall in the “remarks” section of the daily log record the number of hours of off-duty time and on-duty time that was accumulated by the driver for each day during the 14 days immediately before the beginning of the day.

2. Shipping Documents Bills of Lading

Where applicable, a Bill of Lading shall be identified by a numerical code or other means of identification and shall set out at least the following:

• name and mailing address of the consignor;

• date of the consignment;

• point of origin of the shipment;

• name of the originating carrier;

• names of connecting carriers, if any;

• name and mailing address of the consignee;

• destination of the shipment;

• particulars of the goods comprising the shipment, including weight and description;

• a space for the signature of the consignor or his agent;

• a provision stipulating whether the goods are received in apparent good order and condition;

• a space in which to show the declared value of the shipment;

• where charges are to be prepaid or collected;

• a space in which to indicate whether the charges are prepaid or collect;

Page 6 of 33



• a space in which to show whether the C.O.D. fee is prepaid or collect;

• a space in which to show the amount to be collected by the carrier on a C.O.D. shipment;

• a space in which to note any special agreement between the consignor and the carrier;

• a statement in conspicuous form indicating that the carrier’s liability is limited by a term or condition of the applicable schedule of rates or by other agreement, if such a limitation exists.

The person who is the originating carrier of the goods being shipped shall, on the bill of lading issued for those goods:

• acknowledge receipt of the goods by signing the bill of lading, and

• indicate the condition of the goods and give details of any defect.

Waybills

Instead of carrying a bill of lading for the goods transported, the company may carry a waybill for the goods issued by the consignor or carrier. A waybill shall be identified by the numerical code or other means of identification set out on the bill of lading and set forth at least the following:

• particulars of the goods carried on the vehicle;

• name and mailing address of the consignor;

• point of origin of the shipment;

• name and mailing address of the consignee;

• destination of the shipment;

• names of connecting carriers, if any; • whether the charges are prepaid or collect;

• date of the consignment.

Note: See Section 2 of the Bill Of Lading and Conditions of Carriage Regulation (AR 313/2002) for exemptions (e.g. owner’s own goods).

Dangerous Goods Shipping Documents

If Valard transports Dangerous Goods, a Dangerous Goods Shipping Document shall contain, at minimum, the following information:

• Consignor’s name and address in Canada;

• Date of shipment;

• Description of the goods: (in the following order)

1. UN number (e.g. UN1230);

2. Dangerous goods shipping name (e.g. Methanol);

3. Primary class and subsidiary class (e.g. 3(6.1)); Page 7 of 33

http://www.qp.alberta.ca/1266.cfm?page=2002_313.cfm&leg_type=Regs&isbncln=9780779782390






4. If applicable, the packing group in roman numerals (e.g. I, II or III) or the compatibility group letter for explosives;

5. If applicable, the words "toxic by inhalation" or "toxic – inhalation hazard" for dangerous goods subject to Special Provision 23 (Class 6.1, PGI, toxic due to inhalation);

• The quantity in metric measurement (e.g. kg or L) for transport originating in Canada;

• The “24-hour number” of a person who can provide technical information on the dangerous goods; and

• The consignor’s certification.

In some cases, more information may need to be included, such as:

• The number of small means of containment (e.g. volume of 450 L or less) that require labels;

• The technical name or the statement “not odorized”;

• The Emergency Response Assistance Plan (ERAP) number and its activating telephone number; Note: An ERAP is only required for certain dangerous goods in certain quantities. To learn more about ERAP, please consult Part 7 of the TDG Regulations.

• The flash point, if the product is a Class 3 flammable liquid and is being transported on a ship; (e.g. gasoline, diesel, etc.);

• Special instructions, such as the control and emergency control temperatures of Classes 4.1 and 5.2; and

• The number of any applicable Transport Canada Equivalency Certificates.

Shipping documents must be carried within the driver’s reach and, when the driver leaves the cab, the shipping documents must be left on the driver’s seat, in a pocket on the driver’s door or in an obvious place in the cab. If the vehicle is left in a supervised area, a copy of the shipping document must be left with the person in charge.

Note: There may be exemptions to regulations. Refer to Part 3 of the Transportation of Dangerous Goods Regulations (SOR/2001–286).

For more information refer to the web site: www.transportation.alberta.ca and/or contact the Dangerous Goods Coordination and Information Centre at 800-272-9600 for further information on bulletins, permitting and general information.

Weigh Slips

Valard Construction will obtain accurate vehicle weights and weigh slips for vehicles that are required to be weighed under the Bill Of Lading and Conditions of Carriage Regulation (AR 313/2002).

Page 8 of 33

https://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/tdg/clear-tofc-211.htm





http://www.transportation.alberta.ca/

http://www.transportation.alberta.ca/







COMPLIANCE WITH THE LAW

SAFETY LAWS

Drivers operating vehicles owned by Valard Construction will comply with all transportation safety

laws as required. The Commercial Vehicle Certificate and Insurance Regulation (AR 314/2002) identifies that:

“safety laws” means, as the context requires,

i) the Act (Traffic Safety Act) and regulations made under the Act;

ii) the Dangerous Goods Transportation and Handling Act and the regulations made under that Act;

iii) the laws of a jurisdiction outside Alberta, respecting the same, similar or equivalent subjects as those regulated or controlled by the laws referred to in sub clauses (i) and (ii).

SAFE VEHICLES Vehicle Condition

Drivers will not operate and Valard will not permit a person to operate a commercial vehicle if the vehicle or any equipment related to the commercial vehicle is in a condition likely to cause danger to persons or property.

Page 9 of 33







USE OF SAFETY EQUIPMENT USE OF WARNING DEVICES

During the night time a commercial vehicle will not be stationary on a highway outside the limits of an urban area unless;

• the hazard lights are alight if functional; and

• advanced warning triangles are placed without delay on the highway in line with the commercial vehicle at a distance of approximately 30 metres behind and in front of the commercial vehicle.

When there is insufficient light or conditions where objects are not clearly discernable at 150 metres, commercial vehicles will not be stationary outside of the limits of an urban area unless;

• the hazard lights are alight if functional, and


During the day time a person will not permit a commercial vehicle to be stationary on a highway outside the limits of an urban area unless;

• the hazard lights are alight if functional, and


Warning triangles and hazard lights are used to make other traffic aware of parked commercial vehicles.

USE OF FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

If the need to use a fire extinguisher arises:

Remember the word PASS • Pull - Pull the safety pin by breaking the seal;

• Aim – Aim the nozzle, horn or hose at the base of the fire;

• Squeeze - Squeeze the handle;

• Sweep – Sweep from side to side moving carefully toward the fire keep the extinguisher aimed at the base of the flame and sweep back and forth until the flames appear to be out.

Safety Instructions

• remove the fire extinguisher from its bracket;

• approach the fire from upwind if possible;

• hold the extinguisher in an upright position;

• continue to use until the fire is out and the fire extinguisher is empty; Page 10 of 33



• replace the safety pin and return it to your compartment;

• have extinguisher recharged immediately or replaced before your next run;

• report use of fire extinguisher to supervisor.

USE OF PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE)

Valard Construction will ensure all employees are educated on the proper use of all issued PPE (e.g. safety glasses, hard hats, breathing apparatus, etc.).

Note: Reference Occupational Health and Safety Act for specific instructions and the use of PPE. This legislation may also require additional components to be covered in the safety program. The Occupational Health and Safety Act is available online at: http://work.alberta.ca/occupational-health-safety/307.html.

Page 11 of 33

http://work.alberta.ca/occupational-health-safety/307.html





DRIVER CONDUCT AND DISCIPLINE DRIVER CONDUCT Drivers must practice good conduct by keeping the following policies in mind:

• safely operate company vehicles on the highway with a professional attitude and obey posted speed limits;

• drive in a defensive manner, be aware of surroundings and look ahead. Leave a safe distance between vehicles and be a professional and courteous driver;

• keep the vehicle under control at all times and reduce speed due to changes in road, weather and traffic conditions;

• be prepared to avoid collision producing situations by practicing and promoting safe driving skills;

• report all significant events on road to the Safety Advisor, including violations, near misses, etc.

DISCIPLINARY PROCEDURES (STEPS) All disciplinary steps taken by Valard Construction will be progressive in nature. All actions taken, including verbal warnings, will be documented. Disciplinary action may be taken with employees for any: • regulatory violations (identified on the Carrier Profile, driver’s abstract or through internal

evaluations/audits). • significant company policy violations (identified through internal audits, direct observation, reports

from other staff, and reports from the public/customers).

As appropriate, disciplinary action may include:

• written warnings;

• suspension; or

• termination.

The disciplinary process may also require corrective measures, such as re-training. For severe violations that pose a significant risk to public safety, Valard may take disciplinary action at any stage based on the severity of the violation.

Where any form of disciplinary action is taken against a driver, this action must be documented and recorded in the driver’s file.

Page 12 of 33



DRIVER QUALIFICATIONS DRIVER QUALIFICATIONS

When hiring new drivers, Valard Construction will ensure the driver is qualified for the job by reviewing their driver abstract. By reviewing the commercial driver abstract, the company will ensure the driver has a valid operator’s licence for the class of vehicle they will be operating. The company will also examine the driver’s history to determine whether they are qualified to operate a commercial vehicle safely.

When hiring new drivers, Valard may also:

• conduct a personal interview to evaluate attitude, driving skills and professionalism;

• contact references and past employers;

• conduct a road test to include: use of two and four lane highways, city driving, and yard backing and parking, shifting, turning, mirror usage, speed and general awareness;

• evaluate the skills and knowledge of a driver by conducting a written exam;

• address any special training requirements (e.g. dangerous goods, long combination vehicle, etc.);

• implement a maximum abstract point threshold (e.g. specify maximum demerit points allowed within a three year period and do not hire if exceeded);

• implement a maximum collision threshold (e.g. consider if your threshold will include preventable collisions only or all collisions. Do not hire the applicant if the threshold is exceeded);

• implement a policy addressing procedures for suspended licence.

• implement a policy requiring drivers to immediately report changes of their Driver's Licence status to their employer (for example, suspensions or medical requirements/conditions).

Page 13 of 33


Date: July 27, 2016 Revision: Revised by: Date: DRIVER EVALUATIONS

The company will perform written driver evaluations according to the intervals in the chart below:

Driver Evaluation

Type Evaluation Interval Comments

New Hire Evaluate on hire Complete written driver evaluation form and place on driver file.

Probationary Driver

3 Months

Complete written driver evaluation form and ensure driver has corrected any issues identified in evaluation conducted at hire.

Non-compliant Driver

Monthly Complete written driver evaluations until satisfied the driver understands and can comply with requirements.

Normal Driver Yearly Complete written driver evaluation

form and place on driver file.

Drivers will be evaluated for skills involving: driving in traffic, backing up, connecting a trailer, fuelling, driving in the mountains, driving defensively, conducting daily Trip Inspections, and identifying and reporting defects to the carrier. Valard maintains an ongoing program for evaluating employees’ driving skills using:

• road tests (see Evaluation form on the next page); • internal audits of records (logbooks, time records, etc.).

Drivers may also be required to take written exams to test driver skills and knowledge of (as applicable):

• hours of service; • cargo securement; • dangerous goods; • daily trip inspections; • other:

Driver Evaluation results will be retained on each driver’s file. A sample driver evaluation form is attached.

Page 14 of 33



DRIVER EVALUATION Carrier Name: Current Class of Operator’s Licence

1 2 3 4 5 Driver Name: Date: Signature of Driver: Date:

DRIVER ACTIONS Performance Assessment DRIVER ACTIONS Performance Assessment Good Fair Poor Good Fair Poor

A. CONTROLS E. TRAFFIC LIGHTS / SIGNS 1. Knowledge and/or use of equipment 1. Fails to anticipate / observe

2. One-handed steering – hand position 2. Judgment – green / amber / red

3. Steering Control – wanders / recovery 3. Judgment – stop / yield / other

4. Shifts too soon / late / lugs

5. Improper use of gears / grinds F. RIGHT-OF-WAY

6. Improper use of clutch / stalls/ coasts 1. Uncertain / hesitant

7. Improper use of brake / park brake 2. Fails to assume own right of way

8. Improper use of accelerator 3. Aggressive / Judgment

9. Signals too soon / late

10. Signals – improper / not cancelled/none G. SPEED

1. Too fast for conditions

B. PARKING / STARTING / BACKING 2. Too slow for conditions

1. Fails to set brake / gear

2. Observation – backing / starting H. BACKUP / TURN AROUND

3. Judgment – vehicle / wheels / angle 1. Poor observation – before / during

5. Rolls back 2. Judgment of distance / position

6. Unsure / too slow

C. LANE DRIVING / CHANGING / POSITION I. ROAD TEST DISQUALIFICATION 1. Fails to check mirror 1. Overall poor performance

2. Fails to check blind spot / late 2. Right of way violation – vehicle / pedestrian

Page 15 of 33


Date: July 27, 2016 Revision: Revised by: Date: 3. Uncertain / hesitant 3. Traffic light violation

4. Road position – straddles lane 4. Stop sign violation

5. Too close / far – stop / pass / follow 5. Speeding violation

6. Improper lane change / late / slow 6. Other violation

7. Fails to observe signs / conditions 7. Climbs over curb

8. Lacks caution at uncontrolled intersection

D. INTERSECTIONS / TURNS / RR 9. Obstructs traffic

1. Block crosswalk / intersection / stop line 10. Unable to perform skill maneuver

2. Stops too far back 11. Hits vehicle / object

3. Unnecessary stop 12. Lacks skill and control

4. Fails to leave parking lot 13. Unsafe action

5. Fails to observe conditions / late 14. Trip inspection failure

6. Left turn – cuts corner / turns wide

7. Left turn – wrong lane – before / after J. GENERAL DRIVER KNOWLEDGE

8. Right turn – cuts corner / turns wide 1. Hours of Service

9. Right turn – wrong lane – before / after 2. Trip Inspections

10. Incorrect position – vehicle / wheels 3. Cargo Securement

11. Too fast – before / during 4. Weights and Dimensions

12. Too slow – before / during

TEST ADMINSTRATION INFORMATION: COMMENTS: Authorized to drive: Yes: No:

Safety Advisors Name: Signature:

Page 16 of 33



DRIVER RECORDS AND RECORD RETENTION DRIVER FILES

Valard Construction will keep a driver record for every person authorized to operate company vehicles, including owner(s) and management. These records will include the following information:

• the driver’s completed application form for employment with the registered owner, where applicable (note: the driver’s resume is considered to be an acceptable application);

• the driver’s employment history for the three years immediately preceding the time the driver started working for the carrier, where applicable;

• a copy of the driver’s abstract in a form satisfactory to the Registrar when the driver is first hired or employed, dated within 30 days of the date of employment or hire;

• annual updated copies of the driver’s abstract in a form satisfactory to the Registrar;

• a record of the driver’s convictions of safety laws in the current year and in each of the 4 preceding years;

• a record of any administrative penalty imposed on the driver under safety laws;

• a record of all collisions involving a motor vehicle operated by the driver that are required to be reported to a peace officer under any enactment of Alberta or a jurisdiction outside Alberta;

• a record of all training undertaken by a driver related to the operation of a commercial vehicle and compliance with safety laws;

• a copy of any training certificate issued to the driver, in electronic or paper form, for the period starting on the date the training certificate is issued and continuing until 2 years after it expires, in accordance with Part 6.6 of the Transportation of Dangerous Goods Regulations under the Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act, 1992; and

• a copy of a current medical certificate for all Class 1, 2 or 4 licences and Class 3 or 5 with a licence endorsement code “C” requiring a periodic medical. If medical certificate is not presented or available, retain a copy of valid driver licence, a Commercial Driver’s Abstract or a note from the medical doctor in lieu of the medical certificate.

DRIVER RECORD RETENTION Valard Construction will keep all driver files at the principal place of business in Alberta. These records will be:

• retained for at least five years from the date they are created, established or received (unless specified otherwise by specific legislation); and

• available for inspection by a peace officer during the carrier’s regular business hours.

Page 17 of 33



EMPLOYEE TRAINING TRAINING AREAS

Valard Construction will ensure all drivers have met training requirements prior to operating company vehicles. This training must be conducted to increase knowledge, reduce violations and reduce the likelihood of collisions.

All employees will receive training in the following subjects, as applicable:

• company safety program;

• safe vehicle operation;

• company maintenance program;

• Traffic Safety Act and relevant transportation safety laws including;

• Hours of service;

• Daily trip inspections;

• Weights and dimensions;

• Cargo securement; and

• Other regulations, as applicable to company operations.

• the Dangerous Goods Transportation and Handling Act and regulations made under that Act;

• any other laws (e.g. Occupational Health and Safety) or laws of another jurisdiction if operating outside of Alberta.

Employees will be trained: ☐ In House ☐ By an External Organization ☐ Both

All drivers will have records of training in their file (e.g. training certificates or other records showing the time, date and type of training). A copy of applicable legislation will be made available for all staff (e.g. web site access, hard copy, or disk).

Note: Training information is available in the Commercial Vehicle Safety Compliance in Alberta education manual and in the Reference Guide for Hours of Service Training Development

ORIENTATION

All new hires will receive training on Valard’s safety and maintenance policies. Orientation must be completed before drivers drive to ensure they know the laws that apply on that first trip. New employees will also receive training in the following subjects upon hire:

Page 18 of 33









X Hours of Service X Daily Trip Inspections X Load Securement

ONGOING TRAINING

Employees will receive ongoing training throughout their employment in the following subjects:

• hours of service (logbooks and/or time records) – Valard will assess the need for additional training by conducting daily and periodic internal audits of:

o driver's hours of service records to ensure documents are not falsified; o daily log completion to ensure they meet the legislated requirements (form and

manner); and o other fatigue related issues, such as, operating beyond the legislated hours of service limits, inadequate rest or off duty periods, etc.

• daily trip inspections – Valard will provide ongoing training through spot checks and monitoring of vehicle defects.

• dimensions – dimensions and permits must be checked before leaving the yard.

• load securement – ongoing training and monitoring of compliance with Cargo National Safety Code Standard 10 through direct spot checks and monitoring the Carrier Profile.

• other regulations, as applicable to company operations.

All employees will be evaluated on a regular basis to ensure they understand minimum transportation safety requirements. If a knowledge gap is identified in a driver evaluation, Valard will ensure that the driver is trained as necessary. Employees may also be subject to additional training throughout the year when:

• Regulations or policies concerning any of the subjects above have changed;

• An employee has demonstrated non-compliance in one of the above areas; or

• An employee has indicated they do not understand the minimum transportation safety requirements.

Valardwill ensure all employees are evaluated on their knowledge of the information received during training.

Page 19 of 33



MONITORING HOURS OF SERVICE COMPLIANCE Valard Construction will monitor the compliance of each driver with the Commercial Vehicle Drivers Hours of Service Regulations (SOR/2005-313). Valard has a responsibility to monitor the compliance of drivers’ hours of service records. The purpose of monitoring these records is to prevent collisions involving fatigued driving. During the monitoring process, the company will address all fatigue-related violations found in these records. Hours of service violations considered to be “fatigue-related” include:

• False records (identified using independent supporting documents);

• More than one record for each day;

• Missing records (every day must be accounted for);

• Records not current to the last change of duty status;

• Driving over any hour limits specified in regulation;

• Drivers not meeting off-duty requirements or taking time breaks as required by regulation;

• Using the 160 kilometer radius exemption when the driver does not meet all specified criteria;

• Failing to meet any condition of a permit related to hours of service.

The process used to monitor drivers for compliance must produce measureable results. The goal of the company is to work towards achieving a Fatigue Violation Rate of 0% (i.e. no fatigue-related violations by any drivers).

Valard will adopt the following approach when reviewing driver records for hours of service violations:

• Document written policies in the safety program that address compliance requirements;

• Assign a person to be responsible for monitoring, taking remedial action when violations are found, etc.

• This person should also be responsible for ensuring they and other applicable employees have the necessary skills and knowledge to accurately analyze hours of service records;

• Verify that all authorized drivers have a record for every calendar day (including days off and holidays);

• Verify all authorized drivers understand and apply the appropriate hours of service regulations;

• Check all authorized drivers for form and manner violations for every day. This includes checking for name, address, date, daily hour totals, and odometer readings on the record;

• Check all authorized drivers for fatigue-related violations (see list of fatigue violations above);

• Use independent supporting documents (that cannot be created or modified by the driver) to verify the accuracy of each driver’s records. Supporting documents may include fuel receipts, bills of lading with shipping times, GPS records, or meal/hotel receipts, toll receipts, etc.

Page 20 of 33







• Check recently trained drivers and drivers with a history of violations more often. Regularly check these drivers until the company is satisfied they understand and apply the appropriate hours of service requirements.

• When a new driver is hired, obtain hours of service records from their previous employer. If this is not possible, then obtain a signed statement from the driver that specifies their total on-duty and off-duty hours for each of the previous 14 days prior to authorizing them to drive.

• Where an Electronic Onboard Recording Device (EOBR) is used in place of a hardcopy log, verify that the driver’s on-duty and off-duty hours are accurate. For example, ensure that the EOBR has not recorded loading or unloading time as “off-duty” time.

• When violations are identified in a driver’s records, take appropriate remedial action. All action(s) taken must be documented in the driver’s file and must include the date the violation was identified and date issue was addressed.

• Prepare a monthly report of your findings and any corrective action(s) taken. Retain all reports for the current year and the preceding 4 years. The report should include a calculation of each driver’s Fatigue Violation Rate (FVR) and of the company’s overall FVR using the formula below:

FVR = Number of days with 1 or more fatigue-related violations x

100% Total number of days checked

• The report should also include a calculation of every driver’s Form and Manner Violation Rate (FMVR) using the formula below:

FMVR = Number of days with 1 or more form and manner violations x 100% Total number of days checked

• It is recommended that carriers with one to ten drivers check every driver at least once a month for hours of service violations.

• Carriers with more than ten drivers should check at least ten drivers plus 10 per cent of the remaining drivers on a monthly basis. For example, a carrier with 30 drivers would check 10 drivers plus 10 per cent of the remaining 20 drivers, for a total of 12 drivers each month. In a larger company, every driver should be checked for hours of service compliance at least once annually.

NOTE: A “driver” includes any person authorized to operate an NSC vehicle registered to the carrier. This includes full or part time employees, volunteers, mechanics, salespeople, dispatchers, office staff, owners, managers, supervisors, etc.

For more information about hours of service monitoring requirements, visit the Alberta Transportation website at: www.transportation.alberta.ca/5610.htm.

Page 21 of 33




OVERVIEW All NSC commercial vehicles (commercial vehicle registered solely or in combination for more than 4,500 kilograms including but not limited to trucks, truck tractors, trailers, converter dollies, jeeps and boosters) registered to the company are required to comply with the company's maintenance and inspection program policies and procedures, including:

• lease operators that have their vehicles registered Valard; or

• if lease operators follow their own maintenance program, then they must;

• provide a copy of the lessee’s maintenance and inspection program that meets the minimum regulatory requirements;

o the registered owner must document that the maintenance and inspection program is “acceptable”;

o the registered owner must ensure the lease operator is following the maintenance and inspection program.

The preventive maintenance and inspection program will address the following areas:

• daily trip inspections;

• repairs;

• routine scheduled maintenance;

• annual CVIP inspections;

• recordkeeping of all inspections, repairs, and routine maintenance.

A person shall not operate or permit another person to operate a commercial vehicle if the vehicle or any equipment related to the commercial vehicle is in a condition likely to cause danger to persons or property.

It is illegal to operate a vehicle on a highway with any defect that is a violation under any legislation.

Valard’s written maintenance and inspection program will be kept at the company’s principal place of business in Alberta. Copies of the maintenance and inspection program will be available at each location of the carrier where the maintenance and inspection of the carrier’s commercial vehicles is carried out. A copy of the program shall be readily accessible to employees of the carriers who carry out the maintenance and inspection program.

DESIGNATION OF MAINTENANCE OFFICER The person is responsible for maintaining and implementing this preventative maintenance program: Name: Mr. Lynn Torgerson

Ms. Bev Whittaker Title: Fleet Manager

Fleet Administrator Phone: (780) 980-5456 Email: [email protected]

[email protected]

Page 22 of 33

mailto:[email protected]

mailto:[email protected]



SCHEDULED VEHICLE MAINTENANCE Valard Construction will routinely inspect applicable vehicle components as listed in:

• Alberta's Vehicle Inspection Regulation (AR 211/2006),

• Schedule 2 of Alberta’s Commercial Vehicle Safety Regulation (AR 121/2009), and

• Schedule 1 of NSC Standard 13 Part 2 (daily trip inspection).

Any component identified as being in need of repair and/or maintenance will be serviced as required. The records documenting the maintenance will be retained on the appropriate vehicle file. Valard will conduct regular and continuous maintenance inspections and repairs in accordance with the following intervals:

Inspection Type Vehicle Type

Inspection Interval (Kilometres, Time or

Hours) Comments

Daily Trip Inspection:

Trucks, Tractors, Trailers Every 24 hours

Complete written Daily Trip Inspection form if required. Report all defects and document all repairs.

Lubrication Interval (Oil changes and greasing)

Trucks 500 Hours

Tractors 500 Hours

Trailers Monthly

Scheduled Maintenance Inspection

Trucks 500 Hours

Tractors 500 Hours

Trailers Monthly

“CVIP” Inspection: All Types (Truck, Tractor, Trailer)

Annually Required every 12 months before next CVIP expires - to be completed by a Certified CVIP Station.

Note: Only fill in the above chart for vehicle types that are registered to the company. For example, if the company does not have trailers registered; do not fill in intervals for trailers.

Page 23 of 33







http://www.ccmta.ca/images/publications/pdf/nsc_standard_13_update.pdf

http://www.ccmta.ca/images/publications/pdf/nsc_standard_13_update.pdf



DAILY TRIP INSPECTIONS NATIONAL SAFETY CODE (NSC) STANDARD 13 Valard Construction will ensure that:

• a copy of Schedule 1 is located in each commercial vehicle. Drivers shall produce the Schedule when requested by a peace officer.

• a daily trip inspection is valid for a maximum of 24 hours from the time recorded on the trip inspection report. Vehicle components will be inspected as required by Section 10(4)(b) of Alberta’s Commercial Vehicle Safety Regulation (AR121/2009). The daily inspection must include all components as specified in the list of items in Schedule 1 of NSC Standard 13 Part 2.

• any of the components that are routinely inspected may be added to the daily trip inspection and any components that are not applicable to the vehicle may be deleted from the daily trip inspection.

COMPLETION OF THE DAILY TRIP INSPECTION REPORT

Drivers conducting a daily trip inspection will prepare a trip inspection report including the following information:

• the licence plate, identification number or unit number,

• the odometer or hub meter at the time of inspection,

• the name of the carrier operating the commercial vehicle,

• the name of the municipality or location on the highway where the inspection was conducted and the time and date that the report was made,

• any defect related to the operation of any item required to be inspected or that no defect was detected,

• the name of the person who inspected the vehicle and a statement signed by that person stating that the vehicle has been inspected in accordance with section 10 of the Commercial Vehicle Safety Regulation (AR 121/2009)

• the name and signature of the person making the report.

Note: A sample trip inspection report is attached. Drivers may use this report or Valard may attach a different report for them to use.

DEFECTS OBSERVED DURING OPERATION OF THE VEHICLE If a driver observes any safety defects as specified in Schedules 1 or 2 of NSC Standard 13 while driving the vehicle, the driver will record the defects in the attached trip inspection report or in a written document and report those defects to the company as required. Drivers will produce this trip inspection report or other document approved by Valard when requested by a peace officer.

Page 24 of 33

http://www.qp.alberta.ca/documents/Regs/2009_121.pdf








Date: July 27, 2016 Revision: Revised by: Date: DISTRIBUTION AND RETENTION OF TRIP INSPECTION REPORTS • The person who completed the trip inspection report will forward that report to their home terminal

within 20 days of completion of the report;

• Valard is responsible for ensuring the trip inspection report is submitted as required. That report must be maintained at the principal place of business within 30 days of receiving the report; and

• The original report will be retained in chronological order by Valard for the month it was created and an additional 6 months.

REQUIREMENT TO REPAIR, CORRECT AND REPORT DEFECTS

• Drivers will not drive a commercial vehicle with any uncorrected or unrepaired major defect (see Schedule 1 of NSC Standard 13 part 2 for a description of a major defect);

• Anyone conducting a daily trip inspection is required to document any defects on the written trip inspection report;

• Valard Construction will certify on the report that the defect has been repaired/corrected or certify on the report the repair/correction is unnecessary;

• If a driver or person authorized by Valard believes or suspects there is a safety defect in the commercial vehicle, they shall report the safety defect to the carrier;

o without delay if the defect is a major defect, o or in a timely manner but not later that the next required daily trip inspection in all other cases.

Page 25 of 33



NSC STANDARD 13 PART

2 Schedule 1 – Truck, Tractor &

Trailers

Application: This schedule applies to trucks, tractors and trailers or combinations thereof exceeding a registered gross vehicle weight of 4500 kg.

1. Air Brake System

Defect(s) • Audible air leak. • Slow air pressure build-up rate.

Major Defect(s) • Pushrod stroke of any brake exceeds the

adjustment limit. • Air loss rate exceeds prescribed limit. • Inoperative towing vehicle (tractor) protection

system. • Low air warning system fails or system is

activated. • Inoperative service, parking or emergency brake.

2. Cab

Defect(s) • Occupant compartment door fails to open.

Major Defect(s) • Any cab or sleeper door fails to close securely.

3. Cargo Securement

Defect(s) • Insecure or improper load covering (e.g. wrong

type or flapping in the wind).

Major Defect(s) • Insecure cargo. • Absence, failure, malfunction or deterioration of

required cargo securement device or load covering.

4. Coupling Devices

Defect(s) • Coupler or mounting has loose or missing

fastener.

Major Defect(s) • Coupler is insecure or movement exceeds

prescribed limit. • Coupling or locking mechanism is damaged or

fails to lock. • Defective, incorrect or missing safety

chain/cable. 5. Dangerous Goods

Major Defect(s) • Dangerous goods requirements not met.

Page 26 of 33


Date: July 27, 2016 Revision: Revised by: Date: 6. Driver Controls

Defect(s) • Accelerator pedal, clutch, gauges, audible and visual indicators or instruments fail to function properly.

7. Driver Seat

Defect(s) •Seat is damaged or fails to remain in set

position.

Major Defect(s) • Seatbelt or tether belt is insecure, missing or

malfunctions.

8. Electric Brake System

Defect(s) • Loose or insecure wiring or electrical

connection.

Major Defect(s) • Inoperative breakaway device. • Inoperative brake.

9. Emergency Equipment & Safety Devices Defect(s)

• Emergency equipment is missing, damaged or defective.

10. Exhaust System Defect(s) • Exhaust leak.

Major Defect(s) • Leak that causes exhaust gas to enter the occupant

compartment. 11. Frame and Cargo Body Defect(s) • Damaged frame or cargo body.

Major Defect(s) • Visibly shifted, cracked, collapsing or sagging frame

member(s). 12. Fuel System Defect(s) • Missing fuel tank cap.

Major Defect(s) • Insecure fuel tank. • Dripping fuel leak.

13. General

Major Defect(s) • Serious damage or deterioration that is noticeable

and may affect the vehicle’s safe operation.

Page 27 of 33


Date: July 27, 2016 Revision: Revised by: Date: 14. Glass and Mirrors Defect(s)

• Required mirror or window glass fails to provide the required view to the driver as a result of being cracked, broken, damaged, missing or maladjusted.

• Required mirror or glass has broken or damaged attachments onto vehicle body.

15. Heater/Defroster

Defect(s) • Control or system failure.

Major Defect(s) • Defroster fails to provide unobstructed view

through the windshield.

16. Horn Defect(s) • Vehicle has no operative horn.

17. Hydraulic Brake System Defect(s)

• Brake fluid level is below indicated minimum level.

Major Defect(s) • Parking brake is inoperative • Brake boost or power assist is inoperative. • Brake fluid leak. • Brake pedal fade or insufficient brake pedal

reserve. • Activated (other than ABS) warning device. • Brake fluid reservoir is less than ¼ full.

18. Lamps and Reflectors Defect(s)

• Required lamp does not function as intended. • Required reflector is missing or partially

missing.

Major Defect(s) When lamps are required: • Failure of both low-beam headlamps. • Failure of both rearmost tail lamps. At all times: • Failure of a rearmost turn-indicator lamp.

• Failure of both rearmost brake lamps.

19. Steering Defect(s)

• Steering wheel lash (free-play) is greater than normal.

Major Defect(s) • Steering wheel is insecure, or does not respond

normally. • Steering wheel lash (free-play) exceeds required

limit.

Page 28 of 33


Date: July 27, 2016 Revision: Revised by: Date: 20. Suspension System Defect(s)

• Air leak in air suspension system. • Broken spring leaf. • Suspension fastener is loose, missing or

broken.

Major Defect(s) 1

• Damaged or deflated air bag. • Cracked or broken main spring leaf or more than

one broken spring leaf. • Part of spring leaf or suspension is missing,

shifted out of place or in contact with another vehicle component.

• Loose U-bolt. _____

1 patched, cut, bruised, cracked to braid, mounted insecurely.

21. Tires Defect(s)

• Damaged tread or sidewall of tire. • Tire leaking (if leak can be felt or heard, tire is

to be treated as flat).

Major Defect(s) • Flat tire. • Tire tread depth is less than wear limit. • Tire is in contact with another tire or any vehicle

component other than mud-flap. • Tire is marked “Not for highway use”. • Tire has exposed cords in the tread or outer side

wall area.

22. Wheels, Hubs and Fasteners Defect(s) Major Defect(s)

• Hub oil below minimum level. (When fitted • Wheel has loose, missing or ineffective fastener. with sight glass.)

• Damaged, cracked or broken wheel, rim or • Leaking wheel seal. attaching part. • Evidence of imminent wheel, hub or bearing

failure 23. Windshield Wiper/Washer Defect(s)

• Control or system malfunction. • Wiper blade damaged, missing or fails to

adequately clear driver’s field of vision.

Major Defect(s) When necessary for prevailing weather condition. • Wiper or washer fails to adequately clear driver’s

field of vision in area swept by driver’s side wiper.

Page 29 of 33



TRUCK/TRAILER TRIP INSPECTION REPORT

Carrier Name: NSC Number:

☐ Pre-Trip ☐ Post-Trip

Time of Inspection: Date of Inspection: Location of Inspection:

Odometer Reading: Vehicle Plate or Unit Number: Trailer Plate or Unit Number:

☐ No Defects Found Inspector/Driver Name: Inspector/Driver Signature:

When item inspected, check “I” column. If defect identified during inspection, check “RR” (requires repair) column.

I RR Item Inspected I RR Item Inspected

Air Brake System Glass and Mirrors

Cab Components / Doors Heater/Defroster

Cargo Securement Horn

Coupling Devices Hydraulic Brake System

Dangerous Goods Inspection Decals

Driver Controls Lights and Reflectors

Driver Seat / Seatbelts Mud flaps and Fenders

Electric Brake System Spare Fuses / Bulbs / Lights

Emergency Equipment and Safety Devices Steering

Engine Fluid Levels Suspension System

Engine Components Tires

Exhaust System Tire Chains / Hanger

Frame and Cargo Body Tools

Fuel System Unit Documents

Exhaust System Wheels, Hubs and Fasteners

General Windshield Wipers/Washer

Other: __________________________________________________________________________

Details of defect(s) detected at any other time(s)

Page 30 of 33



Certification of Repairs Completed

☐ Above defects repaired ☐ Above defects do not affect safe operation of vehicle, repair unnecessary

Name of person inspecting:

Signature of person inspection: Date and time:

Repairman Name (if applicable):

Repairman Signature (if applicable):

Date and time:

Page 31 of 33



RECORD KEEPING VEHICLE FILES Valard Construction will maintain vehicle files to ensure that all vehicles are adequately maintained in a satisfactory mechanical condition. Each commercial vehicle registered to Valard will have a vehicle file that includes the following information:

1. Identification of the vehicle, including

• a unit number, the manufacturer’s serial number or a similar identifying mark,

• the make of the vehicle, and

• the year of manufacture.

2. A record of the inspection of the vehicle under the Vehicle Inspection Regulation (AR 211/2006), and repairs, lubrication and maintenance for the vehicle, including

• the nature of the inspection or work performed on the vehicle, and

• the date on which that inspection or work took place and the odometer or hubometer reading on the vehicle at that time;

3. Notices of defect received from the vehicle manufacturer and the corrective work done on the vehicle in relation to those notices;

4. Trip inspection reports prepared under Section 12 of Alberta’s Commercial Vehicle Safety Regulation.

5. Unless otherwise authorized through a permit, we shall maintain the records at our principal place of business.

Valard will ensure that the records required to be maintained under this section are true, accurate and legible.

RECORD RETENTION

Valard Construction will retain all trip inspection reports for the month they are created and an additional 6 months. The other records identified above will be retained for the year they are created and an additional 4 years. All records will be kept for 6 months after the vehicle is retired or disposed of. These records may be maintained in electronic or hardcopy format as long as they can be readily produced to a peace officer upon request.

The person conducting the trip inspection will certify that any major defect has been repaired/corrected or certifies on the report that repair/correction is unnecessary; a driver shall not drive or be permitted to drive until all major defects have been repaired.

Page 32 of 33



DECLARATION OF COMMITMENT TO TRANSPORTATION SAFETY X I/we, the company’s authorized representative(s), are committed to ensuring all employees are aware

of and dedicated to following transportation safety laws as outlined in this safety and maintenance program. I/we are committed to ensuring the designated safety officer has the necessary resources to ensure the implementation of this program.

X I/we acknowledge that an audit may be conducted on our operations at any time to measure our compliance to regulatory requirements. Should deficiencies be identified during the audit, I/we understand that disciplinary actions may be taken including but not limited to, the issuance of administrative penalties and the Safety Fitness Rating downgraded.

X I/we certify that the information disclosed is true and accurate. I/we acknowledge that providing false or

misleading information may result in the suspension or cancellation of the Safety Fitness Certificate and/or vehicle registration. I/we acknowledge that providing false or misleading information may also results in being charged with offence(s) or administrative penalty(s).

This declaration must include individuals named on the vehicle registration. When vehicle registration shows a corporate, society or organization name, then the declaration must include the owner(s), manager(s), or director(s).

Name: Andrew Felczak

Position in Company: Executive Vice President Health and Safety

Phone: 780-436-9876

Email: [email protected]

Date: July 25, 2016

DESIGNATION OF SAFETY OFFICER The person responsible for maintaining and implementing this safety and maintenance program is: Name: Andrew Felczak

Position in Company: Executive Vice President Health and Safety

Phone: 780-436-9876

Email: [email protected]

Date: July 25, 2016

Page 33 of 33

Page 1 of 14

Document Description Environmental Work

Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.014

Date: Sept. 23, 2003 Revision: 5 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Mar. 12. 2015

26.014 ENVIRONMENTAL WORK PRACTICES Right of Way Construction Guidelines Construction traffic shall be restricted to the right-of-way and approved extra workspace only. If possible, traffic shall be confined to a single trail along the right-of-way. Construction vehicles and equipment shall be operated at speeds safe for existing roads and traffic conditions. Waste generation shall be determined prior to work commencing and appropriate type of waste containment shall be arranged. Any additional waste that may be generated and is not the normal waste such as: cut-off sections of pole pieces, pieces of crossarm, small pieces of wire, empty wire rolls, and discarded wire covers shall be evaluated and the appropriate number of waste bins be provided on site. This is the responsibility of the Project Manager and site Construction Manager. The bins shall be clearly labeled as to what is to be placed in each one. The superintendent shall be responsible to insure bins are emptied when they are full and arrange for a local waste disposal firm to pick up the waste when required. On projects where Valard is not the Prime and the client requests that they be notified of the type of waste generated, the client may have a process in place for disposal. Valard will adhere to the project’s waste protocol. Valard Construction shall ensure that access through sensitive areas (i.e., critical wildlife habitat, erodible soils, recreational sites, historical sites, etc.) is pre-planned in advance of construction initiation. The number of vehicles and trips in these areas shall be minimized to reduce or eliminate potential impacts. All surface disturbances shall be kept to a minimum. Every effort shall be made to preserve topsoil, and prevent topsoil/subsoil mixing and compaction, loss of organic matter, and rutting. During the onset of a winter thaw, wet weather, and other saturated soil conditions, the Field Representative shall have the authority to suspend equipment travel on the right-of-way to reduce or eliminate impacts. Equipment travel shall resume only after soils are sufficiently dry or frozen. Vehicle travel in areas susceptible to poor ground frost conditions or general unstable soil shall be closely monitored. Re-routes may be necessary to avoid low frost areas or employ alternate construction procedures such as swamp mats, log corduroy, rip-rap, or filter fabric. Approval of all re-routes shall be obtained from Valard Construction. All seasonal road bans shall be respected when and where applicable.

Notification of Concerned Parties

1. Prior to commencement of right-of-way preparation, and construction activities, a list of contacts within the appropriate agencies shall be made available to Valard Construction.

2. Valard Construction shall inform the appropriate government agencies of the proposed project schedule, and any changes to the schedule as soon as possible (i.e., 48 hours prior to any changes).

3. Leaseholders, owners of registered trap lines, and individuals with similar land ownership responsibilities shall be notified by registered letter followed by a personal contact by a Valard employee in advance of right-of-way preparation.

Page 2 of 14




4. Valard Construction shall notify authorities having jurisdiction over existing rights-of-way of proposed project activities.

5. Valard Construction shall notify the landowner/leaseholder of any damage to crops, property, irrigation facilities, contamination or degradation of water, or injury to livestock caused by the construction activities

Brushing and Clearing All efforts shall be made to minimize surface disturbance, soil compaction, and loss of topsoil. In sensitive areas (i.e., steep side slopes, wet muskeg), protection measures shall be employed to minimize these impacts. The terrain shall be graded only where necessary and at the approval of the appropriate governing agency. Changes in grade, excessive cuts, and fills along the right-of-way shall be minimized as much as possible. Graded materials shall not be pushed or stored into treed areas. Original contours and surface drainage shall be re-established following construction. Vegetation removal shall be restricted to areas indicated and delineated by flagging and/or staking. Trees shall be felled in such a way that they fall within the clearing boundaries. “Leaners” or felled trees which inadvertently fall into adjacent undisturbed vegetation shall be either bucked into manageable lengths then removed to disposal areas on the right-of-way, or flattened to the ground and left. Whichever method results in the least damage to the surrounding vegetation as instructed by the Forest Service Officer (or an Environmental Supervisor) will be used. Merchantable stands of coniferous (i.e., lodgepole pine, white and black spruce), and deciduous (i.e., aspen) trees shall be salvaged as instructed. Merchantable timber shall be salvaged using chainsaws, feller bunchers, or other approved equipment. Locations of merchantable timber are subject to ground-truthing and confirmation by the landowner. All merchantable timber shall be cut at ground level with no more than a 15-cm high stump. All non-merchantable timber and brush shall be machine cleared with a bulldozer, or KG blade equipped tractors to achieve clean breaks and restrict root grubbing. Narrow residual strips of forest cover (i.e., <l0m) shall not be left standing between existing rights-of-way and parallel easements. All merchantable timber shall be limbed, topped, and decked with the butt ends facing the same direction adjacent and perpendicular to the proposed access where possible at approved decking sites. Decking sites shall be located at appropriate intervals depending on timber quantity. Decking sites shall be located on existing clearings wherever possible, or shall be cleared immediately adjacent to the right-of-way. These decking sites shall not be located within l00m of any watercourse or water body, and shall be well back from the crest on any hill requiring grading. It is permissible that a centrally located access trail be stumped (i.e., root grubbed) and graded as required. However, general root grubbing shall be avoided, particularly within 2 meters of the edge of the right-of-way in forested areas to prevent root damage to adjacent trees. Unnecessary traffic, dumping, and storage of materials over the root zone shall be avoided.

Page 3 of 14




Those sections of the right-of-way subjected to root grabbing shall be stripped of the organic "duff' layer (i.e., leaf litter, root fragments, sod, burn pile residue) remaining on the right-of-way following root grubbing to a depth of 15 centimeters. This material shall be windrowed at both edges of the right-of-way. During clean up, this material shall be redistributed across the right-of-way to supplement the organic content of the remaining soil. Where windrowed snow and/or "duff" material along the edges of the right-of-way exceeds 75 centimeters in height, 10 meter gaps shall be left at approximately 400 meter intervals to facilitate movement of wildlife across the right-of-way. If requested by the trapper, gaps shall also be left at all crossings of active trapper's trails. Slash (i.e., stumps, tops, and limbs of merchantable timber, and all non-merchantable timber) shall be piled, and burned with the exception of rollback requirements as identified by the landowner. Slash shall be pushed into piles off to one side of the centerline with brush rake attachments to minimize disturbance to ground cover. A 5 meter minimum clearance to the edge of the clearing shall be maintained. Windrowed piles shall not exceed 20 meters in length and shall be separated by 5 meter firebreaks. Piles shall not be located within 50 meters of any watercourse or water body.

Water Crossings

Where adequate ice cover has developed at major water crossings, an ice bridge shall be installed by Valard Construction to support equipment travel, and minimize disturbance to the banks and bed of the watercourse. The bridge shall be constructed of water drawn from the stream and/or 'clean" snow ploughed in from adjacent areas. Portable bridges may be installed as an option to natural ice bridges at the approval of Valard Construction. Flow shall not be interrupted or diverted on any watercourse during construction. All trees shall be felled away from a watercourse. Trees and debris inadvertently deposited within the high water mark of any watercourse shall be removed immediately in such a manner as to minimize disturbance to the bed and bank. Logs shall not be skidded across any watercourse, unless an adequate ice/snow or portable bridge is in place. Burn areas shall not be located within 50 meters of any watercourse. Slash shall be piled and retained for use in erosion control on steep and moderate slopes. Locations shall be determined and confirmed through ground-truthing by Valard Construction and the landowner. Trees shall be hand cleared with chainsaws to minimize terrain disturbance, and to preserve compatible trees (e.g., low growing spruce and pine), and shrubs while removing incompatible trees (e.g., aspen and birch) within 30m of any watercourse or water body, or on steep and moderate slopes at the discretion of Valard Construction. Under no circumstances shall trees be “walked" down using tracked dozers or any other heavy equipment. Low shrubs and ground cover shall be left intact.

Page 4 of 14




Table 8-1. Watercourse Vehicle Crossing Methods

(Adapted from Alberta Forestry, Lands, and Wildlife 1989)

WATERCOURSE <6 m Wide 6-15 m Wide >15 m Wide TYPE <0.6 TV' Deep 0.6-1.0 m Deep >1.0 m Deep Environmental Sensitivity L M H L M H L M H CROSSING METHOD

Ford X

Logfill X X

Culvert (X) X X X Ice Bridge (X) X X X X X X X X Temporary Bridge (X) (X) X (X) (X) X X X X Existing Bridge (X) (X) X (X) (X) X X X X NOTES:

This table is intended as a general guide to environmentally acceptable crossing methods in the absence of specific conditions of regulatory approval. Other factors to be considered include stability and composition of the bed and bank, bank height, water velocity, financial cost, and engineering requirements.

X Denotes the method is environmentally acceptable. (X) Denotes the method is environmentally acceptable, however, it is not practical in most cases, considering lower environmental sensitivity and higher construction costs

Environmental sensitivity levels are defined as follows. Be aware that the Alberta Forest Service Officer and/or the Fish and Wildlife Division may further define specific environmental sensitivities. LOW (L)

No downstream water users. Sport fish absent or present in low numbers during non-sensitive period.

MODERATE (M)

Downstream water users.

Warm water sport fish habitat within zone of potential crossing, related sedimentation. HIGH (H)

Downstream water users cannot tolerate increased sediment load.

Cold water sport fish habitat within zone of potential crossing, related sedimentation. A brush screen shall be retained approximately 3 meters high and 25 meters deep on both sides of road and trail crossings. Compatible trees (e.g., low growing spruce and pine), and shrubs shall be preserved while removing incompatible trees (e.g., aspen and

Page 5 of 14




birch), and all danger trees as defined by Valard Construction specifications. A brush strip (i.e., a minimum of 5 meters above the high water mark) shall be retained at water crossings at both sides of the watercourse as indicated on the alignment sheets. The only vegetation to be removed shall be at the vehicle crossing, if one is required. If grading is required at these sites, grading of the bank shall be directed away from the watercourse to prevent introduction of debris and spoil into the channel. Compatible trees (e.g., low growing spruce and pine), and shrubs shall be preserved while removing incompatible trees (e.g., aspen and birch). Banks along watercourses and water bodies shall be restored to stable contours immediately following construction. Following construction, ice bridges shall be scraped clean of spoil inadvertently introduced onto the ice, and physically broken up to prevent ice jams and subsequent flooding during spring break up. Portable bridges shall be removed and the banks restored to pre-construction conditions. Log cribbing may be required, and shall be installed during clean up to rehabilitate graded portions of the banks of watercourses and water bodies at the discretion of Valard Construction. Table 8-1 shall be followed as a general guide for selection of methods for vehicle crossing of all watercourses. Should excessive flows in watercourses occur due to winter thaw or wet weather, vehicular crossings shall be postponed until flows drop to acceptable levels as determined by Valard Construction. Flagging Right-of-way boundaries, and any extra workspaces shall be clearly flagged and/or staked prior to construction. Stakes and flags shall be placed at intervals not exceeding l00 meters. All operations shall be confined to these work limits. All flagging/stakes shall be maintained for the duration of the construction period. Merchantable timber stands to be salvaged shall be clearly flagged and/or staked. All compatible vegetation patches shall be clearly flagged and/or staked so that they may be retained without endangering line integrity. All known archaeological sites adjacent to, or in the proximity of the right-of-way shall be fenced to avoid inadvertent damage during construction. Fences shall also be installed. WASTE MANAGEMENT Waste management is regulated by provincial and federal statutory authorities. Valard’s waste management in offices, shops, and field areas will comply with all relevant legislation, regulation and policies, permits and codes and orders including regional waste management plans, landfill and recycling guidelines applicable. Valard employees and contractors will be trained in the waste disposal requirements at each site. Office Operations Office operations shall ensure that a waste paper recycling program has been implemented whenever possible. It shall be the responsibility of each respective Office Manager (or designate) to ensure a recycling program has been established. Further, each office Manager or designate shall ensure that office staff is participating in the recycling program.

Page 6 of 14




Field and Maintenance Shop Operations Various forms of waste are produced in the normal course of field and maintenance shop operations. Due to chemical composition, physical and/or biological properties, wastes are generally categorized as Hazardous or Non-Hazardous. All waste generated at projects/shops that can be classified as hazardous must be handled, stored, and disposed of in accordance with local government regulations. It is the responsibility of the Project Superintendent (worksites) or Shop Manager (Shops) to ensure compliance with all applicable legislation including cleanup and disposal. On construction sites the superintendent shall be responsible to insure that all waste is stored and disposed as per each locales waste disposal legislation/ regulations/ Bylaws. Non-hazardous wastes generated during construction, and maintenance must be recycled, whenever possible. It is the responsibility of the Project Superintendent to ensure a system of reusing or recycling of materials is implemented, whenever possible. Waste and Hazardous Material Handling and Disposal (Pollution Control): Equipment maintenance shall be restricted to designated and approved areas to prevent contamination of soils by accidental spills of toxic or hazardous materials (i.e., as defined in the Glossary of Terms). In order to prevent any spills, all hazardous, toxic, contaminated, and dangerous wastes shall be stored, transported, and disposed of in conformance with the Hazardous Chemicals Act, WHMIS guidelines, and Hazardous Waste Regulations for the Province/Territory and Federal Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act. All Hazardous materials shall be stored in a manner to eliminate the potential for spills. This can be by using spill containments under all approved storage devices. WHMIS information shall be made available to all employees. Employees who may be required to store or work with hazardous material shall be trained in its storage and handling requirements. Fuelling and servicing of equipment shall be prohibited within 100 meters of the high water mark of any watercourse or standing water body. The right-of-way shall be maintained in an orderly condition, free of accumulated waste products, debris, and litter. All waste shall be kept in an approved container, such as storage in spill proof container and approved facility. All large drums shall be returned to the vendor, or washed, crushed, and disposed of at an approved facility. Due care and attention shall be taken to prevent accidental spills of residual contents during transport and disposal. During disposal of any waste workers shall wear appropriate gloves, protective clothing including face shield if material is a liquid and not contained in a sealed container. Where material is a solid, gloves must be worn to protect hands from any abrasions or contamination. Material that is a controlled product the MSDS must be reviewed and the identified PPE must be worn. Hazardous material such as used paint, batteries, oil, and cleaning agents, and water contaminated by freezing depressants will be collected and recycled or disposed of as hazardous waste. Construction debris and waste materials shall not be buried on-site, or burned in open barrels. Appropriate waste collection containers and facilities will available where hazardous materials are stored. Emissions from equipment shall be controlled as required by Environment Canada. The washing of construction equipment in watercourses or water bodies shall be strictly

Page 7 of 14




prohibited. Contaminated soils will be managed according to their concentration of contaminates and there leach-ability. Appropriate disposal operations will be determined in consultation with the relevant environmental protection authorities. Sanitary Waste

The contractor will provide portable sanitary waste facilities at construction sites. If required, sanitary waste will be removed from the construction sites and disposed of in a manner approved by the relevant regional local municipality Solid Waste

Solid waste will be transported to a landfill site, disposal or transfer station, or recycling center approved by the applicable district. Where an incinerator is available and approved, non-recyclable solid waste may be incinerated. All construction material, including survey material, will be removed from the work site and right of way. Woody debris from the right of way preparation will be disposed of according to applicable permits, regulations or landowner directions. In certain cases where offsite disposal or burning is not acceptable, woody material will be chipped and left on site. Any debris burning will be subject to permits and the requirements of the Provincial Waste Management Act / Open Burning Smoke Control Regulation, The Forest and Range Act, and / or any applicable regional, municipal or improvement district bylaw. Erosion and Sediment Control

The following meetings shall beheld: 1. Pre-job meetings must be held to plan for the least amount of disturbance as

necessary and what control measures need to be put into place. 2. Job planning shall be conducted during construction to ensure that erosion and

sediment control measures are in place and the procedures are being followed. 3. Post-job planning shall be in place to ensure that temporary controls have been

removed and that all potential problem areas have been addressed.

When clearing, stripping land, and excavating during construction activities, the schedule must include a plan to minimize the amount of time that the bare soil is left exposed and to minimize the extent of soil exposure at any one time in order to reduce the amount of erosion and sedimentation that occurs. Whenever the soil is disturbed, Valard shall utilize erosion control devices to prevent erosion and ultimately to help prevent sedimentation. The following devices can provide erosion control:

Temporary seeding Temporary mulching Permanent sodding

Erosion control blankets

Vegetative buffer strips

Page 8 of 14




Entry and exit points for any water runoff must be controlled with the use of sediment control devices to prevent sediment from entering any waterways. Commonly, storm drain inlets are protected to prevent sediment from entering the storm drain. Types sediment control devices that are approved:

Silt fencing Straw bales Storm inlet traps

Sediment ponds

Rock check dams

Intercepting berms.

Valard will insure that all erosion and sediment control devices shall be inspected and a maintain program is to be in place. A set inspection schedule will be established to view all areas where erosion and sediment control devices are used as well as all disturbed areas. Any erosion or sediment control devices that are damaged or deficient during the inspection shall be corrected as soon as possible. Maintenance must also include removing semidation to prevent a breakthrough. All employees who are responsible for erosion and sediment control devices must be trained and be competent in the design, installation, and maintenance of the devices. Wastewater Handling and storage Valard will train all employees Before there is any discharge of wastewater the content must be known If the contents of the wastewater are hazardous (toxic, corrosive, flammable, etc.), the wastewater needs to be disposed of in a facility authorized to dispose of hazardous waste. When working for a client Valard will coordinate with the client to ensure proper disposal of wastewater. Valard will insure ensure the client is aware of how wastewater is disposed of to ensure compliance with applicable permits. Valard will train all workers involved in the handling and disposal of wastewater prior to being permitted to do these tasks. EMERGENCY PROCEDURES AND CONTINGENCY PLANS

1. Contingency plans shall be developed prior to the initiation of construction activities. Construction personnel shall be made aware of their required response to potential problems, and to act quickly as required.

2. A spill contingency plan shall be developed and adopted by Valard. This plan shall contain concise information to assist the operating personnel in the event of a spill or other emergency. The plan shall include the following:

A definition of emergencies covered by the plan. Procedures for alerting company personnel and affected outside parties. Clear definitions of the responsibilities of everyone involved. Guidelines for reaction and control, including shut down procedures, spill

containment, watercourse protection, etc. as required.

Page 9 of 14




Methods for initiating immediate corrective action including spill control and containment, restoration and rehabilitation of the affect resource.

Guidelines for protection of the operating personnel and the general public.

Guidelines for post-restorative inspection. Guidelines for the public relations and the dissemination of information. A telephone contacts summary.

3. When a spill of construction fluids occurs, Valard shall ensure that the contingency plan be activated as quickly as possible to contain, and clean up a spill. All construction vehicles must have access to an industrial response kit. However, as a minimum requirement, all service vehicles shall carry a minimum of 10 kilograms of commercial adsorbent material for spill clean up (i.e., Matasorb; tiger tails TM, & Sorbex).

4. In the event of a “typical" spill (i.e., as defined in the Glossary of Terms), response

steps as outlined in the spill contingency plan should include, but are not limited to:

i) Spill containment: Containment of the spill may be achieved by damming road ditches down-slope of the spill. Spills must be contained in a road ditch, or other depression area until they may be effectively cleaned up. Under NO circumstances shall spills be allowed to mix with local water sources.

ii) Spill recovery: All fluids shall be pumped immediately into a holding tank, or facility, then transported to an approved disposal site. Unconsolidated solvent material must be applied liberally over the contaminated area, on contaminated road and ground surfaces, and then salvaged and disposed of at an approved facility or site. Burning of fuel spills can be an effective recovery method in some circumstances. However, this method is site specific and use of this method shall be approved at the discretion of Valard Construction.

iii) Disposal of Contaminated Soil: All contaminated soil and vegetation shall

be excavated, and disposed of at an approved location. Replacement soil and topsoil may have to be transported to the site as a rehabilitation measure. This will be at the discretion of Valard Construction.

iv) Notification of Spill: The proper authorities (i.e., government agencies and

leaseholders) shall be briefed with respect to the location, size, and contents of the spill. Spill response measures shall be implemented immediately. Valard Construction shall take all responsibility for reasonable satisfactory cleanup in consultation with the property owner of the affected property.

A fire contingency plan shall be developed and adopted by the Contractor. This fire contingency plan shall provide for an effective fire observation and detection system, and must ensure that the construction crews have the necessary fire fighting equipment on hand which is capable of controlling any fire that may occur as a result of their activities. In the event of accidental fire, the fire contingency plan shall be activated. The Contractor shall ensure the risk of accidental fire is reduced by making all personnel

Page 10 of 14




aware of proper disposal of cigarette butts, and by forbidding any fires on the right-of-way when the fire hazard is high or extreme. In addition, the Contractor shall ensure that all equipment has spark arrestors installed, exhaust and engine systems are in good repair, and free of dried grass and other combustibles. All fires shall be reported immediately to the Forest Service Officer, landowner, or leaseholder, and upon their request, the Contractor shall make all equipment and personnel available to control the fire.

The following numbers are for reporting Environmental spills and are only accessible in the applicable province. Alberta: 1-800-222-6514 British Columbia 1-800-663-3456 Saskatchewan 1-800-667-7525 Manitoba 1-204-994-4888 Ontario 1-800-268-6060 Yukon 1-867-667-7244 NWT/Nunavut 1-867-920-8130 Newfoundland 1-800-563-9089

HISTORICAL RESOURCES 1. The collection and disturbance of artifacts of possible historic significance by project

employees is strictly prohibited. 2. Archaeological or historical artifacts include but are not limited to bones, skeletons,

graves, effigies, fossils, and lithics. 3. Should artifacts of obvious historic significance be uncovered during construction,

Valard Construction shall ensure that all operations in the immediate vicinity of the find (i.e., within 50 meters) be suspended until a Culture archaeologist has reviewed the site, and approved the continuation of construction.

CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE Construction, including clearing and brushing may be restricted or prohibited at certain times of the year in certain areas in order to minimize terrain disturbance, and to ensure traffic on the right-of-way is not impeded, and environmental impacts remain minimal. Exemptions to timing constraints shall be allowed only when the Contractor can clearly demonstrate that no environmental impacts will occur as a result, and these exemptions are authorized and approved by Valard Construction. The construction schedule shall make provisions to minimize construction activity in proximity to all watercourses during the ice-free season to reduce or eliminate surface disturbance, and major impacts on aquatic habitats. FISH AND WILDLIFE RESOURCES

1. All project related road-kills, potentially dangerous wildlife encounters, and/or "nuisance animals" shall be reported to the local Fish and Wildlife Division personnel as soon as possible.

2. Construction personnel shall not be permitted to have dogs or firearms on the right-of-way. In addition, recreational use of all-terrain vehicles or snowmobiles

Page 11 of 14




on the right-of-way shall be strictly prohibited at all times. 3. The Contractor shall not intentionally disturb wildlife in the vicinity of the project.

The feeding and harassment of wildlife shall he strictly prohibited. 4. Wherever possible, clearing activities shall be undertaken in a fashion that

minimizes damage to raptor tree nests where Fish and Wildlife personnel identify them. The Field Representative, and the Fish and Wildlife personnel to mitigate potential impacts on raptor nests shall develop appropriate protective measures jointly.

5. Local Fish and Wildlife personnel shall be notified if construction activities will damage beaver dams, ponds, and lodges, muskrat push-ups, or other aquatic fur bearing habitats.

Employee Responsibilities 1) Assess the situation to determine to source and the substance for immediate

danger. 2) Stop and control the spill if possible 3) Report the spill immediately to your supervisor. (i.e. ATCO, Aquila, Enmax) 4) Report spill to Valard Construction Head Office. 5) Begin cleanup of site.

If for any reason there are questions or uncertainty, seek assistance from your supervisor, or department contact.

Once spills have been reported to utility be sure to fill out the appropriate paper work. Oil spills involving Hydraulic oil, Gasoline, or Antifreeze.

1) Assess the situation and take appropriate measures to contain the spill. 2) Use absorbal rags and floor dry to clean up the spill. 3) Contact your supervisor to report spill and receive further instructions. 4) If spill is less than 5 litres report it to Valard Construction. 5) If spill is larger than 5 litres the Alberta Environmental Protection Branch must

be notified. On spills of this size it is very important to contain the spill as soon as possible.

6) Complete the environmental spill release form and fax to the office and to Environment Canada

The following list is for reportable quantities for common substances.

Oils (hydraulic, used, non PCB). >/- 5 litres Gasoline, Diesel, or Glycol >/- 50 litres PCBs > 50 ppm

SPILL KITS

5 GALLON PAIL

15 LBS QUALISORB SUPER ABSORBANT 10 - 24” x 24” ABSORBANT PADS 2 PAIRS OF RUBBER GLOVES 2 - 3M 8210 RESPIRATORS

Page 12 of 14




CAN ROSS SPILL KIT GZ – PCOD DRY PLUGGING COMPOUND GZ – PCOM PRE-MIXED PLUGGING COMPOUND 2 PAIRS OF RUBBER GLOVES 10’ OB-210 LIQUITROL 1 – 16” x 16” OB-4 PAD 3 – THICK PLASTIC BAGS

Page 13 of 14




GLOSSARY OF TERMS DEFINITIONS

Brushing- A silvicultural technique to remove brush and weed species that compete with seedlings for sunlight, water, and soil nutrients.

Brush Strip- A strip of land (often including undisturbed or brush screen vegetation) where disturbance is not allowed or is closely monitored to preserve or enhance aesthetic and other qualities along or adjacent to roads) trails, watercourses, and recreation sites

Coniferous- Cone bearing trees having needles or scale-like leaves, usually evergreen, and producing wood known commercially as “softwoods”.

Critical Wildlife Habitat- An area or region that is seasonally important to the life cycle of the animal inhabiting that area.

Crown Land- Land that is owned by the Crown, or Province.

Cutbank- The excavated bank from a ditch line to the top of the undisturbed slope of a road.

Deciduous-Term applied to trees, commonly broadleaf, that usually shed their leaves annually. Also known commercially as 'hardwoods'.

Dominant- Trees with crowns extending above the general level of the canopy and receiving full light from above and partly from the side; taller than the average trees in the stand with crowns well developed.

Flagging tape- Colored plastic tape which comes in rolls and is used to mark (flag) boundaries or identify certain trees or objects.

Ground trothing- A procedure employed to confirm and verify that environmental conditions in the field match conditions determined during office studies. This is often used when identifying vegetation communities and/or terrain features from aerial photographs versus the “real world”.

Log cribbing- A wall constructed of logs that is anchored and secured into the ground to stabilize the banks along a watercourse or water body to prevent erosion.

Merchantable timber - A tree or stand that has attained sufficient size, timber quality and/or volume to make it suitable for harvesting.

Mitigative- Measures Procedural, location, timing constraints, and methods employed to address project related impacts. Mitigative measures can address both positive and negative impacts.

Microclimate- Generally the climate of small areas, especially insofar as this differs significantly from the general climate of the region.

Right-of-way- The strip of land over which a power line, railway, road, etc. extends.

Slash- The residue left on the ground after felling, including unused logs) uprooted stumps, broken tops, etc.

Spill- The release of dangerous goods in quantities greater than those specified in the Dangerous Goods Compliance Guidelines and which represent a danger to health, life, property, and the environment.

Page 14 of 14




Understory- That portion of the trees or other vegetation in a forest stand below the main canopy level. Hazardous Waste- Those wastes that are potentially hazardous to human health and/or the environment due to their nature and quantity, and require special handling. Non-Hazardous Waste- Any waste not regulated by the Federal Transportation of Goods Regulations Waste Management- Programs that lead to the Reduction, Reuse, Recycling, of all wastes. All environmentally hazardous wastes generated by our operations shall be disposed of at government-approved facilities.

Page 1 of 2

Document Description Use of Compressed Air Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.017


26.017 USE OF COMPRESSED AIR The following are the minimum required practices to be used with compressed air:

Tool and Worker Certification • Users of this equipment must be adequately qualified, suitably trained and with

sufficient experience to use it without supervision, or be under the direct supervision of a worker who is. All pressure vessels must be recertified as per provincial legislation, this test must be done as a minimum every 10 years.

Personal Protective Equipment Required • Hard Hat • Safety Glasses • Safety Boots • Hearing protection, depends on the equipment being powered by the

compressed air • Metatarsal protection (if using any equipment that breaks concrete) • Face shields may also be required

Use and Maintenance • Compressed air must not be used to blow foreign substances from any worker's

clothes. • Ensure that the air pressure has been turned off and the line pressure relieved

before disconnecting the hose or changing tools. • All hose connectors must be of the quick disconnect pressure release type with a

"safety chain/cable". • Hoses must be checked on a regular basis for cuts, bulges, or other damage.

Ensure that defective hoses are repaired or replaced. • A proper pressure regulator and relief device must be in the system to ensure

that correct desired pressures are maintained. • The correct air supply hoses must be used for the tool/equipment being used. • The equipment must be properly maintained according to the manufacturer's

requirements. • Follow manufacturer's general instructions and comply with legislated safety

requirements.


Section 1(1)g Definition “Competent Worker” Section 14(2) Direction of Workers Section 15(1) Worker Training British Columbia Part 2- Application- Section 2.2- General Duties Yukon Act 1 – Definition of “Competent Person” (a)(b)(c) Part 1- General_ Section 1.06- Training of Worker

Page 2 of 2

Document Description Use of Compressed Air Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.017


Saskatchewan Part 1 – Preliminary Matters – Section 2(1)(M) Definition “Competent” Part 1 – Preliminary Matters – Section 19(1)(2)(3)(4) – Training of worker Manitoba Part 1- Definition and General Matters – Definition “Competent” Part 16 – Machines, Tools, and Robots – Section 16.3(a)(b)- Duty to Inform Ontario Part 1 – General- Section 1 – Definition “Competent Worker” (a)(b)(c) NWT

Part 1 – General Safety – Section (9)(10) –Instruction to Workers

Page 1 of 3

Document Description Use of Fire Extinguishers Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.018


26.018 USE OF FIRE EXTINGUISHERS Good Housekeeping is essential in the prevention of fires. Fires can start anywhere and at any time. This is why it is important to know which fire extinguisher to use and how to use it. Workers must be trained in the use of hand held fire extinguishers. Always keep fire extinguishers visible and easy to get at. Fire extinguishers have to be properly maintained to do the job. Where temperature is a factor, ensure that care is taken in selecting the right extinguisher. Fire Extinguishers must be visually checked monthly and recorded on the attached tag. See inspection form in Section 9 of the HS&E Policies Manual. Fire Protection. The following must be addressed prior to commencing any project:

1. All flammable liquids/solids/gases must be stored in an approved container to prevent any type of fire or explosion. The material must be stored a minimum of 30 metres away from any underground shafts, air intakes, combustible engines and any furnaces/burners that have a fire box and require fresh air to operate.

2. Gas and diesel must be stored in an approved container and meet the CSA standard B376-M1980 (R2008) for Gasoline and other Petroleum fuels.

3. All flammable gases must be stored away from compressed Oxygen, and are not to be placed in the same storage area (including outdoor storage). All valves on compressed cylinders must be protected from any possible damage. The valve metal cover must be in place whenever moving or transporting any compressed cylinder. All hoses, fittings, regulators must be kept clean and free of oil or grease. All cylinders must be handled and stored as per the manufacturers recommendations.

4. All internal combustion engines such as compressors, portable lighting plants or generators must be placed in an area preventing providing a source of ignition when located in any possible hazardous area. A hazard assessment must be done to insure that all hazards a re identified and addressed, by either preventing any gases from entering the area, insuring that the exhaust gases temperature is less that the combustion temperature of the local gases. These engines must be equipped with a flame arrestor exhaust system.

5. All motorized equipment including the maintenance shops must be equipped with a 20lb. fire Extinguisher. The fire extinguisher must be mounted in a location, which is easily accessible in case of a fire. The only exception is for Offices ATVs, UTVs and Argos where a 10 lb. fire extinguisher is acceptable (some clients may require a 20 lb.) Client must be asked for their site requirements prior to sending one of these units to their sites.

Page 2 of 3



Types of Fire Common to Construction

Type of Fire

Definition Recommended Extinguishers

Method of Use

Class A Fire Fires involving ordinary

combustibles such are wood, paper, rags and rubbish

Water from a hose, pump type water can or pressurised extinguisher, and soda acid extinguishers. ABC units.

Soak the fire completely including smoking embers. (water) Start at the base of the fire and use a swinging motion from left to right, always keeping the fire in front of you. (ABC)

Class B Fire Fires involving flammable liquids, oils and greases.

ABC units, dry chemical, foam and carbon dioxide extinguishers.

Start at the base of the fire and use a swinging motion from left to right, always keeping the fire in front of you.

Class C Fire Electrical Fires Carbon dioxide and dry chemical (ABC units) extinguishers.

Use short bursts on the fire. When the electrical current is shut off on a Class C fire, it can become a Class A fire if the materials around the electrical fire are ignited.

During the fire season, company vehicles must have fire-fighting equipment on them. This includes shovels pulaskis and water packs. In case of a fire that workers are unable to control, notify the fire department nearest your location, or in the event of a forest fire in Alberta call 310-3473 (310-FIRE) as per Table A (following page)

Page 3 of 3



TABLE “A”

Forest and Prairie Protection Regulations REQUIRED EQUIPMENT FOR FIRE CONTROL

MEN EMPLOYED AT THE SITE OF OPERATIONS

Shovels 1 2 3 4 5 6-10 11-20 21-30 31-40 40+ Backpack with pump 1 1 2 2 3 5 10 15 20 Same Axe/Pulaski

0 0 1 2 3 5 10 15 20 as

31-40 Fire pump 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 increase Fire hose (metres) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 450 450

by Director

Power Saw 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

Regulatory Reference Alberta Act, Section 1(1)g Definition of Competent Worker Act, Section 14(2) Direction of Workers Act, Section 15(1) Worker Training Part 10- Fire and Explosion Hazards – Section 171

British Columbia Part 2- Application- Section 2.2- General Duties Part 4- General Conditions – Section 4.16 – Training

Yukon Act 1 – Definition of “Competent Person” (a)(b)(c) Part 1- General_ Section 1.06- Training of Worker Part 1- General- Section 170(1)(2)(3)(4)- Fire protection

Saskatchewan Part 1 – Preliminary Matters – Section 2(1)(M) Definition “Competent” Part 1 – Preliminary Matters – Section 19(1)(2)(3)(4) – Training of worker Part XXV- Fire and Explosion Hazards- Section 361

Manitoba Part 1- Definition and General Matters – Definition “Competent”

Part 16 – Machines, Tools, and Robots – Section 16.3(a)(b)- Duty to Inform Part 19-Fire and Explosive Hazards- Section 19.2-19.3

Ontario Part 1 – General- Section 1 – Definition “Competent Worker” (a)(b)(c) Part II- General Construction- Section 52-54- Fire Protection

NWT Part 1 – General Safety – Section (9)(10) –Instruction to Workers Part V- Construction and Maintenance – Section 95(1)(5) – Fire Protection

Page 1 of 2

Document Description Use of Cleaning Solvents


26.019 USE OF CLEANING AND FLAMMABLE SOLVENTS

The following are the minimum required practices to be used with these chemicals

Tool and Worker Certification • Users of these chemicals must be adequately qualified, suitably trained and with

sufficient experience to use this tool without supervision, or be under the direct supervision of a worker who is.

Training The following training shall be provided to all workers in the safe handling of flammable and combustible substances prior to performing any work activities. The training shall consist of:

• Safe Handling • Use and storage of the substances • Proper disposal methods • The means of identifying the product, its nature and the potential hazards

Personal Protective Equipment Required

PPE requirements vary greatly from chemical to chemical. Check the MSDS for specific requirements before using. In addition to standard PPE some chemicals require the use of a face shield, monogoggles, protective gloves, protective clothing and aprons, 20 lb. ABC fire extinguisher, rubber boots and/or respiratory protective equipment.

Use • Use non-flammable solvents for general cleaning.

• When flammable liquids are used, make sure that no hot work is permitted in the area.

• When transferring any Flammable/combustible containers must be electrically grounded to each other.

• Store flammable and combustibles in separate designated storage areas.

• Flammable liquids must be stored away from any ignition sources. They must be stored in areas away from substances that may cause a reaction, such as a oxygen cylinder or tank.

• Provide adequate ventilation where all solvents and flammable are being used. • Workers must not enter or remain in a work area if more than 10% of the lower

explosive limit (LEL) of the explosive substance is present in the atmosphere. • Never leave solvents in open tubs or vats - return them to storage drums or tank

that has a means of containment, which prevents any spillage.

• Ensure that proper containers are used for transportation, storage and field use of solvents/flammable.

Page 2 of 2

Document Description Use of Cleaning Solvents


• Waste material contaminated with a solvent, oil, grease, paint, or other flammable substance shall be placed in covered metal containers before disposal and shall not be stored in work areas.

• A 20 lb. ABC Fire Extinguisher must be within reach at all times. The inspection date must be verified that the inspection was performed and the gauge is checked.

Ensure all WHMIS requirements are met.

Regulatory Reference Alberta Act, Section 1(1)g Definition of Competent Worker Act, Section 14(2) Direction of Workers Act, Section 15(1) Worker Training Part 10 -Fire and Explosive Hazards- All Sections Part 29 - WHMIS -All Sections

British Columbia Part 2- Application- Section 2.2- General Duties Part 5- Chemical and Biological Substances – All Sections

Yukon Act 1 – Definition of “Competent Person” (a)(b)(c) Part 1- General Section 1.06- Training of Worker Part 8- Materials and Storage – All Sections Saskatchewan

Part 1 – Preliminary Matters – Section 2(1)(M) Definition “Competent” Part 1 – Preliminary Matters – Section 19(1)(2)(3)(4) – Training of worker Part XXV- Fire and Explosive Hazards – All Sections Part XXII- WHMIS


Part 16 – Machines, Tools, and Robots – Section 16.3(a)(b)- Duty to Inform Part 19- Fire and Explosive Hazards – All Sections Part 35- WHMIS

Ontario Part 1 – General- Section 1 – Definition “Competent Worker” (a)(b)(c) Part II – General Construction – Section 52-58- Fire Safety NWT Part 1 – General Safety – Section (9)(10) –Instruction to Workers Part V- Construction and Maintenance – Section 95(1)(5)

Page 1 of 2

Document Description Use of Elevated Work Platforms/Manlifts Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.020

Date: Sept. 23, 2003 Revision: 3 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: June 10, 2016 26.020 ELEVATING WORK PLATFORMS (MANLIFTS/BUCKETS) The following are the minimum required practices to be used with this equipment

Tool and Worker Certification Users of this equipment must be adequately qualified, suitably trained and with sufficient experience to use it without supervision, or be under the direct supervision of a worker who is. The user must be also trained in Fall Prevention.

Personal Protective Equipment Required • Hard Hat • Safety Glasses • Safety Boots • Harness c/w Lanyard

Use and Maintenance • A manlift device should only be operated by a worker who has been instructed

and trained in the machine’s operation. • Inspection to be done on a daily basis as per manufacturer’s instructions if

defects are found the equipment shall be taken out of service and sent for repairs.

• All workers on manlifts to wear Harnesses & Lanyards at all time and anchored as per manufacturer’s specifications.

• No material is permitted to be tied off to any part of the Manlift. • Manlift devices only to be used on working surfaces for which the machine was

designed. • Manlift devices to be used up to and not exceeding maximum rated working

loads. All loading to be evenly distributed. • No over hanging load to be lifted on a manlift platform. • All equipment is to have alarms and emergency controls. • Do not place makeshift platforms such as boxes or proper access equipment

such as ladders and scaffolds or a manlift platform to gain access to areas above.

• Feet must be placed on the base of the Manlift. Side rails are not to be used to gain reach.

• A manlift shall not be driven in a raised position. • The platform on a manlift device shall not be extended by any means other than

manufacturer’s platform extension devices. • Planks or similar platform materials shall not be used to bridge a gap between

manlift platform and other work areas. • Manlift devices shall not be used in high wind conditions. • Manlift devices shall not be used for pulling, pushing and/or dragging materials. • Manlift devices when not in use are to be turned off in an enclosed work area to

prevent the accumulation of exhaust fumes.

Page 2 of 2

Document Description Use of Elevated Work Platforms/Manlifts Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.020

Date: Sept. 23, 2003 Revision: 3 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: June 10, 2016

Regulatory Reference Alberta Act, Section 1(1)g Definition of Competent Worker Act, Section 14(2) Direction of Workers Act, Section 15(1) Worker Training Part 19 -Powered Motorized Mobile Equipment -All Sections Part 23- Elevated Work Platforms and Aerial Devices- Section 346-347 British Columbia Part 2- Application- Section 2.2- General Duties Part 16- Mobile Equipment – All Sections Part 13- Ladders, Scaffolds and Temporary Work Platforms – Division 5, Section 13.20-13.33 Yukon Act 1 – Definition of “Competent Person” (a)(b)(c) Part 1- General_ Section 1.06- Training of Worker Part 6- Mobile Equipment – All Sections Part 10- Construction and Building Safety – Section 10.53 Saskatchewan Part 1 – Preliminary Matters – Section 2(1)(M) Definition “Competent” Part 1 – Preliminary Matters – Section 19(1)(2)(3)(4) – Training of worker Part XI – Powered Mobile Equipment- All Sections Part XI – Scaffolds, Aerial Devices and Elevated Work Platforms- Section 28.21-28.47 Manitoba

Part 1- Definition and General Matters – Definition “Competent” Part 16 – Machines, Tools, and Robots – Section 16.3(a)(b)- Duty to Inform Part 22- Powered Mobile Equipment Part 28- Scaffolds and Other Elevated Work Platforms – Section 28.21-28.47 Ontario Part 1 – General- Section 1 – Definition “Competent Worker” (a)(b)(c)Part II- General Construction- Sections 93-105 Part II- General Construction – Section 143-149- Elevated Work Platforms NWT Part 1 – General Safety – Section (9)(10) –Instruction to Workers Part V- Construction and Maintenance- Section 200-239 Part V- Construction and Maintenance – Section 269-272 Scaffolds Planks and Platforms

Page 1 of 1

Document Description Electrical Extension Cords Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.021


26.021 ELECTRICAL EXTENSION CORDS

Extension cords can cause serious accidents if used improperly. The following practices are to be followed:

• All electrical cords must be kept in a safe condition.

• Cords that are being used are designed for its intended use.

• Each cord end must be of an approved design and rated for its intended use.

• All electrical extension cords must be designed for external use and rated 16/3.

(Grounded)

• Extension cords to be protected against damage.

• All extension cords to be placed in such away that they will not be a tripping or

falling hazard.

• All extension cords used in hazardous areas or in damp locations to be protected

by an approved ground fault protection.

• All extension cords shall be inspected monthly and prior to each use.

• All frayed, cut or spliced extension cords are to be tagged and removed from

service.

Page 1 of 2

Document Description Use of Combustible Fuels


26.023 HANDLING OF COMBUSTIBLE FUELS Gasoline is made for one purpose: to cause an explosion and thereby release energy for power. If misused, it can cause serious injury or death. The following minimum requirements are to be adhered to.

Tool and Worker Certification Users of these substances must be adequately qualified, suitably trained and with sufficient experience to use them without supervision, or be under the direct supervision of a worker who is.

Personal Protective Equipment Required Minimum protection required for dispensing includes hardhat, safety glasses, impervious gloves and safety boots. Some applications may require the use face shields, aprons, respiratory protection or mono goggles, consult the MSDS Safe Usage

• Fuels must always be kept in a CSA approved container. • All Fuel containers must have a WHMIS workplace label. • Never under any circumstances, use combustible fuels for cleaning purposes • Avoid inhaling vapours. Always use in a well-ventilated area. • Always clean up spills as per the environmental section in this manual. • Never smoke around open combustible fuels. • Never leave any equipment running while refuelling. • Always use ground while refuelling with electric fuel pumps. • Fuel storage areas must be in compliance with Government Regulations and/or

Client’s Safety Program.

Regulatory Reference

Alberta Act, Section 1(1)g Definition of Competent Worker Act, Section 14(2) Direction of Workers Act, Section 15(1) Worker Training Part 10 –Fire and Explosion Hazards- Section 162(1)(2)(3)(4)(5) 163(1)(2)(3) 164 (1) (2)

British Columbia Part 2- Application- Section 2.2- General Duties

Yukon Act 1 – Definition of “Competent Person” (a)(b)(c) Part 1- General_ Section 1.06- Training of Worker Part 8-Materials and Storage – All Sections

Saskatchewan Part 1 – Preliminary Matters – Section 2(1)(M) Definition “Competent”

Page 2 of 2

Document Description Use of Combustible Fuels


Part 1 – Preliminary Matters – Section 19(1)(2)(3)(4) – Training of worker Part XXV- Fire and Explosive Hazards


Part 16 – Machines, Tools, and Robots – Section 16.3(a)(b)- Duty to Inform Part 19- Fire and Explosive Hazards

Ontario Part 1 – General- Section 1 – Definition “Competent Worker” (a)(b)(c)

Part II-General Construction- Section 52-58

NWT Part 1 – General Safety – Section (9)(10) –Instruction to Workers Part V- Construction and Maintenance- Section 95(1)(5)- Fire Protection

Page 1 of 2

Document Description Use of Hand Tools


Date: Sept. 23, 2003 Revision: 4 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Mar. 24, 2016

26.025 USE OF HAND TOOLS The following are the minimum required practices to be used with this equipment Tool and Worker Certification Users of this equipment must be adequately qualified, suitably trained and with sufficient experience to perform the work without supervision, or be under the direct supervision of a worker who is.

Tools used at Elevations: Individuals who are working at heights, either on Power poles/structures or within Manbaskets/RBD buckets or Elevated work platforms must insure that the tools do not fall to the ground. These tools must be either tethered to the equipment or to the worker’s belt to prevent any tool from falling. Following images are an example of tool tethers. See SWP 26.077 Establishing and Maintaining Drop Zones for further information.

Equipment Required

• Hard Hat • Safety Glasses • Safety Boots • Gloves

Use and Maintenance

• Only use hand tools for their intended purpose. Do not for example use screwdrivers as chisels.

• All hand tools must be in good condition. Any hand tools that are unsafe due to damage should be removed from service as per Valard Construction’s Defective Tools/Equipment policy.

• Maintenance records must be kept for all tools, which have been repaired. • Tools, which are struck by hammers, such as chisels or punches should have the

head ground periodically to prevent mushrooming. • Never backup any work with your hand in which the blade can slip and cause

injury. • Always keep all cutting edges sharp, replace or re-sharpen. • When working with tools always place them in a position in which they cannot fall

on others and they do not impose a tripping hazard. • Always store tools in proper containers to avoid damage to tools and injury to

one’s self. • When new hand tools are purchased, each must be evaluated by considering

their ergonomic design. This must be considered during the purchase request.

Page 2 of 2

Document Description Use of Hand Tools


Date: Sept. 23, 2003 Revision: 4 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Mar. 24, 2016

• Never carry hand tools such as chisels and screwdrivers in a pocket; they can cause injury when you bend over or in the event of a fall. When carrying tools protect the cutting edges and carry the tools in such a way that you will not endanger yourself or others.

• All screwdrivers that are to be used on electrical work shall have an insulated handle in perfect shape.

• All power hand tools must be connected to a Ground Fault Circuit interceptor (GFCI)

• Spud (type) wrenches or combination with open-ended wrenches are not to be used to tighten bolts or nuts. A box ended spud wrench or a combination style of tool must be used with the box end used for tightening.

Regulatory Reference: Alberta

Section 1(1)g Definition “Competent Worker” Section 14(2) Direction of Workers Section 15(1) Worker Training


Yukon Act 1 – Definition of “Competent Person” (a)(b)(c) Part 1- General_ Section 1.06- Training of Worker

Saskatchewan Part 1 – Preliminary Matters – Section 2(1)(M) Definition “Competent” Part 1 – Preliminary Matters – Section 19(1)(2)(3)(4) – Training of worker

Manitoba Part 16 – Machines, Tools, and Robots – Section 16.3(a)(b)- Duty to Inform


NWT Part 1 – General Safety – Section (9)(10) –Instruction to Workers

Page 1 of 2

VALARD

Document Description Use of Jack Hammer Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.026


26.026 JACKHAMMER/CHIPPING HAMMER The following are the minimum required practices to be used with this equipment.

Tool and Worker Certification Users of this equipment must be adequately qualified, suitably trained and with sufficient experience to work without supervision, or be under the direct supervision of a worker who is. Personal Protective Equipment Required:

• Hard Hat • Safety Glasses and Face Shield • Safety Boots • Hearing Protection • Metatarsal Protection • Respiratory Protection may be required in some cases

Use and Maintenance The following applies to electric and pneumatic hammers:

• Ensure the area is clear of workers that are unauthorized or do not have the correct PPE.

• The equipment must be properly maintained according to the manufacturer's requirements.

• Follow manufacturer's general instructions and comply with legislated safety requirements

The following applies to pneumatic hammers only:

• Ensure that the air pressure has been turned off and the line pressure relieved before disconnecting the hose or changing tools.

• All hose connectors must be of the quick disconnect pressure release type with a "safety chain/cable". All fittings must be pinned or wired together.

• Hoses must be checked on a regular basis for cuts, bulges, or other damage. Ensure that defective hoses are repaired or replaced.

• A proper pressure regulator and relief device must be in the system to ensure that correct desired pressures are maintained.

• The correct air supply hoses must be used for the tool/equipment being used. Regulatory Reference

Alberta

Section 1(1)g Definition “Competent Worker” Section 14(2) Direction of Workers

Section 15(1) Worker Training


Page 2 of 2

VALARD

Document Description Use of Jack Hammer Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.026




Manitoba Part 1- Definition and General Matters – Definition “Competent” Part 16 – Machines, Tools, and Robots – Section 16.3(a)(b)- Duty to Inform



Page 1 of 3

Document Description Spotters and Signaler Practice

Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.027 Date: Sept. 23, 2003 Revision: 5 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Sept. 7, 2018

26.027 SPOTTERS AND SIGNALERS The employer is responsible to ensure that the traffic is controlled to ensure worker protection. The workers must be visible and / or physically protected from traffic and the following are the minimum required practices for signallers. All other employees must wear a high visibility vest and clothing at all times when working either near a highway/roadway or on any site that Valard is working on. Spotter/Signaller must stand behind a concrete jersey barrier if working on any roadway, if off road then a yellow coloured barricade must be set up.

Tool and Worker Certification Signallers must be adequately qualified, suitably trained and with sufficient experience to perform this work without supervision, or be under the direct supervision of a worker who is. If worker is being a flag person on a highway, he/she must be trained as a Flag person and must wear Hi-Vis outerwear meeting the provincial regulations. If the person is required to spot work or equipment near or travel under energized lines then that person must be a Qualified Utility Worker (journeyman status), as defined in Alberta’s EUC. Code 2007 p. 7. Personal Protective Equipment Required:

• Hard hat • Safety glasses • Safety boots • Reflective vest • Flashlight or other illumination is required after dark • Yellow/Lime Green Reflective outerwear (If Flag person on Highway)

STANDARDS

SPOTTING EQUIPMENT AWAY FROM ENERGIZED LINES/ EQUIPMENT • After completion of Tailboard spotters and signallers will be used as required. • Spotters and signallers must wear appropriate signal vest. • Spotters must be used whenever operating any equipment/vehicle in substations

with 3 metres (10 ft.) of any obstacle or obstruction. • Spotter must insure that they check the area where the equipment/vehicle is to go

and inform the operator of all hazards that are present in the direction of required route or change the route to be used.

• Spotters and signallers must communicate with equipment or vehicle operator using appropriate hand signals. Review of hand signals for operator and signaller/spotter prior to starting work.

• Spotter will watch all activity surrounding the equipment work area. • Before each signal, spotters shall ensure that no hazards exist that endangers any

workers, equipment or property in the work area. • Equipment operator shall move only with instruction from the designated signal

person with the exception of “Emergency Stop” which can be given by any worker.

Page 2 of 3



• Designated signaller/spotter to be in view of and maintain eye contact with operator at all times.

• Designated signaller/spotter must know hand signals. • Designated signaller/spotter must plan an escape route. • Keep at all times, a safe distance away from equipment in the event of an

unexpected rollover. • Copy of Safe Work Practice to be given to equipment operator. • If required, a second spotter will be used. • When spotters are changed the equipment operator is to be notified. • The spotter has the right to stop work at any time if he feels the work area becomes

unsafe. • All workers working in an area where traffic is present barricades and signage must

be in place prior to work commencing. SPOTTING NEAR ENERGIZED LINES • Complete Tailboard and identify the spotter used, operating voltage of energized

line(s) or equipment and appropriate Limits of Approach distances as outlined in Alberta Electrical Utility Code 2007.

• When spotting near energized lines the spotter must be a qualified utility worker.

• Tailboard must contain Limits of Approach distance as specified in the Alberta Electrical Utility Code 2007 table 4.2, column 4, p. 60.

• Both operator of the equipment and Qualified Electrical Worker (QEW) are to know which line is energized including its voltage and height prior to commencing work.

• Spotters must wear a signal vest. • Spotters must communicate with equipment operator using appropriate hand signals.

Review of hand signals for operator and signaller/spotter prior to starting work. • Spotter will watch all activity surrounding the equipment work area. Regulatory Reference

Alberta

Section 1(1) g Definition “Competent Worker” Section 14(2) Direction of Workers Section 15(1) Worker Training British Columbia Part 2- Application- Section 2.2- General Duties Yukon Act 1 – Definition of “Competent Person” (a)(b)(c) Part 1- General_ Section 1.06- Training of Worker

Page 3 of 3



Saskatchewan Part 1 – Preliminary Matters – Section 2(1)(M) Definition “Competent” Part 1 – Preliminary Matters – Section 19(1)(2)(3)(4) – Training of worker Manitoba Part 1- Definition and General Matters – Definition “Competent” Part 16 – Machines, Tools, and Robots – Section 16.3(a)(b)- Duty to Inform Ontario Part 1 – General- Section 1 – Definition “Competent Worker” (a)(b)(c) NWT Part 1 – General Safety – Section (9)(10) –Instruction to Workers

Page 1 of 26

Document Description Fall Prevention Created By: Andy Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.028

Date: Sept. 23, 2003 Revision: 2 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Sept. 20, 2018

26.028 FALL PREVENTION Purpose To establish minimum requirements and guidelines to provide maximum prevention/ protection against falls from elevation and a minimum standard of training necessary to ensure personnel understanding and compliance with the program. Goal Achieve 100% fall prevention/protection for all personnel exposed to potential falls. Responsibility Project management and front line supervision are responsible for supporting and enforcing this program to ensure 100% compliance by all personnel. Workers must wear a full body harness and shock absorbing lanyard system and secured where there is a fall exposure of 10 feet (10’) or more. The Safety Department’s primary responsibilities will be to support the crafts ownership of the program and to assist in any training deemed necessary to ensure personnel have sufficient understanding of the program for successful compliance. At certain worksites Valard’s clients may require that the worker tie off at six feet (6 ft.) A Tailboard is to be given to each person assigned work in elevated areas, or in areas, which present any possibility of falls. Supervisors shall analyze all tasks for their individual fall potential and then ensure that an adequate fall prevention/ protection system, which includes rescue plan to address emergencies prior to any work beginning. Furthermore, supervisors will actively question their employees’ knowledge of the system being utilized, its proper methods of use, and emergency procedures associated with the task. A fall protection plan (see page 23) must be in place prior to using the equipment including a Free Fall Calculation Form (see page 25) Definitions • Anchorage - A secure point of attachment for lifelines, lanyards, or deceleration

devices.

• Valard’s Employee Record Database - Electronic database utilized for storage of all training records.

• Tailboard - which is performed prior to any task being performed. This is to identify any hazards associated with the activity and the controls required to minimize them.

• Buckle - Any device for holding the full body harness closed around the employee’s body.

• Connector - A device, which is used to couple (connect) parts of the personal fall arrest system and positioning device systems together. It may be an independent component of the system, such as a carbineer, or it may be an integral component of the system (such as a buckle or D-ring sewn into a full body harness, or a snap hook spliced or sewn to a lanyard or retractable lifeline).

• Dangerous Equipment - Equipment (such as pickling or galvanizing tanks, degreasing units, machinery, electrical equipment, and other units) that, as a result of form or function, may be hazardous to employees who fall onto or into such equipment.

Page 2 of 26



• Deceleration Device - Any mechanism, such as a rope grab, rip-stitch lanyard, specially woven lanyard, tearing or deforming lanyard, automatic self-retracting lifelines, etc., which serves to dissipate a substantial amount of energy during a fall arrest, or otherwise limit the energy imposed on an employee during fall arrest.

• Deceleration Distance - The additional vertical distance a falling employee travels, excluding the lifeline elongation and free fall distance, before stopping, from the point at which the deceleration device begins to operate. It is measured as the distance between the location of an employee’s full body harness attachment point (D-ring) at the moment of activation (at the onset of fall arrest forces) of the deceleration device during a fall, and the location of that attachment point after the employee comes to a full stop.

• Failure - Load refusal, breakage, or separation of component parts. Load refusal is the point where the ultimate strength is exceeded.

• Freefall - The act of falling before a personal fall protection system begins to apply force to arrest the fall.

• Freefall Distance - The vertical displacement of the fall protection attachment point on the employee’s full body harness between onset of the fall and just before the system begins to apply force to arrest the fall. This distance excludes deceleration distance, and lifeline/lanyard elongation, but includes any deceleration device slide distance or self-retracting lifeline/lanyard extension before they operate and fall arrest forces occur.

• Full Body Harness - Straps which may be secured about the employee in a manner that will distribute the fall arrest forces over at least the thighs, pelvis, waist, chest and shoulders with means for attaching it to other components of a personal fall arrest system.

• Guardrail System - A barrier erected to prevent employees from falling to lower levels.

• Hole - A gap or void four inches (4”) or more in its least dimension, in a floor, roof, or other walking/working surface.

• Lanyard - A flexible line of wire rope or nylon strap which generally has a connector at each end for connecting a full body harness to a deceleration device, lifeline, or anchorage.

• Leading Edge - The edge of a floor, roof, or formwork for a floor or other walking/working surface (such as a deck) which changes location as additional floor, roof, decking, or formwork sections are placed, formed or constructed. A leading edge is considered to be an “unprotected side and edge” during periods when it is not actively and continuously under construction.

• Lifeline - A component consisting of a flexible line for connection to an anchorage at one end to hang vertically (vertical lifeline), or for connection to anchorages at both ends to stretch horizontally (horizontal lifeline), and which serves as a means for connecting other components of a personal fall protection system to the anchorage.

• Low Slope Roof - A roof having a slope less than or equal to 4 in 12 (vertical to horizontal).

Page 3 of 26



• Lower Levels - Those areas or surfaces to which an employee can fall. Such areas or surfaces include, but are not limited to, ground levels, floors, platforms, ramps, runways, excavations, pits, tanks, material, water, equipment, structures, or portions thereof.

• Mechanical Equipment - All motor or human propelled wheeled equipment used for roofing work, except wheelbarrows and mopcarts.

• Opening - A gap or void thirty inches (30”) or more high and eighteen inches (18”) or more wide, in a wall or partition, through which employees can fall to a lower level.

• Personal Fall Protection System - A system used to arrest an employee in a fall from a working level. It consists of anchorage, connectors, a full body harness, and a shock absorbing lanyard and may include a deceleration device, lifeline, or suitable combinations of these.

• Positioning Device System - A body belt or body harness system rigged to allow an employee to be supported on an elevated vertical surface, such as a wall, and work with both hands free while leaning. This system must prevent fall potential of greater than three feet (3’) and be supported with a secured personal fall protection system.

• Primary Fall Prevention - Elimination of fall exposures through use of guardrail systems, aerial lifts, scaffolds or alternate work methods such as pre assembly at ground level.

• Rope Grab - A deceleration device that travels on a lifeline and automatically, by friction, engages the lifeline and locks so as to arrest the fall of an employee. A rope grab usually employs the principle of inertial locking cam/level locking, or both.

• Roof - The exterior surface on the top of a building. This does not include floors or form work, which, because a building has not been completed, temporarily becomes the top surface of a building.

• Roofing Work - The hoisting, storage, application and removal of roofing materials and equipment including related insulation, sheet metal, and vapor barrier work, but not including the construction of the roof deck.

• Secondary Fall Protection - Utilization of fall arrest equipment as a backup to primary fall prevention systems or in the absence of primary fall prevention systems.

• Self-Retracting Lifeline/Lanyard - A deceleration device containing drum wound line, which can be slowly extracted from or retracted onto, the drum under slight tension during normal employee movement, and which, after onset of a fall automatically locks the drum and arrests the fall.

• Snaphook - A connector comprised of a hook-shaped member with a normally closed keeper, or similar arrangement, which may be opened to permit the hook to receive an object and, when released, automatically closes to retain the object. The locking type with a self-closing keeper which remains closed and locked until unlocked and pressed open for connection is the only authorized snaphook. Non locking snap hooks are expressly forbidden for fall prevention/protection purposes.

• Steep Roof - A roof having a slope greater than 4 in 12 (vertical to horizontal).

Page 4 of 26



• Toe board - A low protective barrier (minimum of 6 inches in vertical height from their top edge to the walking/working surface and no more than ¼ inch clearance above the walking/working surface), that will prevent the fall of materials and equipment to lower levels and provide protection from falls to personnel.

• Unprotected Sides and Edges - Any side or edge (except entrances to points of access) of a walking/working surface, e.g., floor, ramp, or runway where there is no wall or guardrail system at least 36 inches high.

• Walking/Working Surface - Any surface, whether vertical or horizontal on which an employee walks or works, including, but not limited to floors, roofs, ramps, bridges, runways, form work and concrete reinforcing steel but not including ladders, vehicles, or trailers, on which employees must be located to perform their duties.

• Warning Line System - A barrier erected on a low pitch roof, to warn employees that they are approaching an unprotected side or edge, and which designates an area in which roofing work may take place without the use of a guardrail, full body harness, or safety net systems to protect employees within that enclosed area.

• Work Area - The portion of a walking/working surface where job duties are being performed.

Tie- Off Requirements: A travel restraint system shall consist of a full body harness with adequate attachment points or a safety belt. The full body harness or safety belt shall be attached by a lifeline or lanyard to a fixed support. A fall arrest system shall consist of a full body harness with adequate attachment points and a lanyard equipped with a shock absorber or similar device. The fall arrest system shall be attached by a lifeline or by the lanyard to an independent fixed support. The fall arrest system shall be arranged so that a worker cannot hit the ground or an object or level below the work. The fall arrest system shall not include a shock absorber if wearing or using one could cause a worker to hit the ground or an object or level below the work. The fall arrest system shall not subject a worker who falls to a peak fall arrest force greater than 8 kilonewtons.

Primary Fall Prevention Systems Primary fall prevention systems are the preferred choice for performing work in elevated areas. These systems provide walking and working surfaces that are free from floor/wall openings and are equipped with standard guardrail systems on all open sides. In most cases, primary fall prevention systems are sufficient fall prevention methods in themselves and do not require the use of additional (secondary) fall protection systems such as harness/lanyard systems. Secondary fall protection systems should only be utilized after all efforts to employ primary fall prevention systems have been exhausted or when being used in concert with primary systems.

Inspections All Harnesses are to be inspected daily by the user who is competent and in addition An annual inspection is to be performed by an qualified employee who is trained in inspecting Fall Arrest Harnesses. A tag shall be attached to the chest strap identifying the last annual Inspection date.

Page 5 of 26



Scaffolding/Temporary Work Platforms Every effort shall be made to ensure all temporary platforms/walkways are equipped with solid decking free of openings and standards guardrail systems.

• Personnel working or traveling on temporary elevated platforms shall wear an approved safety harness/lanyard system at all times.

• Personnel working/traveling on temporary platforms with fall exposure shall secure their lanyards to an anchorage point capable of supporting 5,000 pounds or designed as part of a complete personal fall arrest system which maintains a safety factor of at least two (2).

• Personnel working/traveling on complete temporary platforms, free from deck openings and equipped with standard guardrails are not required to secure their lanyards if they remain within the confines of the temporary platform and guardrail system.

• All temporary platforms shall meet engineering and manufactures specifications, prior to any employee usage of the platform.

• Temporary work platforms shall be inspected daily by designated competent persons prior to use by any personnel. A tag shall be placed on the platform to readily identify the platform as inspected and safe for use.

• Every temporary work platform shall be provided with a safe means of access/egress. Retractable lifelines shall be used while ascending or descending access ladders to temporary work platforms or walkways with a fall hazard greater than ten feet (10’).

Guardrail Systems Guardrail systems are an integral part of many primary fall prevention systems which are to be used whenever practicable and whenever utilized, must be constructed with absolute certainty of integrity and structural soundness. Guardrail systems must meet the following minimum requirements:

• Top rail must be 39 inches + or - 3 inches, above the walking/working surface

• Midrails must be installed at a height midway between the top edge of the guardrail system and the walking/working level.

• Guardrail systems shall be capable of withstanding, without failure, a force of at least 200 pounds applied within 2 inches of the top edge, in any outward or downward direction at any point along the top edge.

• When a 200-pound load is applied to the top handrail it shall not deflect to a height less than 39” above the walking/working level.

• Midrails must be capable of withstanding, without failure, a force of at least 150 pounds applied in any downward or outward direction at any point along the midrail.

• If wire rope is used for top rails, it must be flagged at not more than 6 foot intervals with high visibility material.

Page 6 of 26



Ladders • Permanent caged ladders being used to access complete structures where no fall

exposure exists, may be ascended/descended without wearing a safety harness/lanyard.

• Temporary construction ladders shall extend at least thirty-six inches (36”) above the upper landing being accessed and be secured against displacement.

• Temporary construction ladders and portable ladders (e.g., extension ladders, step ladders, etc.) placed for repeated access/egress to elevations with a fall hazard greater than twelve feet (12’) shall be equipped with retractable lifelines. Personnel ascending or descending these ladders shall secure the retractable lifeline to their safety harness prior to ladder use.

• One time access/egress on a portable ladder does not require the use of a retractable lifeline. The following procedure shall be utilized when a retractable lifeline is not required.

a) Personnel preparing to perform a new work activity must receive a specific Valard Tailboard concerning the use of portable ladders and associated fall protection techniques.

b) Personnel ascending ladders that are not yet secured at the top must have another employee hold the ladder at the bottom until it can be properly secured. This also includes the last trip down after untying the ladder at the top.

c) Upon reaching the elevation where the work is to be performed, the employee shall secure their shock-absorbing lanyard prior to proceeding with the task. The ladder should then be properly secured and the task may begin. When the task is completed, this process should be reversed with the shock-absorbing lanyard being the last protective device to be released prior to descent.

d) Absolutely no objects, tools, or materials are to be carried in hands while ascending/descending ladders.

Covers Covers for holes in floors, roofs, and other walking/working surfaces shall meet the following requirements:

1. Covers located in roadways and vehicular aisles shall be capable of supporting, without failure, at least twice the maximum axle load of the largest vehicle or piece of equipment expected to cross over the cover.

2. All other covers shall be capable of supporting, without failure, at least twice the weight of employees, equipment, and materials that may be imposed on the cover at any one time.

3. All covers shall be secured when installed so as to prevent accidental displacement by the wind, equipment, or employees.

4. All covers shall be marked with the words “HOLE COVER - DO NOT REMOVE” in order to provide adequate warning of the hazard.

Page 7 of 26



5. Only authorized personnel shall be permitted to remove hole covers.

6. Prior to removing covers, the area shall be barricaded to prevent employees from accidentally stepping through an opening.

7. For short duration tasks (single shift), barricade tape may be used to warn employees provided the opening is attended by a monitor at all times. The monitor shall have no other duties.

8. Barricade tape shall be erected a minimum distance of 6 feet from the opening.

Warning Lines Warning line systems are designed to be utilized while performing work on low-slope roofs or flat work areas. The warning line allows employees to readily note when they are approaching an unprotected edge.

a) The warning line shall be erected around all open sides of the work area.

b) When mechanical equipment is not being used, the warning line shall be erected not less than six feet (6’) from the edge.

c) When mechanical equipment is being used, the warning line shall be erected not less than six feet (6’) from the edge which is parallel to the direction of mechanical equipment operation, and not less than ten feet (10’) from the edge which is perpendicular to the direction of mechanical equipment operation.

d) Points of access, material handling areas, storage areas, and hoisting areas shall be attached to the work area by an access path formed by two (2) warning lines.

e) When the path to a point of access is not in use, a rope, wire, chain, or other barricade, equivalent in strength and height to the warning line system, shall be placed across the path at the point where the path intersects the warning line system placed around the work area, or the path shall be offset such that an employee cannot walk directly into the work area.

f) Warning lines shall consist of rope or wire cables, and supporting stanchions erected as follows:

g) The rope or wire cable shall be flagged at not more than 6 feet (6’) intervals with high visibility material.

h) The rope or wire cable shall be rigged and supported in such a way that its lowest point (including sag) is no less than thirty-one inches (31”) from the walking/working surface and its highest point is no more than thirty-nine inches (39”) from the walking/working surface.

i) After being erected, with the rope or wire cable attached, stanchions shall be capable of resisting, without tipping over, a force of at least sixteen pounds (16 lbs.) applied horizontally against the stanchion, thirty inches (30”) above the walking/working surface, perpendicular to the warning line, and in the direction of the floor, roof, or platform edge.

j) The rope or wire cable shall have a minimum tensile strength of five hundred pounds (500 lbs.), and after being attached to the stanchions, shall be capable of supporting, without failure, the loads applied to the stanchions as prescribed in paragraph (C) of this section.

Page 8 of 26



k) The line shall be attached at each stanchion in such a way that pulling on one section of the line between stanchions will not result in slack being taken up in adjacent sections before the stanchion tips over.

Personnel working outside the protection of a warning line system shall be protected by either a personal fall protection system or a safety net system at all times when there is a fall potential of ten feet (10’) or more. A warning line system DOES NOT allow workers to be unprotected from potential fall exposures.

Personnel Restraint Systems Restraint systems are designed to restrain movement so that a fall is not possible. The system must have the capacity to withstand at least 3,000 pounds, or twice the maximum expected force that is needed to restrain the person from exposure to the fall hazard. In determining this force consideration should be given to site specific factors such as, but not limited to, the force generated by a person walking, leaning, or even sliding down a steep roof.

Secondary Fall Protection Systems These systems must be worn and used in the absence of Primary Fall Prevention Systems.

Full Body Harness/Shock Absorbing Lanyards • A full body harness and shock absorbing lanyard system shall be worn and secured

where there is a fall exposure of ten Feet (10) or if required by client or owner may be superseded with their requirements of a 6 ft. or greater fall exposure.

• If the work is located on a permanent structure and no fall potential is created by the work or by the condition of the structure, full body harnesses are not required.

• If the work is located on a complete scaffold where no fall potential is created by the work or the condition of the scaffold, full body harnesses shall be worn but tie off is not required.

• When accessing a complete permanent structure by climbing a permanent caged ladder, a full body harness is not required.

• NOTE: If at any time an employee is forced to reach, or position any part of their body beyond the plane of the structures boundaries (i.e. guardrail system), full body harnesses shall be worn and secured to ensure 100% fall protection.

Shock Absorbing Lanyard

Page 9 of 26



To ensure the integrity of the equipment being used and success of the Fall Prevention/Protection Program, the following shall be strictly adhered to:

• Only full body harnesses/shock absorbing lanyard systems approved by Valard may be used on any project. Personal safety harnesses/lanyard systems are strictly forbidden.

• Lanyards must be of the shock absorbing type when used for fall protection.

• Shock absorbing lanyards shall only be used for fall protection and are never to be used for positioning or material transport.

• The shock-absorbing lanyard shall be secured to the D-ring located on the back of the harness between the shoulder blades.

• The shock absorbing or deceleration device shall be secured adjacent to the harness D-ring.

• D-rings located at the waist may only be used for positioning or with rail-type ladder climbing devices.

• D-rings located on the front of the harness shall only be used for attachment to rail-mounted ladder climbing devices.

• Full body harnesses/shock absorbing lanyards shall be attached to an anchorage point capable of supporting an impact load of 5,000 pounds or twice the potential impact load of the engineered fall protection system.

• Full body harnesses and shock-absorbing lanyards shall be secured to limit potential free-fall distance to 11 Feet (11’) or less.

• When connecting to a metal Sling (dog leash type) with red coating shall have to loops connected to each other with a locking type carabiner to which the Lanyard snap hook is to be connected to. Connecting the snap hook directly to the loops is prohibited.

• Snap hooks attached to shock absorbing lanyards shall be of the double action/locking type design. Simple spring resistant snap hooks shall not be used for fall protection.

• Employees using a full body harness and shock absorbing lanyards shall inspect them for wear, damage and other deterioration prior to each use.

• All full body harnesses and shock absorbing lanyards shall be inspected annually by a designated competent person(s) and completed on the Fall Arrest Inspection Form on Page 22 of this SWP to indicate a current inspection.

• Defective full body harnesses and shock absorbing lanyards shall be tagged “DEFECTIVE - DO NOT USE” and immediately removed from service.

• Full body harnesses and shock absorbing lanyards subjected to impact loading shall be immediately removed from service and shall not be used again for employee protection until inspected and determined by a competent person to be undamaged and suitable for reuse.

Page 10 of 26



Anchorage Points Anchorage Points - The strength of a personnel fall arrest system is based on its being attached to an anchorage system, which does not reduce the strength of the system. The following equipment and structure will not meet the requirements of the OH&S fall protection standard and shall not be used for anchorage points.

a) Screw Pipe

b) Conduit

c) Cable Tray (Use requires engineering approval)

d) Welded Pipe Less Than 2”

e) Wooden Handrails

Positioning Device Systems Work positioning systems are sometimes required for specialized tasks such as installing vertical rebar walls. Personnel utilizing positioning systems must adhere to the following minimum guidelines.

• Personal positioning belts will only be allowed after they have been inspected and found acceptable by the onsite safety representative. A method for readily identifying inspected belts must be developed by the jobsite to ensure all positioning belts in use have been approved.

• Positioning belts of any kind shall not be used as fall protection systems at any time. • Work positioning lanyards are to be attached to D-rings at the waist belt location and

be supported by an appropriate work belt/harness. Positioning lanyards shall not be of the shock absorbing type and shall not be used for fall protection.

• The positioning type lanyard shall limit fall potential to three feet (3’) or less.

• The positioning lanyard must always be backed up by a properly secured shock absorbing fall protection lanyard or retractable lifeline reel.

• While ascending or descending vertical rebar walls, 100% fall protection shall be maintained by utilizing the shock absorbing double lanyard system or retractable lifeline reels.

• Snap hooks on positioning lanyards shall be of the double action/locking type design. Simple spring resistant hooks shall not be used.

• Employees using positioning belts/harnesses and lanyards shall inspect them for wear, damage and other deterioration prior to each use.

• All positioning belts/harnesses and lanyards shall be inspected at least monthly by a designated competent persons(s) and subsequently color-coded or tagged to indicate a current inspection.

• Defective positioning belts/harnesses and lanyards shall be tagged “DEFECTIVE - DO NOT USE” and immediately removed from service.

• Positioning devices shall be secured to an anchorage capable of supporting at least twice the potential impact load of an employee’s fall or 3,000 pounds, whichever is greater.

Page 11 of 26



Lifeline Systems Lifeline systems are points of attachment for fall protection lanyards and harnesses. Lifelines may be mounted either vertically or horizontally and are designed to provide fall protection for personnel working in elevated areas.

• Lifelines shall not be used for any other purpose than fall protection.

• Lifelines shall be protected against being cut or abraded (i.e. Softeners around lifelines at anchorage point.)

• Lifelines shall be inspected, by a competent person(s) at least weekly to ensure system and equipment integrity. The project shall develop a method to readily identify that the lifeline has been inspected and is fit for use prior to beginning any work involving the lifeline system.

Lifeline Placement/Installation Utilize the engineered systems included as part of this procedure or the project will be required to design and engineer a system for their particular needs. Approved engineered drawings must be kept on file at the project. A registered professional engineer must approve all engineered systems.

Lifelines must be installed and used under the supervision of a qualified person. Only designated qualified persons that have been approved by the project manager/superintendent and safety representative will be allowed to supervise the installation. Written documentation on personnel qualified to supervise the installation of lifelines shall be kept on file at the project.

Horizontal Lifelines • Systems must be designed and engineered to maintain a safety factor of at least two

(2).

• Utilize the engineered systems included, as part of this procedure or the project will be required to design and engineer a system for their particular needs. This must be done under the approval of a professional engineer. Approved engineered drawings must be kept on file at the project.

• Lifelines shall be installed, removed and used under the supervision of a designated qualified person(s).

• Written documentation on personnel qualified to supervise the installation of lifelines will be kept on file at the project.

Carabiner

Page 12 of 26



Vertical Lifelines • Must have a minimum breaking strength of at least 5000 pounds.

• Utilize the engineered systems included in this procedure (see appendices) or the project will be required to design and engineer a system for their particular needs. Approved engineered drawings must be kept on file at the project.

• Only designated qualified persons that have been approved by the superintendent and safety representative will be allowed to supervise installation.

• Written documentation on personnel qualified to supervise the installation of lifelines will be kept on file at the project.

Retractable Lifeline System • Retractable lifelines are devices that when properly utilized, will serve to stop the free

fall of an employee prior to the employee striking a lower surface.

• Retractable lifeline devices shall be attached to an anchorage point capable of upporting 5,000 pounds or designed and installed as part of a fall arrest system that maintains a safety factor of two (2).

• Retractable lifelines shall be secured by, as a minimum 3/8” wire rope chokers or slings and ½” shackles. The slings and shackles designated for fall protection shall only be used for fall protection purposes. ROPE (synthetic or natural fiber) SHALL NOT BE USED TO SECURE THESE DEVICES.

Retractable Wire Sling Nylon Sling

• A competent person(s) shall inspect all slings, chokers and shackles annually. • Each retractable lifeline device shall be equipped with a rope tag line for extending • Lifelines shall be placed above every temporary construction ladder that is to be

used for repeated access/egress and exposes employees to a fall hazard greater the device to elevations below the point of attachment.

• Retractable than twelve feet (12'). The retractable device shall be attached in such a manner that it does not interfere with the employee who is using the ladder for access or egress.

Page 13 of 26



• A competent person shall inspect retractable lifeline systems, at least monthly. • Retractable lifelines devices shall only be installed by employees specifically trained

and designated competent for that task.

ANCHOR

Connectors Toggles These devices lock into structural steel bolt holes to provide an anchorage point for a shock-absorbing lanyard. These devices are to be used by structural iron connectors and bolt up personnel during steel erection.

• Connectors toggles shall be able to withstand 5000 pounds impact load or twice the potential impact load of an engineered fall protection system.

Concrete Form Anchorage Points These devices attach to patented concrete forms to provide an attachment point for a shock-absorbing lanyard. They are to be used when placing concrete forms at elevations where a fall exposure exists. Concrete form anchorage points shall be able to withstand 5000 pounds impact load or twice the potential impact load of an engineered fall protection system.

Reinforcement Steel/Concrete Form Work Personnel working on rebar walls, piers and on concrete form walls must have fall protection 100% of the time they are exposed to a potential fall. This fall protection can be achieved by utilizing one of the following options.

a) Double lanyard system

b) Retractable lifelines

c) Manlifts

Personnel working towers/poles generally require the use of work positioning belt and lanyard. The positioning belt/lanyard shall be used in conjunction with a harness/lanyard that has been properly secured to provide fall protection.

WARNING

WHEN IN USE

KEEPER MUST

CLOSE AND LOCK

MOUNTING SURFACE

Page 14 of 26



Positioning Harness

Structural Steel Erection Personnel erecting skeletal steel structures shall maintain 100% fall prevention/protection through the use of personal fall protection systems, retractable lifelines, connectors toggles, and aerial lifts (JLG, Snorkel, etc.).

• Access to structural steel shall be obtained by use of ladders, aerial lifts, or other approved personnel hoisting devices. Climbing of structural steel members such as columns and diagonal braces is expressly forbidden.

• Prior to and during lifeline system placement, personnel shall crawl (coon) steel members with shock absorbing lanyards secured around said steel members. Retractable lifeline systems secured at elevations above the operation may be used in some situations.

Personnel Lifts/Hoisting Device Aerial Lifts/ Buckets (JLG, Scissors, Snorkel, Etc.) Personnel riding in or working from these lifts must secure their safety lanyard to the lift basket. When using a bucket type (truck mounted) the lanyard must be attached to either the boom with a sling and a carabineer or the approved anchor point if it is available.

Crane Hoisted Personnel Baskets Use of these devices shall comply with the safety procedures set forth in the OH&S regs. Personnel riding in or working from personnel baskets must secure their lanyard to the basket or an overhead attachment point at all times while aloft.

Page 15 of 26



ROOFING Low Slope Roof Applications Employees engaged in work activities on low slopes roofs, with unprotected sides and edges ten feet (10’) or more above a lower level, shall be provided 100% fall prevention/ protection by utilizing guardrail systems, personal fall protection systems, safety net systems, or warning lines.

When warning line systems are used, the line shall be placed at least six feet (6’) away from any unprotected side or edge, except when mechanical equipment is being utilized a minimum of ten feet (10’) is required. Any employee working between the roof edge and warning line must be protected by a personal fall protection system.

High Slope Roof Applications Employees engaged in work activities on high slope roofs, with unprotected sides and edges ten feet (10’) or more above a lower level shall be provided 100% fall prevention/ protection by guardrail systems, personal fall protection systems, safety net systems, or lifeline systems.

Personal fall protection systems must remain secured at all times while the fall exposure of ten feet or more is present.

Employees shall receive tailboard prior to beginning any task located on a high slope roof.

Excavations Excavations where workers are required to work closer than 6 feet (6 ft) to the excavation be provided with fall prevention/protection devices adequate to protect personnel working or traveling adjacent to them. The preferred method for safeguarding this fall exposure is with rigid guardrail systems immediately adjacent to the excavation. Where personnel are required to work immediately adjacent to the excavation and guardrail systems do not provide adequate protection, employees shall be provided fall restraint and/or lifeline systems to which they can secure their safety lanyard/harness.

Employees shall remain secured to a lifeline or restraint system when working within six feet (6’) of an excavation with unprotected sides or edges.

Systems and employee restraint systems shall meet engineered drawing and technical specification prior to use.

Fall Protection on Wood Poles: When climbers have to pass obstacles such as telephone cables or cross arms, they must wear a retracting lanyard.

On the way up and on the way down, the ends of the (first) pole strap is attached to both of the lateral D-rings. When an obstacle is reached the retracting lanyard is passed round the pole above the obstacle.

The first pole strap must remain in place until the retracting lanyard is anchored to the opposite D-ring or to itself. It is then unsnapped at one end and reconnected above the obstacle on the way up, or below it on the way down. All workers who climb wooden poles including supervisors must have completed their First Aid/CPR training and annually perform a Pole Top Rescue as

Page 16 of 26



per SOP 27. 003 - Pole Top Rescue. Rescue Equipment for both Pole Top and Structure rescue must at the worksite at all times. This equipment must be checked prior to any climbing.

Fall Protection on Metal Towers:

For qualified and authorized workers, free climbing without the use of fall protection equipment is not permitted for ascending, descending, or lateral movement. Two belts with large snap hooks can be used. All workers who perform work on Structures including the supervisors must receive First Aid/CPR and Structure Rescue as per SOP 27.001 Tower Rescue.

For performing conductor assessments, a personal fall protection system is necessary. A typical way of achieving this is to suspend a 6m retracting life-line block above the insulator string, or work position and attach its free end to the dorsal D-ring on the worker’s body harness. A work-positioning strap is used as well. (Some utilities attach the retracting lifeline hook to a strong hook at the end of a lightweight pole, called a shepherd’s crook). The climber attaches the end of the life-line to his dorsal D-ring, then reaches up with the pole and places the hook on a cross member above him. The lifeline retracts as he climbs, and the process is repeated as necessary.

• Accepted and tested equipment for use with a shock absorber and lanyard as part of the fall arrest system:

• Jelco or Fujii Denko hooks when connecting directly to the lattice steel members and joints

• MSA FP CE0639 Aluminum hooks when connecting to the step bolt

Approved Fall Protection Devices are:

• Miller pole straps

• Jelco pole straps

• Jelco retractable

• Miller retractable Dangerous Equipment Application • Each employee less than 10 feet (10’) above dangerous equipment shall be protected from

falling into or onto dangerous equipment by guardrail systems or by equipment guards.

• Each employee ten feet (10’) or more above dangerous equipment shall be protected from fall potential by guardrail systems, secured personal fall protection systems, safety net systems, or employee restraint systems.

• Lifeline and restraint systems shall meet engineered drawing and technical specifications prior to use.

Free Fall Calculation All workers that are required to work aloft must complete;

• Fall Protection Plan • Free Fall Distance Calculation Form

Training • Employees that have the potential to be exposed to a fall hazard shall be trained prior to

starting work.

Page 17 of 26



• A competent person designated by the project manager/ superintendent and site safety representative must conduct training.

• As a minimum training shall include the following:

1. Valard Construction’s Fall Prevention training program (See ATTACHMENT I)

2. Any fall protection equipment, procedures, or hazards unique to the site that are not included in the Fall Prevention Training Program.

Training must be documented with a written certification record and entered into the Employee Training Database System.

1. Certification records must include the following information:

a) Title and summary of the training.

b) The identity of the employee(s) trained (name, signature)

c) Date and location of the training (project name, number, and location).

d) Name and signature of the competent person that conducted the training.

2. Personnel performing the training shall be designated in writing with documentation being maintained by the project safety and health representative.

3. Personnel performing the training must be qualified in the following areas:

a) The nature of fall hazards in the work area.

b) The correct procedures for erecting, maintaining, disassembling, and inspecting the fall protection system to be used.

c) The use and operation of guardrail systems, personal fall protection systems, safety net systems, warning lines systems, and other protection to be utilized.

d) The limitations on the use of mechanical equipment during the performance of roofing work on low-sloped roofs.

e) The correct procedures for the handling and storage of equipment and materials and the erection of overhead protection.

Retraining • Retraining in fall protection must be conducted anytime there is a reason to believe

that an employee does not have the necessary knowledge and skills to comply with the fall protection/prevention program.

• A designated competent person must conduct retraining.

• Retraining is required under the following circumstances:

• Changes in the workplace render previous training obsolete.

• Changes in the types of fall protection system or equipment to be used render previous training obsolete.

• Observations of inadequacies in an affected employee’s knowledge or use of fall protection systems/equipment indicate that the employee has not retained the requisite understanding or skill.

Page 18 of 26



• Employee infractions of the fall prevention/protection program must be documented and the employee retrained in the applicable area of the program violated.

• Retraining must be documented with a written certification record and entered into Valard’s Employee Training Records Database (same requirements as for initial training).

ATTACHMENT I

FALL PREVENTION/PROTECTION TRAINING PROGRAM

INTRODUCTION A. Falls are the leading cause of work related death in the construction industry.

B. Falls account for 40,000 to 75,000 work related injuries and 80 to 100 fatalities annually.

RECOGNITION OF POTENTIAL FALL HAZARDS A. Unprotected sides and edges.

1. Platforms

2. Walkways and ramps

B. Floor Openings

C. Wall Openings

D. Pipe Racks and Skeletal Steel

E. Scaffolds

F. Ladders

1. Extension

2. Step

G. Roofs

H. Vertical Walls

1. Reinforcing steel work

2. Concrete form installation

I. Excavations

J. Pits, shafts and manholes

K. Equipment (crane booms, maintenance, etc.)

OVERVIEW OF VALARD’S PROCEDURE Be sure to add any job specific procedures, equipment or hazards that are not included in the Engineering and Construction Procedure. Emphasis should be placed on elimination of the exposure first and utilization of fall protection equipment as a last resort.

Page 19 of 26



HANDS ON DEMO OF EQUIPMENT (Set up a mock work area where the instructor can demonstrate and employees can practice hands on use of equipment. As a minimum the demo shall include the following items.)

A. Harness and Lanyard

1. Teach and demonstrate proper donning procedure (per manufacturer’s guideline).

a) Proper fit

b) Proper positioning

c) Proper equipment inspection protocol.

2. Demonstrate correct use and storage of lanyards.

a) Secure overhead to limit fall potential to a maximum of eleven feet (11’).

b) Minimize swing fall hazard by securing lanyard directly overhead.

c) Allow adequate clearance to prevent striking objects below (Shock absorber will elongate upon activation.)

d) Never snap two (2) lanyards together for extra length.

e) Never tie knots in a lanyard.

f) Steel lanyard required for welders.

g) Shock absorber end must be secured adjacent to harness.

h) Never hook shock-absorbing lanyards to a retractable reel.

i) Store lanyards rolled up out of the way to eliminate a trip or snag hazard.

3. Explain and demonstrate proper use of “D”-Rings.

1. Front “D”-Ring must only be utilized for attachment to rail-mounted ladder climbing devices.

2. Side “D”-Rings are designed only for positioning.

3. Back “D”-Ring located between the shoulders must be utilized to attach shock-absorbing lanyard to the harness. (Also to be utilized for direct hook up to retractable lifelines.)

4. Review manufacturers recommended inspection procedure (by user before each use).

a) Faulty latches or snaps

b) Cuts and abrasions

c) Burns

d) Dry rot

e) Chemical Damage

f) Excessive wear

g) Loose or torn stitches

Page 20 of 26



5. Movement and access in elevated areas

a) Always tie-off before accessing work areas where a fall exposure exists.

b) Two (2) lanyards will be required to provide continuous tie-off while climbing through pipe racks or structures.

c) Tie-off to approved anchorage points (reference written procedure).

d) IF FALL PROTECTION TIE-OFF IS NOT AVAILABLE DO NOT ACCESS THE AREA!

e) ALWAYS connect the second lanyard before unfastening the first lanyard when traveling in elevated areas.

B. Explain and demonstrate use of anchorage devices such as straps, connector toggles, etc.

C. Retractable Lifelines

1. Inspect daily prior to use.

a) Check housing for dents or signs of abuse.

b) Check cable for kinks, caging, unlaying, broken wires, heat damage and excessive wear.

c) Pull on cable and make sure it moves smoothly.

d) Give the cable a quick pull to ensure the brake is engaging properly.

e) Check snap hooks for sign of alternations, distortions, cracks, dents or cuts.

f) Check pressed metal sleeves on cable for cracks or excessive wear.

g) Check anchorage for proper connections.

2. Proper care of unit.

a) Never drop the unit from any height.

b) Protect the cable from sharp corners and edges.

c) Don’t allow foreign matter to enter the housing.

d) NEVER permit the cable to re-reel uncontrollably back into the device.

e) Do not leave cable extended for prolonged periods of time.

f) Do not stretch welding leads or electrical cords across the cable.

3. Demonstrate and review proper use of unit.

a) Snap hook shall be secured directly to the back “D”-Ring (Do Not Use safety lanyard for attachment to retractable lifeline.)

b) Swing fall must be minimized. Never install the unit where the cable will make an angle of greatest than thirty degrees (30°) with vertical.

c) Allow a minimum clearance of forty inches (40’) in the event of a fall.

Page 21 of 26



d) Do not work with cable at full extension (at least three feet [3’] must remain on the device).

e) Cable should not pass over sharp corners.

f) Only designed for one (1) person at a time (75-300 lbs.).

g) Never to be used as a work positioning device.

h) Do not allow cable to pass under arms, between legs, or wrap around any part of the body.

i) Do NOT climb above the anchorage point.

j) If used to arrest a fall, a competent person must inspect the unit prior to it being put back in service.

Regulatory Reference Alberta Act, Section 1(1)g Definition of Competent Worker Act, Section 14(2) Direction of Workers Act, Section 15(1) Worker Training Part 9 -Fall Protection -All Sections

British Columbia Part 2- Application- Section 2.2- General Duties Part 11- Fall Protection- All

Yukon Part 1- General- Section 1.37-1.43- Fall Arrest

Saskatchewan Part VII- Personal Protective Equipment – Section 101-107 – Fall Arrest

Manitoba Part 14 – Fall Protection –All

Ontario Part II- General Construction – Section 26&27

NWT Part II – Personal Protective Equipment – Section 57-60

Page 22 of 26



9.7 FALL ARREST EQUIPMENT INSPECTION FORM Employee Name: _____________________________________ Date:______________________________ Print Full Legal Name

Employee Signature: ____________________________________ Employee Code: _____________________

Competent/Trained Inspector: _________________________________________

LANYARD Safe Unsafe N/A Comments Check rope for damaged fibers and strands ☐ ☐ ☐ Inspect the splices for loose strands ☐ ☐ ☐ Thimbles in good shape / secure ☐ ☐ ☐ Hooks – free of cracks, corrosion pits or distortion ☐ ☐ ☐

Keeper freely without binding and the spring exerts enough pressure to remain firmly closed

☐ ☐ ☐

Check shock absorber for signs of over tension ☐ ☐ ☐

Identification tag and labels are in place and legible ☐ ☐ ☐

BODY BELTS Safe Unsafe N/A Comments D-rings not bent or corroded ☐ ☐ ☐ Free from cuts or tears ☐ ☐ ☐ Rivets and stitching intact and secure ☐ ☐ ☐ Seat belt free from contamination ☐ ☐ ☐ No handmade hooks ☐ ☐ ☐ Hardware attachments in good order (no burns or loose stitching) ☐ ☐ ☐

Properly attached tool bag ☐ ☐ ☐ HOOKS / GAFFS Safe Unsafe N/A Comments

Acceptable hook length ☐ ☐ ☐ Nylon straps in acceptable order ☐ ☐ ☐ Hooks acceptably sharpened ☐ ☐ ☐ Gaffe screws tight ☐ ☐ ☐ All adjustable and replaceable parts in good order and securely fastened ☐ ☐ ☐

BODY HARNESS Yes No N/A Comments D-ring pad free of rips ☐ ☐ ☐ Rivets tightly secured ☐ ☐ ☐ Grommets must be tight ☐ ☐ ☐ Buckles are working properly and not bent ☐ ☐ ☐ Webbing free from cuts, broken / pulled stitches, frayed or damaged strands ☐ ☐ ☐

Buckles and D-rings free from cracks and deformities ☐ ☐ ☐

POLE STRAPS Yes No N/A Comments Free from wear and cuts ☐ ☐ ☐ Attachments in good order ☐ ☐ ☐ WORK: To be completed annually by the employee. Send forms to [email protected].

Page 23 of 26

Document Description Fall Protection Plan Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.028

Date: Mar. 24, 2015 Revision: 2 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Sept 20, 2018

Work Location: Supervisor: Date: Job #: Scope of Work:

Fall Hazards ☐ Falling from Structure ☐ Falling from Wooden Pole ☐ Unguarded Edges ☐ Ladders

☐ Open Holes ☐ Trip Hazards ☐ Obstruction Below ☐Boom Supported Platforms

☐ Missing Guardrails ☐ Moving Equipment ☐ Wind Hazards ☐ Manholes

Other: ☐

☐

☐

Describe the Hazards: (Include obstructions, locations, dimensions etc.)

Type of Fall Arrest or Restraint Equipment ☐ Lanyard C/W Shock Absorber ☐ Carabiners ☐ Fixed Anchor ☐ Rope Grab ☐ Horizontal Lifeline

☐ Vertical Lifeline ☐ Safety Net ☐ Linesman Belt C/W Chocker ☐ Deceleration Device ☐ Self retracting lifeline

☐ Anchor Connectors ☐ Retrieval Tripod ☐ Barricades ☐

☐

Anchorage Points To Be Used For Fall Arrest Types of Anchors: Location of Anchors:

Describe Procedure to Inspect, Maintain, Install of Fall protection Systems/ to be used and completed/attached Free Fall Distance Form .

Identify the method of providing protection for workers who may be in or pass through the area below the overhead work activity

☐ Barricading ☐ Catch Nets ☐ Warning Signs ☐ Other:

Rescuers (Trained) 1. 4. 2. 5. 3. 6. Type of Rescue Procedure to be used: ☐ Pole Top Rescue ☐ Tower Rescue ☐ Bucket Rescue/Escape

System to be used to access Injured Worker ☐ Rescue Ladder ☐ Elevated Work Platform ☐ Climb Structure/Pole ☐ Aerial Equipment ☐ Crane Manbasket ☐ Other:

Critical Rescue Factors Additional Anchor Point Required: Landing Area: Rescue Obstruction/Hazards: Method used to remove Injured Worker: Has the Rescue Equipment been inspected and is in good Condition? Yes ☐ No ☐ Is the Equipment Adequate for the Rescue Plan? Yes ☐ No ☐ Is a first-aider present who understands Suspension Trauma and the recovery positions? Yes ☐ No ☐ If working near or over water; is there approved flotation device available for the worker? Yes ☐ No ☐ If working near or over water, is there a boat available? Yes ☐ No ☐

Page 24 of 26



Free Fall Distance Definitions:

L = Length of lanyard: Most Lanyards come in lengths of 4-6 feet and have an energy absorber built into them.

DH = Height of the Dorsal D-ring: This height is measured from the worker’s feet to the point where the D-ring is positioned between there shoulder blades. Most D-rings will sit at five (5) feet high on some one that is six feet tall, when properly wearing a harness; this height may increase the taller the worker is. The value that a competent person uses for DH is either specific to each employee or chosen based on the employee with the tallest D-ring height.

A = Height of Anchorage: This is measured from the working surface of the worker (where his feet are positioned on climbing structure) to the point of where his fall arrest is attached to his anchor point.

FFD = Free Fall Distance = L + DH – A: The vertical distance a worker travels between the onset of a fall until just prior to the point where the Fall Arrest System begins to arrest the fall.

DD = Deceleration Distance: The vertical distance a worker travels between the activation of the Fall Arrest System and final fall arrest. This is found in the manufacturer’s Instructions or on the label. This number will be the maximum deployment length of the energy absorber during the course of the fall. Most energy absorbers have a maximum Deceleration Distance of four (4) feet.

DS = D-ring Slippage: This variable accounts for the relative change in position of the rear dorsal D-ring when fall arrest forces are applied to the harness. When a properly adjusted non-elastic full-body harness supports a worker’s weight, the D-ring attachment point generally shifts up the body by no more than one (1) foot. Therefore, it is common for competent persons to use a distance of one (1) foot in fall-clearance calculations to account for harness effects.

TFD = Total Fall Distance = FFD + DD + DS: Total Fall Distance is the distance required to fully arrest a fall.

SM = Safety Margin: Since DD already accounts for harness displacement, a competent person might choose to use two (2) feet for a SM. In the event that an abbreviated version of the required clearance calculation is used; one that does not have separate variables for harness effects and vertical elongation; then the safety factor may need to be as much as three (3) feet. Deciding which value to use is part of the analysis needed for fall-clearance calculations and often requires both research and expertise.

CR = Clearance Requirement = TFD + DH + SM: Fall Clearance Requirement (distance) is defined as the height at which a worker must attach to an anchorage to avoid contact with a lower level. This important calculation may help in the selection of which fall protection system may work the best for your workplace duties.

Page 25 of 26



7(a) Free Fall Distance Calculating Form Free Fall Distance FFD = L + DH – A Total Fall Distance TFD = FFD + DD + DS Clearance Requirement CR = TFD + DH + SM

Free Fall Distance Calculation

+ - = L DH A FFD + + = FFD DD DS TFD + + = TDF DH SM CR

Calculations by: (Print Name)

Signature:

Date:

LegendA Height of AnchorageCR Clearance RequirementDD Deceleration DistanceDH Height of D-ringDS D-ring SlippageFFD Free Fall DistanceL Length of LanyardSM Safety MarginTFD Total Fall Distance

Page 26 of 26



By signing below, I acknowledge that I have read and agree to abide by all aspects of this Fall Protection Plan. I

further understand that if there are any changes in the conditions that were identified from the initial plan, a new Fall Protection Plan (FPP) and Free Fall Calculation will be required.

Name (please print) Fall Protection Equipment Insp. Signature Date 1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

18.

19.

20.

Page 1 of 7

Document Description Cold Weather Work Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.029


26.029 COLD WEATHER WORK

PURPOSE To prevent cold-related injuries/stresses in the work environment, by providing guidance in the types, recognition, evaluation and control of potentially cold conditions.

DEFINITIONS To better understand local / site weather forecast and or bulletins, it is important to have some knowledge and understanding of the more common meteorological terms, used by weather forecasters.

Blizzard – A severe storm lasting 3 or more hours, with low temperatures, strong winds and poor visibility due to blowing snow.

Freezing Drizzle / Rain – Freezes on impact, forms a coat of ice on the ground and objects they strike. They occur when the air temperature is below zero Celsius near the ground, but above zero Celsius higher up.

Frost - Water vapour, which deposits directly on a surface colder than the surrounding air.

Hail – Precipitation in the form of lumps of ice, larger than ice pellets usually the size of peas and or cherries however, may be as large as oranges.

Ice Pellets – Frozen rain drops, snow flakes and or snow encased in ice, which bounce when impacting the ground.

Ice Crystals – Tiny sprinkles that hang in the air and sparkle.

Snow – Precipitation of significant duration and extent.

Snow, Blowing – Lifted by the wind from the earth’s surface to a height of 2 meters or more.

Snow, Drifting – Blown to a height of less than 2 meters.

Snow Flurry or Shower – Snow fall that suddenly stops and starts, changing rapidly in intensity; the accumulation and extent of which are limited.

Snow Squall - Strong winds, flurries and poor visibility.

Wind - Horizontal movement of air relative to the earth’s surface and is caused by variations in temperature and pressure. Wind direction is the direction from which the wind is blowing. For example, a north wind comes from the north and blows towards the south.

WIND CHILL • Expresses the combined effect of wind and air temperature on body heat loss. • Humans do not sense the temperature of the air directly. Wind chill describes a

sensation, the way we feel as a result of the combined cooling effect of temperature and wind.

Page 2 of 7



• This feeling can't be measured using an instrument, so scientists have developed a mathematical formula that relates air temperature and wind speed to the cooling sensation we feel on our skin.

Studies show that when your skin is wet, it loses heat much faster than when it is dry. As wind increases, heat is carried away from the body at an accelerated rate.

Wind Speeds (Inland):

Light - (0 to 9 KM/H)

Moderate - (10 to 40 KM/H)

Strong / Windy - (41 to 60 KM/H)

Very Strong / Gales - (61 to 90 KM/H)

Very Strong / Storm Force - (over 91 KM/H)

Hurricane Force - (over 115 KM/H)

Wind Chill Index (Revised November 2001) Wind chill is an index not a physical quantity. In other words, it is calculated, not measured. Since the wind chill index represents the feeling of cold on your skin, it is not actually a real temperature, so it is given without the degree sign. For example, "Today the temperature is -10°C, and the wind chill is -20. "

New wind chill index features:

• Uses wind speed calculated at the average height of a human face (about 1.5 metres)

• Based on model of a human face, incorporates modern heat transfer technology

• Estimates the risk of getting frostbite (a severe injury caused by cold).

Page 3 of 7



ROLES / RESPONSIBILITIES The Site Management Team shall monitor area weather forecasts and existing site weather conditions, to better plan and execute construction activities during the winter construction season. However, the continuous monitoring of employees for signs and symptoms of cold-related injuries/stresses rests with the employees and their respective front line supervisor.

• Area Supervisor: Assures that these guidelines are implemented and administered to the extent feasible on the project.

• Safety Advisor: Provides employee training, program evaluation, and guidance to the Superintendent.

• Front-Line Supervisor a. Typically knows their employees' work-related capabilities and limitations, and it

is paramount that they monitor on a regular basis the condition of each employee assigned to them. They should pay particular attention to the employee's task, environment, and clothing, as well as any engineering and administrative controls and personal protective equipment in use.

Page 4 of 7



b. Often as a day-to-day role model for other workers, they must be aware that their actions and behaviour may influence their subordinates. This is particularly true for employees just arriving at the project site. These employees may not be fully acclimated to cold conditions.

Employees: Every person tolerates cold differently. Since no empirical measure can determine when an individual begins to sense cold-related injuries/stresses, the primary responsibility for the prevention of cold related-injuries/stresses should be the appropriately trained employee's determination of his/her condition.

EMPLOYEE AWARENESS AND PREVENTION Cold injury/stress prevention awareness shall be provided at least once a year (preferably during the fall) to all project personnel. This awareness shall include:

Types, warning signs /symptoms and first aid for cold-related injuries/stresses. Frostnip: A mild form of frostbite, where only the skin freezes

• Susceptible body parts – Extremities such as fingers, toes, ear lobes and or tip of the nose.

• Symptoms - Painful tingling or burning sensation. Skin appears yellowish or white, but feels soft to the touch.

• First aid - Do not rub or massage the area. Warm area gradually –use body heat. Report to medical clinic for evaluation / treatment.

Frostbite: Skin and underlying tissue (fat, muscle, bone) are frozen

• Susceptible body parts – Extremities such as fingers, toes, ear lobes and or tip of the nose.

• Symptoms – Skin appears white and waxy, and is hard to the touch. No sensation, the area is numb.

• First aid – Immediately seek medical attention. Do not rub or massage the area, warm slowly, use body heat.

Hypothermia: Feeling cold over a prolonged period of time can cause a drop in core body

temperature (below 37 degrees Celsius).

• Symptoms – Shivering, confusion and loss of muscular control can occur. Poor performance; irrational decisions, not mentally alert. Can progress to a life-threatening condition where shivering stops, the person loses consciousness, and cardiac arrest may occur

• First Aid – Immediately seek medical attention! Get the person indoors. Lay person down, avoid rough handling, particularly if the person is unconscious.

Page 5 of 7



Gently remove wet clothing if applicable. Warm person gradually, using available heat source.

1) Employee responsibilities in avoiding cold-related injuries/stresses.

• Know individual limitations

• Pre work stretching (Body Mechanics)

• Know warning signs / symptoms

• Limit exposed skin

• Wear multiple layers

• Maintain hydration

• Buddy system

• Follow work warm-warm-up schedule

2) Dangers of dehydration

• Loss of body fluid changes flow of blood to extremities, increasing risk of cold stress.

• Coffee intake should be limited due to diuretic & circulatory effects.

3) Employee measures to maintain hydration

• Drink warm sweet drinks and soups, which provide high caloric intake and fluid.

4) Dangers of the use of drugs, including prescription and over the counter medicines, and alcohol that inhibits the body’s response to the cold or impairs judgement.

5) Proper use of engineering and administrative (work practice) controls

6) Proper use of personal protective equipment

7) Measures employees can take to prevent cold-related injuries/stresses:

•Pre work stretches (Body Mechanics)

•Employee remain hydrated

•Work pace

•Good nutritional habits

8) What to do during a Cold Awareness Condition

Page 6 of 7



WORKPLACE AND TASK EVALUATION A thorough evaluation of the workplace may be necessary to identify tasks and conditions that present a potential cold-related injury/stress hazard. This evaluation should include observations, discussions with workers and supervisors.

1. Tailboard is the primary vehicle for evaluating and communicating cold injury conditions on a task-specific basic. Information that can help to determine a cold injury potential and appropriate control measures includes the following:

2. Job Location

• Analyze the specific locations of each task.

3. Work Duration and Schedule

• What are the frequencies at which the task must be performed?

• How much time is required to perform the work?

• How much time is required for preparation, setup, actual task performance, and any normal breaks?

• Excessive overtime work, piecework, and machine-paced work are additional factors to consider.

4. Clothing Personal protective clothing -- perhaps the most important step in fighting the elements is providing adequate layers of insulation from them. Wear several layers (at least 3) of loose-fitting, lightweight, warm clothing. Trapped air between the layers will insulate you. Layers may be removed to avoid sweating and subsequent chill.

• Outer layer to break the wind and allow some ventilation

• Middle layer to absorb sweat and retain insulation

• Inner layer to allow ventilation (Polypro)

The body can loose a substantial amount (50%) of heat from the head.

Adequately covering the head and or face.

Cover your mouth to protect your lungs from extreme cold.

Feet and hands are equally important, wear good quality gloves (mittens, snug at the wrist, are better than gloves).

Wear CSA approved winter work boots.

5. Environmental Conditions

Air temperature, humidity, and wind speed all affect cold-related-injury/stress potential. If available, management may refer to and or use the Environment Canada Computer Program “Wind Chill Calculator”; to assist in evaluating prevailing environmental site conditions. This program is available on Environment Canada’s Web Site at: [www. windchill.ec.gc.ca].

Page 7 of 7



CONTROLS TO HELP AVOID COLD- RELATED INJURY / STRESS As with any hazard, feasible engineering controls should be the primary control measure, followed by administrative (work practice) controls and PPE, in that order.

1. Engineering Controls:

• Use an on-site source of heat, such as Sun Dogs, steam heaters etc.

• Hoardings, windbreaks etc.

2. Administrative and Work Practice Controls:

• If possible, schedule cold-related injury/stress work when conditions are at their minimum. Schedule cold work for the warmest part of the day.

• Implement a work warm-up schedule

v For Example: working in an unprotected environment with an ambient air temperature of –26 C to –28 C, exposed to winds of 16 KM/H, but less than 24 KM/H, two warm-up breaks are recommended per 5 hour work period.

3. Special measures may be needed in some circumstances. For example, when work must be done in isolated areas, the “buddy system” or reliable two-way communication system should be used. Some vehicles may need to be equipped with survival gear.

Work Warm-up Scheduling These guidelines are not intended to replace established cold weather work practices that provide workers with better protection. The American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH) established Threshold Limit Values for utilization in cold work environments. These TLV’s apply to any 5-hour shift (normal work period), with moderate to heavy work activity. Breaks are 15 minutes duration, in a warm location (warm-up shack / hoarding, etc.) It assumes that normal work practice provides for breaks in warm locations every two and a half (2.5) hours. In Alberta Occupational Exposure Limits (OEL) is used rather than (TLV)

All non-emergency work should stop by the time the wind chill reaches –51.

If shield or screens can provide effective protection against the wind, work modification or other measures, the work warm-up schedule for “No Noticeable Wind” would apply.

Field Expedient Wind Speeds If reliable weather reports are not available, use the following as a guide to estimate wind velocity:

• An 8 km/h (5 mph) wind will move a light flag.

• A 16 km/h (10 mph) wind will fully extend the flag.

• A 24 km/h (15 mph) wind will raise a newspaper sheet.

• A 32 km/h (20 mph) wind will produce blowing and drifting snow.

Page 1 of 5

Document Description Helicopter Safety

Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.030 Date: Sept. 23, 2003 Revision: 4 Revised by: M. Brown Date: April 30, 2018

26.030 HELICOPTER ACTIVITIES Purpose Provide workers with a safe means of work activities around and with helicopters including access and egress. 1. All work done by a helicopter that involves crews of Valard Construction LP must be stipulated by written contract. The contract must state the following:

• A minimum pilot experience of 500 hours flying time as pilot-in-command of helicopters.

• The type of helicopter and number of pilots. • Aircraft lifting capacity, takings into account temperature, elevation, fuel

quantity, and weight of load to be lifted. 2. Employees are not permitted to fly beyond gliding distance off shore in a single

engine helicopter unless the helicopter operator is authorized to do so by Transport Canada and adheres to the standard #722.20.

3. Helicopters that carry external loads must be equipped with both electrical, and mechanical releases for releasing the load in an emergency.

Training

4. All employees on any job that involves helicopters must be fully briefed as per Canadian Aviation Regulations and Valard AMP receive training appropriate to t h e job before operations begin. Specific training is needed for work on transmission towers, or for handling external loads. Refer to Valard Aviation Management Plan for standard operating procedures. (Share point). All training must be documented and signed.

5. Before helicopter operations start each day, and after any change of plan or

extended break, a tailboard discussion must be held which includes aircrews and signed off by all parties.

6. All workers involved with helicopters must be familiar with hand and/or head signals,

depending on their task being performed. Workers when using radios they must be familiar with correct voice procedures.

Communications

7. One person on site should be recognized as being in charge of each operation involving a helicopter. This person will:

• Be decided upon before commencing the task • Give direction to the pilot for placement of loads • Be in two-way communications with the aircrew when necessary

Page 2 of 5



8. Work with helicopters must stop if two-way communications fail, except when stopping the job would be unsafe or head and/or hand signals can be used as a safe alternative.

Operational Safety 9. When possible a conspicuous wind monitoring device, such as a fluorescent

ribbon, may be tied near the job site where the pilot can see it. 10. No worker may be on any load or its rigging that is supported, or suspended from

a helicopter in flight. No worker may be in a helicopter that is carrying a external load.

11. No worker should ever be underneath a suspended at any time for any reason. 12. Workers should be aware that static electricity may accumulate in external loads

depending on the aircraft, the load itself and weather conditions. If signs of static are present, workers can request the load touch the ground or tower before attempting to position the load. • Grounding may also be achieved by touching the load with a grounded wand or

by lowering the load to ground before touching it by hand. • Insulation can be achieved by placing an insulating link in the helicopter

slinging line or by touching the load only with insulated gloves until it touches ground.

13. Personal protective equipment for helicopter operation include, as a minimum:

• Hard hat with chin strap fastened • Ear protection • Eye protection • Dress for conditions. Always be prepared to spend the night in the bush.

14. Persons approaching or leaving a helicopter that is on the ground with rotors

turning shall:

• Keep within the pilot’s view, “If you can’t see him he cannot see you” • Approach and depart from the front or sides in the pilot’s view • If the ground is sloping, keep to the downhill side looking at the aircraft at all

times • Carry no objects that extend above the waist • Beware of flying dust, snow, or debris • Beware of slippery ground • Ensure personal items (i.e. lunch bags/Packs) are not blown away by the

downwash

15. Helicopter landing sites must be kept clear of debris and loose objects. On job sites exposed to rotor downwash, equipment and tools must be secured.

Page 3 of 5



16. When workers are transported by helicopter to a remote site and left, they must carry a two-way radio. A pre-arranged pick up must be arranged. If the expected stay is more than four hours, there must be a means of providing a suitable stretcher so that an injured worker may be airlifted to safety.

17. Signals: Valard uses both Hand and Head signals depending on the task

• for direction control point and give a distance (15 feet this way for example) or continually release ad lower an out stretched arm bending at the elbow in the direction the load is to go

• up, is one arm bent up at the elbow, hand and forearm in a full circular motion

• down, is a hand flat over the head in a fore and aft motion • level, or hold is one arm straight out • release is a throat slash motion • Abort is an x made with forearms pointed toward the pilot • Head signal up is a head nod up and down • Head signal down is a head motion side to side • Head signal release is both arms out quickly in full slash

Line Stringing Operations

18. Observe the following guidelines described in SOH 102 in the aviation Management Plan (AMP) regarding line stringing operations:

• Ground or barricade all tension and pulling equipment or consider it to be energized.

• Ensure that all pulling and tensioning equipment has properly functioning brake system.

• Use swivels between the helicopter and the line being pulled to prevent the line from becoming twisted.

• Ensure that rope slings or cables do not twist around the cargo hook, preventing proper operation of the hook or clean release when the hook is opened.

• Place guards to preclude vehicular traffic from coming in contact with moving line. Any movement of or over the sock line must be done with the coordination of the pilot.

• During the pull, give consideration to any and all inactive sock lines in the vicinity of the helicopter. No sag changes or line is to be pulled while the pilot is stringing.

• Allow the pilot to make the initial decision about the order in which lines are pulled to help keep the tail rotors and main rotors out of the lines behind and above the helicopter.

• Do not attach the line at the base of a tower that is already threaded to the helicopter. Consider using a long line if a tower base hookup is required.

Page 4 of 5



• Do not allow anyone or anything under the helicopter or sock line during the course of a pull.

• Consider conductors and metal cables as energized until properly grounded and caught off in that order.

Transferring

19. Observe the following guidelines when using a helicopter to transfer employees, and the guidelines described in SOP H 103 in the Aviation Management Plan (AMP).

• Employees transferring from a hovering helicopter to a structure or riding on a suspended line underneath the helicopter must be trained and qualified in the safe work practices for that operation.

• Employees riding on the skid of the helicopter must wear a full body harness with a shock absorbing lanyard attached to the helicopter at all times when riding from the ground to the structure.

• Employees riding on the skid of the helicopter must check the condition of the positioning attachment device to ensure that the device is in proper working condition.

• Employees transferring from the helicopter to a steel tower or other structure must attach a shunt from the helicopter to the tower before transferring to the tower.

• Employees transferring to a conductor or structure must disconnect their lanyards from the helicopter and reattach the lanyard to the structure immediately upon reaching the work location.

• Employees must transfer to and from the helicopter as smoothly as possible and only by permission of the pilot.

• Employees must use caution when transferring to a structure with insulated

static. Employees must shunt the static with a ground lead that is attached to the helicopter before stepping onto the structure. After the shunt is removed, employees must use a hot stick to attach a personnel ground from the pole bond to the static conductor before coming in contact with the conductor.

• To dissipate any possible static charge that might exist, employees transferring from a helicopter to a steel structure must attach a shunt that is also attached to the helicopter to the tower before coming in contact with the tower.

• The Pilot may also gently touch the skid or platform to the tower when possible to dissipate static build up.

Page 5 of 5



20. HELICOPTER DANGER AREA

Regulatory Reference:

Canadian Aviation Regulations Part 604

Alberta Section 1(1)g Definition “Competent Worker” Section 14(2) Direction of Workers Section 15(1) Worker Training






NWT Part 1 – General Safety – Section (9) (10) –Instruction to Workers

Newfoundland/Labrador OH&S Act Part 5 (a) (b) (e)

Page 1 of 10

Document Description Excavations Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.031


26.031 EXCAVATIONS PURPOSE This procedure will outline the rules and regulations to prevent the risk of accidents, identify and evaluate potential hazards, protect the environment and ensure the integrity of underground installations during excavations. This manual is reviewed and applicable changes will be addressed where the applicable legislation or client’s requirements are revised.

Scope

Excavation procedure applies to the activities and processes under the Occupational Health and Safety Act. All workers including the supervision involved in the excavation shall be trained in Ground Disturbance 2. The implementation of the excavation guidelines and government regulations will eliminate and prevent worker injuries, equipment damages and production losses. This practice included directional drilling.

General The Excavation Procedure applies to any ground penetration regardless of the depth. Appropriate authorities (power, gas etc.) will provide an accurate description/plan of the site; establish the necessary engineering, administrative and equipment controls recommended by the Occupational Health and Safety Act (as per Provincial requirements). A pre-job meeting will be held with all parties involved in the project and if the worksite is on any client’s site, the client’s shall insure that a representative is present. This meeting shall include; emergency procedures, safe work practices approved, underground survey report from the applicable authority, hazard assessment and a list of equipment to be available to complete the project. If any part of the buried line is struck the appropriate owner shall be notified or if unable the applicable Provincial One-Call must be notified of the incident. Upon completion of the project the client shall inspect and approve the work and provide the approval for burial of the excavation.

In cases where it is identified that other owners of buried utilities are not on any provincial First Call list then the Valard’s person in charge shall contact the owner and request that they be present to identify the exact location of their buried lines. Workers are not permitted to enter the excavation unless authorized by their supervisor who will insure that the ground is stable shoring as per the code and all permits are signed, hazard assessment is completed and a Tailboard/FLHA is completed, reviewed by all workers and signed.

Definitions Practice 1) Before any excavation is to take place, the existence and exact location of any

underground utilities and obstructions must be determined. This information will be provided by applicable Provincial First Call and depending on the location and nature of the project or as required in each province.

2) Prior to any excavation to be performed the following steps must be taken:

a. If the area is near any buried pipeline, the owner must be notified 48 hours prior to the work commencing and permission must be granted to excavate the area. The owner is to provide a representative on site prior to the work commencing.

Page 2 of 10


Date: Sept. 23, 2003 Revision: 5 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Jan. 11, 2017 b. If there are buried lines that are not on the locator’s list such as certain counties,

towns, and private land owners, it is the foreman’s responsibility to call the owners and request that they locate their lines in the presence of the Valard foreman. The owner must be provided with sufficient time to provide this service. A meeting must be held with Valard’s foreman and the owner to insure the transfer of information and a copy of the discussion must be kept on file.

c. In cases where the exact location of the line is in any doubt, then the area must be hydro-vaced to visually insure the exact location of the buried line.

d. All structures that may be affected by the excavation must be supported prior to digging.

3) Once buried utilities have been located, a safe work permit can be issued. A Valard Excavation Permit 26.031 is to be used (see page 8) except where Owner’s or Provincial Permit is provided. The permit must include a complete description of the excavation with the appropriate drawings and /or sketches attached. If day lighting is required before conventional excavating, it should be clearly noted on the permit. A copy of the Safe Work Permit will be kept in the excavator or drilling machine and a copy will be kept at the site office. The permit must be reviewed and signed off by Valard’s supervisor, the excavation contractor’s supervisor (if applicable), and the operator of the excavation equipment.

4) Before excavation can begin, appropriate barricades (wood barricades, snow fence etc.) must be obtained and readied for use. Barricades must be installed to protect workers and the public form the hazards of the excavation or if the uncompleted excavation will be left unattended.

5) Once all of the above controls are in place, excavation is allowed to begin. The following is to be considered the minimum required standard for excavation. Some basic are:

a) Spoil piles are to be a minimum of 1.2 m from the edge of the excavation.

b) Any excavation greater than 1.2 m deep must have it’s walls cut back so that the height of the remaining vertical walls is not greater than 1.2 m or protective structures must be installed to prevent the walls from caving in or moving.

c) Cutback must be a minimum of 30º in hard and compact soils (see definition) and 45º in other soils.

d) Protective structures must be installed and used as per the manufacturer’s specifications.

e) Where wooden protective structures are to be built on site, they must comply with the Act’s specifications.

f) Adequate access and egress must be provided for personnel and equipment. Ladders, stairs and ramps may be used.

g) Water shall not be allowed to accumulate in excavations either through pumping or trenching. If there is a chance that water may enter the excavation the worker must wear a harness that has attachment d-rings on each shoulder. This must be connected to a rope capable of lifting the worker in case of an emergency.

h) If a worker is required to enter and work in an excavation deeper than 3 m (10 ft.) Valard will insure that the support structure is designed, certified and installed, maintained, constructed and dismantled in accordance with the professional engineer’s specifications.

Page 3 of 10


Date: Sept. 23, 2003 Revision: 5 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Jan. 11, 2017 6) Excavations shall be inspected daily by a competent worker prior to entry to ensure

that they are stable and safe. In addition, excavations shall be reassessed during and after any rainfall or extreme weather conditions.

All excavations over 4feet (1.3m) must be either cut back or sloped so that the remaining vertical height is no more than 1.5 metres above the floor of the excavation.

Shoring Temporary protective structures such as the trench shields shown, or a combination of

these methods is acceptable to use. The following drawing shows the options that are acceptable.

Examples of trench shields

Cutting back walls If the walls of an excavation are to be cut back:

• The following design specifications (following diagram) must be followed. Since the specifications are based on a subjective interpretation of soil type, a professional engineer shall be consulted whenever there is a question of doubt related to the soil type and potential risk to workers.

• For hard and compacted soil the following diagram shows the sloping required which must be within 1.5 metres of the bottom of the excavation at an angle of not less than 30º measured from the vertical.

Page 4 of 10


Date: Sept. 23, 2003 Revision: 5 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Jan. 11, 2017 Soft, sandy or loose soil As shown in the following diagram, the walls must be sloped from the bottom of the excavation at an angle of not less than 45º measured from the vertical.

Spoil piles The distance between the edge of the excavation and the leading edge of any spoil pile must be at least 1 m. The slope of the spoil pile cannot exceed 45º from the horizontal. These measures are intended to reduce the possibility of the spoil pile slumping into the excavation and loose materials rolling down the pile into the excavation. Spoil pile materials may roll into excavations due to natural settling and daytime warming of frozen excavated material. Spoil piles must be located away from the edge of an excavation because the weight of excavated materials can exert unnecessary pressure on the walls of the excavation. Such pressure can cause excavation walls to collapse.

Safe entry and exit The following methods can be used for access and egress

• Ladder,

• Scaffold

• Mechanical device such as a stairway.

• Appropriate sloping of the ground or soil so that a worker can safely walk into or out of the excavation.

If the trench is more than 1.5 metres deep the following must be provided:

• A safe point of entering and leaving must be no more than 8 metres from the worker.

• The trench walls located between the worker and the safe point of entering and leaving must be supported or sloped as required.

Temporary protective structures In an excavation, 3 metres or less deep, the type of temporary protective structures used shall be;

• Prefabricated from steel,

• Built in place from wood materials for shoring, stringers and bracing.

• Be designed and certified by a professional engineer. The engineer’s specifications must indicate all details related to the design, including the type and grade of materials to be used and the calculated loads the structure is designed to support.

Page 5 of 10


Date: Sept. 23, 2003 Revision: 5 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Jan. 11, 2017 Where an excavation could affect an existing foundation, the foundation must be supported by a temporary protective structure. The structure must be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the specifications of a professional engineer.

Alternative to temporary protective structures

Shoring, stringers and bracing constructed of lumber (see next diagram) shall complies with Schedule 9, or alternate materials, in trenches 1.5 metres to 6 metres deep. If alternate materials are used, they must possess equal or greater properties than those of lumber.

Exterior grade plywood can be installed as a substitute for 38-millimetre shoring elements if the plywood meets the requirements of either of the two-referenced CSA

Standards.

Mechanical devices such as screw jacks and hydraulic equipment can be used in place of the shoring, stringers or bracing described in Schedule 9. The devices must be at least equivalent in strength and reliability to the shoring, stringers or bracing. The use of stringers in trenches less than 2.4 metres deep in “hard and compact soil” is optional.

Installation of shoring, stringers or bracing Steps:

1. Workers must use a ladder to install shoring, stringers or bracing downward from the top of the trench,

2. Install each brace in descending order.

3. Progress downward until the bottom of the trench is reached.

Removal of shoring, stringers or bracing Steps:

1. Ladder must be used

2. Must work in a sequence that is the reverse of the installation sequence.

3. Removal sequence upwards from the bottom of the trench to keep workers above any possible trench wall collapse.

Page 6 of 10


Date: Sept. 23, 2003 Revision: 5 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Jan. 11, 2017 Note: If ground conditions deteriorate to the point that it is unsafe to remove shoring, stringers or bracing, the following removal method must be used that does not require the worker to be in the trench.

• Removal methods could involve use of equipment such as a crane, backhoe or other lifting/excavating equipment rigged or equipped, as necessary, to complete the job safely.

Access for powered mobile equipment

• All excavations to be flagged and marked to prevent workers or equipment from falling into the opening.

• The access route that is used by powered mobile equipment to enter and leave the excavation must be flagged and marked.

• The following can be used as a berm: o Large wooden barricades o Concrete blocks o Pile of excavated material

Schedule 9 Shoring Components Dimensions ( all measurements in Metric) Uprights Stringers Cross-braces

Soil Type

Depth of excavation

Minimum dimensions

Maximum Horizontal spacing

Minimum dimensions

Maximum Vertical spacing

Minimum dimensions

Vertical

Horizontal

Width of trench

Less than 1.8 metres

1.8 to 3.7 metres

Hard and Compact

1.5 to 3.0 38 x 235 1800 89 x 140 1200 89 x89 140 x140 1200 1800

3.0 to 4.5 38 x 235 1200 89 x 140 1200 89 x 140 140 x 140 1200 1800

4.5 to 6.0 38 x 235 10 140 x 140 1200 140 x 184

140 x 184 1200 1800

Likely to crack or crumble

1.5 to 3.0 38 x 235 1200 89 x 140 1200 89 x 140 140 x 140 1200 1800

3.0 to 4.5 38 x 235 900 140 x 140 1200 140 x 140

140 x 184 1200 1800

4.5 to 6.0 38 x 235 10 140 x 184 1200 140 x 184

140 x 184 1200 1800

Soft sandy or

loose

1.5 to 3.0 38 x 235 10 140 x 140 1200 140 x 140

140 x 184 1200 1800

3.0 to 4.5 38 x 235 10 140 x 184 1200 140 x 184

184 x 184 1200 1800

4.5 to 6.0 38 x 235 10 184 x 184 1200 140 x 184

184 x 235 1200 1800

Excavation near Buried Cables and High Pressure Pipeline 1. All buried cables must be considered energized and all buried pipes must be

considered pressurized unless the appropriate Guarantees of Isolation, etc. are in place.

Page 7 of 10


Date: Sept. 23, 2003 Revision: 5 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Jan. 11, 2017 2. Before excavation commences, the intention must be reported to

a) Alberta 1st Call (1-800-242-3447) b) Manitoba Call Before you dig MB (1-800-940-3447) c) , or other authority appropriate to the work site. The specified location of

existing underground cables and pipes must be ascertained from the authority. Their actual location must be determined using an accurate detection device.

a) 5 m rule applies to pipeline locating as per pipeline regulations (hand exposure not using equipment)

b) Danger signs and markings

3. If a buried pipeline is exposed the owner of the pipeline must be contacted and provided a minimum of 24 hrs. of notice before any backfilling is performed. If there is either no response or if unable to make contact with the pipeline owner a detailed record of all contact attempts and inspections (including photos) of all activities done prior to backfilling are to be kept and sent to the Edmonton office for record keeping. This is to prove that all everything was performed as expected.

4. If a buried cable or pipe is damaged, the crew must ensure that appropriate authorities are informed. Make the site safe for the crew and general public until the utility arrives for repair.

5. Mechanical digging equipment must not be used within 1m of any energized cable or pressurized pipe. Hand tools must expose such cables and pipes and hand tools must remove all material within 1m before mechanical equipment may be used within the 1m zone

6. Shovels and other hand tools must be used carefully and with forces that will not damage any cable or pipe that is contacted.

7. If frozen ground prohibits the use of hand tools, it must be thawed. An alternative is to use a Hydro-vac or another non-mechanical digging technique.

8. If the digging conditions are such that excavation is impossible without mechanical digging equipment, energized cables must be de-energized and grounded before digging begins. Similarly pressurized pipes must be turned off and relieved of pressure.

9. Any excavation that contains exposed and energized cables must not be left unattended. A wooden or steel structure or a substantial layer of soil must cover such cables.

Trenching Around Poles 1. The person-in-charge at the site is responsible for deciding if support is needed to

prevent a pole from falling.

2. Support must be installed when digging more than 1m down beside a pole. The person-in-charge shall decide on using support at lesser depths if:

a) The soil is loose, wet or otherwise abnormal.

b) The design of the power line compounds the need of support.

c) There is any other reason to doubt that the pole will remain steady.

3. The options for support are:

a) Temporary mechanical support such as a digger boom or pike pole.

Page 8 of 10


Date: Sept. 23, 2003 Revision: 5 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Jan. 11, 2017 b) Temporary guy wire.

c) Permanent overhead guy wire.

d) Foundation anchor.

MANITOBA SPECIFIC EXCAVATION PROCESS: 1. When excavating in Manitoba and the depth exceeds 1.5 n (5ft), workers must register at

the Safework Manitoba Workplace website https://www.gov.mb.ca/labour/safety/excavation.html and provide a Notice of Excavation and receive a and serial number. You must provide them with Valard’s Excavation #: RE-BBAE-9eBJKR in order to receive the permit number. This document must be posted on the worksite location or office.

2. Either email clickbeforeyoudigmb.com or call (1800-940-3447) to arrange a locate. Locates are only valid for 14 days after located date.

3. Egress and access ladder must be positioned no more that 3 m (10 ft.) from the worker.

Page 9 of 10

Document Description Excavation Permit Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.031


PART 1:

PART 2: SAFETY

PART 3: EMERGENCY PLAN: 1.

What Emergency Response Contingency Plan is in Place (Describe):

Approval Valard Representative: Date: Date:

Area: Date: Location: Permit #:

Valard Representative Responsible for Excavation 1.

Proposed Start Date: Expected Completion Date:

2. Company Executing Work

3.

Method of Penetration Digger: Yes No Hydrovac: Yes No

4. Type: Backhoe: Yes No Hand dig: Yes No

5. Other (Name):

6.

7.

Purpose of Excavation:

8. Signature of Valard’s supervisor: Date:

1. Is Tailboard Completed? Yes: No: 2. Does Tailboard indicate compliance with regulations? Yes: No: 3. Has Provincial One-Call been notified and copy attached? Yes: No: 4. Has the ground condition been checked? Yes: No: 5. Is the trench over 4 feet deep? Shoring or Cutback provided? Yes: No: 6. Shoring or Cutback provided? Yes: No: 7. Access Ladders provided? Yes: No: 8. Workers trained in Excavations? Yes: No:

NOTE: Copy of Applicable Provincial One Call must be attached to Permit

Page 10 of 10




Act, Section 1(1)g Definition of Competent Worker

Act, Section 14(2) Direction of Workers

Act, Section 15(1) Worker Training

Part 32- Excavations and Tunnelling - all Sections


Part 20 – Construction, Excavations, and Demolition – Section 20.28-20.95 – Excavations

Yukon Act 1 – Definition of “Competent Person” (a)(b)(c)

Part 1- General_ Section 1.06- Training of Worker

Part 10 – Construction and Building Safety – Section 10.62- 10.72

Saskatchewan

Part 1 – Preliminary Matters – Section 2(1)(M) Definition “Competent”

Part 1 – Preliminary Matters – Section 19(1)(2)(3)(4) – Training of worker

Part XVII – excavations, Trenches, Tunnels, and Excavated Shafts – All Sections


Part 16 – Machines, Tools, and Robots – Section 16.3(a)(b)- Duty to Inform Part 26 – Excavations and Tunnels – All Sections

Ontario Part 1 – General- Section 1 – Definition “Competent Worker” (a)(b)(c) Part III – Excavations –All Sections

NWT Part 1 – General Safety – Section (9)(10) –Instruction to Workers Part V- Construction and Maintenance- Section 396-432 - Excavations

Page 1 of 5

Document Description Lockouts Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.032


26.032 LOCK-OUT PRACTICE

POLICY This policy is designed to ensure the protection of personnel working on or around any equipment and/or energy source and to prevent damage of equipment. This policy is to be understood and used by all contractors and employees operating on Valard’s Construction sites. All workers are to be trained in the company’s lockout procedure prior to be permitted to work on any equipment requiring a lockout process. All equipment that is energized will fall in this category. Lockout requirements must be followed whenever there is construction, repairs, maintenance or other work on or about a machine, equipment, process, or system, which represents a potential hazard to personnel safety of health and property. It applies to the positive isolation of all energy sources (i.e. electricity, compressed air/gases, hydraulics, steam, mechanical, gravity, pipelines and vacuum.) All energy sources must be turned off, disconnected, and/or released before maintenance is performed. If the unexpected energization or startup of machinery or equipment or the unexpected release of an energy source could cause injury, the energy source must be isolated and effectively controlled. This policy and procedure is intended to supplement but not replace the regulations set out by the Occupational Health and Safety Regulations and the contractor's contractual requirements. When circumstances require the applications of lockout procedures, the isolating device shall be secured in the inoperative position by the use of scissors and locks. Such locks shall be marked and tagged to identify the person applying them, as well as the contractor. A logbook must be maintained with the lock number and to whom it is issued. Each contractor must maintain contact arrangements would the need arise to have the lock removed. When a piece of equipment must be worked on by the shop mechanics, they will remove the key from the ignition and hang a “DO NOT OPERATE” tag on the steering wheel, and must keep the key in his/her pocket until such time as the work is completed. Failure to adhere to these procedures will result in disciplinary action, potentially including dismissal. DEFINITIONS

Zero Energy State: All hazardous energy sources must be isolated and locked out to prevent any injury or damage Sources such as: electrical, compressed gas or steam, chemical, hydraulic, tensioned spring, mechanical or elevated object that could release and endanger a worker or damage equipment. Energy Isolating Device A device that prevents the supply of energy to machinery, equipment or specific systems, but is not limited to switches, circuit breakers, valves and clutches.

Page 2 of 5



Push Button Electrical Switches and Check Valves are not considered to be isolating devices. DO NOT USE THEM AS SUCH. Lockout The placing of locks, lockout devices or an isolating device, in accordance with the lock-out procedure, to control hazardous energy or other related hazards. Personal Lock A key type padlock issued to a worker intended only for locking energy sources in an inoperative or safe position. The only keys for a personal lock are in the possession of the worker to whom the lock was issued.

Scissor system: for use for group lockouts. A multi-hole clamp device which is connected to a lock-out point and then the personal locks are applied to the holes in the scissor. Never put a personal lock in the last hole of a scissor, always attach another scissor and then put the lock in the new scissor. Tag A tag used to convey information about the equipment or process that is locked out. The tag must be attached to the personal lock. Tags without locks do not constitute lock out. Log Book A log book or Binder with the Lockout Log Sheets shall be kept indicating the following

information for every lock put into service:

• Date of lock-out installed • Equipment identification including number where possible • Name of individual • Signature of applicant • Lock number • Name and date when lock is removed

PRACTICE 1. No personnel will work on any equipment that represents a safety hazard unless that

equipment is properly locked-out. 2. The contractor's supervisors are to determine what needs to be locked-out before

proceeding with any work. 3. The electrical and mechanical contractors responsible in each area will designate a

responsible employee to assist all other trades in locating the necessary switches drives or piping which must be locked out. The designated responsible employee of the electrical or mechanical contractor in each area will physically isolate the equipment/system.

Page 3 of 5



4. The supervisor responsible for the personnel who will be working on the

equipment/system install scissor and lock with lock-out permit tag on the isolating device, immediately assuring the equipment will not operate by which ever means necessary, i.e.: local jog button, start/stop switch.

With equipment, activate the control button or switch two (2) times to ensure that the equipment is de-energised.

5. All personnel who will be working on the equipment are required to place their

own lock with tag on isolating devices. This includes all engineering staff and vendor representatives.

5.1 Locks used for lockout procedure will not be used for any other purpose and

shall be permanently numbered. 5.2 All keys will be under the control of the area supervisor/Superintendent or

construction manager. 5.3 A logbook entry will be made for each lock issued. Each individual requiring a

lock shall sign the logbook or Lockout Log Sheet for their lock. This will be kept in the Superintendent’s possession at all times.

5.4 No person shall work under another person’s lock.

6. Lock-out tags are to be attached to advise others that the pieces of equipment

have been isolated and locked-out. Tags will have the name of the contractor, supervisor, worker, date and brief description recorded on them.

7. Each worker who works on machinery, equipment or system, which is shut down

for construction, maintenance or repair, will ensure:

a) Any equipment that is held up by fluid or air pressure is securely blocked. b) Air rams are completely bled off. c) Lock(s) are applied to power, not control circuits. d) Blinding or blanking is in place if that is the required isolation. e) That their lock and tag is removed when they leave the site of the work or are

no longer working on the equipment. f) Lines may be locked out using a double block with a bleed between to 2

block valves. The valve operators will be locked out using the approved system as stated in this section.

8.) When the work is completed and after all personal locks have been removed, the

supervisor will make a final check of the equipment before removing his lock to assure that it is safe to operate and that all guards are in place before proceeding with clearing of lock-out. Workers are not permitted to energize any equipment in order to do any checks.

9.) Locks

Page 4 of 5



a) A master key for all personal locks shall be kept by the contractor in a secure location and shall only be used by a designated delegate, following proper procedures.

b) No one shall remove any personal lock other than his own except as noted in the lock removal by others procedure.

c) If the worker has left site (quit, discharged or injured), his/her personal locks must be removed by others procedure.

d) Locks and Keys must be returned to the proper authority immediately following completion of work.

10.) Lock Removal by Others

a) The owner of the personal lock must be positively identified. b) All reasonable efforts have been made to contact the worker who placed the

lock, i.e. camp, motel, home, and have them return to site and remove their lock.

c) If the worker cannot be contacted or is incapable of removing the lock, the contractor representative must ensure that no other workers will be endangered if the lock is removed and that no process or machinery will be damaged.

d) A representative of the project safety department should be present when locks are removed.

e) Lock removal should be done with the master key, with cutting of the lock or scissors being the last resort.

f) All information regarding the personal lock removal must be documented on the lockout log sheet form.

Any employee, whose lock has to be removed by other authorities, is subject to disciplinary action.

11.) If you are in doubt about lock-out or lock-out procedures, contact your supervisor

or the project safety supervisor. 12.) Each supervisor will verify strict compliance with this procedure through periodic

inspections. The supervisor must ensure each affected employee is instructed in the purpose and use of this procedure via tailboard meetings, on-the-job training and through supervisors and pre-job planning meetings.

13.) All workers who are not involved in the work such as Pigging in pipelines shall not enter the work area until the area is deemed safe. Valard employees do not enter/work in areas where this work is performed.

Page 5 of 5



Regulatory Reference: Alberta Part 15- Lock Out – All Sections British Columbia Part 10- De-energization and Lock Out- All Sections Yukon Part 3 – Lock Out- All Sections Saskatchewan Part X – Machine Safety – Section 139 – Locking Out Manitoba Part 16 – Machines, Tools, and Robots – Section 16.14-16.18 – Locking Out Ontario Part II – General Construction – Section 188-189 – Lock Outs NWT Part V- Construction and Maintenance – Section 141-149

Page 1 of 2

Document Description Boosting Vehicles Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.033


26.033 BOOSTING VEHICLES PURPOSE: The purpose of this procedure is to ensure boosting is done in a safe manner.

PRACTICE Vehicle batteries contain sulphuric acid. Improper boosting may cause batteries to rupture or explode. It is important to follow the following procedure.

1. Turn off the ignition and all accessories in both vehicles.

2. Put both vehicles in park or neutral with parking brakes set. The vehicles must not touch each other.

3. Attach one end of the positive booster cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery. Attach the other end of the positive booster cable to the positive terminal of the dead battery. Good metal-to-metal contacts are necessary. Warning: Do not allow the ends of both cables to touch while attached to the batteries; sparks and short circuits will result.

4. Then attach one end of the negative cable to the negative terminal of the booster battery, be certain that the opposite end of the negative cable is not contacting either the positive cable or any part of either vehicle.

5. Connect the remaining end of the negative cable to the engine block or thick metal frame of the vehicle with the dead battery. The connection should be made at a level lower than the battery and as far away from it as possible, but still under the hood. This will reduce the possibility of igniting any hydrogen gas that may be present above the dead battery. Ensure the cable will not contact any moving parts.

6. Start the engine of the vehicle that has the booster battery. Let it run for a few minutes with the cables attached. Then start the engine of the vehicle with the dead battery. After the boosted engine has been started, disconnect the booster cable connections in the reverse order of attaching them.

a) The negative cable from the block or frame. b) The negative cable from the booster battery. c) The positive cable from the dead battery. d) Finally, the positive cable from the booster battery.

7. If vent caps were removed from the boosted battery, replace them.

8. Use the accessories on the boosted vehicle sparingly until the battery is fully charged. If the engine should stop before the battery is charged up, it may need another boost.

Page 2 of 2

Document Description Boosting Vehicles Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.033










Page 1 of 3

Document Description Operating Nodwell

Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.034 Date: Sept. 23, 2003 Revision: 3 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: April 29, 2013

26.034 OPERATING FLEXTRAC NODWELL PURPOSE: To insure the safe operation on the equipment as well as its limitations. PRACTICE: All employees who are to operate this equipment must be trained. STARTING: Prior to starting this equipment the following checks must be made:

• Crankcase oil

• Coolant level

• Handbrake set- ON

• Gear selector in neutral (standard transmission) or park (if auto transmission)

• Power take-off in neutral

Engine must be allowed to warm up prior to moving the equipment.

RUNNING: Clutch must be used to start or stop equipment while engine is running.

NOTE: Vehicle must NOT be ALLOWED to roll in gear with the clutch disengaged. If it is to be put into gear on a slope, precautions must be taken to prevent it from rolling forwards or backwards.

If the vehicle is to be operated on terrain, which is not level, a dozer or other piece of equipment must accompany the equipment and be connected to it in order to prevent it from rolling uncontrolled. Before commencing to climb any slope the appropriate gear must be selected. NOTE: DO NOT SHIFT GEARS WHILE MOVING EITHER UP OR DOWNHILL. STEERING: Allow levers to go fully forward when steering action is not required. “Riding” the levers will result in excessive steering brake band glazing and wear, as well as differential wear. Do not hold the steering lever for any extended period of time. If a long turn is to be made, make it in short stages. It will avoid heat build up and minimize wear and tear on the vehicle. Always allow vehicle to start rolling before attempting to steer.

OPERATING: SIDE HILLING: Ground projections and hollows must be avoided. Problem with side hilling for any length of time, is overheating and glazing of the steering brake bands on the uphill side of the crossbar.

MUSKEG: When operating in muskeg be on the lookout for protruding trees and bushes which can tangle up in underside of the vehicle and cause damage to hydraulics lines, fans, belts or radiator, etc. Avoid returning on a path already travelled. Beware of large stretches of water unless the depth is known. MUD: Drive slowly through mud and allow the vehicle to follow its own course.

Page 2 of 3



SNOW: In deep snow allow the vehicle to find its own path. Too much control or steering will make it dig down. Use short pulls on the steering levers to prevent track slippage.

TREES AND SHRUBS: As with muskeg watch for tree limbs they could get caught up in the vehicle. Do not try to drive over trees of more than four (4) inches in diameter, either cut them down or drive around them. Avoid a situation, which requires backing up over trees and shrubs.

SALVAGING MATERIAL: During any salvage operations material must be placed on a trailer, which is to be attached to the Nodwell’s hitch. No material is to be placed on the deck, which can impede either access or visibility to operate the equipment.

LOADING OF NODWELL: This equipment must be loaded with the following followed:

• Tailboard must be completed

• Trailer must be level

• Only trained personnel to load the equipment

• Trailer deck must be clean.

• Equipment to be secured as per Alberta Transportation's requirements

VACATING THE VEHICLE: Always set the hand brake when vacating the cab of the vehicle. Regulatory Reference

Alberta Act, Section 1(1)g Definition of Competent Worker Act, Section 14(2) Direction of Workers Act, Section 15(1) Worker Training Part 19 -Powered Motorized Mobile Equipment -All Sections British Columbia

Part 2- Application- Section 2.2- General Duties Part 16- Mobile Equipment – All Sections

Yukon Act 1 – Definition of “Competent Person” (a)(b)(c) Part 1- General_ Section 1.06- Training of Worker Part 6- Mobile Equipment – All Sections

Saskatchewan Part 1 – Preliminary Matters – Section 2(1)(M) Definition “Competent” Part 1 – Preliminary Matters – Section 19(1)(2)(3)(4) – Training of worker Part XI – Powered Mobile Equipment- All Sections


Part 16 – Machines, Tools, and Robots – Section 16.3(a)(b)- Duty to Inform Part 22- Powered Mobile Equipment

Ontario Part 1 – General- Section 1 – Definition “Competent Worker” (a)(b)(c) Part II- General Construction- Sections 93-105

NWT

Page 3 of 3



Part 1 – General Safety – Section (9)(10) –Instruction to Workers Part V- Construction and Maintenance- Section 200-239

Page 1 of 19

VALARD

Document Description Bonding and Grounding Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.036


26.036 BONDING AND GROUNDING PRACTICE Purpose: To provide the worker with guidelines and a practice on the accepted process in which work activities on electrical systems are performed in a safe and reliable manner. Bonding: Is a method of physical interconnecting conductive parts to maintain a common potential. Bonding is performed in order to avoid harmful shock currents by minimizing any potential difference across the workers body. A jumper is to be used to tie the conductor/circuit to a bonding point such as an equipotential band, ground mat/grid below the workers feet.

Grounding: Is a method of connecting an isolated conductor to a low resistance ground, in order to trip the circuit as quickly as possible and minimize voltage rise on the circuit. Grounding, by itself, does not protect the worker from harmful shock currents. Bonding Application Procedure: Acceptable equipotential bonding methods must be used when a worker is within the limits of approach of an isolated electrical circuit and there is a possible source of energization. Bonding is also required when working on an isolated circuit, which runs parallel to an energized circuit (induction)

* SEE LIMITS OF APPROACH TABLES IN HS&E MANUAL SWP 26.002*

The following considerations must be applied when bonding;

1) Bonds to phases, neutrals, and shield wires must be applied with a hot stick Note: Does not include down leads.

If the neutrals or shield wires are interconnected with the phases at another location, then all the wires must be treated as phase conductors.

2) Bonds between pole bands and down leads can be made by hand. There is no practical means of avoiding down leads while climbing; planning the amount of exposure time must be minimized before the equipotential zone is set up

3) On wooden poles without down leads, a jumper to a pole band must be used. The pole band is to be positioned low enough to protect the worker climbing and high enough to protect the ground man as well.

4) On poles with down leads, there are two (2) options for setting up equipotential zones. • The preferred method is to use a pole band bonded to the conductors and down

lead. • An equipotential zone can be created above bonded through-bolts by bonding

the down lead to the conductors. If work is to be performed below all of the bonded bolts a pole band must be used.

Do not rely on the connection between the shield wire/neutral to down leads to provide bonding. When in doubt install a bonding jumper between the overhead and the down lead.

Page 2 of 19

VALARD



5) A through-bolt on a pole is an acceptable alternative to a pole band if the following are

performed; • The bolt is bonded to the conductors • The bolt is tight and snug-fitting • A worker can work comfortably above the bolt • Do not permit a small gauge bonding wire for hardware to become in series

with the tripping circuit 6) All conductive paths must be bonded together to form an equipotential zone. 7) To ensure the maintaining equipotential zones, the phases and neutral/shield wires must

be bonded together either at the site. 8) There is some level of grounding when bonded to concrete and wooden poles with down

leads.

Grounding Application Procedure: 1) Grounds are applied in order to trip the circuit, minimize voltage rise in back feed

situations, or minimize static induction. 2) During the application of grounding the following must be considered; connecting a

circuit to ground does not mean the voltage will be “zero”. If a conductor becomes energized at 14,400 volts the voltage at the ground probe will also be 14,000 v. because they are tied together. Step and touch potential hazards will exist any time there is a source of energy, including induction.

3) A ground is always required to trip circuits when accidentally energized. 4) The circuit must be connected to the best possible grounding point.

Grounding alternatives are listed below in order of effectiveness:

i. Substation Ground grids (less than 1 ohm, high capacity) ii. Systems neutral/shield wires (3-6 ohms, Medium capacity) iii. Deep driven ground rods/tower legs (3-10 ohms, Med. Capacity) iv. Equipment or single rod grounds (17-25 ohms, Med. Capacity) v. Temporary ground rods (10-20,000 ohms, very low capacity)

Note: When using a substation ground grid be aware of the operating condition

of the substation at the time it is being used.

Typically temporary grounds must have no more than 30 ohms to be effective trip grounds.

5) Temporary ground rods are to be used as a last resort. 6) If a good grounding point is not available at the work site a ground can be installed

remotely. Insure that there are no possible open points between the site and the grounding location. Note: conductor adds additional resistance to the tripping circuit and reduces the effectiveness.

Page 3 of 19

VALARD



7) When induction is a consideration, the installation of two (2) or more grounding points can cause circulating currents. Large circulating currents can create step and touch potential hazards around the grounding points.

8) When attaching to the single ground rod at a structure an additional ground probe must be used to insure integrity of the system, which may be insufficient due to corrosion and deterioration.

BONDING AND GROUNDING GUIDELINES: 1) If guy wires, grounds or neutrals are involved, they must be bonded into the zone. 2) Be aware of the step and touch potentials for the ground man when there is a vehicle or

piece of equipment tied to the zone. 3) When stringing over energized lines, arrange your work in order that the work is

performed in the least amount of time and for the shortest distance. 4) If work is to be done on a rural transformer pole, avoid work on the meter base when

there is a zone established on the top of the pole. 5) Remove the equipment or vehicle as soon as possible after completing the task

associated with it/them. This reduces the hazard to the ground man. 6) Install all bond leads with a hot stick as isolated conductors and equipment are tied into

the zone. A sequencing of work steps can be done so that there is not a need for a hot stick when attaching to down leads, guy wires, anchor rods, vehicles and bands.

7) Be aware of bad connections, which may produce a voltage drop in a zone that could be harmful.

8) Ground chains must be inspected yearly for contaminated connection or clamp. 9) A suitable jumper across the switch should be applied when working on a structure with

a fused disconnect. 10) Insure that there are no fused disconnects between the work area and the tripping

ground. STRUCTURAL WORK GUIDELINES:

1) A zone must be produced on the structure being worked on. Most effective means is with a rated pole band.

2) Produce a zone on a wood or concrete pole using a rated pole band. Ensure that the rebar in the concrete structures is bonded into the zone.

3) A steel tower or pole can be bonded into the zone by using the appropriate clamp attached directly to the structure or an appropriate stud.

4) Climbing over the band with a bonding jumper(s) in place must be done quickly to minimize the possibility of the hazard. Best means is to remove the bonding jumper before climbing over the band. In these cases, make sure that the zone is built in a way that only one jumper needs to be removed.

5) When approaching conductive structures such as steel, or structures that have conductive components like guy wires or down leads, there is a risk of step and touch potentials.

Page 4 of 19

VALARD



6) Handling conductors possess more risk than working on a structure. The risks include step and touch potentials. Approved equipotential methods are:

a. Conductive platforms such as a bonding mat or the deck of a truck, with all of the conductors and the platform bonded together.

b. If a bond mat or platform is not feasible then all handling of the conductors must be with rubber gloves.

REMEMBER: There is still the possibility of step potential, avoid contact between conductors and other parts of your body.

SPLICING CONDUCTORS GUIDELINES: • Always jumper conductors across the break to avoid dangerous potential differences.

Even if a conductor is grounded on both sides of a break, each side can be at different potentials from induction or some other energy source.

• A bond across the break can be achieved in different ways. A sample of creating bonds is shown below in the drawing.

• If possible avoid splicing on the ground. • Means to minimize risk when splicing conductors to find a reliable way to protect worker

are; 1. Use bond mat whenever conductor is handled on the ground. 2. Use the deck of the truck as a ground mat by bonding the truck to the

conductor. 3. Perform the work up from the structures in the equipotential zones by:

Page 5 of 19

VALARD



• Equipotential Method: a. Cutting the span of conductor out b. Use a new section of wire c. Perform splices from the structure in the equipotential

zones • Isolated and Grounded Method (not a equipotential method)

If the Equipotential method can not be used the following must be considered:

A. Equipotential method must still be used when working on structures.

B. Job must be planned to minimize exposure time on the ground.

C. Care must be taken when creating isolation points.

D. If an equipotential zone cannot be established then rubber gloves must be worn.

E. If rubber gloves are being used to splice on the ground that the risk increases with the time to perform the task.

F. Rubber gloves may be adequate for automatic splice, but when a two piece compression splice is done, equipotential methods must be used.

G. When working on the ground, be aware of possible risks including step and touch potentials if the lines become energized.

H. Conductors are to be handled with rubber gloves only. POLE/STRUCTURE REPLACEMENT GUIDELINES:

A. Electrical connections required to bond conductors together can be achieved away from the actual work site.

B. The sequence of the replacement must be planned to minimize the number of times jumpers need to be connected and disconnected.

C. Rubber gloves must be used when handling poles that will be coming within the limits of approach of the isolated and grounded conductor(s).

D. Steel and concrete poles, or wood poles with down leads and guy wires could directly transfer hazardous voltage to workers handling the pole on the ground. Either move the pole out of the limits of approach or move the conductors out of the way.

E. Once the poles are in the hole but still within the limits of approach of the isolated and grounded conductors, rubber gloves may be removed when contacting poles.

The possibility of step and touch potential still exists. F. For poles with down leads and guy wires without rated guy strain insulators, make

connections between the ground rod and anchor rod before they are bonded in with the other wires on the structure; otherwise a continuity jumper must be placed across the open point. This prevents the worker from becoming the path for current flow from any source of energy, including induction.

Page 6 of 19

VALARD



CONDUCTOR/EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL ENTERING OR LEAVING THE EQUIPOTENTIAL ZONE:

A. Hand lines should be kept as clean and dry as possible to avoid leakage currents which could cause a shock hazard. Where it is possible, hang the hand line on wood products such as cross arms or poles.

B. Be careful of the possible hazard that may be transferred to the vehicle. Operators should remain on the truck or a bonded ground mat.

C. Bond hydraulic and electric tools where hoses/wires extend outside the zone. D. Conductors that are being brought into or removed from a zone, must be bonded to the

zone (i.e. hanging slack span or new tap) E. Material and wire being sent or used within the zone (i.e. a coil of wire) do not have to be

bonded unless they are extending outside the zone.

WORKING FROM A BUCKET:

1. Electrically (voltage) Rated and Tested Boom; • The boom or truck does not need to be tied into the zone. • Conductors to be worked on must have a trip ground on them. • The cover must be removed from the boom. • The boom must be treated the same as a hot stick and wiped down before use. • Within limits of approach of the structure, an equipotential zone must be created on

the structure. • The zone is required since the worker in the bucket could come in contact with the

conductor and structure at the same time. • All tested insulated sections must be visible when the vehicle is in the zone. • Limits of Approach must be maintained from adjacent phases.

2. Using Un-rated Booms;

• The boom or truck must be tied into the equipotential zone.

• When the vehicle is tied into the equipotential zone, the workers must be made aware of the hazards of touching or stepping on and off the truck.

• If the boom has insulated sections, bonding above the insulation will reduce the risk to workers on the ground.

CUTTING OPEN WIRE OR JUMPERS: • Any time you cut open a conductor or jumper, you must insure you have continuity by

bonding the two sides together to prevent voltage differences across the break.

Page 7 of 19

VALARD



WORKING PROCEDURES FOR BONDED AREA:

• SINGLE, TWO AND THREE PHASE LINES WITH SYSTEM NEUTRAL GUIDELINES;

All Single Phase system with a neutral ground will require all conductors and Guy Wires to be bonded together to a band on each structure that is being worked on.

• BONDED SECTIONS 2 OR 3 PHASE LINE GUIDELINES:

1. Bonded Area- No Guys, Neutrals, Grounds or Taps

• Ground at a preferred location • Install bonds at any location where there is a power system source. • Place a band at an appropriate location and bond to one phase at the structures

where the work is performed.

2. Bonded Area-With Guys and Grounds. • Produce a bonded area as required • Ground at a preferred location.

Work on Structure #2

If jumpers will be opened, both sides must be bonded.

Keep most of the jumpers away from the work site.

Grounding to trip the circuit.

1

2

3

Only require pole band and bond to one phase (two bonds if jumpers will be opened).

Bonding to protect workers.

Page 8 of 19

VALARD



• Place a band at the appropriate location on the structure that work is being done. • Bond to all phase conductors, guy wires, equipment grounds, lightning arrestors,

return “A” ground, or any grounded point on these structures.

• POTENTIAL BACKFEED GUIDELINE: • Bond all phases of the main line or line being worked on where a tap(s) enters the

bonded area and the tap is classified as power system source. Remember that you cannot rely on switches/fuses to maintain electrical continuity between bonds and grounds.

• If a tap entering a bonded area is deemed a power system source because it has a 100 kVA or greater per phase transformer, it can be managed by:

• bonding all phases together as required

• removing secondary cables from bushings in such a manor that they cannot make contact with bushings and tag

• opening, visibly identifying opening, tagging and locking, with a company lock, the main secondary breaker

• Produce zone on structure you are working on.

TWO AND THREE PHASE SYSTEMS WITH A CONTINUOUS NEUTRAL/SHEILD WIRE(S)

This type of job is one of the more complicated and difficult to use equipotential practices.

The Risk: If the line becomes accidentally energized, the neutrals/shield wires cause currents to flow in a way that can result in large voltage differences between conductors and a hazard for the lineman.

Managing the Risk:

The person responsible for the job must decide on the best strategy for managing the risks in discussion with the crew, before proceeding. • The normal method of dealing with these systems is to use equipotential practices by

bonding all conductors and neutrals/shield wires on every pole where you are working. You are accountable to explore the feasibility of equipotential practices before considering other alternatives.

• If the complexities of the job make normal equipotential practices unworkable you must use the following practices to manage the risks:

o Limit the length of your work area to 1 km. o Bond and ground all conductors together at all power system sources. o Identify job sites where there is a possibility of backfeed and take additional

precautions to eliminate this hazard (i.e. Remove secondaries, or ground primaries or secondaries.)

• When working on a structure you must go from the band to the neutral and to all phases. If you are changing or replacing conductors, bond to one of the new conductors to make it easier to remove the old ones.

Page 9 of 19

VALARD



The risk has been reduced but if the line does become energized there will still be voltage differences between some conductors which could be hazardous. POWER SYSTEM SOURCE Definition: A *power system source is a generator of electricity with high voltage and has the capacity to deliver a hazardous current flow, including:

another power line that could become connected to your circuit through:

• A switching error (normal and loop feeds) • Line crossings • Overbuilt or under built circuits • Parallel lines (leaned lines, others circuits in the same corridor) • Energized cables in the same trench • One single transformer of 100 kVA per phase or larger. This assumes there could be

some form of back-up generation at these sites that would have the capacity to produce a hazardous current flow in the bonded area.

• A line that extends more than 8 km from a bonded area • Atmospheric conditions • Independent power producers

STRINGING OR SALVAGING CONDUCTOR Equipotential Bonding and Grounding methods shall be used when stringing or salvaging conductors.

Page 10 of 19

VALARD



STRINGING OR SALVAGING CONDUCTOR (cont’d) • There are often many alternatives to stringing lines. Choose the methods that will

minimize your exposure to risks. You may have to develop some new methods or use different equipment; be creative.

• Conductors must be bonded and grounded before they are pulled. • Use tension stringing whenever possible, to minimize or control hazards on the ground. • When handling conductors on the ground, use a bond mat or an approved conductive

platform, such as the deck of a truck, bonded to all conductors to create an equipotential zone whenever possible.

• If after completing a hazard assessment an equipotential zone can not be produced to handle conductor on the ground, you must use rubber gloves.

• Do not handle the conductors when they are moving or being pulled. • There must be a person, who is deemed competent and understands the risks &

hazards involved with the task, observing the reel(s) at all times while stringing conductor.

• Limit the handling of the conductors on the ground when conductor is being hung. • If, after completing a hazard assessment, it is determined that the line cannot

become energized by any means and connected one ground to drain static, you may string, hang and tie-in the conductor without equipotential bonding and grounding providing the length of the line is less than 3 km.

Stringing or Salvaging Conductor Parallel to an Energized Line • Equipotential Bonding and Grounding methods shall be used when stringing or

salvaging conductors. • Choose the methods that will minimize your hazards. You may have to develop some

new methods or use different equipment; be creative. • Conductors and equipment must be bonded and grounded before stringing begins. • Use tension stringing whenever possible, to minimize or control hazards on the ground. • When handling conductors on the ground, use a bond mat or an approved conductive

platform, such as the deck of a truck, bonded to all conductors to create an equipotential zone whenever possible.

• After completing a hazard assessment, an equipotential zone cannot be produced to handle conductor on the ground, you must use rubber gloves.

• Do not handle the conductors when they are moving or being pulled. • There must be a person, who is deemed competent and understands the risks &

hazards involved with the task, observing the reel(s) at all times while stringing conductor.

• Limit the handling of the conductors on the ground when conductor is being hung. • If conductors are left unattended, long term or over night on stringing dollies or other

attachments to the wood pole they must:

Page 11 of 19

VALARD



• Be attached at a height that maintains the proper ground clearance according to the ECUC at the intended operating voltage of the circuit that the conductor is part of.

• Not be within 150 mm of any hardware on the structure.

• Maintain 500 mm or be insulated from any neutral, ground wire, grounded hardware or guy wire.

• If a bonded zone has been produced on the ground, provisions for safe exit and entry must be provided. For example, a raised platform covered with rubber mats.

Butt Down/Tie Down Locations

Caution! Always consider electrical and mechanical protection at locations where a conductor is handled by an employee or where contact could be made by the public, regardless of whether there is any possibility of accidental energization.

• Electrical Protection refers to the steps to manage electrical hazards, including

induction, by using proper ground clearances, trip grounds, insulation and equipotential zones.

• Mechanical Protection refers to barricades, flagging or supervision, to prevent staff or public from contacting the conductors.

Butt Down/Tie Down Locations cont’d

The strategy and practices you apply will depend upon whether you are dealing with: • temporary situations (within the workday) • longer term situations (overnight or longer) • the two options for tying conductors off are at: • ground level • overhead

Butt Down/Tie-Down Temporary Situations – Ground Level

Risks of Tying Conductors Off At Ground level In the past people and livestock have been killed and injured and grass fires have resulted due to conductors being tied off at ground level and/or inadequate grounding installed and left for extended periods. The cause has mainly been induction but can occur from any form of accidental energization.

The following work procedures shall be followed. • Control the situation at the butt down location, realizing that at times you could be a

kilometer or more away from that location, while the stringing continues.

Page 12 of 19

VALARD



• Flag, barricade or supervise the conductors at the butt down location if there is any possibility of the public coming in contact with the conductors.

• If the conductors can become accidentally energized these precautions must also be followed:

o Bond and ground all conductors at the butt-down and/or on the trailer to prevent a potential difference between conductors.

o Move trip ground closer to butt down location before handling conductors on the ground. If there is an energized parallel line a large loop will produce a circulating current. If possible, avoid large loops.

o Keep the trip ground close but out of the job site to prevent step potential problems, ideally a span away or no closer than 10 meters to the work location.

o Use a bond mat bonded to the conductors or after a hazard assessment rubber gloves can be used when handling the conductor.

o Remember there is still a possibility of step potential.

• When stringing parallel to an energized line the hazard increases due to induction.

Butt Down/Tie-Down Temporary Situations – Overhead • Use an equipotential zone when handling conductors on the pole.

• No marking or barricading is required if the conductors maintain proper Electrical and Communication Board (ECUC) clearances for isolated wires and the land use classification.

• If clearances are not maintained with the wires, you must consider flagging, barricading and/or supervision, depending upon the location, job practices and your assessment of the hazard to public or worker.

Butt Down/Tie-Down Long Term Situations – Ground Level Control the situation at the butt down location.

• Barricade or supervise the conductors if there is any possibility of the public coming in contact with the conductors. Barricades should extend sufficiently to properly protect the conductors and should be made of a non-conductive material. (i.e. plastic snow fence.)


• When handling conductors use a bond mat bonded to the conductors. If after a hazard assessment rubber gloves must be used.

• The conductors will have rated insulation cut in at a height that the insulation cannot be reached by unqualified persons.

• All temporary grounds will be removed if conductors are isolated from the ground.

• If insulation cannot be cut into the conductors they must be protected mechanically with appropriate fencing so that absolutely no access can be obtained by unqualified persons.

Page 13 of 19

VALARD



• Fencing should be of a non-conductive material and danger signs installed warning of the possible electrical danger that exists and all conductors will be bonded together and grounded by a 10-ohm ground.

• There will be only one ground left on the conductors at the fenced location to eliminate static voltage and not permit a circulating current.

Butt Down/Tie-Down Long Term Situations – Overhead • Maintain proper ECUC clearances for isolated wires and the land use classification.


• An equipotential zone must be produced on the pole before handling the conductors.

• The tails or ends of conductors that could reach the ground will be coiled up and attached in a safe elevated position.

• Conductors dead ended without insulators require ground and bonded to the butt end of the pole.

• Conductors dead ended with insulators then no ground is required.

Restoration The following information is to give you guidelines for restoration of overhead lines during emergency or none standard work. EB&G methods are to be followed at all times. Use this information to support the work required in sometime difficult situations.

Broken Conductor • Ground both sides of work location

• Produce equipotential zone or use rubber gloves when handling the conductors (

• If poles are leaning an excessive amount they must be supported

• Use digger truck

• Use conductors to support structures

• Take tension on one of the broken conductors

• Jack conductors together as much as possible and splice

• Check structures to ensure they are safe to climb

• Work from one structure continuing to jack conductors to straighten poles

• Use bucket truck to eliminate climbing structures

• Sag conductors as required

• Equipotential zone will be produced on all structures worked on

Broken Structures With No Neutral • Produce a situation to eliminate all power system sources

Page 14 of 19

VALARD



• Ground both sides of work area in order to handle conductors with rubber gloves if no Equal potential zone is created.

• Clear conductors by cutting or rolling out of the work location

• Consider the publics access to the work site • Conductors would be repaired, hung, sagged and tied in using EB&G methods or

rubber gloves and conductors must have jumper installed.

Broken Structures With Neutral • Grounds must be attached at all Power System Sources

• If after a tailboard discussion, it is determined that EB&G will be in-effective, produce a construction clearance by removing all Power System Sources

• Using EB&G methods remove a span of wire at all Power System Sources

• Do not leave phase conductors bonded to the system in work zone or where accessible by the public

• Maintain system neutral • Remove bond leads from neutral to phase conductors before work proceeds.

This is done to isolate the neutral from the system primary

• Eliminate all possible back feed situations

• Complete all pole replacement and hanging of new conductor as new construction

• Replace bond lead between neutral and phase conductors

• When bringing originally removed spans of wire back to normal EB&G methods must be used

• Grounds should be installed on both sides, try to equalize the zone and if not able to, rubber gloves must be used

Changing Transformers (where GOI is taken from same structure)

The need for EB&G to change transformers is not required when the conditions have been met for the two situations below where a GOI is taken from the same structure.

Changing Transformer with No Primary Switch’s (Rural Farm Service) • Remove the secondary load (trip breaker if applicable)

• Create visual open on primary by removing the riser and put it back on itself

• While maintaining limits of approach create visual open on secondary to eliminate all possible sources of backfeed

• Potential test the primary circuit(s) and install “Men at Work” Isolation Log/Tag.

• Maintain limits of approach and change transformer

Page 15 of 19

VALARD



Changing Transformer with Primary Switch’s on Same Structure

• Remove the secondary load (trip breaker if applicable) • Create visual open on primary by opening the disconnects and removing the riser

• While maintaining limits of approach create visual open on secondary to eliminate all possible sources of backfeed

• Potential test and install “Men at Work” Isolation Log/Tag. • Maintain limits of approach and change transformer

Substation Grounding and Bonding Requirements:

Applying Grounding A temporary protective ground must be installed to trip the circuit in case of accidental energizing also to, minimize voltage rise and to bleed off capacitive charge.

When applying the grounds, consider the following:

• A temporary protective ground is always needed to trip circuits when accidentally energized. Connect the circuit to the station grid. Remember, any type of grounding connection to the earth has some impedance and will limit the amount of current that can be handled safely.

Attach Grounds Directly to the Station Ground Grid Ground connections, when practicable, must be connected directly to the ground grid rather than the steel structure. Clean connection points of all paint, oxidation and contaminants before applying ground clamp.

CAUTION! Ensure that there are no devices that will open under fault conditions between the temporary protective grounds and the worksite.

Solid blade switches and gang switches must be checked, locked and tagged in the closed position when used in the tripping circuit.

When installing temporary protective grounds on bundle conductor all sub conductors must be grounded at that point either with a ground jumper or an aluminium nema path.

Bonding a Bundled Conductor When grounding a bundled conductor, a spacer is not considered an electrical

connection and therefore bonding of the Bundle will be required.

Single Ground Set A single safety ground installed within 30cm2 of an electrical terminal connected to a current carrying yoke may bee bonded to the remainder of the bundle via the yoke.

Page 16 of 19

VALARD



APPLYING THE BONDING Equipotential bonding methods must be used when the equipment being worked on can become energized. The application of bonding is to protect workers from harmful shock currents. When Applying bonding, consider the following:

• Bonds to phased, neutrals, and shield wires must be applied with a hotstick. The reason for using the hotstick is to protect the worker in the event any of the wires are or may become energized.

• Standard practice is to bond all three phases at work locations (NOTE: All paths that current can follow must be bonded)

• The Safe Work Plan should determine the risks when working on or touching the grid.

Examples:

• When working in a trench with feet below the grid and touching the grid

• When working around transformer neutrals or neutral reactors

• When splicing grid conductors.

All Conductive paths must be bonded together to form an equipotential zones, the phases, concentric neutrals, shield wires, guy wires and steel winch lines etc. must be bonded together.

PRACTICES Steps to implement hazard control for various jobs:

• Test for potential

• Temporary protective grounds must be installed

• Bond all phases using a hotstick

• Tie excess ground cable to the structure securely to reduce mechanical stress (Do Not Coil)

Ground Sets Should Be Kept as Short As Possible

Working on Ground: • Protect all workers from step and touch potential • Produce an equipotential zone with the use of a rated ground mat or other approved

conductive platform. • Examples:

o Equipment outside the station fence and connected to the station grid o Step & touch potential which can develop inside the station.

• Use approved protective equipment such as rubber gloves, rubber boots, hotsticks and rubber mats to handle the conductor.

Page 17 of 19

VALARD



CAUTION! Be aware and guard against step and touch potential when using protective equipment instead of a ground mat, Avoid contact between the conductor and unprotected parts of your body.

Be aware of conditions that will render the insulating devices useless such as wet or contaminated conditions and sharp objects.

Splicing or Terminating Underground: When working on an underground cable equipotential bonding and grounding methods must be applied. All possible sources of potential and all possible ground paths must be considered. Rubber gloves must be used until a equipotential zone is established.

Ensure that all conductors are bonded to the equipotential zone

Splicing on the ground: • Bond conductors across the break to avoid dangerous

potential differences.

1. Note: The use of an insulated access mat should be determined from a Safe Work Plan

Note: Alternatives to a ground mat include:

• Working from the deck of the truck or trailer bonded to the conductor and equipment.

CAUTION! Be aware Penetrox™ is conductive and petroleum based and will render rubber based

insulation devices useless.

When working on the bus: • When working from the structure or from an aerial device, ensure all conductive

paths are bonded, including fibreglass ladders.

Equipment/Material Entering or Leaving the Equipotential Zone: • Use hand lines to transport equipment and material in or out of the equipotential

zone ensure handline is not attached to the worker or conductors. Extra precautions are required when the rope is wet.

• Bond truck chassis, boom or steel winch lines into the equipotential zone. Operators are to remain on the truck or a bonded ground mat while the winch line is in the equipotential zone.

• Bond any conductive path that may extend outside the equipotential zone. Working from a Bucket supported by an Unrated Boom:

• Bond the boom, bucket or truck chassis into the equipotential zone.

CAUTION! There is a risk of touch and step potential when stepping on or off the truck that is

bonded into the equipotential zone. The truck and ground could be at different potentials.

Page 18 of 19

VALARD



Cutting open a conductor or working across an open switch: Bond across the work location where there will be gap in the continuity of the circuit,

for example, working on an open switch, removing a riser or cutting a conductor. This will prevent a potential difference across the two open ends.

THIS IS THE MOST IMPORTANT PART OF EQUIPOTENTIAL BONDING AND GROUNDING

Disconnect With a Jumper across Possible opening Any possible gap (break) in the continuity of a conductor requires bonding across such a location. Examples of this are switches and breakers. Be careful not place body in series when applying a jumper.

Vehicle working outside a substation fence, extending inside the fence. • If vehicle is located outside the fence and the extension has to cross the substation

fence it must be grounded to the substation ground grid

• Once the vehicle is grounded to the station grid, all ground personnel must stay clear of the vehicle.

• Operation of the boom equipment must be done from ON the vehicle if possible. If not possible, portable bond mats shall be placed along the vehicle to protect the operator when operating or when stepping on or off the vehicle or anyone near the vehicle, accessing tool bins tec. Workers should limit time stepping on or off the portable ground mats. If portable bond mats are not used the vehicle must be flagged off until the crane or bucket is clear of the equipotential zone.

• Personnel within the substation may receive material only when the vehicle is grounded to the substation grid.

Boom truck outside the substation with personnel off-loading equipment. NOTE:

Degassifier unit, mobile substations and other similar equipment must be grounded or bonded to the station grid when installed. Care should be taken to insure the station grid protects the area. If the station grid does not extend to the required setup location a temporary perimeter ground must be installed. Step and touch potential should be noted in the safe work plan and daily tailboard discussions.

Vehicle working inside a Substation extending outside the fence. • The vehicle in the station must be grounded to the station grid.

• All outside personnel located outside the fence working with loads from the vehicle must work from a ground mat (unless a certified non-conductive sling is used with no chance of contacting boom hook.) The mat must be bonded to the station ground grid.

Page 19 of 19

VALARD



Regulatory References: Alberta Part 40- Electrical British Columbia Part 19 -Electrical Safety Yukon Part 9- Electrical Safety NWT/Nunavut Section 96 Manitoba Part 38 -Electrical Safety Saskatchewan Part XXX- Additional Protection for Electrical Workers- Sections 450-467 Ontario Part II – General Construction- Electrical Hazards Sections 181-195.3

Page 1 of 2

Document Description Hydrovacing Practice Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.038


26.038 OPERATING OF HYDRO-VAC EQUIPMENT

This Safe Work Practice is applied to both trailer and permanent truck equipment.

Hydro-vac equipment operator must be trained in its use. Training documentation must be presented to Valard’s Safety Department prior to operating equipment. Must understand the limitations as well as the Safety requirements of the equipment.

Training:

• H²S Training

• CSTS

• Log Book

• Load Securement

• Pre & post trip inspections

Personal Protective Equipment: The following equipment must be worn at all times while operating hydro-vac equipment.

• CSA approved hardhat, Hearing protection • Eye protection (safety glasses)

• Face Protection (face Shield)

• Safety Footwear

• Long sleeved shirt or jacket. No short sleeved permitted. Signage required:

The following signs are required to perform this task at all locations.

• Hearing Protection Required sign. (This is mandatory no exceptions, not even in the woods. All workers visitors etc. must be warned of the noise.)

• Road signage as per Alberta’s Transportation’s Requirements must be met.

Site Preparation:

• Work area must be accessible for the hydro vac equipment.

• Landowner’s permission must be received if required.

Hydrovacing:

• All areas must be identified using Alberta-one-call or approved locators.

• When hydrovacing these areas, the following must be addressed

o When locating lines insure the line locate.

o If not located in area, hydrovac till the area that is required to be dug must be exposed to insure line is there. ( a minimum of 1 Metre must be hyrovaced in each direction or until line is exposed)

Page 2 of 2

Document Description Hydrovacing Practice Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.038


o If unable to locate line in work area photo must be taken with a measuring tape in the photo showing exact distance exposed. DO NOT write the distance and not provide this picture.

o Expose area perpendicular to the line to be located to verify its exact position.


Act, Section 1(1)g Definition of Competent Worker Act, Section 14(2) Direction of Workers Act, Section 15(1) Worker Training Part 32- Excavations and Tunnelling - all Sections

British Columbia Part 2- Application- Section 2.2- General Duties Part 20 – Construction, Excavations, and Demolition – Section 20.28-20.95 – Excavations

Yukon Act 1 – Definition of “Competent Person” (a)(b)(c) Part 1- General_ Section 1.06- Training of Worker Part 10 – Construction and Building Safety – Section 10.62- 10.72

Saskatchewan Part 1 – Preliminary Matters – Section 2(1)(M) Definition “Competent” Part 1 – Preliminary Matters – Section 19(1)(2)(3)(4) – Training of worker Part XVII – excavations, Trenches, Tunnels, and Excavated Shafts – All Sections




Part III – Excavations –All Sections


Part V- Construction and Maintenance- Section 396-432 - Excavations

Page 1 of 2

Document Description Camp/Site Trailer Setup Practice


26.039 CAMP FACILITIES/ SITE TRAILERS SETUP AND REMOVAL Valard Construction has developed a procedure in order that the environment is protected at all times, this process must be adhered to at all times.

• Location must be chosen so that the camp is not setup where there is a possibility that contaminant may run or leak down to any waterways.

• The right-of-way shall be maintained in an orderly condition, free of accumulated waste products, debris, and litter. All garbage and construction debris shall be removed on a daily basis, and disposed of at a landfill site.

• Liquid waste containment for both the washrooms and kitchens will be drained into a holding tank which shall be pumped out regularly to prevent it from overflowing.

• Waste holding tank must be equipped with an overflow alarm, this is to be tied into the water pressure system so that it will shut down if alarm is activated due to a high level. This must be setup to alarm below the overflow tube.

• Waste Containers will be provided and a waste disposal company will be contracted to maintain it. This applies to the garbage from the rooms and kitchen. (Does not apply to any hazardous material).

• Fuelling and servicing of equipment will be setup so that there will not happen within a 100 meters of the high water mark of any watercourse or standing water body.

• The fueling station will be placed in an area that is not close to vehicular traffic.

• Fuel containers shall be double walled.

• 20 Lb. ABC Fire Extinguishers must be placed approximately 10-20 ft from fuel tanks area. Must be placed at a distance that the flames will not prevent worker form being able to access it.

• Jersey barriers must be placed in a position that prevents vehicles from coming into contact with any fuel, propane, waste water and water containers.

• Equipment maintenance will be restricted to designated and approved areas to prevent contamination of soils by accidental spills of toxic or hazardous material; this area will be checked to insure compliance to this.

• All contaminated soil and vegetation shall be excavated, and disposed of at an approved location. Replacement soil and topsoil may have to be transported to the site as a rehabilitation measure. This will be at the discretion of Valard Construction.

• Oil spills involving Hydraulic oil, Gasoline, or Antifreeze shall be reported immediately to the supervisor on site and receive instructions on the cleanup method. The MSDS must be reviewed prior to any cleanup is started. (if its performed by the appropriate waste disposal Company as per the applicable Environmental cleanup regulations).

Page 2 of 2

Document Description Camp/Site Trailer Setup Practice


• If the spill is less than 5 litres then a spill kit with Absorbal rags or socks may be used as long as the MSDS is checked first.

o Assess the situation and take appropriate measures to contain the spill. o Use absorbal rags and floor dry to clean up the spill. o Contact your supervisor to report spill and receive further instructions. o If spill is less than 5 litres report it to Valard Construction. o If spill is larger than 5 litres the Alberta Environmental Protection Branch

must be notified. On spills of this size it is very important to contain the spill as soon as possible.

o Complete the environmental spill release form and fax to the office and to Environment Canada

The following list is for reportable quantities for common substances. Oils (hydraulic, used, non PCB). ≥ 5 litres

Gasoline, Diesel, or Glycol ≥- 50 litres

PCBs ≥ 50 ppm

• All debris (e.g., trade waste, oil, filters, grease cartridges, lubrication containers, kitchen garbage) shall be collected, and disposed of at a designated and approved facility. All large drums shall be returned to the vendor, or washed, crushed, and disposed of at an approved facility. Due care and attention shall be taken to prevent accidental spills of residual contents during transport and disposal.

• All debris and waste materials shall not be buried on-site, or burned in open barrels

• All garbage and any waste must be cleaned up regularly and a complete area cleanup must be performed as soon as the camp is dismantled.

• All hazardous, toxic, contaminated, and dangerous wastes shall be stored, transported, and disposed of in conformance with the Hazardous Chemicals Act, WHMIS guidelines, and Hazardous Waste Regulations for the Province of Alberta as well as Federal Regulations

When the camp is not required and is to be removed, all material must be removed including any waste as well as the ground must be restored to it original state if it is required.

Page 1 of 2

Document Description Vehicle Extrication Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.040


26.040 VEHICLE/EQUIPMENT EXTRICATION PRACTICE. Valard Construction has from time to time had to pull equipment that are stuck in mud and snow. Valard has developed this practice in order that the when they are to be towed that there will be minimal environmental and equipment damage when it must be performed. Equipment to be recovered Recovery Equipment Sling Size Digger Truck Dozer, Loader, Trackhoe,

Digger 3” X 20’

Loader Dozer, Loader, Trackhoe 2” X 20’ Backhoe Dozer, Loader, Trackhoe,

Digger 3” X 20’

Trackhoe Dozer, Loader, Trackhoe 4” X 20’ Boom Truck Dozer, Loader, Trackhoe,

Digger 4” X 20’

1 ton Truck Digger, Dozer, Loader, Trackhoe

2” X 20’

Pickup Pickup or 1 ton pickup 2” X 20’ • Appropriate sized attaching equipment is to be used.

• When performing this on or near a roadway additional flag personnel shall be positioned in order to warn and control traffic till the recovery is completed.

• When any nylon sling is used to pull on equipment, that sling will be labeled as a tow sling only and not ever used for rigging purposes.

• The signal person shall stand a minimum distance of 20 feet to the side of the pull, in case the sling breaks. This will minimize the person signaling from getting struck by the broken sling.

• No one is permitted to stand between the two pieces of equipment during this activity, they must be positioned a minimum of 30 feet from the sling area.

• Equipment towed out will be inspected for damage and if there is no damage then it may return back into service. Damaged equipment must be repaired prior to returning to the site.

• It is not permitted to backup and take a run with the sling in a slack position in order to try to jolt the stuck unit out.

Regulatory References Alberta

Act, Section 1(1)g Definition of Competent Worker Act, Section 14(2) Direction of Workers Act, Section 15(1) Worker Training


Page 2 of 2

Document Description Vehicle Extrication Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.040





Part 16 – Machines, Tools, and Robots – Section 16.3(a)(b)- Duty to Inform Ontario

Part 1 – General- Section 1 – Definition “Competent Worker” (a)(b)(c)


Page 1 of 4

Document Description All Terrain Vehicles Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.041


26.041 USE OF ALL TERRAIN VEHICLES (ATV/ UTV/ ARGO) ALL PERSONNEL THAT ARE TO OPERATE ANY ALL-TERRAIN - VEHICLE MUST BE

TRAINED IN ITS USE. PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: • DOT/Snell/ANSI approved helmets only (hardhats are not approved) • Safety Footwear with 6” uppers. • High Visibility vest or outerwear. • Long sleeved clothing • Gloves • Safety glasses if helmet has no face shield.

• Clothing must be worn to provide protection from the cold due to increased wind chill at high speeds while operating equipment

• Do not wear scarves or loose clothing because of potential entanglement with moving parts.

EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: • Level 1 First Aid Kit • Minimum 10 lb. mounted Fire Extinguisher • Pulaski, Shovel and Water Can • Air horn (to repel bears) • Amber light • Buggy Whip required to access Mine Site

PROPER RIDING POSTURE Riding an ATV correctly allows the operator to operate and control the machine more easily, and react more quickly to changes in terrain and environment. Proper riding posture includes:

• Head and eyes up, looking forward; • Shoulders relaxed, with elbows bent slightly; • Hands on the handlebars; knees in toward the gas tank • Feet on the footrests, toes pointing straight ahead.

LOADING/UNLOADING

• A trailer is to be used to transport ATV; Truck deck is only to be used if a trailer is not available.

• Trailer must have a tilting deck. • Worker must be in a sitting position when driving up or off deck. Before

dismounting ATV the brake must be set or the unit must be secured with ratchet straps ATV.

Page 2 of 4



• If loading onto a truck deck approved ramps must be used. When unloading/ loading unit on or off a truck deck a winch (mechanical or electrical) must be used

PRE RIDE INSPECTION 1. Tires- Check condition and pressures. 2. Fuel and oil level- Fill both tanks to their proper levels. 3. All brakes- Check operation and adjustment. 4. Throttle pedal- Check for free operation. 5. Brake lights- Check for proper operation. 6. Engine Ignition switch- Check for proper operation. 7. Horn button- Check for proper operation. 8. Bach Up safety beeper (if equipped)- Check for proper operation. 9. Seat position correctly and latch fully engaged. 10. All guards and covers are properly installed and fastened. 11. Wheels- Check for tightness of wheel nuts and axle nuts; check that axle nuts are

secured by cotter pins. 12. Air cleaner element- Check for dirt; clean or replace. 13. Steering- Check for free operation noting any unusual looseness in any area. 14. Loose parts- Visually inspect vehicle for any damaged components or loose

nuts/bolts or other fasteners. 15. Driving gear- Wear a helmet, goggles or safety glasses, boots, long sleeved shirt,

long pants, and other protective clothing that may be required.

SAFE OPERATION – ATV GENERAL

• Do a pre-ride inspection before using any ATV. • To turn an ATV, keep most of your body weight on the outside foot peg and lean

your upper body into the turn. • When climbing hills, shift your body weight forward by leaning to keep the front

wheel(s) on the ground. • If stopped while going uphill, do not apply the rear brake. Get off the machine

and turn it around to proceed down the hill. • When going down hills, keep the engine running and in gear, apply the rear

brake and avoid sharp turns. • Avoid "side hill" situations. When they are unavoidable, lean into the hill. • As a last resort to avoid an impending collision, roll off the vehicle and kick

yourself free of it. • Do not allow extra riders on the ATV. • All equipment shall be operated in a safe manner and under safe

environmental conditions. • Only trained and competent Personnel shall operate ATV’s;

Page 3 of 4



• Wear appropriate PPE, i.e., helmets with goggles, gloves, boots (with ankle supports);

• Never attempt to climb a hill too steep for your ability or the performance of the ATV;

• Avoid riding across slopes whenever possible. • No passengers are allowed on ATV’s • Load/unload ATV from a ramp or bank. • Follow OEM operator’s manual. • It is illegal to operate an ATV on public roads.

SAFE OPERATION – UTV GENERAL

• Do a pre-ride inspection before using any UTV. This inspection should include checking tires, throttle cable, front and rear brakes, lights and switches, oil and fuel, chain, and the chassis for any defects or wear.

• Avoid "side hill" situations. When they are unavoidable, lean into the hill. • All equipment shall be operated in a safe manner and under safe

environmental conditions. • Only trained and competent Personnel shall operate UTV’s; • Do not operate on hills steeper than 15 degrees 15°. • Do not carry more than one passenger. • Always wear your seat belt, the cab frame is not designed or intended to

provide rollover protection. • Operate slowly in reverse- avoid sharp turns or sudden braking. • Make sure the passenger reads and understands all safety labels. • Watch for branches or other hazards that could enter the vehicle.

Note: Loss of vehicle control causes most accidents. When the operator encounters a

change of terrain or swerves to avoid an obstacle, it causes an abrupt change of balance and loss of control.

Collisions with automobiles on public roads are the most common cause of fatal All Terrain Vehicle accidents. Regulatory Requirements Alberta Part 9- Powered Mobile Equipment – Section 282- ATV and Snow Vehicles British Columbia Part 16 – Mobile Equipment – Section 16.49-16.55- All Terrain Vehicles Yukon Part 6- Mobile Equipment – Section 6.45-6.48 Saskatchewan Part XI-Powered Mobile equipment

Page 4 of 4



Manitoba Part 22 – Powered Mobile Equipment

Page 1 of 2

Document Description Housekeeping Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.043


26.043 HOUSEKEEPING Good housekeeping is a basic part of incident prevention. It is the responsibility of all

employees and cannot be accomplished by periodic cleanups.

Housekeeping shall be maintained by the following practices:

• Access to emergency exits must be kept clear.

• Ensure that all machinery, equipment, workplace and storage facilities are inspected on a regular basis and kept in a safe manner.

• All working areas shall be kept clean and free from loose or unstable objects, oil, grease, and other materials at all times.

• Every work area shall be kept clean and free from any slipping or tripping hazard.

• Truck cabs must be kept clean of food waste and other garbage, including empty pop/coffee containers.

• Oil or other spillage shall be cleaned up will the job is in progress.

• Ensure that all tools are kept clean, in proper working order and placed in their proper storage area upon completion of their use. It will be the supervisor's or Forman's responsibility to see this practice is undertaken.

• Never place loose parts, tools or equipment on stair treads.

• Material is not to be stored in aisles.

• Rubbish, garbage and paper shall be placed in metal containers.

• Any material, garbage, or empty containers that are to be discarded must be done so in accordance with WHMIS, Manufacturer and site requirements.

• Only approved solvents are to be used for cleaning purposes.

• Flammable liquids, toxic or harmful substances shall be stores in safe and approved containers and properly identified. (See Section 12 for additional WHMIS information.

• Fire extinguishers in shops shall be attached to the wall with signs showing their locations.

• Racks for storage shall be adequately secured and stable.

Regulatory References Alberta Part 12 – General Safety Precautions – Section (185)- Housekeeping

British Columbia Part 20 – Construction, Excavation, and Demolition – Section (20.39) – Housekeeping

Yukon Part 10- Construction and Building Safety – Section (10.23) - Housekeeping

Page 2 of 2

Document Description Housekeeping Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.043


Ontario Part 2- General Construction – Sections (35-48) – Housekeeping

NWT Part 1- Accident Prevention –Sections (23-29) - Housekeeping

Page 1 of 3

Document Description Operating Mulcher


26.044 OPERATING MULCHER This procedure is to identify the steps to complete this task in a safe and efficient manner. Safety Equipment required:

o Hard hat

o Safety glasses

o Boots

o Leather gloves

o Hi-visibility vest

Required training: 1. Operators are to be trained in the equipment which is being used.

2. Dangerous Tree Control Course

3. H2S Aware (if required by client)

If energized lines are in the vicinity, a signal person must be used and identified including the Limits of Approach and identified on the tailboard. Limits of Approach must be maintained at all times. Steps:

Operator role and responsibilities: 1. Only trained operators are to operate a mulcher.

2. Operator must wear the appropriate wear outside the equipment, (Glasses, hardhat, Safety boots and hi-visibility outerwear).

3. The operator must perform regular walk-around inspections throughout the workday.

4. Windows must be checked for cracks and kept clean.

5. Operator must be aware of all other workers or other people that are near the mulcher while it's in operation.

6. Operator must wear a seat belt when operating the mulcher.

7. The mulcher must be escorted when accessing public roads.

8. Passengers are not to ride either in or on the mulcher when it is in motion.

9. The mulcher must be blown out regularly with an air hose to remove dust and debris.

10. The operator must ensure that any tree sustaining partial or full damage to the main trunk from the mulching operation will be felled by the mulcher or marked as a hazard.

11. All hazards must be communicated to the supervisor.

12. All known hazards must also be communicated immediately to those persons that may be affected by the hazard.

Page 2 of 3



Mulcher Setup 1. When a mulcher is cutting (i.e. drum is spinning), no person should be allowed within

100 metres or 2 tree lengths, whichever is greater, in any direction of the machine.

2. Mulchers must display visible signage requiring that all persons keep away at least 100 metres away while the machine is at work.

3. Mulchers must display signage requiring that hearing protection must be worn past the sign. This sign must be 100 metres from the work area.

4. Mulchers must be fitted with a positive air shutoff device and a backup alarm.

5. Mulchers must be fitted with a secondary escape system (e.g. escape hatch).

6. Mulchers without this escape hatch are not permitted in British Columbia.

7. Mulchers must be equipped with fire fighting equipment during fire season. See Safe Work Practice 26.013.

8. Mulchers must be equipped with a radio that contains a channel with the same frequency as that of the crew.

9. Mulchers that are equipped with a factory installed fire suppression system can only be operated when the system is functional.

10. All emergency shut-off systems must be functional at all times.

Mulcher Operation: 1. A tailboard must be completed with all personnel that are working within close proximity

of the mulcher identified with their roles identified and communicated to all workers. This must contain an emergency rescue plan and the work site must be inspected for any additional hazards and included in this tailboard.

2. Doors are to remain closed during normal operations to prevent the operator from being struck by flying debris.

3. Operator must avoid cutting trees that are too large, as per manufacturer's specifications for the mulcher being used.

4. If slashers are required to cut a tree, they must follow all applicable provincial legislation.

5. When a "dog leg" needs to be cut, the slahers must first cut a line of sight, then retreat to a safe area (100 metres away) before mulching operations can resume.

6. Slashers and operators must follow the industry recommended practice for " dangerous tree control"

7. When a person is to approach a mulcher from any direction, that person must notify the operator by radio/phone so that the operator is aware of their presence. Operator must acknowledge the person and the machine must be put on standby mode (drum disengaged) before any close approach. NO EXCEPTIONS!!

8. Operators are to make regular radio checks with workers in the area as well with the Medic. If the communication system breaks down the work must cease till repairs are completed and communication is restored. If workers are to be working alone then Section 24 of the HS&E Policy will be implemented and followed.

Page 3 of 3



9. When doing any repairs or maintenance on the units, the key for the power plant must be removed from the ignition to prevent the drum from rotating. This key is to remain in the person doing the repairs or maintenance activities are completed.

10. Keys must be marked, identifying what they control.

Regulatory References

Alberta Act, Section 1(1)g Definition of Competent Worker Act, Section 14(2) Direction of Workers Act, Section 15(1) Worker Training Part 32- Excavations and Tunnelling - all Sections

British Columbia Part 2- Application- Section 2.2- General Duties Part 20 – Construction, Excavations, and Demolition – Section 20.28-20.95 – Excavations


Saskatchewan Part 1 – Preliminary Matters – Section 2(1)(M) Definition “Competent” Part 1 – Preliminary Matters – Section 19(1)(2)(3)(4) – Training of worker Part XVII – excavations, Trenches, Tunnels, and Excavated Shafts – All Sections




Part III – Excavations –All Sections

NWT Part 1 – General Safety – Section (9)(10) –Instruction to Workers Part V- Construction and Maintenance- Section 396-432 - Excavations

Page 1 of 7

Document Description Use of Circular Saws Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.046


26.046 USE OF CIRCULAR SAWS The circular saw is one of the most popular tools in the workplace, but it is potentially very dangerous.

The following are the minimum required practices to be used with this equipment:

Tool and Worker Certification Users of this equipment must be adequately qualified, suitably trained and with sufficient experience to use this tool without supervision, or be under the direct supervision of a worker who is qualified.

Personal Protective Equipment

• Hard Hat

• Safety Glasses

• Leather Gloves • Safety Boots

• Hearing Protection

• Dust Mask

GENERAL SAFETY RULES:

• DANGER! Keep hands away from cutting area and the blade. Keep your second hand on auxiliary handle or motor housing. If both hands are holding the saw, they cannot be cut by the blade.

• Do not reach underneath the work piece. The guard cannot protect you from the blade below the work piece.

• Adjust the cutting depth to the thickness of the work piece. Less than a full tooth of the blade teeth should be visible below the work piece.

• Never hold piece being cut in your hands or across your leg. Secure the work piece to a stable platform. It is important to support the work properly to minimize body exposure, blade binding, or loss of control.

• Hold tool by insulated gripping surfaces when performing an operation where the cutting tool may contact hidden wiring or its own cord. Contact with a “live” wire will make exposed metal parts of the tool “live” and shock the operator.

• When ripping, always use a rip fence or straight edge guide. This improves the accuracy of cut and reduces the chance of blade binding.

• Always use blades with correct size and shape (diamond versus round) of arbor holes. Blades that do not match the mounting hardware of the saw will run eccentrically, causing loss of control.

• Never use damaged or incorrect blade washers or bolt. The blade washers and bolt were specially designed for your saw for optimum performance and safety of operation.

Page 2 of 7



• If the power supply cord is damaged, it must be replaced only by the manufacturer or by an authorized service center to avoid risk.

CAUSES AND OPERATOR PREVENTION OF KICKBACK: Kickback is a sudden reaction to a pinched, bound, or misaligned saw blade, causing an uncontrolled saw to lift up and out of the work piece toward the operator. When the blade is pinched or bound tightly by the kerf closing down, the blade stalls and the motor reaction drives the unit rapidly back toward the operator.

If the blade becomes twisted or misaligned in the cut, the teeth at the back edge of the blade can dig into the top surface of the wood causing the blade to climb out of the kerf and jump back toward the operator. Kickback is the result of saw misuse and/or incorrect operating procedures or conditions and can be avoided by taking proper precautions, as given below:

• Maintain a firm grip with both hands on the saw and position your arms to resist kickback forces. Position your body to either side of the blade, but not in line with the blade. Kickback could cause the saw to jump backwards, but kickback forces can be controlled by the operator, if proper precautions are taken.

• When blade is binding, or when interrupting a cut for any reason, release the trigger and hold the saw motionless in the material until the blade comes to a complete stop. Never attempt to remove the saw from the work or pull the saw backward while the blade is in motion, or kickback may occur. Investigate and take corrective actions to eliminate the cause of blade binding.

• When restarting a saw in the workpiece, center the saw blade in the kerf and check that saw teeth are not engaged into the material. If saw blade is binding, it may walk up or kickback from the workpiece as the saw is restarted.

• Support large panels to minimize the risk of blade pinching and kickback. Large panels tend to sag under their own weight. Supports must be placed under the panel on both sides, near the line of cut and near the edge of the panel.

• Do not use dull or damaged blades. Unsharpened or improperly set blades produce narrow kerf causing excessive friction, blade binding and kickback

• Blade depth and bevel adjusting locking levers must be tight and secure before making cut. If blade adjustment shifts while cutting, it may cause binding and kickback.

• Use extra caution when making a “plunge cut” into existing walls or other blind areas. The protruding blade may cut objects that can cause kickback

• Check lower guard for proper closing before each use. Do not operate saw if lower guard does not move freely and close instantly. Never clamp or tie the lower guard into the open position. If saw is accidentally dropped, lower guard may be bent. Raise the lower guard with the retracting handle. Make

Page 3 of 7



sure it moves freely and does not touch the blade or any other part, in all angles and depths of cut.

• Check the operation of the lower guard spring. If the guard and the spring are not operating properly, they must be serviced before use. Lower guard may operate sluggishly due to damaged parts, gummy deposits, or a buildup of debris.

• Lower guard should be retracted manually only for special cuts, such as “plunge cuts” and “compound cuts.” Raise lower guard by retracting handle. As soon as blade enters the material, the lower guard must be released. For all other sawing, the lower guard should operate automatically.

• Always observe that the lower guard is covering the blade before placing saw down on bench or floor. An unprotected, coasting blade will cause the saw to walk backwards, cutting whatever is in its path. Be aware of the time it takes for the blade to stop after switch is released.

• Know your power tool. Read operator’s manual carefully. Learn its applications and limitations, as well as the specific potential hazards related to this power tool.

• Always wear safety glasses with side shields.

• Protect your lungs. Wear a face or dust mask if the operation is dusty. Protect your hearing. Wear hearing protection during extended periods of operation.

ADDITIONAL SAFETY RULES • Check damaged parts. Before further use of the tool, a guard or other part

that is damaged should be carefully checked to determine that it will operate properly and perform its intended function. Check for alignment of moving parts, binding of moving parts, breakage of parts, mounting, and any other conditions that may affect its operation. A guard or other part that is damaged should be properly repaired or replaced by an authorized service center. Following this rule will reduce the risk of shock, fire, or serious injury.

• Inspect for and remove all nails from lumber before using this tool.

• Do not operate tool while under the influence of drugs, alcohol, or any medication.

OPERATING THE SAW • It is important to understand the correct method for operating the saw. Refer

to the figures in this section to learn the correct and incorrect ways for handling the saw.

• When lifting the saw from the workpiece, the blade is exposed on the underside of the saw until the lower blade guard closes. Make sure the lower blade guard is closed before setting the saw down.

Page 4 of 7



• To make sawing easier and safer, always maintain proper control of the saw. Loss of control could cause an accident resulting in possible serious injury.

To make the best possible cut: • Hold the saw firmly with both hands.

• Avoid placing your hand on the work piece while making a cut.

• Support the work piece so that the cut (kerf) is always to your side.

• Support the work piece near the cut.

• Clamp the work piece securely so that the work piece will not move during the cut.

• Always place the saw on the work piece that is supported, not the “cut off” piece.

• Place the work piece with the “good” side down.

• Draw a guideline along the desired line of cut before beginning your cut.

DEPTH OF CUT ADJUSTMENT Always keep correct blade depth setting. The correct blade depth setting for all cuts should not exceed 1/4 in. below the material to be cut. More blade depth will increase the chance of kickback and cause the cut to be rough. One blade tooth below the material to be cut works best for most efficient cutting action.

Page 5 of 7



TO ADJUST BLADE DEPTH • Disconnect power source to saw.

• Loosen the depth adjustment lever.

• Hold the base flat against the workpiece and raise or lower the saw until the required depth is reached.

• Tighten the depth adjustment lever securely.

USING AN EDGE GUIDE

• Use an edge guide (not included) when making long or wide rip cuts with the saw.

• Remove the battery pack from the saw.

• Place the edge guide through the holes in the saw base

• Adjust the edge guide to the width needed.

• Tighten the wing screw securely.

• When using an edge guide, position the face of the edge guide firmly against the edge of work piece. This makes for a true cut without pinching the blade. The guiding edge of the work piece must be straight for your cut to be straight. Use caution to prevent the blade from binding in the cut.

Page 6 of 7



To make the best possible cut:

• Hold the saw firmly with both hands.

• Avoid placing your hand on the work piece while making a cut.

• Support the work piece so that the cut (kerf) is always to your side.

• Support the work piece near the cut.

• Clamp the work piece securely so that the work piece will not move during the cut.

• Always place the saw on the work piece that is supported, not the “cut off” piece.

• Place the work piece with the “good” side down.

• Draw a guideline along the desired line of cut before beginning your cut.


OH&S Code Part 25 Section 376(1) (2) OH&S Act Sections 14(1) and 15(1) OH&S Code Part 25 Section 375 (1) (2) (3) (4)

British Columbia Reg. Part 12 Tools, Machinery and Equipment Sections 12.72 and 12.73

Yukon Part 4 Hand Tools and Power Driven Portable Tools/

Page 7 of 7



Manitoba Part 16 Machines, tools and Robots Division 1

Saskatchewan Part X Machine Safety Sections 146(1) and 146(2)

Ontario Reg. 145/00 Section 29 Training of Worker and Sections 112(1)(2)(3) inclusive

Page 1 of 5

VALARD

Document Description Arc Flash Protection Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.047


26.047 ARC FLASH PROTECTION AND PRACTICES This procedure is to identify the steps to complete these tasks in a safe and efficient manner. Safety Equipment required:

• Hard hat

• Safety glasses

• Boots

• Leather gloves


• Fall Arrest Harness or Lineman belt

• Face shield (cal rated)

• FRC rated for work may include Arc Flash Suit (see chart and calculations for ARC Flash potential)

Required tools and equipment: • Cover ups (certified within 3 years)

• Insulated Rubber Gloves (certified within 6 Months).

• Hotsticks (certified within 1 year).

Scope: Identifies safe work practice for working on or near exposed electrical conductors or circuit parts in workplaces.

Purpose: This practice is intended to provide for employee safety relative to electrical hazards.

Responsibility: This practice shall be implemented by the employees. The employer provides this

practice and the training of the employees.

Establishing an Electrical Safe work Condition: An electrical safe work condition shall be achieved and verified by the following process:

a) Determine all possible sources of electrical supply to the specific equipment. Check applicable up-to-date drawings, diagrams, and identification tags.

b) After properly interrupting the load current, open the disconnecting device(s) for each source.

c) Wherever possible, visually verify that all blades of the disconnecting are fully open or that drawout-type circuit breakers are withdrawn to the fully disconnected position.

d) Apply lockout/tagout devices in accordance with SWP 26.032.

Page 2 of 5

VALARD



e) Using an adequately rated voltage detector, test each phase conductor or circuit part both phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground. Before and after each test, determine that the voltage detector is operating satisfactorily.

f) Where there is a possibility of induced voltage or stored electrical energy, ground the phase conductors or circuit parts before touching them. If it is a possibility that the conductors or circuit parts could contact other exposed energized conductors or circuit parts, apply ground-connecting devices rated for the available fault duty.

Working on or near de-energized Electrical Conductors or Circuit Parts that have Lockout/Tagout/Devices applied.

a) General. All electrical circuit conductors and circuit parts shall be considered energized until the source(s) of energy is (are) removed, at which time they shall be considered de-energized. All electrical circuit conductors and circuit parts shall not be considered in electrically safe condition until all sources of energy are removed, the disconnecting means is under lockout/tagout, the absence of voltage is verified by an approved voltage testing device, and where exposure to energized facilities exists, are temporary grounded.

b) Employee Involvement. Each person who could be exposed directly or indirectly to a source of electrical energy shall be involved in the Lockout/Tagout process. Note: An example of direct exposure is the qualified electrician who works on the

motor starter control, the power circuits or the motor. An example of indirect exposure is the person who works on the coupling between the motor and compressor.

c) Control of energy. All sources of electrical energy shall be controlled in such a way to minimize employee exposure to electrical hazards.

Working on or near Live Parts a) Live parts to which employee might be exposed to shall be put into an electrically

safe work condition before an employee works or near them, unless the employer can demonstrate that de-energizing introduces additional or increased hazards or is infeasible due to equipment design or operational limitations.

Approach Boundaries to Live Parts a) Shock Hazard Analysis. A shock hazard analysis shall determine the voltage to

which personnel will be exposed, boundary requirements, and the personal protective equipment necessary in order to minimize the possibility of electrical shock to personnel.

b) Shock Protection Boundaries. The shock protection boundaries identified as Limited, Restricted, and Prohibited Approach Boundaries are applicable to the situation in which approaching personnel are exposed to live parts. See table on Page 4 table for the distances associated with various system voltages.

Note: In certain instances, the Flash Protection might be a greater distance from the exposed live parts than the Limited Approach Boundary.

Page 3 of 5

VALARD



Arc Flash Hazard Analysis. An arc flash hazard analysis shall determine the Arc Flash Protection Boundary and the personal protective equipment that people within

the Arc Flash Protection Boundary shall use. The arc flash hazard analysis shall be updated when a major modification or renovation takes place. It shall be reviewed periodically, not to exceed five years, to account for changes in the electrical distribution system that could affect the results of the arc flash hazard analysis. The arc flash hazard analysis shall take into consideration the design of the overcurrent protective device and its opening time, including its condition of maintenance.

Exception: An arc flash hazard analysis shall not be required where all of the following conditions exist:

(1) The circuit is rated 240 volts or less.

(2) The circuit is supplied by one transformer.

(3) The transformer supplying the circuit is rated less than 125 kVA.

Note: Improper or inadequate maintenance can result in increased opening time of the overcurrent protective device, thus increasing the incident energy.

Arc Flash Protection Boundary.

a) Voltage Levels Between 50 Volts and 600 Volts. In those cases where detailed arc flash hazard analysis calculations are not performed for systems that are between 50 volts and 600 volts, the Arc Flash Protection Boundary shall be 4.0 ft, based on the product of clearing time of 2 cycles (0.033 sec) and the available bolted fault current of 50 kA or any combination not exceeding 100 kA cycles

(1667 ampere seconds). When the product of clearing times and bolted fault current exceeds 100 kA cycles, the Arc Flash Protection Boundary shall be calculated.

b) Voltage Levels Above 600 Volts. At voltage levels above 600 volts, the Arc Flash Protection Boundary shall be the distance at which the incident energy equals 5 J/cm2 (1.2 cal/cm2). For situations where fault-clearing time is equal to or less than 0.1 sec, the Arc Flash Protection Boundary shall be the distance at which the incident energy level equals 6.24 J/cm2 (1.5 cal/cm2). For clearing times and bolted fault currents other than 300kA cycles, or under engineering supervision, the Flash Protection Boundary shall alternatively be permitted to be calculated in accordance with the following general Formula:

Flash Protection Boundary for systems that are 600 volts or less, the Flash Protection Boundary shall be 4.0ft, based on the product of clearing times of 6 cycles (0.1 Second) and the available bolted fault current of 50 KA or any combination not exceeding 300 kA cycles (5000 ampere seconds). For clearing times and bolted fault currents other than 300 kA cycles, or under engineering supervision, the Flash

Page 4 of 5

VALARD



Protection Boundary shall alternatively be permitted to be calculated in accordance with the following general formula:

Dc = [2.65 x MVAbf x t]1/2 or Dc = [53 x MVA x t]1/2

Where:

Dc = distance in feet from arc source for a second –degree burn

MVAbf = bolted fault capacity available at point involved (in mega volt-amps)

MVA = capacity rating of transformer (mega volt-amps). For transformers with MVA ratings below 0.75 MVA, multiply the transformer MVA rating by 1.25

t = Time of arc exposure (in seconds)

APPROACH BOUNDARIES TO LIVE PARTS FOR SHOCK PROTECTION Nominal System Voltage Range, Phase to Phase

Exposed Movable Conductor (Unqualified worker)

Exposed Fixed Circuit Part

Restricted Approach Boundary; Includes Inadvertent Movement Adder (qualified worker)

Prohibited Approach Boundary

Less than 50 Not specified Not Specified Not specified Not Specified

50 to 300 3.05m (10ft 0in.) 1.07m (3ft 6in.) Avoid Contact Avoid Contact

301 to 750 3.05m (10ft 0in.) 1.07m (3ft 6in.) 304.8mm (1ft 0in.) 25.4mm (0ft 1in.)

751 to 15kV 3.05m (10ft 0in.) 1.53m (5ft 0in.) 660.4mm (2ft 2in.) 177.8mm (0ft 7in.)

15.1 kV to 36 kV 3.05m (10ft 0in.) 1.83m (6ft 0in.) 787.4mm (2ft 7in.) 254 mm (0ft 10in.)

36.1 kV to 46 kV 3.05m (10ft 0in.) 2.44m (8ft. 0in.) 838.2mm (2ft 9in.) 431.8mm (1ft 5in.)

46.1 kV to 72.5 kV

3.05m (10ft 0in.) 2.44m (8ft 0in.) 965.2mm (3ft 2in.) 635mm (2ft 1in.)

72.6 kV to 121 kV 3.25m (10ft 8in.) 2.44m (8ft 0in.) 991 mm (3ft 3in.) 812.8mm (2ft 8in.)

138 kV to 145 kV 3.36 m (11ft 0in.) 3.05m (10ft 0in.) 1.093m (3ft 7in.) 939.8mm (3ft 1in)

161 kV to 169 kV 3.56m (11ft 8in) 3.65m (11ft 8in.) 1.22m (4ft 0in.) 1.07m (3ft 6in.)

230 kV to 242 kV 3.97m (13ft 0in.) 3.97m (13ft 0in.) 1.6m (5ft 3in.) 1.45m (4ft. 9in.)

345 kV to 362 kV 4.68m (15ft 4in) 4.68m (15ft 4in.) 2.59m (8ft 6in.) 2.44m (8ft 0in.)

500 kV to 550 kV 5.8m (19ft 0in.) 5.8m (19ft 0in.) 4.43m (11ft 3in.) 3.28m (10ft 9in.)

756kV to 800 kV 7.24m (23ft 9in.) 7.24m (23ft 9in.) 4.55m (14ft 11in) 4.4m (14ft 5in.)

Page 5 of 5

VALARD



Protective Clothing and Other Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) for Application with an Arc Flash Hazard Analysis. Where it has been determined that work will be performed within the Arc Flash Protection Boundary identified by 130.3(A), one of the following methods shall be used for the selection of protective clothing and other personal protective equipment:

Incident Energy Analysis. The incident energy analysis shall determine, and the employer shall document, the incident energy exposure of the worker (in calories per square centimeter). The incident energy exposure level shall be based on the working distance of the employee’s face and chest areas from a prospective arc source for the specific task to be performed. Arc-Rated FR clothing and other personal protective equipment (PPE) shall be used by the employee based on the incident energy exposure associated with the specific task. Recognizing that incident energy increases as the distance from the arc flash decreases, additional PPE shall be used for any parts of the body that are closer than the distance at which the incident energy was determined.

Page 1 of 4

VALARD

Document Description Augering Footing Practice Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.048


26.048 AUGERED FOOTING PRACTICE This procedure is to identify the steps to be taken to prevent any incidents from occurring and to be completed in a safe and efficient manner. Safety Equipment required: 1. Safety Glasses, hardhat, and boots

2. Fall Arrest equipment and temporary barriers

3. Hi-visibility vest

Tools and Equipment required: 1. Texoma augering machine

2. Rebar cage

3. Various formworks depending on soil conditions e.g. masonite sheets, sonotube, corrugated steel culverts, casings, etc.

4. Footing framework and anchor bolt template

5. Slings

6. Shackles (sized for the weight being lifted)

Steps: 1. Complete tailboard.

2. If hold off is required, make sure switching is in place.

3. Setup augering machine and crane at site, level complete with outrigger pads

4. If working near existing power lines the crane must grounded.

5. Attach slings to the identified attachment points

6. Only one signalman is to be used.

Because of the hazards associated with aerial devices coming in contact with overhead energized conductors, the operator of any aerial device MUST always stand on the designated operator’s platform while performing any operation which could potentially bring the aerial device within the limits of approach of energized conductors. All other personnel MUST remain clear of the vehicle, the boom, the winch line and any of its accessories while the aerial device is being operated unless proper protective equipment is utilized. To ensure that the “Limits of Approach” are not encroached a “Dedicated Observer” must be appointed and positioned to aid the operator in performing these tasks. All vehicles must be suitably grounded prior to any hoisting activities in close proximity to energized conductors.

Page 2 of 4

VALARD



The following hazards must be addressed:

1. GRAVITY • Suspended loads

• Falling materials

• Working within the “drop zone”

• Hoisting equipment

2. MECHANICAL • Working near rotating machinery

• Failure of rigging equipment

Prepare a tailboard job plan identifying: • The tasks to be performed

• The potential hazards associated with the job

• Emergency response plan

• Crew member duties

Before augering is to begin gas, electrical and other services in and near the area to be excavated must be accurately located and marked. A Dig Monitor shall be identified to observing the digging operation.

When working under or in the vicinity of live conductors, all equipment must be grounded and the safe limits of approach to the live conductor must be maintained at all times. A qualified dedicated observer and signal the operator whenever the equipment approaches these specified distances as per provincial legislation.

Particular care is to be given to moving parts such as the kelly bar and auger of the digging machine. The swing area of the auger machine must be clearly identified and workers are to be kept clear at all times.

A level area extending at least 1m (3 ft.) from the upper edge of the excavation must be kept clear of equipment, excavated soil, and rock and construction material.

Before starting work, visual barriers must be installed to identify clearly the safe work area(s) for the worker, and/or to identify hazardous area(s) for people not involved in the work.

If a person could fall into an excavation that is more than 2.4 m (8 ft.) deep, a temporary barrier or a protective cover must be installed.

The barrier must be at least 1.1 m (3.5 ft.) high and a minimum 1.8 m (6 ft.) from the edge. Access within this area will be permitted only with the use of an approved fall protection system. See sketches below for approved anchorages of the fall arrest equipment.

Page 3 of 4

VALARD



Furthermore, no worker shall enter an augered excavation that is deeper than 1.2 m (4 ft.) unless they are wearing approved fall protection and a steel liner is installed.

The steel liner must extend a minimum of 0.6 m (2 ft.) above ground level, be supported on two sides by steel wire rope, extend to within 1.2 m (4 ft.) of the point where work is to be done, and the distance between the liner and perimeter of the hole must not be greater than 100 mm (4 in.).

In addition no worker shall enter an augered hole unless a competent person is above ground in close proximity at all times and a means to rescue (a documented rescue plan is required) the worker from the caisson is readily available.

If protective covering is used it must completely cover the opening, be securely fastened, identified as covering an opening and be capable of supporting all loads it may be subjected to.

The following steps combined with the use of the framework will allow for the safe installation of the tower foundations. The framework is used for securing the anchor bolts and the circular form. It consists of a main frame, a small frame, an anchor bolt template and a bolt support plate. The template is bolted or nailed to the bottom of the small frame, which in turn is fastened to the main frame by means of clamps. The main frame is generally located and supported on four stakes (Peg anchors). The frame set must be properly designed to ensure that the elevation of the anchor bolts is right with respect to the finished concrete.

1. Auger the footing hole to the required depth in accordance with the design. All workers to maintain a safe distance from the rotating shaft and auger.

2. Install the main frame in accordance with the procedure. Check its horizontal and vertical location.

Page 4 of 4

VALARD



3. Install formwork. The form is set flush with the top of the main frame, which usually coincides with the top of concrete; and extended 0.3 m to 1.3 m (12 in. to 4ft.), into the ground depending upon the soil conditions. When masonite sheets are used, the circular length is pre-calculated and the nailing positions marked. The sheets are nailed to the main frame at eight locations to form a circle. The joints of the sheets are overlapped approx. 0.3 m to 0.4 m (12 in. to 16 in.).

4. Sling the crane to the attachment points on the rebar cage and install the rebar cage. Maintain specified concrete cover and secure it in position.

5. Install the small frame and the anchor bolt template.

6. Install the hopper at the augered hole and pour the concrete. The hopper is usually hung on the concrete truck chute. Pour the concrete up to approx.1/3 hole depth then back fill the space between the form and the ground with soil. Continue pouring until the concrete level reaches approx. 0.6 m to 0.9 m (2 ft. to 3 ft.) below finished grade.

7. Installation of two to four anchor bolts, push the bolts vertically into the concrete through the template. The anchor bolts are held in place by either the template or the bolt support plate

8. Check that the elevation and center of anchor bolts are correct.

9. For anchor tower footings, where a large number of anchor bolts are used, the small frame, template, bolt support plate and anchor bolts are pre-assembled as a whole set. Pour concrete to the elevation near the bottom of anchor bolts; install the small frame set, and protect the bolt threads from concrete spatters, then bring the concrete to grade to grade.

10. Finish the concrete surface using a wooden or magnesium trowel. Do not over finish, as it will bring a layer of mortar to the surface, which is not desirable. The concrete under the template, where the shoe footing is to be seated, should be level and flat. In the other areas the concrete should be sloped away from the edges of the template to facilitate drainage.

Page 1 of 1

VALARD

Document Description Installing Power Installed Anchors Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.049


26.049 INSTALLING POWER INSTALLED ANCHORS This procedure is to identify the steps to be taken to prevent any incidents from occurring and to be completed in a safe and efficient manner. Safety Equipment required: 1. Safety Glasses, hardhat, and boots

2. Hi-visibility vest

Tools and Equipment required: 1. Digger truck c/w outrigger pads

2. Anchor attachment head and anchor installation wrench

3. Power Installed Anchor (PISA)

Steps: 1. Complete tailboard.

2. Setup digger at site, level complete with outrigger pads. Operator must be trained and competent.

3. If working near existing power lines the digger must grounded.

4. Remove earth auger from the Kelly bar.

5. Install anchor wrench attachment head to the Kelly bar

6. Attach anchor installation wrench to head and load PISA and guide to anchor location.

7. Digger operator to begin installation (all crew members must be clear of area).

8. Install PISA to proper depth and digger operator lifts installation wrench bar slowly out. While lifting the wrench out the operator must adjust the boom to limit the amount of swing when the wrench clears the PISA. All crewmembers must be clear of swing area. 9. If no further anchor installation required, reinstall the earth auger and stow the equipment.

Worker is too close.

Proper distance.

Page 1 of 3

Document Description Manual Lifting and Handling Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.050

Date: Sept. 23, 2003 Revision: 2 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Dec. 4, 2015

26.050 LIFTING AND HANDLING LOADS Manual handling can cause serious, long-term disabling musculo-skeletal injuries. The following techniques are a minimum practice to help eliminate the possibility of an injury.

Workers who are working in an office environment shall have them and their workstations evaluated in order that their body positions are such as to prevent any injuries such as Carpal Tunnel etc.

Valard will implement control measures to reduce the risk of musculoskeletal injuries. It must eliminate or, if that is not practicable, minimize the risk of MSI to workers. Personal protective equipment may only be used as a substitute for engineering or administrative controls if it is used in circumstances in which those controls are not practicable.

All workers shall receive training on all types of work positions in order that they are aware of their body and the work environments impact on them. The following lifting hazard identify the correct positioning.

Safety Equipment required: o Hard hat

o Safety glasses

o Boots

o Leather gloves

o Hi-visibility vest

Lifting Hazards:

• Awkward / Sustained posture - Improper lifting technique is the largest cause of lower back injuries. For example, bending at the waist, or twisting while holding anything greatly increases the stress on the muscles and joints of the back.

• Forceful exertions - There is a limit to the amount of weight the back can lift; this limit is different for each person. Know and respect your limits. Use mechanical aids wherever possible, i.e. cranes, carts, dollies, etc.

• Repetitive movements - Repeated actions cause fatigue; fatigue reduces the amount of weight the body can safely lift. Be sure to give the back adequate rest between lifts.

Page 2 of 3



Proper Lifting Techniques:

• Test the weight of the load. o If it feels to heavy ask for help, or use a machanical lifting device.

o It is your legal right to refuse to refuse lifting anything that may be a danger.

• Position the body close to the load.

• Take a wide stance, with the load between the knees if possible.

• Bend your Knees.

• Bending at the waist should never be permitted

o Never try to catchh a falling load

• Keep the lower back straight, the risks of injury increases when the lower back is rounded.

• Keep your head up, the more vertical your posture, the lower your risk of injury.

• Breath out as you begin to lift

o This increases tention from your abdominal muscles.

o Do not hold your breath during a lift; this increases pressure in the abdomen.

• Always keeping your shoulders in line with your feet

o Twisting significatnly increase the risk of injury.

o Never twist while lifting or carrying anything, even light objects.

o No twisting!

• Proper lowing is as important as proper lifting

o Dropping or throwing loads is hazardous.

o Bend the knees, keep the back straight, and breath out as you begin to lower.

Page 3 of 3



Regulatory References Alberta OH&S Code Part 14, Sections- 209, 210, 211

Page 1 of 8

Document Description Hot Weather Work Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.052


26.052 HOT WEATHER WORK

PURPOSE To prevent heat-related injuries/stresses in the work environment, by providing guidance in the types, recognition, evaluation and control of potentially hot conditions.

Is there a temperature at which work becomes dangerous and should be stopped? The short answer is yes. Both very cold and very hot temperatures could be dangerous to your health.

Excessive exposure to heat is referred to as heat stress and excessive exposure to cold is referred to as cold stress.

In a very hot environment, the most serious concern is heat stroke. In absence of immediate medical attention, heat stroke could be fatal. Heat stroke fatalities do occur every summer. Heat exhaustion and fainting (syncope) are less serious type’s illnesses that are not fatal but interfere with a person's ability to work.

What are the warning signs of heat stroke? The victims of heat stroke and hypothermia are unable to notice the symptoms, and therefore, their survival depends on co-workers' ability to identify symptoms and to seek medical help.

While symptoms can vary from person to person, the warning signs of heat stroke can include complaints of sudden and severe fatigue, nausea, dizziness, lightheadedness, and may or may not include sweating. If a co-worker appears to be disorientated or confused (including euphoria), or has unaccountable irritability, malaise or flu-like symptoms, the worker should be moved to a cool location and seek medical advice.

Many Canadian occupational health and safety regulations specify upper and lower temperature limits for work performed inside buildings that are normally heated (see Table 3).

The weather broadcast service of Environment Canada uses the humidex scale to inform the public about hot weather conditions. The Humidex scale quantifies human discomfort due to perceived heat taking into account the effect of air temperature and relative humidity. For a given temperature, the Humidex increases as the relative humidity (moisture content) of the air becomes higher. The following table gives ranges of Humidex for various degrees of thermal effect on people.

Table 2 Humidex and Thermal Comfort

Humidex Range (°C) Degrees of Comfort

20 - 29 Comfortable

30 - 39 Varying degrees of discomfort

40 - 45 Uncomfortable

46 and Over Many types of labour must be restricted

Page 2 of 8



The Treasury Board Secretariat (TBS) of Canada uses Humidex as measure of thermal conditions in office accommodations. "An unsatisfactory condition is deemed to exist when the Humidex reading exceeds 40°C [inside the building - not based on "weather information" or outdoor air temperatures] or when the air temperature (dry bulb) falls below 17°C. In these cases, operations shall be stopped and employees released from the workplace if relocation is not practicable. Direct comparison between WBGT and Humidex is not possible - there are no standard conversion tables or mathematical formulas to do such conversions.

How can I measure occupational heat exposure?

Feeling of hot or cold depends on:

• Air temperature

• Relative humidity of air

• Presence of hot or cold objects in the surrounding area

• Presence of air movement (breeze, ventilation)

• Physical exertion

• Clothing

Control measures that can be used to reduce the effects of heat?

The risk of heat-related illnesses can be reduced by:

1. Engineering controls to provide a cooler workplace

2. Safe work practices to reduce worker exposure

3. By training employees to recognize and prevent heat illnesses.

Table 3 (below) provides a summary of these controls.

Engineering Controls

Engineering controls are the most effective means of reducing excessive heat exposure. The examples, which follow, illustrate some engineering approaches to reducing heat exposure.

Reducing Metabolic Heat Production (heat produced by the body): Automation and mechanization of tasks minimize the need for heavy physical work and the resulting buildup of body heat.

Reducing the Radiant Heat Emission from Hot Surfaces: Covering hot surfaces with sheets of low emissivity material such as aluminum or paint that reduces the amount of heat radiated from this hot surface into the workplace.

Insulating Hot Surfaces: Insulation reduces the heat exchange between the source of heat and the work environment.

Shielding: Shields stop radiated heat from reaching work stations. Two types of shields can be used. Stainless steel, aluminum or other bright metal surfaces reflect heat back towards the source. Absorbent shields, such as a water-cooled jacket made of black-surfaced aluminum, can effectively absorb and carry away heat.

Ventilation and Air Conditioning: Ventilation, localized air conditioning, and cooled

Page 3 of 8



observation booths are commonly used to provide cool workstations. Cooled observation booths allow workers to cool down after brief periods of intense heat exposure while still allowing them to monitor equipment.

Reducing the Humidity: Air conditioning, dehumidification, and elimination of open hot water baths, drains, and leaky steam valves help reduce humidity.

Personal Protection

Ordinary clothing provides some protection from heat radiated by surrounding hot surfaces. Specially designed heat-protective clothing is available for working in extremely hot conditions. In hot and humid workplaces, light clothing allows maximum skin exposure and efficient body cooling by sweat evaporation.

Eye protection that absorbs radiation is needed when the work involves very hot objects, such as molten metals and hot ovens.

Work that requires the wearing of impermeable clothing presents an added heat burden as the clothing reduces the body's ability to dissipate heat. Under such circumstances, it is often necessary to reduce the exposure limit values of WBGT to levels below those appropriate for workers wearing light clothing.

Table 3 Summary of Control Measures Method of Control Action

Engineering controls Reduce body heat production Mechanize tasks. Stop exposure to radiated heat from hot objects Insulate hot surfaces. Use reflective

shields, aprons, remote controls. Reduce convective heat gain Lower air temperature. Increase air speed

if air temperature below 35°C. Increase ventilation. Provide cool observation booths.

Increase sweat evaporation Reduce humidity. Use a fan to increase air speed (movement).

Clothing Wear loose clothing that permits sweat evaporation but stops radiant heat. Use cooled protective clothing for extreme conditions.

Administrative controls Acclimatization Allow sufficient acclimatization period

before full workload. Duration of work Shorten exposure time and use frequent

rest breaks. Rest area Provide cool (air-conditioned) rest-areas. Water Provide cool drinking water. Pace of Work If practical, allow workers to set their own

pace of work. First aid and medical care Define emergency procedures. Assign one

person trained in first aid to each work shift. Train workers in recognition of symptoms of heat exposure.

Page 4 of 8



Becoming acclimatized to hot environments?

The body adapts to a new thermal environment by a process called acclimatization. Complete heat acclimatization generally takes six to seven days, but some individuals may need longer. Loss of acclimatization occurs gradually when a person is moved permanently away from a hot environment. However, a decrease in heat tolerance occurs even after a long weekend. As a result of reduced heat tolerance, it is often not advisable for anyone to work under very hot conditions on the first day of the week.

New employees should acclimatize before assuming a full workload. It is advisable to assign about half of the normal workload to a new employee on the first day of work and gradually increased on subsequent days.

Although well-trained, physically fit workers tolerate heat better than people in poor physical condition, fitness and training do not substitute for acclimatization.

The longer you work in a hot environment, the better your body becomes at adjusting to the heat. This is called “acclimatization”. If you are ill or away from work for a week or so you can lose your acclimatization.

To become acclimatized, the following may be considered:

If you are experienced on the job, you should limit your time in hot working conditions to 50 per cent of the shift on the first day, 60 per cent of the shift on the second day, and 80 per cent of the shift on the third day. You should work a full shift the fourth day. If you are not experienced on the job (if you are, for example, a new employee), you should start off spending 20 per cent of the time in hot working conditions on the first day and increase your time by 20 per cent each subsequent day.

Instead of reducing the exposure times to the job in a hot environment, you can become acclimatized by gradually increasing the physical demands of the job over a week or two.

When there is a potential exposure to heat stress, control measures must be taken to prevent heat exposure in the workplace. These include engineering controls, administrative controls and protective clothing. Selection of appropriate workplace controls will vary, depending on the type of workplace and other factors.

Some medications interfere with acclimatization. For example, hypotensives (drugs causing low blood pressure); diuretics, antispasmodics, sedatives, tranquilizers, antidepressants and amphetamines decrease the body's ability to cope with heat. Workers should seek a doctor's advice on the suitability of a medication for them if they work in hot environments. Consumption of alcohol also interferes with acclimatization.

How to prevent heat related illnesses?

If practical, workers in hot environments should be encouraged to set their own work and rest schedules. Infrequent or irregular tasks such as emergency repairs of hot process equipment often result in heat exposure. Experienced workers can often judge heat strain and limit their exposure accordingly. Inexperienced workers may need special attention as they may continue to work beyond the point at which signs of heat strain appear.

People are generally unable to notice their own heat stress related symptoms. Their survival depends on their coworker's ability to recognize these symptoms and seek timely first aid and medical help.

Page 5 of 8



Salt and Fluid Supplements: A person working in a very hot environment loses water and salt through sweat. This loss should be compensated by water and salt intake. Fluid intake should equal fluid loss. On average, about one litre of water each hour may be required to replace the fluid loss. Plenty of cool (10-15°C) drinking water should be available on the job site and workers should be encouraged to drink water every 15 to 20 minutes even if they do not feel thirsty. Alcoholic drinks should NEVER be taken as alcohol dehydrates the body.

An acclimatized worker loses relatively little salt in their sweat and, therefore, the salt in the normal diet is usually sufficient to maintain the electrolyte balance in the body fluids. For unacclimatized workers who may sweat continuously and repeatedly, additional salt in the food may be used. Salt tablets are not recommended because the salt does not enter the body system as fast as water or other fluids. Too much salt can cause higher body temperatures, increased thirst and nausea. Workers on salt-restricted diets should discuss the need for supplementary salt with their doctor.

Drinks with alcohol or caffeine should never be taken, as they dehydrate the body. For most people, water is the most efficient fluid for re-hydration.

Emergency Action Plan: In extreme environments, an emergency plan is needed. The plan should include procedures for providing affected workers with first aid and medical care.

More information is available in OSH Answers Working in Extreme Hot or Cold Temperature Conditions.

This can happen to anybody—even the young and fit. In Ontario, heat stress is usually a concern during the summer. This is especially true early in the season, when people are not used to the heat.

Heat exposure may occur in many workplaces. Significant sources of heat can be found in workplaces such as foundries, smelters, chemical plants, bakeries and commercial kitchens. For outdoor workers, direct sunlight is usually the main source of heat. In mines, geothermal gradients and equipment contribute to heat exposure. Humidity in workplaces also contributes to heat stress.

How We Cope With Heat Your body is always generating heat and passing it to the environment. The harder your body is working, the more heat it has to lose. When the environment is hot or humid or has a source of radiant heat (for example, a furnace or the sun), your body must work harder to get rid of its heat.

If the air is moving (for example, from fans) and it is cooler than your body, it is easier for your body to pass heat to the environment.

Workers on medication or with pre–existing medical conditions may be more susceptible to heat stress as some medication may impair the body’s response to heat. These workers should speak to their personal physicians about work in hot environments.

Page 6 of 8



Heat Stress–Related Disorders A summary of heat stress–related disorders, causes, symptoms, treatment and prevention is presented in the table below.

Cause Symptoms Treatment Prevention Heat Rash Hot humid

environment; plugged sweat glands.

Red bumpy rash with severe itching.

Change into dry clothes and avoid hot environments. Rinse skin with cool water.

Wash regularly to keep skin clean and dry.

Heat Cramps

Heavy sweating from strenuous physical activity drains a person's body of fluid and salt, which cannot be replaced just by drinking water. Cramps occur from salt imbalance resulting from failure to replace salt lost from heavy sweating.

Painful cramps commonly in the most worked muscles (arms, legs or stomach) which occur suddenly at work or later at home. Heat cramps are serious because they can be a warning of other more dangerous heat-induced illnesses.

Move to a cool area; loosen clothing, gently massage and stretch affected muscles and drink cool salted water (¼ to ½ tsp. salt in 1 litre of water) or balanced commercial fluid electrolyte replacement beverage. If the cramps are severe or don't go away after salt and fluid replacement, seek medical aid. Salt tablets are not recommended.

Reduce activity levels and⁄or heat exposure. Drink fluids regularly. Workers should check on each other to help spot the symptoms that often precede heat stroke.

Fainting Fluid loss and inadequate water intake and standing still, resulting in decreased blood flow to brain. Usually occurs in unacclimatized persons.

Sudden fainting after at least two hours of work; cool moist skin; weak pulse.

GET MEDICAL ATTENTION. Assess need for CPR. Move to a cool area; loosen clothing; make person lie down; and if the person is conscious, offer sips of cool water. Fainting may also be due to other illnesses.

Reduce activity levels and⁄or heat exposure. Drink fluids regularly. Move around and avoid standing in one place for too long. Workers should check on each other to help spot the symptoms that often precede heat stroke.

Heat Exhaustion

Fluid loss and inadequate salt and water intake causes a person's body's cooling system to start to break down.

Heavy sweating; cool moist skin; body temperature over 38°C; weak pulse; normal or low blood pressure; person is tired and weak, and has nausea and vomiting; is very thirsty; or is panting or breathing rapidly; vision may be blurred.

GET MEDICAL ATTENTION. This condition can lead to heat stroke, which can kill. Move the person to a cool shaded area; loosen or remove excess clothing; provide cool water to drink; fan and spray with cool water. Do not leave affected person alone.

Reduce activity levels and⁄or heat exposure. Drink fluids regularly. Workers should check on each other to help spot the symptoms that often precede heat stroke.

Heat Stroke If a person's body has used up all its water and salt reserves, it will stop sweating. This can cause body temperature to rise. Heat stroke may develop suddenly or may follow from heat exhaustion.

High body temperature (over 41°C) and any one of the following: the person is weak, confused, upset or acting strangely; has hot, dry, red skin; a fast pulse; headache or dizziness. In later stages, a person may pass out and have convulsions.

CALL AMBULANCE. This condition can kill a person quickly. Remove excess clothing; fan and spray the person with cool water; offer sips of cool water if the person is conscious.

Reduce activity levels and/or heat exposure. Drink fluids regularly. Workers should check on each other to help spot the symptoms that often precede heat stroke.

Page 7 of 8



Managing Heat Stress Induced by Hot Weather

Most workplaces do not have “hot processes”, but working in hot weather can pose health risks to their workers. For hot work environments due to hot weather, a hot weather plan is appropriate. A hot weather plan is a simplified heat stress control plan. A hot weather plan should establish the implementation criteria, or “triggers”, to put the plan into effect. The criteria may include weather⁄environmental indicator triggers such as:

o Humidex reaching or exceeding 35

o Environment Canada Humidex advisory (air temperature exceeding 30ºC and Humidex exceeding 40);

o Environment Canada weather reports;

o Heat waves (three or more days of temperatures of 32ºC or more) and/or

Ontario Ministry of the Environment smog alert.

Generally, plans related to hot weather should be in place between May 1 and September 30 of each year.

The following websites have information on Humidex, weather reports and smog alerts:

Environment Canada http://www.msc.ec.gc.ca/contents_e.html

Environment Canada Fact Sheet: Summer Severe Weather http://www.on.ec.gc.ca/severe-weather/summer.html

Environment Canada Weather Office http://www.weatheroffice.ec.gc.ca/canada_e.html

Air Quality Ontario Smog Advisories http://www.airqualityontario.com/

Other Resources

Additional information on methods to monitor and manage workplace heat exposures may be found in the following resources:

WSIB Prevent Heat Stress

The Prevent Heat Stress website provides links to information and tools on heat stress awareness, monitoring and control measures.

ROLES / RESPONSIBILITIES The Site Management Team shall monitor area weather forecasts and existing site weather conditions, to better plan and execute construction activities during the summer construction season. However, the continuous monitoring of employees for signs and symptoms of heat-related injuries/stresses rests with the employees and their respective front line supervisor.

Page 8 of 8



• Area Supervisor: Assures that these guidelines are implemented and administered to the extent feasible on the project.

• Safety Coordinator: Provides employee training, program evaluation, and guidance to the Superintendent.

• Front-Line Supervisor a. Typically knows their employees' work-related capabilities and limitations, and it is

paramount that they monitor on a regular basis the condition of each employee assigned to them. They should pay particular attention to the employee's task, environment, and clothing, as well as any engineering and administrative controls and personal protective equipment in use.

b. Often as a day-to-day role model for other workers, they must be aware that their actions and behaviour may influence their subordinates. This is particularly true for employees just arriving at the project site. These employees may not be fully acclimated to hot conditions.

• Employees

Every person tolerates heat differently. Since no empirical measure can determine when an individual begins to sense heat-related injuries/stresses, the primary responsibility for the prevention of heat related-injuries/stresses should be the appropriately trained employee's determination of his/her condition.

EMPLOYEE AWARENESS AND PREVENTION Heat injury/stress prevention awareness shall be provided at least once a year (preferably during the spring) to all project personnel. This awareness shall include:

o Review of this Safe Work Practice.

o How to prevent heat stress

o Signs of heat stress

o How to cope with heat stress.

o Review Heat Stress–Related Disorders Chart

Page 1 of 4

Document Description Stringing Practice


26.053 STRINGING PRACTICE

This procedure is to identify the steps to be taken to prevent any incidents from occurring and to be completed in a safe and efficient manner. Safety Equipment required: 1. Safety Glasses, hardhat, and boots 2. Hi-visibility vest 3. Fire Resistant Clothing c/w long sleeves 4. Insulated Hot Sticks 5. Ground Chains an appropriate amount for the particular job requirements. Working with Tensioning Conductors Calculating Conductor Weight in a Span

1. On level terrain, the weight of a conductor= Conductor Weight in lbs/ft. (kg/m) X (1/2 Span A + ½ Span B)

2. When the bottom of the sag is midspan, as seen in next diagram, the weight of a conductor=,

Conductor Weight in lbs./ft. (kg/m) X (Length to Lowest Sag Point in span A + Length to Lowest Sag Point in Span B)

• An aerial lift can be overloaded when consideration is not given to lifting a

conductor from a structure on a hill or lifting a conductor to a higher position. • A conductor’s weight doubles when it is lifted to its maximum height, which occurs

when the lowest point of sag reaches an adjacent structure. Therefore, as a conductor is lifted with an aerial device or live-line tools to a higher location, the weight increases as the lowest sag point moves farther away.

Calculating Conductor Tension Conductor Tension= Conductor Weight in lbs./ft. (kg/m) X Span Length in Ft. (m) 8 X Sag in ft. (m)

Page 2 of 4



Rules of Thumb for Conductor Tension

• The tension on a conductor is generally the heaviest weight dealt with by powerline workers.

• On distribution lines:

o Line tension will be less than 500 pounds (225 kg) for 3/0 or smaller and less than 750 pounds (340 kg) for 3/0 and larger aluminum conductor.

o Line tension will be less than 750 pounds (340 kg) for 3/0 or smaller and less than 1000 pounds (450 kg) for 3/0 and larger copper conductor.

• At temperatures below freezing, the conductor tension increases 20 percent for each 20° F (10°C) drop in temperature.

• At temperatures above freezing, the conductor tension increases 10 percent for each 20°F (10°C) drop in temperature.

• When pulling up on a conductor, the tension increases as the sag decreases. Line tension is doubled when one-half of the sag is removed. Line tension is tripled when two-thirds of the sag is removed.

Calculating Tension on a Loaded Down Guy

Where H = Height of the guy attachment L = Length of the guy lead T = Tension of the conductors held by the down guy

Example of calculating guy tension

Page 3 of 4



Calculating Vertical Load Applied by a Down-Pull The vertical load applied to a crossarm, snatch block, or a stringing block by a down-pull (see Diagram below) can be excessive when stringing conductor or temporary dead-ending conductor to the ground. A short lead will exert a high vertical weight, which could overload a structure or its components.

Vertical Weight on a Structure = T X H L

T = 1.000, H= 50 Ft., and L = 100 Ft. Therefore, the vertical weight on the crossarm = (1,000X50) / 100 – 500 pounds. It is best to keep the length (L) as long a practical during stringing in the preceding example because the vertical weight would be only 100 pounds if the length (L) were increased to 500 feet.

Measuring the Line Angle in the Field A line angle must be known to conform the proper framing for the structure, as well as be capable of calculating the bisect tension involved in handling a conductor. To measure an actual line angle in the field, measure out 57 feet in two directions (as shown in the next diagram). The length of Line X represents the line angle. This method is reasonably curate up to 45 degrees. For example if Line X is 30 feet, the line angle is 30 degrees, (for metrics, measure 6 metres in each direction. The line ngle is the length of Line X in metres X 10. For example, if Line x is 3 metres, the line angle is 10 X 3 = 30 degrees.)

Page 4 of 4



Calculating the Bisect Tension of a Conductor at a Corner Bisect tensions should be known when a conductor is lifted or relocated on a corner Structure. The approximate bisect tensions of a conductor can be calculated using the following Table.

Table Factor to Calculate Bisect Tensions. The table shows how the factors are used to calculate the bisect tensions various angles given 1,000 pounds line tension. Using the Table, an actual line tension can be inserted in the proper row to calculate a bisect tension.

Line Angle Degrees Bisect Tension (lbs. or kg) = Line Tension X Factor 90 1,500 1,000 1.5 75 1,250 1,000 1.25 60 1,000 1,000 1.0 45 750 1,000 0,75 30 500 1,000 0.50 15 250 1,000 0.25

If a more accurate calculation of the bisect tension is needed, the bisect tension can be calculated as follows: Bisect Tension = Line Angle X Line Tension 60 Note: The bisect tensions on the snatch blocks in SWP 26.006 (page 17 of 28 Snatch Blocks) mat appear different; however, the angle of the rope is measured inside the block, while line angles tend to be measured as shown in the diagram on the same page in SWP 26.006. Moving a Conductor into a Corner

The sag and tension of a conductor can change very quickly when moving a conductor into a corner. The tension and sag increase can cause a midspan contact with live overhead conductors, a broken jib, or bucket truck instability. Calculating the bisect tension ahead of time is complex. Keeping a close watch on the sag as the conductor is moved in and out of the corner is the most practical way to prevent excess tensions

Page 1 of 5

Document Description Rubber Glove Practice Created By: B. Szumik Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.054

Date: Jan. 7, 2011 Revision: 1 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Jan. 3, 2012

26.054 RUBBER GLOVE PRACTICE Introduction During live line rubber glove work the only line of defense from energized equipment are rubber gloves and any additional rubber protective equipment and barriers that are used. Where exposed equipment poses a hazard of inadvertent contact approved cover-up equipment must always be used. Description of Rubber Gloves

The exposed cuff distances from the protective cover to the glove bead as a minimum should be:

Glove Class Cuff Exposed Distances

Class 1 2.54 cm or 1 “ Class 2 5.08 cm or 2” Class 3 7.62 cm or 3” Class 4 10.16 cm or 4”

Safety Note: The Valard standard is to use Class 3 gloves and sleeves for any voltage levels up to 25 kV. Matching rubber gloves to the leather protective covers is equally important as maintaining this cuff distance when replacing leather protective covers, as protective covers come in various lengths to suit the rubber glove class category. The work area is the portion of the glove that begins at the cuff area and extends down toward the forearm, wrist, palm and fingers area. Minor scuffs, abrasions and cuts to the outer black surface of the glove is permitted in the work area provided that there is no visible protrusion of the inner surface area identified by the

Page 2 of 5



contrasting color. The external or black layer of the rubber glove represents 20% of the composition where as the contrasting inner surface area represents the remaining 80% layer. Conversely, any break in the inner surface area on the inside portion of the rubber glove, renders the glove to be defective and must be removed from service. For these reasons, it is imperative to complete a thorough daily inspection of the rubber gloves before use. INSPECTING RUBBER GLOVES Prior to use a daily visual and air test is to be performed to ensure that gloves have not been damaged. Steps to follow for inspection: • Turn glove inside out and carefully inspect for any cuts, splits, or wear spots paying particular

attention to the fingertips and thumb areas. • Flip or reverse the glove back to the original side and inspect the surface area in the same

manner as the above step. • Twirl glove to fill with air and trap it by rolling the glove cuff. • With the free hand, squeeze the glove in various places. • Flip or reverse the glove back to the original side and inspect the surface area in the same

manner as the above step. • While the glove is inflated, hold it up to the face to feel or hear if there is any air leaking through

a puncture. * Inflating the glove this way will amplify any small damaged spots which might not be found by ordinary visual inspection

Rubber gloves must never be used when:

• There is any break or puncture in the surface area of the glove • Any hard spot or foreign material is visible in the rubber composition • Any contrasting inner or outer color is visible through a cut or wear area from the

opposite side • The glove is beyond its expiry date (6 months) stamped on the cuff portion of the glove

All defective or suspect gloves shall be returned to the work center for replacement.

Page 3 of 5



CARE OF RUBBER GLOVES The following precautions should be noted in caring for rubber gloves:

• Rings, watches and other jewelry should be removed to avoid electrical stresses. • Rubber gloves should not be stored in a folded or creased position with objects lying on

top of them. They should be stored in a rubber glove bag hanging in an upright position with the cuffs pointing down and flap closed

• Rubber gloves should not be stored in locations where there is the possibility of corona discharge or ozone concentrations. This phenomenon causes rapid breakdown of the rubber’s molecular structure rendering it defective. It is the beginning of corona cutting deterioration.

• Rubber gloves should never be stored inside out as this subjects the natural lay of the rubber to stress checks. Any ozone, fluorescent lights or ultraviolet radiation exposure causes compounded stressing to occur even more quickly.

• In the field rubber gloves shall only be cleaned with clean water. Commercial soaps, detergents or cleaning agents may damage the rubber

• Only cornstarch or an approved powder is to be used to aid in putting on rubber gloves. Baby powder should not be used as there are chemical compounds that accelerate deterioration of the rubber.

• Grease or oils should be avoided as these substances seriously damage the rubber compounds of the glove

Protective Covers Protective covers act as a mechanical protection barrier from slivers, sharp objects, ties, grease and other foreign substances, which may cause damage to the natural rubber. These protective covers are sized to fit over rubber gloves of the same size. The cuff portion of the cover should not be relied upon for electrical protection. Inspection and care of leather protective covers Glove covers along with the rubber gloves shall be inspected at least once a day before use. They should be inspected for signs of splinters, or foreign objects that may have punctured the leather glove and possibly into the rubber. Leather covers should be replaced if they are impregnated with penetrox, oil, the stitching is separating or the glove appears to have excessive wear. To help prevent the possibility of current leakage while performing rubber glove work the cuff portion of the protective covers should be kept clean at all times. The protective covers should never be used as a replacement for regular work gloves. When to us Rubber Gloves Appropriate class rubber gloves shall be used when:

• Installing line hose, hoods, blankets or other protective devices by hand for rubber glove applications,

• Controlling poles using tools such as a cant hook / ropes when installing in an energized circuit,

• When performing switching, pruning, live line tool work under adverse weather conditions,

Page 4 of 5



• Stringing or sagging conductors, or when installing or removing guys, hardware, equipment while in the ‘4 foot vicinity’ of circuits energized above 750 v phase to ground,

• When operating gang operated/air break switches in conjunction with a ground gradient control mat,

• As an option, performing switching operations with live line tools on live-front padmount transformers and switching kiosks/terminals,

• When working on any energized secondary equipment, • The supervisor or the employee deems it necessary.

Rubber Glove Work in Adverse Weather During adverse weather conditions rubber glove work shall not be started or carried out. If the work has begun and weather conditions deteriorate, the job should be placed in a safe condition and completed when conditions improve. Rubber glove work must be suspended/discontinued immediately in the event of an electrical storm.

Baby Powder should not be used as the chemical composition of the powder will eventually deteriorate the synthetic rubber.

Page 5 of 5



Testing Frequency

Protective Equipment

Maximum Use Voltage Phase to Phase

Retest Frequency

Rubber Gloves & Sleeves Class 00 500 V 6 months Class 0 1,000 V 6 months Class 1 7,500 V 6 months Class 2 17,000 V 6 months Class 3 26,500 V 6 months Class 4 36,000 V 6 months

Rubber Blankets, Line Hose, Couplers and Hoods

Class 0 1,000 V 1 year Class 1 7,500 V 1 year Class 2 17,000 V 1 year Class 3 26,500 V 1 year Class 4 36,000 V 1 year

Page 1 of 6

VALARD

Document Description Operating Snowmobiles Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.068

Date: Feb. 22, 2011 Revision: 1 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Jan 3, 2012

26.068 USE OF SNOWMOBILES ALL PERSONNEL THAT ARE TO OPERATE SNOWMOBILES MUST BE TRAINED IN IT’S USE. PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT REQUIRED:

• DOT/Snell/ANSI approved helmets only (hardhats are not approved). • Safety Footwear with 6” uppers. • High Visibility vest or outer wear. • Long sleeved clothing. • Warm gloves • Eye protection (snow goggles or safety glasses). • Clothing must be worn to provide protection from the cold due to increased wind chill at high

speeds while operating snowmobiles. • Do not wear scarves or loose clothing because of potential entanglement with moving parts.

TRANSPORTATION A single snowmobile may be transported in the box of an appropriately sized pickup box. If transporting more than one snowmobile, they must be transported using a trailer or “sled deck” designed for transporting snowmobiles. Secure the rear of the snowmobile with a ratchet-type tie-down strap. If using a trailer, ensure you have all the proper equipment to attach your trailer to your vehicle, including: safety chains, proper size hitch ball, proper electrical connections and lights that are in working condition.

• Trailers and sled decks will come equipped with a rod or a bar to secure the snowmobile to the trailer. A rod will go across the skis and is held in place at the outside end by a snap pin. A bar will go across the skis and be screwed into the trailer’s deck at a preset receptacle at the center of the snowmobile trailer bed.

INSPECT YOUR SNOWMOBILE BEFORE YOU RIDE Always inspect your snowmobile before each ride to detect problems that could cause an accident.

• Always set the parking brake first. • Consult your owner’s manual for items that may need to be lubricated, tightened, adjusted,

aligned, or checked for wear. Front-to-Back Inspection Process Complete a thorough inspection of your snowmobile by starting at the front and finishing at the back. Skis

• Check the overall condition and spacing/position. • Check the skag/wear bar condition. • Check the suspension condition and adjustment.

Cowling • Test the front headlights–both high and low beams. • Check for cracks and other damage.

Engine • Check the drive belt’s condition and tension. Carry a spare drive belt. • Check the condition of the exhaust. • Check fuel levels–gasoline, oil, and, if applicable, coolant.

Handlebars • Test that the handlebars turn smoothly. • Check all of the controls on the handlebars.

o The throttle should move easily and snap back. o The brake lever should feel firm, not touch the handgrip, and snap back. o Test the engine’s stop switch.

Page 2 of 6

VALARD



Mid-Section • Examine the tracks for rips, tears, ice, and/or debris. • Check the condition of the high-fax/slide rail. • Check the bogie wheel condition. • Check suspension condition/adjustment.

Rear • Test that the brake light and taillight are working. • Make sure that you have a tool kit, operator’s manual, and spare parts.

LOADING/UNLOADING When loading/unloading ensure you are wearing a helmet. The semi-kneeling riding position will allow you to respond the fastest if a problem while loading or unloading occurs. Load/unload snowmobiles from a ramp or bank. Loading With a Ramp

• Double check the ramp to be sure it is secure, drive the snowmobile at a moderate speed up the ramp, letting off the throttle as the skis reach the bed at the top of the ramp. Slowly drive the snowmobile forward until it is over the location where it will be secured and set the brake.

Unloading with a Ramp • Remove the rod or bar and tie downs securing the snowmobile, ensure the ramp is secure and

stable and then slowly back the snowmobile off the deck. STARTING THE ENGINE Try not to flood the engine when starting the snowmobile. If the choke is used and the engine hesitates to start, stop before too much gas is used. Wait a minute or two, and then try to start the engine again.

• Point the snowmobile in a safe direction • Be ready to start it by kneeling or sitting on the machine • Check the throttle by depressing it at least once to be sure it isn’t frozen. When released it should

return quickly to the idle position • Check all important switches like key and safety switches, which should be in the “on” position • Depending on the machine, choke or prime the engine if it is cold • If your machine starts electrically, turn the key to the ”start” position and release the choke as

soon as the engine starts • If your machine is a manual start, pull the recoil starter cord until you feel resistance, then pull

vigorously, but don’t let the handle snap back PROPER RIDING POSTURE Riding a snowmobile correctly allows the operator to operate and control the machine more easily, and react more quickly to changes in terrain and environment. Positioning Yourself for Safer Riding Learn to position your body properly as you maneuver through various types of terrain. Mastering the basic riding positions is the key to safe snowmobiling.

Page 3 of 6

VALARD



Sitting: Safest and Most Stable

• Sitting is the most common position. It provides the lowest center of gravity for maximum stability and safety.

• This is the only position recommended for carrying passengers if the snowmobile is designed for that purpose.

• Keep your feet firmly on the running boards and in the foot wells.

Semi-kneeling: Best for Easy Weight Shifting

• Semi-kneeling lets you lean uphill or shift your body weight easily.

• Use this position for crossing a road or moving around congested areas.

• Switching from sitting to kneeling helps you avoid fatigue at low speeds.

• Novice riders should practice semi-kneeling.

Standing: Best for Seeing Ahead

• Standing gives you maximum visibility. • In areas with obstructions, this position can help

you look over an obstacle to see if another is behind it.

• At road crossings, this position provides the longest line of sight.

• Standing lets you shift your weight quickly in any direction and change riding positions.

Posting

• This crouching position uses your feet and legs to absorb any shocks, which helps avoid uncomfortable bumps.

• It’s also useful when climbing steep hills, crossing creeks and streams, and encountering other difficult situations.

• Since this is the most tiring position to maintain, use posting only when necessary and for short periods.

RIDING BEHAVIOURS

Page 4 of 6

VALARD



Safe snowmobilers know that they are responsible for their snowmobile and for their behaviour while operating it. They demonstrate responsibility by learning about their snowmobile and by improving their riding skills. In doing this, they begin to exhibit the six traits of a safe snowmobiler, who:

• Understands the mechanics of the snowmobile. • Respects both its capabilities and its limitations. • Maneuvers skillfully through a variety of operating conditions. • Knows and observes the laws governing snowmobiles. • Uses good judgment. • Respects others and the environment.

Examples of poor riding behaviour includes carelessness, speeding, following too close and riding on ice. Carelessness Careless operation is a leading cause of snowmobile deaths. Always drive defensively, at safe speeds, and as if you would encounter a careless driver or another hazard at any time. Careless snowmobiling operation comes in many forms, including but not limited to:

• Hugging the inside corners on curves. • Speeding, particularly when near non-motorized trail users, trailheads, buildings, livestock or

wildlife. • Over riding headlights • Riding too fast in foggy or snowy conditions. • Riding your snowmobile on prohibited roads. • Failure to obey signs and regulations. • Riding on the wrong side of the trail. • Following other snowmobiles too closely. • Passing on corners and blind hills. • Approaching blind hills at excessive speeds.

Speed Speed is a major factor in many snowmobile accidents, many of them being at night.

• Always keep the speed of the snowmobile slow enough to ensure they are in control of it and operating safely. Never exceed speed limits that are posted on trails or roadways, including those posted for roadways when you are operating in a road ditch.

• At night, the headlights illuminate your path about 200 feet in front of the snowmobile. Be careful not to over ride the headlights.

Following too close Following too close is another common cause of crashes. Many happen when the lead rider has applied the brake and the person behind could not react fast enough to stop. When riding in a group, there are a few guidelines you should know:

• Snowmobiles should ride single file and not side-by-side. Some trails are not wide enough for two snowmobiles. This will also help when there is two-way traffic on a snowmobile trail.

• Follow the snowmobile in front of you at a safe distance that would allow you to stop or slow down in a safe manner. A good rule to follow is the 3-second rule.

3-Second Rule When the person in front of you passes an object, note where it is and start counting. By the time you arrive at that same object, you should have counted no less than three seconds. With the weight of the snowmobile, there can be a deadly outcome from the force of impact during a crash. Always allow more distance between riders when riding in whiteouts from snow dust, fog, wind, and snowstorms or when night riding.

Page 5 of 6

VALARD



Riding on Ice The safest snowmobiling rule is to never cross lakes or rivers since it can never be guaranteed that ice of any thickness will support a snowmobile.

• Besides the danger of plunging through the ice, you have far less traction for starting, turning, and stopping on ice than on snow.

• If you go through the ice, stay calm. Extend your arms out forward in front of you on the unbroken ice surface to catch yourself. Kick your feet to propel you onto the ice, like a seal. If the ice keeps breaking, continue moving toward shore or the direction from which you came.

GETTING STUCK Knowing the type of snow you are riding on can help avoid getting stuck. Your machine can easily sink if the snow is loose, light, deep or powder. When these snow conditions occur, keep your RPM’s and power high enough to keep momentum but don’t overpower the machine; it can quickly dig the snowmobile’s track into the loose snow and result in getting stuck. If you get stuck be extremely cautious when trying to move your snowmobile. Over-exerting can lead to back injuries and even a heart attack. Have friends from your riding group help move your machine very carefully. Do not get on your machine and rev up the engine to drive it out of the situation. This may cause your machine to sink even further. When stuck on flat ground:

• With your feet on the running boards, rock the snowmobile slowly from side to side while gently feathering the throttle

• Shut off the engine, clear the loose snow from the track and try to pack the snow under the track for a firm base

• Try walking ahead of the machine and trampling a path in the snow to help reduce drag on the machine

• If you are carrying an avalanche shovel or small folding shovel, use the shovel to dig snow out from around and beneath the snowmobile, as well as to shovel a path in front of the machine

When stuck going uphill Your machine may get stuck while you are riding uphill in certain snow conditions.

• Shut off the machine and get off on the uphill side • You will need to turn the snowmobile around, so assess which direction is the safest and easiest

to turn it downhill • Trample the snow on the side of the snowmobile you choose to turn it toward and dig out the ski

loop on that side if needed to gain a good hand-hold • Grasp the ski loop on the side of the snowmobile you are turning toward and begin pulling the

snowmobile around • Continue to turn the sled 180 degrees until it’s facing downhill. Use caution when on steep slopes

so the machine does not roll over on you or take off downhill in an uncontrollable manner • Start the snowmobile and drive it back down the hill

TOWING A DISABLED SNOWMOBILE

Towing a disabled snowmobile behind your snowmobile calls for extreme caution to avoid injuries and damage to either snowmobile. • Always remove the drive belt from the machine that will be towed • It is recommended you use a rigid tow bar instead of a rope or chain • If you must tow the disabled snowmobile with a tow rope or chain, tie the left ski of the disabled

sled tight against the tow snowmobile’s hitch or right rear to keep it from wandering into oncoming traffic on the trail

• Passengers may need to ride on the machine being towed to help steer and brake during towing. • Passengers should keep their feet on the running boards at all times.

Page 6 of 6

VALARD



• Always be certain the rear snow flap on the tow snowmobile is in place and properly functioning to avoid injury to the passenger

• When crossing a road, passengers should get off the towed machine and walk across. • The driver of the snowmobile must be very cautious at all times and should always operate at

slow speeds • Use reflectors or flags on both machines while towing to warn others that you are towing/being

towed SAFE OPERATION – GENERAL

• Do a pre-ride inspection before using a snowmobile. • To start a cold engine, you may need to choke or prime it. However, don’t choke or prime the

engine if it’s warm. You may flood the engine with too much fuel, making it difficult or impossible to start.

• To turn a snowmobile, keep most of you body weight on the outside running board and lean your upper body into the turn.

• When climbing hills, shift your body weight forward by leaning to keep the front skis on the ground.

• If stopped while going uphill, do not apply the rear brake. • When going down hills, keep the engine running and in gear, apply the rear brake and avoid

sharp turns. • Avoid “side hill” situations. When they are unavoidable, lean into the hill. • As a last resort to avoid an impending collision, fall off the vehicle and kick yourself free of it. • Do not allow extra riders unless the snowmobile you are riding is designed for passengers (two

up seat). • Be careful when crossing roads. Come to a complete stop and make absolutely sure no traffic is

approaching from any direction. Then cross at a right angle to traffic. • All equipment shall be operated in a safe manner and under safe environmental conditions. • Only trained and competent Personnel shall operate snowmobiles. • Wear appropriate PPE at all times during vehicle operation. • Never attempt to climb a hill too steep for your ability or the performance of the snowmobile. • Avoid riding across slopes whenever possible. • Load/unload snowmobiles from a ramp or bank. • Follow OEM operator’s manual. • It is illegal to operate a snowmobile on public roads.

Note: Loss of vehicle control causes most accidents. When the operator encounters a change of terrain

or swerves to avoid an obstacle, it causes an abrupt change of balance and loss of control. Regulatory Requirements Alberta Part 9 – Powered Mobile Equipment – Section 282-ATV and Snow Vehicles British Columbia Part 16 – Mobile Equipment Yukon Part 6 – Mobile Equipment Saksatchewan Part XI-Powered Mobile Equipment Manitoba Part 22 – Powered Mobile Equipment

Page 1 of 2

VALARD

Document Description Working Around Lightning Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number SWP 26.070

Date: Jan. 10, 2014 Revision: Revised by: Date:

Purpose: To Protect workers from the hazards of a lightning strike which may travel for miles Scope: 10 people are killed each year in Canada due to lightning strikes. Another 70-150 are seriously injured. This standard address the best practice policy to mitigate the risk associated with lightning strikes. As line work involves liner conductive construction, line strikes on non-isolated lines become a complicated concern. Valard does not expect employees to work during lightning conditions at any time including restoration. General Information: 1) The best place to be during lightning storm activity is a well-constructed building or metal

topped vehicle. 2) A lighting strike can travel as far as 8km laterally from origin. 3) If you cannot find shelter (remote patrol), set up camp away from trees and find low-lying

areas. 4) Avoid using landlines or anything connected that can carry an electrical charge. 5) The safe standard for resuming activity outdoors is 30 minutes after the last rumble of

thunder. 6) If lightning strikes a person it is safe to immediately after render first aid. 7) If you require access to WeatherSenry, you will need to obtain a user name and password

and download the App. Note: WeatherSentry has a dedicated Valard account whereby a person can use a smart

phone to access real-time weather information and lightning strike data. Lightning strike data can be obtained across Canada and will send alerts for (caution, and clear) depending on the programmed parameters.

8) Each second between a flash and thunderclap represents 300 meters. If you hear thunder up to 30 seconds after, you are within direct striking distance.

Consider the following when working on lines: · 1 minute between flash/thunderclap is 18km away · 5 minutes between flash/thunderclap is 90km away · 10 minutes between flash/thunderclap is 180km away Anything beyond 10 minutes is usually out of audible range without specialized sonic meters. Procedure The following principles apply to all work sites under potential conditions for lightning storms. The foreman is responsible to assess the daily conditions and apply work restrictions as per the policy. 1: During the initial review scope of work for the day, identify the type of work and specific work

location(s). Reference Environment Canada website, local weather cast, and WeatherSentry for a forecast. If lightening is imminent, prepare to stand down until conditions are safe.

2: Review the current and forecast conditions with the crew. If this is day one with the crew or new workers are at the site, ensure you review this standard with them so that clear expectations are outlines.

Page 2 of 2

VALARD

Document Description Working Around Lightning Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number SWP 26.070

Date: Jan. 10, 2014 Revision: Revised by: Date:

3: If the scope of work is working is not part of a line or the isolation point (open) is within visual range, you must stop all work once rumble or lightening is confirmed. Work is not to resume until 30 minutes after the last confirmation of lightning or rumble.

4: If the scope of work is on grounded lines of which the known open points are not at the immediate work area, expand your weather and lightening search parameters to include the lines that are part of your bonded work zone. Two methods can be used to obtain an all clear for work:

a) Using WeatherSentry, monitor the lightning strikes (km) radius from your bonded worksite to the last lightning strike that could have potentially struck the line being worked on up or downstream. After the last strike, 30 minutes must pass prior to work resuming (All Clear). WeatherSentry will send a notification of all clear after 30 minutes. b) If using visual and audible (lightening & thunder) method only, after the last rumble or strike observed, wait 45 minutes prior to work resuming (All Clear) 5. As the day progresses and there are changing conditions (periods of clear and stand down), plan your work accordingly. If you are using cranes and complex lifts, assess how long it will take you to stand down to a safe location if you were fully engaged in the work. If weather patterns are changing rapidly, plan less demanding work on the ground that does not use personal lift devices, cranes, or line trucks.

Page 1 of 2

Document Description Use Portable Generator Created By: D. Lebedynski Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.071

Date: Oct. 15. 2014 Revision: Revised by: Date:

26.071 USE OF PORTABLE GENERATORS

General 1. Always inspect portable generators prior to use for damage or loose fuel lines

that may have occurred during transportation or handling.

2. Keep the generator dry and DO NOT operate in wet/raining conditions.

3. Maintain and operate portable generators in accordance with the manufacturer’s use and safety instructions.

4. Never attach a generator directly to the electrical system of a structure (home, office, trailer) unless the generator has a properly installed transfer switch because this creates a risk of electrocution for utility workers.

5. Always plug electric tools and appliances into the generator using the manufacturers supplied cords.

6. Use undamaged heavy duty extension cords that are grounded (three pronged).

7. Use ground fault circuit interrupters (GFCI’s) as per the manufacturer’s instructions.

8. Never start or fuel a generator while it is located inside a building/ structure or the box of a truck.

9. Never place a generator outdoors in close proximity to doors, windows or vents of a building/structure.

10. Never store fuel in close proximity to a running generator or a generator that has not cooled down completely after use.

11. To reduce the risk of fire, keep at least 5 feet of clearance on all sides of generator including overhead. DO NOT operate the generator near combustible materials.

Major Causes of Injuries and Fatalities - Shocks and electrocution from improper use of power or accidentally

energizing other electrical systems. - Carbon Monoxide from a generators exhaust. - Fires from improperly refueling the generator or inappropriately storing fuel.

Regulatory reference Alberta



Yukon Act 1 – Definition of “Competent Person” (a)(b)(c) Part 1- General Section 1.06- Training of Worker

Page 2 of 2

Document Description Use Portable Generator Created By: D. Lebedynski Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.071

Date: Oct. 15. 2014 Revision: Revised by: Date:





Page 1 of 5

Document Description Use of Striking Tools Created By: S. Henderson Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.074

Date: Nov 9, 2015 Revision: 1 Revised by: S. Henderson Date: Dec 24, 2015

26.074 Use of Striking Tools Purpose The following are the minimum required practices to use with striking tools. Tool and Worker Certification: Users of this equipment must be adequately qualified, suitably trained and with sufficient experience to use this tool without supervision, or be under the direct supervision of a worker who is qualified. Personal Protective Equipment Required: Hard Hat (If the risk of head injury exists) Safety Glasses or Goggles, and Face Shield Safety Boots Gloves and/or Hand Protection Hearing Protection (Recommended)

Page 2 of 5



Use:

• Read and follow the manufacturer’s instructions and warning labels. • Use the correct tool for the job. Use tools for their intended purpose (ex. never use screwdrivers as

chisels).

o Do not use cold chisels for cutting or splitting stone or concrete. o Do not use a drift pin punch (also called an aligning punch) as a pin punch intended for driving,

removing, or loosening pins, keys, and rivets.

• Use the tools only if they are good condition. Refer to maintenance practices below if repair is necessary.

o Do not use struck tools if the cutting edge is dull or chipped or if the point of a punch is slanted or damaged.

o Do not use struck tools if the struck end is chipped or mushroomed. o Do not use a hammer with a loose or damaged handle. o Do not use a handle that is cracked, broken or loosely attached to the head. o Do not use a hammer head with cracks, chips, mushrooming or excessive wear. o Do not use a hammer with cracks in the claw or eye section.

• Ensure the work area is clear of debris. • Ensure there is adequate lighting in the work area. • Ensure that the piece being worked on, is held securely in vice (if loose or not attached to the vehicle).

• Keep your fingers away from the striking area. • Use tongs or a holder to guide the striking tool, to take the workers hand out of the line of fire.

• Protectors can be attached to tools as well, to guard the workers hand from hammer blows.

Page 3 of 5



Use continued:

• Never carry hand tools such as chisels and screwdrivers in a pocket; they can cause injury when you bend over or in the event of a fall.

• When carrying tools protect the cutting edges and carry the tools in such a way that you will not endanger yourself or others.

• Hold the chisel, for shearing and chipping, at an angle, which permits the bevel of the cutting edge to lie flat against the shearing plane.

• When using a hammer to strike another metal tool, such as a punch or chisel, aim the blow or cut away from your body.

• Do not allow bull point chisels to be hand-held by one employee and struck by another. • Check the material/stock for any foreign objects such as nails, staples or screws. • Get a firm grip on the handle, this will ensure that you don’t lose your hold on the hammer. • Hold the hammer at the end of the handle with your dominant hand. You will get maximum leverage,

and the best balance and control holding it this way.

• Keep your wrist straight and use your whole forearm to lift and drop the tool. • Check before you swing, keep your workspace clear, and check that nobody is standing behind you or

too near. • Watch the object you are hitting. • Hold the hammer with your wrist straight and your hand firmly wrapped around the handle. • Strike a hammer blow squarely with the striking face parallel to the surface being struck. Always avoid

glancing blows and over/under strikes.

Page 4 of 5



Maintenance/Repair:

• “If a tool is defective in some way, DO NOT USE IT.” (SWP 26.002 - Defective Tool Practice) • Any tools that are unsafe due to damage should be removed from service. Follow procedure in the

HS&E Manual (17.3 - Removal of Defective Tools, Equipment and Machinery). • Repairs can be performed by a competent worker or trained repair technician. • Striking Tools:

o Redress striking tools with burred or mushroomed heads.

o Redress the point or cutting edge to its original shape. Grind to a slightly convex cutting edge. The point angle of the chisel should be 70° for hard metals, 60° for soft.

o Do not apply too much pressure to the head when grinding a chisel. The heat generated can remove the temper. Immerse the chisel in cold water periodically when grinding.

Hammers:

• If a hammer shows dents, cracks, chips, mushrooming or excessive wear, do not try to re-grind it to shape.

• If a hammer is worn out and dangerous - discard it! Discard any that exhibit even the slightest hairline fracture.

Page 5 of 5



Regulatory Reference: Alberta Act Section 2 (2) - Obligations of workers Regulation Par t 1 , Section 1(g) Definition of “Competent Worker”, Section 14 - Duties of Workers, Section 15 - Safety Training Code Part 18 - Personal Protective Equipment

British Columbia Part 2 - Application - Section 2.2 - General Duties

OH&S Regulation - Part 8 - Personal Protective Clothing & Equipment

Saskatchewan Part I - Preliminary Matters - Section 2(1) (m) Definition “Competent”, Section 19 - Training of worker

Part VII - Personal Protective Equipment

Manitoba Part 1 - Definition and General Matters - Definition “Competent” Part 6 - Personal Protective Equipment Part 16 - Machines, Tools, and Robots - Division 1

NWT Act 1 - Definition of “Competent Part 3 - Section 12, General Duties of Employers Part 5 - Construction and Maintenance Part 7 - Personal Protective Equipment

NL

Part I - Definition of “Competent Worker” (i)(ii)


Ontario Part I - General - Section 1 - Definition “Competent Worker” (a, b, c)

Part XII - Safety Materials, Equipment, Devices and Clothing

Yukon Act 1 - Definition of “Competent Person” Part 1 - General - Section 1.06 - Training of Worker Part 1 - General - Section 1.08 - Personal Protective Equipment

Page 1 of 1

Document Description Working Over and Near Water Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.076


26.076 Working Over or Near Water

This Safe Work Practice applies to all workers who perform work over or near any body of water.

OBJECTIVE:

SAFETY EQUIPMENT REQUIRED:

1. Safety Glasses 2. Hard Hat (with chinstrap) 3. Safety Boots 4. Lifebuoys 5. Personal Floatation Device

TRAINING All Workers working over or near water shall be trained in their responsibilities, the safe work practices and procedures.

STEPS:

1. Prior to any work commences a Hazard assessment must be completed to identify all hazards and all workers associated with the job shall review it and sign the last page.

2. A tailboard must be competed prior to any work commencing.

3. Employees when working over or near water wear where the danger of drowning exists shall wear a Canadian Coast Guard or Canada Department of Transport approved life jacket or personal floatation device.

4. Life jacket or personal floatation device must be checked prior to each use in case there are defects or damaged which could alter the devices’ strength or buoyancy.

5. Lifebuoys or buoyant heaving line must be provided for emergency rescue use.

6. Ring buoys shall have a minimum or 90 feet to a maximum of 200 feet.

7. When the job is completed all equipment must be stored in a clean dry location.

Note: Employees, who will be performing work over or near water, where the danger of drowning exists, are not permitted to work alone at any time.

Page 1 of 8

Document Description Use of Gloves – Tools, Materials & Cutting Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.080

Date: Aug. 2, 2017 Revision: 2 Revised by: D. Flohr Date: Oct. 17, 2017

26.080 Use of Gloves for Handling Material and Cutting Tools

Purpose:

The purpose of this safe work practice is to set the standard for the proper selection and use of gloves during work activities on all project sites. Each worksite shall maintain an adequate supply of proper gloves for the type of work that may be encountered.

Glove Selection when Handling Materials or Tools:

Employees shall wear the proper gloves to protect their hands from injury as specified by the below Glove Use Guideline. However, if a cutting hazard is present please see Glove Selection when Working with Cutting Tools or Materials with a Potential Cutting Hazard below. As a minimum, heavy leather gloves with a cut resistant (CR) level 2 rating are good for providing general protection while handling materials, working in excavations, abrasive blasting, housekeeping, rigging, and grinding.

Page 2 of 8



Glove Selection when Working with Cutting Tools or Materials with a Potential Cutting Hazard: When a task requires the use of a cutting tool or handling materials with a potential cutting hazard, refer to Table 1 below to determine what tool is appropriate for the task and to determine whether CR gloves are required. When CR gloves are required, at least Level 3 CR gloves must be used or as otherwise specified below.

Table 1 - Guideline for Selection of Cutting Tools

Category of Use

Application Cutting Tool Comments Office and

general use

Opening envelopes Scissors, mail opener No CR gloves required

Cutting paper Scissors, paper cutter No CR gloves required

Opening packages Scissors No CR gloves required

Cutting thin cardboard boxes Cutting rope or twine Cutting plastic, polyethylene, or shrink wrap

Scissors

No CR gloves required

Field – electrical Small gauge / data wire Side cutters Wire strippers


Wire smaller than #10 AWG gauge

Wire strippers No CR gloves required

Wire #10 AWG gauge or larger Skinning knife (e.g., Klein KT- 46037) Stripping knife (1000 V Insulated)

Level 3 or greater CR gloves

Stripping control cables Tech cables Power cables

Skinning knife (e.g., Klein KT- 46037) Stripping knife (1000 V Insulated) Cable jacket skinners


Cutting copper and aluminum cables

Ratcheting cable cutters Non-insulated cable cutter


Field - mechanical

Cleaning gasket material from flange

Gasket scrapper Retractable razor scrapper


Cutting gaskets Gasket cutting tool Shearing scissors


Retractable safety knife (e.g., Martor® Megasafe # 116001)


Page 3 of 8



Field material handling (including warehouse)

Moving, installing or salvaging glass or porcelain insulators or other material with sharp edges or potentially sharp edges if the material was to break


Cutting boxes Cutting heavy rope Cutting heavy/large plastic

Box cutter Retractable safety knife (e.g., Martor® Megasafe # 116001)


Table 2 below gives examples of some recommended cutting tools for the various applications listed. This is not an exclusive list; other manufacturer’s cutting tools can be used, as long as the correct tool is used for the task.

Table 2 – Examples of Recommended Cutting Tools

Cutting Tools

Picture Application Box cutters

Typical example: Martor® Handy 444

Cardboard Boxes

Level 3 or greater CR gloves required

Retractable blade Typical example: Martor® Megsafe #116001

Cutting boxes;

cutting rope or twine; cutting plastic, polyethylene, or shrink wrap; gaskets


Retractable razor scraper Cleaning gasket material from flange, removing decals from glass surface Level 3 or greater CR gloves required

Page 4 of 8



Cable skinning knife Typical examples: Klein KT-46037 - kit

Skinning control cables; tech cables; power cables

(when fixed blade is required)


Cable jacket skinners Typical example: Ideal industries

Skinning control cables

No CR Gloves required

Wire strippers and cutters Strips wire sizes #10, 12, 14, 18 and 20 AWG

Typical examples: PROTO professional®, Ideal Industries

Cutting wire under # AWG 10 gauge


Insulated wire and cable cutters Typical example: Klein

Cutting wire over AWG #10 gauge


Ratcheting cable cutters manual and electric operated Typical examples: Greenlee, Homac®, Ideal Industries



Non-insulated cable cutter Typical examples: Klein, Ideal Industries


No CR Gloves required.

Page 5 of 8



The gloves displayed in Table 3 below are typical examples of cut resistant gloves. It is not an exclusive list and the images may not be representative of the gloves available. The level of glove required is job dependent; personal preference is considered as long as the gloves meet the minimum requirements for the job being performed.

Table 3 - Protective Glove Examples

Typical Level 3 or Greater Protective Glove To Be Worn With Cutting Tools

Typical Examples

GLOVE KEVLAR NITRILE COATED ASTM 4

Kevlar(R)/Fiberglass String Knit with Nitrile Palm Coat Glove. Cut-resistant. 13- gauge knit is highly dexterous yet provides stellar cut protection. Composite blended Kevlar(R) fiber provides ASTM Level 4 cut protection.

Kevlar Gloves

Kevlar gloves

GLOVE FLAME RESISTANT CUT

13 g composite yarn liner with black foam neoprene palm coating. All components inherently flame resistant (FR). EN (European Standard) cut resistance (CR) Level 3 or greater.

FR Rated Gloves

GLOVE GRAY CUT RESISTANT DYNEEMA

The world's strongest fiber. Fifteen times stronger than steel by weight. Resistant not just to cuts but also abrasion and chemicals. Excellent heat transfer, allowing you to stay cooler without itching. Re-usable, machine washable and have the highest abrasion rating for longevity. CE Standard cut resistant Level 3.

Black Rhino® Stainless Steel Wire Core Slash Resistant Safety Gloves These gloves are knit from a high-tech yarn, which consists of a stainless-steel core wrapped with tough Dyneema® man-made fiber. These gloves give exceptional protection against cuts from sharp-edged materials and knives. Stand up to repeated washings. ASTM cut resistant Level 5.

Page 6 of 8



Cut Resistant Glove Rating And Typical Material Used

Task

Level 5 Metal Mesh, Hexarmor

Extreme cutting hazards: • Heavy metal plate stamping • Handling plate glass

Level 4 Fibre-metal blend (Kevlar Steels,

Dyneema Fibreglass)

High cutting hazards: • Handling heavy broken insulators or sharp edged objects. • Handling heavy glass.

Level 3 Kevlar, Vectan, Twaron, Dyneema,

leather reinforced with Kevlar

Moderate cutting hazards: • Using an open blade knife or cutting tool. • Skinning cables. • Skinning wire greater in size than #10 AWG. • Cutting boxes, cutting rope, twine, plastic, polyethylene,

shrink wrap, or gaskets (box cutter, retractable blade, or skinning knife).

• Handling light broken insulators or sharp edged objects. • Handling light glass.

Level 2 Heavy leather, polyester, nylon, multiply

layers

Low cutting hazard: • Regular lineman activities. • Regular substation activities. • Automotive applications. • General maintenance and construction activities.

Page 7 of 8



Manufacturers typically use the ASTM F-1790 standard for measuring the cut protection performance of protective apparel. This test method uses force-distance testers to determine how resistant a material is to cuts when exposed to a cutting edge under specific loads. This method provides data to differentiate the cut resistance of common material such as cotton, leather and high performance fibers. Results are provided in terms of grams of weight applied to the specific material being tested. Another testing agency which rates fabric and cut resistance can be seen Table 4 below, ANSI/ISEA (American National Standards Institute)/(International Safety Equipment Association).

Table 4 - ANSI/ISEA 105-2005 Mechanical Ratings

Rating Cut Level 0

Cut Level 1

Cut Level 2

Cut Level 3

Cut Level 4

Cut Level 5 Cut Level 6

Abrasion Resistance* (Cycles)

< 100 ≥ 100 ≥ 500 ≥ 1000 ≥ 3000 ≥ 10000 ≥ 20000

Cut Resistance (Grams)**

< 200 ≥ 200 ≥ 500 ≥ 1000 ≥ 1500 ≥ 3500 -

Puncture Resistance (Newtons)

< 10 ≥ 10 ≥ 20 ≥ 60 ≥ 100 ≥ 150 -

* Abrasion ratings 0 through 3 are based on measurement with a 500-gram load. Levels 4 through 6 are measured with a 1,000-gram load.

** Weight needed to cut through material with 25 mm of blade travel

Page 8 of 8



Regulatory References: Alberta Act Section 2 (2) - Obligations of workers Regulation Par t 1 , Section 1(g) Definition of “Competent Worker”, Section 14 - Duties of Workers, Section 15 - Safety Training Code Part 18 - Personal Protective Equipment

British Columbia Part 2 - Application - Section 2.2 - General Duties

OH&S Regulation - Part 8 - Personal Protective Clothing & Equipment

Saskatchewan Part I - Preliminary Matters - Section 2(1) (m) Definition “Competent”, Section 19 - Training of worker


Manitoba Part 1 - Definition and General Matters - Definition “Competent” Part 6 - Personal Protective Equipment Part 16 - Machines, Tools, and Robots - Division 1

NWT Act 1 - Definition of “Competent Part 3 - Section 12, General Duties of Employers Part 5 - Construction and Maintenance Part 7 - Personal Protective Equipment

NL

Part I - Definition of “Competent Worker” (i)(ii)


Ontario Part I - General - Section 1 - Definition “Competent Worker” (a, b, c)

Part XII - Safety Materials, Equipment, Devices and Clothing

Yukon Act 1 - Definition of “Competent Person” Part 1 - General - Section 1.06 - Training of Worker Part 1 - General - Section 1.08 - Personal Protective Equipment

Page 1 of 10

Document Description Working Around Drilled Holes

Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number SWP 26.082 Date: Sept. 20, 2017 Revision: 2 Revised by: A. Felczak Date: Nov. 20, 2017

26.082 Working Around Drilled Holes

Purpose This Safe Work Practice provides guidance for improving safety when working around drilled holes on distribution, transmission and Substation projects and includes all subcontractors who may be providing this service for Valard. Foremen and Supervisors have the responsibility to put in place those measures that best protect employees. This Safe Work Practice represents the soundest methods for reducing incidents and ensuring employee safety, based on experience and other learnings.

Pier or Direct Embed Foundations based on some unique features of the working environment or project, Supervision must analyze and carefully document the measures that will be utilized, ensuring that they provide as much protection to the workplace and employees as possible.

Objective To more effectively eliminate, mitigate or control hazards associated when working around drilled holes on distribution, transmission and substation projects.

Scope This Safe Work Practice applies to crews tasked with working around drilled holes on distribution, transmission and substation projects greater than 30 inches in diameter, with depth greater than 6 feet, for pier or direct embed foundations. For spread footing foundations, follow applicable excavation requirements.

Definitions Anchorage - a secure point of attachment for lifelines, lanyards or deceleration devices. Anchorages used for attachment of personal fall arrest equipment shall be independent of any anchorage being used to support or suspend platforms and capable of supporting at least 5,000 pounds per employee attached.

Full-body harness - an approved device using straps secured in a manner that will distribute forces over the thighs, pelvis, waist, chest and shoulders with means for attaching it to other components of a fall arrest system.

Restricted Access Zone (RAZ) - an area around the drilled hole that is restricted to those employees performing necessary tasks. The RAZ should be established a minimum of six (6) feet from the edge of the drilled hole. Should it become necessary for an employee to enter within the restricted access zone, the employee shall wear a full-body harness and be tied off to a suitable anchorage utilizing a leading edge self-retracting lifeline.

Self-retracting lifeline - an approved deceleration device containing a wire rope with a swivel snap hook, an in-line shock absorber for leading edges and a drum-wound line which can be slowly extracted from, or retracted onto, the drum under slight tension during normal worker movement, but at the onset of a fall automatically locks the drum and arrests the fall. Procedure for Drilling Process (Holes Greater than 30" up to 48" in Diameter)

1. Locate drill site and confirm structure number. Verify the presence of a current Underground Utility Locate Ticket. Survey the area to identify and confirm the presence of any potential underground and/or overhead encumbrances that could impact the job set-up. Confirm the presence of any known or suspected underground utility.

1.1 If performing work in an existing substation site, it is required that prior to any mechanical excavation, all underground utilities or hazards must be identified. An

Page 2 of 10



excavation checklist is recommended to be used to identify and document these hazards.

2. Evaluate the work area ground conditions and surrounding environment. Ensure adequate ground stability where equipment will be stationed or positioned.

3. A specific Job Tailboard or Job Safety Analysis (JSA) for drilled holes must be completed. Roles and responsibilities of all crew members will be listed on the form. Updated Tailboards or Job Safety Analysis (JSA) must be completed any time the working conditions or job activities change in a significant way from the original plan.

4. Perform and document all necessary equipment inspections.

5. Position digger/drill rig and all other associated equipment at the designated drill location.

6. Prior to start-up of the drill rig, effectively place a warning line system around the swing radius of the drill rig. To increase awareness, employees should be wearing high visibility clothing or a minimum of Class 2 reflective vests around the drilling operation. Warning line system can be established by using:

• Cones (with rope, chain or some additional barrier between the cones) • Snow/construction fencing • Ropes • Chains • Caution/Warning tape • Combination of the above

7. Place a Restricted Access Zone (RAZ) a minimum of six (6) feet from the edge of the drilled hole before it reaches six (6) foot in depth. The RAZ can be established by using:

• Guardrail System • Hi-Cones (with rope, chain or some other additional barrier between the cones) • Snow/construction fencing • Ropes • Chains • Caution/Warning tape • Combination of the above

Page 3 of 10



(Example RAZ with Swing Radius Protection)

A warning sign will be placed on or near the entrance to the RAZ noting job site hazards and the need for fall protection. Should it become necessary for an employee to enter within the RAZ, the employee shall be wear a full-body harness and be tied off to a suitable anchorage utilizing a leading edge self-retracting lifeline. There must be a sufficient number of anchorages to not allow the leading edge self-retracting lifeline to cross over the hole.

(Sample Wording)

NOTE #1: All full-body harnesses used for when working around drilled holes for structure foundations, direct embed distribution and transmission poles and in substationsmust be specifically selected and approved for this type of work. The harnesses are designed for rescue in a horizontal position. NOTE #2: No one shall enter within the RAZ system without having received a job briefing on the work being performed, wear all appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) and received the required training. 8. Signage should be placed at the entrance to the jobsite warning all other employees, customer/client and the general public of the work taking place and the specific hazards associated with the task. All signage used on the jobsite shall be in the language(s) according to the make-up of the crew.

Page 4 of 10



(Sample Wording)

9. Measurements - Employees periodically take depth measurements during thedrillingprocess.When it becomes necessary to enter inside the RAZ, to take measurements, employees are required to wear a full-body harness and be tied off to a suitable anchorage utilizing a leading edge self-retracting lifeline. The ground conditions around the hole should be evaluated to determine if extra footing (mats, boards, etc.) needs to be in place for the person evaluating the hole. There should be a sufficient number of anchorages to NOT allow the leading edge self-retracting lifeline to cross over the hole. Only authorized employees should be in the area during drill operations. No employee shall be within the RAZ while the drill rig is in the proves of drilling.

10. All employees wearing fall protection shall be trained on how to properly use, care for and inspect their fall protection equipment.

11. If the hole(s) will be left unattended or not under construction, cover open hole with a proper cover. A proper cover should entirely cover the hole and be able to withstand twice (2x) the weight of employees, equipment and materials that may be imposed on the cover at any time. If the hole cannot be completely covered or backfilled to ground level due to an obstruction, a barricade must be installed around the hole.

All covers shall be secured or of adequate weight when installed so as to prevent accidental displacement by the weather, equipment or employees.

Steps should be taken to identify when a hole cover is in use, so that it is not inadvertently removed. All unused covers should be stored in a designated location.

The hole cover should be marked with the word “HOLE” or "COVER".

Once the hole has been covered the RAZ can be removed. The RAZ may have to be temporarily moved during the process of setting the cover. If the RAZ is moved during this process, employees that are outside of a piece of equipment within 6’ from the edge of the hole

are required to be wearing a full-body harness and tied off to a leading edge self-retracting lifeline until the hole is covered.

Prior to removing the hole cover, it is recommended that the RAZ be (re)established. However, if the RAZ cannot be (re)estblished prior to removing the hole cover because it will hinder the removal process, any employees outside of a piece of equipment that is within 6’ from the edge of the hole are required to be wearing a full-body harness and tied off to an anchorage utilizing a leading edge self-retracting lifeline. Once the hole cover has been removed, the RAZ must be

Page 5 of 10



(re)established and any employees inside the RAZ are required to be wearing a full-body harness and tied off to an anchorage utilizing a leading edge self-retracting lifeline. A designated safety watch should be temporarily assigned to observe an uncovered hole, to identify and react to any hazards while the RAZ is being (re)established. The safety watch cannot have any other duties while monitoring the open hole. The safety watch must maintain continuous surveillance until the RAZ is (re)established.

of Hol

(Example of Hole Cover) TRAINING All employees shall be trained on:

Best Practice: Drilled Holes - Pier or Direct Embed Foundations • Guardrail System

o How to properly set-up the guardrail system.

• Fall Protection o How to properly use, care for and inspect their fall protection equipment. o When it is necessary to wear a full-body harness. o How to properly use, care for and inspect the full-body harness. o When it is necessary to wear a full-body harness and be tied-off.

• Anchorage Points o What constitutes a proper anchorage point. o When more than one anchorage point is needed.

• Leading Edge Self-Retracting Lifeline

o How to properly use, care for and inspect the leading edge self-retracting lifeline. o When/why it is necessary to be tied off with a leading edge self-retracting lifeline.

• Job-site set-up

o Guarding the swing radius of the drill rig. o Proper method for establishing proper access/egress for the drill rig operator. o Set-up of warning signs in the work area.

• Proper set-up of a Restricted Access Zone

o Entry limitations/requirements. .

Page 6 of 10



• Rescue Training and Plan o Training on preforming a rescue (work team to review rescue plan) o Review of the rescue plan

Drilled Shaft Entry The practice of entering drilled shafts for activities such as hand cleaning, visual inspection and/or equipment retrieval should be undertaken only after a determination by a qualified person that there are no less-hazardous alternative methods to accomplish the work. Entry is only permitted in fully cased holes.

NOTE: A detailed entry procedure is required to be completed and approved prior to entry. RESCUE PLAN A “Rescue Kit” must be available on-site that is capable of retrieving a person who has fallen into a drilled hole. The Rescue Kit must allow the crew to handle the various types of rescue situations they could likely face. These scenarios include:

1. Situation 1 - A person falls down a hole, is wearing a full body harness, and their retractable is connected. Retrieval Method - Hook up the wire rope grab with the carabiner and endless sling to the crane and raise the employee from the hole.

2. Situation 2 - A person falls down a hole, wearing a full body harness, is conscious, and

able to use their arms. Retrieval Method - Lower the Rescue Rope and Carabiner for the employee to attach to their d-ring on their harness and raise employee from the hole.

3. Situation 3 - A person falls down a hole, wearing a full body harness, but is not conscious, or can’t use their arms. Retrieval Method - Lower the Rescue Stick with carabiner and rescue rope attached. Attach carabiner to employee d-ring and pull to release the carabiner and rescue rope from the rescue stick. Raise employee from the hole.

4. Situation 4 - A person falls down a hole, not wearing a full body harness, is conscious, and able to use their arms. Retrieval Method - Lower the Buckingham Harness for the employee to put on. Then lower the rescue rope and carabiner for the employee to attach to their d-ring on their harness and raise employee from the hole.

5. Situation 5 - A person falls down a hole, is not wearing a full body harness, and is unconscious. Retrieval Method - Wait for properly trained rescue personnel to arrive. Do Not Enter Hole!

Page 7 of 10



TheRescueKitshouldincludethefollowingitems: •EndlessSling&Carabiner

•BuckinghamHarness WireRopeGrab

• RopeGrab

Page 8 of 10



Appendix A Procedure - Drilling Process (Holes Greater than 48" in Diameter)The Restricted Access Zone (RAZ) around holes greater than 48" in diameter can be established by using a guardrail system. The guardrail system must be capable of withstanding a force of at least 200 pounds applied within 2 inches of the top edge in any outward or downward direction and be at least 42 inches in height.

Note: For special situations where guardrails cannot be used, such as steep terrain or in an energized substation, the RAZ (see Example 1 p. may be established by using the other acceptable methods specified in this document. Guardrails should be placed a minimum of six feet (6') from the edge of the hole. If Guardrails are placed closer than six feet, an additional warning system shall be placed at six feet or greater to establish the RAZ. An adequate number of guardrail sections, per manufacturer recommendations, must be used to adequately secure the work zone and protect employees. The actual number of sections used will depend on the size of the hole. Guardrails may not have to be placed completely around the hole. (Reminder: Full body harness with self-retracting life line must be worn prior to entering the RAZ) Sample Guardrail Configuration

A system is defined as a rail (a & b) and a base (c&d). You can utilize as many danger side rail systems (b) hooked together as you need to protect the size hole. These sections are available in various sizes. At each end of the (b) danger side railings, install a minimum of a 5' outrigger system (a) away from the danger side to properly support the danger side railing. Toeboards (e) are optional and not required when drilling holes.

A warning sign will be placed on or near the entrance to the guardrail system noting job site hazards and the need for fall protection. Should it become necessary for an employee to enter within the guardrail system, the employee shall be wear a full-body harness and be tied off to a suitable anchorage utilizing a self-retracting lifeline. There must be a sufficient number of anchorages to not allow the self-retracting lifeline to cross over the hole.

All other requirements contained in Procedure - Drilling Process (Greater than 30" up to 48" in Diameter) remain in place for holes greater than 48" in diameter.

Page 9 of 10



Example 1

Page 10 of 10



Appendix B

1.Once the drilling process is completed and the process of setting the rebar cage, setting direct embed poles, setting forms, pouring concrete, placing anchor bolts, etc begins, the guard rail system can be removed. However removal of the guardrail system in order to facilitate these tasks. Removal of the guardrail system during the performance of these tasks does not eliminate the requirement for a Restricted Access Zone (RAZ). The RAZ should be established a minimum of six feet (6') from the edge of the hole. The fall protection and RAZ can be removed once the fall hazard has been eliminated. The Restricted Access Zone can be established by using:

• Guardrail System • Cones (with rope, chain or some additional barrier between the cones) • Snow/construction fencing • Ropes • Chains • Caution/Warning tape • Combination of the above • Other

(Example RAZ set-up) 2. Entering Within the Restricted Access Zone (RAZ) - Employees will periodically enter within the RAZ to perform tasks such as setting the rebar cage, setting the direct embed poles, setting forms, pouring concrete, placing anchor bolts, etc. The ground conditions around the hole should be evaluated to determine if extra footing (mats, boards, etc.) needs to be in place for the person working around the drilled hole. Employees that enter inside the RAZ are required to wear a full-body harness and be tied off to a suitable anchorage utilizing a leading edge self-retracting lifeline. There should be a sufficient number of anchorages to NOT allow the leading edge self-retracting lifeline to cross over the hole. Note: If there is a break in the barricade and the hole cover is removed then a safety watch must be present in order that no one enters the area without fall arrest equipment and connected to an anchor point.

Page 1 of 3

Document Description Operation and Use of Portable Light Towers

Created By: K. Hickey Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.083 Date: Nov. 15, 2014 Revision: Revised by: Date:

26.083 OPERATION AND USE OF PORTABLE LIGHT TOWER PURPOSE: To ensure the safe operation on the equipment as well as its limitations. PRACTICE: All employees who are to operate this equipment must review the SWP and

Operator’s manual. Transport and Towing:

• Always use the proper trailer hitch and safety chains – check that the hitch and coupling on the towing vehicle are rated equal to or greater than the trailers “gross vehicle weight rating”. Connect safety chains in a crossing pattern under the tongue and attach the breakaway cable to the rear bumper of the towing vehicle.

• Check tires for wear, inflation (50 psi) and condition prior to transporting. • Ensure directional and brake lights on the trailer are connected and working properly • Recommended Manufacturer speed when towing:

o 80 KM/H or less on highway o 20 KM/H or less off-road conditions

• Stand clear of traffic when starting or checking the unit along the road. • Check the fuel tank, oil pan, and fuel and oil lines for leaks that would spill fuel or oil on

the road. • Check fasteners and mounting brackets periodically to ensure all are tight and nothing is

in danger of falling off during transit. • Use the lifting eye or forklift pockets on the tower for lifting the trailer and tower. • Make sure any tie-downs at the bottom of the trailer are released, and the cradle

retaining pin is inserted and secured, prior to lifting. •

Set-Up: Move the light tower to desired location keeping the following in mind:

• The light tower should not be placed where those working under the light are either: forced to look into the light regularly, or forced to work with their backs to the light (shadows will block the light from the work area).

• The area where the tower is positioned should be relatively level for safe and proper operation of the unit.

• The light tower should be located on the same level or on ground higher than the work area.

• Use tire chocks in front of and behind each tire wherever possible. Always use tire chocks on an incline.

Unhitch from the towing vehicle as follows: • Rotate the tongue jack into position (90 degrees), release the hitch pin and raise the

tongue off the towing vehicle. Level the trailer, using the jacks as follows:

• Extend the front outriggers until the outrigger pins lock into place. Rotate the jack on each outrigger into vertical position and lock into place.

• Rotate the rear jack and lock into the vertical position. • Start at the highest jack position. Rotate the jack handle until the jack foot touches the

ground. • Raise the other jacks to level the trailer.

Connect a ground/ground rod to the grounding stud on the trailer.

Page 2 of 3



• Drive the rod into the ground and secure the grounding wire to the lug located on the trailer frame.

Raise the tower as follows: • Remove the tower travel locking pin and/or safety pin • Remove the tower locking pin from the tower base. Using the winch, raise the tower to

the vertical position. Secure mast with locking and/or safety pin • Beware of pinch points when erecting the tower. • Do not attempt to lean the tower down below 45 degrees when it is extended – serious

damage may occur. • Under no circumstances should the tower be repositioned when the boom is in vertical

position. • Towers can extend up to 30 Ft. Ensure the area above the trailer is open and clear of

overhead wires. • If for any reason part of the mast hangs up or winch cable develops slack while raising

or lowering tower, STOP immediately and contact supervisor and mechanic. • Never remove safety pin and/or pull mast locking pin while the tower is up.

Starting:

• Ensure the light switches and breakers are turned “off”. This prevents the engine from starting under load and prevents electrical equipment from being damaged.

• Unlock and open the access doors. • Check the oil, fuel, and coolant levels. • Check that the tower has been properly grounded. • Place the key into the ignition switch and preheat the unit for 10-30 seconds. Never

preheat for more than 30 seconds; damage may be done to the heating elements. • Turn the key switch towards the start side of the key switch. • Start the engine and listen for any unusual sounds or vibrations. • Once the engine has been started and running smoothly, place the light switches in the

“ON” positions, one at a time. • Contact supervisor and mechanic if any issues out of the norm occur when starting or if

the engine will not start.

Light Tower Auxiliary Power: • Total auxiliary power cannot exceed main circuit breaker rating. • Before plugging in auxiliary cords; feed them up through the trailer frame and attach to

receptacles. Close the cabinet doors to protect control panel and other components from weather.

Shutdown Procedures: • Place all light switches into their “off” position. • Allow the engine to run for 1 to 5 minutes under no load, and then turn the unit “OFF”. • Never shut the unit down while under load. The AC generator may become damaged. • After being shut down, the lights must be allowed to cool down before trying to restart

the lights. This cool down period can be between 10-25 minutes, depending on the ambient temperature.

• Shut the engine down if any of the following conditions exist during operation:

Page 3 of 3



1. Noticeable change in engine speed 2. Loss of electrical output 3. Equipment connected to the generator overheats 4. Sparking Occurs 5. Engine misfires or there is excessive engine/generator vibration 6. Protective covers are loose or missing 7. If the ambient temperature is greater than 43 degrees Celsius

Lowering the Tower:

• Bulbs become extremely hot when in use – be sure to allow them to cool. • Using the upper telescoping winch, telescope the tower down to its fully retracted

position. • Loosen the rotational lock and rotate the tower into its nesting position. The upper

telescoping winch should be pointed forward, towards the tongue. • Remove the travel and/or tower locking pin. • Using the lower pivot winch, lower the tower into the cradle. • Verify that all locking and safety pins are “latched” or hooked over the tower cradle. This

prevents the tower sections from telescoping out while traveling. • Replace the travel locking pin. • If required, remove the light fixtures and crosshead assembly. • Secure all locking pins and verify that components are properly latched. • Close and lock both doors.

Fueling:

• Always handle fuel with care. • Stop engine before refueling. Fill fuel tank outdoors. • Be sure the fuel supply has a positive shut-off valve. • Do not replace fuel lines with materials different from those supplied as original

equipment. • Do not refuel the engine when it is hot, while smoking, or when near open flames or

sparks. • Use secondary containment when fueling and when light tower is operating.

Regulatory Reference Newfoundland and Labrador Part V General Health and Safety Requirements Sect. 36 “Illumination”

Page 1 of 2

Document Description Operating Equipment near Energized Facilities.

Created By: K. Curley Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.084 Date: Dec. 13, 2017 Revision: Revised by: Date:

26.084 OPERATING EQUIPMENT NEAR ENERGIZED FACILITIES. PURPOSE: To ensure the safe operation or Equipment near energized Equipment during the course or moving and operating the equipment in a safe manner to prevent any contact. PRACTICE: Whenever practicable, facilities should be de-energized and isolated when travelling below or working nearby with equipment that has the ability to reach within the limits of approach. It is imperative that adequate controls are in place whenever equipment is travelling below or working near or below energized facilities. Electrical system owners must be contacted and issue approval for Valard to proceed as per this SWP. Valard and sub-contractor must have a system in place to adequately manage the hazards of operating equipment near energized facilities. The system must contain the following elements:

• A means to determine the voltage and subsequent limit of approach. If the voltage is unknown, the limit of approach is seven metres.

• A means to determine the conductor height above ground, accounting for potential change in ground conditions and conductor sag.

• A means to determine the traveling height of equipment moving under an energized circuit or working under.

• Positive methods of control to ensure the limits of approach are not breached. Examples are:

o Signage. o Goal posts. o Spotter(s).

• A method to communicate the hazards and subsequent controls to all involved in the work area.

• Training to ensure all involved personnel know what to do in the event of contact to avoid injury due to step/touch potential. Minimum training requirement 7 Steps Electrical Awareness or equivalent training approved by Valard.

When a spotter is used, he or she must not be assigned any other tasks. The spotter must understand the hazards and the controls, and must have an audible means of contact with the equipment operator (e.g., radio communication, air horn). The minimum course requirement Spotting near Energized Power Lines (Valard’s in house training) or equivalent training approved by Valard.

Examples of acceptable means of control are:

• Equipment with boom (e.g., crane, track-hoe, backhoe) crossing below an energized power line off road.

o Signage. o Goal posts o Equipment height stowed o Conductor height above ground o Hazard assessment and controls understood by all involved.

Page 2 of 2

Document Description Operating Equipment near Energized Facilities.

Created By: K. Curley Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.084 Date: Dec. 13, 2017 Revision: Revised by: Date:

• Equipment with boom (e.g., crane, trackhoe, backhoe) working near or below an energized power line.

o Signage o Spotter(s) o Equipment height stowed or equipment reach o Conductor height above ground o Hazard assessment and controls understood by all involved.

• Equipment without a boom (e.g., dump truck, tractor-trailer) travelling below an energized power line.

o Signage o Equipment height above ground o Conductor height above ground o Hazard assessment and controls (e.g.; assurance that all implements are

lowered before approaching line) understood by all involved.

The employer is responsible to ensure that the traffic is controlled to ensure worker protection. The workers must be visible and / or physically protected from traffic and the following are the minimum required practices for signalers. All other employees must wear a high visibility vest at all times when working either near a highway/roadway or on any site that Valard is working on.

Page 1 of 6

Document Description Pulling Rope Maintenance and Use

Created By: A. Felczak Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.087 Date: Sept. 10, 2018 Revision: Revised by: Date:

26.087 Pulling Rope Maintenance and Use This safe work practice is to prevent rope failure while pulling wire rope during stringing operation using fibre rope, this rope shall meet SWP 26.088 Rope Selection for Stringing Puller. Rope shall be Inspected for wear, tearing, abrasion, elongation (uneven diameter), melted fibres and cut strands. Storage and use of Rope while on a puller.

• Rope must be covered to not expose it to the Sun, road grim, debris or severe weather conditions.

• When storing all rope must be covered up. Rope Inspection Procedure:

1. Prepare Inspection Record Sheets/ Rope Log Book. Fill in known rope information, such as: type, diameter/circumference, fiber material, length, manufacturer, type of service.

2. A log book must be kept on a document which is located to the Puller unit, it must contain all puller loads as indicated on the Readout. This must include the date as well as the load that maximum load applied.

3. While using the rope a visual inspection should be make especially on the first 30 meters including the swivel and the loop for wear.

4. Annually a minimum of the initial 10 meters of the rope is to be cut and sent out for testing. Test results must be recorded in the Rope logbook. If there is a failure at a significant number less that the working load (+10%), then another 10 meters must be cut and sent for testing. These results must also be recorded.

5. All test results are to be identified in the Logbook.

6. Ropes that are purchased by All Power for Valard. (See Rope specs on pages 2 and 3 Other areas may purchase ropes made by other manufacturers. These rope types are to be identified in the Log Book including the specs if available. If there are no specs then the stringing crew must follow Consult Yale Cordage for guidelines for working loads.

7. Check braided ropes for hardness. Pushing on the rope should cause the braids to open. Braided ropes should be supple and bend easily. They should flatten slightly when compressed laterally.

8. Check jacketed ropes or double braids for core breaks. This is manifested by sudden reduction in diameter and can be felt by running hands over the rope. (See pages 4-7 for identifying rope defects)

Page 2 of 6



UNITREX ROPE

SPECIFICATIONS

* Knots and abrupt bends significantly reduce the strength of all ropes and lower maximum

working load.

** Working load is based on static or moderately dynamic lifting/pulling operations. Instantaneous changes in load, up or down, in excess of 10% of the rope’s rated working load constitute hazardous shock load and would void the normal working-load recommendation. Consult Yale Cordage for guidelines for working loads and the safe use of rope. (See SWP. 088)

Diameter Average Spliced Break Strength*

Minimum Spliced Break Strength

Maximum Working** Load 4:1 Weight

Inches (mm) Lbs Kg Lbs Kg Lbs Kg Lbs/100ft Kg/100m 0.44 (11) 20,000 9,080 18,000 8,172 5,000 2,270 6.7 10.0 0.53 (13) 26,000 11,800 23,400 10,620 6,500 2,950 9.2 13.7 0.58 (15) 34,000 15,435 30,600 13,892 8,500 3,859 11.4 17.0 0.63 (16) 42,000 19,295 38,250 17,366 10,625 4,824 13.5 20.1 0.71 (18) 50,500 22,925 45,450 20,663 12,625 5,731 16.9 25.2 0.84 (21) 73,500 33,365 66,150 30,029 18,375 8,3411 24.2 36.0 1.00 (25) 100,000 45,400 90,000 40,860 25,000 11,350 32.4 48.2 1.15 (29) 125,000 56,750 112,500 51,075 31,250 14,188 42.4 63.1 1.25 (32) 158,000 71,730 142,200 64,557 39,500 17,933 52.5 78.2 1.40 (36) 195,000 88,530 175,500 79,677 48,750 22,133 64.9 96.6 1.75 (44) 264,000 119,855 237,600 107,870 66,000 29,964 92.6 137.9 1.94 (49) 310,000 140,740 279,000 1216,666 77,500 35,185 98.8 147.1 1.99 (51) 360,000 163,440 324,000 147,096 90,000 40,860 113.3 168.7 22.0 (56) 430,000 195,220 387,000 175,698 107,500 48,805 144.0 214.4

Page 3 of 6



STATIC -12™ DS (Double Strand) Rope

Static - 12™ DS is a double Strand variant of the 12 strand Rope. It has low stretch and is abrasive resistant. This construction gives the highest strength to weight ratio for Polyester and is easy to spice and can be coated for even greater durability. Product Material: 100% Polyester Characteristics

• High Strength • Low Stretch • Abrasion resistant • Easy to Splice

Diameter Circumference Weight Tensile Average

Inches Metric (mm) inches Metric (mm) Lbs/100 ft. Kg/100 M Lbs KG

3/16” 5mm 9/16” 15mm 1.2 lbs 1.8kg 1.200 lbs 540kg 1/4” 6.5mm 3/4” 20mm 2 lbs 3kg 2,200 lbs 1,000kg

5/16” 8mm 1” 25.5mm 3 lbs 4.5kg 3.200 lbs 1,450kg 3/8” 9.5mm 1-3/16” 30mm 4 lbs 6kg 6,000 lbs 2,700kg

7/16” 11mm 1-3/8” 35mm 6.2 lbs 9kg 8,000 lbs 3,600kg 1/2” 13mm 1-9/16” 40mm 8.3 lbs 12kg 11,000 lbs 5,000kg 5/8” 16mm 2” 51mm 13 lbs 19kg 16,000 lbs 7,200kg 3/4” 19mm 2-1/4” 57mm 17 lbs 25kg 21,000 lbs 9,500kg 7/8” 22mm 2-3/4” 70mm 26 lbs 38kg 30,000 lbs 13,600kg 1”” 25mm 3-3/16” 80mm 34 lbs 51kg 36,500 lbs 16,600kg

1-1/8” 29mm 3-1/2” 90mm 43 lbs 64kg 48,500 lbs 22,000kg 1-1/4” 32mm 3-15/16” 100mm 52 lbs 78kg 56,000 lbs 25,500kg

1-5/16” 33mm 4-1/8” 105mm 60 lbs 89kg 65,000 lbs 29,500kg 1-1/2” 38mm 4.3/4” 120mm 71 lbs 106kg 82,000 lbs 37,200kg 1-5/8” 41mm 5” 127mm 90 lbs 134kg 98,000 lbs 44,500kg 1-3/4” 45mm 5-1/2” 140mm 104 lbs 155kg 110,000 lbs 50,000kg

Page 4 of 6



Rope Defects Cut Strands Single Braided Ropes: Cut strands can significantly degrade the strength of a rope. In 12-strand ropes, two cut strands in proximity necessitates that the rope be either repaired by cutting out the damaged section and re-splicing, or the rope must be retired. For 8-strand and 3-strand single braids, a single cut strand indicates that the rope must be repaired or retired. Double Braided Ropes: In these ropes the cover is often composed of multiple yarns arranged in groups of two or three in a weave of the cover. Each group of yarns is considered a single strand of the cover braid. In standard double braids where the cover and core share the load, three or more cut strands in proximity indicate repair or retirement. In core-dependent double braided ropes, 100% of the ropes strength is carried by the core. The cover functions as protection. While cover damage does not affect the ropes strength, a damaged cover can allow the strength bearing core to be subjected to damage from abrasion or other mechanisms leading to reduction in strength. Covers should be repaired when damage is evident.

Compression Often seen on winch drums, compression is caused by fibre molding itself to the contact surface while under a radial load. Compression can be identified by a visible sheen and stiffness that can be reduced by flexing the rope. Compression is not a permanent characteristic and should not be confused with melted or glazed fibres.

Pulled Strand Strands that are pulled away from the body of the rope, not cut or otherwise damaged, are usually caused by snagging on equipment or rough surfaces. This is not a permanent condition. Pulled strands can be carefully worked back into position in the braid by following the strand through the braid pattern and equalizing the tension to that of the surrounding strands.

Page 5 of 6



Double braid with pulled strand 12-strand with pulled strand

Melted Fiber/ Glossy or Glazed Areas Glossy or glazed areas are signs of heat damage. The strength loss may be more than the amount of melted fibre indicates, as fibres adjacent to the melted areas are probably damaged from excessive heat even though they appear normal. The melted fibre will have likely damaged an equal amount of adjacent un-melted fibre. If possible, remove affected section and re-splice with a standard end-for-end splice. If re-splicing is not possible, retire the rope.

Double braid melted fibre 12 strand melted fibre Discoloration With use, all ropes get dirty. Be on the lookout for areas of discoloration that could be caused by chemical contamination. Determine the cause of the discoloration and replace the rope if it is brittle or stiff. If possible, remove affected section and re-splice with a standard end-for-end splice. If re-splicing is not possible, retire the rope.

Discoloration on double braid Discoloration on 12 strand

Inconsistent Diameter Inspect for flat areas, bumps or lumps. This can indicate core or internal damage from overloading or shock loads and is usually sufficient reason to replace the rope. Inconsistent texture or stiff areas can indicate excessive dirt or grit embedded in the rope or shock load damage and is usually reason to replace the rope.

Double braid inconsistent diameter

Page 6 of 6



Abrasion When a single braid rope is first put into service, the outer filaments of the rope will tend to abrade and fuzz up. This is the result of these filaments breaking, which actually forms a protective cushion and shield for the fibers underneath. In most applications, this condition should stabilize, not progress. If the surface roughness increases, excessive abrasion takes place and strength is lost. When inspecting the rope, look closely at both the inner and outer fibres. When either is worn, the rope may be degrading. Open the strands and look for powdered fibre, which is one sign of internal wear. Estimate the internal wear to estimate total fibre abrasion. If total fibre loss is 20%, then it’s safe to assume that the rope has lost 20% of its strength as a result of abrasion. To determine the extent of fibre damage from abrasion, a single yarn in all abraded areas should be examined. The diameter of the abraded yarn should then be compared to a portion of the same yarn or an adjacent yarn of the same type that has been protected by the strand crossover area and is free from abrasion damage. As a general rule for braided ropes, when there is 25% or more wear from abrasion, or the fibre is broken or worn away, the rope should be retired from service. For double braid ropes, 50% wear on the cover is the retirement point and with 3 strand ropes, 10% or more wear is the retirement point. For core-dependent double braid ropes, if no damage to the core has occurred, the jacket can be repaired.

Page 1 of 3

Document Description Walking in Field Conditions Created By: A. Buss Doc. Number Safe Work Practice 26.089

Date: Feb. 1, 2016 Revision: 0 Revised by: R. Hiscock Date: Feb. 14, 2019

26.089 Walking in Field Conditions

The purpose of this practice is to establish a minimum safety standard for walking in the field and to identify some common hazards associated with field work. Overview Walking in Field Conditions – Hazard Summary A site hazard assessment is mandatory before beginning work to identify and mitigate any site specific hazards not identified in this practice.

Practice

1. Avoid areas of tall grass. If it is necessary to walk in areas of tall grass, slow your pace, taking deliberate and cautious strides. The purpose for this is to avoid falling into potholes, tripping over obstacles, getting caught on sharp tree stubs and avoiding small animals such as snakes all can be very difficult to see in tall grass.

2. If possible, walk on an established path (to minimize damage to terrain). 3. Wear rubber boots on wet days for protection, traction and comfort. Rubber boots will

allow you to walk through puddles and small streams instead of trying to jump over them.

4. Use a stake to help identify the depths of small streams and puddles and to identify the type of bottom under the water, before you step in.

5. On construction sites you should be aware of waste lumber containing nails. a) Puncture wounds from nails can be painful, difficult to heal and become infected

easily. b) If working after a fresh snow fall in a construction area, watch for nails and other

sharp objects that could be laying under the snow. 6. Deadfall – Dead Slow

a) Allow extra time to negotiate areas where trees are blown and/or burnt. If you proceed at a normal pace in a deadfall area, you could slip on fallen logs.

7. Traffic and Heavy Equipment a) Remember to be seen (make eye contact with operator) b) Be careful around farm yards, machinery and livestock c) Remember traffic is a danger even on minor country roads

8. Be aware of the consequences of changes in the weather and check the forecast

Walking in Cold Weather Use these tips to prepare yourself and take care when out walking in icy or snowy conditions. For additional information see SWP 26.029 Cold Weather Work

1. Concentrate on your walking and take small steps – walking at a slower pace than normal increases your traction and can greatly reduce your chances of falling.

2. Be aware of where you are going – always watch for hazards and dangers such as ice on steps, pavements, and pathways.

3. Always be aware of the possibilities of ice and water in muskeg and marsh areas. Avoid this area where possible and carry up to date mapping.

4. Carry emergency equipment for rescue. 5. When a water hazard is identified, working on ice training must be provided.

Page 2 of 3



6. Watch for cracks of ice or snow on top of areas with the potential for water, avoid areas with signs of cracking.

7. When traveling on foot or by vehicle watch for signs of avalanches. If you see small avalanches on small slopes, chances are the same conditions exist on larger slopes.

8. Don’t Rush. Move at a speed that feels comfortable and remember to shorten your stride. Give yourself lots of time to get where you are going.

9. Keep one hand free for your balance. Use handrails when available for going up or down steps and take care to plant your feet firmly on each step.

10. Wear good footwear with treads – these are designed to provide a better grip in wet and slippery conditions. Alternatively, you can try shoe chains or ice grippers which are designed to provide traction on ice and snow; however they are not suitable for walking on normal surfaces because the chain links provide unstable footing.

11. Stay alert – look out for icicles hanging from trees, sheets of ice on sloping roofs that may be melting if the sun is out.

12. Don’t carry a heavy backpack as this will alter your center of balance, reducing your stability.

13. Brighten up your outer gear by wearing a safety vest; this makes you more visible to drivers.

14. If the sun is bright, wear safety sunglasses. They help you see better through any glare and avoid hazards, and also protects eyes from harsh sunlight.

15. Give yourself the equivalent of four legs by using walking poles, which will reduce the chances of slips and give you extra stability in extremely icy conditions.

16. Remember that it is important to keep your head warm when walking in cold winter weather – you can lose about 20% of your body heat from your head. Hats also shield your head from the sun, and the visor will protect your face from both the sun and rain.

Walking in Hot Weather

Walking in the heat can have dangerous consequences. For additional information see SWP 26.052 Hot Weather Work Water:

1. When walking in warm weather it is very important to take plenty of water with you. Drink small amounts of water often. Even if you don’t feel thirsty you should still have a drink at least every 15 minutes.

2. Remember that approximately 68% of your body is made up of water. You only have to lose 2% of your body weight in fluids and you will start to feel hot and your heart rate increases.

3. Heat stroke and heat exhaustion potentially are very serious so if you get a headache or feel dizzy, stop walking immediately, have a rest, a drink of water and try to cool down.

Clothing: 1. A hardhat with a brim is essential for providing protection against sunburn

and sunstroke. Protect your eyes with safety sunglasses that block UVA and UV rays.

2. Wear clothes that are light coloured as this helps to reflect the sun’s heat.

Page 3 of 3



3. Ideally, wear a fabric that wicks away moisture from your skin to the outside of the material, where it will evaporate.

4. Don’t wear tight clothing – go for a loose top and lightweight trousers and a cool long sleeved shirt to protect you from the sun’s rays.

5. Don’t forget your sunscreen. Wear SPF 15 or above, and reapply frequently if you are sweating heavily.

6. Drink enough water to keep you hydrated but being aware that too much water can cause water poisoning. While working, drink about 250 ml (1 cup) of water every 15-20 minutes and during more physically demanding work drink at least 1litre an hour.

7. Water should come from a clean uncontaminated source. Drinking water from unknown natural water sources can cause illness and further dehydration.

Date post:	02-May-2023
Category:	Documents
Upload:	khangminh22
View:	0 times
Download:	0 times